SOLVED PAPER
DPMT  2005
1. S.I. unit of magnetic flux is (a) tesla (b) oersted (c) weber (d) gauss. 2. A body of mass m is moving towards east and another body of equal mass is moving towards north. If after collision both stick together, their speed after collision would be (a) v (c) 7 2 v (b) v/2 (d) v/72 (c) 3600 (d) 4200. 8. A transverse wave is expressed as : y = y0s'm2nft. For what value of A,, when maximum particle velocity is equal to 4 times the wave velocity? (a) y0n/2 (b) 2y0n (c) y0n (d) y0n/4. 9. Two bodies are thrown up at angles of 45° and 60°, respectively, with the horizontal. If both bodies attain same vertical height, then the ratio of velocities with which these are thrown is (a) 7273
(C) 7 5 7 2
3. A body of mass 1 kg is moving in a vertical circular path of radius 1 m. The difference between the kinetic energies at its highest and lowest position is (a) 20 J (b) 10 J (c) 475 J (d) 10(751) J
(b)
(d)
2/73
7 3 / 2 •
4. Across each of two capacitors of capacitance 1 iF and 4 [J.F, a potential difference of 10 V is applied. Then positive plate of one is connected to the negative plate of the other, and negative plate of one is connected to the positive plate of the other. After contact, (a) charge on each is zero (b) charge on each is same but nonzero (c) charge on each is different but nonzero (d) none of these. 5. Magnification of a compound microscope is 30. Focal length of eye piece is 5 cm and the image is formed at a distance of distinct vision of 25 cm. The magnification of the objective lens is (a) 6 (b) 5 (c) 7.5 (d) 10. 6. (a) (b) (c) (d) Kirchoff's law of junction, 2 / = 0, is based on conservation of energy conservation of charge conservation of energy as well as charge conservation of momentum.
10. Charges 4 0 , q and 0 are placed along xaxis at positions xQ,x = U2 and x = I, respectively. Find the value of q so that force on charge 0 is zero. (a) Q (b) 0/2 (c)  0 / 2 (d)  0 . 11. A ray fall on a prism ABC (AB  BC) and traval as shown in figure. The least value of refractive index of material of the prism, should be (a) 1.5 (b) 7 2 (c) 1.33 (d)
7 3
12. Escape velocity from a planet is v„. If its mass is increased to 8 times and its radius is increased to 2 times, then the new escape velocity would be (a) v„ (c) 2v„ (b) 72v c (d) 272v c
7. Calculate the amount of heat (in calories) required to convert 5 g of ice at 0°C to steam at 100°C . (a) 3100 (b) 3200 32
13. A body takes time t to reach the bottom of an inclined plane of angle 8 with the horizontal. If the plane is made rough, time taken now is 21. The coefficient of friction of the rough surface is * based on memory
P H Y S I C S l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05 30
(a)
tanG
(b)  t a n 9 (d) itanG
(c) jtanS
(a) (b) (c) (d)
speed of the observer distance between observer and source speed of the source frequency from the source.
14. Two small charged spheres A and B have charges 10 jxC and 40 jiC respectively, and are held at a separation of 90 cm from each other. At what distance from A, electric intensity would be zero? (a) 22.5 cm (b) 18 cm (c) 36 cm (d) 30 cm. 15. 50 tuning forks are arranged in increasing order of their frequencies such that each gives 4 beats/sec with its previous tuning fork. If the frequency of the last fork is octave of the first, then the frequency of the first tuning fork is (a) 200 Hz (b) 204 Hz (c) 196 Hz (d) none of these. 16. In a cyclotron, if a deuteron can gain an energy of 40 MeV, then a proton can gain an energy of (a) 40 MeV (b) 80 MeV (c) 20 MeV (d) 60 MeV. 17. Graph between velocity and displacement of a particle, executing SHM is (a) a straight line (b) a parabola (c) a hyperbola (d) an ellipse. 18. In the nuclear reaction, 180 v A  > y  P
72 Y
22. Two simple pendulums whose lengths are 100 cm and 121 cm are suspended side by side. Their bobs are pulled together and then released. After how many minimum oscillations of the longer pendulum, will the two be in phase again? (a) 11 (b) 10 (c) 21 (d) 20. 23. If percentage change in current through a resistor is 1%, then the change in power through it would be (a) 1% (b) 2% (c) 1.7% (d) 0.5% 24. 3 identical bulbs are connected in series and these together dissipate a power P. If now the bulbs are connected in parallel, then the power dissipated will be (a) PI3 (b) 3P (c) 9P (d) PI9. 25. (a) (b) (c) (d) Acceleration due to gravity decreases from equator to poles decreases from poles to equator is maximum at the centre of the earth is maximum at the equator. SOLUTIONS 1. (c)
the atomic mass and number of P are, respectively (a) 170,69 (b) 172,69 (c) 172, 70 (d) 170, 70. 19. A radioactive substance has activity 64 times higher than the required normal level. If T]/2 = 2 hours, then the time, after which it should be possible to work with it, is (a) 16 hrs. (b) 6 hrs. (c) 10 hrs. (d) 12 hrs. 20. An electron, moving in a of induction of intensity B , proportional to (a) its charge (b) (c) speed (d) uniform magnetic field has its radius directly magnetic field none of these.
2. (d) : From the principle of conservation of linear momentum, mvi + mvj = 2 mv'  2mv'  = m  vi + vj 
2 2 or, 2 mv' = m\v + v
3.
v 72' (a) : Difference in kinetic energy
,
~Jlv
= 2mgr = 2 x 1 x 10 x 1 = 20 J. 4. (c): Stored charge on capacitor becomes zero only when it is discharged through resistance or when two capacitors of equal capacitance are charged and then connected to opposite terminals. Here the capacitances are different. 31
21. The apparent frequency in Doppler's effect does not depend upon
32 PHYSICS l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05
(c) : M.P. of compound microscope = m„ x me r D_ v D u where m e = — = — = 1 + u„ u„ fe 30 = m„ x 6 => m„ = 5. 5. 6. (b) : Kirchoff's law of junction is based on the law of conservation of charges i.e. on the fact that charges do not remain accumulated at a junction of a circuit i.e. a junction of a circuit cannot act as source or sink of charges. Total rate of incoming charges is equal to the total rate of outgoing charges. 7. (c) : Heat required = heat require to melt ice to water of 0°C + heat require to boil water to 100°C + heat require to make steam at 100°C = mL, + msAt + mLs = 5 x 80 + 5 x l x 100 + 5 x 540 = 400 + 500 + 2700 = 3600 cal.
13. ( a ) : When body moves on frictionless surface then 1 ~> d — —gsiti&t When body moves on rough inclined d = ig(sin6ficos0)(2O 2 1 •• 1 > —:g(sin0(J.cos9)(2<) • = —gsin0< sin0ficos0 = p.cos0 = sinQsin0 4 sinG > H = —tan8. 4 £=0
X 
sin9 4 4 14. ( d ) : Let at a distance ^ x the total electric intensity ' 1A 4TV£QX
90x X
8. (a) : As given in question, maximum particle velocity = 4 * wave velocity 4xoo JW° = k X y0n/2. 2g where u is initial velocity of the body. sin 2 45 _ u22 sin 2 60 2g ^ u22~ ~ sin 2 45 Qq 2g uj _ v/3/2 u2 l/y/2
4O
9.
(c) : Vertical height
«2sin26
qB =0 4ne0(90x) ,6 • (90  x2) = 4x2 x (90x)2 90  x = 2x => 3x = 90 => x = 30 cm. 15. (c) : As given, u 2 = u + 4 Similarly, « , = « + ( / i  l ) M From given condition, 1),, = 2v => u + (50  1) x 4 = 2v =
•u = 196 Hz.
_ sin 2 60
10. (d) : The total force on Q , 4QxQ •=0 47ts0/" 4TO 0 (//2r Qq 4 QxQ 4ti£ 0 (/ /4) 4TT£0/ //2
j2mE 16. (b) : R = j2mE = RqB qB As R is a constant for the cyclotron (it is cyclotron radius) and q for the deuteron and proton are the same, RqB is a constant. ••• V 2 mp'Ep =4lmdEd = ^ 2 ( 2 mp)Ed
=> J2mpEp :.
Ep = 2Ed = 2 x 40 = 80 MeV.
11. (b) : As AB = BC, Z A = Z C = 45° At each reflection, Zr = 45° = i e , critical angle 1 • = ^2. sin;',. sin 45° 12. (c) : Escape velocity 2GW) 27? 2 GM R R = 2v„.
17. (d) : In simple harmonic motion, y = a sinottf, v = acocosoo/ From this, we have V2 V2  y +   = 1 , which is equation of ellipse. a a (0 18. (b) : '782°Z>
. 176y
5He
2,
V
2GM
p > '
v
^ 176 7 _ „ 0 L 71 Z + e _!
69
172
+ jHe
^ + energy
32
PHYSICS l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05 32
19. (d) :
Available
4.
nTm = T
.2
11  J
=> T= 6 x 2 = 12 hr.
BOUND VOLUMES of your Favourite Magazines
Mathematics Today Chemistry Today Physics For You Biology Today
Volumes of the following years are available : Mathematics Today Chemistry Today Physics ForYou 2004 2004 2004 2004,2003 & 2001
20. (c) : When electron moves in a magnetic field, mv = qvB r qB 21. (b): Apparent frequency in Doppler effect depends on frequency of source, direction and velocity of source and observer. 22. (b) : T = 2nij
7
For / = 121 cm and / = 100 cm («)11 = (« + 1)10. n = 10. 23. (b) : Power = PR A P „ Af A R — =2 y +— . AP  2 x 1% + 0 = 2%.
BiologyToday
24. (c) : When bulbs are connected in series,
V pJ—R' 3 — When bulbs areRconnected in parallel,
= 3x3P = 9P. P' = R" R 25. (b) : At poles, the effect of rotation is negligible because of which g is maximum while at equator the effect of rotation on g is the maximum. Therefore, value of g is minimum. Thus as we go from pole to equator acceleration due to gravity decreases. For complete solved paper of DPMT2005, refer MTG's DPMT Explorer.
V2X3
Price of each volume : Rs.170 Add Rs.25 (for each volume) for postage .
How to order: Send money by demand draft/money order. Demand Draft should be drawn in favour of MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd. Mention the volume you require along with your name and address. Mail your order to : Circulation Manager, MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd., 406, Taj Aptt., Ring Road, Near Safdarjung Hospital, New Delhi  29.Tel.: 26197344 email:mtg@pcmbtoday.com
34
PHYSICS F O R Y O U  AUGUST 05
SOLVED PAPER
DCE  2005
1. An organ pipe, open from both end produces 5 beats per second when vibrated with a source of frequency 200 Hz. The second harmonic of the same pipes produces 10 beats per second with a source of frequency 420 Hz. The frequency of source is (a) 195 Hz (b) 205 Hz (c) 190 Hz (d) 210 Hz. 2. Two rings of radius R and nR made up of same material have the ratio of moment of inertia about an axis passing through centre is 1 : 8. The value of n is (a) 2 (b) 2V2 (c), 4 (d) 1/2. radius of Earth's orbit is (a) 4 (b) 9 (c) 64 (d) 27. 9. 3 particles each of mass m are kept at vertices of an equilateral triangle of side L. The gravitational field at centre due to these particles is 3 GM (a) zero (b) L2 12 GM 9 GM (d) (c) s i r 1?
j 10. A solid sphere of radius R is rolling with velocity v 3. One drop of soap bubble of diameter D breaks into I on a smooth plane. The total kinetic energy of sphere is 27 drops having surface tension a. The change in surface 7 , (b) mv2 (a) energy is 4 2 2 (a) 2n.aD (b) 4naD (d)  w v (c) ncD2 (d) SnaD2. j (c) ~'»v~ 4. The gas having average speed four times as that 11. A block is kept on an inclined plane of inclination of S0 2 (molecular mass 64) is I 0 of length /. The velocity of particle at the bottom of (a) He (molecular mass 4) ! inclined is (the coefficient of friction is (I) (b) 0 2 (molecular mass 32) I (a) [2g/(.icosesin0)]" 2 (c) H2 (molecular mass 2) (d) CH 4 (molecular mass 16) (b) J2gl(sin0ncos8) (c) V2g/(sin6 + icos0) 5. A container having 1 mole of a gas at a temperature j (d) ^2g/(cos0 + j.Lsin0) 27°C has a movable piston which maintains at constant pressure in container of 1 atm. The gas is compressed 12. If earth is supposed to be a sphere of radius R, if until temperature becomes 127°C. The work done is g}0 is value of acceleration due to gravity at lattitude of 30° and g at the equator, the value of g  g3n„ is (C,, for gas is 7.03 cal/molK.) (a) 703 J (b) 814 J (c) 121 J (d) 2035 J. (a) ^co2/? (b) 31 6. An electron having mass (9.1 x 10~ kg) and charge (1.6 x 10"'° C) moves in a circular path of radius 0.5 m (c) co2R (d) ^ R with a velocity lO6 rn/s in a magnetic field. Strength 13. An organ pipe open at one end is vibrating in first of magnetic field is overtone and is in resonance with another pipe open (a) 1.13 x io~5 T (b) 5.6 x I0"6 T at both ends and vibrating in third harmonic. The ratio (c) 2.8 x 10~6 T (d) none of these. of length of two pipes is 7. A cylinder rolls down an inclined plane of inclination (a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 8 : 3 (d) 3 : 8. 30°, the acceleration of cylinder is 14. A coil takes 15 min to boil a certain amount of (a) g/3 (b) g (c) g/2 (d) 2g/3. water, another coil takes 20 min for the same process. 8. A period of a planet around Sun is 27 times that * based on memory of Earth. The ratio of radius of planet's orbit to the
32 PHYSICS l"'OH YOU  AUGUST '05
35
Time taken to boil the same amount of water when both coil are connected in series, (a) 5 min (b) 8.6 min (c) 35 min (d) 30 min. 15. Two capillary of length L and 2L and of radius R and 2R are connected in series. The net rate of flow of fluid through them will be (given rate of the flow through single capillary, X = nPRV&r\L) (a) — X 9 (c) X (b) (d) f * \ x
connected in series with resistance of 20 Q across source. If 0.1 A passes through resistance then what is the voltage of the source? (a) 1.5 V (b) 2.0 V (c) 2.5 V (d) 5 V. 22. Potentiometer wire of length 1 m is connected in series with 490 Q resistance and 2 V battery. If 0.2 mV/cm is the potential gradient, then resistance of the potentiometer wire is (a) 4.9 0 (b) 7.9 Q (c) 5.9 Q (d) 6.9 Q. 23. Dipole is placed parallel to the electric field. If W is the work done in rotating the dipole by 60°, then work done in rotating it by 180° is (a) 2W (b) 31V (c) 41V (d) W/2. 24. An electron of charge e moves in a circular orbit of radius r around the nucleus at a frequency u. The magnetic moment associated with the orbital motion of the electron is (a) nver2 (c) 7toe (b) (d) 7t er
16. A charge q is fixed. Another charge Q is brought near it and rotated in a circle of radius r around it. Work done during rotation is (a) zero (c) 17. (a) (b) (c) Qq 2 e„r Qq u (b) 47: £ r 0 (d) none of these.
Advantage of optical fibre high bandwidth and EM interference low band width and EM interference high band width, low transmission capacity and no EM interference (d) high bandwidth, high data transmission capacity and no EM interference. 18. In an electromagnetic wave, direction of propagation is in the direction of (a) E ^ (b) B (c) ExB (d) none of these. 19. F, and F 2 are focal length of objective and eyepiece respectively of the telescope. The angular magnification for the given telescope is equal to F, F1 (a) F
2
25. A and B are two identically spherical charged body which repel each other with force F, kept at a finite distance. A third uncharged sphere of the same size is brought in contact with sphere B and remived. It is then kept at midpoint of A and B. Find the magnitude of force on C. (a) FT2 (b) F!8 (c) F (d) zero. 26. A composite rod is made of copper ( a = 1.8 x 10"5 K"1) and steel ( a  1.2 * 10"5 K"1) is heated then it (a) bends with steel on concave side (b) bends with copper on concave side (c) does not expand (d) data is insufficient. 27. A wave of equation y = 0.1 sin[100rekc\ and wave velocity 100 m/s, its wave number is equal to (a) 1 nr 1 (b) 2 r ! (c) n m"1 (d) 271m1. 28. Volumetemperature graph at atmospheric pressure for a monoatomic gas (V in m 3 , T in °C) is •
V / V
(c) 20. (a) (b) (c) (d)
f^f2 F] + F2
(d)
F] + F2 M
Critical velocity of the liquid decreases when radius decreases increases when radius increases decreases when density increases increases when density increases.
21. A diode having potential difference 0.5 V across its junction which does not depend on current, is 32
(a)
r CC)
(b)
T CO
PHYSICS l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05 36
(C)
(d)
T(°C) T(°C)
29. (a) (b) (c) (d)
In Xray experiment Ka, denotes characteristic lines continuous wavelength a , (3emissions respectively none of these.
In second case, 2 / ~ 420 = 10 / = 205 Hz or, 215 Hz. The value o f / = 205 Hz satisfies both the conditions. 2. (a) : The moment of inertia of circular ring whose axis of rotation is passing through its centre, /, = mR2. Also, I 2 = m2(nR)2 Since both ring have same density, «7, _ m 2n(nR) xA~ 2nR x A where A is crosssection area of ring. m2 = nm. Also, mR1 U m2(nRf
> n = 2.
30. The ratio of frequencies of two pendulums are 2 : 3, then their length are in ratio (a) 7273 (b) V3/2 (c) 4/9 (d) 9/4
mR1 nm(nR)2
31. The value of escape velocity on a certain planet is 2 km/s. Then the value of orbital speed for a satellite orbiting close to its surface is (a) 12 km/s (b) 1 km/s (c) y[2 km/s (d) 2km/s. 32. The electrochemical equivalent of a metal is 3.3 x 10~7 kg/C. The mass of metal liberated at cathode by 3 A current in 2 sec will be (a) 19.8 x 10"7 kg (b) 9.9 x 10~7 kg 7 (c) 6.6 x 10" kg (d) 1.1 x lo^ 7 kg. 33. For a paramagnetic material, the dependence of the magnetic susceptibility X on the absolute temperature is given as (a) X « T (b) X oe 1 tr(c) X « MT (d) independent. 34. (a) (b) (c) (d) An optically active compound rotates the plane polarised light changing the direction of polarised light do not allow plane polarised light to pass through none of the above.
3.
(d) : Change in surface energy, (AW) = surface tension x change in surface area of bubble = ct [27 x 47id2  471D2] Volume of bigger bubble = volume of 27 smaller bubbles
— 7 i D 3 = 2 7 x — 7t<3?3
=> s
3
3
=>
d =
3
—.
AW = a x 4 C 27x^1 T
D2
= 2D2 x 471 x a = 8TIctD2. (a) : Velocity
i
Vmolecular mass => M]=4i.e. He.
(b) : W = P(Vf V,) = nR(TfT,) = 1 x 8.14 (127  27) = 8.14 x 100 = 814 J. (a) : B= mv = qvB r mv qr 9.1xl0~ 31 xlO 6 1.6xl0"'9x0.5 = 11.37xl0~ 6 T
35. Three particles A, B and C are thrown from the top of a tower with the same speed. A is thrown up, B is thrown down and C is horizontally. They hit the ground with speeds VA, VK and Vr respectively. (a) VA = VH = Vc (b) VA = VB > Vr (c) VH > Vc> VA (d) VA > VH = Vc. SOLUTIONS 1. (b) : In first c a s e , /  2 0 0 f = 195 Hz or, 205 Hz.
= 1.13 x 105 T. 7. (a) : Acceleration of a cylinder down a smooth inclined plane is gsinB mR2 for cylinder. where 1 = (1 + HmR1) gsin30° mR
2
g x 1/2 _ g 1 1 + 1/2 3
mR 37
32 PHYSICS l"'OH YOU  AUGUST '05
8.
RL OC
(b) : According to Kepler's third law, T2 R _ (T" RC~ 277;,
N 2/3
From (i) and (ii), equation, 3v_
41. 3^ 2/n
uc. = ufi
U,
= 9.
9. (a) : The gravitational field intensity at point O is the net force exerted on a unit mass placed at O due to three equal masses m at vertices A. B and C. Since the three masses are equal and their distance from O are also equal, they exert force FA, FH and FR of equal magnitude. It follows from symmetry of forces that their resultant at point O is zero. 10. ( a ) : Kinetic energy = translational kinetic energy + rotational kinetic energy = — mv" + —7co 2 2 2 2 Moment of inertia of sphere (/) = — MR K.E. = — / M V 2 2 N
+ — x — MR" 1
14. (c): The time taken by coils to boil the same amount of water when connected in series, as V is the same, the current decreases, time t  t} + t2 = 35 min. 8r/ 15. (aj : Fluid resistance is given by R = When two capillary tubes of same size are joined in parallel, then equivalent fluid resistance is
8R]L\ 9
71F Rate of flow P_ R, nPr
TC(2 RY
x — = —X. 8rZ, 9 9
8
7IPR* as X = 8r /
2
5
(— \R
10
11. (b): Acceleration of block = gsinen*
16. ( a ) : The charge is moving in an equipotential line. So no work is done. 17. (d) : Few advantages of optical fibres are that the number of signals carried by optical fibers is much more than that carried by the copper wire or radio waves. Optical fibers are practically free from electromagnetic interference and problem of cross talks whereas ordinary cables and microwaves links suffer a lot from it. 18. (c) 19. (a) : The angular magnification produced by an optical instrument is defined as angle subtended at eye using instrument M• angle subtended at unaided eye For telescope, fo = ^ M =— _ — F fe 2 _ kr pr where T is coefficient of viscosity of the liquid, p its density and r is the radius of the tube. £ is a dimensionless constant called the Reynold number. Thus critical velocity increases when density and radius of the tube decreases. 20 a 21. (c) : I"  V L IR = 0.5 + 0.1 x 20 = 2.5 V.
0.1 A V AWvi
= gsinO  g m cosO = g(sin9 cosG) From straight line equation, v2 — it2 = 2 as i.e. v = 2 x g ( s i n 9  j i c o s B ) / or, v = y2g/(sin9.icos0).
2
N = mgcosO
12. (b) : Acceleration due to gravity at lattitude X is given by g'=g — R(a2cos2\ At 30°, g30 = g  «co cos 30° = or, gg3o: • R.
2 2
20. (c) : Critical velocity of a liquid,
3 > g~R
4
13. (a) : In first overtone of organ pipe open at one 3v u, = end,
41R
Third harmonic or second overtone of organ pipe open at both end, 32
u„ =• 2L
3v
... (ii)
22. (a) : Potential across potentiometer wire
PHYSICS l"'OH YOU  AUGUST '05 38
(0.2 xlO" 3 ) V x 1 m
10 " m
= 0.02 V
Comparing with general equation, o 100TC y = 0.1 sin (tot  kx) => £ = —=  y ^  = 7t m 28. (c) : Foe T 29. (a) : As we know w = 1 shell is known as the ATshell. In A'ray experiment when Xrays are emitted in the process of filling the vacancy at K shell they are known as K shell A'rays. The KX ray that originates with the n = 2 shell is known as A',, A'ray and the KXr&ys originating from higher shells are known as Ky and so forth. i 30. (d) : Frequency of pendulum x x/length
R x2 r+R where R is resistance of potentiometer wire and r is resistance connected in series. 0.02(490 + R) = 2R => 9.8 + 0.02 R = 2 R 9. /? = — 4 = .9 Q. 9.8 = 2 R  0.02R 1.98 23. (a) : Work done =  pEcosQ ]V=pE' cos60° Also 0.02 = IV = pE \ WI pE
where p is dipole moment of dipole and E is the electric field applied. The work done required to rotate dipole by 180° is W =  pE cos 180° = pE = 2IV. 24. (a) : The charge passing per second through any point of the path is v times the charge of the electron. i.e. I = ve If /I is the area of the orbit, the magnetic moment is in = IA = vera'2. 25. (c): Let initially both the sphere having charge q. Thus force between A and B sphere kept at a distance /• is given as , „ F =47ts n r
_ fi
i2
31. (c) : Escape velocity = sj2gR =v(. Orbital velocity = v„ = ^JgR=vL./J2
O
O
= V2 km/s. V2 32. (a) : From Faraday's first law of electrolysis mass of a substance liberated = ZIt = 3.3 x 0 7 x 3 x 2 = 19.8 x io~7 kg. 33. (c) : Paramagnetic material obey's Curie's law. According to which % = C/7". where C is called Curie's constant. 34. (a): When the planepolarised light passes through certain substance, the plane of polarisation of the light is rotated about the direction of propagation of light through a certain angle. 35. (a): When A is thrown up, it reaches to maximum height at zero velocity, comes back to A with the same initial velocity vA. vH has the same initial velocity. The vertical velocity vc  0. vc is acting horizontal. Whereas for A and yjv^ + 2gh for A. For B, yjvB2 +2gh For C also, yjvc2 + 2 gh i.e. ^jv2 + v2 :. The final velocities are the same. .'. Vf for A = vf for B = vf for C. For complete solved paper, refer MTG's DCE Guide
When two identical metallic spheres are brought in contact, the charge on them ^ ( are equalised due to the flow of free electrons. Thus W when an uncharged sphere ^ ^ ^ ^ C is brought in contact with sphere B having a charge q and then removed, the total charge q is equally shared between two so that the charge left on B is q/2 and that developed on C is q/2. The force on C. when it is placed between A and B is given as qx(q/2) (q/2)x(q/2) _qq_ Fr = 4 ne, [21]= F. 4nea(r/2)~ 4ne 0 (r/2) •+vit0 26. (b) : As coefficient of linear expansion of copper is more than steel therefore it expand more than steel with same amount of change in temperature. 27. (c) : Wave equation v = 0.1 sin (10071/  kx)
32 PHYSICS l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05
39
(SOLVED PAPER
CBSE PMT  2005
Contd. from July 2005 issue t . A lens of focal length of 20 cm and of refractive index 1.5 is placed inside a shell containing liquid of refractive index 1.6. What will be the focal length inside the liquid. 2. (a) Electric field and a dipole are in same direction. When the dipole is deflected in small angle does it exhibit SHM? (b) Electric field inside a sphere varies with distance as Ar. Find the total charge enclosed within the sphere if A = 3000 V/m 2 ; R = 30 cm, where R is the radius of the sphere. SOLUTIONS 1. The focal length of lens in air
/
1
1
fa V«1 R2 The focal length of lens when placed in a liquid of refractive index 1.6
... (0
(ii) x H/ f, From equation (i) and (ii), f ^ ( H g  l ) = (1.51)1.6 _ 0.5x1.6 fa~ (n K pi/) _ (1.51.6) ~ 0.1 3. (a) If the radius of a coil is changing at the rate 10 2 units in a normal magnetic field 1 Or3 units, the ./. / , =  8.0 x / a =  160 cm. induced emf is 10.V. Find the final radius of the coil, The convex lens becomes a concave lens. (b) Name the type 2. (a) The torque applied to deflect dipole by small of gate used in the ' angle is given by circuit given, find x =  /?£sin9 =  pEQ the relation between r ,_ A, B and Y and draw Also, 7a = I^ = pEQ dt2 the truth table. This satisfies the condition of simple harmonic motion. (c) Light of wavelength X = 4000 A incident on a metal d2Q 2n surface. If stopping potential needed to stop the elected —— = co 9. .. photoelectron is 1.4 volt, then find out the work function dt~ of metal surface. Thus time period = 2n 4. (a) Separation between two parallel plates facing each other is 2 cm and surface area P = 100 cm2. If 106 (b) By Gauss theorem, E at r inside the uniformly charged O electrons of velocity 10s m/sec projected into the gap sphere between plates of potential difference 0 = 400 volt, 1 : q find the deflection of an electron. £0 47tr2 (b) Of an resonance circuit at which angular frequency, potential difference leads the current? Q (4/3)7t/3 Q
o
o
5. (a) Describe a decay of a neutron. (b) For a radioactive material half life period is 600 sec. If initially there are 600 number of molecules find the time taken for disintegration of 450 molecules and the rate of disintegration. 32
3 .. E = Ar. Given r max = R = 0.30 m or, radius of the sphere is 30 cm.
PHYSICS l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05 40
£n ~—nR3
4™"2
\4ne0R3
j
a = ,!/' x 4TtE0 = 3000 x (0.3) x
3 3
9x10
1
= 3xl0 x<3) xl0"3x= 9 x lOo c _ 3. (a) Area of coil = nr dA . dr — =:?T — 2TO' dl dt Induced emf \e\ =
r!A
2
= — x 10 " m = 0.176 cm = 1.76 mm. 9.1 (b) If voltage leads the current in the resonant circuit, coL—— > 0
ojC
1 6
9x10
coZ, >coC
CD" > 
LC
co >
VZr'
' dt
\e\= B— ['.• (j) = BA] dt • 1 x 10"" = 103 X 2N x /• =
x 10~2
5. (a) Neutron decays to a proton, an electron and an antineutrino. This is called neutron beta decay. n —> p + e + u (b) The original number of molecules A'„ = 600 If 450 molecules disintegration have taken place, the number of molecules remaining is 600  450 = 150. 150
Vn"
600 '
v>
0.016 m = 1.6 cm. 2n (b) NAND gate is used in the circuit
f1 4 \2 \2)
=> n = 2 =
t 71/2
o
A 0 0 1 1 B 0 1 0 1 A 1 1 0 0 B 1 0 1 0 AB 1 0 0 0
C V
Y = AB  A + B 0 1 1 1
t = 2 x 600 = 1200 sec. The rate of disintegration, r ^  M J J K * 150 dt TV2 x 150 = 0.173 disintegrations/sec 600 at that instant when 150 molecules were remaining. 0.693
This work as OR gate as output of given circuit is equivalent to that only. (c) Maximum kinetic energy of electron = stopping potential = Work function
A.
Solved Papers 2005 in
Physics For You
> IITJEE (Screening)
CBSEPMT (Prelims)
 work function  1 . 4 eV
>
CBSE (Board)
April 2005 May 2005 May 2005 June 2005 June 2005 June 2005 June 2005 July 2005 July 2005 July 2005 July 2005
PHYSICS l"'OH YOU  AUGUST '05 42
6.6x10~ 34 x 3x10 s
9
4000x10 10 = 4.95 x 1 0  '  1.4 eV = 3.09  1.4 = 1.69 eV.
>
r
V.
AIEEE WBJEE IITJEE (Mains) AIMS
> AFMC
>
2
1X
2x 10~ x9.1 x 10 ' x(10 )
1,6x 10~19 x , . 10~2 400x ,
2 3
> CBSE (Mains) > BHU (Prelims)
8 2
V
Karnataka CET
32
SOLVED PAPER
KERALA PMT  2005
1. the (a) (c) (e) One milligram of water is converted into energy, energy released will be 90 J (b) 9 x io 3 J 5 9 x io J (d) 9 x IO10 J 6 9 x 10 J. (d) the frequency of modulated wave varies as frequency of modulating wave (e) the frequency of modulated wave varies as frequency of carrier wave. 6. Audio signal cannot be transmitted because (a) the signal has more noise (b) the signal cannot be amplified for distance communication (c) the transmitting antenna length is very small to design (d) the transmitting antenna length is very large and impracticable (e) the signal is not a radio signal. 7. In which of the following remote sensing technique is not used? (a) forest density (b) pollution (c) wetland mapping (d) ground water survey (e) medical treatment. 8. If the unit of force and length are doubled, the unit of energy will be (a) 1/4 times the original (b) 1/2 times the original (c) 2 times the original (d) 4 times the original (e) 8 times the original. 9. A car travels half the distance with constant velocity of 40 kmph and the remaining half with a constant velocity of 60 kmph. The average velocity of the car in kmph is (a) 40 (b) 45 (c) 48 (d) 50 (e) 52. 10. Velocitytime (vt) graph for a moving object is shown in the figure. Total displacement of the object during the time interval when there is non
AWv— 2. In the diode circuit given, (a) D and D2 are r reverse biased (b) £>, and D2 are forward bias (C) D  is forward biased and D2 is reverse biased D, is reverse biased and D2 is forward biased (d) (e) D, and D, will not conductive.
JT
V
3. in npn transistor, the collector current is 10 mA. If 90% of the electrons emitted reach the collector, then (a) emitter current will be 9 mA (b) emitter current will be 11.1 mA (c) base current will be 0.1 mA (d) base current will be 0.01 mA (e) emitter current will be 11.3 mA. 4. In the Ag i v e n Bcircuit the output Y becomes zero for the inputs (a) A = 1, B = 0, C = 0 (b) A = 0, B = 1, C = 1 (c) A = 0, B = 0, C = 0 (d) A = 1, B = 1, C = 1 (e) A = 1, B = 1, C = 0. 5. In frequency modulation (a) the amplitude of modulated wave varies as frequency of carrier wave (b) the frequency of modulated wave varies as amplitude of modulating wave (c) the amplitude of modulated wave varies as amplitude of carrier wave
P i n s i r s F O R YOl< I AUGUST'05
v (m/s)
30 4 0 50
60
— • / (see) 43
zero acceleration and retardation is (a) 60 m (b) 50 m (c) 30 m (d) 40 m (e) 65 m. 11. When a ceiling fan is switched on, it makes 10 revolutions in the first 3 seconds. Assuming a uniform angular acceleration, how many rotations it will make in the next 3 seconds? (a) 10 (b) 20 (c) 30 (d) 40 (e) 60. 12. If A and B are nonzero vectors which obey the relation \A + B\ = \AB\, is (a) 0° (c) 90° (e) 180°. then the angle between them (b) 60° (d) 120°
radius 0.2 m. Then its moment of inertia (in kg m 2 ) about its geometrical axis is (in kg m2) (a) 0.8 (b) 0.4 (c) 0.2 (d) 20.2 (e) 20.4 18. A cricket bat is cut at the location of its center of mass as shown. Then J C the two pieces will have the same mass the bottom piece will have larger mass the handle piece will have larger mass mass of handle piece is double the mass of bottom piece (e) cannot say. A simple pendulum is taken from the equator to pole. Its period decreases (b) increases remains the same decreases and then increases becomes infinity.
(a) (b) (c) (d)
13. A book is lying on the table. What is the angle between the action of the book on the table and the reaction of the table on the book? (a) 0° (b) 30° (c) 45° (d) 90° (e) 180°. 14. A man of mass 60 kg is standing on a spring balance inside a lift. If the lift falls freely downwards, then the reading of the spring balance will be (a) zero (b) 60 kgf (c) < 60 kgf (d) > 60 kgf (e) 60 kg + weight of the spring. 15. Which one of the following is not a conservative force? (a) gravitational force (b) electrostatic force between two charges (c) magnetic force between two magnetic dipoles (d) frictional force (e) force between nucleons. 16. An 8 kg metal block of dimension 16 cm x 8 cm x 6 cm is lying on a table with its face of largest area touching the table. I f g = 10 ms~2 the minimum amount of work done in making it stand with its length vertical is (a) 0.4 J (b) 6.4 J (c) 64 J (d) 4 J (e) 12.8 J. 17. A solid cylinder of mass 20 kg has length 1 m and 32
19. the (a) (c) (d) (e)
20. The depth at which the value of acceleration due to gravity becomes 1 In times the value at the surface is (R be the radius of the earth) (a) R/n (b) R/n2 (c) R(nl) (d) Rn («l)
(e) Rn 21. (a) (b) (d) Construction of submarines is based on Archimedes' principle Bernoulli's theorem (c) Pascal's law Newton's laws (e) Boyle's law.
22. Water rises up to a height h in a capillary tube of certain diameter. This capillary tube is replaced by a similar tube of half the diameter. Now the water will rise to the height of (a) 4/; (b) 3 h (c) 2h (d) h (e) 1/2 h. 23. An incompressible fluid flows steadily through a cylindrical pipe which has radius 2r at point A and radius r at B further along the flow direction. If the velocity at point A is v, its velocity at point B is (a) 2v (b) v
PHYSICS l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05 44
(c) v/2 (e) 8v. 24. (a) (c) (d) (e)
(d) 4v (e)
(*1+*2X*3)
k\+k2+ k^
When water is heated from 0°C to 10°C, its volume increases (b) decreases does not change first decreases and then increases first increases and then decreases.
C (2P, 3F)
25. An ideal gas is taken through a cycle ABCA as shown in the PV diagram. The work done during the cycle is (a) I p v (b) 2 PV (d) PV
2
29. A source of sound of frequency 500 Hz is moving towards an observer with velocity 30 ms~'. The speed of sound is 330 ms 1 . The frequency heard by the observer will be (a) 545 Hz (b) 580 Hz (c) 458.3 Hz (d) 550 Hz (e) 560 Hz. 30. A stone is dropped into a lake from a tower of 500 m high. The sound of the splash will be heard at the top of the tower approximately after (given velocity of sound = 330 ms 1 ) a time of (a) 11.5 seconds (b) 1.5 seconds (c) 10 seconds (d) 14 seconds (e) 21 seconds. 31. Four identical capacitors are connected as shown in diagram. When a battery of 6 V is connected between A and B, the charge stored is found to be 1.5 jiC. The value of Ci is (a) 2.5 nF (b) 15 nF (c) 1.5 aF (d) 1 \i¥ (e) 0.1 xF. 32. A 10 ^F capacitor is charged to a potential difference of 1000 V. The terminals of the charged capacitor are disconnected from the power supply and connected to the terminals of an uncharged 6 ^.F capacitor. What is the final potential difference across each capacitor? (a) 167 V (b) 100 V (c) 625 V (d) 250 V (e) 750 V. 33. A particle of mass m carrying charge q is released from rest in a uniform electric field of intensity E. The kinetic energy acquired by the particle after moving a distance of x is (neglect gravitational force) (a) qEx (b) qEx2 2 (c) qE x (d) q2Ex 2 (e) q E?x.
A CP, V) V
(c) 4 PV
(e) zero.
26. A hot liquid kept in a beaker cools from 80°C to 70°C in two minutes. If the surrounding temperature is 30°C, then the time of cooling of the same liquid from 60°C to 50°C is (a) 240 s (b) 360 s (c) 480 s (d) 216 s (e) 264 s. 27. Which of the following is not characteristics of simple harmonic oscillation? (a) the motion is periodic (b) the motion is along straight line about the mean position (c) the acceleration of the particle is directed towards the extreme positions (d) the oscillations are responsible for the energy transportation (e) the period is given by T = have usual meaning. 28. The resultant spring constant of the system of springs shown below is (a) (b) (c) kx + k2 + £3
(4*, + 2*2)(A3) A,
where the symbols
K
k\ + k2 + £3 {k\+k2) 2 (A, +k2 + k3)
(d)
kj
PHYSICS FOR YOU  AUGUST '05
45
34. The electric field E, current density j and conductivity a of a conductor are related as (a) a = E/j (b) a = j/E (c) a ~ /E (d) a = 1/jE (e) a = j2E. 35. Two cells of same emf E but different internal resistances/", and r 2 are connected in series to an external resistance R. The value of R for which the potential difference across the first cell is zero is given by (a) J? = / • ,  r2 (b) R = rt+ r2 (c) R = /',/•; (d) R = r,/r 2 (e) R = rt= r2. 36. Two wires that are made up of two different materials whose specific resistances are in the ratio 2 : 3 , length 3 : 4 and area 4 : 5 . The ratio of their resistances is (a) 6 : 5 (b) 6 : 8 (c) 5 : 8 (d) 1 : 2 (e) 1 : 4 37. A galvanometer has 30 divisions and a sensitivity 16 j.A/div. It can be converted into a voltmeter to read 3 V by connecting (a) resistance nearly 6 kO in series (b) 6 k£2 in parallel • (c) 500 Q in series (d) it cannot be converted (e) 6.6 kQ in series. 38. An alpha particle and a proton of same velocity enters a uniform magnetic field at right angles to it. The ratio of the radii of the circular paths of alpha particle and the proton respectively is (a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1 4 (d) 2 : 3 (c) (e) 39. Two long parallel wires P and O are both perpendicular to the plane of the paper with distance 5 m between them. If P and O carry currentof2.5 amp and 5 amp respectively in the same direction, then the magnetic field at a point half way between the wires is (a) (c) (e) 32 V3n0
2tt 3PO
40. An ac source of frequency 50 Hz is connected in series to an inductance of 0.5 H and resistance of 157 ohms. The phase difference between current and voltage is (a) 90° (b) 60° (c) 75° (d) 45° (e) 30°. 41. A transformer with efficiency 80% works at 4 kW and 100 V. If the secondary voltage is 200 V, then the primary and secondary currents are respectively (a) 40 A, 16 A (b) 16 A, 40 A (c) 20 A, 40 A (d) 40 A, 20 A (e) 40 A, 10 A. 42. The following series resonant LCR circuit has a quality factor (0factor) 0.4 and a bandwidth of 1.3 kHz. The value of inductance is then (a) 0.1 H (c) 2 H (e) 5 H.
C L
HJCfflRTL
0.1 nF
R  2 k2 : £
(b) 0.94 H (d) 10 H
43. Which one of the following is not electromagnetic in nature? (a) Xrays (b) gamma rays (c) cathode rays (d) infrared rays (e) microwaves. 44. A glass slab of thickness 3 cm and refractive index 3/2 is placed on ink mark on a piece of paper. For a person looking at the mark at a distance 5.0 cm above it, the distance of the mark will appear to be (a) 3.0 cm (b) 4.0 cm (c) 4.5 cm (d) 5.0 cm (e) 3.5 cm. 45. A fish looking from within water sees the outside world through a circular horizon. If the fish is Jl m below the surface of water, what will be the radius of the circular horizon? (a) 3 m (c) Ji m (e) 4 m. 3 (b) —?=
m
(b) (d)
^0 ^ 71 Ho 271
(d) 3N/7 m
271
\/3p 0
4 6 . When the angle of incidence on a material is 60°,
PHYSICS l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST'0546
the reflected light is completely polarized. The velocity of the refracted ray inside the material is (in ms 1 ) (a) 3 x io8 (c) V 3 x l 0 8 (e) 0.75 x io8. 47. of (a) (c) (e)
(b)
3
l7?
,xlO°
(d) 0.5 x 10s
The wavelength of the matter wave is independent mass momentum frequency. (b) velocity (d) charge
6. (d) : Following are the problems which are faced while transmitting audio signals directly. (i) These signals are relatively of short range, (i i) If everybody started transmitting these low frequency signals directly, mutual interference will render all of them ineffective. (iii) Size of antenna required for their efficient radiation would be larger i.e. about 75 km. 7. (e) : Remote sensing is the technique to collect information about an object in respect of its size, colour, nature, location, temperature etc. without physically touching it. There are some areas or location which are inaccessible. So to explore these areas or locations, a technique known as remote sensing is used. Remote sensing is done through a satellite. 8. 9. (d) : Energy = force x distance (c) total distance _ (d/2) + (d/2) _ 2\\v2 d! 2 dt2 total time v, + vv, v2
48. In a sample of radioactive material, what fraction of the initial number of active nuclei will remain undisintegrated after half of a halflife of the sample?
(A) (C)
(e)
1
7T
42
(d) 2V2
SOLUTIONS 1. (d) : E = MC = 1 x 10'6 x (3 x 108)2 = 10"6 X 9 x 1 0 1 6 = 9 X 1 0 ' ° J.
2. (c): When positive terminal of battery is connected to the /jside and negative terminal to the /7side then diode is said to be forward biased while when negative terminal of battery is connected to pside and positive terminal to the //side then diode is said to be reverse biased. 3. (b): Let the number of electrons emitted per second at emitter be x. ex x 90
100 100
= 48 kmph. 40 + 60 10. (b) : Between time interval 20 s to 40 s there is nonzero acceleration and retarding. .'. Distance travelled during this interval = area between interval 20 s to 40 s = — x base x height + area of rectangle = —x20x3 + 2 0 x 1 = 30 +20 = 50 m.
2
40x60x2
11. (c) : Angle turned through in 3 seconds
= 2TI X 1 0 = 2071
But,
0 = GV +  o c r
a:
407T
= 10 mA
20TT = 0 +  o c  9 2
radians/s" co 3 s =0 +
407T
!,, = ex = — mA = 11.1 mA 9 Also, /,. = / /; + / r or, IH= 1.1 mA.
A
to, = (o0 + at ;
4071 x;
407T
1
)' = 0
4.
(e) : BC
0
*
1
3 1 40tt x3 +  x 9 = 607t 0 from 6 s to 3 s = 3 2 9 The number of revolutions made from 3s to 6s = 6071/271 = 30. 12. (c) : \ A + B\= \ AB\ M2+52+ 2.1Bcos0=M2+522M5cos0
5. (b) : The process of changing the frequency of a carrier wave (modulated wave) in accordance with the audio frequency signal (modulating wave) is known as frequency modulation (FM).
32 P H Y S I C S l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05
=> 4y5Bcos6 = 0 .. cos© = 0 0 = 90°. 47
reaction o f table
in a capillary tube of radius r is given by h =
2s cos8 rpg
13. (e) :
.. h* Mr. :. When diameter of tube is half of original then water will rise to a height 2h.
action o f book
14. (a): Inside a freely falling lift, as the spring balance is attached to the lift, with respect to the lift, the mass is weightless. 15. ( d ) : Force of friction is nc^ conserved. This is not a conservative force. 16. (d) : Work done = nigh The height of centre of mass initially = 3 cm The height when ^ 16 the block is vertical = 8 cm .•. Work done = mgh = 8 x 10 x (5 x IO"2) = 400 x 10"2 = 4 J.
23. (d) : From equation of continuity av = a constant /raA vA = aB vH \J_ => n(2r)2v = nr2vH vR = 4v. 24. (d): As the temperature of water increases its volume v o l u m e decreases till 4°C, at this temperature volume of water is minimum. On further increase in the temperature, volume starts increasing.
HD
4°C •*• t e m p e r a t u r e
(8  3 ) = 5 c m = t }3 cm 8 cm 16 cm .
h
25. (d) : Work done = area enclosed by triangle = ^x(2PP)(3VV) = ^xPx2V = PV.
26. (d) : From Newton's law of cooling,
01+02 n
6 cm
17. (b) : The moment of inertia of cylinder about the geometrical axis = MR2!2 20 x (0.2 )2 = ^—— = 0.4 kgm 2 . 18. (b) : Centre of mass is closer to massive part of the body therefore the bottom piece of bat have larger mass. 19. (a) : T = As we go from equator to pole the value of g increases. Therefore value of time period of simple pendulum decreases. 20. (c) : Acceleration due to gravity at a depth d
•
t \ 2 When liquid is cooled from 80°C to 70°C 8070
120
80 + 70 10
30 (i)
120x45 When liquid is cooled from 60°C to 50°C 6050 10 t
= * 10
k=
60 + 50 30 2 t= 120x45 25 = 216 s. [using (i)]
or,
x25 : 120x45
27. (c) : Acceleration  displacement The direction of acceleration is always directed towards the equilibrium position. 28. (e) : Two springs and k2 are parallel which are in series with spring.
(&! + k 2 ) x k i
 Mf)  Hf
n 21. (a) 22. ( c ) : The height h through which a liquid will rise 32 R n
h\
+
k*) k^
29. (d) : Apparent frequency = 330 x500 = ——x500 33030 300
PHYSICS l"'OH YOU  AUGUST '05 48
330
u ' = 550 Hz. I. (a) : The time taken by stone to reach lake S= ut\+gl\
1 2
Alternative : i 
2E r]+r2 + R E n R = r,
f 2
As ir, = E (given), i =
1
2 • 500 = 0xt, + —xlOxf, 1 1 2 • ?,2 = 100s => t, = 10 s. ie time taken by sound to reach tower s 500 U= = c=: 1.5 s. v 330 Total time taken by sound of splash to be heard / = /, + t2 = 10 + 1.5 s = 11.5 s. I. (e) : The capacitance ;ross A and B = ^ +
2 i
1 2 1
2 r, = r, + r2 + R
36. (c) : Resistance = p — RL = Pl x A X .dZ. _ 2 x _ 5 _ 3 — X —X — 3 4 4 P2 h 37. (a) : (R + G)1K = V V (R + G) = = 6.25 kQ. t30x16x10"6 .". Value of R is nearly equal to 6 kQ. This is connected in series in a voltmeter. 38. (e) : r = qB
mP
R AAVV—
3
s Q = CV, 1.5 u.C = — Ci x 6 diagram 2 1 1.5 * C, = — xl0"° =0.1xl0~°F = 0.1 j.lF. 1 15 2. ( c ) : After charging, total charge on the capacitor 0= CV , where C = 10 JJ.F = 10 x 10"6 F x 1000 V = 10~2 C. Men this charged capacitor is connected to uncharged apacitor then total charge remains same. • Q = Q, + Q2
10"2 = ( C , + 10" This is the equivalent
la
1p _ 4 m p 2e
J
x
e
mn
—
39. (d) : B = ifo.
471
Z5
2.5 2.5
X ,
2.5
2.5 A ifo 2ti' co L < X 2.5 m >
5 A
C.2)V V = 625 V.
...
2n
.
V =• 16x10"
40. (d) : tan0 =—— = — = R R
2TXX50X0.5
157
3. (a) : Kinetic energy = force x distance = Eq x x = qEx. 4 . (b) lE
 WvVE I W r
where 0 is the phase difference between current and voltage. tan0 ~ 1, 0 ~ 45°. .„ , „ output power 41. (a) : r) = input power 80 _ 200 x / v 100 ~ 4 x 103 , 80 4x1000 , , . => /.. = x = 16 A. 100 200 Also, Ep Ip = 4 KW
l
EJs EpIp
15. (a) :
VWv R
"rom circuit, F, + V2 = iR E  ir} + E  i f 2 = iR. Also ir] = E (given) ir] — + jr — i f 2 = iR => R = rj — r2.
4x10
r = 100
:
40 A. 49
PHYSICS l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05
42. 0 =
 = (0*R)2 C
ls a flying bird in a bottle lighter than it sitting on the bottom?
When the cap is sealed, the bird and the bottle form a sealed system. As long as the bird is not accelerating up or down (ie sitting on the floor or flying level) the center of mass of the system is moving with a constant vertical velocity. On the otherhand, if the bird is accelerating downwards, then so is the center of mass. The net force on the system must be a small downwards force  so the upwards force from the scale is slightly less than the gravity force on the system. Thus the scale reads a smaller weight than the weight of the sitting bird in the bottle. Similarly, ifthe bird is accelerating upwards, the net force is also upwards  the scale reads a higher weight than the sitting bird. Physically, what is happening is that when the bird is j flying steadily, it is pushing air downwards with its' wings to keep it up in the air. This causes a wind to j flow downwards which impacts the bottom of the bottie. pushing it down. This downwards flow of air also creates ! a slight vacuum above the wings, which creates a small force downwards on the ceiling of the bottle. The downwards force from the air on the bottle pushes! down with exactly the weight of the ,bird (if the bird is not accelerating), making the scale push upwards with an extra force. When the cap is opened, the system stops being closed and the parts really do need to be considered sperarately,i but we can get an idea about what happens by thinking about it a little: 1. If the bird is "in" the open bottle but very, very, far above the tops of the walls of the bottle, only a small amount of its down draft will be felt by the bottle  making the bottle approximately its empty weight. If the bird is sitting on the floor of the bottie, the bottle feels its whole weight. If the bird is flying in the bottle, then although all of its downdraft should hit the floor of the bottle, the small downwards force on the ceiling created by the slight vacuum made by the wings is absent, making the bottle lighter than the closed bottle.
PHYSICS l"'OH Y O U  AUGUST '05 50
=> L = (0.4 x 2 x io 3 ) 2 x 0.1 x 106 = 0.64 H. None of the given answer is correct. 43. (c): Cathode rays are invisible fast moving streams of electrons emitted by the cathode of a discharge tube which is maintained at a pressure of about 0.01 mm of mercury. 44. (b) : The apparent depth of ink mark real depth
. H = 3/2 ®— 2 cm 3 cm
3/2 Thus for person mark is at a distance = 2 + 2 = 4 cm. 45. (a) : From condition of total internal reflection, sinO = 
• = 2 cm.
+ h2 RR +h'=(Rxiiy (V?)
2
^*
2
=>
7= ^R2R2 —R—l 9 9 R = 9 => /? = 3 m. j. = tan / 3x10
:
46. (c) : From Brewster's law, • = tan 60° • = ^ x l 0 8 m/s.
S N_ T
T
47. (d) 48. (c) : where n = 2. Also T =
'1/2
\I2
1/2
given.
3.
n = 1/2.
jV_ Nn 32
1 Ti
International Physics Olympiad
^ m PROBLEMS & SOLUTIONS • • I
Q. The most frequent orbital manoeuvres performed by spacecraft consist of velocity variations along the direction of flight, namely accelerations to reach higher orbits or brakings done to Image: E S A initiate reentering in the atmosphere. In this problem we will study the orbital variations when the engine thrust is applied in a radial direction. To obtain numerical values use: Earth radius RR = 6.37 x 106 m, Earth surface gravity g = 9.81 m/s 2 , and take the length of the sidereal day to be T0 = 24.0 h. We consider a geosynchronous communications satellite of mass m placed in an equatorial circular orbit of radius ra. These satellites have an "apogee engine" which provides the tangential thrusts needed to reach the final orbit. Marks are indicated at the beginning of each subquestion, in parenthesis. Question 1 1.1 Compute the numerical value of r0. 1.2 Give the analytical expression of the velocity v0 of the satellite as a function of g, Rr, and r0, and calculate its numerical value. 1.3 Obtain the expressions of its angular momentum L0 and mechanical energy E0, as functions of v0, m, g and RT. Once this geosynchronous circular orbit has been reached (see Figure F1), the satellite has been stabilised in the 24 desired location, and is being m readied to do its work, an error * by the ground controllers causes 0 the apogee engine to be fired / again. The thrust happens to i j be directed towards the Earth and, despite the quick reaction of the ground crew to shut the *' engine off, an unwanted p_j velocity variation Av is imparted on the satellite. We characterize this boost by the parameter (3 = Av/v0. The duration of the engine bum is always negligible with respect to any other orbital times, so that it can be considered as instantaneous. Question 2 Suppose 3 < 1. 2.1 Determine the parameters of the new orbit, semilatusrectum I and eccentricity 8, in terms of r0 and p. 2.2 Calculate the angle a between the major axis of the new orbit and the position vector at the accidental misfire. 2.3 Give the analytical expressions of the perigee rmm and apogee rmax distances to the Earth centre, as functions of r 0 and P, and calculate their numerical values for P = 1/4. 2.4 Determine the period of the new orbit, T, as a function of T0 and P, and calculate its numerical value for P = 1/4. Question 3 3.1 Calculate the minimum boost parameter, P esc , needed for the satellite to escape Earth gravity. 3.2 Determine in this case the closest approach of the satellite to the Earth centre in the new trajectory, r'min, as a function of r0.
For more about this exam read MTG's Physics Olympiad Problems and Solutions
PHYSICS FOR YOU  SEPTEMBER '05
Question 4 Suppose P > Pe5C. 4.1 (1.0) Determine the / residual velocity at the infinity, , as a function of v0 and p. 4.2 (1.0) Obtain the "impact parameter" b of the asymptotic escape direction in terms of r 0 and p. (See Figure F2). 4.3 (1.0 + 0.2) Determine the angle 0 of the asymptotic escape direction in terms of p. Calculate its numerical 3
value for P = —IW.
SOLUTIONS 1.1 and 1.2
GMr,n=mv0_
r0
r
n> gRf T02 4 n2
1/3
To '
GMr g=R'R
o=
r0 = 4.22xlO 7 m v0 =3.07xl0 J m/s
sRfmgR2 2 4> = 1.3 Ll)=r0mv0=— mv0 V0 v 0 1 2 nMTm 1 2 gRjm E0=mv0 G = mv0 2 r0 2 rQ = mv0
1 2
HINT Under the action of central forces obeying the inversesquare law, bodies follow trajectories described by ellipses, parabolas or hyperbolas. In the approximation m « M the gravitating F3 mass M is at one of the focuses. Taking the origin at this focus, the general polar equation of these curves can be written as (see Figure F3) r(9) =
1ECOS0
mv0
2
1 jr E0 = —mv02 .
2.1 The value of the semilatusrectum I is obtained taking into account that the orbital angular momentum is the same in both orbits. That is
' —
Z,Q2 GMTm
T —
_m2g2V
^ "o
1
gRT2m2
^—T
^
'n
l = r0. The eccentricity value is G2 Mf m3 where E is the new satellite mechanical energy. 2 > r0 1 . 2 . ^ I . 2 I 2 = — mAv +En=—mAv — mvn 0 2 2 2 E = —mvn   1 = Xmv2 ( P 2  1 ) 2 2 0 v0 Combining both, one gets e = p. This is an elliptical trajectory because e = P < 1. 2.2 The initial and final orbits cross at P, where the satellite engine fired instantaneously (see figure 4). At this point That is >'(6 = a ) = ' o = : >h •Pcosa K => a =—. 2
1
2
e2 = 1 
2EL0
where / is a positive constant named the semilatusrectum and e is the eccentricity of the curve. In terms of constants of motion: /= and 8=
1+
2Elf G M rr?
2 2
sl/2
Av_ z
GMm
2
where G is the Newton constant, L is the modulus of the angular momentum of the orbiting mass, with respect to the origin, and E is its mechanical energy, with zero potential energy at infinity. We may have the following cases: i) If 0 < e < 1, the curve is an ellipse (circumference for e = 0). ii) If e = 1, the curve is a parabola. iii) If e > 1, the curve is a hyperbola. 24
2.3 From the trajectory expression one immediately obtains that the maximum and minimum values of r
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
correspond to 9 = 0 and 0 = n respectively (see figure 4). v0 p^
r»
rmm • 'A v J»
!
energy has to be zero to reach infinity (Ep = 0) without residual velocity (Ek = 0). £ = imv02(pLir=0 This also arises from T = pe,c=l
j I ; /
//
\ n \
2
a= s
or from ;max =
i / ' max 1
\\ \ \
3.2 Due to 8 = p esc = 1, the polar parabola equation is I r
1 COS0
Figure 4 Hence, they are given by /
' max , "' 18 'min
r
, , 1+8
' e . 'max =
max
r
0
a n dj
j _ p
Itlin"
mm
0
Tp
J +
For (3 = 1/4, one gets 'max = 5.63 x 107 m; r min = 3.38 x 107 m. The distances rmm and rmm can also be obtained from mechanical energy and angular momentum conservation, taking into account that r and v are orthogonal at apogee and at perigee.
E=LmVo2^_l)=imv2_g4aL
where the semilatusrectum continues to be / = r0. The minimum earthsatellite distance corresponds to 0 = n, where r'mm = r0!2. This also arises from energy conservation (for E = 0) and from the equality between the angular momenta (L0) at the initial point P and at maximum approximation, where r and v are orthogonal. 4.1 If the satellite escapes to infinity with residual velocity v„, by energy conservation,
F
1
2 ,<32
2
,1/2
(P  1 ) =  / m £
2
0
2
r
Lq =
mgR2
v0
= mvr
What remains of them, after eliminating v, is a seconddegree equation whose solutions are r max and r min . 2.4 By the third Kepler's law, the period T in the new orbit satisfies that j •3 a r0 where a, the semimajor axis of the ellipse, is given by
2 l(3
3/2
^ voo=v0(P"l) 4.2 As £ = p > Pesc 1, the satellite trajectory Asymptote will be a hyperbola. The satellite angular momentum is the same at P than at the point Av where its residual ,/ a ' . US 1711 velocity is (figure •  G 5), thus mv„r0 = mv„b So, b = r0=> 6 = 'o(Pz 1 )
1/2
'Jfi ! ro th Y ® asym
T2
_ rf
Therefore, T = T0( 1  P )" .
3/2
2
For P = 1/4, T = T0
= 26.4 h.
4.3 The Asymptote angle between each Figure 5 asymptote and the hyperbola axis is that appearing in its polar equation in the limit r — This is the angle for which the equation » denominator vanishes.
1  Pcos0 a s 3 m = 0
3.1 Only if the satellite follows an open trajectory it can escape from the earth gravity attraction. Then, the orbit eccentricity has to be equal or larger than one. The minimum boost corresponds to a parabolic trajectory, with £ = 1. e = P => Pesc=l This can also be obtained by using that the total satellite 24
®asym = COS (1/P)
%
_I
According to figure 5, , n 1= •  — + vmym P For p =  p a v c =  ,
— + COS 2
P
one gets 0=138° = 2.41 rad .
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
CITc?ljfeaghnci
h r Q l i l f e i n g
The problems given here are intended for students preparing for IITJEE and students are advised to make a sincere effort of solving these problems before going through the solutions. By :Shashi Bhushan* 1. Two capacitors in series are charged by a 12.0 V " 1 E= 12 V 3 nF battery that has an internal 5 Q r= 1 Q. resistance of 1.0 £2. There is 6 JJ.F a 5.0 £2 resistance in series between the capacitors. (a) What is the time constant of the charging circuit? (b) After the switch has been closed for a time, determined in part (a), what is the voltage across the 3 0.F capacitor? Across 5 Q resistor? Soln.: (a) R (equivalent) = 1 + 5 = 6 Q 3x6 ; C (equivalent) =  —  = 2nF. j+6 Time constant, x = RC = \2 sec. (b) q = q0(\  e'K) where q0 = EC = 12 2 = 24 o.C At time t = x q = <7oU  e~') = 0.63<70 15.12 M.C. rolling without slipping. Find the speed of centre of mass of the ball at the bottom of the rails. Soln.: (a) The section of the rolling ball perpendicular to the rails and parallel to the rails has been shown. Note that ball is in contact with rail at point P only in the second diagram. (And of course at another point Q opposite P which is not visible). Since there is no slipping,
VP = 0 is into the plane o f t h e paper
X
J
But v P = vcm + v P O (velocity of P relative to CM) co JR or, 0 = v cm (») + co(OP) (<) => vcm = ay]RA  d 2 /4. (b) While rolling down the inclined rails, the same relation holds between vcm and co. Since there is no sliding, friction does not perform any work and mechanical energy is conserved. K.E.at b0tt0m — P.E.„top •at mv, 2 co" = mgh *2vc2m = 2 gh 5 R (d2/ 4)
2
2
Current, i = ^ = iu 0 dt E 12 V where < = — = n = 2 A. R 6Q At time t = x, i = 0.37i 0 = 0.74 A. Potential difference across 3 jo.F <•.1 Yc 3(.iF = 5.04 volts. [Note that charge on both the capacitors is same]. Potential difference across 5 Q VR = i x 5 = 0.74 x 5 = 3 , 7 0 y . 2. A uniform solid ball of radius R rolls without slipping between two horizontal rails such that the horizontal distance is d between two contact points of the rails to the ball. (a) Show that Vcm = cWR2  d2 /4. where a> is angular velocity of the ball. (b) Now consider a pair of equally inclined rails with a separation d ( < 2R) and consider a uniform ball starting from rest and descending a vertical distance h while
10 gh 5 + 2/
1  
4R
3. In a park, a toy train moves along a square path of side length a blowing a whistle of frequency 300 Hz. A boy is riding a toy car running on a circular track of radius a/4. The centres of the square and the circle coincide. The car moves with a constant speed of 11 m/s. At the initial moment of the train was at T and the car at C. The train
Faculty of Momentum, 1525, Wright Town, Jabalpur (MP.). Ph.: 07615005358 24
P H Y S I C S FOR Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
moves such that the points O, C and T always lie on the radial line. Determine the maximum and minimum frequency heard by the boy. Speed of sound is 330 m/s. Soln.: Consider the situation when train has moved a distance x. Speed of train, dx d ( a ^ „  = — — tan0 ' dt dtyi a > dQ_ a 2, = —sec = —co sec ( 2 dt 2 dQ where — = C angular speed of — D dt the train = angular speed of car 11 m/s 44 rad/sec. o/4 2 v r = 22 sec 0. The Doppler shifts depends on velocity of train along the line joining C and T. Note that the velocity of car is always perpendicular to this line and hence has no effect on apparent frequency. Component of train's velocity along C'T' is vTr = vysinO = 22 sec 2 0 • sin0 In the position shown minimum frequency will be registered by the boy on the car when vTr is maximum, when sin0 • sec20 is maximum when 0 = 45° [ .• both sin0 and sec© are increasing function when 0 changes from 0° to 90°, and 45° is the maximum possible value of 0 in this case]. Minimum frequency is heard when the train is about to reach the corner. Vyj. = 22 sec 2 45° • sin45° = 22V2 m/s.
/min =300
and K0 and the tangent at A makes an angle 0 with volume axis as shown. Find A(P.„ K) the value of molar specific heat of the gas at constant volume using the given information. Soln.: For a adiabatic process, PV1 = constant ell dP
dV
V
dV
V,
But
)A dP)
>A
yfh y0 = tant y [from the graph] _ K0 tan 0 RPa ~ i'0 tan 0 PQ
d V
yPo = tant Since, Cv =
y
R R  1 ~ J Q tan 0
330
_330 + 22\[2
= 274.2 Hz.
Maximum frequency is heard when the train takes the turn at the corner. In this situation the velocity component of the train is towards the car and is maximum.
./max
~ 300
330 33022V2
= 331.1 Hz.
I 5. A non I conducting cylinder is ; fitted with a 0 Atmosphere 0 i conducting piston of T* P„  cross sectional area A, thickness d and thermal conductivity K. The cylinder i contains a monoatomic gas at atmospheric temperature T0. The piston is open to the atmosphere (atmospheric pressure = Pn) as shown and can slide without friction. The heater fitted inside the cylinder supplies heat at a constant rate of q and is switched on at / = 0. (a) Find the temperature of the gas as function of time. (b) Find the maximum volume of the gas if its initial volume is V0. Soln.: (a) Let the temperature of the gas be T at time t. Rate of heat supply by heater = rate of heat absorbed by gas + rate of heat conduction to atmosphere through piston Heat supplied by heater in time dt = qdt Heat absorbed by gas in time dt = nCPdT where dT = rise in temperature in time dt. Note that process is isobaric as gas expands under constant atmospheric pressure. Heat conducted through piston in time dt .. qdt = nCpdT + KA(TT0) dt
SEPTEMBER '05
4. A gas is undergoing an adiabatic process represented by the graph shown in figure. At a certain stage (shown by point A in the graph) the pressure and volume is P0 74
KA{TT0) dt
PHYSICS FOR YOU
nR dT =
KA(TT0) d
dt
2 dT dt qd  KA(T T0) ~ 5nRd dT Integrating, f, qdKA(TT ) 0 qdKA(T
K U  At Required fraction = — = 5.54x10" = 5.43x10" ——— 1 E 10.2 Note: This fraction is too small. Hence we made almost no error in assuming that almost all energy is possessed by photon.
5nRd 5 nRd
fdt
Tq)
2KAt
qd 1_i^(7_r0) =e qd '
2 KAt qd ] _ e 5nM ~KA (b) Temperature is maximum when ; — <= and > qd T ^niax 0+~KA or, At maximum temperature, rate of heat supplied by heater = rate of heat lost by gas KA T T r = 7; +
To)
Process is isobaric,
Y VN _ Vmax 0 r
Tq
T,n a x
6. An electron in a H atom at rest makes a transition from n = 2 energy state to n = 1 state. Assuming that the recoil energy of Hatom is small, calculate the fraction of energy difference between n = 2 and n = 1 level that goes into atomic recoil energy, [mc2 = 939 MeV, where m is the mass of Hatom]. Soln.: From conservation of momentum, the total momentum before and after photon emission shall be zero.
E
7. A radioactive source emits ^particles with kinetic energy K and has half life T. At an instant the concentration of P particles at a distance r from the source is C. (a) Calculate the number of nuclei in the nuclide at that instant. (b) If a small plate is placed at a distance r0 from the source such that P particles strike normally and come to rest, calculate the pressure experienced by the plate. Mass of P particle is m. Soln.: (a) Let A = activity of source. dr = vdt The number of particles (P) emitted per second = A. Consider an imaginary shell of radius r centred at the source. In a time interval dt, Adt number of Pparticles cross the surface of the shell. If v be the speed of P particles, t h e n ^ ^ particles will be present inside the annular region of thickness dr = vdt. Volume of annular space = 4nr2 vdt Concentration of P particles in this region (i.e. at a distance r) is
C
Adt 4 nr vdt
A = 4nr vC
But A = \N, where N is instantaneous number of radionuclide in the source. A 4nr2vC 4w vCT Ar => N = — = — = In 2 X X (2k 2 Also, K = —mv => V = 2 m N= In 2
•'•
™V~ pc
— (i) [E = energy of photon]
But E = E2 = 10.2 eV. Note that recoil kinetic energy of Hatom is very small due to its large mass and hence the entire energy may be assumed to be possessed by the photon. .. From v (l), mv = 10.2 eV c Recoil of kinetic energy of H is 2 K 2m = 0.5
(10.2)
mc eV.
(0.5)(10.2)2 = 5.54x 10 939 xlO 6
4nr CT In 2 (b) Each Pparticle strikes with a momentum mv and loses all its momentum. Change in momentum of each p particle = mv Pressure on plate = (mv) x number of particles striking per second per unit area A XN = mvx• = mv x 4nrn4roV
24 PHYSICS FOR YOU  SEPTEMBER '05
mvX 4nr02
4ronCT I"2
2K _ 2K = mvC.l /n V /tt
Contd. from page no. 4 Conservation of momentum A ball at rest has no momentum. It is in its state of inertia. According to the law of conservation of momentum, the vector sum of the momentum is constant. That applies to closed systems. When ball A is going to the right along the X axis it has momentum only in that direction. For our purposes let's say that the momentum of ball A is 5 m/s. Ball B is in the path of ball A. Ball A hits ball B and they move off in their respective angles. Momentum is represented by (mass * velocity). If ball A has a mass of 2 kg the momentum is equal to 10 kg m/s. Ball B also has amass of after kg. Dependent on the collision angle of ball A are the before ® angles at which both balls collision B will roll. Let's assume 60 o30" that ball A will go off at Kj 30 degrees and ball B will go off at 60 degrees. After vA they come in contact with one another both balls will have a y and ax component. These components can be figured out with geometry. By solving equations mBuBx + mAuAx = mAvAx + mBvBx mBuBy + mAuBy = mAvAy + mBvBy We can easily calculate the velocities of ball A and B after coming in contact.
2
= ^2mK C , — = 2KC. V fl/ 8. A cylindrical glass rod of radius R and refractive index lies on a horizontal plane mirror. A ray of light is incident on the rod horizontally at a height h above the horizontal diameter of the rod such that h= Rl\f2 as shown in figure. At what distance a second similar rod, parallel to the first, be placed on the mirror, such that the emergent ray from the second rod is in the line with the incident on the first rod? (Take V3=1.75, s i n l 5 ° = 1/4, cosl 5° = 9/10.) Soln.: The path of the ray is shown in figure. From symmetry of the problem, the distance between the rod will be 2d.
OA 
d
"
d
From AAMC the angle of incidence will be R/42= 1 i = 45°. R ~ 41 Using Snell's law at point A : sin / = sin 45° = 7 2 sin r => r = 30° So from AACB, (3 = 120° => a = 15° Since here a * 0 so CD will not be radius (note this step carefully). => BN> R Now, d= QN + NP = CD + NP = i?cosa + 5Many = tfcosa + (BD + R) tany d = tfcosa + (/?sina + #)tany ... (i) Since, sin/' = 4 2 s i n r = sine => / = e = 45° y = 60° So, d = flcosl5 + (7?sinl5 + tf)tan60 = 3 MR So required distance = 2d = 6.18/?.
Collision The key to billiards is to know what is going to happen to the balls after the collisions. This is important not only for making shots and pocketing balls, but also for setting up your next shot by placing the cue ball in line for the next ball. There are always ways of altering the spin of the ball to change where the ball will end up in. In a head on collision, the object ball will continue on the path that the cue ball was on before the collision took place. In angular, two dimensional collisions, the two balls will always have a resulting angle of 90 degrees. A collision is also takes place when you strike the ball with the cue stick. This is called an impluse. The collisions in a game of pool can get very, very complex. For example, when you break, many of the balls are already moving at different speeds and different angles. These are difficult collisions to figure out vectors are needed to sort out that. The velocity of the ball can be determined by using vectors. The formula for this
24 PHYSICS FOR YOU  SEPTEMBER '05
24
SOLVED PAPER
BIHAR C EC E'05 (MAINS
1. A bullet of mass 10 g is fired horizontally into a wooden block of mass 10 kg, which lies on a smooth horizontal table. The bullet is embedded in the block and the block slides with a velocity 0.2 m/s after the impact. Find the muzzle velocity of the bullet fired from the gun and the total mechanical energy lost in the impact. 2. Two trains A and B are travelling in opposite directions along straight parallel lines at the same speed 60 km/h. A light aeroplane crosses above them. A person on the train A sees it cross at right angles, while a person on train B sees it cross at an angle tan _1 (l/2). At what angles does the aeroplane cross the line as seen from the ground? Also calculate the ground speed of the aeroplane. 3. A mass M moves in a vertical circle at the end of a string of length L. Its velocity at the lowest point is v0. Determine the tension in the string when it makes an angle 9 to the downward vertical. 4. A pendulum consists of a uniform rod AB of length L = 0.5 m and mass M = 1 kg. Calculate the period T of the pendulum, if it is suspended from a point C such that AC = Z./4. 5. The effective gravity g eff at a point of the earth's surface is defined by weighing an object and dividing it by its known mass. What is the ratio of the effective gravity between the earth's equator and the poles? (Assume the earth is a sphere of mass ME = 6 x 1024 kg and radius RC = 6400 km). 6. A cube of a material floats in a container of mercury. The coefficient of linear expansion of material is a and the coefficient of volume expansion of mercury is y. As the temperature of the container is increased, find the relation between y and a such that the cube does not go deeper in the container from its original position. 7. What is the radius of the smallest droplet that can form from water of surface tension 0.07 N/m and vapour pressure 2300 N/m 2 ?
24 PHYSICS FOR Y O U  S P E B R '05 ET M E
8. A closed vessel 10 litres in volume contains air under a pressure of 105 N/m 2 . What amount of heat should be imparted to the air to increase the pressure in the vessel five times? 9. A copper plate (thickness d { = 9 mm) and an iron plate (d2 = 3 mm) are put together. The external surface of copper plate is maintained at a constant temperature of 7', = 50°C and that of the iron plate at T2 = 0°C. Find the temperature TX of the constant surface. The area of each plate is much greater than its thickness. Coefficient of thermal conductivity of copper and iron are 390 W/m. deg and 58.7 W/m deg respectively. 10. A long string of mass per unit length 0.2 kg/m is stretched to a tension of 500 N/ Find the speed of transverse waves on the string and the mean power required to maintain a travelling wave of amplitude 10 mm and wavelength 0.5 m. 11. A double slit experiment is shown in the figure. Each slit has width ii'. A thin piece of glass of thickness d, refractive index n, is placed between one of the slits and the screen. The intensity at the central point is measured as a function of thickness 5. For what values of 8 is the intensity at C a minimum? 12. An optical doublet is formed from two lenses A and B made of glass of different refractive indices p.,, respectively. Let A has two convex sides of radius of curvature R and lens B has one flat side and one concave side of radius of curvature R. What is the power of the doublet? For red, yellow and blue wavelengths, the refractive index \iA is 1.50,1.51 and 1.52 respectively whereas H/, is 1.60, 1.62 and 1.64 respectively. What is the difference in power of the doublet for these three wavelengths? 13. Two masses each of m = 1 kg with equal charges O are suspended by light strings of length L = 1 m
from a point. The strings hang at 30° to the vertical. Determine <9. 14. In the 3 Q, VAVcircuit, the ammeter reading R is taken with WA— both switches > 2® open as well as with both 3fl switches closed. WA<12 V The readings are the same in the two cases. Neglect the internal resistance of the battery. Determine the resistance R. 15. Determine the force between two circular loops of wire having the same radius R, and carrying the same currents /, when they are located at a distance L apart, with L>> R, and with their axes parallel and the currents in the same direction. Express the force in terms of the angle 0 between their axes and their line of centres. 16. A classical electron moves in a circular orbit around a proton. Derive a differential equation for the electron energy, taking into account the classical radiation loss. On this basis, calculate the approximate time it takes for a weakly bound electron to fall into the first Bohr orbit. 17. A rectangular loop of conducting wire has area A and N turns. It is free to rotate about an axis of symmetry. A constant magnetic field B is present perpendicular to the axis. Find the induced e.m.f. as a function of time if the loop is rotated at angular velocity co? 18. Use the Bohr model of hydrogen atom to show that when an electron jumps from the level n to level n  1, the frequency of the emitted photon is close to the electron rotation frequency (in Hz) if n is very large. 19. Calculate the speed and the deBroglie wavelength of an oxygen molecule at room temperature. 20. The current gain of a transistor in a common emitter circuit is.49. Calculate its common base current gain. Find the base current when the emitter current is 3 mA? SOLUTIONS 1. m = 0.10 kg, M = 10 kg, m • M u = ?, V = 0.2 m/s Applying the law of conservation of momentum,
24
0.10 x u = 10.10 x 0.2 => u — 20.2 m/s. The muzzle velocity of the bullet = 20.2 m/s Total mechanical energy lost = ^mir
1 2 1
+ m)V
2
=> Loss of energy = ^ x 0 . 1 0 x 2 0 . 2 2  i x l 0 . 1 0 x 0 . 2 2 = 40.2 Joules. 2. Train moves at 60 km/hr to the east. The relative velocity of the plane with respect to A si
r '+V/j2 — 2 v^vfl cost as the plane makes an angle 0 (0 is to be determined). Given (vAvg) is _ tovB L
.'. By the law of the triangle (Pythagores theorem), hypotenuse, vA2  vB2 = R2 •'• vA2  v / = vA2 + vB2  2VAVH cos0 => 2vs2 = 2 v / 4 v / ( c o s 0 => vB = v^cos©. For the train C moving with the same velocity, R' =
2
va+Vc=Va+Vb
~VA +VN +2v / ( v B cos0 R' makes an angle 0 such that v s i n 9 tan+=l= ' Q 2 vR +v A cos© + v^cosO 2v /l sin9 V V vH B vB + B But vA =
COS0
COS0
cos0 = 2
vB
COS0
a
sin 9
2v ii tan9 = 2vB 3.
2
tan0 =
0 = 45°.
The tension of the
string T= —— + mgcosQ But by the law of conservation of mechanical energy, 1 2 1 2mvo =2mv 2 , S 2gh 2gR(\  cos0)
+m h
mgcosQ mg mv2!R
i
•
T = ^{v022gR(lcosQ)} +mgcosQ . R The tension = the component of the weight of m + the centrifugal force mv2/R. :.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
4.
Moment of inertia of the rod about
I2
U4
1/4
the centre of mass = m • — .
12
m = 6.086 x IO"5 2300 = 6 x 102 mm = 0.06 mm. => R=
m
.•.
About the axis of rotation O, I = / c M . + mtP
•CM.
2 2 1 _ 7 mlA +/ [12 16 J 48 This is a physical pendulum.
ml'g where / is the moment of inertia and /' is the distance of the centre of mass from the axis of rotation. T = 2n 7m 48 11 m{l!4)g
The period of oscillation, T = 2N
8. PV= nRT. At constant V, P T Therefore, the rise of temperature is 5 times if pressure is to be increased 5 times. The volume of air enclosed = 10 litres at 105 N/m 2 At NTP, i.e. temperature 273°K, P = 1 x io5 N/m 2 , volume of air = 22.4 litres. 10 Number of moles of air = 22.4 A 0 = (5 x 273  273) K = 1092 K. Heat required = ^ x  ^ x ^ K
= 1218.75/? Joules = 1218.75 x 8.31 = 10128 J. 9. K of copper = 390 W/m deg; K for iron = 58.7 W/m deg. In series, potential 5Q0(. 0°C B difference across Cu + A potential difference Fe Cu H across iron = potential difference across AB Potential difference here is the temperature difference, dOldt is the same. (dQ/dt = heat transferred/unit time for heat transfer and the charge conducted per second for current transfer) dQ_ (500) A = 50 dt (L /K)A) + {L2Ik2A) k _ 9x 10~ 3 m. h ^ x l Q " 3 Kx 390 ' K2 58.7 p +
A,
T, „ 7 I 17 1 T = 2N\—— =N ——. 12 g 3 V 5. g' = gco2rcosX
• co r
2 2
But r = RcosX g'= g  co Rcos X At the equator, it is GM g = l co 2R R GM At the pole, X = 90°, ^cosX = 90° R G = 6.67 x 1 0  U , M = 6 x io 2 4 , R = 6400 km = 6.4 x io 3 m.
271
05 =
24x60x60 '
the angle turned
throu
gh/s
One can substitute and get the values. 6. If V is originally immersed in mercury, V0 the total volume of the body, p, the density of the material ^'PHgg = V0p x g ^ ( 1 + 3aA0) p H g (l  Y A 0 ) g = F 0 (l + 3aA0) p(l  3aA0) x g But V'pHgg = F 0 pg. If (1  yA0) = (1  3aA0) i.e. if y = 3a, the body will not rise or fall with respect to the surface of mercury. 7. Excess of pressure = 2300 N/m 2 =
2x
K2
= 0.074 x 10  3
dQ. 50 = 6 7 4 x l 0 3 cal/s. per unit area dt ' 0.074x10  3 674xlO3=5O_0 9x10" 390 0 = 34.5°C
(one can check with Fe also). 10. Velocity of a transverse wave in a string = ^
2T
as this is a droplet (with
one surface) ° ' 0 7 N/m
where T is the tension and p, = mass per unit length. T = 500 N, n = 0.2 kg/m. .•. v, the speed of the wave = J  ^ y = 50 m/s.
24 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  S P E B R '05 ET M E
Mean power, P = ^pva>2A2 crosssection.
S where S is the area of
mg tanQ =
4tc0
4d2
2 X Given, the amplitude A = 10 x 10~3 m, X = 0.5 m
...
p • S = p.
1 4 it2 v 2 v P^xuxvx4"
A2
7
d = I sin30° q2 = 47t80 x 4 x psin 2 d mgtand
»xl0y
L4xUrxiox4=,
n9 4 *
'73
30'
7cos8 >F
^ = 1X0.2X50X 2 = 197 watts.
47i2x2500x(10X103)2
0.5
2
= 10"8
9^3
mgcosd
q = 0.25 x IO"4 = 25 xC each. 14. When S] and S2 are open, the total resistance in the circuit is 8 Q.
3a V/A— 1.5 A
D
11. At C, if there is no plate, one gets maximum intensity A because the path difference is zero. If the path difference is X/2, then g one gets minimum. If a plate of thickness t is inserted, the equivalent path is BCt+ \it i.e. BC. — /(1 H). If t or d the the thickness is such that / (1  p.) = X/2, one gets a dark spot at C.
hMWr
h
R
J? "
4 $ 2 £2
11
Tr^'vK.
(""I
+ 1
V
(Mjg ~ 1)
Therefore the power of the double lens  1
(,,
n 2 = 1.60
Red : \kA = 1.50,
Yellow : \iA = 1.51, \x.B = 1.62 0.40 R Blue : \La = 152, (xs = 1.64
0
.51X2_M2
3Q This is also the VAVcurrent in A 12 V when S, and S2 are closed. Taking the loop ABCD, the equivalent resistance 3 R n. IS 3+R 12 • = i2 +1.5 A 3R 3+ 3+R But in the loop ABCD, 3 x 1.5 = R x i2 12 2R 2 3 + 3R 3+R 12(3 + R) 9 + 3 R 3(3 + R) 9 + 6R 2R 2R 4 _ = J _ R = 4.5 Q 9 + 6R 2R 3R 9 4 One can verify that I> + R=~5~ O 9 24 Total resistance = j + ^ = ^ • 12x5 = 2.5 A . 24 .'. Current i2 = 1 A. [4.5 x l = 3 x 1.5 in the loop ABCD verified] Current 15. When two circular coils are carrying current in the same direction, they are equal to two magnetic dipoles having the north poles on the right hand side for both. They will be attracted because the A7pole of P is facing the south pole of Q. When the distance is very large composed to the radius, the field due to P at a distance
22 PHYSICS FOR YOU  OCTOBER '05
R
R
:
. 5 2 x 2 _ M l : 0.40 R R R The powers of the combination are the same for all the three colours.
0
13. T cos0 = mg => T = 7'sin 9 = 24 mg cos 9
1 4T o 78
q (2d)
L is dt When 0 = 90°, i.e. (at = 90°, the value is maximum. The coil is at that instant in the plane of the field. E0 = BAN(0 When it is perpendicular, < is maximum, dfy/dt = 0. > j E = £0sinco/, where E0 = BANu>. 18. According to Bohr's correspondence principle, for large quantum numbers, the classical result will be the same as those given by the quantum theory. ho = £„£„_, E
o = Ho 271 ,2
Mo i 2nR 2nR ...(L » R) 471 (L2+R2)3/2 L3 A s t h e m a g n e t ± : m c m a i t o f c a i l g = i nR2. :. the force of attraction = BM cosG, as cos0 = 1 here,
.5=3..,.
(i0 . 2(%R2) . a2 Force of attraction =  — ' mR 471
.ifo. 471 S
i22\nR2)2
•+N
2n2mk2ei 2ti mk e c»ir
2 2 A
[ 2
2n
4
1
( i  i
1 r
—r where S  area oi eadh coil.
u =
If the axes are making an angle Q. Then is BM cos0. 16. As a varying electric and magnetic field alone can give a wave, an electron which is at rest or moving with a constant velocity will not be able to emit radiation. An accelerated electron radiates energy according to Maxwell's theory. The energy emitted by an electron per second is F • ds = qEV
1
2
[ifn — (nX) and 2 « » 1 ] 4n2mk2eA
As
n2
2
n (n1)
2
=>
v> = 
—— = u , the classical orbital frequency.
27t r 2tzkr V= ,21.2 vi h
nh
4n2mke2
1 '2tt 47T2WFE2 „ h
2 2
Energy emitted by a wave —e 0 c£ 0
per second/unit
v 2nr
2nke nh
4712mk2e4 h\? '
area. If an electron moving in a circular orbit round the proton has an acceleration towards the centre due to centripetal force, a force is acting on the electron causing acceleration will cause radiation energy loss. As energy is continuously lost while making rotation. There is no equality of the centripetal force of attraction and the decreasing centrifugal force of mofr. The attraction towards the nucleus, the centripetal force goes on increasing and till some angular momentum is left, it will continue to turn but coming nearer and nearer the nucleus and finally it falls on the nucleus. 17. Let the normal to the loop be at an angle 0 to the magnetic field. The flux through the coil = BANcosQ where B is the magnetic induction, A is the area of loop and N = number of turns of the coil. i.e. <> = BANcosatt.
^induced 24
19. The average velocity of an oxygen molecule at room temperature is 3x1.38x10  2 3 32x1.66x10 ,27
6.6x10 ^de Broglie
27
= 4.8x10 m / s
34
mv 3 2 x l . 6 6 x l 0 x4.8xl02 10 m = 0.25 A. = 0.25 x 10"
20. Current gain of the common emitter circuit = ^ = 49 = 3 in But
IC + IB = IE
,
•• p + l
k r h IB(IC + IB)
_lc lE
Ic . . (3 49 — = common base 6 gain, a = = — IE P + l 50 49 49 But / c, , =  • / b = — x 3 m A = 2.94mA 50 50 = 3  2.94 mA = 0.06 mA.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
SOLVED PROBLEMS
Practice Question for PMT
1. If x  anbmcp > y= a"b"
cP
,
bn,eP.
(a) The error in the in the determination of jc = that in y > error in z (b) The error in z > error in y > error in x (c) Error in x = error in y > error in z. (d) None. 2. Mark the wrong statement/statements. (a) For the same quantities such as potential or kinetic energy of a mass, the dimensions are the same (b) If the dimensions are the same, they denote the same physical quantity (c) The dimensions of the same quantity need not be the same (d) None. If the initial velocity is zero and the acceleration of a body is 3 t, the distance travelled in 5 seconds is given by (a) 187.5 m (b) 62.5 m (c) 125 m (d) None. When a body is falling down freely from a height, the relation between distance and time is given by (a) straight line with increasing time (b) It has the shape of a circle (c) It is a parabola with decreasing curve and then remains constant (d) It is a parabola with increasing curve and then remains constant. A projectile is fired on a horizontal ground at an angle of 45° with an initial velocity of 40^2 m/s . (a) The horizontal distance travelled by the projectite in Is is half of that travelled in 2s and the horizontal distance travelled in 6s is half of that travelled in 12s. (b) The horizontal distance travelled in 6s is less than the distance travelled in 4s (c) The horizontal distance travelled in 8 s = the horizontal distance travelled in 16 s (d) None.
24 PHYSICS FOR Y O U  S P E B R '05 ET M E
When a body is falling freely from a height, its maximum potential energy = its maximum kinetic energy. When a satellite is turning round the earth in an orbit of radius r, the magnitude of (a) The potential energy of the satellite = kinetic energy of the satellite (b) The potential is double the kinetic energy (c) The kinetic energy is double the potential energy (d) None. A man is travelling horizontally at 3 m/s to the east and the rain drops are falling vertically at 4 m/s. At what angle should he hold the umbrella ? (a) At an angle 9 to the vertical in the northwest direction where 9 = sin" — (b) Vertically (c) At 9 to the vertical where 9 = sin1— in the 5 northeast direction • 1 4 (d) At an angle 9 = sin — to the vertical Two vectors A and B are given by A = {2i3j + 2k) and B = (4l6j+ angle between 2 a n d B ' s g i v e n by (a) 90° (b) 45° (c) 0° (d) None. When a particle of mass m is making a vertical rotation with an angular velocity co, at the maximum height, if the tension is T, then
2 because (a) T = mg + mw r mg is acting dounwards, the centripetal force is mcoV
3.
4.
4k) , the
5.
(b) T = mgm<s>~r as mufr is the centrifugal force (c) T = mg as T is the centripetal force (d) T = nm2rmg as msrR is acting outward (centrifugal force) and T+ mg is acting towards the centre
9
2
10.
If two spherical shells A and B of masses 2 kg and 5 kg and radii 0.1m and 0.3 m respectively, roll down the inclined plane starting from rest, (a) The heavier mass will roll down the inclined plane faster and has an acceleration g sinO (b) The lighter one will roll faster with an acceleration g sin9 Both will reach the end with the same velocity (c) and their accelerations will be more than g sinG (d) Both will reach at the same time and their acceleration will be less than g sind.
(a) air flows from B to A (b) air flows from A to B (c) there is steady condition. No air will flow from A to B or B to A (d) None. 15. The position of the hole for H„ getting the maximum range of efflux (a) should be at the bottom (c) at the top (b) at H0/2 (d) the range attained will only depend on the total quantity of water in the tank and not the position of the hole. 16. If a manometer is made of two narrow tubes A and B of radii r, and r2 and T is the surface tension of a liquid of density 10J kg/m3, the liquid level in A will be (a) equal to B (b) lower than B (c) higher than B (d) cannot say. 17.
11.
Moment of inertia about EF, (a) 7, + Md22 (b) / as EF is outside the body Md„2 + 2Mdld1 =A 12. The work done by a body of mass m moving with uniform acceleration a towards the centre, in rotating through n degrees is (a) manr (b) zero (c) ma2r (d) None. (d) 13. A block is projected up an inclined plane with a velocity v. If there is friction between the block and the inclined plane, the minimum velocity v is (a) yj2gsmQh (b) p\xk (c) (d) gh cotO + 2gh
y]2\ikghcotB
(c) 72 = 7I
m j ;
K, vt , . la. >2%
v„ vc
.
AD, BC are adiabatics. The ratio of volumes (b) V ;
v
d
~
_
v
h
vc
W
(0
v
d
(d) None.
18. The electric field due to a semicircular ring of charges at the centre is E4tc07I
yj2gh2VikghcoxQ
14. A and B are soap bubbles formed by filling air. If the radius of A is smaller than B, if these two bubbles are now connected to each other, 64
&
Therefore the electric field at the centre of a circular ring is 4A, ... 2X (b) 4ns0r (c) zero (d) None. 19. The magnetic field at the centre of a semicircular
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  OCTOBER '05
wire of radius a carrying current is magnetic field at the centre of the coil is (a) (c)
W
. The
24.
(d) Electric dipoles exist but magnets are monopoles The ratio of the magnetic moment to the angular momentum of an electron orbiting in the hydrogen atom according to classical physics, is given by (a) v ' (c) ^ m e mc
2a Ho' 1
47IE0
2
(b) zero (d) None.
^
20. Two metal spheres A and B of radius 5 cms and 20 cms are kept at a large distance and connected by a long wire. It the charges on A and B are 5pe + and 10pe + , charges flow (a) from A to B (b) from higher to lower charges because B is having a higher charge (c) from lower charge to higher charge (d) from a charge having a higher potential energy to the one having lower potential energy.
21. 2xF 4n F 2xF 2M F 2\xF 2\iF D
A
(d) None.
25. Bohr's assumption that the angular momentum of the electron in H atom is nh (a) quantisation of energy (b) quantisation of the de Broglie wave similar to waves on a sonometer wire of open tube (c) similar to waves in a closed tube (d) quantisation of compton wave length. 26. Find the relation between torque and (i) angular accelration and (ii) angular momentum 27. Two rods of length I and mass m are in L shape. Find the moment of inertia about an axis passing through the point of joining and perpendicular to the plane of Lsection I, m
lb
The total capacitance is (a) 4 \ i F (b) 2 \iF (c) \\iF (d) 0 . 5 M . F
/, m
22.
28. How does resistance vary in semiconductors with temperature. (a) increases (b) decreases (c) no rlation etc. 29. Find the relation between A,, X2 and A,
0 ) x3 = x
l
+ x
2
(b)  L + _ L = X
Xi A,) AT
All resistances have equal values, 1Q each. The current in the circuit is (a) 6 A (b) 9 A (c) 4 A (d) 3 A 23. The difference between the electrical field lines due to a charge and those due to a magnet are (a) The magnetic fied lines start from a north pole and end in south poles. The lines are closed (b) The magnetic field lines start from a south pole and end in north pole (c) Magnets are always dipoles, electric charges can exist as isolated charges 66
(c) none. 30.
(a) find the phase difference between the currents in L, and Rt (b) and the phase difference between the potential differences across C and R,
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  OCTOBER '05
31. If two conductors of infinite lengh carry the same current in the same direction. What is the magnetic field at P due to A and B 32. If the kinetic energy of photons produced from a metal by irradiating the metal with 4000 A° radiation was
p B I 1.6 eV, the kinetic energy of photons produced by 6000 A 0 will be (a) 2.4 eV (b) 1.6 eV (c) 1.0 eV (d) 0.6 eV 33. The ground state energy of the electron in the hydrogen atom is  13.6 eV The ionization energy of H atom is (a)  13.6 eV (b) 13.6 eV (c) depends on the number of the orbit (d) j
(b) Torque and work done have the same dimensions t = r x F ; W = r. F. But they are different quantities statement is false. (c) This is surprisingly true because if one takes work done, power or energy in mechanics, and the same thing in electricity, the current and charge have no analogue in mechanics. Their dimensions are different although both are in different forms of energy and one can be converted into the other 3. (b) a = dx. >dv = adt dt' v = }3 tdt = 3 r = 62.5m
,ds_. v=4=> ds = vdt => S = f \t2dt = j • = • f  = 2 2 3 2 2 dt' (d) : w = 0; s = ±gt2
34. What is the maximum wavelength that can be detected by a semiconductor photo detector if the band gap of the semiconductor Eg = 0.75 eV ? (given he = 12400 eV A°) (a) 165.3 (b) 1653 A° (c) 16530 A° (d) 165.3 nm 35. In an Xray tube (copper target), if the excitation energy of the K level is 9.5 KeV, is it possible to have Xrays and if so what is the wave length, if one applies a potential of 8 KeV ? SOLUTIONS 1 (d) : x = a"b c'' Inx = n\na+m\nb + p\nc differentiating, — = n— + m—+p— x a . b c .da Error % = — = x dc + da + a b c y
m
This is a parabola with increasing distance but it remains constant when it reaches the ground. 5. (c) : The time taken by the projectile to reach the maximum height (at which its final vertical component is zero) is given by, 0 = 40>/2 • sin 45°  gt =>40 = 10x t =>t = 4s The time of flight is 8s. After 8 seconds, the projectile cannot travel as it has already hit the ground. 6. (b): The magnitude of the potential energy = The kinetic energy of the satellite = ^ QMlH 1. (c): The relative velocity of the rain with respect to the man = velocity of the rain w.r.t. the inertial frame  velocity of the man w.r.t. the inertial frame. 6 = s i n  1 1 in the NE direction.
x
GMm
4km/w
db
p— c
3km/w vm_ incretial
fc
da +
=
T
=
db + dz_ z
dc
8. (c) : The two vectors are parallel. Therefore the angle between them is 0°. AB* 0 but Ax. B will be zero. i AxB=2 j 3 4  6 k 2 =i(0)7(0)+*(0) = 0 4
Errors 1 2. (b) : (a) mgh and m v True.
dc.= dy x y
have the same dimensions.
^ • 5 = 8 + 18 + 8 = +34.
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  S P E B R '05 ET M E
9. (d) : T + mg = mar :. T = m<s?r  mg mafr is the centrifugal force and T + mg is the centripetal force acting towards the centre. 10. (d) : The K.E. of the rolling body at B. P.E. at A. =>mgh = ^m(\ +
v2 = 2 gh 2
16. The excess pressure h pgh = 2 T Where r =
2T
hr is a constant. R
COS0
where© is contact
angle, R is the radius of the tube. h— — cos 0 as h R is a constant,
^)b
2
(i\ +
k2lr2)
But v2 a2 = 2as gh (1 + kz/rz)s
It is independent of mass and the radius and less than gsinO. (M. I. of a hollow sphare
= 2 mr 2
d) + 4
•
5
~J )•
larger the radius, smaller the height of the miniscus therefore level on the left hand side will be less and on right hand side will be more. 17. (b) : The ratio of volumes P V x = constant for adiabatic curves PV = \xRT • j f/Yi _ c o n s t a n t WR T2V]1 r2vr V,, K.
y X v
11. (d): /, = Icm + M d\ where d is the distance of the centre of mass. Icm = IxMd2 •• h = Ic.m+M(dl
2 2 +
d2)2
18. (c): The electric fields are in the same plane, in opposite direction. They cancel each other. 19. (a) :
5
= / ,  Md + Md + Md2 + 2 Mdxd2 I2 = IX+M d2 +2 Mdxd212. (b) : For rotation, the work done is Torque x 0. As the motion is of uniform angular velocity, there is no acceleration and therefore no torque. No work is done. 13. v2u2=2as .'. u
2
Hoi a2 2fl ' The magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane containing the current element and radius. They add to each other. = 4jt 20. (a) : The potential of the charge
A = I fl1
;
v= 0
=2as
u^ =  2 ( g s i n 0 + p y t gcos0)5' =2(gsin0^
+
s= h
H S
sin 9 sinO
4iten
rx
4 7tE0
5xlQ" 6 c 0.05
p,gcos0^)
= (2gA + 2n t gAcot9). AT 14. Excess of pressure inside the film =
As RA <RB,PT A>PR B .
The potential of the charge at B = Q 1 1 10x10" 4KEn 0.20 47tso •o r ' Charges flow from a higher to a lower potential therefore charges flow form A to B till their potentials become equal. 21. (a) :
2\iF
Air will flow from A to B. But as B is already large, it will grow further reducing the pressure inside, till A collapses. 15. The range is maximum when h = fj h below or above the height same. , the range will be the . At a height
4\xF
2\iF
2 nf
2\i.F
C
ih 2hF
D
This is the same as one given below. This is equivalent to a wheatstone's bridge. Therefore the capacitors connected between B and C the total
PHYSICS FOR YOU  OCTOBER '05
22
capacitances are l p F in the series from ABD and l p F in ACD. They are in parallel. Therefore the total capacitance is 2 p F . 22. (a) : 3
1.
2 \xF
T
2 uF 4n •Z) 2nf
"'^deBroglie ~
2 7 t r
2 nF
as X = — . Just as one gets a finite number of waves mv ° in a given string, or gets n • X , 2~k, 3X for open tubes, 2nr =n\ie Broglje . 26. Torque replaces force in circular motion. Just as (mv) = rate of change of momentum, torque x = dt rate of change of angular momentum. Mass in translaton is replaced by the moment of inertia in circular motion. Mass x a = force, is replaced by 7 x a = x where a is the angular acceleration. Angular momentum is /. co just as linear momentum is m.v. a mv I = moment of momentum or angular x momentum = rxmv = mrar = mr2a>. Rate of change of angular momentum dd) •• mr2 a r2 dt = /ct co = angular velocity, /co = Angular momentum. ^^ch
= rate
F=
is the axis of symmetry 1 and 2; 3, 4, 5; 6, 7 have the same potentials. This is equivalent to A rWIW—i1_2v m — ' LvwwvJ  W W r —
R/2 rWM— 3,4,5 r^WAW, WAWAMAAA6
' • [WWW— fi I—wmfc—I WvWrJ?/,
7
r
MMWV 1
R/A
"total
•
=
lfi! each
3R
23. (a, c) : Electric dipoles also exist. But any magnet has always a north and a south pole. Let us consider the magnetic moment of a very thin wire carrying current in the anticlock wise direction. This face is equivalent to the north pole. If one holds the paper against light, one can see that the current flows in the clockwise direction on the other side. This is equivalent to a south pole as can be verified from the direction of B. 24. (b) : The angular momentum of the electron is 1 /co = mr CO. The magnetic moment of the orbiting electron
2 = i A=e v nr" = enr 2 • co Ji 2t:
change of angular momentum = I a .
A
27. For rod A, the value of I about C= ml
I, m C
For rod B, the value of I about C=
ml1
M. I. of A and B about C
2mll
L
271
e mr2  co 2m •
28. (a): As the temperature of a semiconductor increases, electrons in the valence band acquire more energy and they have a probability crossing the potential barrier and start a current. Therefore the temperature decreases the resistance of the semiconductor. he . he
.
3
25. (b) : For Bohr orbits, angular momentum /co = nh . mr2 • — = — => mv. 2nr = nh r 2n nh = 2nr
_
he
^1+^2 _ 1
X{k2
24 PHYSICS F O R YOU  S P E B R '05 ET M E
30. (a): Potential difference across L and R are the same, as they are in parallel circuit. The current in the resistance is in phase with the potential difference but current in L lags by nil. Hence the phase difference between the currents in R and L =  n / 2 . (b) The current is the same as C and R are in series. VR2 and IR2 are in phase for R2 but Ic leads V(, by %!2Therefore the phase difference between the potential differences across C and R is + 90°. 31. If the conductors have infinite length, the mag. hield at P = that due to B along the current direction and that due to A at P, l r to the p.... direction at the end.
•
3 . 1 ^ = ^ 0 + 1 . 6 ey W0 = 1.5eV If X2 =6000A° is used, hv2 = 12400eVA° = 2 . 0 6 6 6000.4° = 2AeV. .. K.E. of the photo electrons = 2.1  1.5 = 0.6 eV. 33. The ionisation energy is the energy needed to remove the electron from the groundstate to infinity. In the case of the H atom, =  13.6 eV. Ionisation energy =EXEx= 0  (  1 3 . 6 e F ) = 13.6eV • 34. The maximum wavelength that can be detected if the gap energy is Eg is A. = r. j.
max =
j00
R
 n +
Ho
7
12400eVA° = 16530^°. 0.75eV
32. (d) : hv = heIX 12400eFA° • 3.\eV 4000 A° K. E. of the electrons =1.6 eV hv = Wu + K.E. of the electrons (Einstein's equation for photo electricity) hv, of 4000 A° radiation
35. One cannot get A^series Xrays if the applied voltage is less than the K energy level i.e. 9.5 KeV.. However, even at lower applied potentials, one can get some other series and a continuous spectrum or Bremsstrahlung. The short wavelength limit is given by he = 12400eVA°  = 1.554° v 8000
W l  f c G 
CBSEPMT/AIIMS/AFMC & Other PMT Exams
CBSEPMT
MAINS e x p t O R € : R :f " / m j™
Most Powerful Books for
CAK TE P E M£ C l TSS RC H R EHA ET
CAPSULE
1
Rs.200
23
Assertion & Reason
Assertion & Reason
\ Zoology*^,
Botany A
H u m a n
For Competitive Exams.
Bioloj
Send a demand Draft in favour of 'MTG Books' payable at Delhi. Add Rs.35 for postage/handling charge if ordering a single book. PostageB331on order of more than one book.
How to order
9nn
• tWi, 4\v •,),«». • 73
&&
M T G
BOOKS
503, Taj Apt., Ring Road, Near Safdarjung Hospital, New Delhi  29. Tel.: 26194317, 26191601
22
PHYSICS FOR Y O U  OCTOBER '05
'J

tiy
H
FDR
(For Q.NO. 1 to 40) Only one option is correct and there will be negative marking in these PASSAGE : 1 (Read the following passage and answer the questions number 1 to 5. They have only one correct option).
T h e C i l i a r
questions.
muscles of eye control the curvature of the lens in the eye and hence can alter the effective focal length of the system. When the muscles are fully relaxed, the focal length is maximum. When the muscles are strained the curvature of lens increases (that means radius of curvature decreases) and focal length decreases. For a clear vision the image must be on retina. The image distance is therefore fixed for clear vision and it equals the distance of retina from eyelens. It is about 2.5 cm for a grownup person. A person can theoretically have clear vision of objects situated at any large distance from the eye. The smallest distance at which a person can clearly see is related to minimum possible focal length. The ciliary muscles are most strained in this position. For an average grownup person minimum distance of object should be around 25 cm. A person suffering for eye defects uses spectacles (eye glass). The function of lens of spectacles is to form the image of the objects within the range in which person can see clearly. The image of the spectaclelens becomes object for eyelens and whose image is formed on retina. The number of spectaclelens used for the remedy of eye defect is decided by the power of the lens required and the number of spectaclelens is equal to the numerical value of the power of lens with sign. For example power of lens required is +3 D (converging lens of focal length 100/3 cm) then number of lens will be +3.
y
eye lens
For all the calculations required you can use the lens formula and lens maker's formula. Assume that the eye lens is equiconvex lens. Neglect the distance between eye lens and the spectacle lens. 1. is Minimum focal length of eye lens of a normal person 25 (b) 2.5 cm (c) — cm 25 (d) — cm.
(a) 25 cm 2. is
Maximum focal length of eye lens of normal person (b) 2.5 cm (c) 25 cm (d) 25 11
(a) 25 cm
3. A nearsighted man can clearly see object only upto a distance of 100 cm and not beyond this. The number of the spectacles lens necessary for the remedy of this defect will be (a) +1 (b)  1 (c) + 3 (d)  3 4. A farsighted man cannot see object clearly unless they are at least 100 cm from his eyes. The number of the spectacles lens that will make his range of clear vision equal to an average grown up person (a) +1 (b)  ' l (c) + 3 (d)  3 5. A person who can see objects clearly from distance 10 cm to < > then we can say that the person is x, (a) normal sighted person (b) nearsighted person (c) farsighted person (d) a person with exceptional eyes having no eye defect PASSAGE : 2 (Read the following passage and answer the questions number 6 to 10. They have only one correct option) The concept of work in thermodynamics is borrowed from mechanics. For finite distance moved by the piston from initial position A to final position B. The work
Contributed by Deptt. of Physics, Resonance, Kota (Rajasthan)
24 PHYSICS FOR YOU  SPE BR '05 ETME
done by the gas is given by
P = pressure of gas, dV = change in volume In PV diagram work will be area under the curve. A few comments regarding this integral operator needs to be made. First along the path taken in going from A to B, an equation of state ( i.e. P =f (V) ) may or may not exist. One. can express P as a function of V only if the external conditions are changed in such a way that at every point on the path the system can be regarded as an equilibrium state and Such a transformation is called a quasistatic transformation. If the transformation is such that when the sequence of the changes in external conditions are reversed, the system retraces its path from Bio A. This transformation is called reversible. All reversible transformations are quasistatic but all quasistatic processes need not be reversible. If the transformation from A to B is not reversible, the transition from A to B cannot be represented by curves on PFdiagram. Such transitions are represented by broken lines joining A and B. The spontaneous processes of nature are irreversible. Several example can be cited. The free expansion of a gas is irreversible. The combustion reaction of a mixture of petrol and air ignited by a spark cannot be reversed. Free expansion (expansion of gas against vaccum) differs from all other process.In the case of free expansion work done by the gas is zero although it cannot be calculated by PV diagram. Directions for Q. 6 to 10 \ If the given statement is true, then fill bubble for (a) and if given statement is false fill the bubble for (b). 6. All reversible processes are not quasistatic but all quasistatic processes are reversible. 7. In case of free expansion of gas work done by the gas can not be calculated by A'Fdiagram because free expansion cannot take place reversibally. 8. For non zero pressure of the gas there will be non zero work whenever there will be non zero volume changes of the gas. 9. Total work done by the gas depends upon intermediate process.
24
10. For volume changes from K, to VQ work done by gas in process 1 will be greater than in process 2. PASSAGE : 3 (Read the following passage and answer the questions number 11 to 15. They have only one correct option) Charges are concentrated exclusively on the external surface of a conductor. Therefore neither the material of the conductor nor its mass are of any importance for its capacitance. Capacitance depends on the shape and surface area of the conductor. Since a conductor is liable to be electrified by induction, its capacitance is influenced by other conductors in its vicinity and by the medium they are in. To fulfil its function the capacitor must be able to store accumulated charges and energy for appreciable time to obtain a definite capacitance one can conveniently take two conductors and arrange them as close to each other as possible and place a dielectric between them. The dielectric between the conductors plays two fold role. Firstly, it increases the capacitance and secondly prevents the neutralization of the charges, that is it prevents them from jumping from one conductor to the other. For this reason electrical breakdown strength (The maximum electrical field which a dielectric can withstand, also called dielectric strength of dielectric) should be high. In order to keep the capacitance constant and independent of surrounding bodies the entire electric field should be contained between the plates. For this reason the distance between the plates should be small as compared to their linear dimensions. To protect the capacitor from external influences it is housed in a shell. Mathematically we can relate q = CFand for a parallel plate capacitor fully filled with a dielectric C = According to paragraph answer. 11. (a) (b) (c) (d)
£ £
d
Capacitance does not depend on area of plates separation between plates surrounding bodies potential difference across plates
12. Two plates of a capacitor kept on insulating stand are fully charged. Now the ebonite plate between the
PHYSICS F O R YOU  SPE BR ET M E '05
capacitor plates is removed then the capacitance of capacitor will (a) increase (b) decrease (c) remains same (d) may increase or decrease 13. A table for parallel plate capacitors along with the properties of dielectrics used in these is given. Choose the most appropriate capacitor. (Assuming same potential difference across each capacitor)
Capacitor Dielectric Constant A B C D 2.8 3.3 2.2 4.4 Dielectric Distance between strength (VIM) plates (m) 3 6 7 1 x x x x 10 7 10 7 10 7 10 7 0.01 m 0.01 0.01 0.01 Area of plates (m 2 ) 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.125
of 10 A and having resistance of 0.1 Q. The resistance of additional shunt must be (a) 0.1 Q (b) 1/9 Q. (c) 1/100 Q (d) none of these 19. The equivalent resistance between the points A and B is (a) 5R/9 (b) 2R/3 (c) R
R AWv
^VWv
R
B
(d) none of these.
41
(a) A
(b) B
(c) C
(d) D
14. As the distance between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor is decreased (a) chances of electrical break down will increase if potential difference between the plates is kept constant. (b) chances of electrical break down will decrease if potential difference between the plates is kept constant. (c) chances of electrical break down will increase if charge on the plates is kept constant. (d) chances of electrical break down will decrease if charge on the plates is kept constant.
20. In the given circuit > Rr Find which of the following VvWstatement is correct. R2 —ww(a) potential difference across i?, is high (b) current through R, is E greater than in R, (c) power consumed in R} is greater than in R2 (d) none of these 21. Two particles are moving along a straight line as shown. The velocity of approach between A and B is (a) V A +V B (c) VA  VB 22. In the following circuit diagram, the current flowing through resistor of 1/4 Q is (a) 1 A (b) 60 A (c) 30 A (b)
•0 MD
WAVJ
15. All linear dimensions are doubled then the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor will (a) remain unchanged (b) become double (c) increase by eight times (d) increases by four times 16. A wire of resistance R is cut into two equal parts. Now one part is stretched to double the length. Then the resistance of the stretched wire will be (a) R (b) 2R (c) 4R (d) R/2 17. A bulb rated 200 W, 200 V is used at 100 V. Then the number of electrons passed through bulb in one second is (a) 3.125 x 1017 (b) zero (c) 3.125 x 101S (d) 6.25 x 1018 18. Currents upto 100 A are to be measured with the help of an ammeter designed for a maximum current
1/4 Q.
1 £2 (d) none of these
23. A 50 Amperehour battery can supply a current of 50 A for 1 hour, 25 A for 2 hour and so on. Then the total energy stored in the 12 V50 Amperehour battery is (a) 600 J (b) 2.16 x io 6 J (c) depends on for how much time it is used (d) 3.6 x io 4 J 24. For a prism kept in air it is found that for an angle of incidence 60°, the angle of refraction A, angle of deviation 8 and angle of emergence 'e' become equal. Then the refractive index of the prism is (a) 1.73 (b) 1.15 (c) 1.5 (d) 1.33
24 PHYSICS FOR Y O U  S P E B R '05 ET M E
25. PT diagram is shown below then choose the corresponding VT diagram
D
P
D
+T (a)
+T
28. In the following arrangement the system is initially at rest. The platform is now released. Assuming the pulleys and string to be massless and smooth, the acceleration of block C will be (a) zero 2 (b) 2.5 m/s 2 (c) 10/7 m/s 2 (d) 5/7 m/s . 29. Circuit for the WvVmeasurement of resistance by potentiometer is R shown. The MVv—WArgalvanometer is first connected at points  m and zero deflection is observed at length PJ = 10 cm. In second case it is connect at point C and zero deflection is observed at a length 30 cm from P. Then the unknown resistance Xis (a) 2R (b) R/2 (c) R/3 (d) 3R 30. A mango tree is at the bank of a river and one of the branch of tree extends over the river. A tortoise lives in river. A mango falls just above the tortoise. The acceleration of the mango falling from tree appearing to the tortoise is (Refractive index of water is 4/3 and the tortoise is stationary) (b) 3g/4 (a) g (c) 4g/3 (d) none of these
(b)
D
(c)
+T
(d)
26. Choose the correct ray diagram of an equi convex lens which is cut as shown.
— * — *
(c)
— >
H
27. Ram can throw a ball on a horizontal surface upto a maximum distance of 50 m. The maximum height upto which he can throw the ball is (a) 50 m (b) 25 m (c) 12.5 m (d) 100 m
24 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  S P E B R '05 ET M E
31. Two conducting movable smooth pistons A  B = = c are kept inside a non S S S S conducting, adiabatic P $ IP $ p container with initial > positions as shown. Gas < is present in the three K U3 1/3 parts A, B & C having initial pressures as shown. Now the pistons are released. Then the final equilibrium position length of part A will be (a) Z./8 (b) LIA (c) LI6 (d) 1/5. 32. Two aeroplanes fly from their respective position A and B starting at the same time and reach the point
C sfirraUaneously when wirrfr was not +E  Wowing. On a windy day they head towards C but both reach the point D simultaneously in the same time which they took to reach C. Then the wind is blowing in (a) northeast direction (b) northwest direction (c) direction making an angle 0 < 9 < 90 with north towards west, (d) north direction 33. In the I figure shown a 11117)11/ parallel plate d / 2 „K 2 v //mint capacitor has a dielectric of P width d/2 and dielectric constant K = 2. The other dimensions of the dielectric are same as that of the plates. The plates Px and P2 of the capacitor have area A each. The energy of the capacitor is (a) w
(C)
a resistor and a battery. The charging of the capacitor starts at t = 0. The rate at which energy in capacitor is stored (a) first increases then decreases (b) first decreases then increases (c) remains constant (d) continuously decreases 37. In the figure shown the equivalent capacitance between A and B is (a) 3.75 F (b) 2 F (c) 21 F (d) 16 F
5F
4F
2F
38. 12 gm He and 4 gm H2 is filled in a container of volume 20 litre maintained at temperature 300 K. The pressure of the mixture is nearly (a) 3 atm (b) 5 atm (c) 6.25 atm (d) 12.5 atm 39. A diatomic ideal gas undergoes a thermodynamic change according to the PV diagram shown in the figure. The total heat given of the gas is nearly (a) 2.5 P0V0 (b) 1.4 P0V0 (c) 3.9 P0V0
2 P,
v
isothermal
r C
A:
^ 3d 3 eaA V2 2 " V
•(b)
2e0AV 2 e0AV2 3d 2MF
2K
+V
(d)
(d) 1.1 P0V0
34. In the figure a capacitor of capacitance 2 p,F is connected to a cell of emf 20 volt. The plates of the capacitor are drawn apart slowly to double the distance between them. The' work done by the external agent on the plates is (a)  200 ^J (b) 200 ^J (c) 400 (xJ
40. Which of the following will have maximum total kinetic energy at temperature 300 K? (a) l k g , H2 (b) l k g , He (c) ^ kg H2 + ^ kg He (d) ^kgH 2 + ^ k g H e
2 0 volt
(d)  400 nJ
(One or More than one may be correct. No negative marking) For Q. No. 41 to 55. 41. An ideal gas can be expanded from an initial state to a certain volume through two different processes (i) PV? = constant and ( i i ) P = K V 2 where K is a positive constant. Then (a) final temperature in (i) will be greater then in (ii) (b) final temperature in (ii) will be greater then in (i) (c) total heat given to the gas in (i) case is greater than in (ii) (d) total heat given to the gas in (ii) case is greater than in (i) 42. Two identical blocks A and B are placed on two
24 P H Y S I C S FOR Y O U  SPE BR ET M E '05
35. Two identical capacitor C, and C2 are connected in series with a battery. They are fully charged. c, = c c2=c Now a dielectric slab is inserted between the plates of C2. The potential difference across C, will (a) increase (b) decrease (c) remain same (d) depend on interval resistance of the cell
HHh
—1 1—
36. An uncharged capacitor is connected in series with
43
inclined planes as shown in
d i a g r a m .
Neglect air resistance and other friction Read the following statements and choose the correct options. Statement I : Kinetic energy of A on sliding to J will be greater than the kinetic energy of B on falling to M. Statements I I : Acceleration of A will be greater than acceleration of B when both are released to slide on inclined plane Statements I I I : Work done by external agent to move block slowly from position B to O is negative (a) only statement I is true (b) only statement II is true (c) only I and III are true (d) only II and III are true 43. A current / flows through a cylindrical fuse wire of length /, radius r, specific resistance p. It is known that the heat radiated per unit area per second is h. This is equal to the electrical power per unit surface area. Therefore h can be expressed as (a) h = (c) h= I 1P
2:tV
a grain and sit on the front wall. The possible path shown in diagram. Choose the correct path so that path length becomes minimum. Given that BD = DE, ZAFB = ZEFC. (a) ABC (b) ADC (c) AFC (d) AEC 46. In the figure initial status of capacitance and their connection is shown. Which of the following is/are correct about this circuit?
+1 I 2 iF
B C
15 V
oA
+11 3nF
D

10 V
D
"
C
(a) final charge on each capacitor will be zero (b) final total electrical energy of the capacitors will be zero (c) total charge flown from A to D is 30 p.C (d) total charge flown from A to D is  30 pC 47. In the figure shown the plates of 2Q a parallel plate capacitor have unequal charges. Its capacitance is C. P is a point outside the capacitor and close to the plate of charge Q. The distance between the plates is d. (a) a point charge at point P will not experience electric force due to capacitor (b) the potential difference between the plates will be 3 0 / 2 C (c) the energy stored in the electric field in the region 9 Q2 between the plates is —— 8C (d) the force on one plate due to the other plate
IS
,
I 'P it r
2„
/ 2 P/
(d) » =
Ji r
£
44. Choose the correct mirrorimage of figure given below. (a)
Q1
2 ro0cr
(b)
INDIAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY Joint Entrance Examination 2006 (IITJEE) (d) 45. A crow is sitting on a branch of a tree and on ground surface wheat grains are spread. The crow flies towards the ground and picks up
24 PHYSICS FOR Y O U  S P E B R '05 ET M E
Examination Schedule : April 9, 2006 (Sunday) 08.00  10.00 hrs. (Physics); 12.00  14.00 hrs. (Math) 16.00  18.00 hrs. (Chemistry) Each of the above three papers (Physics, Mathematics and Chemistry) will be of objective type in new designed to test the comprehension and analytical ability of the Candidates. Application Form and Information Brochure will be available from 28th of November, 2005 to 6th of January, 2006.
Directions (For questions from 48 to 50) You already have some knowledge of the earth and its motion about its own axis and also about the Sun. In this exercise you have to identify the effect of some imaginary conditions. Read statements in Q. 48,49 and 50 and choose one of (a), (b), (c), (d) out of the following options for each statement to become true. (a) if the earth were not inclined on its axis (b) if the orbit of earth were a circle rather than ellipse (c) if the earth revolved toward west rather than toward the east. (d) if the earth had half the present diameter but retained its present mass. 48. Statement : The sun would set in the east. 49. Statement: Objects would weigh four times as much as they do now 50. Statement: Night and day would be of equal length in all latitudes all year long. Direction for questions (51 to 54) Read each of the following numbered pairs of statement carefully one is an assertion and the second is a possible reason. Mark your answers to question according to followings. (a) If both assertion and the reason are true and the reason is an adequate explanation of assertion. (b) If both assertion and the reason are true statements, but the reason does not explain the assertion. (c) If the assertion is a true statement but reason is a false statement. (d) If both the assertion and reason are false statements. 51. Assertion : While drawing a line on a paper, friction force acts on paper in the same direction along which line is drawn on the paper. Reason : Friction always opposes motion. 52. Assertion : For an observer inside the moving train stationary objects outside the train appear to move with different speeds. Objects near the train appears to move faster and object far away appears to move slower. Reason : Relative velocity of the object is independent of relative position. It only depends on velocity of observer and object but not on their position. 53. Assertion : When an ideal gas is heated in a rigid non conducting container then pressure becomes double if the temperature is doubled.
Reason : Both the frequency of collisions and momentum transferred per collision becomes 2 times. 54. Assertion : We cannot produce electric field in a neutral conductor. Reason : Neutral conductor cannot produce electric field. 55. Match the following : Side P Side Q (A) Photoelectric effect I. Photon (B) Wave II. Frequency (C) X rays III. K capture (D) Nucleus IV. y rays (a) A  I, B  II, C  III, D  IV (b) A  II, B  I, C  IV, D  III (c) A  II, B  I, C  III, D  IV (d) none of these ANSWERS 1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 46. 50. 55. (d) (b) (d) (b) (d) (b) (b) (a) (b, d) (a, b, (a) (a) 2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. c) 51. (b) (a) (b) (d) (c) (d) (b) (b) (d) (c) 3. 8. 13. 18. 23. 28. 33. 38. 43. 47. 52. 4. (b) 9. (b) 14. (c) 19. (d) 24. (b) 29. (b) 34. (d) 39. (c) 44. (a) (b, c) 48. 53. (b) (c) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (b) (c) (c) (c) (a) 5. 10. 15. 20. 25. 30. 35. 40. 45. 49. 54. (d) (b) (b) (d) (d) (c) (a) (a) (c) (d) (d)
Note : For detailed solutions please log on to our website www. resonance, ac. in
JOINT ENTRANCE EXAMINATION (WBJEE2006)
Eligibility B.E./B.Tech./B.Arch. : High Secondary (10 + 2) with English, Vernacular (or any other fifth subject), Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics, need not be a resident of West Bengal. Date of Examination : April 22 and 23, 2006 Pattern : All question papers in Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry and Biological Sciences will be of two hours duration. All questions will be Multiple Choice Question (MCQ) type. The detailed advertisement will appear on 6.11.2005 in national dailies. It will also be posted on the pwebsite : http://jexab.becs.ac.in
24 PHYSICS FOR YOU  S P E B R '05 ET M E
45
SOLVED PROBLEMS
Practice Question for PMT
1. The damping force for a body moving through a fluid is proportional to velocity. What will be the dimensional formula of the constant of proportionality? (a) MLT1 (b) M L 0 r r ' (c) ML'T (d) ML^T" 1 . 2. the (a) (c) 3. What should be the angle of projection, so that horizontal range is equal to the maximum height? tan"11 (b) tan~'2 tan~!3 (d) tan _1 4. Angle between P and Q is 0.. What is the value (b) zero (d) P2Q sine. (a) 4.13 x IO"21 joule (c) S.27 x 10"21 joule (b) 5.2 x 10"21 joule (d) 2.6 x 10~21 joule. 8. Which type of thermodynamics process is the heating of water under atmospheric pressure? (a) adiabatic (b) isobaric (c) sochoric (d) none of these. 9. A mass m is suspended from two springs of constants ks and k2 and it oscillates with frequencies/, a n d / 2 respectively. If the same mass is suspended from the same two springs connected in parallel, then the frequency of the combination will be (a.)/=/,+/2 (c) f =4 f i + f i (b) f = 4 K K
(d)
of P (QxP)l 2 (a) P gcos0 (c) P2QsinQ cos6
4. A block is allowed to slide down an inclined plane of inclination 0. If, the inclined plane is lying on the floor of a lift which is falling down with a retardation a, what will be the acceleration of the block with which it will slide down? (a) (g + a)sin0 (b) (jg  a)sin0 (c) g sin© + a (d) g sin0  a. 5. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius R rotating about its axis with a constant angular speed co. Two blocks, each of mass m are attached gently to the opposite ends of a diameter of the ring. The angular speed of the ring, will be 2M M 2m G) (b) © (a) M + 2m v ' M + 2m M , M + 2m G) (d) —  — c o (c) M + 2m ' ' M 6. The time period (7) of the artificial satellite of earth depends on the density (p) of the earth (assumed constant) as (a) Toe
p
f
^

M

/i+/2 10. The frequency of an open organ pipe is f . If half part of organ pipe is dipped in water then its frequency is (a) / (b) 3//4 (c) f / 2 (d) 0. 11. Six charges each equal to +Q are placed at the corners of a regular hexagon of each side x. What is the electric field at the intersection of its diagonals? 1 36g ^ 1 6Q (a) (b) 471E 0 X2 47TE,0 * (c)
1
47IS0
Q
x2
(d) zero.
(b) T K ^ j p (d) Toe i/p.
(c) Tcc\!y[p
7. The average kinetic energy of a hydrogen molecule at 27°C is 6.2 * IO"21 joule. The mass of the hydrogen molecule is 3.1 x IO"27 kg. The average kinetic energy at 127°C is
12. What is the equivalent resistance between any two corners of the triangle circuit shown below? Each resistance is of 1 £2? (a) 1/2 £2 (b) 1 Q (c) 3/2 Q, (d) 2 Q. 13. A capacitor is charged from a 5 volt battery 100 times per second and is then discharged through a milliammeter 100 tomes per second with the help of
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SPE BR ET M E '05
46
a vibrating switch. What is the capacitance of the capacitor if the current is 0.5 mA? (a) 1 nF (b) 5 nF (c) 50 p,F (d) 100 p,F. 14. An electron and a proton enter a magnetic field at right angle to the field with same kinetic energy. Which of the following is true? (a) trajectory of electrons is less curved (b) trajectory of proton is less curved (c) both are equally curved (d) both move along straight line paths. 15. A proton and an alpha particle enter in a uniform magnetic field with the same velocity. The period of rotation of the alpha particle will be (a) four times that of the proton (b) two times that of the proton (c) three times that of the proton (d) same as that of the proton. 16. An air bubble inside a glass slab (p. = 1.5) appears at 6 cm when viewed from one side and 4 cm when viewed from the opposite side. The thickness of the slab is (a) 10 cm (b) 6.67 cm (c) 15 cm (d) none of these. 17. (a) (c) (d) Xrays will not show the phenomenon of diffraction (b) polarisation deflection by electric field interference.
20. In a nuclear reaction between a deuteron and 6 C 12 , the nucleus 7N13 is produced. Which is the other particle liberated? (a) electron (b) positron (c) proton (d) neutron. 21. Assuming that the junction diode is ideal, in the circuit shown here, the current through the diode is (a) zero (b) 1 mA (c) 10 mA
100 Q
—Wv—
I V 2 V
(d) 30 mA.
22. A particle of mass m = 5 is moving with a uniform speed in the XOY plane along the line Y = X + 4. The magnitude of the angular momentum of the particle about the origin is (a) 60 units (b) 40v2 units (c) zero (d) 7.5 units. 23. When a mass is rotating in a plane about a fixed point, its angular momentum is directed along (a) the radius (b) the tangent to the orbit (c) a line perpendicular to the plane of rotation (d) none of these. 24. A block of mass 2 kg is placed on the floor. The coefficient of static friction is 0.4. A force of 2.8 newton is applied on the block as shown in the figure. The force of friction between the block and the floor is (take g = 10 m/s 2 ) (a) 2.8 N (b) 8 N (c) 20 N (d) zero. 25. Moments of inertia of a uniform circular disc about a diameter is /. Its moment of inertia about an axis perpendicular to its plane and passing through a point on its rim will be (a) 5/ (b) 31 (c) 61 (d) 41. 26. The largest and the shortest distance of the earth from the sun is r] and r2. Its distance from the sun when it is perpendicular to the major axis of the orbit shown from the sun (a) rx+r2 (b) n +ry
18. Einstein photoelectric equation states that
1 —mv 2 = / ,j u  « u 0 . In this equation v refers to
(a) (b) (c) (d)
velocity of all ejected electrons mean velocity of emitted electrons minimum velocity of emitted electrons maximum velocity of emitted electrons.
19. A photon and an electron possess same de Broglie wavelength. Given that c = speed of light and v = speed of electron, which of the following relations is correct? Here Ee = kinetic energy of electron, Eph = kinetic energy of photon, p e = momentum of electron,/?^ = momentum of photon. E„ 2c V (a) " F ^ T (b) E 2c v Ph ph (0 Pph v
(d)
SPE BR ETME
Pe Pph '05
c 2v
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U 
2r r
(C)
\i
r, +r,
(d)
n+ri
27. Excess pressure inside a bubble of radius r is P. Then (a) P ~ Mr (b) P «= r2 2 (c) P oe r (d) none of these. 28. A beaker full of hot water is kept in a room and it cools from 80°C to 75°C in minutes, from 75°C to 70°C in U minutes and from 70°C to 65°C in t3 minutes. Then (a) tl<t2<t3 (b) tx = t2 = t3 (c) tx<t2 = t3 (d) tx < t2 < tj 29. The curve in the adjoining figure shows an isothermal expansion of a given mass of a gas. The area under the curve is divided into two regions. The region 1 0,0 V 2V is from A t o B and the volume region 2 is from B to C. If the work done in the two regions be denoted by Wx and W2 respectively. Then (a) Wx > W2 (b) W] < W2 (c) Wx = W2 (d) Wx  W2 30. Two mutually perpendicular simple harmonic vibrations have same amplitude, frequency and phase. When they superimpose, the resultant form of vibration will be (a) a circle (b) an ellipse (c) a straight line (d) a parabola. 31. Three charges of (+2q), iq) and (q) are placed at the corners A, B and C of an equilateral triangle of side a as shown in the adjoining figure. Then the dipole moment of this combination is (a) qa (b) zero (c) qaj3 (d)
(a) increasing the capacitance (b) increasing the potential difference between the plates (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these. 33. Two similar accumulators each of emf E and internal resistance r are connected as shown X in the adjoining diagram. Then the potential difference between X and Y is (a) 2E (b) (c) zero (d) none of these. 34. Two identical batteries, each of e.m.f. 2 volt and internal resistance 1 ohm are available to produce heat in a resistance r = 0.5 by passing a current through it. The maximum joulean power that can be developed across R using these batteries is (a) 1.28 W (b) 2.0 W (c) 8/9 W (d) 3.2 W 35. A long straight thin conductor has a current of / ampere. The magnetic induction B away from the conductor at a distance r from its axis varies as shown
(a)
(b)
(c) 0,0
(d)
2
Tiqa
32. Increasing the charge on the plates of a capacitor means
36. The number of turns in the primary and the secondary coils of a transformer are 1000 and 3000 respectively. If 80 volt A.C. is applied to the primary coil of the transformer, t£ien the potential difference per turn of the secondary coil would be (a) 240 volt (b) 2400 volt (c) 0.24 volt (d) 0.08 volt. 37. If the potential difference between the cathode and
24 PHYSICS FOR YOU  SPE BR ETME '05
48
the target of Coolidge tube is 1.2 x 105 volt then the minimum wavelength of continuous Xrays is (a) 10 A.u (b) 1 A.u (c) 0.1 A.u (d) 0.01 Au 38. Light of wavelength 7200 A in air has a wavelength in glass (p. = 1.5) equal to (a) 7200 A (b) 4800 A (c) 10800 A (d) 7201 A. 39. An achromatic prism is made by combining two prisms Px (p.F = 1.532, p.c = 1.515) andP 2 = 1.666, He = 1.650) i represents the refractive index. If the angle of the prism P} is 10°, the angle of the prism P2 will be (a) 5° (b) 78° (c) 10,6° (d) 20°. 40. In J.J. Thomson's method, electric field E , magnetic field B and velocity v of the electrons were in mutually perpendicular directions. This velocity selector allows particles of velocity v to pass undeflected when (a) v = BE (b) v = E/B (c) v = B/E (d) v = B2IE. 41. Doubly ionised helium atoms and hydrogen ions are accelerated from rest through the same potential drop. The ratio of the final velocities of the helium and the hydrogen ions is (a) 2 (c) 1/2 (b) (d) 1/^2
(a) 2/5 (c) 2~5
(b) 2 x 5 (d) 2 5 .
46. The masses of neutron and proton are 1.0087 and 1.0073 a.m.u respectively. If the neutrons and protons combine to form helium nucleus of mass 4.0015 a.m.u the binding energy of the helium nucleus will be (a) 28.4 MeV (b) 20.8 MeV (c) 27.3 MeV (d) 14.2 MeV. 47. When an p«junction diode is reverse biased, the flow of current across the junction is mainly due to (a) drift of charges (b) diffusion of charges (c) both drift and diffusion of charges (d) depends upon the nature of material. 48. If VA and VB denote the potentials of A and B, then the equivalent resistance ion between and B in the adjoining electric circuit is (a) 10 ohm if VA > VB (b) 5 ohm if VA < VB (c) 5 ohm if VA > VB (d) 20 ohm if VA < VB. 49. lattice parameter is (a) 10 3O m (c) 10~10 m
30 m (b) — xlO 2 15 (d) IO' m.
42. The plate current ip in a triode is given by iin ip = K K+, then the mutual conductance Gm is related to the plate current as 1/3 \2/3 (a) Gm  (g (b) Gm  (ip)2' (c) Gm ip (d) Gm cc ( i p f \ 43. Momentum of a photon of wavelength X is (a) h/X (b) zero (c) hX/c (d) hc/X. 44. If the ionization energy for the hydrogen atom is 13.6 electron volt, the energy required to excite it from the ground state to the next higher state is nearly (a) 3.4 electron volt (b) 10.2 electron volt (c) 12.1 electron volt (d) 1.5 electron volt. 45. The probability of a radioactive atom to survive 5 times longer than its halfvalue period is
24
50. Which of the following gates corresponds to the truth table given below. A B Y (a) NAND 1 0 0 (b) NOR 1 0 1 (c) XOR 0 1 1 (d) OR. 0 0 1 SOLUTIONS 1. (b) : F = kv. That is MLT~2 = k [LT 1 ] Hence k = MT"1. 2. 2g 1 2 1 ? Hence, sin28 =  s i n 0 or, 2sin0cos6 = —sin 0 2 2 or, tanG = 4. 3. (b): p is perpendicular to (QxP). of perpendicular vector is zero. The dot product . u 2 sin 26 (d) : R = ym. That is u 2 sin2 (
PHYSICS F O R Y O U  S P E B R '05 ET M E
4. (a) : The effective value of the downward acceleration is [g  (a)] sin0 = (g + a)sin9. 5. (c) : /co = 7,co, Here I = MR2, / , = (M + 2m)R2 Hence co, = Mco/(M + 2m). 6. (c) : T = 2n. Tx 1 R1 \GM =2k4, R ]IGx(4/3tiR3P)
J
And ZL = MlxV2_ T2 qx M2 Let Tu Mu qx be the time period, mass and charge of proton and T2, M2, q2 that for aparticle. Then
TlllxMI q2 M] Here q2 = 2qx and M2 = 4 M x . Hence,
T2 =
That is 7. 8. 9.
r 2 = 7 j x l x 4 = 27j. real depth _ thickness  real depth 6 4 17. (c) : Xrays consists of photons, which do not carry charge. 16. (c) : p = 18. (d): It is the maximum kinetic energy of the electron, when minimum amount of energy is used to take the electron out. 19. (b) : £ c =— mv1 = — x(mv)v = — — v. 2 2 2 X he For photon, Eph =
13 20. (d) : ,D2 + 6C12 + 7N Here a = 6 + l  7 = 0, b = 2+ And 0T' is neutron.
(c) : KE « T, where T is in kelvin. (b) (c) : / i = T _ J — > / 2 = 7 " J — 27t V m 2n v m
In parallel, k = kx + k2. * That i s / 2 = /j 2 + f2. 2n V Frequency of open and closed pipes are v/2/ and v/4/ respectively. / 10. (a) 11. (d): Electric fields due to the charges at the opposite corners will cancel each other. 12. (a) : Suppose we want to find the resistance across a and c. The symmetry of the distribution current requires that there should be same current in the partsab and be. Same is true for the parts ad a and dc. This is possible only when there is no current through the part bd. Hence equivalent circuit is as shown in the figure. And the equivalent resistance across a and c is 1/2 Q. 13. (a) : Here 5 x C x 100 = 0.5 * IO"3 This gives C = 1 iF. Mvsin<j> 14. (b) : Radius of the circular path is R = q0B Since, mass of electron is less, so its radius will also be small. The radius of the proton will be more than that. Hence, curvature of the trajectory of the proton will be less. Remember, curvature = 1/radius. 2jiM 15. (b) : In this case, T = • qB
1213
1
21. (a) : The diode is reverse biased so the current through it is zero. 22. (a): Momentum of the particle = mass x velocity = (5)x(3a/2) = 15V2. The direction of momentum in the XOY plane is given by ¥X y  x + 4. Slope of the line = 1 = tan6. i.e. 0 = 45° Intercept of this straight line = 4 Length of the perpendicular z from the origin on the straight line = 4sin45° = Angular momentum = momentum x perpendicular distance = 60 units. 23. (c)
24 PHYSICS F O R Y O U 
SPE BR ET M E
'05
24. (a) : Limiting force of friction = pi? = \iMg = 0.4 x 2 x 10 = 8 N. As external applied force of 2.8 newton is less than than limiting friction, the actual force of friction is equal to the external force of 28 newton but in opposite direction. 25. (c) 29. (c) 26. (b) 30. (c) 27. (a) 28. (a)
cathode and the anticathode is Fvolt, then the minimum wavelength A,min of continuous Xrays is given by ^•min = hc/eV Here h = 6.6 x 10"34 joule x sec c = 3 x 108 m/sec, e = 1.6 x 10~19 C _ 6.6xl0~34x3xl08 min " 1.6xlO 1 9 V V= 1.2 X io 5 = 120000 eV he = 12400 eV A 12400 eV A 120000 38. ( b ) : "Hg^0.7 A.
31. (c) : If D is the middle point of the line joining B and C, then charges of (q) and (q) placed at B and C can be replaced by a charge (2q) placed at D. ' JV\ Now AD = (AB) sin 60° = a aS
Here % = 1.5, Xa = 7200 A = qa4h. ^ = ™ 0
a = 4800A
Electric dipole moment = 2q
.
Positive direction of dipole moment is from D to A i.e. along the bisector of the angle at A but away from the base of the triangle. 32. (b) 33. (c) : Let current in the circuit be i then i is given by E + E = ir + ir or, i = E/r. Now, Vx  Vy = Eir = E—xr = EE = 0. r 34. (b): For maximum power in the external resistance external resistance = total internal resistance. Hence the two batteries should be connected in parallel. External resistance = 0.5. Total internal resistance = r =  + i or, r' = 0.5 r' 1 1 Current in external resistance E 2 2 i= = =  = 2 ampere. r+r 0.5 + 0.5 1 Power developed across external resistance = 2 2 x 0.5 = 2 watt. 35. (d) : B Mr. E N 36. (d) : For a transformer, — = — —
E
u„ 1.5 39. (a): For an achromatic combination of two prisms P\ and P2, the angular disperson 0! and 0 2 are numerically equal. i.e. 0, = 0 2 ( l p , F  l ^ c ) ^ , = (2\lF  2\ic) A2 i.e. (1.523  1.515)10° = (1.666  1.650)^ 2 or, (0.008)(10°) = (0.016)^ 2 A2 = 5°. 40. (b) : In crossed electric and magnetic field the charged particle travels straight with no deflection when Bev = Ee. :. v = EIB. 41. (d) : If charges on helium ion and hydrogen ion be denoted by q and q . Energyof helium ion = qV Energy of hydrogen ion = q'V where Vis the potential difference through which either of these ions is accelerated. If VHs and VH denote the final velocities of helium ions and hydrogen ions and MHe and MH the masses of helium ions and hydrogen ions. Then vl qV_ q'V
V f vUe }
fir
2
P
N
P
UhJ
/ N 1
U'J
N, ..
Nn
= Now,  J L = Nn 1000
0.08
volt  ^ = 0.08 Ns turn
Here, fv ^
2
=
and —QM,He
37. (c) : When the potential difference between the
24
UhJ
rr = I 2 UJ
J_
VH
SPE BR ET M E '05
PHYSICS FOR YOU 
3/2
42. (a) : For a triode, i = K
dip \
H
1/2
... (i)
dVv «
 i f
/^p=constant 1/2
Now,
s
n
1/3
di p dV(,
V ° 'Vp = constant
JK
2
=f*2/v/3
46. (a) : 2 w r = 2 [1.0087 + 1.0073] = 2 [2.0160] amu = 4.0320 a.m.u Y.mp = 4.0015 a.m.u Decrease in mass when two protons and two neutrons combine to form helium nucleus = (4.0320  4 . 0 0 1 5 ) amu = 0.0305 amu = (0.0305)(931) MeV = 28.4 MeV. 47. (b) 48. (c): When VA > VB, the junction diode is forward biased biased and hence conducting. Then the two ten ohm resistors are arranged in parallels. 1 = J_ R•AB " i o J_ _2_ 10' 10
But
r
\
dVe %J 3
d i ^
= G,„
r 2 ' 3 c; 1 1/3
p
G»>
2
'
5 ohm. 44. (b) 49. (c) : Let the lattice parameter be a, then 10HO m. a3 = 50. (a)
43. (a)
45. (c) : Here tlth = 5 = « But AWV0 = (1/2)" = (1/2) 5 . A%V0 = 2"5. Survival probability of a radioactive atom = 2"5.
Dear Students, We know that its too difficult to remember The spectral classification sequence (star classes on a stellar evolution diagram). So we are presenting some mneumonics to learn few very difficult things in Physics in a very easy way. 1. The different categories of radiation, in order of increasing wavelength Cary grant expects unanimous votes in movie reviews tonight. Cosmic, gamma, Xrays, ultraviolet, visible, infrared, microwave, radio, television. 2. Whether current leads voltage or lags it in reactive circuits Think of 'Eli the Ice man'. In inductive (L) circuits, voltage (E) leads current (I), hence ELI. In capacitive (C) circuits, it is the other way, so ICE. 3.
The direction in which the current flows in a thermocouple Contributed by Neha Chandak, Nagpur made from antimony and bismuth metals abc  The current flows from the antimony to the bismuth through the cold junction. The definition of mechanical advantage Men always like eating. MA  load over effort (1/e)
MEMORY
5. The order of ohmic values in resistors Billy brown relies on your gin but prefers good whiskey. Black/brown/red/orange/yellow/green/blue/purple/grey/white.
If you have such mneumonics in Physics, Chemistry, Botany or Zoology which can be proved as aid to memory then send them to us. On selection we will publish them with your name in our monthly magazines Physics For You, Chemistry Today and Biology Today.
24 PHYSICS FOR YOU 
SPE BR ETME
'05
SOLVED PAPER
KERALA PET  2005
1. are (a) (c) (d) The frequency of Xrays, yrays and ultraviolet rays respectively a, b and c, then a < b, b > c (b) a > b, b > c a > b, b < c (d) a < b, b < c a = b = c. (a) 70/2 (e) Io28. The ratio of the deBroglie wavelength of an aparticle and a proton of same kinetic energy is (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 1 (c) 1 : (d) 4 : 1 (e) V2 : 1 9. Which of the following is not conserved in nuclear reaction? (a) total energy (b) mass number (c) charge number (d) nucleon number (e) number of fundamental particles. 10. The number of a  p a r t i c l e s and (3particles respectively emitted in the reaction : 8 s^ 1 9 S ~* 78 are (a) 8 and 8 (b) 8 and 6 (c) 6 and 8 (d) 6 and 6 (e) 8 and 4. 11. The counting rate observed from a radioactive source at t = 0 second was 1600 counts per second and / = 8 seconds it was 100 counts per second. The counting rate observed as counts per second t = 6 seconds will be (a) 400 (b) 300 (c) 250 (d) 200 (e) 150. 12. If De, Db and Dc are the doping levels of emitter, base and collector respectively of a transistor, then (a) Dc = IJh = Dc (b) De <D„ = Dc (c) De >Dh> Dc (d) De < Dh < Dc (e) De> Dc> Dh. 13. The relation between a and P parameters of a transistor is (a) a =(3
.(b) 7 0 /V2
(c) 70/4
(d) 70
2. If c is the speed of electromagnetic waves in vacuum, its speed in a medium of dielectric constant K and relative permeability p,r is (a) v = — = (c) (e) v = (b) v = c^\xrK (d) v = K
VcZ
3. A red coloured object illuminated by mercury vapour lamp, when seen through a green filter, will appear (a) red (b) blue (c) violet (d) white (e) black. 4. Time taken by sunlight to pass through a window of thickness 4 mm whose refractive index is 3/2 is (a) 2 x IO"4 sec (b) 2 x io 4 sec 11 (c) 2 x IO" sec (d) 2 x 10" sec (e) 2 x 10s sec. 5. Two thin lenses of focal length 20 cm and 25 cm are in contact. The effective power of the combination is (a) 4.5 D (b) 18 D (c) 45 D (d) 2.5 D (e) 9 D. 6. The magnification of the image when an object is placed at a distance x from the principal focus of a mirror of focal length / is (a) (e) / 1+ / (b) l + {
(c)
7
(d)
i
/
(b)
. P
7. In the Young's double slit experiment, the central maxima is observed to be 70. If one of the slits is covered then the intensity at the central maxima will become
24
(c) a =  P —
1+0
V
(d)
P a^t—
1P
(e) a = p. 14. A pn junction in series with a resistance of 5 k£2
PHYSICS F O R Y O U 
SPE BR ET M E
'05
is connected across a 50 V p n DC source. If the forward bias resistance of the i 5kn junction is 50 £2, the +1 forward bias current is 1 (a) .8.8 mA (b) 1 mA (c) 2 mA (d) 20 mA (e) 9.9 mA. 15. A transistor connected at common emitter mode contains load resistance of 5 k£2 and an input resistance of 1 k£2. If the input peak voltage is 5 mV and the current gain is 50, find the voltage gain. (a) 250 (b) 500 (c) 125 (d) 50 (e) 75. 16. and (a) (c) If and n2 are the refractive indices of the core the cladding respectively of an optic fibre, then w, = n2 (b) < n2 n 2 < «, (d) n2 = 2m,
22. A body starting from rest moves with constant acceleration. The ratio of distance covered by the body during the 5th second to that covered in 5 seconds is (a) 9/25 (b) 3/5 (c) 25/9 (d) 1/25 (e) 25. 23. (a) (c) (e) The area under accelerationtime graph gives distance travelled (b) change in acceleration force acting (d) change in velocity work done.
24. A particle is displaced from a position (2/'  j + k) to another position (3/ + 2 j  2k) under the action of the force of (2i + j  k ) . The work done by the force in an arbitrary unit is (a) 8 (b) 10 (c) 12 (d) 16 (e) 20. 25. From the top of tower, a stone is thrown up. It reaches the ground in s. A second stone thrown down with the same speed reaches the ground in t2 s. A third stone released from rest reaches the ground in t3 s. Then (a) h = 1 1
(c)
(e) «2 = yflni • 17. If a radio receiver amplifies all the signal frequencies equally well, it is said to have high (a) fidelity (b) distortion (c) sensibility (d) sensitivity (e) selectivity. 18. the (a) (e) If a radio receiver is tuned to 855 kHz radio wave, frequency of local oscillator in kHz is 1510 (b) 455 (c) 1310 (d) 1500 855.
(b) 1
= 1?
(e)
< = 3
r 1r <2 r '2
(d) t? = ti
19. A TV tower has a height of 100 m. What is the maximum distance upto which the TV transmission can be received (R = 8 x 106 m)? (a) 34.77 km (b) 32.70 km •(c) 40 km (d) 40.70 km (e) 42.75 km. 20. (a) (c) (e) The dimensional formula of magnetic flux is [M'L0T~2A_1] (b) [M'L^'A" 1 ] 2 2 [M'L T!A ] (d) [M'L^TA 1 ] 1 [M'L^A ]
26. An object is projected at an angle of 45° with the horizontal. The horizontal range and maximum height reached will be in the ratio (a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1 (e) 4 :V2 27. If the length of the second's hand in a stopclock is 3 cm, the angular velocity and linear velocity of the tip is (a) 0.2047 rad/s, 0.0314 ms"1 (b) 0.2547 rad/s, 0.314 ms"' (c) 0.1472 rad/s, 0.06314 ms"1 . (d) 0.1047 rad/s, 0.00314 ms"1 (e) 0.347 rad/s, 0.134 ms"1. 28. A player caught a cricket ball of mass 150 g moving at the rate of 20 ms1. If the catching process be completed in 0.1 s the force of the blow exerted by the ball on the hands of the player is (a) 0.3 N (b) 30 N (c) 300 N (d) 3000 N (e) 3 N.
21. A physical quantity/I is related to four observable a, b, c and d as follows. A=• Cyfd The percentage errors of measurement in a, b, c and d are 1%, 3%, 2% and 2% respectively. What is the percentage of error in the quantity A? (a) 12% (b) 7% (c) 5% • (d) 16% (e) 14%.
24
PHYSICS FOR YOU 
SPE BR ET M E
'05
29. A uniform metal chain is placed on a rough table such that one end of chain hangs down over the edge of the table. When onethird of its length hangs over the edge, the chain starts sliding. Then, the coefficient of static friction is (a) 3/4 (b) 1/4 (c) 2/3 (d) 1/3 (e) 1/2. 30. Two masses M and Ml2 are joined together by means of light inextensible string passed over a frictionless pulley as shown in the figure. When the bigger mass is released, the small one will ascent with an acceleration of (a) g/3 (b) 3g/2 (c) gl2 (d) g (e) gl4. 31. In elastic collision (a) both momentum and kinetic energies are conserved (b) both momentum and kinetic energies are not conserved (c) only energy is conserved (d) only mechanical energy is conserved (e) only momentum is conserved. 32. A ball is released from the top of a tower. The ratio of work done by force of gravity in first, second and third second of the motion of the ball is (a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 4 : 9 (c) 1 : 3 : 5 (d) 1 : 5 : 3 (e) 1 : 3 : 2 33. When the kinetic energy of a body is doubled, its momentum increases by times. (a) ^2 (e) 1/72 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) 2^2
(e)
PQ + QR + PR
35. The moment of inertia of a thin rod of mass M and length L about an axis perpendicular to the rod at a distance L/4 from one end is (a) (e)
ML2
„
(b)
ML2
T
1ML2
~Y2
(c)
7 ML1 24
(d)
7 ML 12
48
36. A body rolls down an inclined plane. If its kinetic energy of rotation is 40% of its kinetic energy of translation, then the body is (a) solid cylinder (b) solid sphere (c) disc (d) ring (e) hollow cylinder. 37. Which of the following statements about the gravitational constant is true? (a) it is a force (b) it has no unit (c) it has same value in all systems of units (d) it depends on the value of the masses (e) it does not depend on the nature of the medium in which the bodies are kept. 38. Four particles each of mass M, are located at the vertices of a square with side L. The gravitational potential due to this at the centre of the square is r— GM (b) 764  3 (a)  7 3 2 ^ (c) zero <«> S  .
(d) 732
GM L
34. Three identical spheres, each of mass 1 kg are kept as shown in figure, touching each other, X with their centres on a straight line. If their centres are marked P, Q, R respectively, the distance of centre of mass of the system from P is PQ+PR PQ + PR + QR (a) (b) 3 3 PR + QR PQ+QR (c) (d)
24 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  SPE BR ET M E '05
39. Two identical solid copper spheres of radius R are placed in contact with each other. The gravitational attraction between them is proportional to (a) R2 (b) Rr2 (c) R* (d) R~* (e) R\ 40. to (a) (c) (e) The modulus of elasticity is dimensionally equivalent strain stress surface tension. (b) force (d) coefficient of viscosity
41. Radius of an air bubble at the bottom of the lake is r and it becomes 2r when the air bubbles rises to the top surface of the lake. If P cm of water be the atmospheric pressure, then the depth of the lake is
(a) 2 P (e) 5P.
(b) 8P
(c) 4P
(d) IP
(a) 1 hour (b) 1 s (d) 1 minute
(c) 12 hours (e) 0.1 hour.
42. A manometer connected to a closed tap reads 4.5 x 105 pascal. When the tap is opened the reading of the manometer falls to 4 x 105 pascal. Then the velocity of flow of water is (a) 7 ms'1 (b) 8 ms"1 (c) 9 ms"1 (d) 12 ms"1 (e) 10 ms"1. 43. What is the velocity v of a metallic ball of radius r falling in a tank of liquid at the instant when its acceleration is onehalf that of a freely falling body? (The densities of metal and of liquid are p and c respectively, and the viscosity of the liquid is t). (a) r g, (o (e) 44. A black body has maximum wavelength Xm at 2000 K. Its corresponding wavelength at 3000 K will be 3 16, (d) (b) (a) 2X"> ( 0 J^K (e) 4
2
49. A particle starts simple harmonic motion from the mean position. Its amplitude is a and total energy E. At one instant its kinetic energy is 3£/4. Its displacement at that instant is (a) a/J2 (e) a. 50. A particle executes linear simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 2 cm. When the particle is at 1 cm from the mean position the magnitude of its velocity is equal to that of its acceleration. Then its time period in seconds is 1
271
<b) (a)
(b) a/2
(c)
j =
(d)
a/43
(b) .
(d)
2^r
9ti
(po)
iw?
<
c)
Jf
(d) £ 2n
51. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe are tuned to the same fundamental frequency. The ratio of their lengths is (a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 1 : 2 (e) 4 : 1. 52. An observer standing near the sea shore observes 54 waves per minute. If the wavelength of the water wave is 10 m then the velocity of water wave is (a) 540 ms"1 (b) 5.4 ms"1 (c) 0.184 ms"1 (d) 9 ms"1 1 (e) 48.6 ms" . 53. A set of 24 tuning forks are so arranged that each gives 6 beats per second with the previous one. If the frequency of the last tuning fork is double that of the first, frequency of the second tuning fork is (a) 138 Hz (b) 132 Hz (c) 144 Hz (d) 276 Hz (e) 270 Hz. 54. The electrostatic field due to a charged conductor just outside the conductor is (a) zero and parallel to the surface at every point inside the conductor (b) zero and is normal to the surface at every point inside the conductor (c) parallel to the surface at every point and zero inside the conductor (d) normal to the surface at every point and zero inside the conductor (e) normal to the surface at every point and nonzero inside the conductor.
PHYSICS FOR Y O U  SPE BR ET M E '05
45. The value of PV/T for one mole of an ideal gas is nearly equal to (a) 2 J mol"1 K' (b) 8.3 cal mol"1 Kr1 1 1 (c) 4.2 J mol K(d) 2 cal mol"1 K"1 1 1 (e) 4 cal moh K . 46. The volume of a metal sphere increases by 0.24% when its temperature is raised by 40°C. The coefficient of linear expansion of the metal is °C. (a) 2 x 10"5 (b) 6 x 10"5 (c) 18 x 105 (d) 1.2 x 105 (e) 2.1 x io 5 . 47. The temperature of equal masses of three different liquids A, B and C are 12°C, 19°C and 28°C respectively. The temperature when A and B are mixed is 16°C and when B and C are mixed is 23°C. The temperature when A and C are mixed is (a) 18.2°C (b) 22°C (c) 20.2°C (d) 25.2°C (e) 20.8°C. 48. The time period of the seconds hand of a watch is
24
55. A point charge +q is placed at the midpoint of a cube of side a. The electric flux emerging from the cube is 3 •qal ^ (a) zero (b) — — / \ 1 iA \ (d) Aqa2
E°
series with P the balance point shifts to 2/3 m from same end. P and Q are (a) 4, 2 (b) 2, 4 (c) both (a) and (b) (d) neither (a) nor (b) (e) unpredictable. 63. The current and i2 f1 1 through the resistors R, (= 10 Q) and R2 (= 30 Q) r in the circuit diagram with E, E, = 3 V, E2 = 3 V and ll i l l 1 M E 3 = 2 V are respectively f (a) 0.2 A, 0.1 A Lamv(b) 0.4 A, 0.2 A Rr (c) 0.1 A, 0.2 A (d) 0.2 A, 0.4 A (e) 0.4 A, 0.1 A.
4
(c) —
(e) e0/q. 56. F i g u r e shows f o u r plates each of area A and separated from another by between P and 8NA M I r v (e) zero.
j
1
\ a distance d. What is the capacitance 01 4e 0A 2EQA 3 SNA  f (c)  y (d) u
57. A soap bubble is charged to a potential of 16 V. Its radius is then doubled. The potential of the bubble now will be (a) 16 V (b) 8 V (c) 4 V (d) 2 V (e) zero. 58. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance is charged to 1 pC. The charging battery is and then the separation between the plates is Work done during the process is (a) 5 pJ (b) 0.05 iJ (c) 1 p,J (d) (e) 50 xJ. of 10 jiF removed doubled. 10 pJ
64. An a  p a r t i c l e with a s p e c i f i c c h a r g e of 2.5 x 107 C kg 1 moves with a speed of 2 x 10s ms  1 in a perpendicular magnetic field of 0.05 T. Then the radius of the circular path described by it is (a) 8 cm (b) 4 cm (c) 16 cm (d) 2 cm (e) 32 cm. 65. (a) (c) (e) A cyclotron can be used to accelerate aparticles (b) (iparticles neutrons (d) neutrino positron.
59. A 10 £2 electric heater operates on a 110 V line. The rate at which heat is developed in watts is (a) 1310 W ( b ) 670 W ( c ) ' 8 1 0 W (d) 1210 W (e) 1100 W. 60. For a certain thermocouple, if the temperature of the cold junction is 0°C, the neutral temperature and inversion temperatures are 285°C and 570°C respectively. If the cold junction is brought to 10°C, then the new neutral and inversion temperatures are respectively (a) 285°C and 560°C (b) 285°C and 570°C (c) 295°C and 560°C ' (d) 275°C and 560°C (e) 275°C and 570°C. 61. In which of the following substances does resistance decrease with increase in temperature? (a) copper (b) carbon (c) constantan (d) silver (e) sodium. 62. Resistors P and Q connected in the gaps of the meter bridge. The balancing point is obtained 1/3 m from the zero end. If a 6 Q resistance is connected in
75 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  NOVEMBER '05
66. The magnitude of the earth's magnetic field at a place is B0 and the angle of dip is 8. A horizontal conductor of length / lying magnetic northsouth moves eastwards with a velocity v. The emf induced across the conductor is (a) zero (b) B0 Iv sin5 (c) B0lv (d) B0 /vcos5 (e) B 0 sin5. 67. A milliammeter of range 030 A has internal resistance of 20 Q. The resistance to be connected in series to convert it into a voltmeter of maximum reading 3 V is (a) 49 Q (b) 80 Q (c) 40 Q (d) 30 Q (e) 50 Q. 68. A straight conductor of length / carrying a current /, is bent in the form of a semicircle. The magnetic field in tesla at the centre of the semicircle is
7 (a) ^ x l O " / 7 (c) ^ 2x l O / 7 (b) — x 10 I
(d)
n
I
xlO,7
(e)
n2I
xlO,7
69. A coil having an inductance of 0.5 H carries a current which is uniformly varying from zero to 10 ampere in 2 second. The e.m.f. (in volts) generated in the coil is (a) 10 (b) 5 (c) 2.5 (d) 1.25 (e) 0.25 70. E= and (a) (c) (e) If an alternating voltage is represented as 141 sin (628 t), then the rms value of the voltage the frequency are respectively 141V, 628 Hz (b) 100 V, 50 Hz 100 V, 100 Hz (d) 141 V, 100 Hz 100 V, 314 Hz.
or, / =
5 (e):
3x4xl0"3 „ ,, j = 2x10 11 sec. 2x3x10 .
+ 1 _L__L _ 9 + / 2 " 2 0 25 ~100
' /~/, or, P = 9 D. 6.
(c) :  w 1 =
height of image height of object
or,
m
v =.
u
71. A stepdown transformer is used on a 1000 V line to deliver 20 A at 120 V at the secondary coil. If the efficiency of the transformer is 80%, the current drawn from the line is (a) 3 A (b) 30 A (c) 0.3 A (d) 2.4 A (e) 24 A. 72. For the series LCR circuit shown in the figure, what is the 220 V resonance frequency and the amplitude of the current at the resonating frequency? (a) 2500 rad s"1 and 5 ^ 2 A (b) (c) (d) (e)
7. ( c ) : / 0 = /f 2 When one slit is closed, amplitude becomes half and intensity becomes l/4th. I— IJ4. h 8. (a) : = — mv \ma(vo)2 4mp(va)2 or,
1
=
\mp(vp)2 =^mp(vp)2
v
€
8 mH
t
AM/V44D
J
20 nF
= 
2
or, v^ = h
p h
m
2
p' p
v
or, 9. (e)
mpyp mava
mp 4 mp
2 = 1. 2
2500 rad s' 1 and 5 A 2500 rad s"1 and 51^2 A 250 rad s"1 and 5 ^ 2 A 25 rad s"1 and 5s/2 A SOLUTIONS
10. (b) : 196  164 = 32 88  78 = 10
A\96
D164
Then, 4 a + 00 = 32 or, a = 8 and 2 a  p = 10 or, 16  P = 10.
v. P = 6.
1. 2.
(a) : b > a > c (c) : — = Ho
1
or
£o
a < b and b > c.
; —=K and v =
1
11. (d) : At t = 0, counts per second = 1600 At / = 8, counts per second = 100 In 8 sec, count rate reduces to ~
1 _ 1

iL._L Ho s o . >r (e) K '
Therefore, half life must be 2 sec. In 6 sec., the count 1600 „„„ rate will become —   = 200. 12. (e) 13. (c): p = 1a or, P = a(l + P) = or, P  Pa = a
3. 4.
(c) : p. = 3/2, d = 4 mm = 4 x 10~3 m c d
n = 
or,
24
v t cxt 3 x l 0 8 xt P = —— = d 4 x 10
;
v
= —
3 3xl08x/ or,  = T2 4 x 10
P 1+ a 14. (e) : R = 5 * 103 Q, F = 50 V V 50 1 1 R (5x10 +50) 100 + 1 101
= 9.9 mA.
PHYSICS F O R Y O U  S P E B R '05 ET M E
15. (a) : RL = 5 kQ Input resistance = 1 k£2, V0= 5 mV, (3 = 50 Output voltage = 5kQ x I c h Input voltage = 5 * 10 3 V P= 50 = — and A = 5 X 1 ° 3 = 5x10 Q. 1x10 h 50 x 5 x IO"6 = 250 x 10"6 ••• 4 = 50 X l h output voltage Now, voltage gain input voltage 5 x l 0 3 x 250xl0~ 6
5xl0~ 3 3
23. ® : Change in velocity Area = change in acceleration (a) x change in time u) = change in velocity. 24. (a) : A = 2i  j + k , B = 3i + S = BA = {3i+2j2k)(2ij = i+3j3k 2j2k + k)
FS = (2i+jk)(i+3j3k) = 2 + 3 + 3 = 8. 25. ( b ) : Let h be the height of the tower, then from the laws of motion (under gravity),
1
2
= 250
h = utx + —gt\ hut2
... (i), when projected upward
16. (c) : « 2 < n \ 17. (a) 18. (e) : For resonance. 19. (a) : Covering range = d ~ j2hR = V 2 x l 0 0 x 8 x l 0 6 = V 16x10® = 4 x l 0 4 = 4 0 km. 20. (e) : § = BA = BAcosQ F B =and BqV= F. qV F qV
^cos8
1 + —g'2 2 ... (ii), when thrown downwards with velocity u.
Also, h = ^ g t 3 2
.. (iii), when released from rest. ... (iv) (v)
From fi),  = u + ^gt1 h 1 From (ii),  = u + 2 gt2 h . Adding (iv) and (v), h+
J_
Dimensions =
[MLT"Z][L1}
h) =
\g(h+h)
[AT][LT~X] Dimensional formula of < will be J > [ M ' ^ A  ' T " 2 ] or, [M'LT^A" 1 ]. a2b3 c\[d
Putting the value in (iii), t3 = yjtxt2 . 26. (d) : Horizontal range = Maximum height reached = u2 sin 26 u2 sin 2 6
.2 g
21. (e) : A =
log^4 = 21oga + 31ag6^logc +—loga? Differentiating both side dA _ 2da A a

k s i n 2 8 x 2 g _ 2 sin 26 Ratio = 2 • 2a ~ • 2fl gxu sin 8 sin 6
2
Mb b

dc c

1 dd 2 d
(1/ 42)' = 4:1.
*»
* £ < e
= 45)
= 2 x 1% + 3 x 3% + 2% + ~ x 2 %
= 2% + 9% + 2% + 1% = 14%. 22. (a) : Distance covered in 5th second
a « v 9a = w +—(2rcl) = 0 + —(101) = —
27. (d) : Length of second's hand = 3 cm = radius, v = cor. and co = — = — = — = 0.1047 rad/sec. T 60 30 v = 0.1047 x 3 = 0.00314 m/s. 28. (a) : m = 150 g, v = 20 m/s, ( = 0 . 1 s F = ma a = v/t = 20/0.1 = 200 150 x 200 = 30 N. F= 1000
Distance covered in 5 sec., 1 2 « 1 25a S = ut + ar = 0 +  x ax 25 = 2 2 2 Ratio = 9/25.
..
PHYSICS FOR YOU  NOVEMBER '05
77
29. (e) : For static friction,
/ x M x g 1/3 /
34. (b) : xt
(MP{ 0) + ( M „ ) ( P Q ) + (Mr)(PR) MP + M0 + Mr PQ + PR 3
1+ 1+1
^
R
(2
1 x 0 +1 x PQ +1 x PR Mxg Ma
30. (a) : Mg  Tx„ T2
M M g = —a 2 2 , • M 3M g c Solving, — g = a => a = — 2 2 3 :. When the bigger mass is released, acceleration of the lighter mass will be gl3.
rh
w "•T2 M2
ML1 12 Now at a distance L/4, the moment of inertia will be 35. (e) : Moment of inertia of uniform rod ML1 +M ~~Y2 M Ml} 12 Ml} 16 Mt =
+
M/21
I
]_ J_ 3+ 4
M
• T
Mg
31. (a) : In elastic collision both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved. 32. (c) : u  0, S„=~g(2n\)
ML2 1ML 4 12 48 36. (b) : Kinetic energy of rotation = 40% of K.E. of translation.
J"
2
Kinetic energy of rotation = —J® =  m k x — 2 2 R Kinetic energy of translation = — mv mk 2
1 , 2 V2 1 2
1 ,
1
,9
v2
Work done by the force of gravity in first second is mgh~g2 =mg[h^ — R2
1 2 x— mv 100 2
40
Work done in 2nd second is mgh^mg2 or, mg^h~g
il=2 *2 = 2 * 2 R1 Moment of inertia of a solid sphere about its diameter is —MR . :. The body is a solid sphere. 37. (e) 38. (a) : Potential energy at the
= 1:3. 2
2
Work done in third second is mgh^mg2 or, mgih~g mgl hRatio of 1st and 2nd = wgj hmg Ratio of 2nd and 3rd is mg
rd
^ — M
m
2
)
= 3:5.
V j 5 ^
„ r~4 M centre is 4V2 L GM ^2x16 or, L GM
= 732
M Gx — nRpx — nRp 3 4R
4 1 4 1
..
Ratio of 1 : 2
st
nd
t : 3 = 1 : 3 : 5.
1 2
39. (c) : F = = i.e. Foe R' 40. (c) : 7 =
^ (2 RY
33. (a) : Kinetic energy = —mv
2
Momentum = mv = p or, kinetic energy = p2/2m or, kx = —L or, pl = ^2mkx 2m
2
Gxxn2p2R* 9 FIA tsLIL
2
2kx = Ic2 or, p2 = or,
24
k2 = — or, 2kx = 2m 2m = yj2 y[2~mkx = yllp]
stress strain
AL
Dimensionally — = 1. Modulus of elasticity is dimensionally equivalent to stress.
PHYSICS FOR Y O U  SPE BR ET M E '05
p2=42px.
41. (d) : Let the pressure at the given point inside the liquid be (F, + P,lm) and f 2 = P ~ at  pressure = cms of Hg or 76 x 13.6 cms of water Now, PjV, = P2V2 i.e. (/^+/ )jitr 1 = PxjTc(2/}) or, Px = IP. As P is in cms of water, the depth of the lake is 7P. P v2 42. fe): — + —  constant (by Bernoulli's theorem) Pg 2 g Pg or, or, or, 2 g pg 2 g
, 3 3
48. (d) 49. (b) : Total energy of a simple harmonic motion is given by E = 2 ma2a2
3E 1 1, 2 2\ — = —mco (a x ) 4 2
or,
or,
41,2 J 32 2 2 —a=a~x
3(1 2 2 I 1 2/ 2 — —ma a = — wco ( a
2
2\ )
2 2 3 2 or, x =a —a
4.5 xlO 5
1 „ 4xl05 1 v, 2 +x0 = + —— pg 2 pg 2 g I„m5 0.5x10 = 1 v{ 2 1x10 2 = v2 Pg 2 g p lxio5 2 — = v2 1x10 2 100 = v2 v 2 = 10.
2 a a or, x = — or, x = —. 4 2 50. (c) : A = 2 cm Magnitude of velocity from mean position = cW A and acceleration = co2* Now, m2x = coVA2  x 2 or, (o = y/3. 2n co = — 3 or, co2 • 1 = © V 4  1
x
2(P~Po)g 43. (a) : We know terminal velocity = 2r 9ri Here g = g/2 2 ( p  P o ) g / 2 _ r (ppo)g V = 2r 9n 9T Xm{ 3000 _ Xm 44. (b) : LL 7] Xm2 2000 Xm2 Xmi = —Xm. 2 3 PV 45. (a) : —  = nR = 1 x 2 cal/mole/kelvin. 46. (a) : Y = 24 xlO"5 AV V • AV 0.24
y= — and a = —
2.
y
100x40
3
= — xlO"5 = 2xl0~ 5 per°C. 4x3 12 47. (c) : Heat gain = heat lost Q ( 1 6  1 2 ) = Cfl(1916) and C s (23  19) = C c (28  23) => CA _ CB ~ CB _ Cc ~ 3 4 5 4
„ 27t 2 7i or, T = — = t=. co ^ F 51. (d) : u = — for closed organ pipe v f u = — for open organ pipe 212 v _ v 2. h 1  1 or,  = — ^ 4^~2/2 ' 4 l2 h 2 52. (d) : Number of waves per minute = 54 .•. Number of waves per second = 54/60 Now, v = 54 v = — x l 0 = 9m/s. 60 53. fc) :i>24 = 2u, and U24  Di = (n  1) number of beats/s = 23 x 6 or, 2u,  u, = 138 or, u, = 138 D 2 = x>i + 6 = 138 + 6 = 144 Hz. 54. (d) 55. (c) : According to Gauss's law. 56. (b) : The figure can be represented as
CA 15 — =— Cc 16 If 0 is the temperature when A and C are mixed then, Q ( 0  1 2 ) = Cc(280) 280 CA 15 •'• Solving, 0 = 20.2°C.
SPE BR ET M E '05
Now, the two capacitors are in parallel. Ceq = C + C = 2C and C = t0A/d. ,. 2C =
24 PHYSICS F O R Y O U 
57. (b) : V cc — F, O C
and
V2
16
oc
<2 — => Fi = — = 8 V;
2/j
2x10 20 r=5xl0"2x2.5xl07 12.5 125 = 0.16 m = 16 cm. 65. (a) 66. (b)
16
YL1
F> 1 <72 J^J
Vn
1 <T , but , C2=C, 2 C2 2 (There appears to be a misprint in the question paper. Values of q and C are given micro units but the answer is in milli units). 58. (b) : 59. (d) : R = 10 Q Operating voltage = 100 V Rate of heat developed, H = PR
V 110 A A And /, = —= = 11 . H R 10 77= ( l l ) 2 x io = 1210 W.
67. (b) : IA = 30 x IO' 3 A, RA = 20 Q, R = ? F = 7^(7? + 7?„) => 3 = 30 x 10~3(20 + R) => 0.1 x io 3 = 20 + 7? => 7? = 100  2 0 = 80 Q. 68. (a) : Magnetic field at the centre of the semicircle _ PO.ti7 4tt r Here r = U% 471 I e= I L— dt
69. (c) : L = 0.5 H. e
=
60. (b) : Temperature of cold junction = 0°C Neutral temperature = 285°C Inversion temperature = 570°C. 61. (b) /= h 1 (1/3) O ... (i) or, 3 P =  0 or, P = ^ 2 2 When Q resistance is connected in series then the balance point shifted as 1/3 3 P+6 _ O 2/3 1/3 or, P + 6 = 20 or, 3(P + 6) = 3Q ... (ii) 62. (b) : P Q
5 10 ^ L— = — x — = 2.5 10 2 dt
70. (c) : £ = 141sin(628/) £ = 7s0sincof 0) = 628 => 27CD = 628 628 628 o = = 100 Hz 271 2x3.14 V =3L " " 72
141
72
1.41
= 100 V. xl00
71. (a) : Efficiency =
E I
PP
or,
80=
120x20
1000 x 7 p 1
JtC
x 100 =» / .p = 3 A.
From (i), ^ + 6 = 2 0 or, 6 = 2 0  ^ = ^ 2 2 2 or, 0 = 4. Then P = 2. 63. (a) : In the loop containing three cells 7?,/, + Ei  E2  E3 = 0 Then, /?,/, + 3  3  2 = 0 or, /?,/, = 2 / , = 2/7?, = 2/10 or, = 0.2 A. In the loop containing single cell R2i2 + E2 = 0 or, R2i2 = E2 —E —3 or, » 2 = — 2  = — =  0.1 A /, = 0.1 A. 30 7?>
2
72. ( b ) : Resonance angular frequency,
m
1
78X10 x20x10"6
_3
104 100 , co0 =  5 = = x10 = 2500 rad/s. 716 4
220V
44
J
25 x 102 x 20 x 10~6 x 220 220 25x 102 x 8x IO 3 or, 7 = V5 2 = 5 .
64. (c) :
or, Bq = or, r = r Bq/m r7 1 As qhn = 2.5 x 10 kg" , 5 = 0.051, v = 2 x 105 m/s wv
24
72 = (5) 2 + ( l l  l l ) 2
PHYSICS FOR YOU 
SPE BR ETME
'05
JAM
H r) J^Ii F D R
(For Q.NO. 1 to 45) Only one option is correct and there will be negative marking in these PASSAGE 1: (Read the following passage and answer the questions numbered 1 to 5. They have only one correct option) An experimental setup of verification of photoelectric effect is shown in ,8 Q, 100 cm the diagram. The o voltage across the electrodes is 2Q 20 V measured with the help of an ideal voltmeter, and which can be varied by moving jockey Jon the potentiometer wire. The battery used in potentiometer circuit is of 20 V and its internal resistance is 2 Q.. The resistance of 100 cm long potentiometer wire is 8 Q. The photocurrent is measured with the help of an ideal ammeter. Two plates of potassium oxide of area 50 cm2 at separation 0.5 mm are used in the vacuum tube. Photo current in the circuit is very small so we can treat potentiometer circuit an independent circuit. The wavelengths of various colours is as follows :
1 Light Violet 2 Blue 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Orange 6 Red
questions.
resistance of vacuum tube operating in this case when jockey is at end P. (a) 8 x 10s Q (b) 16 x 106 Q 6 (c) 8 x io Q (d) 10 x io 6 n 3. It is found that ammeter current remains unchanged (2 pA) even when the jockey is moved from the end P to the middle point of the potentiometer wire. Assuming all the incident photons eject electron and the power of the light incident is 4 x io  6 W. Then the colour of the incident light is (a) green (b) violet (c) red (d) orange 4. Which of the following colour may not give photoelectric effect from this cathode? (a) green (b) violet (c) red (d) orange 5. When other light falls on the anode plate the ammeter reading remains zero till, jockey is moved from the end P to the middle point of the wire PO. Thereafter the deflection is recorded in the ammeter. The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electron is (a) 16 eV (b) 8 eV (c) 4 eV (d) 10 eV Passage 2 : (Read the following passage and answer the questions numbered 6 to 10. They have only one correct option). Two closed identical conducting containers are found in the laboratory of an old scientist. For the verification of the gas some experiments are performed on the two boxes and the results are noted. Experiment 1. When the two containers are weighed WA = 225 g , WB = 160 g and mass of evacuated container Wr = 100 g. Experiment 2. When the two container^ are given same amount of heat same temperature rise is recorded. The
X in A40004500 45005000 50005500 55006000 60006500 65007000
1. The number of electrons appeared on the surface of the cathode plate, when the jockey is connected at the end P of the potentiometer wire. Assume that no radiation is falling on the plates. , (a) 8.85 x 106 (b) 11.0625'x 109 (c) 8.85 x 10" (d) 0. 2. When radiation falls on the cathode plate a current of 2 iA is recorded in the ammeter. Assuming that the vacuum tube setup follows ohm's law, the equivalent
Contributed by Deptt. of Physics. Resonance, Kota (Rajasthan)
24 P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  SEPTEMBER '05
pressure change found are APA = 2.5 atm. APB =1.5 atm. Required data for unknown gas :
Mono (molar mass He 4g Ne 20 g F2 19 g Ar 40 g N2 28 g Kr 84 g 32 g Xe Rd 131 g 222 g Cl2 71 g
11. Acceleration of the first particle was (b) 4 x io 16 m/s 2 (a) zero 16 2 (d) 2.5 x 1015 m/s 2 (c) 2 x 10 m/s 12. Acceleration of second particle was (a) 5 x 1015 m/s 2 (b) 4 x 1016 m/s 2 16 2 (c) 2 x 10 m/s (d) zero 13. If the first particle is stopped for a moment and then released. The velocity of centre of mass of the system just after the release will be 1 „ 1 103 m/s (a)  x 10~30 m/s (b) 3 3 (c) 14. (a) (b) (d) x 103 m/s (d) none of these
Dia H? (molar mass) 2 g
o2
6. Identify the type of gas filled in container^ and B respectively. (a) mono, mono (b) dia, dia (c) mono, dia (d) dia, mono. 7. Identify the gas filled in the container A and B. (d) Ar, 0 2 (a) N 2 , Ne (b) He, H2 (c) 0 2 , Ar 8. Total number of molecules in A (here NA = Avagadro number) 125 (b) 3.125 NA (a) — • 64 125 (d) 32.25 NA (c) ~ N A 28 9. The initial internal energy of the gas in container A, If the containers were at room temperature 300 K initially (a) 1406.25 cal (b) 1000 cal (c) 2812.5 cal (d) none of these 10. If the gases have initial temperature 300 K and they are mixed in an adiabatic container having the same volume as the previous containers. Now the temperature of the mixture is T and pressure is P. Then (a) P> PA, T> 300 K (b) P > PB, T = 300 K (c) P < PA, T= 300 K (d) P> PA, T< 300 K Passage 3 : (Read the following passage and answer the questions numbered 11 to 15. They have only one correct option). In a certain experiment to measure the ratio of charge and mass of elementary charged particles, a surprising result was obtained in which two particles moved in such a way that the distance between them remained constant always. It was also noticed that, this two particle system was isolated from all other particles and no force was acting on this system except the force between these two masses. After careful observation followed by intensive calculation it was deduced that velocity of these two particles was always opposite in direction and magnitude of velocity was 103 m/s and 2 x 103 m/s for first and second particle respectively and masses of these particles were 2 x IO"30 kg and 10 30 kg respectively. Distance between them came out to be 12 A. (1 A = IO"10 m)
Path of the two particles was intersecting straight lines parabolic (c) circular straight line w.r.t. each other
15. Angular velocity of the first particle was : 12 12 (a) 2.5 x 10 rad/s (b) 4 x io rad/s 13 (c) 4 x io rad/s (d) zero 16. A one dimensional Situation Velocities gas is a hypothetical +5 A 4 2 +3 gas with molecules that B +1 3 +4 6 can move along only a single axis. The given C +2 +4 +5 +3 table gives four D 4 +3 +3 5 situations, the velocities in metre per second of such a gas having four molecules. The plus and minus sign refer to the direction of the velocity along the axis. In which situation rootmeansquare speed of the molecules is greatest? (a) A (b) B (c) C (d) D 17. A composite bar of length L= + L2 is made up from a rod of material 1 and of length I , attached to a rod of material 2 and of length L2 as shown. If a , and a 2 are their respective coefficients of linear expansion, then equivalent coefficient of linear expansion for the composite rod is (a) (c) a ,Z,2 +a2Z,, L a + a2L2 (b) (d) a,a 2 (Z.,  + L2) (a,Z, r +a 2 Z, 2 )
24
18. Some of the thermodynamic parameters are state variables while some are process variables. Some
24 P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  SEPTEMBER '05
grouping of the parameters are given. Choose the correct one. (a) state variables : temperature, no. of moles process variables : internal energy, work done by the gas. (b) state variables : volume, temperature process variables : internal energy, work done by the gas. (c) state variables : work done by the gas, heat rejected by the gas process variables : temperature, volume. (d) state variables : internal energy, volume process variables : work done by the gas, heat absorbed by the gas. 19. The given curve represents the variation of temperature as a function of volume for one mole of an ideal gas. Which of the following curves best represents the variation of pressure as a function of volume?
(a)
d 2d 3 dX
(b)
d
•
2d
3dx.
(C)
2d
3 dy
(d)
d
2d
3 d x \
t/ '
,c. 45°
•
22. A current carrying rod AB is placed perpendicular to an infinitely long current carrying wire as shown in the figure. The point at which the conductor should be hinged so that it will not : rotate. (a) A (b) B (c) C (d) some where between A and C
3>K
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
23. A steel rod of length 1 m is heated from 25°C to 75°C keeping its length constant. The longitudinal strain developed in the rod is (Given : Coefficient of linear expansion of steel = 12 x 10"^/°C) (a) 6 x 10"6 (b)  6 x io~5 4 (c)  6 x io(d) zero 24. In the circuit shown in figure, the resistance of voltmeter is 6 kfi. The voltmeter reading will be (a) 6 V (b) 5 V (c) 4 V (d) 3 V
10 V H i 
20. A uniform disc of radius R lies in the xy plane, with its centre at origin. Its moment of inertia about 2axis is equal to its moment of inertia about line y = x + c. The value of c will be (a) R  j (b) ±" (d) R
3k£2 2 k£2
+R (c) J
21. Two very large thin Q 30 conducting plates having 1 same crosssectional area are placed as shown in figure they are carrying *X (d, 0) (2d, 0) (3d, 0) charges 0 and 3 Q respectively. The variation of electric field as a function at x (for x = 0 to x = 3d) will be best represented by
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
25. In the arrangement shown in figure, dielectric constant = 2 and K2 = 3. If the capacitance are C, and C2 respectively, then C,/C2 will be (the gaps shown are negligible)
(a) 1 : 1
(b) 2 : 3
(c) 9 : 5
(d) 25 : 24
26. If a charged conductor B is so placed inside a hollow conductor that it touches the outer conductor. Then what will happen to its charge? (a) The charge of B is transferred to A and comes on its outer surface. (b) The entire charge of B is transferred to A and comes on its inner surface. (c) A positive charge is induced on the outer surface of A. (d) No charge will be transferred to A. 27. A steady current is set up in a cubic network composed of wires of equal resistance and length d as shown in figure. What is the magnetic field at the centre P due to the cubic network? (a)
8
by B and C by the instant A, B and C meet for the first time is (a) 3 : 2 (b) 5 : 4 (c) 3 : 5 (d) 3 : 7 32. Two blocks A and B a b each of mass m are placed F ^ ^ 2F .. , 30° on a smooth horizontal ////l!llll7ll!ll)))>//>//l surface. Two horizontal force F and 2F are applied on the2 blocks A and B respectively as shown in figure. The blocks! does not slide on block B. Then the normal reaction acting between the two blocks is (a) F (b) Fi2 (c) FlS (d) 3F. 33. Two beads A and B move along a semicircular wire frame as shown in figure. The beads are connected by an inelastic string which always remains tight. At an instant the speed of A is u, ZBAC = 45° and ZBOC = 75°, where O is the centre of the semicircular arc. The speed of bead B at that instant is (a) 72it (c) u l l j i (b) u (d) 7273;
V
(

HHO3/ 72c/ QkI d
4ti d
(b)
(c) 0
Ho 4T T Ho (d) 4ti
28. In a stepup transformer the turns ratio is 10. If the frequency of the current in the primary coil is 50 Hz then the frequency of the current in the secondary coil will be (a) 500 Hz (b) 5 Hz (c) 60 Hz (d) 50 Hz 29. Arectangular loop of sides of length .'and b is placed in xy plane.Auniform but time varying magnetic field of strength B = 20// +1 Ot2j + 50k where / is time elapsed. The magnitude of induced e.m.f. at time 7 is (a) 20 + 20 / (b) 20 (c) 20 t (d) zero 30. Atrain of mass M is moving on a circular track of radius R with constant speed V. The length of the train is half of the perimeter of the track. The linear momentum of the train will be (a) zero (b) 2 MV
71
34. A particle revolves in clockwise direction (as seen from point A) in a circle C of radius 1 cm and completes one revolution in 2 sec. The axis of the circle and the principal axis of the mirror M coincide. Call it AB. The radius of curvature of the mirror is 20 cm.Then the direction of revolution (as seen from A) of the image of the particle and its speed is (a) clockwise, 1.57 cm/s (b) clockwise, 3.14 cm/s (c) anticlockwise, 1.57 cm/s (d) Anticlockwise, 3.14 cm/s 35. The wavelengths of Ka Xrays of two metals A and B are 4 . 1 and respectively, where R is Rydberg 1875R 675R constant. The number of elements lying between A and B according to their atomic numbers is (a) 3 (b) 6 (c) 5 (d) 4 36. A proton and a neutron are both shot at 100 m/s
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
(c) MVR
(d) MV.
31. Three particles A, B and C move m a circle of radius r = 1/71 m, in anticlockwise direction with speeds. 1 m/s, 2,5 m/s and 2 m/s respectively. The initial positions of A, B and C are as shown in fiaure. The ratio of distance travelled 24
towards a l2C nucleus. Which particle, if either, is more likely to be absorbed by the nucleus? (a) the proton (b) the neutron (c) both particles are about equally likely to be absorbed (d) neither particle will be absorbed 37. The given lens is broken /j\ into four parts and rearranged / \ as shown. If the initial focal III length is / then after I3 rearrangement the equivalent \ j focal length is » (a) f (b) J12 (c) >74
(c) If the assertion is a true statement but reason is a false statement (d) If the assertion is false and reason is true statement. 41. Assertion : The binding energy of a satellite does not depend upon the mass of the satellite. Reason : Binding energy is the negative value of total energy of satellite. 42. Assertion : Simple harmonic motion is not a uniformly accelerated motion. Reason : Velocity is nonuniform in SHM.
43. Assertion : If two waves of same amplitude produce a resultant wave of same amplitude, then the phase 38. A block of iron is kept at the bottom of a bucket difference between them will be 120°. full of water at 2°C. The water exerts bouyant force on. Reason : The resultant amplitude of two waves is equal the block. If the temperature of water is increased by to sum of amplitude of two waves. I °C the temperature of iron block also increases by 44. Assertion : The D.C. and A.C. both can be measured 1 °C. The bouyant force on the block by water by a hot wire instrument. (a) will increase (b) will decrease Reason : The hot wire instrument is based on the (c) will not change principle of magnetic effect of current. (d) may decrease or increase depending on the values of their coefficient of expansion 45. Assertion : Although the surfaces of goggle lens 39. An ice block at 0°C is dropped from height h above the ground. What should be the value of h so that it melts completely by the time it reaches the bottom assuming the loss of whole gravitational potential energy is used as heat by the ice? [Given : LF = 80 cal/gm] (a) 33.6 m (b) 33.6 km (c) 8 m (d) 8 km 40. In the figure shown, a person wants to raise a block lying on the ground to a height h. In both the cases if time required is same then in which case he has to exert more force. Assume pulleys and strings light, (a) (i) (b) (ii) (c) same in both (d) cannot be determined Direction for questions (41 and 45) : Read each of the following numbered pairs of statement carefully one is an assertion (A) and the second is a possible reason (R). Mark your answers to question according to followings. (a) If both assertion and the reason are true and the reason is an adequate explanation of assertion. (b) If both assertion and the reason are true statements, but the reason does not explain the assertion
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
are curved, it does not have any power. Reason : In case of goggles, both the curved surfaces have equal radii of curvature and have centre of curvature on the same side. One or more than one options may be correct (For Q.No. 46 to 55) 46. A solid sphere and a hollow sphere of the same material and of equal radii are heated to the same temperature (a) both will emit equal amount of radiation per unit time in the beginning (b) both will absorb equal amount of radiation from the surrounding in the beginning (c) the initial rate of cooling will be the same for the two spheres (d) the two spheres will have equal temperatures at any instant. 47. A particle of mass m moves along a curve y = x2. When particle has acoordinate as 1/2 andxcomponent of velocity as 4 m/s then. (a) the position coordinate of particle are (1/2, 1/4) (b) the velocity of particle will be along the line 4x  4y  1 =0. (c) the magnitude of velocity at that instant is 4vr2 m/s (d) the magnitude of angular momentum of particle about origin at that position is 0.
48. An electron makes a transition from n = 2 to n = 1 state in a hydrogen like atom. (a) magnetic field at the site of nucleus is decreased by 16 times. (b) magnetic field at the site of nucleus is increased by 32 times (c) angular momentum of electron is changed (d) none of these 49. The half life period of a radioactive substance is 20 days. If its initial concentration is doubled then the halflife period will becomes (a) double (b) half (c) four times (d) remains same 50. A partition divides a container having 2P,2V, T P. V, T II I insulated walls into two compartments I and II. The same gas fills the two compartments whose initial parameters are given. The partition is a conducting wall which can move freely without friction. Which of the following statements is/are correct, with reference to the final equilibrium position? (a) The pressure in the two compartments are equal. (b) Volume of compartment I is 3 V/5 (c) Volume of compartment II is 12K/5 (d) Final pressure in compartment I is 5/73. 51. The rate of heat energy emitted by a body at an instant depends upon (a) area of the surface (b) difference of temperature between the surface and its surroundings (c) nature of the surface (d) none of these 52. The figure shows, a graph of the current in a iqa discharging circuit of a capacitor through a resistor 2 5A of resistance 10 Q. (a) The initial potential ~ 2s difference across the capacitor is 100 volt. (b) The capacitance of the capacitor is ^ ^ F
53. In series LCR circuit voltage drop across resistance is 8 volt, across inductor is 6 volt and across capacitor is 12 volt. Then (a) voltage of the source will be leading current in the circuit (b) voltage drop across each element will be less than the applied voltage (c) power factor of circuit will be 4/3 (d) none of these 54. Which of the following is not possible ?
P, = 2 x i o ! N/m 2
P„=
1 X 105N/m2
(moving fluid) capilarry
(stationary fluid)
(stationary fluid)
55. In which of the following cases potential energy increases? (a) a spring is compressed from its natural length (b) two opposite charges are brought near each other (c) a body is taken away against gravitational force. (d) air bubble rises up in water. ANSWERS 1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 46. 50. 53. (d) (c) (d) (b) (c) (a) (b) (b) (d) (a, b) (a, b, (d) Note 2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. 47. c, d) 54. 3. 8. 13. 18. 23. 28. 33. 38. 43. c) 51. (a, c, d) (c) (d) (a) (c) (d) (c) (d) (b) (c) (a, b, 4. 9. 14. 19. 24. 29. 34. 39. 44. 48. (a, c) 52. 55. (d) (d) (c) (d) (c) (d) (a) (a) (c) (c) (c) (c) (a) (b) (d) (a) (b) (c) (b, c) (a, b, (a, c) 5. 10. 15. 20. 25. 30. 35. 40. 45. 49. c, d) (b) (b) (a) (b) (d) (b) (d) (a) (a) (d)
t
(c) The total heat produced in the circuit will be 500 . , jou es In 2 (d) The thermal power in the resistor will decrease with 1 second a time constant
2 In 2 24
: For detailed solutions please log on to out website www.resonance.ac. in
P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  SEPTEMBER '05
SOLVED PAPER
MANIPUR PMT  2005
1. Find the correct statement. (a) A potentiometer is a better device to determine e.m.f. of a cell than a voltmeter. (b) Voltmeter is a better device to determine e.m.f. of a cell than a potentiometer. (c) Both potentiometer and voltmeter is equally better device to determine e.m.f of a cell. (d) e.m.f. of a cell cannot be determined by potentiometer. 2. An electromagnetic wave travelling in vacuum is given by £,. = 30cosf2n x 10s?  2jut/3], where EV is in volt per meter, 1 in second and x in meter. Then the frequency and direction of propagation of the wave are (a) 10s Hz, x direction (b) 10s Hz, y direction (c) 30 Hz, x direction (d) 30 Hz, > direction. > 3. o4Pu246 emits in succession two (3 particles, three aparticles and three y ray photons. The resultant isotope is (a) qo Th 214 (b) 88Ra234 238 (d) 92U236. (c) 92U 4. A 4 (iF condenser is charged to 400 volt and then its plates are joined through a resistance. The heat produce in the resistance is (a) 0.64 J (b) 0.32 J (c) 0.16J (d) 1.28 J. 5. (a) (b) (c) (d) Photoelectric current can be increased by increasing the intensity of light decreasing the intensity of light increasing the frequency of light decreasing the frequency of light. (a) only electric field increases the energy of the charged particle (b) only magnetic field increases the energy of the charged particle (c) electric and magnetic field alternately increases the energy of the charged particle (d) none of the above. 8. The equation of a body executing simple harmonic , d2x „ . , motion is given by n— + gx = 0 . The time period dt' of motion is 1/2 ,1/2 4tt° (a) (b) S V " \l/2 V' 11 (c)  . 3 l ~rj\ J (d) 4 71 It J 9. In a pressure cooker, cooking is fast because (a) boiling point of water increases because of lower pressure (b) boiling point of water increases because of increasing of pressure (c) increase of latent heat of steam (d) decrease of latent heat of steam. 1 0. The. absorptive power of a perfectly black body is (a) zero (b) one (c) infinite (d) one hundred. 11. by (a) (b) (c) (d) A galvanometer can be converted to an ammeter connecting a high resistance in series with it a high resistance in parallel with it a low resistance in series with it a low resistance in parallel with it.
6. After two hours 1/16 of the initial amount of a certain radioactive isotope remains undecayed. The half life of the isotope is (a) 15 min (b) 30 min (c) 45 min (d) 1 hour. 7. In a cyclotron
12. A tuning fork vibrates at 250 Hz. The length of the shortest closed organ pipe that will resonate with tuning fork is, if the speed of sound in air is 350 m/s (a) 25 cm (b) 33 cm (c) 60 cm (d) 35 cm.
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
13. Which of the following quantity remain constant in the motion of a planet in an elliptic orbit as seen from the sun? (a) speed of the planet (b) kinetic energy of the planet (c) angular momentum of the planet (d) velocity of the planet. 14. Water is normally used as a coolant liquid to take away heat from running engine because of its (a) high density (b) high specific heat (c) low specific heat (d) high normal conductivity. 15. per (a) (c) A circular disc is rotating at the rate of600 rotations minute, its angular velocity is 10 radian/sec (b) 60 radian/sec 31.4 radian/sec (d) 62.8 radian/sec.
(a) 107 (c) 10"
(b) 1010 (d) 1012.
22. The average size of a nucleus is of the order of (a) 10 , 5 m (b) 10 'm (c) 10~8m (d) lO^m. 23. Which of the following material is normally used as moderator in nuclear reactors? (a) iron (b) germanium (c) graphite (d) oxygen. 24. The halflife of Pa218 is 3 minutes. What fraction of 10 g sample of Pa218 will remain after 15 minutes? (a) 1/5 (b) 1/2 (c) 1/125 (d) 1/32. 25. Which of the following transition in a hydrogen atom emits the photon of lowest frequency? (a) n = 2 to n = 1 (b) n = 4 to n = 2 (c) n = 4 to n = 3 (d) n = 3 to n = 1. ANSWERS 1. (a) : Potentiometer measures the e.m.f. of a cell more accurately as it is a null method. 2. ( a ) : E = 30cos
16. A charged particle moving with velocity v enters a magnetic field in a direction perpendicular to the field and moves in a circular path of radius r. Then the time period of the particle (a) increases with v (b) decreases with v (c) independent of v (d) increases with v and r. 17. The refractive index of glass is 1.5. The speed of light in glass is (a) 2 x i o 1 0 m/s (b) 3 x IO10 m/s 8 (c) 2 x i o m/s (d) 3 x io 8 m/s. 18. Two sources of light are coherent if light waves coming from them are of same (a) wavelength (b) velocity (c) phase difference (d) frequency. 19. The speed of violet light and red light are exactly same (a) in vacuum and air (b) in vacuum but not in air (c) in air but not in vacuum (d) neither in vacuum nor in air. 20. Candela is the unit of (a) luminous intensity (b) luminous efficiency (c) luminous flux (d) illuminants. 21. The energy release by fission of a single uranium atom is 200 MeV. The number of fission per second required to produce 3.2 watt of power is
24
2jix10V2tvc
2nx" 3 .
Comparing it with the relation Ey  30cos
2jiu t
we get i) = 10 s Hz and direction of propagation of the wave is x direction. 3. (a) : An alpha particle has mass of 4 units and charge of +2 units. A Pparticle has negligible mass and carries unit negative charge. A yparticle carry no charge and massless particle. With emission of two P, 3 a and 3y particles, decrease in mass number 12 and decrease in charge number = 6  2 = 4. The resultant isotope is 90 Th 234 . 4. (b) : Heat produced in the resistance is equal to energy stored in capacitor = CV1 = —x4xl0"* x(400) 2 = 0.32 J. 2 2 5. (a) : By increasing the intensity of the incident light, number of photons falling on a metal surface increases which will increase the number of photoelectrons thus the photoelectric current will increase.
PHYSICS F O R YOU  SEPTEMBER '05
Our Selected Students in PMT  2005
r> a S
I? I ft s ? J ¥ k
I ?§ ?
» J » tPm*
t>
A* *
alt*
> ,
C^N
*
Our Selection in 2 0 0 5 .
zm j.w
mix
STATE LEVEL PMT:
506
( Admission in progress for )
All India Test Series
All India Test Series consists of specially designed Prescheduled Minor and Major test papers in all subjects covering all Major concepts of the syllabus. Medium : English & Hindi Eligibility No of Test : XII App. or XII passed
:
1 Subjective Test Series
PRIZM is a subjective Test Series to prepare students for CBSE ( P M / P D ) Mains Exam. II sets the students on a carefully chartered path which beings with Subjective Paper Test Series Medium Admission : English & Hindi : Direct Course Name Eligibility : XII App. or XII passed
Admission : Direct
15 (Obj.) & 04 (Sub) Test
No of Test : 09 Subjective Test FSR^zrvi
Course Fee Rs.3000 / (Service Tax as applicable )
Course Fee : Rs. 800 A ( Service Tax as applicable )
Correspondence Course
Dasyyani Classes Ltd. study Material comprises of a systematized study material on each subject, specially designed exercises both for CBSE(PM/PD) / STATE LEVEL P M T a self monitoring stage by stage system helping you to analyse your own success on a rating scale and boosting your confidence gradually. Medium : English & Hindi Eligibility : XI.XII App. / Passed Admission : Direct Course Fee : Rs. 4000 /No of Sets : 04 Sets ( Service Tax as applicable)
Postal Test Series
Daswani Classes Ltd. Provided Postal Test Series for those Students how are unable to join the Class Room Coaching as well All India test Series also at our any centre. You can get the benefits through this Test Series regarding your Pre  Medical Selection. Medium : English & Hindi Eligibility : XII App. or XII passed Admission : Direct Course Fee Rs. 2000 /No of Test : 15 (Obj.) & 04 (Sub ) Test ( Service Tax as applicable )
For more details visit at our web site
Scholarship
Daswani Classes Ltd. Provided Scholarship for those students who cleared Screening Exam of CBSE ( PM / PD ) in 2004 or scored more then 85 % marks in XII Board Exam can Enroll Free of cost for All India Test Series, Postal Test Series or PRIZM A d m i s s i o n P r o c e d u r e :Apply on a plain paper specifying medium ( Hindi I English ) along with two passport size photographs, attested copies of dass X & XII board marksheets, Scholarship documents ( if any ) and Demand Draft in Favour o f " D a s w a n i C l a s s e s L t d . " Payable at Kota. I m p o r t a n t : Write clearly your Name, Date of birth, Father's Name, Full Address, Telephone Number with STD. Code and any necessary information.
WHERE
SUCCESS
IS
MUST
Corp. Office : 683, C.A.D. Circle , Dadabari main Road Kota ( Raj. ) Tel: 0744  2501876,2501433 Fax : 0744  2501433 Mob, 98293  45678 Website : www.daswanigroup.com E  Mail: info@daswanigroup.com
Our Centres : Ajmer, Agra, Allahabad, Alwar, Bikaner, Bilaspur, Bhopal, Chandigarh, Gorakhpur, Gwalior, Indore. Jaipur. Jodhpur, Kanpur, Meerut, Raipur, Ratlam, Rishikesh. Sikar, Udaipur, Vadodara. 24 PHYSICS F O R YOU  SEPTEMBER '05
N_ (b> : — =    or, Nn 16 => n = 4. t 2 1 i.e. n = — = 4 or, T = — = — hr = 30 min. T 4 2 7. (b) : In a cyclotron energy of the charged particle 6. 1 B2q2r2 2 m ,, 1 B2q2r2 i.e. b = 2 m is
8
i.e. v =
3x10
„ ,„ 8 , = 2x10 m/s.
1.5 18. (c) : For coherent source wavelength is same and phase is also same or phase difference is constant. 19. (a) : For vacuum and air all colours have same speed. 20. (a) : The S.I. unit of luminous intensity is candela. 21. (c) : Number of fission per second
or,
E
B d2x ~ = dr gmx
n d2x Compare it with the relation, m 2 = —kx dt we get k = gm/n Time period of SHM = T = 2 n J ~ or, T = 2%\— V k V Sm or, T= 4n.3/2
'
(c):
d2x 7t ~dF=~gx
or
'
m
H __=10" 200xl0 6 xl.6xl0" 1 9 22. (a) : The size of a nucleus is the order of 1 fm i.e. 10~15 m. 23. (c) : Graphite is used as a moderator in nuclear reactors.
=
9. (b) : Increase of pressure increases the boiling point of water. 10. (b) : For a perfectly black body the absorptive power is unity. 11. (d) : To convert a galvanometer into an ammeter a low resistance is connected in parallel. 12. (d) : For a closed pipe, n = v/4L 350 350 or, 250 = or, L = — = 0.35m = 35cm. 4L 4x250 13. (c) : In a motion of a planet in an elliptic orbit as seen from the sun angular momentum of the planet remain constant. 14. (b) : Water has high specific heat. It means for a particular change in temperature it would draw maximum heat. 15. (d) : co = 2nu = 2 x 3 . 1 4 x    = 62.8 radian/sec. 60 1 6. (c) : Time of the particle i.e. it is independent of v. 17. (c) : P = 2nm
or,
N N0 N
12
or,
N K 12,
Na~ 32
25. (c) : The energy in the «th state of a hydrogen atom is given by E ^n
+
^2 > n = Et
[where
=  1 3 . 6 eV]
A£ = E2 —
(i) « = 2 to n = 1 l2 4\ (ii) n  4 to n = 2
J__J_
AE = E,
= 0.75£,
22 42 (iii) n = 4 to n — 3 _4 7 (iv) n = 3 to n = 2 A£ = £, 32
AE
AE = E
E. =0.1875£, 16 7 144
= E,
I
2
1_
= 0.004/i,
= E
4
9
= — E. = 0 . 8 81£ . 9 1 For n = 4 to n = 3, hydrogen atom emits a photon of lowest frequency.
24
72 P H Y S I C S F O R YOl! I DECEMBER '05
A1IMS
CBSE ^DPR/IT) (AFMC )(VMMC)
(EAMCET) (WBJEE)
( BHU ) ( CMC )
(Manipal PMT)
2006 Medical Entrance Exam
( UP c p m t H
(CET Karnataka)
Practice Test Paper
Bihar )
(PMT
( JIPMER )
(mp PMT) (MGIMSJ (PMDT
1. (a) (c) (d)
Haryana] (Kerala P m T ) (Raj. (a) (b) (c) (d) inside the square plate inside the circular plate at the point of contact outside the system.
PMT) (TNPCEE )
The unit of amplification factor is ohm (b) mho AV' a nondimensional constant.
2. A rubber ball is dropped from a height of 5 metre on a plane where the acceleration due to gravity is not known. On bouncing, it rises to a height of 1.8 m. On bouncing the ball loses its velocity by a factor of (a) 3/5 (b) 9/25 (c) 2/5 (d) 16/25. 3. A force F makes an angle 20° with another force F. The resultant of two forces : s (a) f c o s 2 0 ° (b :'/cos20° (c) 2 f c o s 10° (p • cos 10°. 4. In the case of an obliqtt •t ' \ the velocity is perpendicular to acceleration (a) once only (b) twice (c) thrice (d) four times. 5. 1 kg block and 0.5 kg lkg 0.5 k g block move together on a ir//mi/> horizontal f r i c t i o n l e s s surface. Each block exerts a force of 6 N on the other. The blocks moves with a uniform acceleration of (a) 3 ms 2 (b) 6 ms" 2 2 (c) 9 ms(d) 12 ms  2 . 6. A 5 kg brick of dimensions 20 cm x 10 cm x 8 cm is lying on the largest base. It is now made to stand with length vertical. If g = 10 ms 2 , then the amount of work done is (a) 3 J (b) 5 J (c) 7 J (d) 9 J. 7. If the density of a material of a square plate and a circular plate shown in figure is same, the centre o f mass of the composite system will be
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
8. If a planet consists of a satellite whose mass and radius were both half that of the earth, the acceleration due to gravity at its surface would be (g on planet = 9.8 ms  2 ) 2 (a) 4.9 ms" (b) 8.9 ms"2 2 (c) 19.6 ms" (d) 29.4 ms"2. 9. If Rm is the radius of moon's orbit round the earth, am the acceleration of moon towards the centre of earth, and Rc the radius of earth. Then am is equal to (if g is acceleration due to gravity on the surface of earth)
10. Figure shows stress/ strain curves for three different materials taken to fracture. Which curve best shows the behaviour of a copper wire, and which one best shows the behaviour of a glass fibre? (a) (b) (c) (d) Copper wire I I II II Glass fibre II III III I
strain
x
11. The mercury thread in a barometric tube stands at a height of 0.76 metre. If density of mercury is 13.6 x 103 kg n r 3 a n d g i s 9.8 ms 2 , then the atmospheric pressure in Nitt 2 is
3 (a) 1.01 x io 5 (c) 1.01 X 10
4 (b) 1.01 x 10 6 (d) 1.01 x io .
19. The graph between E and r for a conducting uniformly charged sphere of radius R is
12. Two different gases of molecular masses Mx and M2 are at the same temperature. What is the ratio of their mean square speeds? (b) M2/Mx (a) M , / A / 2 (c) 4mxim1 (d)
ylM3/Ml
(a)
r=R
(b)
r=R
.
13. Heat energy absorbed by a system in going through a cyclic process shown in figure is (a) 107 rr J 4 (b) 10 71 J (c) 10" 71 J 3 (d) 10^ 7t J.
30
(C)
10
(d)
r=R
10
30
P in kPa
14. An object is at temperature of 400°C. At what approximate temperature would it radiate energy twice as first? The temperature of surroundings may be assumed to be negligible? (a) 200°C (b) 200 K (c) 800°C (d) 800 K. 15. Consider a wave represented by y = cos(5007  70x) where y is in mm, x in m and n n s. Which of the following are true? (a) the wave is a standing wave (b) the speed of the wave is 50/7 ms 1 (c) the frequency of oscillations is 500 x 2n Hz (d) none of these 16. A springmass system oscillates in a car. If the car accelerates on a horizontal road, the frequency of oscillation will (a) increase (b) decrease (c) remain the same (d) becomes zero. 17. A particle moves in the XY plane according to the equation r = (i +2 j)A cosco t . The motion of the particle is (a) on a straight line (c) periodic (b) simple harmonic (d) all of these."
20. A point charge is surrounded symmetrically by six identical charges at distance r as shown in the figure. How much work is done by the forces of electrostatic repulsion when the point charge at the centre is removed at infinity? (a) zero (c) (b) (d) 6<?2 4tts0r 12 q 2
47ts Qr
47ts0r
21. Two dipoles (dipole moment p) are placed as shown in figure. The force between two dipoles will be (a) (c) 22. (a) (c) (d) 3 kp2 2x4 3kp 4x4 (b) (d) 3kp 3kp 5x4
When the cells are connected in parallel the e.m.f. increases (b) the e.m.f. decreases the current capacity increases the current capacity decreases.
18. When a charged particle is projected in a direction perpendicular to a uniform and static electric field, its path is (a) a straight line (b) simple harmonic (c) a parabola (d) all of these.
24
23. The potential difference between the terminals of a cell in an open circuit was 2.2 V. When it was measured across a resistor of 5 £2 it was found to be 1.8 V. The internal resistance of the cell is (a) 10/9 Q (b) 9/10 Q (c) 12/7 Q (d) 7/12 £2. 24. A long metallic cylinder of radius R has a current i flowing through it. The magnetic induction B will vary with distance from the centre as shown in the figure
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
(c) t
(d) t
28. Lenz's law is a consequence of the law of conservation of (a) charge (b) mass (c) energy (d) momentum. 29. In a series LCR circuit, at resonance, the (a) total impedence is 25. A proton is released from the origin at a place where fields E and B exist along  v e Xaxis and  v e Zaxis respectively. Find the displacement of the proton, when its velocity becomes perpendicular to the electric field for the first time, along Taxis 2 Em  2 Em (a) ~iPr (b) eBJ eB1 Em Em (d) ~7B* 26. A proton (mass m and charge +e) and aparticle (mass 4m and charge +2e) are projected with the same kinetic energy at right angles to a uniform magnetic field. Which one of the following statements will be true? (a) the aparticle will be bent in a circular path with a smaller radius than proton (b) the radius of the path of aparticle will be greater than that of proton (c) radius of the paths of both the particles will be the same (d) both will go through the magnetic field in the straight line. 27. In the circuit shown in figure, the key is pressed at time t = 0. Which graph in figure shows the variation of current / with time /?
key i
La—— Ceo
(b) total impendence is R (d) voltage across C and L are in phase (d) the voltage across C lags the source voltage by Till. 30. are (a) (c) A star is moving towards earth, then spectral lines shifted towards blue (b) red green (d) infrared.
31. A diffraction pattern is obtained by using red light. If red light is replaced by blue light then (a) bands become broader and farther apart (b) bands disappear (c) bands become narrow and crowded together (d) no change in bands will takes place. 32. An air bubble in a glass slab (p = 1.5) is 5 cm deep when viewed from one face and 2 cm deep when viewed from the opposite face. The thickness of the slab is (a) 7 cm (b) 10.5 cm (c) 7.5 cm (d) 10 cm. 33. If refractive index of water is 4/3 and glass is 5/3, then critical angle so that light travelling from glass to water is completely reflected is (a) sin'(4/5) (b) siir'(5/4) (c) sin 1 (3/5) (d) sin '(4/5). 34. In a photoemissive cell, speed of fastest electron is v when radiations of wavelength X are incident on it. If incident wavelength is changes to thrice the earlier wavelength, speed of fastest emitted electron will be ,1/4 / . \ 1/2 I4 (a) v (  (b) (c) less than (d) greater than vl — \
rwMi VAVR
(a)
(b)
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
35. If the momentum of a particle is doubled, then wavelength associated with the particle will be (a) remains unchanged (b) half (c) double (d) none of these. 36. 0.5 (a) (c) The deBroglie wavelength of an electron of speed kms 1 is 1.5 x 10~6 m (b) 1.5 x IO"8 m 10 1.5 x IO" m (d) 1.5 x io' 2 m.
43. If the shortest wavelength of Lyman series is 911.6 A, then largest wavelength of the same series will be (a) 1119.8 A (b) 1215.5 A (c) 1376.8 A (d) 1417.9 A. 44. If ultraviolet light of wavelength 800 A is allowed to fall on the hydrogen atom in its ground state, electron with kinetic energy 1.8 eV is liberated. If wavelength of the incident radiations is changed to 700 A, then Planck's constant = 6.57 x IO"34 J sec) (a) 3.8 eV (b) 4.0 eV (c) 4.8 eV (d) 6.0 eV. 45. A hole in Ptype semiconductor is (a) missing atom (b) a missing electron (c) a donor level (d) an excess electron. 46. Truth table given below corresponds to (a) AND gate (b) OR gate (c) NAND gate (d) NOR gate. 47. In the figure given, input is across A and C and output is across B and D. Then output is (a) zero (b) Vi (c) half wave rectified (d) full wave rectified. 48. Which of the following is responsible for the flow of current in a conductor? (a) positive ions (b) free electrons (c) protons and holes (d) protons. 49. Current gain of a semiconductor device is a = —
'E
37. A proton and an aparticle are accelerated through the same potential difference. Ratio of deBroglie wavelength of the proton to that of aparticle will be (a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 2 7 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 2V2
38. Potential energy Vof a pair of nucleons varies with their distance d as (a) V « d (b) V = constant for d < 0 and V = 0 for d > d0 where d0 is same fixed distance (c) Voc \ld (d) dr2. 39. Binding energies per nucleon for Li7 and He4 are 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV respectively. Then energy of the reaction : Li7 + H1 — He4 is » (a) 19.6 MeV (b) 17.3 MeV (c) 8.4 MeV (d) 2.4 MeV. 40. Two radioactive materials Xt and X2 have decay constants 10/A. and 1/1 respectively. If initially, they have same number of nuclei, then ratio of the number of nuclei of X, to that of X2 will be Me, after a time (a) (1/9) X (b) (1/10)1 (c) (1/11)1 (d) (11/10)1. 41. When hydrogen atom is in its first excited level, its radius is (a) half of the radius of hydrogen atom in its ground state (b) same as radius of hydrogen atom in its ground state (c) twice of the radius of hydrogen atom in it's ground state (d) four times as the hydrogen atom in its ground state. 42. Uranium235 is used as nuclear fuel in a nuclear reactor having power level 1 MW. Amount of fuel needed in one year will be (given : energy released per fission = 200 MeV) (a) 87 gm (b) 103 gm (c) 385 gm (d) 148.5 gm
54
Inputs A B 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
Output Y 0 1 1 1
and (3 = — then relation between a and 3 is IR 'B (a) P = a 1+ a (b) a  1P
(d) non? of these. (c) P = a 1 a 50. A combination of AND function and NOT function results in (a) OR gates (b) inversion (c) NAND gate , (d) NOR gate.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O l ! I DECEMBER '05
\
SOLUTIONS 1. (d): Since amplification factor is the ratio of output voltage and input voltage therefore it is a dimensionless constant. 2. (c) : Fractional loss in velocity
= 1  ^ = 12 1
2gxT8 * 2gx5
=1
_3 = 2 5~5
3. (c) : R = F + F2 + 2F2cos20° = 2/^(1 + cos20°) or R2 = 2/^(1 + 2cos 2 10°  1) = 4/^cos 2 10° or, R = 2FcoslO°. 4. ( a ) : At the highest point of trajectory, the velocity becomes horizontal. So, it is perpendicular to acceleration (which is directed vertically downwards). 5. (d) : 6 = 0.5a or, a = ^ r ms" = 12 ms" .
2 2
15. (b) : Comparing with y = acos(o>r  kx) co = 500, k = 70 co 500 50 Speed of wave = — = = — ms v k 70 7 16. (c) : The frequency of oscillation does not depend upon the effective value of acceleration due to gravity, in a springmass system. 17. (a) dv„ dvx = qE 18. (c) : In this case and —7 = 0 '' dt m dt (qE dx =v = This gives U m. dy = v = c o n s t a n t and ~^ y
V j
6. (a) : Initial height of C.G. = 4 cm Final height of C.G. = 10 cm Increase in height = 6 cm = 0.06 m Work done = 5 x 10 x 0.06 J = 3 J. 7. (a) : If p is mass/area, then mass of square is /2p. 7r/2p Again mass of circular plate is ——. Clearly, the square plate is more massive than the circular plate. G(M/2) _ GM 8. (c) : g' =  (R/2)2 ~ R2 2g = 2 x 9.8 ms"2 = 19.6 ms"2. 8' n2 a„, GMJRm 2 am R: L = 9. (d) : — = —^ or, 2 g GMJR g K or, A. R„ g.
We obtain x = ( — ) r andy = (constant) x t \2m) This gives y2 = constant x x. So, the path is parabola. 19. (b) : For conducting sphere, for r < R, E = 0. However, for r>R,E= kqlr2 1 where k = and q is the charge on the sphere.
47lSn
20. (b) : The potential energy of the point charge due •. Since 47ie0r the six charges are identical, the resultant potential energy Hence, the work done on 4ne0r moving the point charge to infinity is 6q2/4n£0r. 21. (b) : Electric field at dipole 2 is due to 1 is 1 P £2] = • (opposite to p t ) 47ts0 X" Electric potential energy of the PI = P Pi = P system is U = p2E2l F dU =
47CS 0 X
to individual charges surrounding it is U =
of the point charge is
6 q2
10. (d) : Copper is ductile and glass is brittle. 11. (c) : P = 0.76 x 13.6 x io 3 x 9.8 N n r 2 = 1.01 x 105 Nm"2. 12. (b) : CoctL Vm 13. (c) : Area = 14. (d) 2Q or, C x
2
3)_3
p2_3kp2
— M J = 100 TtJ.
7tD2
ux20x20'
dx 4tt£ oy 4 ttSqX Positive sign of F indicates that there is repulsion between the dipoles. 22. (c) : The current capacity increases when cells are connected in parallel. 23. (a) : r = —
„„ , , . E  V )
Q
673
\R = \
N
F2.2L.F
1.8
5 = — Q. 9
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
24. (b): In figure, if we want the magnetic field at an inside point P for a long metallic cylinder carrying current, / we consider a closed curve C as shown. We apply Ampere's circuital law here. 1 B(2nr) = ii0—Inr nR
,
B oc r. U nR If we want the magnetic field at a point P' distant r' from the axis of the cylinder, then we again apply Ampere's circuital law for the curve C'. We obtain
A B' (27i/) = n0/
bJ^LU2
2w' ' B'  r'"1 We now plot a graph for Bvsr. 25. ( b ) : Let us take axes as shown in figure. According to the righthanded system, the Zaxis is upward in the figure and hence the magnetic +X field is shown downwards. At any time, the velocity of the proton may be written as M = Uj + Uyj The electric and magnetic fields may be written as E = Ej and B = Bk respectively. The force on the proton is F = e(E+ixB) = eEjeB(uyi uxj) Thus, Fx = euyB and Fv = e(E  ux B) The components of the acceleration are (i) dt du e and r~ = (EuxB) (ii) dt m eB eB ,,, , d2y eB duK We have, — r = + = dt' m dt HI Ul HI HI m where io = eB/m ... (iii) This equation is similar to that for a simple harmonic motion. Thus,
56
(iv) uy = A sin(co? + 5) du and hence, — = Aocos(cor + S) (v) dt duv Fv At / = 0, ux — 0 and —~ = — = dt m m Putting in (iv) and (v), E eE 8 = 0 and A = mco B E . Thus, uv = sin co/ ' B The path of the proton will be perpendicular to the Kaxis when uv = 0. This will be the case for the first time at t where 7 777 C 17 sincof = 0 or, co? = 7i or, t = — = co eB ai dy E . Also, u„= — = sinco* dt B y or, \dy = — \sm(s>tdt o Bo E , , or, y = — (  l + coscof) Ba
At
Ba Ba Thus, the displacement along the 7axis is 2E _ 2 Em _  2 Em Ba BeB eB2
C O
t=,y
(  1 + COS7t) =
„ mv2 1 2 pl 26. ( c ) : q v B =  T  , E K =  m V = £ qB qB Since EK is same but ma = 4m p , qa = 2qp, we obtain R = pm p E K q„B
'
F
S
K
V ^ v E _ prirEK R„ = B q„B
Hence Rp = Ra. 27. (c): The current grows and then becomes maximum with the increase in time. 28. (c) 29. (b) : At resonance, a series LCR circuit is totally resistive. 30. (a) : When star moves towards earth, wavelength of the light coming from it decreases and spectral lines shift towards the blue side. 31. (c) : Band width wavelength When we go from red colour to blue colour wavelength
PHYSICS FOR YOU DECEMBER '05
dux =
eB
«„
decreases and hence band width decreases, i.e. bands become narrower. 32. (b) : Total apparent depth y = 7 cm If thickness of the slab = real depth = x (say) Then p. = x/y => x = y • p. = 7 x 1.5 = 10.5 cm. 33. (d) :
=
^K ~ a

_ 5/3 _ 5 ~ 4/3 ~ 4 c: Sill
1 sine
4 5
=>
• if 4
hc 1 —mv2 = — 2 X hc ,'2 _ (j, 31 _ he From (i) and (ii), provided — > < > t 3A. i.e. if photoelectrons are emitted. 35. (b) : As X = h/P
0)
(ii)
42. (c) : Power in 1 MW = 106 J/s Total E per second = 10s J Energy released per fission = 200 MeV = 2 0 0 x 1.6 x 10 x i o 6 J = 3.2 x 1 0 " " J. No. of fissions needed per second IO6 = r = 3.125xl0 16 . 3.2x10 No. of fissions needed in one year = 3.125 x io 16 x 365 x 24 x 60 x 60 = 9.86 x 1023 .". Number of nucleus involved in fission per year = 9.86 x 1023 235 .. Mass required = 7 — x 9 . 8 6 x l 0 23 « 385 gm 6.02x10 1 43. (b)
00
x..
I2 2
...
v  A . i f A U x . 2P 2l P 2
6.6x19" 36. (a) : X = or, X = mv 9.1x 10 x 500 X = 1.5 x 10"6 m. 37. (c) : XP = X = ••• XP:Xa 38. (c) 39. (b) : Binding energy of Li7 = 5 . 6 x 7 = 39.2 MeV Binding energy of He4 = 7.06 x 4 = 28.2 MeV Since the reaction is not balance, first balance the reaction then calculate the energy of the reaction. Li7 + H1 — 2 He 4 > Energy of the reaction = 2 x 28.24  39.2 = 17.3 MeV. 40. (a) : V, = N0e'xi', N2 = N0ex2> JV, t= 1 1 io_i A. 9' •7(2 m)eV h • 2 eV ~ 7(16m)eV 2y/2:l.
X.=X, = —x911.6 = 1215.5 A 3 3 44. (b): Let Ex and E2 be the kinetic energy of electrons for incident radiations of wavelength Xx and X2 respectively. 7.=  he A,
<()
(i)
(ii) he hc
hc r A E2 = ()>
v '2(4
Subtracting them, E, E.= £,=£,+ E,=) or, hc
_1_
=
LX2
X.
1 700x10"' 1 800x10"'
6.57x10 x 3x10 1.6x10""
£ 2 = 1.8 +
6.57xl0" 34 x3xl0* 1.6x10" [1.43 x io 7  1.25 x 107]
6.57x10 x3xl0s x0.18xl0 7 1.6xl0"19 or, E2 = 1.8 + 2.2 = 4.0 eV. 45. (b) : Hole is deficiency of electron. or, £ 2 =1.8 + 46. (b) : For OR gate, Y = 47. (d) 48. (b) 49. (c) A+B.
41. (d) : In first excited state n = 2 and r « n2. i.e. radius becomes four times.
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
50. (c) : AND gate followed by NOT gate is NAND gate.
Practice Paper for
IITJEE 2006
PARTA
Note: For Question Numbers 115 only one answer is correct. 1. An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very slowly (see the figure). The coefficient \ * / a of friction between the insect and the surface is 1/3. If the line joining the center of the hemispherical surface to the insect makes an angle a with the vertical, the maximum possible value of a is given by (a) cot a = 3 (b) tan a = 3 (c) sec a = 3 (d) cosec a =3 2. A string of negligible mass going over a clamped pulley of mass m supports a block of mass M as shown in the figure. The force on the pulley by the clamp is given by (a) 7 2 M g (c)
2
the platform is given an angular velocity ct>0 When the tortoise moves along a chord of the platform with a constant velocity (with respect to the platform), the angular velocity of the platform a)(t) will vary with time t as G)(0 ®(0 (a) <o(0 (c) (d) (b)
u>(0
(b) 4lmg W g (d) yl{M + mf + M2g
3. A symmetrical lamina of mass M consists of a square shape with a semicircular 7 ~ \ 2a section over the edge of the / square as shown in figure. •o The side of the square is 2a. The moment of inertia of the lamina about an axis through its centre of mass and perpendicular to the plane is 1:6 Ma2. The moment of inertia of the lamina about the tangent AB in the plane of the lamina is (a) 2.6 Ma2 (b) 4.8 Ma2 2 (c) 5.6 Ma (d) 9.8 Ma2 4. A circular platform is free to rotate in a horizontal plane about a vertical axis passing through its center. A tortoise is sitting at the edge of the platform. Now,
5. A hemispherical portion of w w w w w radius R is removed from the bottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume of the remaining cylinder is Kand its mass is M. It is suspended by a string in a liquid of density p where it stays vertical. The upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the liquid surface. The force on the bottom of the cylinder by the liquid is (a) Mg (b) Mg  Vpg (c) Mg + nR2hpg (d) pg(V + nR2h) 6. The PT diagram for an ideal gas is shown in the figure, where AC is an adiabatic process, find the corresponding PV diagram.
(a)
Contributed by : Vidyarthi Academy, 1/4, 1 st Floor, Chandrodaya Society, \Swastik Park, Opp. Swastik Chamber, Chembur, Mumbai, Ph.: 25222710
24
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
(c)
B
(d) V V
7. A nonconducting ring of radius 0.5 carries a total charge of 1.11 x 10"10 C distributed nonuniformly on its circumference producing an electric field E everywhere in space. The value of the integral  EdX (a) +2 V (X = 0 being center of the ring) in volts is (b)  1 V (c)  2 V (d) zero
11. A wave equation is given by y = /4cos(w/  kx), where symbols have their usual meanings. If vp is the maximum particle velocity and v is the wave velocity of the wave then (a) vp can never be equal to v (b) vp = v for X = 2nA (c) vp = v for X = A/2n (d) v^ = v for X := A/n. 12. A conducting sphere of radius R, carrying charge Q, lies inside an uncharged conducting shell of radius 2R. When joined by a metal wire, (a) 1/3 Q amount of charge will flow from the sphere to the shell (b) 2/3 Q amount of charge will flow from the sphere to the shell (c) QI2 amount of charge will flow from the sphere to the shell (d) (g2/167160/?) amount of heat will be produced 13. A proton, a deuteron and an alpha particle are accelerated through potentials of V, 2V and AV respectively. Their velocity will bear a ratio (a) 1 : 1 : 1 (b) 1: ^ 2 : 1 (c) 7 2 : 1: 1 (d) 1 14. Induced currents in position 2, 3, 4 are respectively (a) clockwise, anticlockwise, clockwise (b) anticlockwise, zero, anticlockwise (c) anticlockwise, zero, clockwise (d) anticlockwise, clockwise, clockwise
8. A particle of mass ^v m strikes elastically with a horizontal disc >x of radius R, with a velocity v as shown in the figure. If the mass of the disc is equal to that of the particle and the surface of contact is smooth, the speed of the disc just after collision and its direction of motion with respect to initial direction of particle is (a) (c) 2v along x 90° V3 (b) — v , 6 = 30° (d) 2v, 45°.
9. Distance between the centers of two stars is 10a. The masses of these stars are M and 16 M and their radii a and 2a respectively. A body of mass m is fired straight from the surface of the larger star towards the smaller star. The minimum initial speed for the body to reach the surface of smaller star is (a) ^ (c) GM — 5GM (b) (d) t 5 GM GM
5 N o current
15. The work function for a substance is 4.0 eV. The longest wavelength of light that can cause photoelectron emission from this substance is approximately (a) 540 nm (b) 400 nm (c) 310 nm (d) 220 nm
10. Two masses m and Mare attached to a spring, which is kept in a stretched position with maximum extension xQ and is released. Assuming the horizontal surface on which masses are placed to be frictionless, the time period for oscillation would be (a) 2n (c) Mm k(M + m) (b) 2ti,
PARTB
Note: For Question Numbers 1630 one or more than one answer/s is/are correct. 16. An uniform bar length 6a and mass %m lies on a smooth horizontal table. Twopoint masses m and 2m moving in the same horizontal plane with spe^d 2v and v, respectively, strike the bar (as shown in figure) and stick to the bar after collision. Denoting angular velocity (about the center of mass), total energy and
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
ff
(d) 271
2 Mm
k(M + m)
24
center of mass velocity by io, E and Vc respectively, we have after collision I 2m (a) Vc = 0 (b) « =
jv
2a
3a
(c) co = — 5a 3 mv' (d) E =
17. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v making an angle of 45° with the horizontal. Magnitude of the angular momentum of the projectile about the point of projection when the particle is at its maximum height (a) zero (b) mv 4jig
(c)
21. Consider a simple rigid body consisting of two particles of mass m separated by a massless rod of length 21. The midpoint of the rod is rigidly attached to a vertical axis which rotates at angular speed a>. The rod is skewed at angle a, as shown in the sketch. Neglect gravity. Angular momentum L of the system (a) about z axis is 2mPu> (b) about z axis is 2m/ 2 wcosa (c) L is constant (d) L is not constant Note: Question Numbers 2230 are passage based questions. Read the passages carefully and answer the following Multiple Choice Questions based on each passage. Each questions has one or more than one correct answer/s. Passage 1: In the beginning, electricity and magnetism were entirely separate subjects. The one dealt with glass rods and cat's fur, pith balls, batteries, currents, electrolysis, and lightning; the other with bar magnets, iron filings, compass needles, and the North Pole. But in 1820 Oersted noticed that an electric current could deflect a magnetic compass needle. Soon afterward, Ampere correctly postulated that all magnetic phenomena are due to electric charges in motion. Then, in 1831, Faraday discovered that a moving magnet generates an electric current. By the time Maxwell and Lorentz put the finishing touches on the theory of electricity and magnetism were inextricably intertwined. They could no longer be regarded as separate subjects, but rather as two aspects of a single subject: electromagnetism. Faraday had speculated that light, too, is electrical in nature. Maxwell's theory provided spectacular justification for this hypothesis, and soon optics the study of lenses, mirrors, prisms, interferences and diffraction was incorporated into electromagnetism. Hertz, who presented the decisive experimental confirmation for Maxwell's theory in 1888, put it this way: "The connection between light and electricity is now established In every flame, in every luminous particle, we see an electrical process Thus, the domain of electricity extends over the whole of nature. It even affects ourselves intimately: we perceive that we possess an electrical organthe eye." By 1900, then, three great branches of physics: electricity, magnetism and optics, had merged into a single unified theory.
ir
(d) m f i g t f
g
18. Two particles, each of mass m and charge q, are attached to the two ends of a light rigid rod of length 2R. The rod is rotated at constant angular speed about a perpendicular axis passing through its centre. The ratio of the magnitudes of the magnetic moment of the system and its angular momentum about the centre of the rod is (a) q/2m (b) qlm (c) 2qlm (d) q/nm 19. Three simple harmonic motions in the same direction having the same amplitude a and same period are superposed. If each differs in phase from the next by 45°, then (a) the resultant amplitude is (1 + J2)a (b) the phase of the resultant motion relative to the first is 90° (c) the energy associated with the resulting motion is (3 + 2 s[2 ) times the energy associated with any single motion (d) the resulting motion is not simple harmonic 20. A wave is represented by the equation y = A sin(10 + 157TJ + n/3), where x is in meters and t is in seconds. The expression represents (a) a wave travelling in the positive xdirection with a velocity 1.5 m/s. (b) a wave travelling in the negative xdirection with a velocity 1.5 m/s. (c) a wave travelling in the negative xdirection having a wavelength 0.2 m. (d) a wave travelling in the positive xdirection having a wavelength 0.2 m.
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
(And it was soon apparent that visible light represents only a tiny "window" in the vast spectrum of electromagnetic radiation, from radio through microwaves, infrared and ultraviolet, to Xrays and gamma rays.) 22. From passage we can conclude that (a) we cannot treat electricity and magnetism separately (b) we cannot treat optics and electromagnetism separately (c) there is a single set of equations which can explain current electricity, magnetism and optics (d) unification means single equation for all phenomenon 23. (a) According to Ampere a single moving charge can produce magnetic field (b) Maxwell's theory united electricity and optics (c) Discovery of electromagnetic radiation yrays, ultraviolet, visible, microwave etc. is unification theory. (d) Discoveries by Oersted and Faraday are different physical phenomenon. Passage 2: A bubble chamber contains a liquid that is just at the point of boiling. Tiny bubbles form along the trail of a highenergy particle passing through the liquid. The paths revealed in a cloud or bubble chamber can be photographed to provide a permanent record of the event. Figure shows the bubblechamber tracks resulting from an event that begins at p o i n t s . At this point a gamma ray, which is emitted by certain radioactive substance and travels in from the left. 24. (a) (b) (c) (d) 25. (b) (c) (d) Particles 1, 2, 3 are proton, electron, proton electron, proton, proton electron (e _1 ), positrion (e+), electron (e_1) electron (e^1), positrion (e+), yray (a) tracks are spiral because of friction track are spiral because of collisions 3 has least velocity while 1, 2 have same velocity 3 has maximum velocity
the principle of relativity is hardly new; it was stated clearly by Galileo, Question: does it also apply to the laws of electrodynamics? At first glance the answer would seem to be no. After all, a charge in motion produces a magnetic field, whereas a charge at rest does not. A charge carried along by the train would generate a magnetic field, but someone on the train, applying the laws of electrodynamics in that system, would predict no magnetic field. In fact, many of the equation of electrodynamics, starting with the Lorentz force law, make explicit reference to "the" velocity of the charge. It certainly appears, therefore, that electromagnetic theory presupposes the existence of a unique stationary reference frame, with respect to which ail velocities are to be measured. And yet there is an extraordinary coincidence that gives us pause. Suppose we mount a wire loop on a freight car, and have the train pass between the poles of a giant lrfagnet. As the loop rides through the magnetic field, a motional emf is established; according to the flux rule e = ~(d&/dt). This emf, remember, is due to the magnetic force on charges in the wire loop, which are moving along with the train. On the other hand, if someone on the train naively applied the laws of electrodynamics in that system, what would the prediction be? No magnetic force, because the loop is at rest. But as the magnet flies by, the magnetic field in the freight car will change, and a changing magnetic field induces an electric field, by Faraday's law. The resulting electric force would generate an emf in the loop given by equation e = ~(d<$/dt). 26. (a) (b) (c) (d) Let person on train be A and on ground B. A is wrong but B is right A is right but B is wrong both are wrong they differ in interpretation but predictions are in agreement
27. (a)A is correct in his interpretation if he is moving in inertial frame. (b) B is correct in interpretation if he is stationary. (c) in order to interpret correctly A and B must know in which frame they are. (d) Interpretation tells us the frames in which they are. Passage 4 : Air molecules are in continuous chaotic motion. What is the chance that all the air molecules
P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  SEPTEMBER '05
Passage 3 : In its application to classical mechanics,
24
in a room could, for an instant, randomly fly into the wastepaper basket in the corner of the room? Is such a thing possible? Is it probable? Perhaps surprisingly, the probability of this happening is far greater that the probability that all the air molecules in the room where you are sitting have the actual positions that they have right now. Although this may seem contrary to experience, we will prove it. Let the volume of the room be VR and that of wastepaper basket be VWH. What is the chance that all n molecules in the room will randomly end up in the wastepaper? For all n molecules the probability is (VWKIVR)n. This is exceedingly small number since VWB/VR « and n is large. For a 0.3 m 3 wastebasket and a 3000m 3 room, the probability is (10~4)", where n = 1024 a very small number indeed. Can this • • • possibility be • • larger than • probability of • • • s p e c i f i c • • distribution of • • m o l e c u l e s I I• I 1 1 1 I I I I I I• I II I• I I 444^ vWB * • spread evenly 2nm throughout the ° room? Imagine the room divided into many small cells each equal to the smallest volume a molecule can be forced to occupy. This is an illdefined number but for our purposes we will use the volume of a typical air molecule, roughly a cube 2 x 10~'° m on a side, or a volume of about 10~29m. In our room of volume 3000 m3, there are/V= 3000/10~29 = 3 x 1032 cells. The probability that a single molecule is found in a specific cell is UN. The probability that all n molecules are in their specific cells at any instant is (1 IN)" = ( l / 3 x l 0 12)n = 10"3 2'lo2S, or 102 8 x '°2:> times the probability of all 1024 molecules being found in the wastebasket. It is incomparably smaller. The difference is that in the second calculation the molecular positions were exactly specified whereas in the first one they could be anywhere in the wastebasket. Had we specified the positions in the first case also, the probabilities would have been the same. For the same reason all lottery numbers are equally good: 01 02 03 04 05 06 is as likely as 23 18 07 12 37 15. The distinction here is between the microstate of the system and its macrostate. A microstate is specified by giving a complete atomic description of each particle. A macrostate is specified by giving the values of
macroscopic quantities such as pressure, temperature and volume, without regard to what is happening at the atomic level. We did not know, or care about, the precise locations of the individual molecules. These two concepts are connected by the principle of equal probabilities: All possible microstates consistent with a given macrostate are equally likely. 28. (a) 1st calculation is for macrostate and 2 nd for microstate. (b) microstate corresponds to energy of atom or molecule. (c) microstate corresponds to variables measured in lab. (d) from the passage we conclude that macrostate can be achieved by probability distribution of atoms or molecules in microstates. 29. (a) For practical purposes pressure, volume etc. have a fixed value for given conditions. (b) the probability that every molecule occupies a specific location is greater than probability that all molecules are in waste basket. (c) the probability that every molecule occupies a specific location is less than probability that all molecules are in waste basket. (d) If the volume of waste basket is doubled the probability of all the molecules are found in it is increased by a factor of 2'°~ . 30. In equilibrium state (a) all the gas molecules are equally distributed in different microstates. (b) most of the molecules are in most probable microstate. (c) molecules are distributed in microstates as per temperature of each molecule. (d) nothing can be said regarding distribution of molecules in microstates. ANSWERS 1. 6. 11. 16. 19. 23. 27. 29. (a) (b) (b) (a, c, (a, c) (a, b, (a, b, (a, c) 2. 7. 12. d) 20. d) d) ' 30. 3. 8. 13. 17. (b, c) 21. 24. 28. (b) (d) (a) (d) (b) (b) (d) (b, d) (d) (c) (a, b, 4. 9. 14. 18. 22. 25. d) (b) (c) (c) (a) (c) (b, d) 5. (d) 10. (a) 15. (c)
26. (d)
24 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '05
'J
yll
rJMr sri
r j
i
\
rj
rj
r)
FOR
(For O.NO. 1 to 40) Only one option is correct and there will be negative marking in these (For Q.NO. I to 40) Only one option is correct and there will be negative marking in these questions. 1. The force exerted by a compression device is given by F(x) = kx(x I) for 0 <x < I, where I is the maximum possible compression, x is the compression and k is a constant. The work required to compress the device by a distance d will be maximum when (a) d = 1/4 (b) d = 1142 (c) d = //2 (d) d = /. 2. In a cricket match, the bowler running at velocity 1 m/s throws a ball (0.5 kg) at speed of 25 m/s after performing necessary bowling actions from a height 0.5 m from initial level in a time span of 1.5 seconds. The average power delivered to the ball by the bowler is (a) 317/3 W (b) 634/3 W (c) 635 W (d) 317.5 W 3. A particle is moving with velocity v = i + 3j and it produces an electric field at a point given by E = 2k • It will produce magnetic field at that point equal to (all quantities are in S.I. units) 6i  2j 6i +2 j (b) c (c) zero (d) cannot be determined from the given data. (a) 4. Figure shows a block kept on a rough inclined plane. The maximum external force down the incline for which the block remains at rest is 2 N while the maximum external force up the incline for which the block is at rest is ION. The coefficient of static friction p is (a) S / 2 (b) I/V6 (c) V3 (d) 1/V3 5. In the figure shown, the minimum force F to be applied perpendicular to the incline so that the block does not slide is (a) 0 (b) 40 N (c) 120 N (d) 200 N
questions)
6. A particle is projected with a velocity u making an angle 8 with the horizontal. The instantaneous power of the gravitational force (a) varies linearly with time (b) is constant throughout (c) is negative for complete path (d) none of the above 7. The energy that is dissipated during the braking process to stop a travelling car moving at 50 km/hr is r) times that dissipated to stop the car when travelling at 100 km/hr. r is equal to (a) 1/8 (b) 1/4 (c) less by a factor depending on the mass of the car (d) 1/2 8. The direction of the field B at P is shown. ly
The V shaped wire is in xy plane. (a) along + xaxis (b) along + zaxis (c) along (jr)axis (d) along + ^axis 9. If the magnetic field at P can be written as A"tan(o/2) then K is [Refer to the figure of question no. 8]
Contributed by Deptt. of Physics, Resonance, Kota (Rajasthan)
58 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  JANUARY '06 85
JV_ 4tt d jV (c) ltd (a)
(b) (d)
jV_ 2nd
ltd 10. The direction of field 5 at a point P symmetric to P* with respect to the vertex, i.e., along the axis and the same distance d, but inside the V is along (a) positive zaxis (b) negative xaxis (d) negative j/axis (c) negative zaxis
perpendicular planes as shown in figure. If /, = 2 A along the yaxis and /2 = 3 A along  v e zaxis &ndiAP=AB= 1 cm. The value of magnetic field strength B at P is
5 5
P
P*
(a) (3x10" T) j + (  4 x 10" T)k (b) (3xl0~ 5 T) / + (4x 10~5 T)ic (c) (4x10~5 T)j + (3xl 0"5 T)k (d) (  3 x 10  T) j + ( 4 x l 0' 5 T)k
/
>
X
11. A magnetic dipole M = (Ai + B]) J/Wb is placed in magnetic field. B = (Cx2i + Dy2j) Wb in XY plane at r = (Ei + Fj) m. Then force experienced by the bar magnet is (a) 2ACEi + 2BDF j (N) (b) 2ACEi(~N) (d) ACEi+BDFj(N) . (c) 0
15. The components of a force acting on a particle are varying according to the graphs shown. When the particle moves from (0, 5, 12) to (4, 20, 0) then the work done by this force is P. (in N) F, (inN)
*• .1' (in m)
12. An infinitely long wire carrying current 1 is along )' axis such that its one end is at points (0, b) while the wire extends upto + oo. The magnitude of magnetic field strength at point (a, 0) (a) (c) JV_ 14na slct2+b jV b
2
(0,0)
(a*0)
JV (b) 47r a 1 477b1 (d) none of these.
(a) 192 J (c) 0
(b) 400/3 J (d) none of these
4jta Ja +b2
13. Two observers moving with different velocities see that a point charge produces same magnetic field at the same point A . Their relative velocity must be parallel to r where r is the position vector of point A with respect to point charge. This statement js (a) true (b) false (c) nothing can be said (d) true only if the charge is moving perpendicular to the r . 14. Two infinitely long linear conductors are arranged perpendicular to each other and are in mutually
PHYSICS FOR YOU JANUARY '06
16. In the figure the variation of components of acceleration of a particle of mass 1 kg is shown with respect to time. The initial velocity of the particle is u = (3i + 4 j) m/s. The total work done by the resultant force on the particle in time interval from t = 0 to / = 4 seconds is
a , (ill m/s 2 ) a r (in m/s 2 )
> t (in
s)
/ (in s )
1
37°
•7
(a) 22.5 J (c) 0
(b) 10 J (d) none of these
17. The potential energy function associated with the force F = 4xyi + 2x2 j is (a) U =  2x 2 y (b) U =  2x2y + constant 2 (c) U = 2x y + constant (d) not defined 18. As shown in the figure, M >> ?: M is a man of mass 60 kg stand ing * on a block of mass 40 kg kept on ground. The coefficient of B friction between the feet of the ll'inninillimitllU'll man and the block is 0.3 and that between B and the ground is 0.1. If the man accelerates with an acceleration 2 m/s2 in the forward direction, then (a) it is not possible (b) B will move backwards with an acceleration 0.5 m/s2 (c) B will not move (d) B will move forward with an acceleration 0.5 m/s2. 19. In the figure the block/I of mass m is place on the block B of mass 2m. B rests on the lm floor. The coefficient of 7777777777777777777777777 friction between A and B as well as that between the floor and B is p. Both blocks are given the same initial velocity to the right. The acceleration of A with respect to B is (a) zero (b) pg to the left (c) pg to the right (d) 1/2 pg to the left
1 m/s. There is a magnetic field of 1 T perpendicular to the plane of revolution of charge. The tension in string at that moment will be (Neglect gravity) (a) 5 x 10"7 N ' (b) 15 x IO"7 N 6 (c) 10~ N (d) zero 23. Two changes +q and q are +9 i) 6>« attached to the two ends of a light rod of length L, as shown in figure.  > v The system is given a velocity v i> perpendicular to magnetic field q B . The magnetic force on the system of charges and magnitude of force on one charge by the rod, are respectively (a) zero, zero (b) zero, qvB (c) 2qvB, 0 (d) 2qvB, qvB 24. A neutral particle is at rest in a uniform magnetic field B. At t = 0, particle decays into two particles each of mass m and one of them having charge q. Both of these move off in separate paths lying in plane perpendicular to B . At later time, the particles collide. Then this time of collision is 777 17 217 777 (b) qB (a) qB mn (d) they will never collide. (c) ~4qB
25. A uniform magnetic field B = (3i+4j + k) exists in (2.2) region of space. A semicircular wire of radius ,K, 45° 20. A heavy body of mass 25 kg is to be dragged along I m carrying current 1 A having its centre at (2, 2, 0) a horizontal plane (p = 1 / a/3 ). The least force required is is placed in xy plane as shown in figure. The force on (a) 25 kgf (b) 2.5 kgf semicircular wire will be (c) 12.5 kgf (d) 25/S kgf. 21. Figure shows an equilateral triangle ABC of side / carrying currents, placed in uniform magnetic field B. The magnitude of magnetic force on triangle is (a) ilB (b) 2ilB (c) 3/75 (d) zero. 22. A charge of magnitude 1 pC and mass 1 mg is attached to one end of a light string of length 2 m whose other end is fixed. The charge is given a velocity (a) J2 (i+j + k) (c) V2 (i+jk) (b) J i ( i  j + k) (d) V2 (i+j + k)
26. There exists a uniform magnetic and electric field of magnitude 1 T and 1 V/m respectively along positive yaxis. A charged particle of mass 1 kg and of charge 1 C is having velocity 1 m/sec along xaxis and is at origin at / = 0. Then the coordinates of particle at time 7t seconds will be (a) (0, 1, 2) (b) (0,  n2/2,  2) 2 (c) (2, 7t /2, 2) (d) (0, tt2/2, 2) 27. A uniform magnetic field of magnitude 1 T exists
58 P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  JANUARY '06 87
in region y > 0 is along k direction as shown. A particle of charge 1 C is projected from
® B= 1 T
point (—v/3,  1 ) towards origin with speed 1 m/sec. , If mass of particle is 1 kg, then coordinates of centre of circle in which particle moves are (a) (1, 73) (b) (1,  7 3 ) (c).
to xaxis are placed at (d, 0) and (2d, 0) as shown in figure. Current per unit width in both the ® planes is same and current is flowing in the outward direction. The variation of magnetic induction as function o f x (0 < x < 3d) is best represented by
A
2
(d)
\
2 '
(a) d x 2d
3d
(b) »2d v id •
28. A uniform magnetic field exists in region which forms an equilateral triangle of side a. The magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane of the triangle. A charge q enters into this magnetic field perpendicularly with speed v along perpendicular bisector of one side and comes out along perpendicular bisector of other side. The magnetic induction in the triangle is 2 mv mv (b) qa (a) qa mv (c) 2 qa (d) 4qa 29. Two long conducting wires fixed at (0,cr)(j) point (0, a) and o) (0,  a ) carrying equal currents in + direction. A "(o, _a)(s> positive charged particle is projected with velocity u0 from the point (a, 0) as shown in figure, the electric field at that point so that particle will not experience any force there, is (space is gravity free) (•1,,'V,, along +z direction (a) 2 na Ho'Vll along  z direction (b) 2na (c) (d) IV''.) along  z direction 2^2na along + z direction
(C) 2d x id •
(d)
d
x
2d
id •
PASSAGE1 : (Read the following passage and answer the questions numbered 31 to 35. They have only one correct option) Ram and Ali are two fast friends since childhood. Ali neglected studies and now has no means to earn money other than a camel whereas Ram becomes an engineer. Now both are working in the same factory. Ali uses camel to transport the load within the factory. Due to low salary and degradation in health of camel, Ali becomes worried and meet his friend Ram and discusses his problem. Ram collected some data and with some assumptions concluded the following.
2^f2na 30. Two large conducting current planes perpendicular
48
(i) The load used in each trip is 1000 kg and has friction coefficient \i t = 0.1 and pv = 0.2. (ii) Mass of camel is 500 kg. (iii) Load is accelerated for first 50 m with constant acceleration, then it is pulled at a constant speed of 5 m/s for 2 km and at last stopped with constant retardation in 50 m.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U DECEMBER10
(iv) From biological data, the rate of consumption of energy of camel can be expressed as P = 18 x 103 V+ 104 J/s where P is the power and V is the velocity of the camel. After calculations on different issues Ram suggested proper food, speed of camel etc. to his friend. For the welfare ofAli, Ram wrote a letter to the management to increase his salary. (Assuming that the camel exerts a horizontal force on the load) : 31. Sign of work done by the camel on the load during parts of motion : accelerated motion, uniform motion and retarted motion respectively are (a) +ve, +ve, +ve (b) +ve, +ve,  v e (c) +ve, zero,  v e (d) +ve, zero, +ve 32. the (a) (c) The ratio of magnitude of work done by camel on load during accelerated motion to retarded motion is 3 :5 (b) 2.2 : 1 1: 1 (d) 5 : 3
Loudspeaker principle : A light voice coil is mounted so that it can move freely inside the magnetic field of a strong permanent magnet. The paper cone is attached to the voice coil and attached with a flexible mounting to the outer ring of the speaker support. Because there is a definite equilibrium position for the speaker cone and there is elasticity of the mounting structure, there is inevitably a free cone resonant frequency like that of a mass on a spring. The frequency can be determined by adjusting the mass and stiffness of the cone and voice coil.
paper cone attached t o coil moves air to produce sound
current away N * ' f r o m viewer A
interacting with
1 Clirren! t0Ward
viewer
33. Maximum power transmitted by the camel to load is (a) 6250 J/s (b) 5000 J/s (c) 10s J/s (d) 1250 J/s 34. The ratio of the energy consumed of the camel during uniform motion for the two cases when it moves with speed 5 m/s to the case when it moves with 10 m/s (a) 19/20 (b) 19/10 (c) 10/19 (d) 20/19. 35. the (a) (c) The total energy consumed of the camel during trip of 2100 m is 2.1 x io 6 J (b) 4.22 x io 7 J 4 2.22 x io J (d) 4.22 x 106 J
force on coil
Working : The radio drives a rapidly changing current through the coil. The current follows the vibrations of speech and the electromagnetic force follows the current changes, pushing the paper cone. Finally the air in front of the loudspeaker is set into vibration following the cone's motion, and sound waves are transmitted to the listener. 36. (a) (b) (c) The principle of loudspeaker is it converts mechanical energy into electrical energy permanent magnet exerts force on the coil the voice coil carrying current experiences torque due to which cone rotates and sound is produced. (d) paper cone attached to coil moves air to produce sound when the voice coil is vibrated by an AC current interacting with magnetic field. 37. A voice coil in a loudspeaker has 40 turns of wire and loopdiameter 1 cm and the current in the coil is 1 A. Assume that the magnetic field at each of the wire of the coil has constant magnitude 0.2 T and is directed at an *• X angle 60° from the normal to the plane of the coil as shown in figure. The magnitude and direction of magnetic force on the coil is
89
PASSAGE2 : (Read the following passage and answer the questions numbered 36 to 40. They have only one correct option) Components of loudspeaker : A loudspeaker consists of permanent magnets, basket, voice coil, flexible suspension ring and rigid speaker cone as shown in figure.
magnets basket
A Z S T ' Z Z " c o n e
paper
signal ^ from amplifier 58 P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  JANUARY '06
(a) 4K x 10"2 N, +y (c) 7i x 10 N,
2
(b) 4jt x 10" 2 N,  y y (d) 4a/3 7t x 10"2 N,  y
(c) The block will perform to and fro motion along the hemispherical surface about the original position. (d) The block can never come to the original position. 42. A particle of charge q and mass m enters normally (at point P) in a region of magnetic field with speed v. It comes out normally from Q after time T as shown in figure. The magnetic field B is present only in the region of radius R and is uniform. Initial and final velocities are along radial direction and they are perpendicular to each other. For this to happen, which of the following expression(s) is/are correct? (a) (c) mv B=~~q.R
Km
38. With reference to the figure of Q.37 when the current in the coil is given by / = /. cos (2000ti0 where t is in seconds, the coil will experience magnetic force in the positivesdirection in the time intervals o f : [Take the initial direction of current shown in figure to be positive] (a) 0 to 5 x 10"4 sec (b) 2.5 x lO^toS x 10^ sec (c) 0 to 2.5 x 10"4 sec (d) 2.5 x 10 4 to 7.5 x 10~4 sec 39. If the diameter of the cylindrical magnet, number of turns of the coil and cross section area of the wire of the coil are all doubled, then the magnetic force on the coil assuming the same potential difference, is (assume that value of magnetic field also gets doubled.) (a) same (b) doubled (c) becomes 8 times (d) becomes four times 40. If the voice coil is wound loosely and there is an approachable gap between two consecutive turns; when the current is passed through coil (a) it tries to contract. (b) it tries to expand. (c) current has no effect on coil. (d) coil will get contracted without current due to fixed magnets in loudspeaker. One or more than one options may be correct (For Q.No. 41 to 55): 41. In the figure, a block rests on the top of a smooth fixed hemispherical tube of radius R in which it can just fit. Two springs are connected to the base as shown. The block is given a small jerk so that it can slide on the hemisphere. The FX {F is magnitude of force and Xis compression) graph for the springs is given below. Which of the following may be possible?
(b) r =
7iR 2v
2 qB
(d) none of these.
43. There are two massless springs A and B of spring constant k4 and kn respectively and kA > kB. If WA and Wt, be denoted as work done on A and work done on B respectively, then (a) if they are compressed to same distance, IVA > WK (b) if they are compressed by same force (upto equilibrium state) WA < WH (c) if they are compressed by same distance, WA = WH (d) if they are compressed by same force (upto equilibrium state) W. > W,t 44. A space has magnetic field in which the lines of induction are as shown in the figure. (a) The magnetic induction at B is greater than the magnetic induction at C. (b) An electron placed at B experiences a larger force at B than that at C. (c) An electron shot with a velocity towards D, perpendicular to the lines of induction at B in the plane of the figure will emerge from its opposite corner. (d) An electron shot with a velocity along the line ABC will continue to be moving in the same direction. 45. Which of the following statements is/are incorrect?
P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  JANUARY '06 90
spring 1
spring 2
(a) The block will compress both springs by same amount. (b) The block will compress the springs during its to and fro motion about its original position by different amounts.
58
(a) No net force acts on a rectangular coil carrying a steady current when suspended freely in a uniform magnetic field. (b) A charged particle enters a region of uniform magnetic field at an angle of 85° to the magnetic lines of forces. The path of the particle is a circle. (c) When a body is free to slide down a rough inclined plane at a constant velocity, the direction of the total force exerted by the plane on the body is vertical. (d) When a body is at instantaneous rest, it must be in equilibrium. 46. Column X gives four physical quantities. Select the appropriate units for these from the options given in column Y. For some of the physical quantities, there may be more than one correct choice. X Y (i) Permittivity A. (joule) 1 (amp) 2
B. ( f a r a d ) 1 ( a m p ) 2 ( o h m ) 2
friction between the belt and the table as well as between the belt and the blocks B and C is p and the system is released from rest from the position shown, the speed with which the block B falls off the belt is (a) m/s if p = 0.2 (c) 2 m/s if p. = 0.5 (b) ^ 2 m/s if p = 0.2 (d) 2.5 m/s if p, = 0.5
49. In the figure E shown, initially the K O spring of negligible J 000001. smooth mass is in underformed 7777777777777777777777777777777 state and the block has zero velocity £ is a uniform electric field. Then (a) the maximum speed of the block will be (b) the maximum speed of the block will be QE VwA7 2 OE
(ii) Magnetic permeability (iii) Magnetic induction (iv) Energy (a) (i)  D (c) (iii)  C, E
C. (joule)1 (metre)"2 (amp)"1 D. (coul)2 (metre) 2 (newton) 1 E. (coul)1 (newton)1 (sec)1 (metre)"1 F. (henry)1 (volt)2 (ohm)"2 G. (coul)1 (newtonj'Qoule^'fmetre)" 1 (b) (ii)  A (d) (iv)  B, F
OE (c) the maximum compression of the spring will be  — K (d) the maximum compression of the spring will u ——. be Q 50. Which of the following quantities is/are frame dependent? (a) magnetic field due to current carrying wire (b) work done by a force on a particle (c) potential energy (d) kinetic energy 51. A block A (5 kg) rests over another block B (3 kg) placed over a smooth horizontal surface. There is friction between A and B. A horizontal force Fx gradually increasing from zero to a maximum is applied to A so that the blocks move together without relative motion. Instead of this another horizontal force F2, gradually increasing from zero to a maximum is applied to B so that the blocks move together without relative motion. Then
5 kg R 3 kg  > B 5 kg 3 kg
2
E
47. Two charged particles M and jV enter a space of uniform magnetic field, with velocities perpendicular to the magnetic field. The paths are as shown in the figure. The possible reasons for different paths may be (a) the charge of M is greater than that of N (b) the momentum of M is greater than that of N (c) specific charge of M is greater than that of N (d) the speed of M is less than that of N. 48. Two 30 kg blocks rest on a massless belt which passes over a fixed pulley and is attached to a 40 kg block. If c o e f f i c i e n t of
2 in 30 kg I S 2 m
cb
30 kg
(a) (b) (c) (d)
//hi/>>/>n//nm'// TT/777777777777777Tn F, (max) = F2 (max) F, (max) > F , (max) Fx (max) < F, (max) F, (max): F, (max) = 5 : 3
52. Which of the following is/are conservative force(s)?
4 0 kg ,/
(a)
F = 2/"3 r
(b) F = ——r r
91
58 P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  JANUARY '06
(c) F
3 (xi+yj) (a2 + y2f'2
(d)
F
3 (yi + Xj)
(* +/)
2 3/2
(c) magnetic force on the charged particle is zero (d) magnitude of magnetic force on charged particle is qVB. ANSWERS 1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 44. 48. 51. 54. (d) (a) (a) (b) (a) (d) (a) (d) (b, (a, (a, (b, (c, 2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. 45. 49. 52. 55. 3. (a) 8. (b) 13. (b) 18. (b) 23. (d). 28. (c) 33. (d) 38. (d) (a, b, c) lb. d) 46. (a, d) 50. (a, b, c) (a, d) (a) (b) (a) (b) (b) (b) (a) (d) 4. 9. 14. 19. 24. 29. 34. 39. 43. (a, d) 47. (b, c, d) 53. 5. (a) 10. (b) 15. (b) 20. (a) 25. (a) 30. (b) 35. (d) 40. (d) (a, b) (a, c, d) (a, b, c) (d) (c) (a) (c) (b) (d) (b) (a)
53. In the figure the variation of potential energy of a particle of mass m = 2 kg is represented w.r.t. its xcoordinate. The particle moves under the effect of this conservative force along the xaxis.Which of the following statements is/are correct about the particle? U (in J) 20
15
\
s
I
;
*• A (in m) "
(a) If it is released at the origin it will move in negative jcaxis. (b) If it is released at x = 2 + A where A > 0 then its maximum speed will be 5 m/s and it will perform oscillatory motion. (c) If initially A =  10 and u = s/6i then it will cross x = 10. (d) x = 5 andjc = + 5 are unstable equilibrium positions of the particle. 54. From a cylinder of radius R, a cylinder of radius R/2 is removed, as shown. Current flowing in the remaining cylinder is I. Magnetic field strength is (a) zero at point A (b) zero at point B (c) (d) I V at point A 3nR vJ at point B 3it R
*
c) d) c) d) d)
Note : For detailed solutions please log on to our website www. resonance, ac. in
EXAM ALERT
ALL INDIA INSTITUTE OF MEDICAL SCIENCES (AIIMS  2006)
Applications are invited in prescribed form for admission to MBBS Course commencing on 1st August, 2006. Entrance Examination will be held on 01.06.2006 (Thursday). Eligibility Criteria: Candidates who have passed 12th class 'A examination under 10 + 2 system or an equivalent examination with Physics, Chemistry, Biology and English, securing a minimum 60% marks (50% in case of Scheduled Caste/Scheduled Tribe candidates) in aggregate in Physics, Chemistry. Biology and English or whose results of Class  XII are likely to be declared by mid July, 2006 are eligible to apply. Schedule of sale of prospectuscumapplication forms: 1. Against cash payment by selected branches of S.B.I, (except AIIMS Campus. Ansari Nagar. New Delhi) 03.01.2006 to 17.02.2006 2. Against cash payment from S.B.I., AIIMS Campus. Ansari Nagar, New Delhi  03.01.2006 to 24.02.2006 3. By post against Bank Draft from the Office of Asstt. Controller of Examinations, AIIMS  03.01.2006 to 17.02.2006 4. Last date for receipt of completed applications at Examination Section. A.I.I.M.S  24.02.2006 by 5:00 p.m. For more details see exam alert on pcmbtodav.com or mtg.in
P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  JANUARY '06 92
•
A' R
,
W2
58
55. A charged particle is x©x X X „ B kept at rest on a smooth X X horizontal surface in X X uniform mangetic field X X B which is directed downwards as shown in the figure. An observer is moving with constant velocity v towards right. Then with respect to the observer which of the following statements is/are correct ? (a) path of the charged particle will be straight line (b) path of charged particle will be circular
(SOLVED PAPER
UP CPMT  2005*
1. The time constant is given by (a) L/R (b) R/L (c) LR (d) MLR. 2. Which colour shows .naximim deviation when passed through a prism? (a) white (b) red (c) violet (d) green. 3. A person standing in front of a mirror finds his image larger than himself. This implies that the mirror is (a) concave (b) convex (c) plane (d) none of these. 4. The equivalent resistance between A and B in the given circuit is (a) 10 Q (b) 20 Q (c) 30 Q (d) 40 Q. 5. a (a) (b) (c) (d) A galvanometer can be converted into voltmeter by low resistance in series high resistance in parallel low resistance in series high resistance in series. 9. Which of the following statement is correct for PNjunctions? (a) in depletion layer immovable ions exist (b) the current in the reverse biased condition is generally very small (c) /Wjunction diode is reverse biased then barrier potential increases (d) all of these. 10. If a spring is divided into n equal parts then k of one spring becomes (a) —— < n +1 (c) nk 11. (a) (b) (d) (b) (d) n+1 k n +1
Intensity of sound wave depends on frequency as well as amplitude frequency only (c) amplitude only number of overtone.
12. If a charge g, and q2 in e.s.u. kept at a distance r cm apart the potential energy of the system is (a) (c) r 3r (b) (d) ir
6. The dimension of Planck's constant is equal to (a) work (b) force (c) angular momentum (d) linear momentum. 7. A car is moving along a straight horizontal road with a speed of 72 km/hr. If the coefficient of static friction between road and tyres is 0.5, the shortest distance in which the car can be stopped is (a) 40 m (b) 80 m (c) 90 m (d) 180 m. 8. A ball of mass m elastically collides with a wall with velocity v, then change in momentum is equal to (a) 2m (b) 2mv (c)  2 m v (d) 2v.
58 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  JANUARY '06
13. If halflife of a substance is 4 days then amount of substance left after 2 days is (b)
(C) ^2
721 72 + 1
(d)
14. A 20 kg body requires 75 N to start the motion. If 60 N force is required to continue the motion then the coefficient of kinetic friction is (a) 0.42 (b) 0.53 (c) 0.31 (d) 0.25 15. For a capacitor to hold maximum charge it must have * Based on memorv
93
(a) large radius (c) solid sphere
(b) hollow sphere (d) small radius.
16. When a gas expands adiabatically (a) no energy is required for expansion (b) energy is required and it comes from the wall of the container of the gas (c) internal energy of the gas is used in doing work (d) law of conservation of energy does not hold. 17. Earth radius can be measured by (a) orbiting the satellite around the earth at two different positions (b) by the measurement of centre of gravity (c) by the value of g (d) by Cavendish value G, centre of gravity, the value of g. 18. A geostationary satellite has an orbital period of (a) 2 hr (b) 12 hr (c) 6 hr (d) 24 hr. 19. The radius of the Bohr orbit depends on (a) 1 In (b) n (c) Mn2 (d) n2. 20. If the distance between the plates of a parallel plate condenser is halved and the dielectric is doubled, then its capacity will (a) remain the same (b) increases by 4 times (c) increases by 2 times (d) increase by 16 times. 21. Resonance is a special case of (a) damped vibration (b) natural vibration (c) undamped vibration (d) forced vibration. 22. (a) (b) (c) (d) First law of thermodynamics states that system can do work system has pressure system has temperature heat is a form of energy.
25. (a) (c) (d)
The energy produced in the sun is due to fission reaction (b) fusion reaction motion of electrons and ions chemical reaction. is is
26. If the luminousefficiency of a lamp 2 lumen/watt and its luminous intensity 42 candela, then the power of the lamp is (a) 62 watt (b) 138 watt (c) 76 watt (d) 264 watt.
27. An ideal gas at 27°C is compressed adiabatically from 27 unit volume to 8 unit volume. If y = 5/3, then the rise of temperature is (a) 145°C (b) 370°C (c) 225°C (d) 402°C. 28. The period of revolution of a certain planet in an orbit of radius R is T. Its period of revolution in an orbit of radius 4R will be (a) T (c) 7 2 T (b) (d) 87:
29. If a cycle wheel of radius 4 m completes one revolution in two seconds then acceleration of the cycle is (a) 4 m/s 2 (b) 2rc2 m/s 2 2 2 (c) n m/s (d) 47t2 m/s 2 . 30. A force of 50 dynes is acted on a body of mass 5 g which is at rest for an interval of 3 sec, then impulse is (a) 0.16 x 10~3 Ns (b) 1.5 x 10 3 Ns 3 (c) 0.98 x 10" Ns (d) 2.5 x 10"3 Ns 31. When a source is going away from a stationary observer with the velocity equal to that of sound in air, then the frequency heard by observer will be (a) same (b) double (c) half (d) one third. 32. (a) (b) (c) (d) For the stability of any nucleus binding energy per nucleon will be more binding energy per nucleon will be less number of electrons will be more none of these.
23. A thermoelectric refrigerator works on (a) Seebeck effect (b) Peltier effect (c) Joule effect (d) photoelectric effect. 24. The bread gives a boy 5000 cals. How much height he can climb by using this energy of his efficiency is 28%. (mass of the body = 40 kg). (a) 5 m (b) 15 m (c) 10 m (d) 22 x 5 m.
58
33. If the critical angle for total internal reflection from a medium to vacuum is 30°, the velocity of light in the medium is (a) 3 x io 8 m/s (b) v^xlO* m/s (c) 6 x 10 s m/s (d) 1.5 x 108 m/s.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  JANUARY '06 94
34. A light of wavelength 4000 A is allowed to fall on a metal surface having work function 2 eV. The maximum velocity of the emitted electron is (a) 1.35 x 1 0 s m/S (b) 6.2 x 10s m/s 5 (c) 2.7 x 10 m/s (d) 8.1 x 105 m/s. 35. If a half wave rectifier is used to convert 50 Hz a.c. into d.c then the number of pulses present in rectified voltage is (a) 25 (b) 50 (c) 100 (d) 75. 36. In the circuit shown in figure at rMiim. resonance R jy/vV(a) the power factor is zero (b) the current through the a.c. source is minimum (c) the current through the a.c. source is maximum (d) currents through L and R are equal. 37. When light travels from air to water which parameter does not change? (a) wavelength (b) frequency (c) velocity (d) all of these. 38. The difference between soft and hard Xrays is of (a) velocity (b) intensity (c) frequency (d) polarization. 39. If vm, v r and vx are the speeds of microwave, Xrays and gamma rays respectively in vacuum then (a) vg > V; > vm (b) vir < vx < v,„ v >v (d) (c) y x< V„, 40. A material is placed in a magnetic field and it is thrown out of it. Then the material is (a) paramagnetic (b) diamagnetic (c) ferromagnetic (d) nonmagnetic. 41. Two long parallel wires carry equal currents I in the same direction . The length of each wire is / and the distance between them is a. Force acting on each wire is (a) (c) VJI1 2 na M,,/2/2 4na2 (b) (d) M 2na1 M l 4na2
Calculate the rate at which it develops heat in watts, (a) 670 (b) 810 (c) 1210 (d) 1310. 43. A wave is represented by x = 0 . 4 c o s  ^ 8 /  ^ j where x and y are in metres and t in seconds. The speed of the wave is (a) 0.5 m/s (b) 8 m/s (c) 16 m/s (d) 6 m/s. 44. If a body is released into a tunnel dug along the diameter of the earth of radius R0, it executes the simple harmonic motion with time period (b) (c) T = 2ti (d) r=27i. T= 2.
45. 540 g of ice at 0°C is mixed with 540 g of water at 80°C. The final temperature of the mixture in °C will be (a) 40°C (b) 79.9°C (c) 0°C (d) 80°C. 46. Work done by the system in closed path ABC A (a) zero ... (b) IP2WWi) V
 >
t'p,
B
1
C
(c) (K,  V2) (P,  P2) (d) (P + W — V2Vj
v
47. At which the following temperatures the value of surface tension of water is minimum? (a) 4°C (b) 25°C (c) 50°C (d) 75°C. 48. On increasing the temperature of a substance its colour become (a) red (b) yellow (c) green (d) white. 49. A nucleus „XM emits one a and one (3 particle. The resulting nucleus is (a) „X * (b) N2X~* (c) „_ 4 Z m ~ 4 (d) „ l Z "  4 .
95
42. At 10 Q electric heater supplies on a 110 V line.
58 P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  JANUARY '06
50. The relation between amplification factor (n), plate resistance (r p ) and mutual conductance (g,„) of a triode valve is given by (a) n = rp* gm (b) r p = ( i * gm (c) gm = n x rp (d) none of these. SOLUTIONS 1. (a) : As L/R is time constant of RL circuit, so its dimensions are [M°L°T]. 2. (c) : Deviation 8 =  l)A For violet colour i is maximum. Therefore 8 is maximum for violet colour. 3. ( a ) : The size of the image is more than the size of object, so the mirror is concave. 4. (a) : It is balanced Wheatstone bridge because     and     
with velocity v. .'. Change in momentum = mv  (mv) = 2mv. 9. (d) 10. (c) : When a spring constant k is cut into n equal parts, then spring constant of each part is nk. 11. (a) : Intensity of sound (7) (amplitude) 2 . 2 Also, / (frequency) Hence, intensity of sound depends both amplitide as well as frequency. 12. (a) : Potential energy of the system 1 4ti£(i r _A ~
, Mi , where K = l/47te . ,
0
13. (a) : N = jV0(1/2)" where n = number of half lives = t!T N_ M, 7 2 Hence the amount of susbtance left after two days is 1/72 . 14. (c) : Force of friction = force required to keep the body moving constant speed, i.e., F = 60 N. 60  = 0.31 R 20x9.8 15. (a) : Capacity (C) = 4jteQr Capacity of a spherical capacitor depends on the radius. Hence, capacitor of larger sphere hold maximum charge. 16. (e) : According to I s ' law of thermodynamics dO = dU + dW For adiabatic expansion, dO = 0 .. dll = dW. 17. (c) : Earth radius can be measured by the value of g. _GMjl S~ , where M„ = mass of earth Rc = radius of earth, G = gravitational constant. 18. (d) : A geostationary satellite resolves around the earth from west to east with the same angular velocity as the earth. Its period of revolution is one day i.e. 24 hours. 19. (d) : Radius of « th Bohr orbit is r„ °c n2. z,,KA 20. (b) : Capacity of a condenser, C = — C {Kid)
P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  JANUARY '06 96
or,
N
Therefore resistance between C and D is ineffective so total resistance between A and B
( 1 0 + 1 0 ) ( 1 0 + 10) _ 20x20
(10+10) + (10 + 10)
20 + 20
5. ( d ) : To convert galvanometer into a voltmeter we connect a high resistance in series of galvanometer. 6. (c) : Dimensions of Planck's constant (h) [£] = [ M l ^ ] M [T 1 ] Angular momentum, [L] = [/] [to] = [ML ] [T ] = [ M L T ' ] . Hence dimension of Planck's constant is equal to angular momentum. 7. (a) : Opposing force on a car is the force of friction, F [\.mg Reatardation, a = — = Hg
2 1 2
F
.'.
m m = 0.5x10 = 5 m/s 2 . 72 km/hr = 72x1000 = 20 m/s. 3600 v = 0, a =  5 m/s 2 . By third equation of motion, v2 = ir + 2as 0 = (20) 2 + 2(5) (s) or, s = (20)2/10 = 40 m. Hence, the shortest distance in which the car can be stopped is 40 m. 8. (b): Since the collision is elastic, so the ball returns
58
Therefore,
dJ2
c2
\ i J 2 K,
d
=4
1
C 2 or, — = ,4 C,
or,
T2 = T
or, t2 = 87*.
Hence capacity will increase by 4 times. 21. ( d ) : Resonance is a special case of forced vibration. 22. (d) : According to first law of thermodynamics heat is a form of energy. 23. (b) : Thermoelectric refrigerator is based on the Peltier effect. 24. (b) : Energy received by a boy from bread = 5000 cals = 5 0 00 x 4.2 = 21 x 103 J. According to law of conservation of energy mgh =
100
29. (d) : Angular velocity, w = 2n/T : 7t rad/sec. Y Centripetal acceleration = oo2r = 7I2/' = 47t2 m/s 2 .
CO :
2K
:.
30. (b) : Force, F = 50 dynes = 50 x 10 s N = 5 x 10"4 N Impulse = force x time .. Impulse = 5 x 10"4 x 3 = 15 x 10~4 = 1.5 x 10"3 Ns. 31. (c) : The frequency heard by the observer , 7V 1 7 7 = 7 = —77. v+v 2 32. (a) : For the stability of the nucleus it should have high binding energy per nucleon. . ^ \ v 33. (d) : sm C = — = — p c V = csinC = 3 x io 8 X s in30° = 1.5 x ]0 8 m/s. 1 hr 34. (b) : i  m v ^ — f r 0 ( c V ) 2 X 6.6x10 x 3 x 10s 4000 x 10"'° x 1.6x 10~'9
 2 = 3.12
x 21 x 103
, 28x21x10' ,, h= = 15m. 100x9.8x40 25. (b) : In the sun, energy is produced due to fusion reaction. 26. (d) : Luminous flux (0) = 4nI where 1 = luminous intensity .. 0 = 471 x 52 = 527.5 lumen luminous flux Since luminous efficiency = 1 power 527.5 „ „ „ .. Power of the lamp = —— = 263.7= 264 watt. 27. (d) : For adiabatic compression Given : 7", = 27°C = 300 K K, = 27 unit; V2 = 8 unit y = 5/3. W'=T2V2Y~' or, K
71
= 1.1 eV = 1.76 x IO"1" J.
2x1.76x10" 9.1X10"31
= constant.
 = 0.387x10''
or, v = 6.2 x 105 m/s. 35. (b) : 50 Hz a.c. has 100 pulses/sec. In half wave rectifier negative pulses are missing. Therefore, rectified voltage has 50 pulses/sec. 36. (c) : In the circuit shown L and C are in series. Therefore, it is a series resonance circuit. Hence current through a.c. source is maximum. 37. (b) : In going from air to water frequency remains the same. 38. (c) : The Xrays having large wavelength and low frequency are soft Xrays whereas Xrays having small wavelength and high f r e q u e n c y are hard Xrays, so difference is of frequency. 39. (d) : Microwaves, gamma rays and Xrays are electromagnetic waves. In vacuum, these waves travel with the same speed.
97
7 > 3 0 0 ( 0 " = 3 0 0 ( f ] = 675 K or, T2 = 675  273 = 402°C. 28. (d) : Time period of revolution of a planet in an orbit is T. According to Kepler's third law, r oc &
or,
M
U ;
2
M
or, T2 = TT
'r2yn
58 PHYSICS F O R YOU  JANUARY '06
i.e. velocity of light ( 3 * 10s m/s). \ = vm = vx. 40. (b) : Diamagnetic material is repelled by the magnetic field therefore when a diamagnetic material is placed in a magnetic field it is thrown out of it. 41. (a) : Force acting on each wire, F = Ho 4ti
21
of 2 units. A (3 particle has negligible mass and carries unit negative charge with the emission of one a and one P particle, decrease in mass number 4 and decrease in charge number = 2 ,  1 = 1. The resulting nucleus is „ _ (Z^ ~ 4 . 50. (a) : A/,, — , AF„ x = AV„ or, AK„ A/,. jx = r
Jl / =  2I l 4n a a
2
2n a V
2
42. (c) : Heat developed per second =
(110)
2
AV J L = AV L x M J L 11 = AF A/„ AV„
R 10 = 1210 watt
43. (c) : Given equation : x = 0.4cos^8/ — Compare the given equation with standard equation i~ x = acos 2nvt 2ny "
N
Available
BOUND VOLUMES of your Favourite Magazines
Mathematics Today Chemistry Today Physics For You Biology Today
Volumes of the following years are available : MathematicsToday Chemistry Today : : : : uuRffft 2004 2004 2004 2004,2003 & 2001
we get, 2711) = 8 or, u = — 271 2tt 1 y =  or, X = 47t Speed of the wave, v = v>\ s x47t = 16 m/s.
Heat required to melt 540 g of ice at 0°C = 540 x 80 = 43200 cals. Heat lost by water in cooling from 80°C to 0°C = 540 x 80 = 43200 cals Since both are equal, therefore, final temperature of mixture will become 0°C. 46. (b) : Work done by the system = area of AABC 2 2 47. (d): Surface tension of water decreases with increase in temperature, therefore at 75°C surface tension of water is minimum. 48. (a) : At 900°C, the colour of hot body is red. At 1200°C, the colour of hot body is yellow. At 1300°C, the colour of hot body is green. At 1600°C, the colour of hot body is white. Final colour = white. 49. (d): An alpha particle has mass of 4 units and charge
Physics ForYou BiologyToday
Price of each volume : Rs.170 Add Rs.25 (for each volume) for p o s t a g e .
How to order: Send money by demand draft/money order. Demand Draft should be drawn in favour of MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd. Mention the volume you require along with your name and address. M a i l y o u r o r d e r t o : Circulation Manager. MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd., 406, Taj Aptt.. Ring Road, NearSafdarjung Hospital, New Delhi 29.Tel. :26197344 e  m a i l : mtg@pcmbtoday.com
58
PHYSICS F O R YOU  JANUARY '06 98
Practice Paper for West Bengal JEE 2006
1. When two bodies move uniformly towards each other the distance between them decreases by 8 m/s. If both bodies move in the same direction with different speeds the distance between them increases by 2 m/s. The speeds of the two bodies will be (a) 4 m/s and 3 m/s (b) 4 m/s and 2 m/s (c) 5 m/s and 3 m/s (d) 7 m/s and 3 m/s. 2. Figure shows the displacement (x)time (t) graph of a particle moving on the Aaxis. Then (a) the particle is at rest (b) the particle is continuously going time (t) o along Xdirection (c) the velocity of the particle increases upto time t0 and then becomes constant (d) the particle moves at a constant velocity up to a time t0 and then stops. 3. The resultant of two vectors (A + B) and (A  B) is a force \jjA2 + B2. The angle between two given forces is (a) 7i/4 (b) 7i/3 (c) 7r/2 (d) 7t. The frictional force on the block is (a) 9.8 N (b) 0.7 * 9.8 * V 3 N (c) 9.8x^/3 N (d) 0.7 x 9.8 N. 7. A body of weight W is kept on a rough inclined plane having an angle of inclination with horizontal. 9 and friction coefficient p. Force required to pull the body downwards is (a) FF(p.cos8 + sinGj (b) M'(peosO  sinO) (c) lysine  pcos9) (d) !f'(pcos0 + 2sin0). 8. The position of centre of mass of a system of particles does not depend upon (a) masses of particles (b) forces on particles (c) position of the particles (d) relative distance between the particles. 9. A body is moving along a circular path with constant speed. If the direction of rotation is reversed and the speed is doubled, then (a) direction of centripetal acceleration remains unchanged (b) direction of centripetal acceleration is reversed (c) magnitude of centripetal acceleration is doubled (d) magnitude of centripetal acceleration is halved. 10. A curved road of diameter 1.8 km is banked so that no friction is required at a speed of 30 m/s. What is the banking angle? (a) 6° (b) 16° (c) 26° (d) 0.6°. 11. Rotational analogue of force in linear motion is (a) weight (b) angular momentum (c) moment of inertia (d) torque. 12. The mass of an electron is 9 x 10~31 kg. It revolves around the nucleus of an atom in a circular orbit of 4.0 A with a speed of 6 x 106 m/s. The angular momentum of electron is (a) 2.16 x 10"" kgm2/s (b) 2 x IO"35 kgnr/s (c) 3 x 10 33 kgm2/s (d) 3 x 1Q35 kgnr/s.
4. A particle of mass m moving with a velocity v make head on elastic collision with another particle of same mass and initially at rest. The velocity of first particle after collision is (a) v (b)  v (c) tv (d) 0. 5. A player caught a cricket ball of mass 150 grams, which was moving with a velocity of 20 m/s. If the catching process is completed in 0.1 second, the blow exerted by the ball on the hands of the player is (a) 100 N (b) 30 N (c) 20 N (d) 15 N. 6. A body of mass 2 kg rests on a rough inclined plane making an angle 30° with the horizontal. The coefficient of static friction between the block and the plane is 0.7.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  JANUARY'06 59
99
13. A body is under the action of two equal and opposite forces, each of 3 N. The body is displaced by 2 m. The work done is (a) + 6 J (b)  6 J (c) 0 (d) none of these. 14. A 12 HP motor has to be operated 8 hours/day. How much will it cost at the rate of 50 paise/kWh in 1 day? (a) Rs. 350/(b) Rs. 358/(c) Rs. 375/(d) Rs. 397/15. A rope ladder with a length / carrying a man with a mass m at its end is attached to the basket of a balloon with a mass M. The entire system is in equilibrium in air. As the man climbs up the ladder into the balloon, the balloon descends by a height h. Then the potential energy of the man (a) increases by mg(2l  h) (b) increases by mgh (c) increases by ivgl (d) increases by mg( 1 — h). 16. If earth suddenly shrinks by one third of its present radius, the acceleration due to gravity will be 2 3 4 9 s (d) (a) lb) 2 g <c> 9 g 4 17. Two spheres of equal radius r are touching each other. The force of attraction between them is proportional to (a) /•" (b) iA (c) r2 (d) r 18. Two pieces of wire A and B of the same material have their lengths in the ratio 1 : 2 and their diameters are in the ratio 2 : 1. If they are stretched by the same force, their elongations will be in the ratio (a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 4 (c) 1 : 8 (d) 8 : 1. 19. A body floats with one third of its volume outside water and 3/4 of its volume outside another liquid. The density of the other liquid is (a) 9/4 g/c.c. (b) 4/2 g/c.c. (c) 8/3 g/c.c. (d) 3/8 g/c.c. 20. Two cylinders A and B float on water. It is observed that A floats with 2/3rd of its volume immersed and B floats with half of its volume immersed. The ratio of densities of A and B is (a) 4 : 3 (b) 3 : 1 (c) 3 : 2 (d) 3 : 4. 21. Two spheres are made of same metal and have same mass. One is solid and the other is hollow. When heated 54
to the same temperature, percentage increase in diameter will be (a) more for hollow sphere (b) less for hollow sphere (c) same for both (d) cannot say. 22. The coefficient of linear expansion of a crystal in one direction is a , and that in every direction perpendicular to it is a 2 . The coefficient of cubical expansion is (a) 3a, (b) 3a 2 (c) a , + 2 a , (d) 2a, + a 2 . 23. In a pressure cooker, cooking is faster because the increase of vapour pressure (a) increases specific heat (b) decreases specific heat (c) decreases boiling point (d) increases the boiling point. 24. An ideal gas A and a real gas B have their volumes increased from V to 2 V under isothermal conditions. The increase in internal energy (a) of A will be more than B (b) of A will be less than B (c) will be same in both cases (d) will be zero in both cases. 25. When the door of a refrigerator in a room is kept open, the temperature of the room (a) decreases (b) increases (c) remains constant (d) cannot say. 26. Water falls from a height of 500 m. What is the rise in temperature of water at the bottom if whole energy is used up in heating water? (a) 0.96°C (b) 1.02°C (c) 1.16°C (d) 0.23°C. 27. The kinetic energy of one mole of an ideal gas is E = 3/2 RT. Then CP will be (a) 0.5R (b) 0.1/? (c) 1.57? (d) 2.5R. 28. During the melting of a slab of ice at 273 K at atmospheric pressure, (a) positive work is done by the ice water system on the atmosphere (b) positive work is done on the ice water system by the atmosphere (c) internal energy of ice water system remain constant (d) internal energy of ice water system decreases.
58 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  JANUARY '06 100
29. Heat given to a body which raises its temperature by 1°C is (a) water equivalent (b) specific heat (c) thermal capacity (d) temperature gradient. 30. A black body has maximum wavelength X„, at 2000 K. Its corresponding wavelength at 3000 K will be 3, 2. 16 81. (a) (b) (c) — A.„, (d) —A.,,, 31. A cylindrical rod is having temperature TT and T2 at its ends. The rate of flow of heat is 0 , cal/sec. If all the linear dimensions are doubled keeping temperatures constant, then the rate of flow of heat 02 will be (a) 40, (b) 2Q, (c) Q,/4 "(d) 0,/2. 32. Two spheres made of same material have radii in the ratio 1 : 2. Both are at same temperature. Ratio of heat radiation energy emitted per second by them is (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4 (c) 1 : 8 (d) 1 : 16. 33. Consider a compound slab consisting of two different materials having equal thickness and thermal conductivities K and 2K respectively. The equivalent thermal conductivity of the slab is 2 4 (a) (b) \/2K (c) 3K (d)  K
J J
38. If the intensities of two interfering waves be 7, and 12, the contrast between maximum and minimum intensity is maximum, when (a) > > I2 (b) /, < < I 2 (c) 7, = / 2 (d) either 7, or I 2 is zero. 39. A number of tuning forks are arranged in order of increasing frequency and any two successive forks produce 4 beats per sec, when sounded together. If the last tuning fork has a frequency octave higher than that of the first fork is 256 Hz, then the number of tuning forks is (a) 63 (b) 64 (c) 65 (d) 66. 40. Two waves of length 100 cm and 101 cm produce 10 beats in 3 sec. The speed of sound is approximately (a) 1010 m/s (b) 355 m/s (c) 336.67 m/s (d) 33.67 m/s. 41. The velocities of sound at the same temperature in two monoatomic gases of densities p, and p2 are v, and v2 respectively. If p,/p 2 = 4, then the value of v,/v2 is (a) 1/4 (b) 2 (c) 1/2 (d) 4. 42. The displacement of a wave travelling in xdirection is given by y = 10~4sin(600/  2x + 3x73) where x and y are in metre and t is in second. The speed of wave motion in ras"1 is (a) 300 (b) 600 (c) 1200 (d) 200. 43. Quality of sound depends upon (a) frequency (b) amplitude (c) overtones (d) none of these. 44. A particle undergoes simple harmonic motion having time period T. The time taken in 3/8th oscillation is (a) \ t (b) I t
(C)
34. (a) (b) (c)
At absolute zero all substances exist in solid form molecular motion ceases water becomes ice (d) none of these.
35. Of the following, the equation of plane progressive wave is (a) y = /'sinoo? (b) ;' = /"sin(cor£x) (c) y = "7=sin(co?fct) yjr (d) j/ = —sin(coZfa) r
12t
(d)
^ T .
36. When a sound wave goes from one medium to another, the quantity that remains unchanged is (a) frequency (b) amplitude (c) wavelength (d) speed. 37. A plane wave of sound travelling in air is incident upon a plane water surface. The angle of incidence is 30°. If the velocity of sound in water is 1400 m/s, and the velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s, there will be (a) reflection only (b) refraction only (c) both reflection and refraction (d) neither reflection nor refraction.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  JANUARY'06 59
45. The graph between the length and the (time period)2 of a simple pendulum is (a) straight line (b) circle (c) parabola (d) hyperbola. 46. A simple pendulum of length / has been set up inside a railway wagon sliding down a frictionless inclined plane having an angle of inclination 9 = 30° with the horizontal. What will be its period of oscillation as recorded by an observer inside the wagon? (a) 2 n J j f
1V3 g
(b)
2nWyg
101
(C)
I \8
(d)
2n
47. A large horizontal surface moves up and down in simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 1 cm. If a mass of 1 kg (which is placed on the surface) is to remain continuously in contact with it, the maximum frequency of simple harmonic motion will be (a) 5 Hz (b) 0.5 Hz (c) 1.5 Hz (d) 10 Hz. 48. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion which of the following statements is not correct? (a) Total energy of the particle always remains the same. (b) Restoring force is always directed towards a fixed point. (c) Restoring force is maximum at the extreme positions. (d) Acceleration of the particle is maximum at the equilibrium position. 49. Two spheres A and B of exactly same mass are given equal positive and negative charges respectively. Their masses after charging (a) remains unaffected (b) mass of A > mass of B (c) mass of A < mass of B (d) nothing can be said. 50. Figure shows the electric lines of force emerging from a charged body. If the electric field at, I and Bare EA and EH respectively and if the displacement between A and B is /'. then (b) EA <EH (a) EA > E„ ( d ) EA = EH/R2. = EJR (c)
52. Two copper spheres of same radii one hollow and other solid are charged to the same potential then (a) both will hold same charge (b) solid will hold more charge (c) hollow will hold more charge (d) hollow can not be charged. 53. A capacitor of capacitance 1/300 pF is connected to a battery of 300 V and charged. Then the energy stored in the condenser is (a) 3 x 10^ J (b) 6 x io 14 J x 4 (c) 1.5 IO J (d) 12 x io 5 J. 54. A wire 1 m long has a resistance of 1 Q. If it is uniformly stretched, so that its length increases by 25%. then its resistance will increase by (a) 25% (b) 50% (c) 56.25% (d) 77.33%. 55. The resistance of a metal conductor increases with temperature due to (a) change in current carriers (b) change in the dimensions of the conductor (c) increase in the number of collisions among the current carriers (d) increase in the rate of collisions between the current carriers and the vibrating atoms of the conductor. 56. W h a t 2Q AMVwill be the resistance between P Q and O in the 2Q. following MWQ+circuit? (a) (1/3) Q (b) (2/3) Q (c) 2 Q
3
3Q
(d) 5 Q.
E„
51. Study figure shown and find out the equivalent capacitance of the network between D and B. (a) 5 pF (b) 3 p,F (c) 2 pF (d) 1 iF. 58
57. To get the maximum current from a parallel combination of n identical cells each of internal resistance r in an external resistance R, when (a) R>> r (b) R < < r (c) R = r (d) none of these. 58. Two electric bulbs, one 200 volt60 watt and the other of 200 volt200 watt are connected in series of a 200 volt line, then (a) the potential drop across the two bulbs is the same (b) the potential drop across the 60 watt bulb is greater than the potential drop across the 200 watt bulb (c) the potential drop acrosss the 200 watt bulb is greater than the 60 watt bulb (d) the potential drop across both the bulbs is 200 volts.
PHYSICS F O R YOU  JANUARY '06 102
59. Inversion temperature of a thermocouple is that temperature of hot junction at which the e.m.f is (a) maximum (b) minimum (c) zero (d) none of these. 60. Which of the following thermocouple produces the maximum therrno e.m.f. for the same temperature difference between hot and cold junctions? (a) copperbismuth (b) antimonybismuth (c) ironnickel (d) copperiron. 61. When a straight conductor is carrying an electric current (a) there are circular magnetic lines of force around it (b) there are no magnetic lines of force near it (c) there are magnetic lines of force parallel to conductor along the direction of current (d) there are magnetic lines of force parallel to conductor opposite to the direction of current. 62. The wire loop PORS formed by joining two semi circular wires of radii RT and R2 carries a current 1 as shown. The magnitude of magnetic induction at the centre C is
•fe)
(a) 9G
(b) 10G
(c) G/9
(d) G/10.
67. The magnetic field at the centre of current / carrying loop of radius r is (a) HO "I 2r
(b)
(c)
(d) \x0nl.
68. A magnet is broken into three pieces in length. The strength of the new pole is the strength of the poles of original magnet. (a) the same as (b) one half (c) double (d) one third. 69. Two identical thin bar /y magnets each of length / and pole strength m are placed at right iji angles to each other, with north / pole of one touching south pole of the other, then the magnetic s N2 I S2 moment of the system is (a) 1 ml (b) 2ml (c) jiml (d) ml/2. 70. Two short magnets of equal magnetic moments are placed on a piece of cork which floats on water. The magnets are so placed that the axis of one produced bisects the axis of the other at right angles. Then the cork (a) moves bodily only (b) rotates only (c) has neither rotational nor translational motion (d) has rotational as well as translational motion. 71. A ferromagnetic material is heated above its Curie temperature. Which one is correct statement? (a) ferromagnetic domains are perfectly arranged (b) ferromagnetic domains become random (c) ferromagnetic domains are not influenced (d) ferromagnetic material changes into diamagnetic substances. 72. Most of the substances show which of the magnetic property? (a) diamagnetism (b) paramagnetism (c) ferromagnetism (d) none of these. 73. A material is placed in a magnetic field and it is thrown out of it. Then the material is (a) paramagnetic (b) diamagnetic (c) ferromagnetic .(d) nonmagnetic. 74. A bar magnet of magnetic moment M is kept in a uniform magnetic field of strength 5, making angle 8 with its direction. The torque acting on it is (a) MB (b) M8cos0 (c) MB(lcos0) (d) MBS'MQ.
R1S
PIO
4 [R2
R,
(b) (d)
(Wf l 4 U M j f
63. A circular loop of area 0.02 m2 carrying a current of 10 A, is held with its plane perpendicular to a magnetic field induction 0.2 T. The torque acting in the loop is (a) 0.01 Nm (b) 0.001 Nm (c) zero (d) 0.8 Nm. 64. Two parallel long wires A and B carry currents /, and I 2 (< /). When /, and A are in the same direction, the magnetic field at a point mid way between the wires is 10 ]U.T. If / 2 is reversed, the field becomes 30 (xT. The ratio / s // 2 is (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4. 65. The deflection in moving coil galvanometer is reduced to half, when it is shunted with a 40 £2 coil. The resistance of the galvanometer is (a) 60 Q (b) 10 Q (c) 40 Q (d) 20 £2. 66. In a shunted ammeter, only 10% of current passes through the galvanometer of resistance G. The resistance of the shunt is
P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  JANUARY'06 59
103
75. Magnetic flux 0 in weber in a closed circuit of (b) dispersion and focussing resistance 10 £2 varies with time / (sec) as 0 = 6t2  5 c + 1. (c) refraction and scattering (d) dispersion and total internal reflection. The magnitude of induced current at I = 0.25 is (a) 0.2 A (b) 0.6 A (c) 1.2 A (d) 0.8 A. 85. Why sun has elliptical shape when it rises and sets? 76. Alternating voltage V = 400sin(500ro) is applied It is due to (b) reflection across a resistance of 0.2 k£2. The r.m.s. value of current (a) refraction (c) scattering (d) dispersion. will be equal to (a) 14.14 A (b) 1.414 A 86. The image formed by an objective of a compound (c) 0.1414 A (d) 2.0 A. microscope is 77. What changes on polarisation of light ? . (a) frequency (b) wavelength (c) phase (d) intensity. 78. A concave mirror of focal length/produces an image n times the size of object. If image is real, then distance of object from mirror is (a)'(nl)/ (c) (b) { n j r ) f (d) (« + I)/(a) virtual and diminished (b) real and diminished (c) real and enlarged (d) virtual and enlarged. 87. In which of the following case, man will not see image greater than himself? (a) concave mirror (b) convex mirror (c) plane and concave (d) none of these. 88. A photographer changes the aperture of his camera so that the new diameter of the aperture is twice the initial one. The ratio of new exposure time to the initial one is (a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 (c) I : 4 (d) 4 : 1. 89. The ratio of specific charge of ionic deuterium to that of proton will be (a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 1 : 2. 90. The energy of a photon in electron volt, whose wavelength is 6600 A is (/? = 6.6 * IO"34 Js) (a) 0.1875 eV (b) 1.875 eV (c) 18.75 eV (d) 198 eV.
79. A convex mirror is used to form an image of a real object. Choose the wrong statement. (a) the image lies between the pole and the focus (b) the image is diminished in size (c) the image is erect (d) the image is real. 80. If an object is 30 cm away from a concave mirror of focal length 15 cm, the image will be (a) erect (b) virtual (c) diminished (d) of same size.
81. A fish 10 cm long is 4 cm under the water level. Its 91. A photocell with a constant potential difference of Kvolt across it is illuminated by a point source from a length when viewed vertically above will be (a) 10 cm (b) 3 cm (c) 7.5 cm (d) 8 cm. j distance of 25 cm. When the source is moved to a distance of 1 m, the electrons emitted by the photocell 82. A ray of light passes from vacuum into a medium (a) carry l/4 th their previous energy of refractive index p, the angle of incidence is found to (b) are 1/16th as numerous as before be twice the angle of refraction. Then the angle of (c) are I/4th as numerous as before incidence is (d) carry 1/4"' their pervious momentum. (a) cos~'(p,/2) (b) 2cos~'(p/2) 92. The work function for tungsten and sodium are (c) 2sin '(p) (d) 2sin'i}i/2). 4.5 eV and 2.3 eV respectively. If the threshold wavelength 83. The astronomical telescope consists of objective X for sodium is 5460 A, the value of X for tungsten is and eyepiece. The focal length of the objective is (a) 528 A (b) 2791 A (a) equal to that of the eye piece (c) 5893 A (d) 10683 A. (b) greater than that of eye piece 93. The wavelength of characteristic Xrays depends (c) shorter than that of eye piece upon (d) five times shorter than that of the eye piece. (a) temperature of target (b) size of target 84. Rainbow is formed due to a combination of (c) atomic number of target (a) refraction and absorption (d) mass of target.
58
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  JANUARY '06 104
94. What determined the hardness of the Xrays obtained from the Coolidge tube? (a) current in the filament (b) pressure of air in the tube (c) nature of target (d) potential difference between cathode and target. 95. Light of certain wavelength and intensity ejects photoelectrons from a metal plate. Then this beam is replaced by another beam of smaller wavelength and smaller intensity. As a result (a) no change occurs (b) emission of photoelectrons stops (c) kinetic energy of photoelectrons decreases by the strength of the photoelectric current increase (d) kinetic energy of photoelectrons increases but the strength of the photoelectric current decreases. 96. What is used to convert alternating current into a direct current? (a) choke coil (b) transformer (c) diode valve (d) triode valve. 97. The value of plate resistance of a triode is 3 x 103 Q and its mutual conductance factor is 1.5 millimho, then its amplification factor will be (a) 2 x IO6 (b) 45 (c) 4.5 (d) 4 x IO'5. 98. A silicon specimen is made into a /?type semiconductor by doping, on an average, one indium atom per 5 x 107 silicon atoms. If the number density of atoms in the silicon specimen is 5 x 1028 atoms/m 3 , then the number of acceptor atoms in silicon per cubic centimeter will be (a) 2.5 x io 30 atoms/cm 3 (b) 2.5 x 1035 atoms/cm 3
(c) 1.0 x io 13 atoms/cm 3 (d) 1.0 x io 15 atoms/cm 3 . 99. In a good conductor, the energy gap between the conduction band and the valence band is (a) infinity (b) wide (c) narrow (d) zero. 100. On increasing the reverse voltage in apn junction diode the value of reverse current will (a) gradually increase (b) suddenly increase (c) remain constant (d) gradually decrease. ANSWERS 1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 46. 51. 56. 61. 66. 71. 76. 81. 86. 91. 96. (c) (a) (d) (d) (c) (c) (b) (a) (c) (a) (c) (d) (a) (c) (b) (b) (a) (c) (b) (c) 2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. 47. 52. 57. 62. 67. 72. 77. 82. 87. 92. 97. (d) (b) (a) (b) (c) (d) (b) (a) (a) (a) (a) (b) (b) (a) (a) (d) (b) (b) (b) (c) 3. 8. 13. 18. 23. 28. 33. 38. 43. . 48. 53. 58. 63. 68. 73. 78. 83. 88. 93. 98. (b) (b) (c) (c) (d) (b) (d) (c) (c) (d)
(C)
(b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (b) (c) (c) (d)
4. 9. 14. 19. 24. 29. 34. 39. 44. 49. 54. 59. 64. 69. 74. 79. 84. 89. 94. 99.
(d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (c) (b) (c) (c)
(C) (C) (C)
(b)
(c)
(d) (d) (d) (d) (d) (d)
5. 10. 15. 20. 25. 30. 35. 40. 45. 50. 55. 60. 65. 70. 75. 80. 85. 90. 95. 100
(b) (a) (d) (a) (b) (b) (b) (c) (a) (a) (d) (b) (c)
(C)
(a) (d) (a) (b) (d) (b)
WB JEE'06
WttG Complete Book for
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  JANUARY'06
59
JE
(For Q.NO. 1 to 40) Only one option is correct and there will be negative marking in these questions. 1. A certain gas is taken to the five states represented by dots in the graph. The plotted lines are isotherms. Order of the most probable speed vp of the molecules at these five states is = (a) '/> at 3 > vp at I '/) at 2 > V/J at 4 Vp a, 5 (b) 'p at 1 > vp at 2 ~ Vp at 3 > Vp at= 4 Vp at 5 (C) Vp at 3 > Vp at 2 =vp Vp 4 > vp Bt i = Vp at 5 at (d) insufficient information to predict the result. 2. On an X temperature scale, water freezes at 125.0°X and boils at 375.0°*. On a Y temperature scale, water freezes at  7 0 . 0 ° 7 and boils at 30.0°K The value of temperature on Xscale equal to the temperature of 50.0°Kon Tscale is (a) 455.0°* (b)  1 2 5 . 0 ° * (c) 1375.0°* (d) 1500.0°*. 3. A uniform, y k constant magnetic R field B is directed at s an angle of 45° to the *axis in the xyplane, / h PORS is a rigid square 0 wire frame carrying a steady current / 0 , with its centre at the origin f 2 O. At time / = 0, the frame is at rest in the position shown in figure, with its sides parallel to the* and>»axes. Each side of the frame is of mass M and length L. The torque f about O acting on the frame due to the magnetic field will be (a) i = (c) _ RJ l Bl.fi (b) (i+j) aj) BIJ} (d) x = H  j )
4. The coefficient of viscosity r of a liquid is defined as the tangential force on a layer in that liquid per unit area per unit velocity gradient across it. Then a sphere of radius a moving through it under a constant force F attains a constant velocity v given by (where K is a numerical constant) (a) KFaq (c) (b) Ari a a
/I V A
/
F (d) KT) K ~ ari 5. When force F is applied to the combination of two springs (shown aj in figure), the elongation in upper spring will be (the whole system is inside a lift is moving upwards with a constant acceleration a). The upper spring is ideal while the lower spring has mass M. Assume that the deformation of the springs are constant. M(g + a) (a) kt +k 2 (b) [F + M (g + q)](*, + k2 ) (c) (.F + M(g + a)) kl+k1 (d) F + Mg + Ma X WMW
\k>
>
rF
/
6. A D.C. supply of 120 V is connected to a large resistance X. A voltmeter of resistance 10 kQ placed in series in
10 k£2 0 •iy
120 V
k
Contributed by Deptt. of Physics, Resonance, Kota (Rajasthan)
106 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
the circuit reads 4 V. This for measuring very high (a) 390 kQ (c) 190 kQ
is an unusual use of voltmeter resistance. The value of X is (b) 290 kQ \ (d) 300 kQ. \
capacitances of 1 pF. The battery voltage is 3 V. The voltage across the resistor A in the following circuit at steady state is (a) 0 V (b) 0.5 V (c) 0.75 V (d) 1.5 V. 10. One end of a light rod of length 1 m is attached with a string of length 1 m. Other end of the rod is attached at point O such that rod can move in a vertical circle. Other end of the string is attached with a block of mass 2 kg. The minimum velocity that must be given to the block in horizontal direction so that it can complete the vertical circle is ( g = 10 m/s 2 ). (a) 4V5 (b) 5^5 (c) 10 (d) 3^5 .
7. Select the correct characteristics of the\image of a real object formed by a lens of focal l e n g t h / f r o m the choices given below? Nature of lens and position (i) Lens is converging and 2 / away from the object (ii) Lens is converging and between / and 2f from the object (iii)Lens is diverging and distant / from the object (iv)Lens is converging and less than / from the object (a) (ii)  C (c) (i)  E Characteristic pf the image observed . (A) virtual, erect, diminished \ \
\
(B) virtual, erect, magnified
\
(C) real, inverted, diminished
;
(D) real, inverted, magnified
(E) real, inverted, same size. (b) (iii)  B (d) (iv)  A.
8. An ideal gas undergoes j an expansion from a state with temperature T{ and volume K, to V2 through three different polytropic processes A, B and C as shown in the PV diagram. If \AEA\, and A£( be the magnitude of changes in internal energy along the three paths respectively, then (a) A EA\ < A£b < A£ r  if temperature in every process decreases (b) AEA\ = A£S = A£ (  if temperature in every process decreases (c) A£^ < A£)j < A£ r l if temperature in every process increases (d) lAfitfl < lAfi^l < A£ (;  if temperature in every process increases. 9. Each resistor in the following circuit has a resistance of 2 MQ and the capacitors have
107 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
11. In a vertical plane inside a smooth hollow thin tube a block of same mass as that of tube is released as shown in figure. When it is slightly disturbed it moves towards right. By the time the block reaches the right end of the tube then the displacement of the tube will be (where R is mean radius of tube). Assume that the tube remains in vertical plane. (a) 2R/n (b) 4R/n (c) RI2 (d) R. 12. Let BR and BN be the magnetic field produced by the wire P and Q which are placed symmetrically in a rectangular loop
ABCD as s h o w n in /j C
figure. Current in wire P is I directed inward and in O is 21 directed outwards. If
* _
A
J By • dI = 2p„ tesla meter, J Bv • d! = — 2 p 0 tesla meter,
_
A
II
H
and \B,, • dl =  p 0 tesla meter,
t h e v a l u e o f 1 will b e
(a) 8 A (c) 5 A
(b) 4 A (d) 6 A.
13. A ray of light is incident on a face of equilateral triangle at an incident angle 50°. At this angle minimum deviation occurs. This deviation is (a) 30° (b) 40° (c) 50° (d) 20°.
14. The voltage time (V 1) graph for triangular wave having peak value V0 is as shown in figure.
this region. If the electric potential is 10 V at the origin, then potential at x = 2.0 m is 20
E, (N/C)
Jc(m)
The r.m.s value of V in time interval from t = 0 to 774 is (a) (c) iL
(b) 40 V (d) 30 V. 19. A steady current is passing through a linear conductor of nonuniform crosssection. The net quantity of charge crossing any crosssection per second is (a) directly proportional to the area of crosssection (b) inversely proportional to the area of crosssection (c) independent of the area of crosssection (d) directly proportional to the length of the conductor. 20. When an uncharged parallel plate capacitor is connected to a source of constant potential difference, which of the following is incorrect? (a) all the charge drawn from the source is stored in the capacitor (b) all the energy drawn from the source is stored in the capacitor (c) the potential difference across the capacitor grows rapidly initially and this rate decreases to zero eventually (d) only half of the energy drawn from the source is dissipated outside the capacitor. 21. In a photoelectric effect, electrons are emitted (a) with a maximum velocity proportional to the frequency of the incident radiation (b) at a rate that is independent of the intensity of the incident radiation (c) only if the frequency of the incident radiation is above a certain threshold value (d) only if the temperature of the emitter is high. 22. Which one of the following combinations of radioactive decay results in the formation of an isotope of the original nucleus? (assume that beta means P") (a) one alpha and four beta (b) one alpha and two beta (c) one alpha and one beta (d) two alpha and one beta.
108 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
s
(b)
K
i i V2
(d) none of these.
15. In the above question the average value of voltage (K) in one time period will be (a) (c)
JjL
(b) Ti
f
(d) zero.
16. An uncharged parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery. The electric field between the plates is 10 V/m. Now a dielectric of dielectric constant 2 is inserted between the plates filling the entire space. The electric field between the plates now is (b) 20 V/m (a) 5 V/m 10 V/m (d) none of these. (c) 17. An infinite long plate has surface charge density a as shown in the figure. A point charge q is moved from A to B. Network done by electric field is c<7 , (a)  M X ,  * , ) 2s„ (b)
28,,
B U„ 0)
A (*,, 0)
(c)
e„
(d) — (2nr + r) 18. A graph of the .\component of the electric field as a function of .v in a region of space is shown. The y and r components of the electric field are zero in
23. A uniform rod of mass m and length / is rotating with constant angular velocity co about an axis which passes through its one end and perpendicular to the length of rod. The area of crosssection of the rod is A and its Young's modulus is Y. Neglect gravity. The strain at the mid point of the rod is may I 3 mm11 (a) (b) 8 AY 8AY 3»7C0 2 / nm2l (c) (d) 4 AY 4 AY 24. A solid spherical black body of radius r and uniform mass distribution is in free space. It emits power P and its rate of cooling is R, then (a) RP °c r~ (b) RP oc r (c) RP °c Mr2 (d) RP « Mr. 25. A black body emits radiation at the rate P when its temperature is T. At this temperature the wavelength at which the radiation has maximum intensity is A,0. If at another temperature T' the power radiated is P' and wavelength at maximum intensity is X0/2 then (a) P'T' = 32PT (b) P'T' = 16PT (c) P'T'= 8PT (d) P' T' = 4PT. 26. The emissive power of a black body at T = 300 K is 100 watt/m 2 . Consider a body B of area ^4=10 m2 coefficient of reflectivity r = 0.3 and coefficient of transmission t = 0.5. Its temperature is 300 K. Then which of the following is incorrect? (a) the emissive power of B is 20 W/m2 (b) the emissive power of B is 200 W/m2 (c) the power emitted by B is 200 watts (d) the emissivity of B is 0.2. 27. In the figure shown, A is a fixed charged. B (of mass m) is given by a velocity v perpendicular to line AB. At / ( « this moment the radius of +'/ curvature of the resultant path of B is (a) 0 (b) co (infinity) (c)
4rt£(lr2/77v2
v
collision, both stopping simultaneously at the same position. Assuming constant retardation for each car, the distance travelled by car A while slowing down is (a) 96 m (b) 84 m (c) 67 m (d) 113 m. 29. The system starts from rest and A attains a A 6 k g —*F velocity of 5 m/s after it has moved 5 m towards 1 right. Assuming the fi]2kg arrangement to be 1 frictionless everywhere and pulley and strings to be light, the value of the force F applied on A is (a) 50 N (b) 75 N (c) 100 N (d) 96 N. 30. When beats are produced by two progressive waves of nearly the same frequency, which one of the following is correct? (a) the particles vibrate simple harmonically, with the frequency equal to the difference in the component frequencies (b) the amplitude of vibration at any point changes simple harmonically with a frequency equal to the difference in the frequencies of the two waves (c) the frequency of beats depends upon the position, where the observer is (d) the frequency of beats changes as the time progresses. 31. The displacement vs time graph for two waves A and B which travel along the same string as shown in the figure. Their intensity ratio IAHH is
4B
+1
9
i—i—i—t—• t
10 11 12
(d) /'.
81
(C)
28. Two cars A and B are travelling towards each other on a singlelane road at 24 m/s and 21 m/s respectively. They notice each other when 180 m apart and apply brakes simultaneously. They just succeed in avoiding
16
(d)
32. Two loudspeakers Lu L2 driven by a common oscillator and amplifier, are set up as shown in the
P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
10
figure. As the f r e q u e n c y of the oscillator increases from zero, the detector at D recorded a series of m a x i m u m and minimum signals.
„ — f
40 m
9 m
•a:
What is the frequency at which the first maximum is observed? (speed of sound = 330 m/s). (a) 165 Hz (b) 330 Hz (c) 495 Hz (d) 660 Hz. 33. A collar B of mass 2 kg is constrained to move along a horizontal smooth and fixed circular track of radius 5 m. The spring lying in the plane of the circular track and having spring constant 200 N/m is undeformed when the collar is at A. If the collar starts from rest at B, the normal reaction exerted by the track on the collar when it passes through A is (a) 360 N (c) 1440 N (b) 720 N (d) 2880 N.
Column I (i) angular momentum (ii) latent heat (iii) torque (iv) capacitance (v) inductance (v) resistivity (a) (i)  (C) (c) ( i i i )  ( E )
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (b) (d)
Column II ML2T~2 ML2Q"2 ML2T"' ML 3 T'Q" 2 M 'L 2 T 2 Q 2 L2T"2 (ii)  (D) (v)  (F).
37. A uniform rod of mass 112 1/2 1n and length / is hinged at 3E its mid point in such a way that it can rotate in the vertical plane about a horizontal axis passing through the hinge. One of its ends is attached """" to a spring of spring constant k which is unstretched when the rod is horizontal. If this rod end is now given a small displacement and released angular frequency of the resulting motion is (a) (c)
38
~k
(b) (d) \ T
34. In the figure shown if a parallel beam of white light is incident on the d plane of the slits then the distance of the nearest white spot on the screen from O is (assume d<< D,X<< d\ (a) 0 (b) d/2 (c) d!3 (d) d/ 6. 35. In the above question if the light incident is monochromatic and point O is a maxima, then the wavelength of the light incident cannot be (a) (c) 3D d2 12 D (b)
(d)
6D d2
18D
36. Match the physical quantities given in column I with dimensions expressed in terms of mass M, length L, time T and charge Q given in column 11 and write the correct answer against the matched quantity.
VT V <8> ® infinite ^ >v s h e e t s c arrving * ® ® <8> ® ® ® ®< current same direction (of equal current per unit length K) are separated by a distance d. A proton is released from a point between the plates with a velocity parallel to the sheets but perpendicular to the direction of current in the sheets. Then the path of the proton is (a) circle (b) helix (c) straight line (d ) straight line only if it is released from a point exactly midway between the two plates. 39. Two long coaxial and conducting cylinders of radius a and b are separated by a material of conductivity o and a constant potential difference V is maintained between them, by a battery. Then a current per unit length of the cylinder from one cylinder to the other is
•a
(a)
47UC?
In (b/a)
V
... (b)
471(7
b+a
12
P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
(C)
2na l In (b/a)
2no T,"
b+a
40. A ring of mass m, radius r having a charge q uniformly distributed over it and free to rotate about its own axis is placed in a region having a magnetic field B is suddenly switched off, the angular velocity acquired by the ring is 2 qB qB (b) m
U are measured as follows: K = 100.0 ± 2.0 J U = 200.0 ± 1.0 J Then the percentage error in the measurement of mechanical energy is (a) 2.5% (b) 1% (c) 0.5% (d) 1.5%. 45. A block of mass m is being pulled up the rough incline by an agent delivering constant power P. The coefficient of friction between the block and the incline is The maximum speed of the block during the course of ascent is P (a) mg sin 0 + (.tmg cos0 P (b) mg sin 0  \img cos 0 77777777777777777" 2P (c) v = mg sin 0  img cos 0 3P (d) mg sin 0  \x.mg cos 0 46. A uniform field B = 3i +4j + 5k . A rod of length 5 m is placed along j^axis is moved along Aaxis with constant speed 1 m/sec. Then induced e.m.f in the rod will be (a) zero (b) 25 volt (c) 20 volt (d) 15 volt. 47. A particle is projected at angle 60° with speed \0yJ5 , from the point A as shown in the figure. At the same time the wedge is made to move with speed 10>/3 towards right as shown in figure. Then the time after which particle will strike with wedge is (a) 2 sec (b) sec (c) 4 / ^ 3 sec 48. As shown in the figure, rod is composed of two parts of 2m mass, length / and m mass, length 21. It is placed on rough edge as shown in (d) none of these.
«
(c)
si.
2m
(d) none of these.
41. The magnetic field at the origin due to the current flowing in the wire is
upto ~ X
w
<b,
z
u
parallel to Xaxis T upto co
(d)
M„/ (ik) 47taV2
42. Two masses m and 2m are placed in fixed horizontal circular smooth hollow tube as shown. The mass m is moving with speed u and the mass 2m is stationary. After their collision, the time elapsed for next collision (coefficient of restitution e = 1/2) 2 nr (a) — u 3 nr (c) (b) (d) 4tcr — u 12 nr
43. A mosquito with 8 legs stands on water surface and each leg makes depression of radius a. If the surface tension and angle of contact are T and zero respectively, then the weight of mosquito is (a) STa (b) \6nTa (c) 7a/8 (d) 7a/1671. 44. The values of kinetic energy K and potential energy
111 PHYSICS F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
(i, = 0.80 mimmmiiwmimim M = 0.75 t 30°
the (a) (b) (c) (d)
figure. it will it will it will it will
In the given configuration of rod slide first, then rotate to fall rotate first, then slide to fall neither slide nor rotate slide and rotate simultaneously.
body is a good absorber (a — 1), it is not transparent > and its surface is dull (t — 0, r — 0). » » The relation given above is oversimplified, because body may transmit some wavelength and absorb other wavelengths. For the next three questions assume that emissions from all surfaces are perpendicular to respective surfaces. 51. For the surface A shown in e = 0.5 figure, e = 0.5 and for the surface B, e = 1. Given that P = a AT4 = 100 J/s. For this situation, rate of loss of energy by the surfaces A and B respectively are : (assume that / = 0 for both A and B). (a) 100 J/s, 50 J/s (b) 50 J/s, 50 J/s (c) 0, 50 J/s (d) 0, 0. 52. A slab of transmitting t = 0.5 power / = 0.5 and reflective e = 0.5 r = 0.5 power r = 0.5 is kept in between the two surfaces as shown. For this situation the rate of loss of energy by the surface A and B respectively are (a) 25 J/s, 50 J/s A: (b) 50 J/s, 100 J/s T (c) 12.5 J/s, 37.5 J/s (d) 0 , 0 . 53. In the above question, if the surface B is removed, then the rate loss of energy by surface A is (a) 33.3 J/s (b) 25 J/s (c) 50 J/s (d) 37.5 J/s = 0.5 e=l
49. A uniform magnetic field of 1.5 T exists in a cylindrical region of radius 10.0 cm, its direction being parallel to the axis along east to west. A current carrying wire in north south direction passes through this region. The wire intersects the axis and experience a force of 1.2 N downward. If the wire is turned from north to south to north eastsouth west direction, then magnitude and direction of force is (a) 1.2 N upward (c) 1.2 N (b) 1.2x (d)
1.2
N downward
—downward VI
50. In the above problem, if wire in northsouth direction is lowered from the axis by a distance of 6 cm, then magnitude and direction of force is (a) 0.48 N, downward (b) 0.48 N, upward (c) 0.96 N, downward (d) 0.96 N, upward. PASSAGE I : Read the following passage and answer the questions numbered 51 to 55. They have only one correct option. Heat transfer by radiation : When the thermal radiations fall on matter they are either transmitted, absorbed or reflected. The socalled diathermanous materials like dry air, rock saltr~carbon disulphide etc. are practically transparent to these radiations. On llie~trtheflmnd_ materials like metals, wood, water are opaque and therefore, they are known as adiathermanous or athermanous. The thermal radiations can penetrate a diathermanous material. Once radiated by a hot body, thermal radiation travel on and on as electromagnetic waves until they get absorbed by some cold athermanous body. The total energy reflected R, transmitted Tand absorbed A by certain area of the body in a given interval of time must be equal to the total energy I falling on a body over the same area and in the same interval of time, i.e. R+ T + A = /. If we define, r reflective power, the fraction of incident radiations reflected, t transmitting power, the fraction of incident radiations transmitted, a absorptive power, the fraction of incident radiations absorbed then from the above. r +t + a =1 A body which is transparent (/ — 1) is not opaque and > it is not a good reflector (a —> 0, r — 0). But if the »
e=.\
f = 0.5 /• = 0.5
54. Four spheres of the same radius of different material A, B, C and D have following data as given in the table. All are at the same temperature. B is the best emitter. Then its transmitivity may be Reflectivity Transmitivity A 0.1 0.5 B 0.2 C. 0.3 0.4 D 0.4 0.2 (b) 0.5 (c) 0.2 (d) 0.8 (a) 0.4
P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
14
55. To maintain the temperature of inner environment of a box a source of heat is placed inside the box. The power of the source is minimum if the medium surrounding the box used is (a) either metal or rock salt (b) either wood or dry air (c) either water or wood (d) either metal or car. PASSAGE 2 : Read the following passage and answer the questions numbered 56 to 60. They have only one correct option. Huygen was the first scientist who proposed the idea of wave theory of light. He said that the light propagates in form of wavefronts. A wavefront is an imaginary surface at every point of which waves are in the same phase. For example the wavefronts for a point source of light is collection of concentric spheres which have centre at the origin. W, is a wavefront, W2 is another wavefront. The radius of the wavefront *ra> at time t is ct W„ IV2, W, wavefront in this case where c is the W, W> speed of light. The direction of propagation of light is perpendicular to the surface of wavefront. The wavefronts are plane wavefronts in case of a parallel beam of light. Huygen also said that secobdary wavelet every point of the of radius cA/ wavefront acts as the source of secondary wavelets. The tangent drawn to all secondary wavelets at a time is the 1 + Af new wavefront at that time. The wavelets are to be considered only in the forward direction (i.e. the direction of propagation of light) and not in the reverse direction. If a wavefront IVi at time t is given, then to draw the wavefront at time t + At take some points on the wavefront W, and draw spheres of radius cAt. They are called secondary wavelets. Draw a surface W2 which is tangential to all these
15 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
secondary wavelets, W2 is •'he wavefront at time t + At. Huygen proved the laws of reflection and laws of refraction using concept of wavefronts. 56. A point source of light is placed at origin, in air. The equation of wavefront of the wave at time t, emitted by source at t = 0, is (take refractive index of air as 1) (a) x + y + z = ct (b) x2 + y2 + z2 = t2 2 (d) x2 + y2 + z2 = c t (c) xy + yz + zx = ct 57. Spherical wave fronts shown in figure, strike a plane mirror. Reflected wave fronts will be as shown in
A
\
(b)
(d) 58. Wavefronts incident on an interface between the media are shown in the figure. The refracted wavefronts will be as shown in (a) . VJ w (b)
45°
~1
59. Plane wavefronts are incident on a spherical mirror as shown. The reflected wavefronts will be
(a)
(b)
ANSWERS (c) 1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 46. 51. 56.
medium
(d)
60. Certain shown in refractive medium is (a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 1.5 (d) cannot
plane wave fronts are figure. The index of
(a) (b) (c) (c) (c) (b) (b) (a) (c) (b) (d) (d)
2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. 47. 52. 57.
(c) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (b) (c) (b) (a) (d) (c)
3. 8. 13. 18. 23. 28. 33. 38. 43. 48. 53. 58.
(a) (a) (b) (d) (b) (a) (c) (c) (b) (c) (a) (b)
4. 9. 14. 19. 24. 29. 34. 39. 44. 49. 54. 59.
(c) (d) (a) (c) (b) (b) (d) (c) (b) (c) (c) (a)
5. 10. 15. 20. 25. 30. 35. 40. 45. 50. 55. 60.
(d) (c) (d) (b) (a) (b) (a) (c) (a) (c) (c) (a)
Note : For detailed solutions please tog c to our website www.resonarice.ac. in
be determined.
Letter to Editor
Dear Editor, The enrolment in physics has been steadily decreasing, all over the world, for many years. This is why 2005 was celebrated as the IYP, coinciding with the 100th anniversary of Albert Einstein's Special Relativity. One of the aims of IYP was to improve the public awareness of physics and physics education so as attract young students to physics. As an HSC teacher, I am working on the logical aspects of teaching and learning mechanics  particularly circular motion  for about 30 years and arrived at the following conclusion many years ago which is given below. Although the logical incompleteness of Newton's laws ofmotion leads us to Einstein s General Relativity, that incompleteness itself has not been completely understood. This is why we still have problems in teaching/learning 300year old mechanics. It may be noted that Frank Wilczek [Nobel Laureate of 2004] had admitted, in October 2004, that he had maximum trouble in learning.classical mechanics. He gave a good lesson for physics education and was my subject of lectures in some Indian events of the IYP. Now, some physics organizations are considering the question: Will there be significant rise in the public awareness of physics and in the enrolment in physics? I hesitate to answer positively and in support of this 1 like to share a unique experience, concerned with a new trend in HSC physics  that is listing Understanding Oriented Questions without giving direct answers to them. Such questions are now attracting promising students like the I IT aspirants. Let us start with the question on the circular motion. In that question, a body is shown performing the VCM and students have to show directions of centripetal and centrifugal forces, with suitable arrows. Actually, students do know the VCM from std IX and hence, in my opinion, the said question is not very challenging. However, this question  in the reversed manner is much more challenging question. It is like this : The centripetal force is acting on a body, show the direction of motion. I started the lecture in a Symposium on 16th January 1993 with that reversed question. The minimum academic level of audience was MSc. Physics. But as per my expectation, some young teachers drew anticlockwise trajectory and some did the opposite. Consequently, it was easy for these two groups to understand my opinion about the logical problems in the present treatment of VCM. If this is the situation with young teachers, having done MSc. in physics, what to talk of HSC students. With such logical problems in the basic concepts of mechanics, one can hardly expect students to jump on physics for making career. Dileep V. Sathe, Pune
\
We agree with Dr. Sathe for a need for teaching physics correctly from the grassroots level by going back to the basic concepts as given by the original authors. Constant interpretations and interpolations of the original ideas have diluted the content of physics. It is the approach to teach science that has to change if students have to learn the correct j thinking. We share his concern, as the readers can see from our editorials..  Editor. 
16
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O I J  FEBRUARY '06
SOLVE & SEND Get All India R a n k
Very
Similar
MODEL TEST PAPER for AIIMS 2006
Time : 1 hr Maximum Marks : 60
Instructions: 1. This question paper contains 60 questions. 2. For every correct answer 1 mark will be credited to your account, 1/3 mark will be deducted for every wrong answer and no marks will be awarded for unattempted questions. 3. Use of Trigonometric table, Calculator or any other helping device is restricted. 4. Useful data : At.wt./ Mol.wt. : K M n 0 4 : 158; C u : 6 3 . 5 ; N a O H : 40; HC1:36.5; Mg : 24; H : 1; He : 4; C : 12; N : 14; O : 16; Na : 23; P : 31, S : 32; CI : 35.5; Ca : 40; Zn ; 65; Ag : 108. Atomic No : H : 1; He : 2; Li : 3; Be : 4; B : 5, C : 6; N : 7, O : 8; F : 9; Na : 11; Mg : 12; Al : 13; Si : 14; Fe : 26; Co : 27; Ni : 28; Cu : 29; Zn : 30; Rb : 37
C o n s t a n t s : g = 10m/s2, R = 8.3 JK'mol"1 or 0.0821 atm m c = 9.11 * 10 " kg. flC'mol1, 8 = 1 . 6 * 1 0 ' 1 9 C , N0 = 6 . 0 2 3 x I O 2 3 , mp ~ 1.6 x IO'27 k g ,
5. Fill in your answers in the given response sheet.
1. An equibiconvex lens of focal length 10 cm is cut by a plane perpendicular to its axis to make two piano convex lenses from it. The focal length of each piano convex lens will be (a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm (c) 15 cm (d) 20 cm. 2. A steel wire of uniform area 2 mm 2 is heated upto 50°C and is stretched by tying its two ends rigidly. The change in tension when the temperature falls from 50°C to 30°C is (given Y = 2.0 x 10" Nm 2 and a = 1.1 x io 5 per °C] (a) 2.5 x io'° N (b) 1.5 x io 1 0 N (c) 5 N (d) 88 N. 3. An earth satellite moves from an orbit A to another stable lower orbit B. In this process (a) gravitational potential energy decreases (b) gravitational potential energy increases (c) gravitational potential energy remains unchanged (d) none of these. 4. Two light bulbs one of resistance R and other of resistance R (< R) are connected in parallel to the mains. Which bulb glows brighter? (a) bulb with resistance r (b) bulb with resistance R (c) bulb glow equally bright (d) bulb with resistance r will be fused. 5.
50
A A zX* zJtK*4. z+tY z_iK ~* Radioactive radiations are emitted in the sequence (a) (3, y, a (b) a , p, y (c) (3, a , y (d) y, a, p.
6. A system undergoing simple harmonic motion must possess (a) inertia only (b) elasticity only (c) inertia as well as elasticity (d) inertia, elasticity and external force. 7. The impurity atom with which pure germanium should be doped to make «type semiconductor is not (a) phosphorus (b) arsenic (c) bismuth (d) boron. 8. The ionization energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV. Following Bohr's theory, the energy corresponding to transition between third and fourth orbit will be (a) 3.4 eV (b) 1.51 eV (c) 0.85 eV ; (d) 0.66 eV. 9. (a) (b) (c) (d) Speeds of red light and yellow light are exactly moii Jaoa vdtsenieJdo sd nss sfistMtt Btkn&to Me is nU in vacuum but not in air in air but not in vacuum in vacuum as well as in air neither in vacuum nor in air.
In the given reaction,
10. A gun of weight 10 kg fires a shot of 0.5 g with a velocity 230 ms _1 . Velocity of recoil of the gun is
P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
(a) 1.5 cms 1 (c) 1.10 cms' 11. (a) (b) (c) (d)
(b) 1.15 cms"1 (d) 1.51 cms"1.
On mountains roads are made spiral because they look beautiful save vehicles from turning over reduce speed have less steep slopes.
17. Ratio of coefficient of thermal conductivity of two different materials is 4 : 3. To have same thermal resistance of the two rods of these materials of equal thickness, the ratio of their length should be (a) 3/4 (b) 4/3 (c) 1/4 (d) 5/4. 18. Two bodies of masses MA and Mh have equal kinetic energy. The ratio of their momenta is (a) MA : Mg (b) MB : MA (c) (d)
MA
12. The displacement of a particle executing simple harmonic motion is given by y = 1.2sin(3.57 + 0.5.x) where distances are in metre and t in second. The maximum velocity of the particle is (a) 3.5 ms"1 (b) 4.2 ms"1 1 (c) 5.0 ms (d) none of these. 13. The equation of state of a gas can be expressed (_ a \ RB „ P\— =—. P = pressure, V = volume, 1 V J V 9 = absolute temperature and a, R are constants. Dimensional formula of a is (a) ML5T"2 (b) ML~5T2 2 (c) ML'T(d) M'L 5 T 2 . as 14. A body starts from rest and moves with a uniform acceleration. The ratio of the distance covered in the /7th second to the distance covered in n second is 2 1 2 1 (a)   — (b) — — n n 1 1 2 1 (c) (d)  + n n — 15. Three thin uniform rods of mass M and length L lie along the x, y, zaxes with one end of each at the origin. Moment of inertia / about the zaxis for the threerod system is (a) (c) ML2 ~12~ 2 ML2
((b) b)
:
MB2.
19. An object with mass m and speed v explodes into two pieces, one three times as massive as the other; the explosion takes place in a gravity free space. The less massive piece comes to rest. The change in kinetic energy of the system in the explosion is
(a)
1
mv
,
(b) (d)
1 2, mv mv
(c)
mv
20. A meter stick, suspended from one end, swings as a physical pendulum. Its period of oscillation is given by (a) 2 s (b) 1.64 s (c) 1.16 s (d) 1 s. 21. the (a) (b) (c) (d) Potential F i n given circuit is 9V 32 V 8V 5 V.
•
CM
P
ML2 "T
(d) ML2.
16. A satellite of mass m is revolving at a height h above the earth's surface. The radius of the earth is R and its mass is M. The orbital velocity for this satellite is given by (a) (c) 2 GM R 2 GM R+h (b) (d) 1 GM \R + h jGM \ 2R
22. In figure there are two semicircles of radii r, and r 2 in which a current i is flowing. The magnetic induction at centre O will be (a)
(0 4
(b)
(d)
mi
±v
4
10
P H Y S I C S F O R YOll  FEBRUARY '06
23. The dimensional formula of e2/e0/zc (where e, h, c are charge, Planck's constant and velocity of light), is that of (a) work (b) impulse (c) angle (d) stress. 24. The depth inside the earth at which the value of g is 50% of its value at the surface is (a) R (b) 2R (c) R/2 (d) R/4. 25. If the momentum of a body varies with time according to the relation P = t3  6t2 + 3 Ns, then the time at which the maximum force acts on it, is (a) 2 s (b) 6 s (c) 3 s (d) 4 s. 26. If the earth suddenly shrinks such that its radius becomes half of its present radius, then the duration of the day would become (a) 6 hr (b) 18 hr (c) 12 hr (d) 96 hr. 27. The ratio of time taken by a disc and a sphere of equal radii, to reach the bottom of an inclined plane is given by (a) V57l4 (c) VTOT7 (b) 5/7 (d) V15/14
33. A person can not see objects clearly beyond 50 cm. The power of the lens to correct his vision will be (a) + 2 D (b)  2 D (c) + 5 D (d)  0.5 D. 34. The refractive index of the material of an equilateral prism is ^ 2 • The angle of minimum deviation produced by it will be (a) 30° (b) 45° (c) 60° (d) none of these. 35. The equations of light waves are y, = 6coscot, y2 = 8cos(o» + ()>). These superpose to interfere. The ratio of maximum to minimum intensity in the interference pattern is (a) 7 : 1 (b) 49 : 1 (c) 1 6 : 9 (d) none of these. 36. From Brewster's law it follows that the angle of polarisation depends upon (a) wavelength of light (b) orientation of plane of polarisation (c) orientation of plane of vibration (d) none of these. 37. At what temperature will the hydrogen molecules escape from earth's surface? (a) 104 K (b) 103 K (c) 102 K (d) 10 K. 38. An iceberg (density 0.92 g/cc) is floating partly immersed in sea water (density 1.03 g/cc). The fraction of the total volume of the iceberg above the sea water, is (a) 89% (b) 11% (c) 9.09% (d) 78%. 39. If MJ and MY are the inertial and gravitational masses of a body respectively, then (a) MG = 9.8 MF (b) MG = MI (c) MG = A/,/9.8 (d) MG = M,/6. 40. The gravitational field intensity is measured in (a) Nm 2 kg 2 (b) N kg' s"2 (c) N kg (d) N kg"1. Directions (Q. 41 to 60) : In each of the following questions, a statement of assertion (A) is given and a corresponding statement of reason (R) is given just below it. Of the statements, mark the correct answer as (a) if both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
28. A simple pendulum oscillates with frequency n in air. On immersing in a liquid of density one sixth of the bob of the pendulum, it oscillates with the frequency (a)
(b)
1.^1
(c) (  ) »
(d)
29. If a cube is put in a liquid of density 3 times the density of the material of the cube, then the fraction of the volume of the cube which remains inside the liquid is (a) 1/4 (b) 1/2 (c) 2/3 (d) 1/3. 30. If the angular velocity of a body increases by 50%, then the percentage increase in the rotational kinetic energy is (a) 225% (b) 125% (c) 25% (d) 50%. 31. A transformer changes 220 V to 22 V. If the currents in the primary and secondary coils are 10 A and 70 A respectively, then its efficiency will be (a) 100% (b) 90% (c) 80% (d) 70%. 32. The power factor of LCR circuit at resonance is (a) 0.707 (b) 1 (c) zero (d) 0.5
10 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
(b) if both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A (c) if A is true but R is false (d) if both A and R are false. 41. Assertion : The rainbow is seen sometimes in the sky when it is raining to an observer with his back towards the sun. Reason ; Total internal reflection from water droplets causes dispersion. The final rays are in the backward direction. 42. Assertion : The relative velocity of two photons travelling in opposite direction is C. Reason : The rest mass of photon is zero. 43. Assertion : Brilliant colours are seen in thin layer of oil on the solution. Reason : White light is composed of several colours. 44. Assertion : In LCR series circuit, the resonance occurs at one frequency only. Reason : At resonance the inductive reactance is equal to the capacitive reactance. 45. Assertion : For a given mass of an ideal gas, at constant temperature the product of the pressure and volume is constant. Reason : The mean square velocity of the molecules is inversely proportional to their masses at constant temperature. 46. Assertion : y for a diatomic gas is more than for a monoatomic gas. Reason : The molecules of a monoatomic gas have more degrees of freedom than those of a diatomic gas. 47. Assertion : Radiowaves can be polarised. Reason : Sound waves are longitudinal waves. 48. Assertion : If a pendulum falls freely, then its time period becomes infinite. Reason : Free falling body has acceleration equal to g. 49. Assertion : The couple acting on a body is not equal to the rotational kinetic energy of the body. Reason : Couple and kinetic energy have different units. 50. Assertion : A thin aluminium disc spinning freely about a central pivot is quickly brought to rest when placed between the poles of a strong Ushaped magnet. Reason : A current induced in a disc rotating in a
magnetic field produces a force which tends to oppose the disc's motion. 51. Assertion : In a radioactive disintegration an electron is emitted by the nucleus. Reason : Electrons are always present inside the nucleus. 52. Assertion : A dip needle becomes vertical at magnetic equator of the earth. Reason : The magnetic field due to the earth at the magnetic equator is vertical. 53. Assertion : When two electrons are brought close to each other, the electrical potential energy increases. Reason : Work must be done against electrical force of repulsion. 54. Assertion : If Young's double slit experiment is performed in water, the fringe width will decrease. Reason : Wavelength of light in water is smaller than in air. 55. Assertion : Two satellites of masses m, and m2 (m, > m2) are going around the earth in orbits of radii r, and r2 (r, > r2). Reason : They will have same velocity. 56. Assertion : It is not possible for a system, unaided by an external agency, to transfer heat from a body at lower temperature to another at higher temperature. Reason : It is not possible to violate the second law of thermodynamics. 57. Assertion : In the absence of space charge, the potential gradient between cathode and the anode will be uniform. Reason : The space charge reduces the potential in the cathode and anode region nonuniformly. 58. Assertion : A vibrating tuning fork sounds louder when its stem is put against a desk top. Reason : When a wave reaches another denser medium, a part of the wave is reflected. 59. Assertion : Isotopes of an element can be separated by using a mass spectrometer. Reason : Separation of isotopes is possible because of the difference in electron numbers of isotopes. 60. Assertion : A large soap bubble expands while a small bubble shrinks when they are connected to each other by a capillary tube. Reason : The excess pressure inside bubble (or a drop) is inversely proportional to its radius.
P H Y S I C S F O R YOll  FEBRUARY '06
10
The Editor, Physics For You, 406, Taj Apartment, Ring Road, Adjacent Safdarjung Hospital, New Delhi  110 029.
Attach this form along with your response sheet. (Photocopy is not aliowed). Please send a self addressed envelope along with postal stamps worth Rs.20. Do not fix the stamps on the envelope. The despatch will include ranking cum analysis sheet and solutions (detailed). Response sheet will not be entertained without the stamps. The last date of receipt of Response Sheets is 10th of next month.
Name Correspondence address — Pin:
No. of Q u e s t i o n s A t t e m p t e d
Board Passed/Appearing (Percentage & year)
Phone :
N o . of Q u e s t i o n s U n a t t e m p t e d
Do you s u b s c r i b e to M a t h e m a t i c s Today, Physics For You, Chemistry Today and Biology Today. If Yes Subscription N o If N o , h o w you obtained this issue • From school library Hj M a g a z i n e A g e n t / B o o k Shop Others (please s p e c i f y )
W h a t you like most in Physics For You?
What
suggestions
would
you
like
to
give
for
its
improvement?
Note : Solution sheet other than the one printed will not be accepted. Fill the correct answers in circles with blue/black ball point pen. S h e e t m a r k e d w i t h p e n c i l s will not be a c c e p t e d D o n ' t tick ( S ) mark.
ANSWER SHEET
©® © ®® ® ®® ®® ®® ®® ®® ®® ®© ®® ®® ®® ®®
© ©
© © ©© ©® 20. ® ® ® 21. © ® © @ ©® 22. © ® © @ ©® 23. © © © ® ©® 24. © ® © © 25. ® © @ © ® 26. ® © © ©® 27. © ® ©® 28. © ® © @ ©® 29. © ® © ©
© @
©@ ©© ©©
© ® ©® 17. © ® 18. © ® © @
16.
© @
©© ®® 32. © © © @ 33. © ®
31.
46. 47. 48. 49 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55.
©
©
19.
©
©
@
© 35. © © 36. © ® © ©
34. •
©
©
@
©®
©
© ©© © ®
© ©
©
@
©
©
@
©
©
37. 38. 39.
©
©
@
©
© 40. ©
41.
.
©
©
@
©®
30.
©®
©
@
© 43. © 44. © 45. ©
42.
® ® ® ® ® ® ® ® ®
©
@
©
©®
©@
©
@
©
©© ©©
©
©® ©@
@
® 56. ® 57. ® 58. © ®
© © ©
©®
® ® ®
©
©
©
©
® ® ® ® ® ® ®
©
©
® ®
©
©
©
©
®
PI
59.
©®
©
©
®
©
©
® ® ®
10 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
Practice Paper
for
1. A particle of mass 10 gram is executing simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 0.5 m and circular frequency of 10 radian/sec. The maximum value of the force acting on the particle during the course of the oscillation is (a) 25 newton (b) 2.5 newton (c) 5 newton (d) 0.5 newton 2. A copper wire and a steel wire of same diameter and length are connected end to end and a force is applied which stretches their combined length by 1 cm. The two wires will have (a) same stress and strain (b) different stress and strain (c) different stress and same strain (d) same stress and different strain. 3. A force of 5 N acts on a body of 5 kg for 1 second and gives it a momentum p and kinetic energy E. If the same force accelerates the same body through 1 m, the momentum and energy attained by the body are p' and £ ' respectively. Which of the following relation is correct? (a )p>p',E>E' (b )p<p',E<E' (c)p>p',E<E' (d) p <p', E> E'. 4. Roadways are banked on curves so that (a) the weight of the vehicle may be decreased. (b) the frictional force between the road and vehicle may be decreased (c) the wear and tear of tyres may be avoided (d) the speeding vehicles may not fall inwards. 5. An object is placed at a distance of 30 cm from a concave mirror and its real image is formed at a distance of 30 cm from the mirror. The focal length of the mirror is (a) 15 cm (b) 45 cm (c) 30 cm (d) 20 cm 6. A motor cyclist moving with a velocity of
72 km/h on a flat road takes a turn on the road at a point where radius of curvature of road is 20 m. In order to avoid skidding, he must not bend with respect to the vertical plane by an angle 6 greater than (a) tan"1 (6) (b) tan"1 (2) (c) tan"'(25.92) (d) tan'(4).
VAV
7. In the given figure, the current in the cell is (a) 33 A (b) 3.3 A (c) 0.33 A (d) 3.32 A.
8. The critical angle of light passing from glass to air is minimum for (a) red (b) green (c) yellow (d) violet. 9. Ten identical electric bulbs, each rated 220 V, 50 W are used in parallel on 200 V line for 10 hours a day in month of 30 days. The electric energy consumed in kWh is (a) 5 kWh (b) 50 kWh (c) 15 kWh (d) 1500 kWh. 10. Variation of time period of a simple pendulum with its length is as in
(a)
(c)
/ / 11. A body start from rest with a uniform acceleration of 2 m/s 2 for 10 sec. it move with constant speed for 30 sec then deaccelerated by 4 m/s2 to zero. What is the distance covered by the body? (a) 750 m (b) 850 m (c) 600 m (d) none of these.
10 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
12. A solenoid is taken and an iron rod is inserted into it then which of the following quantities will not change (a) magnetic field at the centre (b) magnetic flux linked with the solenoid (c) self inductance of the solenoid (d) joule heating. 13. Two mirrors are placed at right angles to each other. A man is standing between them combing his hair. How many images he will see? (a) 3 (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 0. 14. A sine wave has an amplitude^ and wavelength A. Let Vbe the wave velocity and v be the maximum velocity of a particle in the medium. Then (a) "  v i f ^ M (b) V = v if A = 2 n l (d) V can not be equal to v.
19. An immersion heater of 1 kW will take the time for increasing the temperature of 1 litre of water through 10°C equal to (a) 10 s (b) 24 s (c) 42 s (d) 100 s. 20. A galvanometer is shunted by 1 /«"' of its resistance. The fraction of the current passing through the galvanometer is 7 I (a) — r (b) n +1 n1 (c) n +1 (d) A n\
21. The peak value of voltage in 220 volt a.c. mains is (a) 155.6 volt (b) 220 volt (c) 311 volt (d) 440 voit. 22. If A = 4/ + 4j  4k and B = 3;' + j + 4k , the angle between the vectors is (a) 0° (b) 45° (c) 60° (d) 90°. 23. Two waves having a phase difference of 60° will have a path difference of (a) A/2 (b) A/3 (c) A/6 (d) 2A. 24. To obtain 3 (J.F capacity from three capacitors of 2 p.F each, they will be arranged (a) all the three in series (b) all the three in parallel (c) two capacitors in series and the third in parallel with the combination of the two (d) two capacitors in parallel and the third in series with the combination of the two. 25. A magnet of magnetic moment M is freely suspended in a uniform magnetic field of strength B. The work done in rotating the magnet through an angle 0 is given by (a) BM (b) A/SsinG (c) A/ScosG (d) MB(\  cos0). 26. An automobile engine develops 100 kW when rotating at a speed of 1800 rev/min. What torque does it deliver? (a) 350 Nm (b) 440 Nm (c) 531 Nm (d) 628 Nm. 27. At what height from the earth surface, the acceleration of gravity will be half the value of g at surface.
10 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
(c) V = v if A = A 2n
15. A body starts from rest with uniform acceleration. The velocity of the body after t sec. is v. The displacement of the body in last 3 sec. is (a) 3vp3v, (b) — ( f  3) (d) none of these.
(c) — (/ + 3)
16. A body of mass 0.10 kg is being rotated in a circular path of diameter 1.0 m on a frictionless horizontal plane by means of a string. It performs 10 revolutions in 31.4 sec. The centripetal force acting on the body is (a) 2 N (b) 2.4 N (c) 0.2 N (d) 0.5 N. 17. If the coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid in a copper vessel is C and in a silver vessel is S and the coefficient of linear expansion of copper is A, then the coefficient of linear expansion of silver is (C + S 3A) (S + 3A C) (a) — — t (b) r j (C + 3 A • S) (C + S + 3/4) (c) (d) 18. A current / ampere flows in a circular wire of radius r subtending an angle n/2 radian at the centre. The magnetic induction B at the centre will be iW r jV (c) 4r 60 (a) (b) ^ rT 2 iM (d) 8r
(R = 6400 km) (a) 2650 km (c) 4800 km
(b) 3200 km (d) 6400 km.
28. Two waves are approaching each other with a velocity of 20 m/s and frequency n. The distance between two consecutive nodes is (a) 20In (b) 10/w (c) 51 n (d) n/10. 29. 2 x (a) (c) Coefficient of superficial expansion of a solid is 10"5/°C. Its coefficient of linear expansion is 1 x 10"5/°C (b) 2 x i o  5 l°C 5 3 x l O l°C (d) 4 x 10~5 /°C.
If magnetic flux between the pole pieces is known to be 8 x 10 4 Wb, then induced emf in the wire is (a) 8 x 103 V (b) 6 x io~ 3 V (c) 4 x IO"3 V (d) 2 x 10"3 V. 37. A closely wound flat circular coil of 25 turns of wire has diameter of 10 cm and carries a current of 4 ampere. Determine the flux density at the centre of a coil. (a) 1.679 x 10~5 tesla (b) 2.028 x 10~4 tesla 3 (c) 1.257 x 10~ tesla (d) 1 . 5 1 2 x IO"6 tesla. 38. (a) (b) (c) The magnitude of acceleration of the car is maximum on applying brakes on pressing the accelerator on starting the car (d) on turning off the car.
30. If the capacitance of a spherical conductor is 1 0,F, then its diameter would be (a) 1.8 x i o 3 m (b) 18 x i o 3 m (c) 1.8 x 107 m (d) 18 x 107 m. 31. A wire has a resistance of 3.1 Q at 30°C and a resistance 4.5 Q at 100°C. The temperature coefficient of resistance of the wire is (a) 0.0064 °C' (b) 0.0034 0 C"' 0 (c) 0.0025 C"' (d) 0.0012 "C"1. 32. (a) (c) (d) The internal resistance of a cell is the resistance of electrodes of the cell (b) vessel of the cell electrolyte used in the cell material used in the cell.
39. The extraction of cream from milk when it is churned depends upon (a) centrifugal force (b) centripetal force (c) cohesive force (d) gravitational force. 40. (a) (b) (c) (d) The coefficient of restitution depends upon the masses of the colliding bodies the direction of motion of the colliding bodies the inclination between the colliding bodies the materials of the colliding bodies.
33. An astronomical telescope has a length of 44 cm and tenfold magnification. The focal length of the objective lens is (a) 4 cm (b) 40 cm (c) 44 cm (d) 440 cm. 34. If a spring extends by x on loading, then energy stored by the spring is (if T is the tension in the spring and k is the spring constant) (a) T2l2x (b) T2/2k 2 (c) 2k/T (d) 2T2/k. 35. A copper ring is moved quickly towards the south pole of a powerful stationary bar magnet. As a result (a) copper ring will get attracted (b) copper ring will get magnetised (c) a current flows in the magnet (d) current flows through copper ring. 36. A small piece of metal wire is dragged across the gap between the poles pieces of a magnet in 0.4 sec.
10 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
41. The coefficient of thermal conductivity of a rod depends on (a) nature of material of rod (b) volume of rod (d) temperature of rod (d) area of crosssection of the rod. 42. Photoelectric threshold wavelength for tungsten is 2300 A. Work function will be (a) 5.39 eV (b) 53.9 eV (c) 5.39 x 103 eV (d) none of these. 43. An electron is accelerated at 10 kV to a tungsten target. The wavelength of the Xray photon produced will be (a) 0.62 A (b) 2.48 A (c) 0.124 mm (d) 1.24 A. 44. A rectangular coil of area 2 0 cm x 15 cm and turns 485 is revolving in a uniform magnetic field intensity 20 Wb/m2 with a speed of 1 800 rpm. Find emf developed in the coil when it makes an angle 60° with the field? (a) 45.7 x 104 V (b) 74.5 x 104 V 4 (c) 4.75 x 10 V (d) 7.45 x 104 V. of of the of
45. A horizontal wire 0.1 m long carries a current of 5 A. Find the magnitude and direction of an independent magnetic field which can support the weight of the wire, assuming its mass to be 3 x 10~3 kg nr 1 ? (a) 58.8 x 10' 3 T, horizontal (b) 5.88 x IO"3 T, horizontal (c) 88.5 x IO'3 T, down vertical (d) 85.8 x 103 T, vertical. 46. If the ratio of maximum and minimum intensities in an interference pattern is 36 : 1, the ratio of the amplitudes of the two interfering waves will be (a) 5 : 7 (b) 7 : 4 (c) 4 : 7 (d) 7 : 5. 47. The equatuion, y = 0.15sin5xcos300/ represents a stationary wave. The wavelength of this stationary wave will be (a) zero (b) 1.256 m (c) 2.512 m (d) 0.628 m 48. Two rods of same material have diameters in the ratio 1 : 2 and lengths in the ratio 2 :1. If the temperature difference between their ends is the same, the ratio of heats conducted by them in a given time will be (a) 8 : 1 (b) 1 : 8 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 4. 49. A surface encloses in an electric dipole. The flux through the surface is (a) zero (b) positive (c) negative (d) infinite. 50. are (a) (b) (c) (d) When using a triode as an amplifier, the electrons emitted by anode and collected by cathode only anode and collected by the grid and by cathode grid and collected by cathode only cathode and collected by anode only.
54. Calculate the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor, the potential plate of which has an area 200 cm2. The distance between the plates is 1 cm and it is filled up by an abonite plate of S.I.C. = 3. (a) 77.4 e.s.u (b) 47.7 e.s.u (c) 4.77 e.s.u (d) 477.0 e.s.u. 55. A wire, having 1 mm 2 crosssectional are carries a current of 3.2 ampere. If the drift velocity of the electrons be 2 cms"', find the number of electrons per unit volume of the wire. Charge of an election = 1.6 x 1019 coulomb, (a) 1018 (b) 1072 (c) 1027 (d) IO30. 56. Two batteries £,= 1 V 5 £, = 9 V r, = 0.9 £1 of e.m.f. 15 volt r, = 0.6 Q  1+ + Iand 9 volt and i n t e r n a l resistances 0.9 ohm and 0.6 ohm respectively, are jVAWl connected with R=10.5Q 10.5 ohm as shown in the figure. Calculate the current in the circuit? (a) 0.5 A (b) 5.0 A (c) 0.05 A (d) 0.005 A.
+2e
57. Find the electric intensity at A. 0.3 m (a) 0.3464 x 10" N/C (b) 346.64 x 10" N/C (c) 34.64 x 10" N/C (d) 3.464 x i o " N/C.+2e
> E
51. Calculate the velocity of sound in air at 20°C, when the atmospheric pressure is 76 cm of mercury. Given t h a t y = 1.41 and density of air is 0.001293 gm per cc. at 0°C. (a) 344.7 m/s (b) 375.4 m/s (c) 320 m/s (d) 365.3 m/s. 52. Most room heaters rely on (a) conduction (b) radiation (c) convection (d) all of these. 53. Electrical fuses are usually made of (a) copper (b) aluminium (c) manganin (d) wood's metal.
58. Of the following quantities, which one has dimensions different from the others? (a) pressure (b) torque (c) stress (d) modulus of elasticity. 59. If P and 0 are two vectors, then the correct relation is (a) P+Q=QP (c) P
x
(b) P + Q = Q + P (d) P
x
Q = Qx P
Q—P•Q .
60. Magnifying power of a telescope is M. If the focal length of its eyepiece is doubled, then the magnifying power is (a) 2M (b) M (c) 3M (d) M/2.
PHYSICS FOR YOU I FEBRUARY '06
62
61. Which of the following statements is not correct in respect to a body in uniform circular motion? (a) its kinetic energy is constant (b) its acceleration is constant (c) its speed is constant (d) its angular velocity is constant. 62. When monochromatic light travels from air to another medium, say glass (a) frequency decreases (b) frequency increases (c) wavelength decreases (d) wavelength increases. 63. A ball collides elastically with another ball of the same mass. The collision is oblique and initially one of the balls was at rest. After the collision the two balls move with same speed. What will be the angle between the velocities of the balls after the collision? (a) 30° (b) 45° (c) 60° (d) 90°. 64. The orbital speed of a satellite in a circular orbit of radius r about a spherical planet of mass M and mean density p for a low altitude orbit (r = rp) will be (a) (b) finap
charge on an electron is rotating once per second in a circular path of radius 0.8 m. The value of the magnetic field produced at the centre will be (n 0 = permeability constant) (a) 107/Ho (c) 10"6/n0
•4
(b) lO'Vo (d) 10"7Ho.
69. The magnetic moment of a short magnet is 8 amp. m2. What is the magnetic induction at a point 20 cm away on its equatorial line from its mid point? (a) 104 weber/m2 (b) 2 x IO"4 weber/m 2 4 2 (c) 3 x IO" weber/m (d) 4 * IO"4 weber/m 2 . 70. A group of electric lamps having a total power rating of 1000 watt is supplied by an A.C. voltage E = 200 sin(310/ + 60°). Then the rms value of the circuit current is (a) 10 amp (c) 20 amp (b) 10V2 amp (d) 20^2 amp
71. Time taken by the sunlight to pass through a window of thickness 4 mm whose refractive index is 1.5 is (a) 2 x ]0"8 second (b) 2 x 108 second (c) 2 x 10"" second (d) 2 x 10" second. 72. Angle of deviation (8) by a prism (refractive index = n and supposing the angle of prism A to be small) can be given by (a) 5 = ( n  1 )A (b) 5 = (jt + I )A A + 8„ sin (Hl) (c) 8 = (d) S = (H + l) sm(A/2) 73. The amplification factor of a triode is 20. Its plate resistance is 10 kiloohm. Its mutual conductance will be (a) 2 x 10s mho (b) 2 x io 4 mho (c) 500 mho (d) 2 * 10~3 mho. 74. On increasing the reverse bias to a large value in a /'//junction diode, the current (a) increases slowly (b) remains constant (c) suddenly increases (d) decreases slowly. 75. A long straight conductor, carrying a current /, is bent to form an almost complete circular loop of radius r. The magnetic field at the centre of the loop has magnitude (a, i l l  '
(d) V2Gp65. Density of ice is p and that of water is a. What will be the decrease in volume when a mass M of ice melts? M PP (a) ( c  p ) (b) M (c) M
I_i
P
a
(d)
M
66. A point source emits sound equally in all directions in a nonabsorbing medium. Two points P and Q are at a distance 9 metre and 25 metre respectively from the source. The ratio of the amplitudes of the waves at P and O is (a) 25/9 (b) 9/25 (c) 5/3 (d) 3/5. 67. Two concentric spheres of radii R and r have similar charges with equal surface densities (o). What is the electric potential at their common centre? (a)
e„
^
(b)
E„
(Rr)
(c) —(R + r)
(d) none of these.
68. A particle carrying a charge equal to 100 times the
10 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
(b) (d)
iV r 0 + «) M f 1 2r \
+
n n)
76. Which of the following statements is correct? (a) A charged particle can be accelerated by a magnetic field. (b) A charged particle can not be accelerated by a magnetic field. (c) The speed of a charged particle can be increased by a uniform magnetic field. (d) The speed of a charged particle can be increased by a nonuniform magnetic field. 77. Suppose the earth stops rotating about its axis. Then the value g at the equator would : (a) become zero (c) increase by co2 R (b) remain unchanged (d) decrease by co2 R
83. Two springs A and B are alike and fV is the work done in stretching the spring. A is stiffer than B (kA > kK). If they are elongated through the same distance, then (a) WA> W„ (b) WA < W„ (c) IVA = Wh (d) none of these. 84. A solid sphere rolls on an inclined plane with an acceleration of 3.5 m/s2. The angle made by the incline with the horizontal is (a) 30° (b) 45° (c) 60° (d) 75°. 85. What will be the number of molecules in 10"6 m3 air at 105 N/m 2 pressure and 300 K temeperature? (Boltzmann's constant = 1.38 x IO"23 JK"1) (a) 32.0 x io 15 (b) 3.2 x 10"23 91 (c) 2.3 x 10 (d) 2.3 x 1019. 86. (a) (c) (d) 87. (a) (c) (d) 88. (a) (b) (c) A red hot body emits thermal radiations (b) ultraviolet rays thermal radiation alongwith red light all of these. The dispersive power of a prism depends on angle of the prism (b) material of the prism angle of the prism and material of the prism both none of the angle of prism and material of prism. Line spectrum is obtained from yellow light of candle light of electric bulb Bunsen burner (d) sodium lamp.
78. A thin prism P of angle 4° and made of glass of refractive index 1.54 is combined with another thin prism P' of refractive index 1.72 for dispersion without deviation. The angle of prism of P' will be (a) 2.6° (b) 4° (c) 5.33° (d) 3°. 79. If the velocity of sound in hydrogen is 1500 m, then its velocity in a mixture of three parts of oxygen and two parts of hydrogen by volume will be (a) 385.7 m/s (b) 474.4 m/s (c) 536.3 m/s (d) 676.9 m/s. 80. 56 tuning forks are arranged such that each fork produces 4 beats per second with its preceding fork. The frequency of the last fork is three times that of first. The frequency of the first fork will be (a) 220 Hz (b) 110 Hz (c) 330 Hz (d) 440 Hz. 81. A metal wire of length L, area of crosssection A and Youngs modulus Y behaves as a spring of spring constant 2 YA YA (b) * = (a) k = L
89. 64 water drops alike in all respects have been charged to the same potential. Their total electrostatic energy is £. All these drops combine to form one big drop. The energy of the big drop will be (a) 8E (b) 16£ (c) 32E (d) 4£. 90. Kilowatt hour is the unit of (a) energy (b) power (c) electric charge (d) electric current. 91. Two separate straight conductors carry parallel currents in opposite directions. They will (a) attract each other (b) repel each other (c) neither attract nor repel each other (d) try to be perpendicular to each other. 92. (a) (b) (c) Identify the following sketch. PNP transistor NPN transistor PN junction diode (d) photocell.
P H Y S I C S F O R YOll  FEBRUARY '06
, ,
(c)
,
YA k =TL
(d)
k J ± . A
82. If yx2 (a) 7=
— x1 is the equation of a trajectory, find V2 (b) —
8
the time of flight. 2 (c) 8
(d)
1 —.
2
10
8
93. For a ring, disc, solid sphere and spherical shell of same mass and radius the moment of inertia about an axis passing through their centre will respectively be maximum and minimum in case of (a) ring and disc (b) ring and spherical shell (c) ring and solid sphere (d) solid sphere and spherical shell. 94. For a photoelectric cell, the graph showing the variation of cutvoltage (V0) with frequency (u) of incident radiation is
100. When a glass rod rubbed with silk is brought near the gold leaf electroscope, the leaves diverge. The charge on the leaves is (a) positive (b) negative (c) either positive or negative (d) equal and opposite. ANSWERS 1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 46. 51. 56. 61. 66. 71. 76. 81. 86. 91. 96. (d) (b) (a) (c) (c) (c) (a) (d) (a) (d) (a) (a) (b) (a) (c) (a) (a) (c) (b) (d) 2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. 47. 52. 57. 62. 67. 72. 77. 82. 87. 92. 97. (d) (c) (d) (c) (d) (a) (c) (c) (a) (b) (c) (d) (c) (c) (a) (c) (a) (b) (c) (d) 3. 8. 13. 18. 23. 28. 33. 38. 43. 48. 53. 58. 63. 68. 73. 78. 83. 88. 93. 98. (b) (d) (a) (d) (c) (b) (b) (a) (d) (b) (d) (b) (d) (b) (d) (d) (a) (d) (c) (c) 4. 9. 14. 19. 24. 29. 34. 39. 44. 49. 54. 59. 64. 69. 74. 79. 84. 89. 94. 99. (d) (c) (c) (c) (c) (a) (b) (a) (c) (a) (b) (b) (a) (a) (c) (b) (a) (b) (d) (b) 5. (a) 10. (c) 15. (a) 20. (b) 25. (d) 30. (b) 35. (d) 40. (d) 45. (b) 50. (d) 55. (c) 60. (d) 65. (c) 70. (b) 75. (c) 80. (b) 85. (d) 90. (a) 95. (a) 100. (a)
v
•
u
•
95. A uniform electric field E is directed along +*axis. If the potential Vis 0 at x = 0, then the potential at a point +x will be (a) xE (b) xE (c) x2E (d) x2E. 96. 100 will (a) 97. (a) (b) (c) (d) A 500 nF capacitor is charged at a steady state of jxC per second. A potential difference of 10 volt be developed between the capacitor plates after 5 sec (b) 10 sec (c) 20 sec (d) 50 sec. Pick cut the incorrect statement. 1 volt x l coulomb = 1 joule 1 volt x l ampere = 1 joule/sec 1 volt x l watt = 1 horsepower watthour can be expressed in electron volt.
98. The SI unit of magnetic field is tesla (T). It may also be written as (a) J A"2 n r 2 (b) J A"1 n r 1 2 (c) JA" n r (d) JA"1 nr 3 . 99. The correct sequence of diamagnetic, paramagnetic and ferromagnetic substances respectively is (a) liquid oxygen, magnetite, water (b) water, liquid oxygen, magnetite (c) liquid oxygen, water, magnetite (d) none of these.
10 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  FEBRUARY '06
Book your c o p y TODAYS
J ! * t M T G BOOKS
2 503, Taj Apt, Ring Road, Near Safdarjung Hospita J g New Delhi  29 Tel : 26194317, 26191601 BOOKS email: info@mtg.io website: www.mtg.in
FDR
(For Q.No. 1 to 60) Only one option is correct and there will be negative marking in these 1. There is a small hole in the bottom of a fixed container containing a liquid upto a height h. The top of the liquid as well as the hole at the bottom are exposed to atmosphere. As the liquid comes out of the hole, (area of the hole is a and that of the top surface is A) (a) the top surface of the liquid accelerates with acceleration = g (b) the top surface of the liquid accelerates with acceleration r2 a'
questions.
(c) the top s u r f a c e of the liquid retards with a retardation = gA (d) the top s u r f a c e of the liquid retards with ga retardation = — r • A 2. A hollow smooth uniform sphere A of mass m rolls without sliding on a smooth horizontal surface. It collides elasticaily and head on with another stationary smooth solid sphere B of the same mass m and same radius. The ratio of kinetic energy of B to that of A just after the collision is (a) 5 : 2 (b) 1 : 1 (c) 2 : 3 (d) 3 : 2. 3. A string of length / is fixed at both ends. It is vibrating in its 3 rd overtone with maximum amplitude a. The amplitude at a distance 113 from one end is (a) a (b) 0 43a (c) — (d) all.
x is the distance from the S.O = S f i / plane of slits as shown), upto a distance / before falling on S R e s t of the space is s, filled with air. If at O a minima is formed, then the s. minimum value of the positive constant a (in terms of / and wavelength X in air) is (a) XII (b) A.//2 (c) FIX (d) none of these.
Screen
5. Three infinitely long line charges are arranged along the three coordinate axes. The magnitude of electric field at a point P (a, a, a) is [X = charge per unit length on each line charge, k = l/47te0] (a) 2 kA . (b) j6kA , (c) 6 kA (d) 2^3kX
6. A bob is attached to a long, light string. The string is deflected by 30° initially with respect to vertical. The length of the string is 1 m. The value of 0 at any time t after the bob has been released is (Use g = n1) (a) 30°cos7i/ (b) 30°sinro (c) 30°sin(7i/+ 30°) (d) none of these. 7. A ring of radius R having a linear charge density X moves towards a solid imaginary sphere of radius RI2, so that the centre of ring passes through the centre of sphere. The axis of the ring is perpendicular to the line joining the centres of the ring and the sphere. The maximum flux through f he sphere in this process is (a) 8. XR (b) XR 2s„ (c) XnR 4s„ (d) XnR 3s,,
4. In the figure shown, a parallel beam of light is incident on the plane of the slits of a Young's double slit experiment. Light incident on the slit, S, passes through a medium of variable refractive index p = 1 + ax (where
Two particles P and Q describe simple harmonic
Contributed by Deptt. of Physics, Resonance, Kota (Rajasthan)
127 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  MARCH '06
motions of same period, same amplitude along the same line about the same equilibrium position O. When P and O are on opposite sides of O at the same distance from O they have the same speed of 1.2 m/s in the same direction, when their displacements are same they have the same speed of 1.6 m/s in opposite directions. The maximum velocity in m/s of either particle is (a) 3 (b) 2.5 (c) 2.4 (d) 2. 9. If we assume that penetrating power of any radiation/ particle is inversely proportional to wavelength of the particle then (a) a proton and an aparticle after getting accelerated through same potential difference will have equal penetrating power (b) penetrating power of aparticle will be greater than that of proton which have been accelerated by same potential difference (c) proton's penetrating power will be less than penetrating power of an electron which has been accelerated by the same potential difference (d) penetrating powers can not be compared as all these are particles having no wavelength or wave nature. 10. A hydrogen atom is in the 4th excited state, then (a) the maximum number of possible transitions will be 10 (b) the maximum number of possible transitions will be 6 (c) it can emit three photons in ultraviolet region (d) if an infrared photon is generated, then a visible photon may follow this infrared photon. 11. A free standing wall of height h and thickness t and density pu rests on a rough floor. A wind of speed v and density p blows against the wall. Assuming air is stopped when it reaches the wall and there is sufficient friction on the ground so that the wall does not slide, the minimum velocity v so that the wall topples is f n1/2 P„g P„g (a) (b) P.* j (c)
13. Total friction force acting on the wall in the above question is (take length of wall to be I) (a) p > ' 2 (b) pjhv1 (c) p J h * (d) p J t v \ 14. A striker is shot from a square carrom board from a point A exactly at midpoint of one of the walls with a speed 2 m/sec at an angle of 45° with the xaxis as shown. The collisions of the striker with the walls of the fixed carrom are perfectly elastic. The / = I/V2 coefficient of kinetic friction between the striker and board is 0.2. The coordinate of the striker when it stops (taking point O to be the origin) is (a) (c) 2V2' V2 1 0 2V2' 0, <b)~ (d) ' 2V2
V 2 ' 2V2 '
15. Consider a spherical planet rotating about its axis. The velocity of a point on its equator is v. The angular velocity of this planet is such that it makes apparent value of g at the equator half of value of g at the pole. The escape velocity for a polar particle on the planet expressed as a multiple of v is (a) v (b) 2v (c) 3v (d) data insufficient. 16. The angular momentum of a particle about origin is varying as L = 4/ + 8 (S.I. units) when it moves along a straight line y = x  4 (x, y in meters). The force acting on the particle would be (a) I N (b) 2 N (c) V2 N (d) S N. 17. The elongation in a metallic rod hinged at one end and rotating in a horizontal plane becomes four times of the initial value. The angular velocity of rotation becomes (a) two times the initial value (b) half of initial value (c) one third of initial value (d) four times the initial value. 18. Number of identical photons incident on a perfectly black body of mass m kept at rest on smooth horizontal surface. Then the acceleration of the body if n number of photons incident per sec is (Assume wavelength of photon to be X) nh nh 2nnh Xm (a) (c) (d) 27t Xm Xm Xm ~h
12. Minimum value of coefficient of friction, in the above question so that the wall only topples and does not slide for a given velocity v is (a) py p„v (b) p,gt 2 Pwgt
1
IP
(d) none of these.
(c)
gt
(d) none.
7 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  MARCH '06
19. A spherical ball of mass density a and radius /• is attached to a pulleymass system as shown in figure. The ball is released in a liquid of coefficient of viscosity ri and density p (< a/2). If the length of the liquid column is sufficiently long, the terminal velocity attained by the ball is given by (assume all pulleys to be massless and string as massless and inextensible) (a) (c) 1 r2(2a  P)g 9 T 1 U 2(q4p)g 9 1 (b) (d) 1 r (cr2p)g r(c3p)g
throughout the plane. If the coordinates of end point P of wire are (2 m, 1.5 m), then the total force acting on the wire is (a) 40 Nk (b) 1 0 N k (c)  1 0 N k (d)  4 0 N k . 23. The gas law PV/T = constant for a given amount of a gas is true for (a) isothermal change only (b) adiabatic change only (c) both isothermal & adiabatic changes (d) neither isothermal nor adiabatic change . 24. A hot black body emits the energy at the rate of 16 J n r 2 s"1 and its most intense radiation corresponds to 20,000 A. When the temperature of this body is further increased and its most intense radiation corresponds to 10,000 A , then the energy radiated in J n r 2 s _l will be (a) 4 (b) 1 (c) 64 (d) 256 25. A wall is made of two layers A and B of the same thickness but different materials. The thermal conductivity of A is twice that of B. In steady state, the temperature difference across the wall is 36°C. The temperature difference across the layer A is (a) 6° C (b) 12° C (c) 18° C (d) 24° C. 26. An ideal monoatomic gas initially at 300 K undergoes an isobaric expansion at a pressure of 2.5 kPa. If the volume increases from 1 m 1 to 3 m \ then heat added to the gas and its final temperature respectively are (a) 12500 J, 450 K (b) 12500 J, 600 K (c) 12500 J, 900 K (d) 25000 J, 1200 K. 27. A plane mirror forms image / of an object O kept 10 cm from the mirror. It is found that 1 O 10 c m when a planoconcave thin lens is placed in front of and in contact with the mirror (plane surface of lens in contact with mirror), the position of image formed by plane mirror does not change. Then the refractive index of lens and radius of curvature of its curved surface are respectively (a) 1.5, 10 cm (b) 2.5, 10 cm (c) V2 , 10 cm (d) all of these are possible 28. An object and a plane mirror are shown in figure. Mirror is moved with velocity v as shown. The velocity of image is object (fixed)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
20. A capillary of the shape as shown is dipped in a liquid. Contact angle between the liquid and the capillary is 0° and effect of liquid inside the meniscus is to be neglected. T is surface tension of the liquid, r is radius of the meniscus, g is acceleration due to gravity and p is density of the liquid then height h in equilibrium is (a) greater than 2 T / r p g (b) equal to 2T/rpg (c) less than 2T/rpg (d) of any value depending upon act. 21. As shown in the figure, three sided frame is pivoted at P and O and hangs vertically. Its sides are of same length and r —
P
q
\mt
have a linear density of J j , kg/m. A current of 1 0 ^ ampere is sent through the frame, which is in a uniform magnetic field of 2 T directed upwards as shown. Then angle through which the frame will be deflected in equilibrium is (Take g = 10 m/s 2 ) (a) 30° (b) 45° (c) 60° (d) 90°. 22. A parabolic wire as shown in the figure is located in 1.5 m B = 2^2T x  y plane and carries a current / = 10 amp. A uniform magnetic field of intensity 2V2 T, making an angle of 45° with *axis exists 8
P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  MARCH '06
(a) 2vsin0 (c) 2vcos0
(b) 2v (d) none of these
heat developed in 80 seconds and amplitude wattless of
« = 4Q
29. M o n o c h r o m a t i c light rays parallel to A'axis strike a convex lens AB. If the lens oscillates such that AB tilts upto a small angle 0 (in radian) on either side of }'axis, then the amplitude of oscillation of image will be ( f = focal length of the lens) (a) / s e c 0 (b) / s e c 2 0 (c) / 0 2 / 2 (d) the image will not move. 30. It is f o u n d that all electromagnetic signals sent from A towards B reach point C. The speed of electromagnetic signals in glass cannot be (a) 1.0 x 10 s m/s (b) 2.4 x 10 s m/s (c) 2 x 107 m/s (d) 4 x 107 m/s 31. Figure s h o w s an / = 1 0 cm / = 5 cm object placed in front of a lens of focal length 10 cm, at a distance 20 cm from the lens. On 20 cm the other side, a convex mirror ( f = 5 cm) (with same principle axis as that of lens) is placed such that all light rays after refracting through lens strike the mirror simultaneously. The distance between the mirror and the lens is (a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm (c) 30 cm (d) cannot be determined 32. A conducting rod AB moves ® B parallel to jcaxis r X in the xy plane. ^  A uniform magnetic field B pointing out of the plane as shown in the figure. Required force to maintain a constant speed v of the rod is given by (initially capacitor is uncharged)
(a)
current is E = 25sin( 100ro + Jt/2) (a) 4000 J, 3A (d) 8000 J, 5A (b) 8000 J, 3A 34. 4000 J,given circuit, the (c) In the 4A 3 ^F potential difference across the WvV— capacitor (in steady state) is 24 V. Each resistance is of VW\r WA— 6 £2. If the cell is ideal, then emf of the cell is (a) 30 V (b) 9 V (c) 12 V (d) 40 V. 35. A loop of a string of mass per unit length (i and radius R is rotated about an axis passing through centre perpendicular to the plane with an angular velocity co. A small disturbance is created in the loop having the same sense of rotation. The linear speed of the disturbance for a stationary observer is (a) coR (b) 2coR (c) 3(0R (d) zero. PASSAGE 1 : (Read the following passage and answer the questions numbered 36 to 40. They have only one correct option) Changing from a circular to an elliptical orbit Let us identify the system as the spacecraft and the earth but not the portion of the fuel in the spacecraft that we use to change the orbit. In a given orbit, the mechanical energy of the spacecraft  earth system is given by E = GMm/lr. This energy includes the kinetic energy of the / \ /clliP'ifl ~ ° , .. : circular'. K orbit spacecraft and the •. ; orbj( potential energy ;' / associated with the : gravitational force between the spacecraft and the earth. *• rocket engine is fire here If the rocket engines are fired, the thrust force moves the spacecraft through a displacement. As a result, the mechanical energy of the spacecraft  earth system increases. The spacecraft has a new higher energy but is constrained to be in an orbit that includes the original starting point. It cannot be in a higher energy circular orbit having a
R
(b) (d)
v„S2/2 R „2i/IIC R
(c) ^ i a  e  " ' " ) R
33. In the series LCR circuit as shown in figure, the
9 PHYSICS FOR YOIJ  MARCH '06
larger radius because this orbit would not contain the starting point. The only possibility is that the orbit is elliptical as shown in the figure. GMM E=— 2a Above equation gives the energy of the spacecraft earth system for an elliptical orbit where a is semimajor axis. Thus if we know the new energy of the orbit, we can find the semimajor axis of the elliptical orbit. Conversely, if we know the semimajor axis of an elliptical orbit we would like to achieve, we can calculate how much additional energy is required from the rocket engines. A spacecraft is moving in a circular orbit around the earth (radius 6400 km), at a height of 300 km from the surface. To place the spacecraft in an elliptical orbit, the magnitude ofthe mechanical energy ofthe spacecraftearth system is decreased by 10.0%. 36. If the spacecraftearth system had initial energy (£•(,). then the total mechanical energy of the system after firing the rocket will be (a) 1.1E 0 (b)  0 . 9 E n (c) E0 (d) none of these. 37. Semimajor axis of the new elliptical orbit is (a) 7437 km (b) 6700 km (c) 7370 km (d) none of these. 38. The maximum distance from the centre of the earth to the spacecraft is (a) 6700 km (b) 8174 km (c) 7437 km (d) 7874 km. 39. Maximum height of the spacecraft above the surface o f t h e earth will be (a) 970 km (b) 1474 km (c) 300 km (d) 1774 km. 40. Minimum distance of the spacecraft from the surface of the earth is (a) 900 km (b) 1474 km (c) 300 km (d) 1774 km.
P A S S A G E # 2 : (Read the following passage and a n s w e r t h e q u e s t i o n s n u m b e r e d 41 t o 45. T h e y h a v e only one correct option)
minimum for red, violet is focused nearest to the lens while red farthest from it as shown in figure.
F,
y
As a result of this, in case of convergent lens if a screen is placed at F v centre of the image will be violet and focused while sides are red and blurred. While at Fn, reverse is the case, i.e., centre will be red and focused while sides violet and blurred. The difference between fv and ft is a measure of the longitudinal chromatic aberration (L.C.A), i.e., L.C..A. =fR  f v =  d / w i t h df=fv /« (1) However, as for a single lens,
/
 = Ctil>
R,
= d\i R "K .f 1 Dividing eqn. (3) by (2); df d\x
—
R2 . J_
(2) (3)
/
—
=
=
tt>
(Ht)
d\\. '= dispersive power (4) 011). And hence, from eqns. (1) and (4), L.C.A. = df= co/ Now, as for a single lens neither/nor co can be zero, we cannot have a single lens free from chromatic aberration.
as to = C o n d i t i o n of A c h r o m a t i s m :
In case of two thin lenses in contact
2= 2 f i F f fi The combination will be free from chromatic aberration \idF= 0
. df df i.e., —7 + —;r = 0 2 f fl which with the help of eqn. (4) reduces to co. f . co,/ „ — 1 i i i 2 = 0 i.e., (5) fc fi f fl This condition is called condition of achromatism (for two thin lenses in contact) and the lens combination which satisfies this condition is called achromatic lens, From this condition, i.e.. from eqn. (5) it is clear that in case of achromatic doublet :
P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  MARCH '06
>
,; /
Chromatic Aberration The image of a white object in white light formed by a lens is usually coloured and blurred. This defect of image is called chromatic aberration and arises due to the fact that focal length of a lens is different for different colours. As p. of lens is maximum for violet while 10
(1) The two lenses must be of different materials. Since, if co, =co,, — + — = 0 A A i.e., — = 0 or, F = oo F i.e., combination will not behave as a lens, but as a plane glass plate. (2) As co and to2 are positive quantities, for eqn. (5) to h o l d , / , a n d / , must be of opposite nature, i.e., if one of the lenses is converging the other must be diverging. (3) If the achromatic combination is convergent, = coc. <a>„ fo i.e., in a convergent achromatic doublet, convex lens has lesser focal length and dispersive power than the divergent one. 41. Chromatic aberration in the formation of images by a lens arises because : (a) of nonparaxial rays (b) the radii of curvature of the two sides are not same. (c) of the defect in grinding. (d) the focal length varies with wavelength. 42. Chromatic aberration of a lens can be corrected by (a) providing different suitable curvatures of its two surfaces. (b) proper polishing of its two surfaces. (c) suitably combining it with another lens. (d) reducing its aperture. 43. A combination is made of two lenses of focal lengths / a n d / ' in contact, the dispersive powers of the materials of the lenses are to and co'. The combination is achromatic when (a) co = (o0, io' = 2co 0 ,/' = 2 / (b) co = co0, co' = 2co 0 ,/' = / / 2 (c) to = to0, to' = 2co 0 ,/' =  / / 2 (d) to = co0, to' = 2co 0 ,/' =  I f . 44. The dispersive power of crown and flint glasses are 0.02 and 0.04 respectively. An achromatic converging lens of focal length 40 cm is made by keeping two lenses, one of crown glass and the other of flint glass, in contact with each other. The focal lengths of the two lenses are (a) 20 cm and 40 cm (b) 20 cm and  4 0 cm (c)  2 0 cm and 40 cm (d) 10 cm and  2 0 cm.
12
45. Chromatic aberration in a spherical concave mirror is proportional to (a) / (b) p (c) 1 If (d) none of these.
P A S S A G E  3 : (Read the following passage and a n s w e r the questions n u m b e r e d 46 to 50. T h e y h a v e only one correct option)
fc <fD and as
Energy balance for the earth Energy arrives at the earth by electromagnetic radiations from the sun. This energy is absorbed by the surface of the earth and reradiated out into space according to Stefen's law. The only type of energy in the system that can change due to radiation is internal energy. Let us assume that any change in temperature of the earth is so small over a time interval that we can approximate the change in internal energy as zero. Thus HMIN) + HM0UT) = 0 ^ETi(IN) = ~ ^4vi(OUT) • Where the IN and the OUT refer to energy transfers across the boundary of the system of the earth, as shown in figure.
\ t /
energy c o m i n g in f r o m the sun
energy radiated f r o m the earth into space = / / „ „ „ , „
The rate of energy transfer per unit area from the sun is approximately 1340 W/m 2 at the top of atmosphere, which is called solar constant/,.. Not all of the radiation arriving at the top of the atmosphere reaches the ground. A fraction approximately 30% of it is reflected from clouds and the ground and escapes back into space. Stephen's law can be used to express the outgoing power, assuming that the earth is a perfect emmiter. Using the equation and the facts, calculation shows that result is significantly lower than the average global temperature 288 K, determined using actual measurements. This difference indicated that a major factor was left out of the analysis. This is the thermodynamic effect of the atmosphere, which results in the additional energy being trapped in the system of the earth and raising the temperature. The energy balance concept is certainly valid and the earth, as a system, must emit energy at the same rate as it absorbs. Thus the value obtained using the energy
PHYSICS FOR YOIJ  MARCH '06
balance concept is the temperature associated with radiation leaving the top of the atmosphere  it is not the temperature at the surface of the earth. 46. If radius of the earth is 6400 km, then net input power received by surface of the earth is nearly equal to (a) 1.2 xio 17 watt (b) 1.7 xio 17 watt (c) 4.8 x io17 watt (d) 3.6 x io17 watt 47. According to the concept of energy balance, the temperature of the earth should be (a) 312 K (b) 296 K (c) 254 K (d) 288 K 48. At moon, if solar constant /,. = 567 W/m 2 , then its equilibrium temperature is approximately equal to (a) 300 K (b) 224 K (c) 254 K (d) 288 K 49. I. Energy balance concept can correctly predict temperature of surface of a planet/satellite provided there is no atmosphere on the planet/satellite. II. If energy balance concept is used for planets/satellite with atmosphere, it can find out temperature of top of the atmosphere, not of the surface. (a) both I and II statements are correct (b) both I and II statements are incorrect (c) statement 1 is correct and II is incorrect (d) statement I is incorrect and II is correct 50. If solar constant for earth and the mars is 7t, and I m respectively, then the ratio of average sunearth distance and sunmars distance is
Such materials are said to be paramagnetic (for example : Mn 2+ ). Materials in which individual atoms or molecules have no net magnetic dipole moment are said to be diamagnetic (for example : Cu + ). Even if an atom has a net magnetic moment, a finite sample of the material will have zero magnetic moment because of random orientation of the atoms. But when a magnetic field is applied, a net alignment of magnetic dipole occurs and the medium becomes magnetically polarized or magnetized. Unlike electric polarization which is always in the same direction as E , magnetisation can be both parallel (paramagnets) and antiparallel (diamagnets) to B . A few materials (called ferromagnetic in reference to their most common example, iron) retain substantial magnetisation even after the external field has been removed  for these magnetisation is dependent not just on the present field but also on the magnetic history of the object. When placed in an external magnetic field paramagnetic substances acquire magnetisation due to alignment of atomic dipoles. But what about diamagnetic materials? Consider an electron revolving in its orbit with a magnetic field applied perpendicular to its plane of motion. Whereas the centripetal acceleration (v 2 /r) is ordinarily sustained by electrical forces alone, my 1 r 4ns,, r Now the magnetic force also has a role to play, thus changing the orbital velocity to V my  + ev'B = 47t£„ r~ r (under the conditions shown in the above diagram the new speed V is greater than v. If B were in opposite direction magnetic force would be opposite to the electric force and thus V would be less than v).
ev'B
\2
rr
(a)
(b)
(c)
vh J
(d)
PASSAGE  4 : (Read the following passage and answer the questions numbered 51 to 55. They have only one correct option). Magnetic Properties of Matter All magnetic fields are due to electric charges in motion. If for example, one were to examine a piece of magnetic material in an atomic scale, he would find tiny current elements created by to distinct and independent processes : Electrons orbiting around nuclei and spinning on their axes. We may treat these current loops as magnetic dipoles, and thus conclude that each electron constitutes a magnetic dipole. But these electrons within a given atom lock together in pairs with opposing spins, and thus effectively neutralise the magnetic moment of each other. Only atoms and molecules with an odd number of electrons may possess a net magnetic diploe moment.
13 PHYSICS F O R YOIJ  MARCH '06
1
=^ ( v r
2
 v 2 ) = ^ ( v ' + v)(v'  v) r
assuming (v  v) = Av « v , we get Av = 2 mc Orbital magnetic moment being directly proportional to orbital angular momentum, a change in orbital speed means a change in orbital magnetic moment.
1 A eVB Am = —a A vrk = 2 4m Notice that this, change is magnetic moment is opposite to the direction of the applied field. In ordinary unmagnetised matter all electron orbits are randomly oriented and thus the orbital magnetic moments cancel out. But in presence of magnetic field each atom picks up a little extra dipole moment and these increments are all antiparallel to the field. This is the mechanism responsible for diamagnetism. Evidently it is a universal phenomenon affecting all atoms. However, it is typically much weaker than paramagnetism and is therefore observed mainly in atoms with paired electrons where paramagnetism is absent.
55. Samples of manganese chloride (MnCl 2 ), cuprous oxide Cu 2 0 and metallic iron were picked up from a meteor X by a suitable space probe and send back to earth. Similar samples picked from another meteor Y were also send back to earth. When these samples were exposed to the same magnetic field at a laboratory on earth, choose the incorrect statement: (a) MnCl 2 from both X and Y will acquire the same magnetisation (b) Cu 2 0 from both X and Y will acquire the same magnetisation (c) iron from both X and Y will acquire the same magnetisation (d) none of these
51. The magnetic moment of an electron comprises P A S S A G E  5 : ( R e a d t h e f o l l o w i n g p a s s a g e a n d of two factors. A spin component and an orbital a n s w e r t h e q u e s t i o n s n u m b e r e d 5 6 t o 6 0 . T h e y h a v e only one correct option) component. Choose the correct option. Circus Act (a) only the spin component is responsible of j . A new circus act was developed by Gemini circus. Riya paramagnetism (a circus girl) swings from a trapeze, projects herself (b) only the orbital component is responsible for at an angle of 53° as shown and supposed to be caught paramagnetism by Ravi, whose hands are 3.2 m above and 4.8 m (c) both spin and orbital component together account horizontally from her launch point. for paramagnetism Once Riya is projected, she moves freely under gravity. (d) both spin and orbital component together account She requires certain minimum velocity v to reach Ravi. 0 for diamagnetism. This velocity may be evaluated by using equation of 52. Choose the incorrect statement. motion in 2D. Once Riya reaches to Ravi, she is caught (a) all ferromagnetic materials are diamagnetic too by Ravi. Now both move with same speed upward and (b) all ferromagnetic materials are paramagnetic too both swing around suspension point O. (c) all paramagnetic materials are diamagnetic too (d) all diamagnetic materials are paramagnetic too 53. The orbital magnetic moment of an electron is directly proportional to the orbital angular momentum M = K L . The value of K (according to the passage) is (a) dim, (b) etmc (c) 2e!mc (d) 3mjl. 54 The fractional change in orbital magnetic moment of an electron in Li2+ revolving in an orbit of rad'us r when exposed to a magnetic field of 1 tesla perpendicular to its orbital plane is jne,/
47IS„// 3/77, (d) (b) (TIE,/ V
J,,J
v In order to safe guard their lives, a safety net is provided 4 m below the launching point of Riya. For all the following calculations take g = 10 m/s 2 .
PHYSICS FOR YOIJ  MARCH '06
Ins,,/2
V
3m,
14
56. In order to just reach Ravi, the initial speed of Riya should be equal to (a) 45 km/hr (b) 30 km/hr (c) 36 km/hr (d) 24 km/hr 57. In the above problem, at the instant when Riya reaches to Ravi, the magnitude and direction of her velocity is (a) 21.6 km/hr, at 37° upward from horizontal. (b) 21.6 km/hr, in horizontal direction. (c) 16.2 km/hr, at 37° upward from horizontal. (d) 16.2 km/hr, in horizontal direction. 58. In the above problem, if mass of Ravi is 2m and mass of Riya is m, then when riya is caught by Ravi both move together with the speed equal to (a) 9 km/hr (b) 6 km/hr (c) 7.2 km/hr (d) 4.8 km/hr 59. If both move together further and both of them are considered as one mass system of 3m. Effective distance of this one mass system from suspension point is assumed to be 1 meter, then angle through which they deflect will be (a) 30° (b) 37° (c) 53° (d) 60° 60. In their debut performance, once Ravi misses the Riya completely as she flies past. The horizontal distance through which Riya moves from the initial launch point before landing in the safety net 4 m below her initial launch point is (a) 10 m 1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 46. 5156. (d) (d) (a) (c) (b) (c) (b) (b) (d) (a) (a) (c) (b) 9 m 2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. 47. 52. 57. (d) (d) (b) (a) (b) (d) (a) (a) (c) (c) (d) (b) (c) 12 m 4. 9. 14. 19. 24. 29. 34. 39. 44. 49. 54. 59. (b) (b) (a) (b) (d) (c) (a) (d) (b) (a) (a) (b) (d) 9.6 m 5. 10. 15. 20. 25. 30. 35. 40. 45. 50. 55. 60. (d) (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) (c) (b) (a) (c) (c)
Exemplary Physics Teacher Award
the futures of their students. Their contributions are barely recognized and appreciated. To honour such dedicated masters and to share their techniques for the benefit of other students, we have decided to constitute the monthly 'MTG Exemplary Physics Teacher' award. The students who have benefited are the best source of information for us about such great teachers. We invite students to propose the names of teachers for the award by writing to us, giving the following information. 1. 2. Student's name, class, school, city, contact address, phone number, email. Teacher's name and career details, contact address, phone number, email, subject (P/C/M/B), where does he teach, when did he teach you. 3. Narrate an incident which demonstrates the techniques he/she uses to expand your thinking... (200 words). 4. How did he influence your life. (100 words)
MTG
W
e realize that there are several great science and math teachers who have devotedly shaped
ANSWERS 3. (c) 8. (d) 13. (b) 18. (b) • 23. (c) 28. (a) 33. (a) 38. (b) 43. (d) 48. (b) 53. (a) 58. (c)
Send your entries to .. MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd. 406, Taj Apt. Ring Road, New Delhi  1 10 029 email : info@mtg.in Every month the selected entry including the teacher's profile will be published in Mathematics Today, Chemistry Today, Physics For You and Biology Today. The teacher will also be awarded a certificate, Rs. 1 1 00 cash and a lifetime subscription of the magazine.
Note : For detailed solutions please log on to our website www.resonance.ac.in
15 PHYSICS FOR YOIJ  MARCH '06
Very Similar
MODEL TEST PAPER
for AIEEE2006
Exam on 30th April 2006
1. The dimensional formula representation for impedance of A.C. circuit is (a) [M°L2T3] (b) [ML2T"3A"2] 2 2 (c) [ML T A'] (d) [ML'T" 3 A 2 ]. 2. Figure shows the accelerationtime graph of a particle. Which of the following represents the corresponding velocitytime graph?
(d) gradually fall behind the aeroplane if the aeroplane was flying horizontally. 6. Two weights w, and w2 are connected by a light thread which passes over a light smooth pulley. If the pulley is raised upwards with an acceleration equal to g, then the tension in the thread will be 2wjw2 WW2 (a) (b) »'] + Vt'2 IV] + w2 4vcjvi'2 4u)W2 (c) (d) VJ + W2 T 7. A beaker containing water is lying on the pan of a spring balance. If one dips his finger in the water without touching the beaker, then the reading of the spring balance will (a) become zero (b) not change (c) decrease (d) increase. 8. A person standing on the floor of a lifts drops a coin. The coin touches the floor after /, second if the lift is at rest and after t2 second if the lift is moving with a uniform velocity v upwards, then (a) <, = t2 (b) t, > t2 (c) /] < t2 (d) none of these. 9. Two billiard balls of the same size and mass are in contact on a billiard table. A third ball of the same size and mass strikes them symmetrically and remains at rest after the impact. The coefficient of restitution between the balls is (a) 2/3 (b) 2/4.1 (c) 1/7 (d) 1/8. 10. The linear momentum of a body is increased by 50%. The kinetic energy will be increased by (a) 25% (b) 50% (c) 100% (d) 125%. 11. Three identical cars A, B and C are moving at the same speed on three bridges. The car A goes on a plane bridge, B on a bridge convex upward and C goes on a bridge concave upward. Let FA, FH and F(: be the normal
P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  MARCH '06
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d) v
3. A train of length 200 m travelling at 30 ms 1 overtakes another train of length 300 m travelling at 20 ms 1 . The time taken by the first train to pass the second is (a) 20 s (b) 30 s (c) 40 s (d) 50 s. 4. If AxB = 0 and BxC. = 0 , then the value of AxC. is (a) 0 (b) ACsmQh. (c) ACcosd (d) ABtand. 5. An aeroplane flying at a constant speed releases a bomb. As the bomb moves away from the aeroplane, it will (a) always be vertically below the aeroplane if the aeroplane was flying horizontally (b) always be vertically below the aeroplane if the aeroplane was flying at an angle of 45° to the horizontal (c) always be vertically below the aeroplane 34
forces exerted by the cars on the bridges when they are at the middle of the bridges, then (a) FA is maximum of the three forces (b) FH is maximum of the three forces (c) FR is maximum of the three forces (d) FA = FK = FC. 12. If /• denotes the distance between the sun and the earth, then the angular momentum of the earth around the sun is (a) oc Vr (b) = mr (c) m2r (d) r312. 13. Three identical rings, each of mass M and radius R are arranged as shown in figure. The moment of inertia ofthe arrangement about YY'
wire and a steel wire of the same length are extended by 1 mm under the same force. The radii of the brass and steel wires are RH and RS respectively. Then (a) (c) Rs=j2RB
RS = 4R„
(b) «.*.= *a. VI % (d) Rs = 4 '
18. A body floats with 1/3 of its volume outside water and 3/4 of its volume outside another liquid. The density of other liquid is (a) (c) cm j gem 4 3 (b) — e cm 9 (d)  g e m
3
(a)(b)
 M R MR2
19. On mixing the salt in water, the surface tension of \ water will I (a) increase (b) decrease j (c) remain unchanged (d) none of these.
1
I 20. Figure shows the  pressure P versus (c)  M R (d)  M R volume/'graphs for a 14. Two planets have radii in the ratio .y : y and density certain mass of a gas in the ratio in : n. The acceleration due to gravity g is at two constant in the ratio temperatures'/', and T2. Which of the following (a) nx : my (b) ny : mx inference is correct? (c) mx : ny (d) my : nx. (a) TX = T2 (b) 7", > r 2 15. A tunnel is dug along a diameter of the earth. If Me (c) 7\ < T2 and RL. are the mass and radius respectively of earth, (d) no inference can be drawn due to insufficient then the force on a particle of mass m placed in the information. tunnel at a distance r from the centre is 21. The temperature, at which r.m.s. velocity of helium GMjn GM.,m (a) hrr (b) molecules is equal to the r.m.s. velocity of hydrogen RF molecules at NTP, is GM„MR? GMjn (a) 100 K (b) 300 K (c) 502 K (d) 546 K. (c) (d) HF' 22. The temperature of equal masses of three different 16. A heavy stone is attached to a thin wire and is whirled liquids^, B and C are 12°C, 19°C and 28°C respectively. in a vertical circle. The wire is most likely to break The temperature when A and B are mixed is 16°C and when the stone is at the when B and C are mixed is 23°C. The temperature when (a) highest point (b) lowest point A and C are mixed is (c) middlepoint, between lowest and highest points, (a) 18.2°C (b) 20.3°C (c) 22.2°C (d) 24.2°C. of the circle (d) position where the wire makes an angle of 45° with 23. 540 g of ice at 0°C is mixed with 540 g of water at 80°C. The final temperature of mixture is the diameter. (a) 0°C (b) 40°C 17. The Young's modulus of brass and steel are (c) 80°C (d) less than 0°C. 10 x lO l o ]Nnr 2 and 2 x 10" Nirr 2 respectively. A brass
35 P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  MARCH '06
24. Three rods 90°C made of the same material and having o°c • the same crosssection have been 90°C joined as shown in figure. Each rod is of the same length. The left and right ends are kept at 0°C and 90°C respectively. The temperature of the junction of the three rods will be (a) 45°C (b) 60°C (c) 30°C (d) 20°C. 25. Two tuning forks of frequencies 256 Hz and 258 Hz are sounded together. The time interval between consecutive maxima heard by the observer is (a) 2 s (b) 0.5 s (c) 250 s (d) 252 s. 26. The displacement y of a particle executing periodic motion is given by y = 4cos 2 (1/2 /) sin(1000«). This expression may be considered to be a result of the superposition of independent harmonic motions (a) two (b) three (c) four (d) five. 27. A man measures the period of a simple pendulum inside a stationary lift and finds to be T s. If the lift accelerates upwards with an acceleration g/4, then the period of the pendulum will be
IT (a) (b) 2TY[5 (c) T (d) 774.
(c) the electric field remains constant but the charge on the plate decreases (d) the electric field increases but the charge on the plate decreases. 31. A parallel plate capacitor is filled with three dielectric of thickness t,, t2 and t3 such that h + h + h = d. Then capacitance of the system is (given that plate area = A) (a)
K] AE N
(b)
/W"!
h.2 A^
h+t2+h Aeo d
Aen
K)
(c)
2K\
t\+t2 +
As n
(d)
32. A wire / = 8.00 m long, of uniform crosssectional area A = 8.00 mm2, has a conductance of G = 2.45 Q _ l . What is the resistivity of the material of the wire? (b) 3.1 x 107 S (a) 2.1 x 10~7 S 7 (d) 5.1 x io 7 S. (c) 4.1 x io S 33. T h e potential difference between A and B in the circuit shown is
1/3 V
28. A charge O is placed at the centre of a circle of radius R. The work done in moving a charge q from A to B so as to complete a semicircle is (a) zero (c)
On
(b) (d)
(a) (c)
15
2_
(b) (d)
15 •V 15
2EnR
29. What is the total flux of electrostatic field due to a charge of one coulomb? (b) 1/£Q (C) SG (d) 1/Eo (a) e 0 30. A parallelplate capacitor is connected to a battery that has a constant terminal voltage. If the capacitor plates are pulled apart, (a) the electric field decreases and the charge on the plates also decreases (b) the electric field remains constant but the charge on the plate increases 36
15
34. There are n exactly identical resistors each having resistance R. The resultant resistance when joined in parallel is X, then on connecting them in series the resistance will come out be (a) \ n '(b) n2X (c) 4 n (d) ^X.
35. Ohm's law is not applicable in (a) diode (b) transistors (c) radio waves (d) all of these.
PHYSICS FOR YOU  MARCH '06
36. A current passes through a coil in the anticlockwise direction. The magnetic field at a point on the axis of the coil is (a) perpendicular to the plane of the coil (b) perpendicular to the axis o f t h e coil (c) along the axis towards the centre of the coil (d) along the axis away from the centre of coil. 37. The wire shown in the figure carries a current of 60 A. The field P if radius is 2 cm will be
figure. The equivalent inductance of the circuit is
U = 0.5 H
L , = 1.75 1
L, = 0.5 H
60 A
(a) 4571 x 105A tesla (b)  45ji x 10" s /t tesla (c) 4571 x 10"' k tesla (d>  4571 x l0~4/t tesla. 3s. . iic /j'// curves A, and .Vi in the figure are associated with (a) a diamagnetic and paramagnetic s u b s t a n c e respectively (b) a paramagnetic and ferromagnetic substance respectively (c) soft iron and steel respectively (d) steel and soft iron respectively. 39. A proton moving with a constant velocity passes through a region of space without any change in velocity. If E and B represent the electric and magnetic fields respectively, this region of space may not have (a) E = 0, B * 0 (b) E± 0, B = 0 (c) E* 0, B * 0 (d) E= 0, B = 0. 40. Which of the following pairs of space and time varying E and B f i e l d s would generate a plane electromagnetic wave travelling in the Zdirection? (a) Ex, BY (b) Ex, Bx (c) Ex, Bz (d) Ez, Bx. 41. Three pure inductances a.c. connected as shown in 38
(a) 2.75 H (b) 2.25 H (c) 2.00 H (d) 1.75 H. 42. An electron moves along the line AB which lies in the same plane as a • * 7 circular loop of conducting wire as shown in the figure. What will be the direction of current induced, if any, in the loop? (a) no current will be induced (b) the current will be clockwise (c) the current will be anticlockwise (d) the current will change direction as the electron passed by. 43. A coil Oi 150 011 in and inductance 1.0 iiciiry connected across an alternating voltage of frequency 150/271 Hz. The phase difference between the voltage and current in the circuit is (a) 71/2 (b) 7t/3 (c) zero (d) rc/4. 44. If A is the amplitude of the wave coming from a line source at a distance r, then (a) A « r2 (b) A °= r 1 2 (c) A ~ r (d) A °c r'. 45. In Young's double slit experiment, monochromatic light is used to illuminate two slits A and B. Slit A being on the upper side of the horizontal plane. Interference fringes are observed on a screen placed in front o f t h e slits. Now if a thin glass plate is placed normally in the path of the beam, coming from slit A, then (a) fringe width increases (b) fringe width decreases (c) there is no change in fringe width (d) fringes disappear. 46. Out of the following four waves which of the two can produce interference? (i) y, = o,sinto/ (ii) y2 = a 2 sin2co/
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '06
(iii).v3 = a3cosco/ (a) (i) and (ii) (c) (ii) and (iv)
(iv)
= a 4 sin(m* + ^ j
(b) (i) and (iii) (d) none of these.
54. Uranium235 is used as nuclear fuel in a nuclear reactor having power level 1 MW. Amount of fuel needed in one year will be (given : energy released per fission = 200 MeV) (a) 87 g (b) 103 g (c) 384 g (d) 148.5 g. 55. In a common base transistor amplifier, current gain is 0.98. On changing emitter current by 5 mA, collector current changes by (a) 4.9 mA (b) 0.19 mA(c) 5.98 mA (d) 5.0 mA. 56. An intrinsic semiconductor behaves like insulator at (a) 273 K (b) 100°C (c) 273°C (d) 0 K. 57. Combinations of NAND gates shows below are equivalent to
47. Which one of the following spherical lenses does not exhibit dispersion? Radii of curvature of the surfaces of the lenses are as given in the diagram.
48. If illumination produced at a screen placed at a distance of 2 m from the lamp is 25 lux, then total luminous flux emitted by the lamp is (a) 50 can del a (b) 100 candela (c) 150 candela (d) 300 candela. 49. are the (a) (c) If two lenses having powers +6 dioptre and  4 dioptre placed in contact. Then nature and focal length of combination will be concave, 50 cm (b) convex, 50 cm concave, 25 cm (d) convex, 25 cm.
50. Eye piece of an astronomical telescope has focal length of 5 cm. If angular magnification in normal adjustment is 10, then distance between eye piece and objective should be (a) 15 cm (b) 35 cm (c) 55 cm (d) 75 cm. 51. Work function of aluminium is 4.2 eV. If two photons each of energy 3.5 eV strike an electron of aluminium then emission of electron (a) will be possible (b) depends on the smoothness of the surface (c) will not be possible (d) none of these. 52. A proton and an aparticle are accelerated through same potential difference. Then ratio of the deBroglie wavelengths Kp and Xa will be (a) 2 (b) 1/2 (c) 1/3 (d) (l/2) ,/2 . 53. If the radioactive decay constant of radium is 1.07 * 10~4 per year, then its half life period is approximately equal to (a) 2520 years (b) 6475 years (c) 7010 years (d) 8900 years.
39 P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  MARCH '06
eXPLOR€R
• 10 Very Similar Practice Test Papers • 20022005 Expert's Solved Papers . 2000+ MCQ's with detailed Solutions • Frequently Asked Questions
AlIEE E
I
#
iiP
Rs.200% ages.11ooJ?
(a) (b) (c) (d)
AND and NOT gates respectively OR and AND gates respectively AND and OR gates respectively OR and NOT gates respectively.
6.
( c ) : T =
lah^(2 rri\ + m2
g )
or,
T= _JLJL(2g) g g 4m/W2 W + W1
58. When a silicon junction diode is forward biased by applying a voltage of 0.9 V, then current through diode is 55 mA at 27°C. The dc resistance of the circuit will be (a) 5.3 ohm (b) 12.8 ohm (c) 16.4 ohm (d) 23.8 ohm. 59. When 90% electrons emitted reach the collector, then collector current is found to be 9 mA. Then (a) emitter current will be 8 mA (b) emitter current will be 11 mA (c) emitter current will be 9 mA (d) base current will be 1 mA. 60. The T.V transmission tower in Delhi has a height of 240 m. The distance up to which the broadcast can be receive is (radius of earth = 6.4 x IO6 m) (a) 100 km (b) 60 km (c) 55 km (d) 50 km. SOLUTIONS (b) : [Impedence] = [resistance]
[ML2T
or,
.j, 2 w,w2 T=— x g
g (2g) W, + M>2 '
or, T =
7. (d) : Water exerts an upward force on the finger [Archimede's principle]. According to Newton's third law of motion, the finger would exert equal and opposite force on water and hence on the bottom of the beaker. So, the reading of the spring balance would increase. 8. 1 , (a) : In the first case, h = — gtx 1 2 (ii) = U, (i)
In the second case, h — vt2
0r
, 1 2 > h — ~gt 2
Comparing (i) and (ii),
9. ( a ) : mit = 2«JVCOS0
But 9 = 30° /. u = 2vcos30° = S v Using one ball for calculation, v0 _ vx 2 itcos30°0 ~ V3vxV3 " 3
" =[ML TA] [AT] [A]
2]
2
2. ( b ) : Since acceleration is constant, therefore there is a uniform increase in velocity. So, the vt graph is a straight line sloping upwards to the right. When acceleration becomes zero, velocity is constant. So, vt graph is a straight line parallel to the timeaxis.
200 m
3.
( a ) : _
300 m
HA AB
vA = 30 m/s, v„ = 20 m/s.
vB x
2m  p is increased by a factor of 3/2. So, Ek is increased by a factor of 9/4. Percentage increase of kinetic energy = •4—x100 = —xl00 = 125. 1 4 11. (c) : On a plane bridge, FA = mg • E„ A A_E1 I I V mg mg
10. (d) : Ek =
t = s ; vA x t = s + 200 AxB = 0 => A\\B ; BxC = 0 => B\\C
u
/ = 20 sec.
4. (a):
:.
A\\C . So, AxC = 0 .
5. ( a ) : At all times, the horizontal component of the velocity of the bomb will be the same as the horizontal component of the velocity of the aeroplane. So, the horizontal displacements would remain the same at all times. 40
Ec A I I
mg
V
P H Y S I C S FOR YOU  MARCH '06
On convex bridge, mg FB= or, Fh = mg  
R
V 2V Comparing, — pg = — x l x g 19. (a)
8 _3 or, p = j g c m
R
2
On a concave bridge, Fc  mg = mv R or, Fcmg + R Clearly, F, is maximum of the three forces. 12. (a) : Accoding to Kepler's third law, or, T « R3'2 r271 3/2 co = — or. co cc r T Now, L = mr2CD or, L r2 ~ 3/2 or, L
20. (c) : For a given pressure, Vis small for Tt. Since Voc T, therefore, 7", < T2. 21 ( d ) : ...
Q.ms.
3 RT
=
~M
or, T cc M
rU2.
13. (d) : Moments of inertia of rings I and 11 about )T = 2xMR2 2 =3 MR2 1 2 MR 7 =MR2. 2
mX
Moment of inertia of ring III about YY' = 1 Total moment of inertia = 3MR 2 +MR2 2
! 4
T 4 — =  = 2 or, T = 2T T 2 or, r = 2 x 273 K = 546 K. 22. (b) : When A and B are mixed, MSH( 19  16) = MSA (16  12) or, 3SH = 45^ When B and C are mixed, mSH (23  19) = mSc (28  23) or, 4SH = 5S c When A and C are mixed, mSA (T — 12) = mS, (2$  T)  SA _ 287" or,
SC
(i)
... (ii)
T12
(iii)
Dividing (i) by (ii),
A _
J x
. , (c) : g = nGpR. ^ D 14. , :. & = Pl^l  = n —. — —— 3 g2 p2R2 y 15. (a) : Let us first calculate the mass of inner solid sphere of radius r. Mass of inner solid sphere, M, V 4 TT1"3 — M,— V3 ./ — x—TU r M = 3 3 R„ nR, Now, g = GMy 1 3—xy
K r
or
5 Sc
P From eqn.
4Sb
1 5
4
2 S
4
~
T
5 _ 115 4 ~ 16
15T+ 16T= 16 or.
(111), — = 16
r12 x 28 + 15
x
12
'
g=
GMr 5Re
GMcmr 5—• R e 16. (b): Tension is maximum when the stone is at the lowest point. Force on particle of mass m = ">g 17. (b) : Y = —UrX— ; F, I and A/ are constants. nR A/ l<~ i.e.. Rs _ Yh
RL YS
628 or, T = — = 20.3°. 31 23. (a) : 540 x 80 + 540 x ] x (9 _ 0) = 540(80  0) or, 80 + 0 = 80  0 or, 20 = 0 or, 0 = 0°C KA(Q0) KA(90Q) KA( 9 0  6 ) 24. (b) : = ^+—L. >317'= 448 + 180 = 628 or, 0 = 2(90  0) or, 30 = 180° or, 0 = 180°/3 = 60°C 25. (b) : Required time interval 1 1  =  s = 0.5s. v,v2 258256 2 26. (b) : =: 2cos 2 1 i sin(1000/)
10 1 1 2x10"
1 2
R.s 1 „ Rn or. — = —r= or, RK=—p=. R„ 72 ' y/2 2V V 18. (c) : —  x l x g = wg; —pg = mg 3 4 42
or, y = 2(1 + cost) sin 1000/ or, y = 2sin 1000/ + 2sin 1000/ cos/ or, y = 2sinl000/ + sin(1001/) + sin(999/) So, the given expression is a result of the superposition of three independent harmonic motions.
P H Y S I C S FOR YOU  MARCH '06
27.
( a )
,g' =g+ 4/ 15g
i U ^ or, T' = ^2nJI  r75 or,
r
r = 2TI 28. (a) :
= ^T
W=jEdr=0 c For in this case, Eldr .
29. (b): From Gauss's theorem, the flux of electrostatic field due to a charge of q coulomb is <)>= \EdS = ^~ £ s o For q = 1 coulomb, 0 = l/e.0. 30. (a) : Electric field (E) = V/d. Since Kis constant and d is increasing, thus £ decreases. Now C is also decreasing and therefore charge content decreases. 31. (a) : We have C, = KtAZ,o. KxAs0,
C,
36. (d) : We have taken two diametrically opposite segments. The fields due to these two segments at the point P are indicated in the figure. The vertical components cancel each other and horizontal components get added. So, the field will be along the axis away from the centre O. 37
(a)
 3
= iQ7 4TI r = 457CX 10~5A tesia.
,,371x100x60^ 2x2
38. (c) 39. (b): A proton moving with a constant velocity passes through a region without any change in velocity. So a magnetic field (B) either may not be present or, if present, then it is in the direction of the velocity. The electric field (£) is definitely zero. 40. fe) :EX, BY are perpendicular to each other and both of them are normal to Zaxis. 41. (c): Here I 2 = 0.5H and L3 = 0.5 H are in parallel.
ij_
1 _ U C2 K2AsQ KiAs, o. 1 h C3 = C3 K,Az() The effective capacitance (C) is given by c
~
C,
/
 +
—
1
+

1 3
\
1 I K, K 3 7Aen
L2 + £3
0.5  = 0.25 H
or, C =
u
h
c2 e0A K2 RA
T
C
Now, L  and L' are in series. Leq„ = Lx + V = 1.75 + 0.25 = 2.00 H. 42. (c) 43. (d) : Here R • 150 Q, L = 1.0 henry 50 u=Hz, < = ? > j 271 . co£ 2tco L 0 150 1 tan < = p = :: 271 X X : R R 2tt 150 (> = 45° = 7t/4. 44. (b) : For a point source, / « 1/t2 r and A c c j l . ..
A4 z a
K j A

 = 4.1x10"' S. 2.45x8.00 33. (c) : Total resistance of the part AB is RAH = 2 + 2 + 2 = 6 Q. £ The current is i = = —A 9 + 6 15 The potential difference between A and B is (1/3) , , 2 , VaH = 2 x 6 volt = — volt. AB 15 15 34. (b) : The resultant resistance in parallel is X = R/n. On connecting them in series we have the resultant resistance Rs = nR = n2X.
3 2 . ( C ) : P = =
8 .00x10"
P~ J~7 V r~
or
'
A„ c c
1
~r
45. (c): As a constant path difference is introduced in the rays coming from two slits. 46. (d): Independent waves can't be coherent and can't produce interference.
35. (d) : Ohm's law is not applicable in valves, semiconductors, electrolytes, transistors etc.
43 P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  MARCH '06
47. ( e ) : A s
JOiD 2
2
Mass required =
6
235 o^x 1023 Mc
23
J 1_ For no deviation, d = d(n) !_/?] R2 f ) J_ Ri R] = R2.
= 384 g.
= 0
55. (a) : Current gain, a = 56. (d)
.
48. (b) : Since E = p or, / = Er2 = 25 x (2) 2 = 100 candela. 49. (b) : P, = 6 D, P2 =  4 D P = />, + P . = (6  4) D = 2 D. .•. / = +50 cm, convex lens. 50. (c) : In normal adjustment, L = f„ +fc and A / = 4  or, 10 = ^
fa /,
57. (b): When two input of NAND gate are combined NOT gate is formed. 58. (c) : V = IR V 0.9 9 , R=—= x 10" ohm r ohm = 1 55x10 550 = 16.4 ohm. 59. (d) : Since 1e = ! h + I c •• h  h = h and since I, = 90%/t, = 0.91, — = 0.9 = — Ie 10 => If /, = 9 rnA, /„ = 10 mA. So, l h = /,  I c = (10  9 ) mA = 1 mA. 60. (c) : d = \l2hR = V2 x 240 x 6.4 x 106 = 55.4 x io 3 m = 55 km. ,.
/„ = 50 cm.
Z, = 5 cm + 50 cm = 55 cm. 51. (c) : Since work function of aluminium is greater than the energy of photons. h 52. (a) : X = — mv A.„ oc
xl/2 /> _
, h or, A, = , yj2meV X^oc
or, X oc
1 •v/w
ORISSA JEE
1/2
6XPLOR6R
•2.
A v a i l a b l e at
Bhubaneshwar : AK Mishra Agency (P) Ltd., Tel.: 2533971 Amit Book Depot Tel.: 2503050 Padmalaya Book Seller, Tel.: 2396922 Pragnya, Tel. 2395757 Jyoti Book Depot, Tel.: 2530807 Behrampur: Murthy News Agency, Tel.: 9437261172 Sadgrantha Mandir, Tel.: 2222678 Cuttack: Madhab Book Store, Tel.: 2311043 AK Mishra Agency (P) Ltd., Tel.: 2618327, 2632375 Bijay Book Depot Rourkela: Student Circle, Tel.: 9437192167 Anil Book Store, Tel.: 9437109718 Student Book Centre, Tel.: 2500076; The best, Tel.: 251074 Shiva Shakti Pustakalaya, Tel.: 2471954 Sagarika, Tel.: 2522758; Prasants, Tel.: 2476020 Sambalpur: Book Fair Book Seller, Tel.: 9437201586
/V 0.693 : Use TU2 =r^4 ' 1.07x10" 54. (c) : E = P x i = io 6 x J = io 6 J Energy released per fissiofi = 200 MeV = 200 x io 6 x 1.6 x JO"19 J = 3.2 x 10" J. .'. Number of fission needed per second 53.
(b)
10" 3.2x10""
= 3.125x10"
Number of fission needed in one year = 3.125 x io16 x 365 x 24 x 60 x 60 = 9.855 x 10". Number of nucleus involved/fission = 9.855 x IO23 44
P H V S I C S F O R V O l l  MARCH 06
Practice Problems
IITJEE 2006
( C H c m e d 011 Q i v w ^ p a t t e r n ) 5. A police car moving with velocity 22 m/s and emitting sound of frequency 176 Hz f o l l o w s a
Police car
April 2006
Time : 2 hrs f •
M a x . Marks : 150
This paper consists of 50 questions having only one correct answer (including some questions based on short passages). Corresponding to right answer there will be +3 marks & for incorrect/wrong answer there will be 1 mark.
1. The measurement of radius, length and resistance of a metal wire of circular cross section are radius = (0.26 ±0.02) cm ; length = (156.0 ±0.064%) cm and resistance = ( 6 4 ± 2 ) Q . The maximum error in measurement of specific resistance of the material of the wire is (a) 18.6% (b) 8.6% (c) 17% (d) 12%. 2. The Young's modulus of brass and steel are respectively 10 x 10'° N/m 2 and 2 x 10 l o N/m 2 . A brass wire and a steel wire of the same length are extended by 1 mm under the same force, the radii of brass and steel wires are RH and Rs respectively. Then (a) (c) Rx = 4lRR R, = 4RH (b) Rs = R j j 2 (d) RS=R„/ 4
o o o
Motor cyclist • 22 m/s (176 Hz)
Stationary car
(165 Hz)
motor cyclist which in turn is moving towards a stationary car and away from the police car as shown in figure. The stationary car is emitting a sound of frequency 165 Hz. If motor cyclist does not hear any beat, then his velocity is (a) 11 m/s (b) 22 m/s (c) 33 m/s (d) 44 m/s 6. The velocity of sound in an ideal gas at temperature r , and T2 K are found to be F, and V2 respectively. If the root mean square speed of the same gas at the same temperature 7, and T2 are v, and v 2 respectively , then (a) v2=Vl(V2/JV (c) v2=v, yj(V2/V,) (b) v2 = v,(Vl/y2) (d)
3. Two satellites of masses m, and m2(m, > m 2 ) are revolving round the earth in circular orbits of radii r, and r2 (/, > r2) respectively. Which of the following statements is true regarding their speeds v, and v2 ? (a) V, = v2 (b) v, > v2 (c) v , < v 2 (d) v , / r l = v 2 / r 1 4. A horizontal pipe line carries water in a stream line flow. At a point along the pipe where the crosssectional area is 10 cm 2 , the water velocity is 1 m/s and the pressure is 2000 Pa. The pressure of water at another point where the crosssectional area is 5 cm 2 , is (a) 500 Pa (b) 50 Pa (c) 5 Pa (d) 5 x 103 Pa. (Density of water = 103 kg. nr 3 )
7. The superposition of two harmonic oscillations in the same direction results in the oscillation of a point according to the equation x = ocos2.1/cos50/, where t is in second.itrnd the period in which they beat (a) 1.second (b) 1.497 second (c) 2.1 second (d) 2.994 second. 8. A sonometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork forming standing weaves with five antinodes between the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended from the wire. When this mass is replaced by a mass M, the wire resonates with the same tuning fork forming three antinodes for the same positions of the bridges. The value of m is
Contributed by Deptt. of Physics, Momentum, Jabalpur (M.P). Ph.: (0761)5005358
51 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '06
(a) 25 kg
(b) 5 kg
(c) 12.5 kg (d)
1/25 kg.
9. A thin copper wire of length L increases in length by 1% when heated from temperature 7*, to T2. What is the percentage change in area when a thin copper plate having dimensions 2L * L is heated from 7", to T2 ? (a) 1% (b) 3% (c) 2% (d) 4%. 10. Two litre of water at initial temperature of 27°C is heated by a heater of power 1 kW in a kettle. If the lid of the kettle is open, then heat energy is lost at a constant rate of 160 J/s. The time in which the temperature will rise from 27°C to 77°C is (specific heat of water = 4.2 kJ/kg) (a) 5 min. 20 sec. (b) 8 min. 20 sec. (c) 10 min. 40 sec. (d) 12 min. 50 sec. 11. The average translation kinetic energy of a molecule in gas becomes equal to 1 eV at a temperature (a) 7733 K (b) 8833 K (c) 3377 K (d) 3388 K. 12. A thermodynamical process is shown in the figure.The presures and volumes corresponding to t some points in the figure are PA = 3 x 104 Pa, VA = 2* IO'3 m3 P,. = 8 x l O4 Pa, V„ = 5 x 1 0  3 m3 '' In the process AB, 600 J of heat is added to the system and in process BC 200 J of heat is added to the system. The change in internal energy of the system in process AC would be (a) 560 J (b) 800 J (c) 600 J (d) 640 J 13. Three discs A, B and C having radii 2 m, 4 m and 6 m respectively are coated with carbon black on their outer surfaces. The wavelengths corresponding to maximum intensity are 300 nm, 400 nm, respectively. The power radiated by them are QA, 0H and i r respectively. (a) Qa is maximum (b) QH is maximum (c) < < is maximum 2 (d) QA = QB = QC 14. A circular ring carries a uniformly distributed positive charge and lies in XY plane with centre at origin of coordinate system. If at a point (0, 0, z) the potential is V, then which of the graph is correct ?
(c)
(d)
15. A fully charged capacitor has a capacitane C. It is discharged through a small coil of resistance wire embedded in a thermally insulated block of specific heat capacity s and mass m. If the temperature of the block is raised by AT, the potential difference Vacross the capacitor is (a) (c) msAT C. ImCAT (b) (d) 2msAT C mCAT
16. A capacitor of capacity C = 4.0 fiF is connected through a resistance R = 2.5 MQ across a battery of negligible internal resistance of 12 volt. The time after which the potential difference across the capacitor becomes three times to that of resistor is (Given log(,2 = 0.693 ) (a) 13.86 sec (b) 6.48 sec (c) 3.24 sec (d) 20.52 sec 17. In the given circuit of figure H'lino current is passing through the —m—— galvanometer connected to a meter bridge. Distance A Ccorresponding *c to null deflection of galvanometer is x. What would be its value if the radius of the wire AB is doubled? (a) x/2 (b) 2x (c) x (d) none of these 18. A galvanometer with resistance 100 Q is converted into an ammeter with a resistance of 0.1 £2. The galvanometer shows full scale deflection with current of 100 MA. Then the minimum current in the circuit for full scale deflection of galvanometer will be. (a) 100.1 mA (b) 1000.1 mA (c) 1.001 mA (d) 0.1001 mA 19. An electron of mass m„ initially at rest, moves through a certain distance in a uniform electric field in time A proton of mass mp, also, initially at rest, takes time t2 to move through an equal distance in this uniform electric field. Neglecting the effect of gravity, the ratio of t2/t, is nearly equal to
P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  MARCH '06
(b) 52
(a) 1 (c) (mjmjn
(b)
(w ; ,/« t .)"
(d) 1836
24. The coefficient of friction between the block and the incline surface is (a) 1/2 (b) 3/4 (c) 1/4 (d) zero 25. Fmi„ is equal to (a) 5 N (b) 20 N (c) 15 N (d) 1 0 N
Q .20 to 23. are based on this passage: In an experiment, a spinning ball is made to fall on rough horizontal surface. While hitting the surface the 5 v0 ball has a velocity v0 and angular velocity —— . After 2 A hitting the surface at A, the ball moves on the path shown and hits the surface again at B. This experiment is repeated for many surfaces of varying roughness. For a certain surface X the ball covers the maximum distance AB. Assume that all the surfaces used in the experiment are perfectly elastic and the ball is a uniform sphere of mass m, radius R.
26. When the applied force is 2F max , acceleration of the block is (a) up the incline (b) down the incline (c) zero (d) none of these 27. In Young's double slit experiment, the two slits act as coherent sources of equal amplitude A and of wavelength X. In another experiment with the same set up, the two slits are sources of equal amplitude A and wavelength X but are incoherent. The ratio of the intensity of light at the midpoint of the screen in the first case to that in the second case is (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 2 : (d) V2  1
20. The coefficient of friction between the surface X and the ball is (a) 0.5 (b) 0.25 (c) 0.75 (d) 1.0 21. The magnitude of impulse imparted by surface X to the ball during the collision at is (a) mv0 (b) 2 mv0 (c) 45 mv0 (d) 43 mv0 22 Angular velocity of the ball just after collision at A is (a) v0/R (b) Vo/2R (c) 2 v J R (d) zero 23. Work done by the surface X on the ball during collision at A is (a) m v2 5 , (b)   « v „ (c) ^ (d) 5 j mv;
28. A thin prism P, with angle 4° and made from glass of refractive index 1.54 is combined with another thin prism P2 made from glass of refractive index 1.72 to produce dispersion without deviation. The angle of prism P2 is (a) 5.33° (b) 4° (c) 3° (d) 2.6° 29. A concave lens of glass, refractive index 1.5, has both surfaces of same radius of curvature R. On immersion in a medium of refractive index 1.75, it will behave as a (a) convergent lens of focal length 3.5R (b) convergent lens of focal length 3.0R (c) divergent lens of focal length 3.5R (d) divergent lens of focal length 3.0R 30. A ray of light travels from a denser to a rarer medium. The critical angle for two media is C. The maximum possible deviation of the ray will be (a) (7t  C ) (b) (7t/2 + C) (c) 2C (d) (Jt2C.) 31. In an ideal double slit experiment, when a glass plate (refractive index 1.5) of thickness t is introduced in the path of one of the interfering beams (wavelength X), the intensity at the position where the central maximum occured previously remains unchanged. The minimum thickness of the glassplate is (a) 2X (b) 2X/3 (c) X/3 (d) X
Q. 24 to 26. are based on this passage: A block of mass 2 kg is placed on a rough incline whose angle of inclination (0) can be varied. It is found that when 0 = tan" '(1/2) the block just beings to slip. The angle of inclination of the incline is doubled and it is found that to keep the block stationary a minimum horizontal force Fmm needs to be applied on the block, pressing it against the incline. The horizontal force is increased gradually and it is found that the block still does not move. When the applied force exceeds a value Fmas the block begins to slide [g = 10 m/s 2 ]
53 P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  MARCH '06
32. The binding energy per nucleoli of deuteron (,H 2 ) and helium nucleus ( 2 He 4 ) is 1.1 MeV and 7 MeV respectively. If two deuteron nuclei react to form a single helium nucleus, then energy released is (a) 13.9 MeV (b) 26.9 MeV (c) 25.8 MeV (d) 19.2 MeV 33. Two radioactive substances A'and >'initially contain equal number of nuclei. A'has a half life of 1 hour and )' has half life of 2 hours. After two hours the ratio of the activity of.Yto the activity of Y is (a) 1 : 4 (b) 1: 2 (c) 1 : 1 (d) 2 : 1 34. Imagine an atom made up of a proton and a hypothetical particle of double the mass of the electron but having the same charge as tne electron. Apply the Bohr atom model and consider all possible transitions of this hypothetical particle to the first excited level. The longest wavelength photon that will be emitted has wavelength X(given in terms of the Rydberg constant R for the hydrogen atom) equal to (a) 9/(5R) (b) 36/(5R) (c) 18/(5R) (d) AIR 35. Electrons with energy 80 keV are incident on the tungsten target of an Xray tube. K shell electrons of tungsten have72.5 keV energy. Xrays emitted by the tube contain only (a) a continuous Xray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung) with all wavelengths of0.155A (b) a continuous Xray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung) with all wavelengths (c) the characteristic Xray spectrum of tungsten (d) a continuous Xray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung) with a minimum wavelength of  0 . 1 5 5 A and the characteristic Xray spectrum of tungsten.
Q. 3 6 t o 3 7 a r e b a s e d o n t h i s p a s s a g e :
(a) (c)
jV_ AnR j V _ (ti + VJ) 2?iR
(d)
5)
37. Since loop is small, assume that the field at its centre is approximately the field at all points inside it. The magnitude of induced emf in the loop (a) (c)
Q.
p0(7t +
2y/3)r2a AR
(b)
p0(7t + 4 i ) r
2
a
AR 2R
p{l(27t + \/3)/ : a 2R
3 8 to 3 9 a r e b a s e d o n t h i s p a s s a g e :
A radio nuclide consists of two isotopes. One of the isotopes decays by aemission and the other by (3emission with half lives f , = 405 sec and 72 = 1620 s respectively. At t = 0, probabilities of getting a and (3particIes from the radio nuclide are equal. 38. The probability of getting a particle from the radio nuclide at / = 1620 sec is (a) 1/9 (b) 8/9 (c) 2/3 (d) 3/8 39. The ratio of number of nuclei of a emitter and (3emitter at time t = 0 is (a) 1/3 (b) 1/2 (c) 1/4 (d) 2/5
Q. 4 0 to 4 2 a r e b a s e d on t h i s p a s s a g e :
A vertical cylindrical vessel of area A = 15 cm 2 contain n = 0.01 mole of each of He, 0 2 and C0 2 . At the lower end, the cylinder has a flexible diaphragm and at the other end a fixed piston. Height of the gas column is h = 30 cm and its 1st and 3rd overtone frequencies are 900 Hz and 2100 Hz respectively 40. The speed of sound in the gas mixture is (a) 330 m/s (b) 300 m/s (c) 280 m/s (d) 360 m/s 41. The ratio of specific heats (y) for the mixture is (a) 10/7 (b) 5/7 (c) 13/7 (d) 11/7 42. Temperature of the gas in the cylinder is (a) 191.47 K (b) 291.47 K (c) 391.47 K (d) 0 K
Q. 4 3 to 4 5 a r e b a s e d o n t h i s p a s s a g e :
In the closed circuit shown, AB, BC and CD are straight J—*—second uctors, each of length R and A / Q \ D DEA is a semi circle of radius R. A small circles loops of radius r is coplanar with the circuit and the centre of loop coincides with centre of curvature of the semicircle. The current through the circuit increases at a constant rate dlldt = a . 36. The magnetic field at centre of the loop as function of / is 54
RMS velocity of molecules of a diatomic gas is to be increased to 1.5 times. In process/1 it is done adiabatically
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '06
and in process B it is done isobarically. The value of y for gas = 1.4 given (1.5) 5 = 7.6 43. The ratio of initial and final volume for process A is (a) 7.6 (b) (7.6) 2 (c) (7.6) 25 (d) (7.6) 15 44. The ratio of initial and final volume for process B is 2 1 4 7 (a) (b) (c) (d) 45. The ratio of work done by the gas during A and B is (a) 2.5 (b) 2.5 (c)  1 . 5 (d) 1.5
Q. 46 to 47 are based on this passage:
(a) ( 2 ,  1 ) (c) ( 3 ,  1 )
(b) (2, 1) (d) (3, 1)
50. If dielectric strength of air is 3 x 106 V/m, minimum possible radius of the sphere is (a) >/20 cm (c) A/30 cm (b) Vio cm (d) 2 cm ANSWERS 1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 46. (a) (a) (a) (a) (c) (a) (a) (b) (a) (a) 2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. 47. (b) (b) (a) (c) (d) (c) (c) (a) (b) (a) 3. 8. 13. 18. 23. 28. 33. 38. 43. 48. (c) (a) (b) (a) (b) (c) (c) (a) (a) (d) 4. 9. 14. 19. 24. 29. 34. 39. 44. 49. (a) (d) (b) (b) (a) (a) (c) (c) (c) (a) 5. 10. 15. 20. 25. 30. 35. 40. 45. 50. (b) (b) (b) (a) (d) (d) (d) (d) (a) (c)
Two thin convex lenses L, and L2 having focal length / , = 30 cm and f2 = 60 cm respectively are placed coaxially as shown . A plane mirror is placed normal to the axis and a point luminous object O on the axis as shown. Light rays emitted by O first pass through lenses L, and L2 respectively and then reflect from mirror M and then reflected rays pass through L2 and L, respectively.
 0 01
L, i M / =30 cm / 2 = 60 cm
( t
L
Exam Alert
> >
> > > > > > > > > > >
V
>
45 cin
90 cm
90 cm
j
46. The image formed by mirror M is at a distance of (a) 180 cm from L2 (b) 90 cm from L2 (c) 180 cm from mirror (d) 120 cm from mirror 47. The final image is formed at (a) pole of Z., (b) between L, and L2 (c) to the right of O (d) between O and L,
Q. 48 to 50 are based on this passage:
A small sphere is charged uniformly and placed at point . 4 ( A   , >  ) S O that at point B ( 8 , 7 ) electric field strength is E = (54/ + 7 2 j ) N/C and potential is +900 volt 48. The charge on sphere is (a) 0.5 nC (b) 0.4 jtC (c) 0.8 nC (d) 1 nC 49. Coordinates of point A are 5
> > > >
CBSE (Pre) IITJEE MGIMS Vellore (Engg.) WB  J E E UPSEE UGET (Mahe) Kerala (PET) Kerala (PMT) BVP (Medical) AIEEE AMU (Engg.) AFMC BHU (Screening) AMU (Medical) CBSE (Mains) BVP (Engg.) Orissa JEE UPCPMT AIIMS BHU (Mains)

2nd April 9th April 16th April 16th April 22nd & 23rd April 23rd April 23rd April 24th & 25th April 26th & 27th April 29th April 30th April 4th May 7th May 10th May 11th May 14th May 21st May 21st May 21st May 1st J u n e 18th J u n e
P H Y S I C S F O R YOIJ  MARCH '06
Practice Paper
for
c BS EPMT ( Prel ims)  2 0 0 6
1. The dimensions of [p 0 £ 0 ]' /2 are the same as that of (a) time period (b) wavelength (c) frequency (d) velocity. 2. A car accelerates from rest at a constant rate of 2 ms 2 for sometime. Then, it retards at constant rate of 4 ms 2 and comes to rest. If the total time for which it remains in motion in 3 seconds, what is the total distance travelled? (a) 2 m (b) 3 m (c) 4 m (d) 6 m. 3. A projectile can have the same range R for two angles of projection. If /, and t2 be the times of flight in the two cases then what is the product of the two times of flight? (a) ut 2 oc R2 (b) t,t2 OC R (c) (d) A. If the initial kinetic energy of the neutron is E, how much kinetic energy is retained by neutron after collision? (a) (c) (A +1) A1 A +1 (b) (d)
,04 + 1)"
A1 (A+ir
8. Three identical particles each of mass 1 kg are placed touching each other with their centres on a straight line. Their centres are marked A, B and C respectively. The distance of centre of mass of the system from A is (a) (c) AB+AC+BC AB + BC (b) (d) AB+AC AC + BC
4. An automobile is turning around a circular road of radius r. The coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road is p. The velocity of the vehicle should not be more than (a) p r g (b) [i.g!r (c) Jug/r (d)
9. Suppose gc be the acceleration due to gravity at the equator and gp be that at poles. Assuming the earth to be a sphere of radius Re rotating about its own axis with angular speed co, then gp  gt, is given by (a) co2/Re (b) Rea)2 (c) wRc (d) w2/R2. 10. A pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of the compartment of a train. When the train is stationary, the time period of the pendulum is T. If the train accelerates, the time period of pendulum (a) will increase (b) will decrease (c) will remain unchanged (d) the pendulum will not oscillate. 11. A simple pendulum performs simple harmonic motion about x = 0 with an amplitude A and time period T. The speed of the pendulum at x — A!2 will be 7W3 T nAy/3 (c) 2T (a) (b) (d) nA — T 3nA
5. A monkey of mass 20 kg is holding a vertical rope. The rope can break when a mass of 25 kg is suspended from it. What is the maximum acceleration with which the monkey can climb up along the rope? (a) 2.5 m/s 2 (b) 5 m/s 2 2 (c) 7 m/s (d) 10 m/s2. 6. An engine pumps up 100 kg of water through a height of 10 m in 5 seconds. Given that the efficiency of engine is 60%, what is the power of the engine? (Take g = 10 m/s 2 ). (a) 33 kW (b) 3.3 kW (c) 0.33 kW (d) 0.033 kW. 7. A neutron is moving with a velocity u. It collides head on and elastically with an atom of mass number 62
12. Two rods of different materials having coefficient
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '06
of linear expansion a , , a 2 and Young's modulii Ylt Y2 respectively are fixed between two rigid massive walls. The rods are heated such that they undergo the same increase in temperature. There is no bending of rods. If ot : a 2 = 2 : 3, the thermal stress developed in the two rods are equal provided K, : Y2 is equal to (a) 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 1 (c) 3 : 2 (d) 4 : 9. 13. A wooden cube floats just inside tne water, when a mass of 300 g is placed on it. If the mass is removed, the cube floats 3 cm above the water surface. The length of the side of cube is (a) 10 cm (b) 15 cm (c) 20 cm (d) 30 cm. 14. The quantity which is zero on an average for the molecules of an ideal gas is (a) momentum (b) density (c) kinetic energy (d) speed. 15. The speed of sound in a gas is v. The rms velocity of gas molecules is C. The ratio of v to C is (a) 3/y (b) y/3 (c)
>/57y
20. A slab consists of two parallel layers of two different materials of same thickness having thermal conductivities K, and K2. The equivalent thermal conductivity of the slab is K, + K, (a) K, + K2 (b) (c)
A', + K, K,K2
(d
'
2X)A, K]+K2
21. A man runs towards the plane mirror at 2 ms 1 . The relative speed of his image with respect to him will be (a) 2ms^' (b) 4 ms"1 (c) 8 ms"1 (d) 10 ms"1. 22. We wish to make a piano convex lens of focal length 16 cm from glass having refractive index 1.5. It is to be used in air. What should be the radius of curvature of the curved surface? (a) 8 cm (b) 12 cm (c) 16 cm (d) 24 cm. 23. We have a right angles isosceles prism. Its refractive index is 1.5. If we incident ray normally on one of the two perpendicular surfaces, which of the following phenomenon will take place? (a) dispersion (b) total internal reflection (c) refraction (d) none of these. 24. Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities I and 41 are superposed. The maximum and minimum possible intensities in the resulting beam are (a) 5/ and / (b) 5/ and 31 (c) 91 and 1 (d) 91 and 31. 25. A charged isolated metal sphere of radius r carries a fixed charge. A small charge is placed at a distance s from its surface. It experiences a force which is (a) proportional to r (b) proportional to (/• + s) (c) inversely proportional to (/• + ,v)2 (d) inversely proportional to s2. 26. Two equal metal balls are charged to 10 and  2 0 units of electricity. Then they are brought in contact with each other and then again separated to the original distance. The ratio of forces between the two balls is (a)  8 : 1 (b) 1 : 8 (c) +2 : 1 (d) 1 : 2. 27. At a point in space, the electric field points towards north. In the region, surrounding this point, the rate of change of potential will be zero along the (a) north (b) south (c) northsouth (d) eastwest.
PHYSICS FOR YOU  MARCH '06
(d)
jj/3
16. Two factories are sounding their sirens at 800 Hz. A man goes from one factory to the other at a speed of 2 ms 1 . The velocity of sound is 320 ms"1. The number of beats heard by the person in one second will be (a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 10. 17. A liquid having coefficient of cubical expansion y is filled in the container having coefficient of linear expansion as a . If, on heating, the liquid overflows, then which of the following relations is correct? (a) y = 2 a (b) y < 3 a (c) y > 3 a (d) 2y = 3a. 18. The first law of thermodynamics forbids flow of a heat (a) from low temperature to higher temperature (b) from lower pressure to higher pressure (c) from bodies with more heat content to one with less heat content (d) none of the above cases. 19. and (a) (c) (d) When the temperature difference between the source the sink increases, the efficiency of the heat engine increases (b) decreases is not affected may increase or decrease depending upon the nature of the working substances.
64
28. From a supply of identical capacitors rated 8 p.F, 250 V the minimum number required to form a composite 16 pF 1000 V capacitor is (a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 32. 29. Find the effective capacitance between points P and O. It will be equal to
(b) it is based on Kirchhoff's laws (c) it does not involve Ohm's law (d) it is a null method. 36. The magnetic field of a bar magnet resembles most closely in the magnetic field of (a) a straight wire carrying a direct current (b) a straight wire carrying an alternating current (c) a wire loop carrying an alternating current (d) a wire loop carrying a direct current. 37. A bar magnet is cut into two equal halves then (a) the two halves are devoid of magnetism (b) one piece has both south poles and the other both north (c) each piece is a bar magnet with the same pole strength as original bar magnet having half length (d) none of these. 38. Figure shows three long, straight and parallel conductors^, B and C carrying currents of 3 A, 2A 1 A 1 A and 2 A respectively. A length 3 A of 0.5 m of the wire B experiences a force of 3 c m 4 cm (a) 10 x 106 N from right to left (b) 10 x 10"6 N from left to right (c) 5.0 x IO"6 N from right to left (d) 5.0 x 10"6 N from left to right. 39. A voltmeter of range 3 V and resistance 200 Q cannot be converted into an ammeter of range (a) 10 mA (b) 100mA (c) 1A (d) 10 A. 40. A small piece of a substance is repelled by magnetic field in whatever direction the magnetic field is applied. The substance is (a) diamagnetic (b) paramagnetic (c) ferromagnetic (d) ferrite. 41. (a) (b) (c) (d) An isolated magnetic pole is not yet observed is made of any ferromagnetic material is made of soft iron only is made of a diamagnetic material.
3 j.iF
3 nF
3 pF
(a) 9 jxF
(b) 4.5 pF
(c) 1 (iF
(d) 6 p.F.
30. A piece of copper and another of germanium are cooled from room temperature to 80° K. The resistance of (a) each of them increases (b) each of them decreases (c) copper increases and germanium decreases (d) copper decreases and germanium increases. 31. Two bulbs take 50 watts each when connected in parallel to 100 V source. The total power consumed by them when they are connected in series with the same source is (a) 100 W (b) 75 W (c) 50 W (d) 25 W. 32. The current / in the circuit as shown in the figure is (a) 1/45 amp. (b) 1/15 amp. (c) 1/10 amp. (d) 1/5 amp.
2 V
30 £ 2
30 Q
33. In a potentiometer, the length and resistance of the wire are 10 metre and 20 Q respectively. The wire is connected in series with a resistance of 5 Q and a battery of e.m.f. 5 volt and negligible internal resistance. The potential gradient along the wire in volt per metre is (a) 0.1 (b) 0.2 (c) 0.3 (d) 0.4 34. (a) (b) (c) (d) When cells are connected in parallel net emf becomes higher net emf becomes lower current capacity becomes higher current capacity becomes lower.
35. Wheatstone bridge is more accurate method of measuring the resistance because (a) it has four resistor arms
42. An induced e.m.f. is produced when a magnet is inserted into a coil. The magnitude of induced e.m.f. does not depend upon (a) the number of turns in the coil (b) the speed with which the magnet is moved (c) strength of the magnet (d) the resistivity of the wire of the coil. 43. When 100 volt d.c. supply is applied across a
PHYSICS FOR YOU  MARCH '06
66
solenoid, a current of 1.0 amp. flows in it. When 100 volt a.c. is applied across the same coil, the current drops to 0.5 amp. If the frequency of a.c. source is 50 Hz, the impedence and inductance of solenoid are (a) 200 Q and 0.55 H (b) 100 Q and 0.86 H (c) 200 Q and 1.0 H (d) 100 £2 and 0.93 H. 44. Light of two different frequencies whose photons have energies 1 eV and 2.5 eV respectively, successively illuminate a metal of work, function 0.5 eV. The ratio of maximum speeds of the emitted electrons will be (a) 1 : 5 (b) 1 : 4 (c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 1. 45. The ionization energy of L i ^ atom in ground state is equal to (a) 13.6 x 9 eV (b) 13.6 J (c) 13.6 erg (d) 13.6 * 10"'" J. 46. (a) (b) (c) (d) The decay constant A. of a radioactive sample decreases as the age of atoms increases increases as the age of atoms increases independent of the age depends on the nature of activity.
Unit of \iJ4n = newton/amp 2 and unit of l/47te0 = newton x metre 2 /coulomb 2 . 2. (d) : v =
/
a
\
= a2t2
or, /, = £2 xt2=\\t2=2t2 Since + t2 = 3 s, hence = 2 s and t2 = I s . Therefore, v = 2 * 2 = 4 ms 1 . As x = ut + at2, hence = ^ x 2 x 4 = 4m.
\
and Xn = — x 4 x l = 2 m . i.e. x, + x, = 6 m. 2 2 3. ( b ) : Range is same for angles of projection 0 and (90  0). 2M sin 0 2i<sin(9O0) 2«cos6 11 = , ti — = 4h sin0cos0 Hence, t\h ~" 4. 7( 2 sin20 g 2R g
(d) : Centripetal force = force of friction
47. The ratio of the radii of the nuclei n AI 27 and 52Te125 is approximately (a) 6 : 10 (b) 13 : 52 (c) 40 : 177 (d) 14 : 73. 48. The distinction between conductors, insulators and semiconductors is largely connected with (a) their ability to conduct current (b) the type of crystal lattice (c) binding energy of their electrons (d) relative widths of their energy gaps. 49. Truth table given here corresponds to (a) AND gate (b) OR gate (c) NAND gate (d) NOR gate. Inputs A B 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Outputs Y 0 1 1 1
or, ^ — = \iR = \iMg or, v = yj\irg. r 5. ( a ) : Let the monkey climb up with acceleration a. The tension caused in the rope will be T = M(g + a), where M is the mass of the monkey. Maximum value of T is 25g = 20(g + a). Taking g = 10 ms~2, it gives a = 2.5 ms~2. 6. (b) : W = 100 x 10 x 10 J. As efficiency of engine is 60%, hence total work done = xi* 60 100 10 x lOOx lOx 10 = J. 60 6
1 0 0
117
50. The electromagnetic waves of frequency 2 MHz to 30 MHz are (a} in ground wave propagation (b) in sky wave propagation (c) in microwave propagation (d) in satellite propagation. SOLUTIONS 1. (d)
10 P=• kW = 3.3 kW. 6 x 5 x 103 (c) : Let the final velocity of the neutron be v,. 2 M2 L Then v, =— 1 u{ + "2 M  +M  M] + M 2 Now 7/, = u, « 2 = 0, /W, = 1 and M2 = A Hence v. = 1+A 1 1
1 , 2 Final kinetic energy of neutron = — xlxv f 1 A
Mo X47TEa 4tt
1+A
67 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '06
Initial kinetic energy of neutron = E Final kinetic energy = I A J +A
]2
—xlxw 2 2
1x800 x 800 = = 10 Hz. 320 320 17. ( c ) : Coeff. of cubical expansion of container = 3 a when y > 3 a , increase in the volume of the liquid is more than that of the vessel. n n
= 
322318
Taking A as the origin, w x 0 + /wx2r + m x 4 r
KM.
=
18. (d): First law of thermodynamics is concerned with the conservation of energy and not with the flow of heat.
= 2r
3m AB = 2r, ^ C = 4r, from A i.e. at B.
19. (a) : t =
Hence
x
(T}  T2).
9. (b) : g' = g  /?t,co2cos2A H e n c e gp = g because at poles, X = 90° and Sc~ S ~ K^2 because at the equator X = 0°. Hence gp  g„ = Rcio2. 10. (b) : The pendulum oscillates under the effect of two accelerations g and a, which are in mutually perpendicular directions. Hence resultant acceleration increases because of which T decreases. I t . (a) : V = <OS]A2~X2 2tc T 12. (c) 2n s/3A •— x . T 2 or,
20. (d) : Let the temperature on the two sides be 0 and B2 and the temperature of interface be 0. Then KA(QX e2)t M(6i 6)? _ K2A(BQ2)t 2d ~ d d This gives £(0,  0 2 ) = 2^,(0,  0) and K(Q,  0 2 ) = 2K2(Q  0,)
Solv,ng '
. .
ts 2,K.]Kj
21. (b) : The image always remains as far behind the mirror as the object is in front. 1 22 ( a ) :  = (151) R 1o or, 1 oo
(VA)
a{T
f2 F2 or, F2 = Y2CL2T U2il2) a2r where F, and F 2 are thermal stress.
Y
or, R = 8 cm. 16" R 23. (b) : Critical angle will be sin"'(l/1.5) = 41.8°. The angle of incidence inside the prism will be 45°. Since it is more than critical angle, the light ray will undergo total internal reflection. 24. (c) : / m a x = / 1 + / 2 + 2 7 v 7 and / m i n = / , + / ,  2 ^ .
As F\ = F2, hence )',a, = K 2 a 2 .
i _ a2
13. (a) : Let the side of the cube be L. Then volume of the cube outside = volume of water displaced due to mass. The water displaced is 300 g and its volume is 300 cm 3 . Hence 3 x l x L = 300 i.e. 1 = 1 0 cm. 14. (a) : Molecules move at random in all possible directions and momentum is a vector quantity. 15. (d) : • ••
v
25. ( c ) : As charge on a metal sphere can be supposed to be placed at the centre just like a point charge and force on point charge « l/(distance) 2 . 26. (a) : Initial force = Fx = Final force 1 (+10)(20) 4s 0
=
yRT
and
c
=
3 RT M
R
1 (5X5) l 47te0 r [charge on each ball = (10
200 8
20)/2 =  5 units]
L  LL C V3 322 '=l±^x« =l ^ x 8 0 0 = x800 Hz v 320 320 Z^.x/J=3202x80{) = 318x800Hz v 320 320
W
25
1
,6. ( d ) :
w» =
27. (d): As electric field is directed from south to north and E =  (AV/Ax) Hence rate of change of potential will not be zero along north or south or northsouth. It is zero along east and west.
PHYSJCS FOR YOU MARCH 06
68
28. ( d ) : For 1000 V capacitor, four capacitors must be joined in series. But capacity of one such row of four capacitors will be equal to 2 p.F. Hence 8 such rows of four capacitors each, must be joined in parallel to form a 16 iF 1000 V capacitor. 29. (a) : It is equivalent to a parallel combination of three capacitors. ••• O r = C, + C2 + C3 = 9 (J.F. 30. (d) : a is +ve for copper but  v e for germanium. 31. (d) : P,= P2 = 50 watt P{P2 _ 50x50  = 25 watt. r 100 P+P, i 32. (c)
R.,Hh A=
Hence,
B„=—^OIII.
2TIX3X10
Hpx2
2
= 2 x 10"5  105 = IO"5 T. F = BRil sin90° = IO"5 x 1 x 0.5 = 5 x 10"" N. As Bj( is <g>, hence according to right hand palm rule, force will be directed from left to right. 39. (a) : Here z„ = 3V = 0.015 amp. = 15 mA. 200 Q So, new range cannot be less than 15 mA.
2 J I X 4 x 10
40. (a): A diamagnetic substance is repelled by a strong magnet. 41. (a): A magnetic pole does not exist in nature because we cannot separate a north pole from a south pole. 42. (d): Induced emf depends only on the rate of change of total magnetic flux linked with the coil. It is independent of the resistance of the coil. 43. (a) : For d.c., co = 0, hence Z = R = (£ r m s // r m s ) = 100/1 = 100 £2. For a.c., Z = +(2NFL)2 = V(100)2 +(100ttZ,)2
30x60 „„ ^ . 2 1 = 20 Q, I = — = — amp. 30 + 60 20 10 5
1 = — amp. 33. (d) 20 + 5 5 1 F = / x 20 = — x 20 = 4 volt. 5 4 voit = 0.4 volt/metre. K_y__
L 10 metre 34. ( c ) : In parallel combination of cells, e.m.f. remain same but current capacity gets increased because currents due to all the cells are added up. 35. ( d ) : In null position, no current flows through the galvanometer connected in diagonal arm of the bridge. It is due to this reason that Wheatstone bridge is more accurate method for determining resistance. 36. ( d ) : A current carrying loop is equivalent to a bar magnet or a magnetic dipole having magnetic dipole moment equal to i A, where A is the area of the loop. M
Now, Z = — = 200 Q, 0.5 hence 200 = V(100) 2 + (100itZ,)2. 44. (c) : r
( v v
<)I
=(hv)lW = 1 eV  0.5 eV = 0.5 eV
^«( v max) 2
II
= (M) )nW = 2.5 eV  0.5 eV = 2.0 eV
1/2
O w j u _ 10 0.5 ( v max )l
= 2 or,
2
( v max ) ( v max)ll
2
^
45, ( a ) : (l.E.h  Z (/.£.) h = (3) x 13.6 eV. 37. (c) 46 (c) 47, ( a ) : Radius of nucleus, R = where A is the mass number R m oc (27)'» (125)'". 48. ( d ) : Forbidden energy gap is maximum in case of insulators, less for semiconductors. For conductors, there is no energy gap. 49. (b) ": For OR gate Y = A + B. 50. (b) : The electromagnetic waves of frequency 2 MHz to 30 MHz are used in sky wave propagation.
< / It is clear from the figure that M = M\ + M2 or, m'  m. or,
/
>
mil = m'l + m'l
38. (d) : Total magnetic field produced by conductors A and C at the position of B = BR = BA BC (BA is ® and B( is O )
PHYSICS FOR YOl  MARCH '06
155
Practice Paper for
V
v.. 3
Mains
5. (a) Only certain definite lines are found in the atomic spectra of substances. Explain why. Hydrogen atom has only one electron, but its emission spectrum has many lines. Explain it. (b) An Xray tube produces a continuous spectrum of radiation with its short wavelength end at 0.45 A . What is the maximum energy of a photon in the radiation. (c) Why does the electrical conductivity of a pure semiconductor increase with rise in temperature? 6. (a) In changing the state of a gas adiabatically from an equilibrium state A to another equilibrium state 5, an amount of work equal to 22.3 J is done on the system. If the gas is taken from the state A to 3 via a process in which the net heat absorbed by the system is 9.35 cal, how much is the net work done by the system in latter case? (1 cal = 4.19 J). (b) What part does the specific heat of water play in causing seabreeze? 7. (a) A simple pendulum PO 2.0 m long is displaced from its position of rest into the position PR and then set free. What would be its speed when it is passing through the point O assuming that 3% of the initial energy is dissipated against air resistance. (b) The initial and final temperatures of water in a container are observed as 16 ± 0.5°C and 41 ± 0.l°C. What is the rise in the temperature of water? (a) Thedisplacementj(inm)ofabody varies with 2 2 time t (in sec) as }' =   j ? + 1 6 / + 2. How long does the body take to come to rest? (b) Machine bearings are often made of one metal while their rotating shafts are made of another. Why? (c) Calculate longest and shortest wavelength in Balmer series. 9. (a) An electric motor runs on a d.c. source of e.m.f. £ and internal resistance r. Show that the power
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MAY0624
1. (a) The maximum and the minimum magnitudes of the resultant of two given vectors are 17 units and 7 units respectively. If these two vectors are directed at right angles to each other, find the magnitude and direction of their resultant. (b) Given the velocity of sound (v) depends upon the elasticity of the medium (E) and the density (c/), derive the relation. 2. (a) If the intensity at a point in an electric field be zero, will the potential there be also zero? If the potential at the point be zero, will the intensity be zero? (b) A resistance of 1000 £2 and a uniform variable resistance oftotal resistance 400 Q are connected in series to a battery of e.m.f. 6 V and a negligible internal resistance. What is the potential difference across the 1000 Q resistor when (i) a quarter, (ii) half of the variable resistance is in the circuit. 3. (a) A spring balance has a scale that reads from 0 to 50 kg. The length ofthe scale is 20 cm. A body suspended from this spring, when displaced and released, oscillates with a period of 0.60 s. What is the weight of the body? (b) A wheel is rotating about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane. If it moves with constant angular velocity or constant angular acceleration, can it have a radial or tangential acceleration? (c) A solid cylinder of mass 20 kg rotates about its axis with angular speed 100 s~'. The radius of the cylinder is 0.25 m. What is the kinetic energy associated with the rotation ofthe cylinder? What is the magnitude of angular momentum of the cylinder about its axis. 4. (a) Compare the velocity of sound in oxygen and hydrogen at 10°C and under a pressure of 76 cm of mercury when oxygen is 16 times denser than hydrogen, (b) One of the two clocks on earth is controlled by a pendulum and other by a spring. If both the clocks be taken to the moon, then state with reason whether the clocks will show accurate time or not.
8.
7Q
output ofthe source is maximum when the current drawn by a motor is e/2r. (b) A current of 5 A flows through a copper wire of a cross section 3 mm2. Obtain the drift velocity of the electrons. Given there is one free electron per atom, molecular mass = 63.5 g/mol, density of copper = 8.92 x 103 kgm\ (c) A bar magnet 4 cm long is held vertically with its north pole resting on a horizontal table. A neutral point is located on the table 3 cm from the lower end of the magnet. Find the moment of the magnet. Given, H = 0.2 oersted. 10. (a) The speed of sound in moist air is greater than in dry air, why? Will the speed of sound in moist hydrogen be greater than in dry hydrogen? (b) The refractive index of glass is 1.5. What is the speed of light in glass? (Speed of light in vacuum is 3.0 x 108 ms"1). (c) The image of a candle formed by a convex lens is obtained, if the lower half of the lens is painted black and completely opaque?
SOLUTIONS
[LT1] o= [ML 'T2]n[ML 3]A or [M°LT'] oc M° * L~" T2" By the principle of homogeneity of dimensions, we have 0 =a +b 1 = a  3b 1 = 2a a= 1/2, b =  1 / 2 Hence the relation is [LT 1 ] « [ML'T"2]1'2 [ML 3]"2 or or v v = E"1 d~u2 i.e., v oc 1 d
where k is the constant.
2. (a) If the intensity ( Q) (• Q) at a point in an electric I —I field be zero, the c potential may not be Mzero there. For " " example, if two like charges of equal magnitude O be separated by a distance 2d as shown in figure, the intensity at C (the mid point of AB) will be zero, but the potential at C will be given by v Q
=
Q
d _ 2 2 , which is not equal to zero.
d
—
I. The resultant of two given vectors has its maximum magnitude when the vectors are parallel to each other (0 = 0°) and its minimum magnitude when they are antiparallel to each other (0 = 7t). Hence if a and b are the two given vectors, we have Maximum magnitude of their resultant =  a \ +  b  = 17, and Minimum magnitude of their resultant =  a \   b  = 7 Solving these two equations, we get  a \ = and \b = 177
= 5,
17+7
=
12
L in 1 ! E
a
Also, it is known that the potential inside a charged hollow conductor is constant having some value but there is no electric field there. If the potential at a point be zero, then the intensity may not be zero there. For example, two equal and opposite charges are placed at a distance apart. Then the potential at any point on the perpendicular bisector of the line joining the two charges will be zero but there will be a resultant intensity at that point whose direction is parallel to the line joining the charges. (b) The circuit is shown in figure, (i) when a quarter of the variable resistance is in circuit, the total resistance of the circuit, is ^looo + ^ p j o
When these two vectors act at right angles to each other, we have magnitude of there resultant = = \ f u F+ 5 2
^ 5=12
1000 Q —vm
AWAV 400 Q
13 This resultant is inclined at an angle a to the vector a where tana = ^ = 04167 a = tan" 1 (0.4167)
6 V
\
or 1100 Q .
(b) Let the relation be represented by equation, h v oc E" x d Writing the dimensions on both sides,
P H Y S I C S F O R YOU  MAY 06
Hence current / = — = ^ A R 1100 .•. potential difference across the 1000 Q resistance is 25
1100
circuit is
xlOOO V = 5.45 V
The moment of inertia, 7, of the cylinder about its own axis is 1 = \ M R 2 = i x 2 0 x ( 0 . 2 5 ) 2 = 0.625 kgm2 Given co = 100 s"1 •'•
A
(ii) In the second situation, the total resistance of the + 1200Q.
'rot = 4x 0.625x (100)2 J = 3125 J.
Hence current i = ~ =  p ^ j A .•. Potential difference across the 1000 £2 resistance is
6
1200
x 1000 V = 5 V.
3. (a) We are given that a weight of 50 kg displaces the spring through 20 cm. Hence, the force constant of the spring is mg 50x9.8 ., , , , i k=— = r = 24.5x10" T m . M x 20x10 Let m be the suspended mass. The time period of the oscillating mass is given by T = 2?r or .,
m
4. (a) Let v, and v2 be the velocities of sound in oxygen and hydrogen respectively and p,, p 2 be their corresponding densities respectively. Since sound travels under the same conditions of temperature and pressure and moreover both oxygen and hydrogen are diatomic gases having the same value for y, the ratio of the two specific heats. . " v2 .
v =
jp£ Here, p2 = 1, p, = V Pi ' 1 1 Vl6 ~ 4' Hence v2 = 4v,
i
Velocity of sound in hydrogen = 4 times the velocity of sound in oxygen. (b) The time period of the clock controlled by a spring depends upon the force constant of the spring and the mass of the body suspended by it, so it will not be affected when it is taken to the moon. Hence the clock based on spring will give the same time on the moon as well as on the earth. But, in case of the clock controlled by a pendulum, time period is inversely proportional to the I square root of acceleration due to gravity, i.e. T °c —t=SS On the surface of the moon the value of g is much less compared to that on the earth. So the time period will be more and hence the clock will go slow. 5. (a) The atomic spectrum of a substance is obtained due to transitions of electrons from one energy state (orbit) to another. Atom has only certain definite energy states corresponding to the stationary or permissible orbits of the electron. Hence only certain definite frequencies of radiation emitted by the atoms are possible resulting in line spectrum of the atom. When a certain quantity of hydrogen gas is excited by supplying energy from outside source, millions of hydrogen atoms are excited. These atoms absorb different amounts of energy and the electrons of the atoms jump to quantum orbits of different energy levels. These electrons make transitions to the ground state by giving up different quantities of energy: As a result, according to Bohr's frequency postulate, they give rise to spectral lines corresponding to the photons of different frequencies. Contd. onpage no. 70
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MAY 06
.. 0.60 = 2ti
24.5 x 10z
(0.60)2 4n 2 4rt 24.5 x 10
x
24.5 x 102 kg x 24.5 x 9.8 N = 219 N.
471
Weight of the body =
(b) The radial acceleration or centripetal acceleration / c = fflV da Tangential acceleration,// = ra = r —• at So, if the wheel rotates with constant angular da velocity (co), then — = 0 . So, — / fT = m dt tangential acceleration will be zero. It will only have radial (centripetal acceleration). But, if it rotates with constant angular acceleration (a), then ^ 0. Hence, in this case, it will have both radial dt and tangential acceleration as shown in figure.
(c) The rotational kinetic energy A'rot is = 2/C°
{EZEEEEB0Axis of
cylinder
26
Very Similar MODEL TEST PAPER
for BHU (MAINS) 2006
SECTION  A
1. A ball is dropped downwards. After 1 second another ball is dropped downwards from the same point. What is the distance between them after 3 seconds? (a) 25 m (b) 20 m (c) 50 m (d) 9.8 m. 2. A 30 kg slab rests on a M F+frictionless floor. A 10 kg block M, rests on the top of the slab. The mTrmTTtmTffmfrt, c o e f f i c i e n t of static f r i c t i o n between the block and the slab is 0.5 and that of dynamic friction is 0.15. A force of 40 N is applied on the block. The resulting acceleration of the slab would be (a) zero (b) 2 m/s 2 (c) 1 m/s 2 (d) 5 m/s 2 . 3. A ball of massOT,collides elastically and head on with another ball of mass m 2 initially at rest. In which of the following cases transfer of momentum will be maximum? (a) ni\ > m 2 (b) mx < m 2 (c) OT, = m 2 (d) cannot be said. 4. A hollow cylinder and a solid cylinder having the same mass and same diameter are released from rest simultaneously from the top of an inclined plane. Which will reach the bottom first? (a) solid cylinder (b) hollow cylinder (c) both will reach the bottom together (d) the one having greater density. 5. A substance breaks down by a stress of 106 N/m 2 . If the density of the material of the wire is 3 x 103 kg/m 3 then the length of the wire of that substance which will break under its own weight when suspended vertically is (a) 3.4 m (b) 34 m (c) 340 m (d) 3400 m. 6. A satellite is orbiting around the earth with a period T. If the earth suddently shrinks to 2/3 rd of its radius without change in mass, the period of revolution of the satellite will be (a) 7. 77V2 (b) T (c) 772 (d) 2T. A tank has an orifice at its bottom. The volume of
Exam on 18th June 2006 ,
liquid flowing out per second from the orifice does not depend upon (a) the area of the orifice (b) height of the liquid level above the orifice (c) density of the liquid (d) value of acceleration due to gravity. 8. Two dissimilar springs fixed at one end are stretched by 10 cm and 20 cm respectively. When masses m, and m2 are suspended at their lower ends. When displaced slightly from their mean position and released, they will oscillate with period in the ratio (a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 1.41 (d) 1.41 : 4. 9. In a refrigerator, heat from inside at 277 K is transfered to the room at 300 K. How many joules of heat energy will be delivered to the room for each joule of electrical energy consumed ideally (a) 13 J (b) 26 J (c) 12 J (d) 11.5 J. 10. A man on the ground finds that when he sees a jet plane just over his head, the sound is heard at an angle of 30° with the vertical from his left. If the velocity of sound is v, what is the velocity of the jet plane? (a) v/2 (b) 2v (c) 2 (d) vS
11. Two charges q, and q2 repel each other with a force of 0.2 N. What will be the force exerted by q, and q2 when a third charge is placed near them? (a) 0.2 N (b) > 0.2 N (c) < 0.2 N (d) less than 0.2 if qx and q2 are similar and more than 0.1 if <7, and q2 are dissimilar. 12. A wire of resistance R is bent in the form of a circle. The resistance between two points on the circumference of the wire and at the end of a diameter of the circle is (a) R/4 (b) R/8 (c) R/16 (d) R/32. 13. The water in an electric kettle begins to boil in 15 minutes after being switched on. Using the same main supply, by what percentage the length of the wire used as the heating element should be increased or
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O l l  MAY 05
52
decreased if the water is to boiled in 10 minutes? (a) decreased by 33% (b) increases by 33% (c) decreased by 67% (d) increased by 67%. 14. A circular coil of radius r carries a current /'. The magnetic field at its centre is B. At what distance from the centre, on the axis of the coil, the magnetic field will be Bl8? (a) 3r (b) 2/• (c) V3r (d) J2r • 15. The sensitivity of a tangent galvanometer will increase when (a) number of turns in the coil is deceased (b) number of turns in the coil is increased (c) radius o f t h e coil is increased (d) none of these. 16. (a) (b) (c) (d) Which of the following is not a property of light? it involves transportation of energy it can travel through vacuum it has infinite speed it can travel in a material medium.
(a) proton (c) neutron
(b) electron (d) neutrino.
23. For a common emitter circuit the current gain of a transistor is 60. If the emitter current is 6.6 mA, the base current is (a) 0.10 mA (b) 6.5 mA (c) 0.66 mA (d) none of these. 24. (a) (b) (c) For detecting intensity of light we use photo diode in forward bias photo diode in reverse bias LED in forward bias (d) LED in reverse bias.
25. If A = 1 = 5 , then in terms of Boolean algebra A + B equals (a) A+B (b) B (c) A (d) A or B.
SECTION  B
Direction: In the following questions more than one of the answers given may he correct. Select the correct answers and mark it according to the code.
Code:
17. A convex mirror of focal length/produces an image l /n times the size of the object. The distance of the object from the mirror is (a) (n + \)f (b)(n\)f
(a) 1, 2 and 3 are correct (b) 1 and 2 are correct (c) 2 and 4 are correct (d) 1 and 3 are correct 26. Which of the following statements are true for a moving body? 1. If its velocity changes, its speed must change and it must have some acceleration. 2. If its velocity changes, its speed may or may not change, and it must have some acceleration. 3. If its speed changes but direction of motion does not change, its velocity may remain constant. 4. If its speed changes, its velocity must change and it must have some acceleration. 27. Iftwo bodies are in motion with velocities v, and v 2 , then resultant velocity can be
(c)
br/
(d)
brj'
18. A Young's double slit arrangement produces interference fringes for sodium light X = 5890 A that are 0.2° apart. What is the angular fringe separation if the entire arrangement is immersed in water whose refractive index is 4/3? (a) 0.10° (b) 0.15° (c) 0.20° (d) 0.30°. 19. The focal length of a thin convex lens for red and blue coloured are 100.9 and 99.5 cm. The dispersive power of the lens is (a) 1.005 (b) 0.995 (c) 0.02 (d) 0.01 20. If £,, £ 2 and £ 3 are three respective kinetic energies of an electron, an alpha particle and a proton each having the same de Broglie wavelength, then (a) £, > £ 3 > £ 2 (b) £ 2 > £ 3 > £, (c) £ , = £ , = £ , (d) £, > £ 2 > £3. 21. The de Broglie wavelength of a neutron at 27°C is X. The wavelength at 927°C will be (a) X/9 (b) X/4 (c) X/3 (d) X/2. 22. In the nuclear process, S C" > 5BM + (3+ + X, X stands for
53 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U MARCH'06
(1) v 0 I = 7V, 2 +V 2 2
(3) I v0  = 0
(2)  v 0  =  v , ± v 2  (4) v0 > c, speed of light.
28. A ball is dropped onto a pad at O and rebounds with a velocity 1 at 1 an angle 60° with the horizontal as shown in figure. The ball will enter a window W of width 0.5 m at a height 1 m, if u is
• L
0.5 m
1.0 m
(I) 50 m/s (2) 1 m/s (I) I F = 0 ; I x = 0 (3) S f = 0, b u t Z x * 0
(3) 6 m/s
(4) 5 m/s. but S T = 0
(4) the liquid will ooze out of the tube slowly. 35. If in athermodynamical process the initial pressure and volume are equal to the final pressure and volume respectively, then (1) final internal energy must be equal to initial (2) final temperature must be equal to initial (3) net work done on the system must be zero (4) net heat given to the system is zero. 36. Which of the following functions represent simple harmonic motion? (1) sin2co/ (2) sinco/ + 2cosra/ (3) sin2a)/ (4) sinco/ + cos2co/. 37. A transverse sinusoidal wave of amplitude a, wavelength A. and frequency/is travelling on a stretched string. The maximum speed of any point on the string is r/10, where v is the speed of propagation of the wave. If a ~ 10~3 m and v = 10 m/s, then X and / are given by (1) X = 2ti x 10~2 m (2) X = 10"3 m ( 3 ) / = 103/(27t) Hz (4) / = 104 Hz. 38. The capacitance of a parallelplate capacitor is C0 when the region between the plates has air. This region is now filled with a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K. The capacitor is connected to a cell of emf E, and then slab is taken out. Then (1) charge EC0(K  1) flows through the cell (2) energy C0E?(K  1) is absorbed by the cell I , (3) the external agent has to do — E C 0 ( K  1 ) amount of work to take the slab out (4) the energy stored in the capacitor is reduced bv l?C0(K  1). 39. Two electric bulbs rated 25 W, 220 V and 100 W, 220 V are connected in series across a 220 V source. The 25 W and 100 W bulbs bulbs now draw powers Pi and P2 respectively, then (1) Pi = 16 W (2) Pi = 4 W (3) P2 = 4 W (4) P2 = 16 W. i 40. (1) I (2)  (3) Which of the following statements is/are incorrect? both Peltier and Joule effects are reversible both Peltier and Joule effects are irreversible Joule effect is reversible, whereas Peltier effect is irreversible I (4) Joule effect is irreversible, whereas Peltier effect is reversible. 41. A ring carrying clockwise current is placed in a uniform magnetic field. The direction of the field is
P H Y S I C S FOR Y O U MARCH'06
29. If a dipole is situated in a nonuniform field,
(2)
(4)
LF*0;IT*0.
30. A reference frame attached to earth (1) cannot be inertial frame as earth is rotating about its axis (2) is inertial frame by definition (3) cannot be inertial frame as earth is moving around its axis (4) is inertial f r a m e because N e w t o n ' s laws are  applicable in this frame. 31. A heavy stone is thrown from a cliff of height h in a given direction. The speed with which it hits the ground (1) must be larger than the speed of projection (2) must be independent of speed of projection (3) must depend on the speed of projection (4) may be smaller than the speed of projection. 32. The moment of inertia of a thin A square plate ABCD of uniform thickness about an axis passing through the centre O and perpendicular to the plate is (where /,, /2, A, /,, are moments ;D of inertia about axes 1, 2, 3 and 4 which are in the plane of the plate). (1) /. +V 2 B 0/\ C 2\
(3)/, + /,
(4) 7 , + / , + /, +/ 4 .
(2) h + U
33. An astronaut, inside an earth satellite experiences weightlessness because (1) the centripetal gravitational force on the astronaut is cancelled by the centrifugal force (2) no reaction is exerted by floor of the satellite (3) he is far away from the earth's surface (4) no external force is acting on him. 34. When a capillary tube is dipped in a liquid, the liquid rises to a height h in the tube. The free liquid surface inside the tube is hemispherical in shape. The tube is now pushed down so that the height of the tube outside the liquid is less than h (1) the liquid will fill the tube but not come out of its upper end (2) the liquid will come out of the tube like in small fountain (3) the free liquid surface inside the tube will not be hemispherical 54
perpendicular to the plane of the ring inwards (1) there is not net force on the ring (2) the ring will tend to contract (3) the ring will tend to expand (4) torque on the coil is maximum.
(3) even when the metal surface is faintly illuminated, the photoelectrons leave the surface immediately ; (4) electric charge of photoelectrons is quantised.
 48. An electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transition from n = w, to n = n2. The time period o f t h e electron 42. The meniscus of a liquid obtained in one of the in the initial state is eight times that in the final state. limbs of a narrow Utube is held in an electromagnet The possible values of and n2 are with the meniscus in line with the field. The liquid is (1) n, = 4, /?, = 2 (2) n[ = 6, n 2 = 3 seen to rise. This indicates that the liquid is (3) «, = 8, n2 = 1 (4) = 8, n2 = 2. (1) paramagnetic (2) ferromagnetic 49. Semiconductor devices are (3) diamagnetic (4) nonmagnetic. (1) temperature dependent (3) current dependent 43. The magnetic flux linked with a coil is 0 and the (2) voltage dependent (4) none of these. emf induced in it is e. Then (1 ) if 0 = 0, e must be 0 50. Which of the following statements concerning the (2) if 0 0, e cannot be 0 depletion zone of an unbiased pn junction is (are) true? (3) if e is not 0, 0 may not be zero (1) the width of the zone is independent of the densities (4) none of the above is correct. of the dopants (impurities) 44. Which of the following Maxwell's equations have (2) the width o f t h e zone is dependent o f t h e densities of the dopants sources of E and B ? (3) the electric field in the zone is provided by the electrons in the conduction band and the holes in the valence band (4) the electric field in the zone is produced by the (2) cfBd! = p 0 / + p0s0 — dEds ionized dopant atoms. dt s
I
\
(3) dEd7 = —(dBds dt s s (4) (§Bds= 0. 45. When lights of different colours moves through water, they must have different (I) wavelengths (2) amplitudes (3) velocities (4) frequencies. 46. A bird flies down vertically towards a water surface. To a fish inside the water, vertically below the bird, the bird will appear to (1) be farther away than its actual distance (2) be closer than its actual distance (3) move faster than its actual spee^ (4) move slower than its actual speed. 47. Photoelectric effect supports the quantum nature of light because (1) there is a minimum frequency of light below which no photoelectrons are emitted (2) the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons depends only on the frequency of light and not on its intensity
I HVSIt'S FOR Y O l MAY '06
SOLUTIONS 1. (a) : The ball A has fallen for 3 seconds, the distance travelled, 1  1 5 9 Si = — el\ =— xl0x3~ =45 ni. The ball B has fallen for 2 seconds, the distance travelled, So = — gt 2 = — x 10 x 2 2 = 20 m. Separation between the two balls, 5,  s2 = 45  20 = 25 m. (c) : Here force of = 0.5 x 10 x io = As applied force is 40 limiting friction, block The slab will however, a= 2. limiting friction = \JihU_g 50 N N i.e. less than the force of shall not move. move with acceleration
2 2
2
'
2
F 40 2 = = 1 m/s . Mx+M2 (30 + 10) 3. (c): Transfer of kinetic energy and hence momentum is maximum when /;;, = m2. 1 2 4. (a) : For solid cylinder, /, = —MR For hollow cylinder, Ih = MR2 55
As //, > /„ therefore angular acceleration, ah < ax Hence solid cylinder reaches the bottom first. 5. (b) : Breaking force = breaking stress * area of cross section = weight of wire I 0 6 X / / = / ( / X pg or. 10 , 10° /= = > 34 m. pg 3XI0 3 X9.S
% decrease in length
 x100 = 1 'i y
x 100 = 33%.
x 100
14. (c) : Magnetic field at centre, B = Magnetic field at a point on the axis, LQ 271 //•" B' J I l 4tt (/• + x2x3/2 ) As B' = 5/8, 8/' = (r
2 3 2
~m 47t r
„ 2nr „ r 6. (b) : T = — = 2nr.\ v \GM where / is the radius of the orbit of satellite. As T is independent of radius of earth, hence T remains unchanged, when earth shrinks. 7. (c): Volume of liquid flowing out per second through ; which is independent of
x
1
(r2+x2f2 +x )
2 l
8r
or, 2 r = (r"+x~y or, x = ^3/•.
the orifice = Av = A^2gh density of liquid. 8.
or, 4 r~ = r + x 15. (b) : /
(c) : OT,g = x 10 ; m2g = k2 /;;, 1 0 a n m2 _ 20 So, k = , d h g \ g r,
= 2JT
20
tan 9. "llQ The sensitivity can be increased (i.e. more deflection
20
2 rH
''I • = „2tt 10 —
10
T2 = 2n —= = 2n I— O 1 T V #
for the given current) if
is decreased. It will be "Ho so if n is increased, r is decreased and 11 is decreased. 16. (c) : Light does not travel with infinite speed. h,  v 17. (b) : m = — = —. Here, image is virtual. h\ u 1, h2 =  « , n or, v = — and n n k f for convex mirror is positive 1 _ 1 n + ^ f u v or, ii = (1  n)f 18. (b) : n =
As S
2/77
_
1.414 9. (a) : Coefficient of performance = ^ QI ^ 7? '/,  T2
= _ _ 2 7 7 _ = 277 = ] 2 j 1 300277 23 •'• Q\ = Q2 + W= 12 + 1 = 13 J.
10. (a) : If K is velocity of jet, then as per question, V v sin 30° = — or V = vsm30° =  . v 2 11. (a): Force exerted by q, and q2 on each other remains the same (= 0.2 N) and is not affected by the presence/ absence of any other charge. 12. ( a ) : In this arrangement, there are two resistances each of value R/2 connected in parallel. So the equivalent resistance is R/4. 13. (a) : Heat produced, 11
=
f or,
v u/n u u = (n  1 )f. uX X 4 o/L' ~ X'~ 3
velocity of light in air(c) velocity of light in water (v) • — =—  1 A, _ 0 ~ 4
'
d = =— ~ 0 ~ 0''
or,
R
(P//A)
A
r According to question, H, = V\A — = V\A p/, p l2 IO/, or, /2 = hh U 15 to U
0' = —0 = — x 0.2° = 0.15°. 4 4 19. (d) : Dispersive power of lens co is _ f R  f „ _ 100.999.5 = 0.013 VTk/s 7100.9x99.5 or, v = A Xm 1 2 1 fr 1 h2 mv =— m 2 2 2 2 Xm 2 X2m
0) =
0.01
20. (a) : X.
56
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U MARCH'06
i.e. E °= Mm. ma > mr > m,. u 21. (d) : X = V2 mE i.e. X oc 1 / V r ; so
If .v = 1.5 m, then 1.5 = «sin60°x —   x 1 0 x ^  =   j2mx(3/2)kT ~~ X 2' JjmkT or, 4 = 0 or, u So the ball will enter the window with all velocities greater than 5 m/s upto 29. (c): In a non uniform field, I, F * 0 . When dipole is aligned with field, ZT = 0 and when dipole is not aligned, E t * 0 . 30. (d) : A reference frame attached to earth is not inertial because rotation of earth around its axis as also around the sun are not uniform. 31. (d): The speed with which the body hits the ground is v + g 2.2r . Clearly, v depends on u and v > it. 32. ( a ) : According to theorem of perpendicular axes / = / , + / , and / = I3 + / 4 As J2 = I3, I = / , + ly r1 2 r 34. (d): The angle of contact at the free liquid surface inside the capillary tube will change in such a way so that the vertical component of the surface tension forces just balance the weight of liquid column. 35. (b) : The process must be cyclic. Therefore, final temperature = initial temperature. As internal energy of an ideal gas is a function of temperature alone, therefore, final internal energy = initial internal energy. 36. (b) : A motion will be simple harmonic if acceleration °= —y dy (i) As v = sin2u», v = 'r~ = 2acos2tot y ' ' dt dv 7 ? Acceleration = — =  4 o r sin2w/=4or>> dt So, y = sin2(i)/ represents simple harmonic motion. (ii) y = sinco/ + 2cosco/ d)> „ • v = — = co cos co/2co sin cat dt dv 1 . „ i Acceleration = — =  w s i n c o /  2 w cosco/ dt = co2(sinco/ + 2cosco/) = ufy. .'. The given function ^represents simple harmonic motion. The remaining two functions do not represent simple harmonic motion. 37. (d) : Maximum speed of any point 011 the string =flco= v/10 33. (b) : GMmc mv
= 0
' ~  — A,. /— — A, K)
22. (d) : „C" + (3+ + ZXA Conservation of mass number: 11 = 11 + 0 + A, A = 0 Conservation of charge number: 6 = 5 + 1 + Z, Z= 0 Hence X stands for neutrino. 23. (a) : P = ^ or, / ( = p / « = 6 0 / a
Since. //, = / /; + /,• .. /,.; ='/« + 60/a. = 61/fl /,.•
61
6.6 x i o  3
61
= 0.108 mA.
24. (b) : To detect the intensity of light, we use photodiode in reverse biased. 25. (d) : .4 + 5 = 1 + 1 = 0 + 1 =1 = A or B. 26. (c): Velocity = speed + direction. If velocity changes, the direction of motion of body may change, the speed of body may or may not change. The change in velocity must produce acceleration. If speed changes, then velocity of body must change and hence there must be an acceleration. 27. (a) : v0 = ^ v 2 + + 2V[V2 cos9 If 0 has any value between 0° to 1 80c then cosG will be positive, zero or negative. 28. (d): Take horizontal motion from O to W, we have N/3 1 s = ul or, — = ucos60°xt = u—t 2 2 or, / = v/3 /11 ... (i) Taking vertical motion from O to IV, we have s= utgr If .v = 1.0 m, 1 " > xl0x4
1.0 = wsin60°x— or. or.
, vj 15 J 15 1 = — xV 3 — T = — 2 M" 15 3  =   ! =  or, t/2 =30 or, // = V30
s
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O l i  MAY 06
57
or, a2nf = v/10 v
/
20m/
10 207ixl0  3 r— = 2tux10
Hr Hz. 7tr
2
m. 10 3X. (a) : (a) Initial charge = (KC0)E F inal charge = C0E Charge that flows through the cell = KCaE  C0E = EC„(K  1) (b) Initial energy = KC0E2 Final energy = CnE2 Energy absorbed by the cell = KC^E2  C0Er = C0£2(A'  1) (c) Work done in taking out the slab IKC0E2\C.qE2
39. (d)
X=/ = —
10X2TT
x. Lli i As — = — = —, .'. v = p_x V \i2 U As > 1, v "• .v Also, speed of bird = dx/'dt
U
Let u
Apparent speed of bird =
dx
dx
=
x
C0E\K\).
47. (a) : According to quantum nature of light, the light travels as packets of energy called photons. Each photon is of definite energy which does not change with the change in intensity of light. Using this concept all the alternatives (1), (2) and (3) can be understood easily. i LL. Q oc n C 48. ( b ) : T„ = 1/n vn vn Here, y 20 V f or, Hi . 2 — n2
V_ V1 V : /?] — — = — and R2 = 100 25 V Current, / = R, +R, (F 2 /25) + (f / 2 /100) Power in 25 W bulb = PR, = 20 K
49. (d): Semiconducting devices are current dependent and temperature dependent as electrical conductivity of semiconductor increases with increase in temperature. 50. (c) : The width of depletion zone of an unbiased pn junction is dependent of densities of the dopants. The electric field in the zone is produced due to ionized dopant atoms.
x — = 16 W 25
X = 4 W
20 Power in 100 W bulb = Z2/?, =  — I K 40. (a)
•
41. (d) : When a clockwise current carrying coil is placed in a perpendicular uniform magnetic field, there is no net force on the ring and ring will tend to expand as the direction of force on every part of the ring is acting outwards. 42. (b): The liquid level rises in case of paramagnetic and ferromagnetic liquids, as they tend to move from weaker parts to stronger parts of the field. 43. (d) : As e = diSfldt, therefore, if < = 0, e = 0, However, > j e can be zero, when () = constant £ 0. If e ? 0, d§ldt it 0, <) may not be zero. ] 44. (a) : The equation 1 and 3 are related to source of electric field and equation 2 with source of magnetic field. 45. (a) : When light of different colours move through water, they have different wavelengths, different velocities and different amplitude. 46. (d): For light travelling from bird (rarer medium) to fish (denser medium), n, = 1 and ~ u' ' refractive index of water. 58 f
&
®
EXPLORER
Available at leading bookshops throughout India.
M T G BOOKS
NewDclhi"29
BHU
WttG
Mh
503, Taj Apt., Ring Road, Near Safdarjung Hospital, Tel: 26194317, 26191C01
BOOKS
email: info@mtg.in website: www.mtgjn
Rs. 200 Pages. 960
('ontd. from page no. 26 (b) The maximum energy of the photon in the radiation is given by E = hvt Now A.. E = hc K = 0.45 A = 0.45x10" 10 m
Let v be the speed of the bob when it is at the point O. Then we have j m v 2 = 19.012 m ; v2 = 19.012 x 2
„ v = Vl9.012x2 = 6.166 ms  i (b) The rise in temperature of water is A0 = [(41 ± 0.1)  (16 ± 0.5)]°C = [(41  16) ± (0.1 + 0.5)]°C = 25 ± 0.6°C The logic of this again becomes clear if we note that. Final temperature is anywhere between (40.9 and 41.1 )°C and initial temperature is anywhere between (15.5 and 16.5). The rise is therefore between (40.9  16.5) and (41.1  15.5) or between 24.4°C and 25.6°C. This is just the range indicated by the above equation of the temperature rise.
6.6 x 10~34 x 3 x 108 0.45xt0l° 6.6x 1Q~34 x3xlQ 8 eV or E = 0.45 xlO~ l o x 1.6 xl0~ l<) = 27.6 x io 3 eV = 27.6 keV The accelerating voltage for electrons to produce Xrays in the Xray tube is 27.6 keV. (c) For a semiconductor, the valence band is totally filled and the conduction band is empty at absolute zero temperature. But the forbidden gap between conduction band and valence band is quite small for semiconductor. For example, it is only 0.72 eV for germanium and 1.1 eV for silicon. Near absolute zero, the electrons cannot cross even this small forbidden gap. But as the temperature is increased, more and more number of electrons in the valence band acquire thermal energy to cross the forbidden gap and move to the conduction band where they can move under the action of even small electric field. Hence the conductivity of semiconductor increases with increase in temperature. 6. (a) Heat absorbed by the system in going from state A to state B. = 9.35 calorie = 9.35 x 4.19 J = 39.18 J Also, total work done on the system in going from state A to state B = 22.3 J. Net work done by the system in the process = (39.18  22.3) J = 16.88 J = 16.9 J. (b) The land is more quickly heated or cooled than seawater because specific heat of land is less than that of seawater. So during the day time the land becomes more heated and lighter than the air over seawater. As a result, lighter hot air on land rises up, and to maintain an equilibrium in pressure, cooler air over the sea flows towards the land. The flow of air from the sea to the land during day time is known as seabreeze. Thus the higher specific heat of water causes the seabreeze. 7. (a) The potenital energy gained by the bob of the pendulum in the position PR = mgh where w is the mass ofthe bob. Gain in potential energy o f t h e bob = m x 9.8 x 2 = 19.6 m. Since 3% of the initial energy is dissipated against air resistance the energy possessed by bob when passing 97 across point O is = 1 9  6 / w x "[QO = 1 9 0 1 2 m 7Q
(a) Given y =  y f 2 +16/ + 2. J 1 2 Comparing it with s = ut + —at , we have 8. m= 16ms i 1 J a 2 4  2 and y  " J or a =  y ms .
For a body to come to rest, the final velocity v = 0, using these values => v = u + at => 0 = 16 — 4 / j or / = 12 s. (b) The coefficient of friction and hence the frictional force between the surfaces of same material is greater than that in case of dissimilar material surfaces. So to reduce the frictional force, machine bearings are made of one metal while their rotating shafts are made of a different material. (c) 1 =R ."1 "2. for Balmer series «, = 2 for longest wavelength n2 = 3 1 = X 5R 36  = 910 A
2 2
X = — x —= —x910 A = 6552 A 5 R 5 for shortest wavelength, n2=<x>
1=VI
x u
= 3640 A .
\_ 1 — 9. (a) Let / be the current drawn. The total power drawn from the d.c. source is then £/' out of which a part i2r gets dissipated (as heat) in the internal resistance of the source. The power output, P, of the source is then P = ei  rr We want P to be a maximum. For this we must have
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MAY 06 7
=> >, = 4 = 4x910 A R
dP dP = s x 1  r x 2i = 8  2ri = 0. Now, di di dP t Thus — — 0 when / = 2trdi Thus the power output of the source is maximum when the current drawn is e/2r. (b) If v is the drift speed of electrons, the current I is I = Anev ...(i) where n is number of free electrons per unit volume. To obtain n we note that it is equal to number of atoms per unit volume because there is one free electron per atom. The number of atoms per unit volume is obtained from the fact that Avogadro number of atoms constitutes onegram mol. of material. Therefore Np 6.02 x 10 x f .92 x 10 or M 63.5x10" LP J •••(ii) = 8.5x 1028 atom/m 3 From equations (i) and (ii) 5_ = 1.2 x lO^ms" 3x 10~6 x 1.6x10" (c) Let the magnet NS of pole strength m be held vertically with its north pole A' resting on 4 cm a horizontal table. P is a point on the table such that PN = 3 cm (figure). The intensity at P due to the /Vpole of the magnet is given by / / = ni/32 in the direction as shown in the figure. The intensity at P due to the Spole of the magnet is Now, PS = PN2 + NS2 = 3 2 + 4 2 = 25 .. H2 = m/25 along PS 3 m The horizontal component of H2 is H2 cos 0 = — x ~
23
10. (a) The speed of sound in a gaseous medium is inversely proportional to the square root of its density i.e. v oc ^1/p. Now, the density of watervapour is less than air and so the density of moist air (air mixed with water vapour) is less than the density of dry air. Hence the speed of sound is greater in moist air than in dry air. But the density of hydrogen is less than the density of water vapour and hence the density of moist hydrogen is more than the density of dry hydrogen. So the speed of sound in moist hydrogen will be less than in dry hydrogen. speed of light in vacuum (b) Mgiass  S peed of light in glass 1.5 = x 10s speed of light in glass 3 x 10s ms "' = 2 x 10s ms"1.
J
Speed of light in glass =
(c) Yes. The image formed will still be of full size. The ray diagram showing the formation of image is as shown in figure. It may be pointed out that the intensity of the image will be lesser, when the lower half of the lens is painted black. It is because, light gathering power of a lens depends upon its diameter.
CBSEPMT
EXPLORER
MODEL TEST PAPERS PRACTICE PAPERS
W1bG
MAINS 1
PS [ascos0=—
3   ]
For P to be a neutral point, we must have //;  H2 cos 0 = H [H = Horizontal component of earth's magnetic field] m m
X
uBstnvi 1 CBSEPWiT
SainS
j 5 = 0.2 or 3
9 ~ 25 or m\
[ 7 H= 0.2] m= 225 unit
(
98 Therefore, the moment of the magnet is M = pole strength x length of the magnet 225 = — X 4 = 9.2 unit, vo
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O l i  MAY 06
9
125
2 YEARS SOLVED PAPERS
Available at leading b o o k s h o p s
71
• 1. Find the resultant of three vectors OA, OB and QC shown in the following figure. Radius of the circle is R. (a) 2R (b) R(l + S ) (c) Ry/2 2.
H
H
H
H
H
I

H H
(d)
R(J21) 6.
A horizontal force of 10 N is necessary to just hold a block stationary against a wall. The coefficient of friction between the block and the wall is 0.2. the weight of the block is (a) 2 N (b) 20 N (c) 50 N
(d) 100 N
Radius of the curved road on national highway is R. Width of the road is b. The outer edge of the road is raised by h with respect to inner edge so that a car with velocity v can pass safe over it. The value of h is (a) v2b Rg (b) v Rgb (c)
V2R
A block is kept on an inclined plane of inclination 0 of length I. The velocity of particle at the bottom of incline is (the coefficient of friction is p.) (a) ^ 2 g / (  i c o s 9  s i n 0) (b) ^ g / f s i n O  j i c o s G ) (c) ^/2g/(sin0 + icos8) (d) yj2gl(cosd + \isinQ)
8
vlb_ (d) R —
7.
3.
A particle originally at rest at the highest point of a smooth vertical circle is slightly displaced. It will leave the circle at a vertical distance h below the highest point such that (a) h = R (b) h = j R (C) h = ~
1
A concave mirror is used to focus the image of a flower on a nearby well 120 cm from the flower. If a lateral magnification of 16 is desired, the distance of the flower from the mirror should be (a) 8 cm (b) 12 cm (c) 80 cm (d) 120 cm I m m i s c i b l e transparent liquids .. .1.51 A,B,C,D and E are B 1.53 placed in a rectangular C 1.62 container of glass with 1.52 the liquids making 1.66 E layers according to their densities. The refractive index of the liquids are shown in the adjoining diagram. The container is illuminated from the side and a small piece of glass having refractive index 1.61 is gently dropped into the liquid layer. The glass piece as it descends downwards will not be visible in (a) Liquid A and B only (b) Liquid C only (c) Liquid D and E orily (d) Liquid A, B, D and E
(d)h
=
A particle of mass m, I o initially at rest, is £ IX, acted upon by a variable force F for a H \ brief interval of time < i T. It begins to move 0 T Time with a velocity u after the force stops acting. F is shown in the graph as a function of time. The curve is a semicircle* n2 KT (a) u = (b) U = 2m ^ F0T nF0T (c) u = (d) u = Am 2m
T
2R
\
9.
On a glass plate a light wave is incident at an angle of 60°. If the reflected and the refracted waves are mutually perpendicular, the refractive index of material is
Momentum, 1495, Near Stadium, Wright Town, Jabaipur (M.P.) Phone : (0761) 4005358, 4035241 Website : www.momentumacademy.com, email : momentumacademy@gmail.com
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
(a)
T
73
(b)
^
co ^
3
(o
1
s
(c) 6.25 x 10'3 tesla in z direction (d) 103 tesla in z direction A metallic ring connected to a rod oscillates freely like a pendulum. If now a magnetic field is applied in horizontal direction so that the pendulum now swings through the field, the pendulum will (a) keep oscillating with the old time period (b) keep oscillating with a smaller time period (c) keep oscillating with a larger time period (d) come to rest very soon In a magnetic field of 0.05 T, area of a coil changes from 101 cm 2 to 100 cm 2 without changing the resistance which is 2 £2. The amount of charge that flow during this period is (a) 2.5 x IO"6 coulomb (b) 2 x IO"6 coulomb (c) 10"6 coulomb (d) 8 x IO"6 coulomb A generator produces a voltage that is given by V= 240sinl20f, where t is in seconds. The frequency and rms voltage are (a) 60 Hz and 240 V (b) 19 Hz and 120 V (c) 19 Hz and 170 V (d) 754 Hz and 70 V Which of the following is wrong statement? (a) An emf can be induced between the ends of a straight conductor by moving it through a uniform magnetic field. (b) The self induced emf produced by changing current in a coil always tends to decrease the current. (c) Inserting an iron core in a coil increases its coefficient of self induction. (d) According to Lenz's law the direction of the induced current is such that it opposes the flux change that causes it. 20. The adjoining figure shows two bulbs Bl and B2 resistor R and an inductor L. When the switch S is turned off (a) both B l and S 2 die out promptly (b) both Bl and B2 die out with some delay (c) Bl dies out promptly but B2 with some delay (d) B2 dies out promptly but B{ with some delay
The wavelength of sodium light in air is 5890 A . The velocity of light in air is 3 x 108 ms 1 . The wavelength of light in a glass of refractive index 1.6 would be close to (a) 5890 A (b) 3681 A (c) 9424 A (d) 15078 A Which of the following statements is correct? (a) In vacuum, the speed of light depends upon frequency. (b) In vacuum, the speed of light does not depend upon frequency. (c) In vacuum, the speed of light is independent of frequency and wavelength. (d) In vacuum, the speed of light depends upon wavelength. Glass has refractive index p with respect to air and the critical angle for a ray of light going from glass to air is 0. If a ray of light is incident from air on the glass with angle of incidence 0, the corresponding angle of refraction is \ 1 (b) 90° (a) (c) sin T (d)
3. Two lenses have focal lengths / and / and their dispersive powers are a>l and co2 respectively. They will together form an achromatic combination if (a) oij/j = (b) (Mj/j + cOJ/J = 0 ( 0 tOj+Z, = co2 + / 2 (d) cOJZJ = co 2 / 2 4. If x is the distance of an object from the focus of a concave mirror and y is the distance of image from the focus, then which of the following graphs is correct between x and y ?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
If a particle of charge 10~12 coulomb moving along the xdirection with a velocity 10s m/s experiences a force of 1010 newton in ydirection due to magnetic field, then the minimum magnetic field is (a) 6.25 x 103 tesla in z direction (b) 1015 tesla in z direction 16
PHYSICS FOR YOU I JANUARY '08
The focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece of a compound microscope are 2.0 cm and 3.0 cm respectively. The distance between the objective and the eyepiece is 15.0 cm. The final image formed by the eyepiece is at infinity. The two lenses are thin. The distances in cm of the object and the image produced by the objective measured from the objective lens are respectively (a) 2.4 and 12.0 (b) 2.4 and 15.0 (c) 2.3 and 12.0 (d) 2.3 and 3.0 A hollow double concave lens is made of very thin transparent material. It can be filled with air or either of two liquids Ll and L2 having refractive indices w, and n2 respectively (n2 > nl > 1). The lens will diverge a parallel beam of light if it is filled with (a) Air and placed in air (b) Air and immersed in L} (c) Lj and immersed in L2 (d) L, and immersed in L, Velocity time (vr) graph for a moving object is shown in the figure. Total displacement of the object during the time interval when there is nonzero acceleration and retardation is (a) 60 m (b) 50 m (c) 30 m (d) 40 m In the circuit shown, a X 6n meter bridge is in its •^W^— balanced state. The 60 cm 40 cm meter bridge wire has a resistance 0.1 ohm/cm. The value 5V 1 of unknown resistance X and the current drawn from the battery of negligible resistance is (a) 6 Q, 5 amp (b) 10 Q, 0.1 amp (c) 4 Q, 1.0 amp (d) 12 £2, 0.5 amp Two ions having masses in the ratio 1 : 1 and charges 1 : 2 are projected into uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the field with speeds in the ratio 2 : 3. The ratio of the radii of circular paths along which the two particles move is (a) 4 : 3 (b) 2 : 3 (c) 3 : 1 (d) 1 : 4 A straight wire carrying a current il amp runs along the axis of circular current i2 amp. Then the force of interaction between the two current carrying conductors is (a) oo (b) zero
N/m (d) ^ r A solenoid has 2000 turns wound over a length of 0.30 metre. The area of its crosssection is 1.2 x IO3 m2. Around its central section, a coil of 300 turns is wound. If an initial current of 2 A in the solenoid is reversed in 0.25 sec, then the emf induced in the coil is (a) 6 x 104 V (b) 4.8 x 10"3 V 2 (c) 6 x IO" V (d) 48 mV A closely wound coil of 100 turns and area of crosssection 1 cm 2 has a coefficient of selfinduction 1 mH. The magnetic induction in the centre of the core of the coil when a current of 2 A flows in it, will be (a) 0.022 Wbm" 2 (b) 0.4 Wb nr 2 2 (c) 0.8Wbm" (d) l W b n r 2
K
'
4JI
The coil of dynamo is rotating in a magnetic field. The developed induced emf changes and the number of magnetic lines of force also changes. Which of the following condition is correct? (a) Lines of force minimum but induced emf is zero. (b) Lines of force maximum but induced emf is zero. (c) Lines of force maximum but induced emf is not zero. (d) Lines of force maximum but induced emf is also maximum. An alternating current is given by the equation i = il cos a t + i2 sin cot. The r.m.s. current is given by (a) (o
1
(b)
1
V2
ih+h?
^ ( M )
'
2
(d)
<M)"
Seven resistors, each of 1 Q, are connected as shown in the figure. The effective resistance between A and B is (a) 1 q 3 (c) 7 Q 32 Sixteen resistors each of resistance 16 Q are connected in the circuit as shown. The net resistance between AB is (a) 1 Q (b) 2 Q
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
(b)
2
(c) 3£2 33. If the current flowing through the 3 Q resistor is 0.8 A, the potential drop across the 4 £2 resistor is (a) 1.6V (b) 2.4V (c) 4.8V (d) 9.6V
(d) 4 Q
(d) Pm (M + m) M+m The work done in increasing the voltage across the plates of a capacitor from 5 V to 10 V is W. The work done in increasing the voltage from 10 V to 15 V will be 4W 5W (a) W (b) — (c) — (d) 2W (c) 41. The radii of two spheres forming a spherical condenser are 0.5 m and 0.6 m. If a medium of dielectric constant 6 is completely filled in between, the capacity of the condenser will be (a) 3.3 x IO10 F (b) 2 x l O " 9 F (c) 2 F (d) 18 F 42. A charge Q is divided into two parts and the two parts are separated by a certain distance. The force between them will be maximum if one of the charges is (a) (c) 4.
Pm
34. The effective resistance between points P and Q of the electrical circuit shown in figure is 2 Rr (a) R + r \ 2 R 8 R(R + r) r ' r (b) 3 R+r (c) 2r + 4R \lR vvw— 5R 28 28 (d) 2 ' 2r The speed of a projectile u reduces by 50% on reaching maximum height. The range on the horizontal plane is (a) 2 u2 3g (b) (c) Su2 2g 3u2 (d) g
f
(b)
Q 3
Q 4
(d) none of these
36. One second after the projection, a stone moves at an angle of 45° with the horizontal. Two seconds from the start, it is travelling horizontally. Its angle of projection with the horizontal is (given g = 10 ms2) (a) 60° (b) tan"1(4) (c) tan"'(3) (d) tan"!(2) A projectile can have the same range R for the two angles of projection. If t1 and t2 be the time of flight in two cases, then what is the product of two times of flight ? R (a) J_ ' R A weight of 1kg is suspended as shown in figure. The tension in the horizontal cord will be (a) 0.5 kg wt (b) 52 kg wt (c) 1.0 kg wt (c) r/2<
Electric charges q, q and  2 q are placed at the three corners of an equilateral triangle of side I. The magnitude of the electric dipole moment of the system is (a) ql (b) 2ql (c) Sql (d) 4ql Two circulai coils have number of turns in the ratio 1 : 2 and radii in the ratio 2 : 1. If the same current flows through them, the magnetic fields at their centres will be in the ratio (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 4 Force between two long straight parallel currentcarrying wires is F. If the current in one of them is doubled, the force between them will be (a) 2F (b) ^ F (c) 2V2F (d) 4F If a current 7 = / 0 sin flows in a circuit
38.
2 kg wt A block of mass M is pulled along a horizontal frictionless surface by a rope of mass m by applying a force P at one end of the rope. The force which the rope exerts on the block is (a) P
Ta
Mm
Z
(b)
PM M+m
across which an alternating potential E = E0 sin m has been applied, then the power consumed in the circuit is EI (b) (d) zero (a) (C) S T2 A current of 2 A flowing through a coil of 100 turns gives rise to a magnetic flux of 5 x 10 5 Wb per turn. The magnetic energy associated with the coil is (a) 5 J (b) 0.5 J (c) 0.05 J (d) 0.005 J
T
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
A vessel of depth d is half filled with a liquid of refractive index n, and the other half is filled with a liquid of refractive index ju,2. The apparent depth of the vessel, when looked at normally, is (a) d (fx, + n2) (c)  r ( f c +  i 2 ) (b) d (d)
— —
Which of the following overlap of orbitals is/are incorrect ? L 0 • © — ©
n. ©0+GXD—
Hi ' 1
— +
H2 1
—
Hi H: 49, A man standing in a swimming pool looks at a stone lying at the bottom. The depth of the swimming pool is h. At what distance from the surface of water is the image of the stone formed Line of vision is normal. Refractive index of water is n h n (d) hn (a) (b) (c) h 50. For two positions of a lens, the images are obtained on a fixed screen. If the size of object is 2 cm and the size of diminished image is 0.5 cm, the size of the other image will be (a) 1 cm (b) 4 cm (c) 8 cm (d) 16 cm IMi The minimum value of n for which g subshell is possible is (a) 6 (b) 5 (c) 4 (d) 3 The charge to mass ratio of a particles is approximately the charge to mass ratio of protons (a) twice (b) half (c) four times (d) six times The number of spherical nodes in 3p subshell is (a) three (b) two (c) one (d) zero Which of the following sets of elements would have the lowest first ionisation energy (/£,)? (a) Mg (b) Rb (c) Li (d) Ca Beryllium has diagonal relationship with (a) Li (b) B (c) Na (d) A1 The size of the following species increases in the order (a) Mg2+ < Na+ < F" < A1 (b) F <A1< Na+ < Mg2+ (c) A1 < Mg2+ < F~ < Na+ (d) Na + < A1 < F" < Mg2+ The inability of N to form NC15 is due to (a) nonavailability of vacant d orbital in valence shell of N (b) high ionisation energy of N (c) low electron affinity of N (d) small size of N atom.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '0
(a) I, III (b) II, III BC13 is a planar molecule boron is (a) sp3 hybridised (c) sp hybridised
(c) III, IV (d) I, IV because in this molecule (b) s/r hybridised (d) unhybridised
Dehydration of sucrose, C 12 H 22 O n by concentrated H 2 S0 4 gives purest form of carbon. The amount of carbon which can be obtained from 34.2 g of sucrose is (a) 14.4 g (b) 12 g atom (c) 3.2 g atom (d) 14.4 g atom In the reaction, 2Na 2 S 2 0 3 + I 2 Na 2 S 4 0 6 + 2NaI, the equivalent mass of 2Na 2 S 2 0 3 (Mol. Mass = M) is (a) M (b) Ml2 (c) MB (d) M/4 An endothermic reaction, A — 5, has an activation » energy as x kJ mo!"1 of A. If energy change of the reaction is y kJ, the activation energy of reverse reaction is (a)  x (b) xy (c) x + y (d) yx The rate constant for a first order reaction is 1 x IO2 s_1. The concentration of the reactants would be reduced from 1 mole to 0.25 mole in (a) 102 sec (b) 69.3 sec (c) 0.5 x 102 sec (d) 138.6 sec Ratio t n / Jt m for a first order reaction would be equal to (a) 7 (b) 2 (c) 8 (d) 3 Vapour density of PC15 is 104.16 but when heated to 230°C its vapour density is reduced to 62. The degree of dissociation of PC15 at this temperature will be (a) 6.8% (b) 68% (c) 46% (d) 64% For an elementary reaction, the specific rate constants for forward and reverse reactions are 0.50 and 5 x 104 respectively. The equilibrium constant for the reaction would be (a) 2.5 x 103 (b) 2.5 x 104 5 (c) 1 x IO' (d) 1 x 10s The weakest base among the following is (a) H~ (b) CHj(c) CH 3 0 (d) Cl"
The concentration of [H+] and concentration of [OH ] of a 0.1 M aqueous solution of 2% ionised weak acid is [ionic product of water = 1 x IO14] (a) 0.02 x 10 3 M and 5 x 10"11 M (b) 1 x 10"3 M and 3 x 10"u M (c) 2 x IO 3 M and 5 x IO"12 M (d) 3 x l 0 2 M a n d 4 x l 0  1 3 M The molal elevation constant of a liquid is the ratio of elevation in boiling point to (a) molality (b) normality (c) molarity (d) mole fraction of solvent 70. Osmotic pressure of 30% solution of glucose is 1.20 bar and that of 3.42 % solution of cane sugar is 2.5 bar. The osmotic pressure of the mixture containing equal volumes of the two solutions will be (a) 2.5 atm (b) 3.7 atm (c) 1.85 atm. (d) 1.3 atm. 71. Determination of correct molecular mass by measuring colligative property applies to (a) an electrolyte in solution (b) an nonelectrolyte in dilute solution (c) a volatile solute (d) an electrolyte in concentrated solution. The molecular velocities of two gases at same temperature are ui and u2. Their masses are m] and m2 respectively, which of the following expression is correct ? (b) mlul  m2u2 (c) m,u2 = m2u1 (d) MjjW2 = m2u2 73. 1.12 x 10 cc of 0 2 at S.T.P. contains molecules equal to (a) 3.10 xlO 1 2 (b) 3.01 x IO20 24 (c) 3.01 x 10 (d) 3.01 x 1023 74. The unit cell belongs to which of the following type (a) Primitive cubic (b) End centred cubic (c) Body centred cubic (d) Face centred cubic 75. The site occupied by the anion A~ in the crystal lattice is (a) triangular hole (b) cubical hole (c) tetrahedral hole (d) octahedral hole 76. The value of AH for the process I(?) + e~(g) —> I (s) (a) > 0 (b) < 0 (c) > 0 (d) < 0 Enthalpy of neutralisation of acetic acid with KOH will be numerically (a) = 57.1 kJ (b) > 57.1 kJ (c) <57.1 kJ (d) unpredictable.
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
78. In which of the following process entropy increases? I. Rusting of iron II. Vaporisation of camphor III. Crystallisation of sugar from syrup IV. Atomisation of dihydrogen. (a) I, II (b) II, III (c) I, IV (d) Only IV 79. The heat evolved during the combustion of 46 g ethanol in a bomb calorimeter was determined to be 670.48 kcal m o l 1 at 25°C. The value of AE of the reaction at the same temperature is (a)  3 3 5 . 2 4 kcal (b)  6 6 9 . 2 8 kcal (c)  670.48 kcal (d)  280.26 x 104 kcal 80. The values of E\ ZnlZn 2+ =  0.76 V and that of „ E?re 2 Ite =  0.41 V. The £° cell of the cell with net cell + ,, P reaction Zn + Fe2+ Zn2+ + Fe is (a)  0 . 3 5 V (b)  1 . 1 7 V (c)  1 . 1 7 V (d) + 0.35 V 81. In the diagram given below the value of X is
Cu 0.15 V E° Cu+ + 0.50 V •Cu
= X volt
(a) 0.325 V (c)  0 . 3 5 V
(b) 0.65 V (d)  0 . 6 5 V
82. The molar ionic conductance at infinite dilution of Ag+ is 61.92 x 10 4 S m o l 1 m2 at 25°C. The ionic mobility of Ag+ will be (a) 6.4 xlO" 8 (b) 6.192 (c) 6.192 xlO" 4 (d) 3 . 2 x 1 0 ^ 83. For the cell reaction to be spontaneous (a) £°cell > 0 (b) E°cell < 0 (c) AG > 0 (d) AG = 0 84. Which statement about Na„S 4 6 is correct ? ,0, 2 (a) O.N. of all atoms is 2.5 (b) Two S atoms have O.N. +2 while other two have O.N. +3 (c) Three S atoms have O.N. +3 while the fourth S atoms has O.N. +4 (d) Two S atoms have O.N. +5 while, the other two S atoms have 0,N.=0 85. In the following half reaction, C 2 0 2 " the value of x is (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 86. In the reaction, 2 H 2 0 2 + 2CIO 2 + 20H~ » 2C1" + 5 0 2 + 6H 2 O t the substance oxidised is (a) H,0 2 (b) C102 2C0 2 + xe~ (d) 4
!
(c) OH
(d) unpredictable.
(c) 4.8 x 1010
(d) zero
One mole of N.H . loses 10 moles of electrons to form a new compound Y. Assuming that all nitrogen appears in the new compound, the oxidation state of nitrogen in the new compound will be (a) + 3 (b) + 5 (c)  1 (d)  3 . 88. xl2 + yS02 + ZH 2 0 — aSO 2 + bV + cH + . > The values of z, b, c are respectively (a) 1, 1 , 2 (b) 2 , 2 , 4 (c) 1 , 2 , 4 (d) 2 , 4 , 2 Migration of colloidal particles under the effect of an electric field is known as (a) electroosmosis (b) electrophoresis (c) electrodialysis (d) dialysis. Which of the following statement is true for physical adsorption ? (a) It is also known as Langmuir adsorption (b) Heat of adsorption is about 100 kJ mol 1 (c) Extent of adsorption increases with increase in temperature (d) It is not specific. The Rubin number which was proposed by Ostwald as an alternative to the Gold number in order to measure the protective efficiency of a lyophilic colloid may be defined as the (a) mass in milligrams of a colloid per 100 c.c. of solution which just prevents the colour change of standard sol of dye CongoRubin from red to violet when 0.16 g eq. KC1 is added to it. (b) mass in grams of a colloid per 100 c.c. of solution which just prevents the colour change of standard sol of dye CongoRubin from red to violet when 0.1 M KC1 is added to it. (c) mass in grams of a colloid per 100 c.c. of solution which just prevents the colour change of standard sol of dye CongoRubin from red to violet when 0.2 M KC1 is added to it. (d) mass in grams of a colloid per 100 c.c. of solution which just prevents the colour change of standard sol of dye CongoRubin from red to violet when 1 M KC1 is added to it. Which one of the following will have the highest coagulating power for a f e m e hydroxide sol ? (a) NaCl (b) BaCl 2 (c) K_,Cr04 (d) K,[Fe(CN) 6 ] 93. Radium has atomic weight 226 and a halflife of 1600 years. The number of disintegrations produced per second from 1 g are 3.7 x 1010 (a) 4.8 x 1010 (b) 9.2 x 106
PHYSICS FOR YOU I JANUARY '08
The activity of a radioactive nuclide (X100) is 6.023 curie. If its disintegration constant is 3.7 x 104 sec1, the mass of X is (a) IO3 g (b) IO15 g (c) IO"6 g (d) 10~14g 95 The decay constant of a radioactive sample is X. The halflife and mean life of the sample are respectively. 1 ln2 1 i 2 (a) — ,ln — (b) X X T'l
(c) Mn2,i
(d)
x
i
\n2'X
Which of the following pairs of ions when mixed in dilute solutions may give precipitate ? (a) (c) Na + ,S0 4 Na+,S2~ (b) NH;,CO23+ (d) Fe ,PO
An aqueous solution of 6.3 g oxalic acid dehydrate is made up to 250 ml. The volume of 0.1N NaOH required to completely neutralize 10 ml of this solution is (a) 40 ml (b) 20 ml (c) 10 ml (d) 4 ml
The ligand shown here is
:o$o;
N N"
(a) tridentate (b) 1,10phenanthroline (c) 1,10 phenanthrine (d) 2,2dipyridyl. Which of the following complex will give white precipitate with barium chloride solution ? (a) [Cr(NH 3 ) 5 Cl]S0 4 (b) [Cr(NH 3 )S0 4 ]Cl (c) [CO(NH,) 6 ]Br 3 (d) None of these Three arrangements have been shown for the complex cation bis(ethylenediamine)dinitro cobalt (III). Which of the following is incorrect ?
2
N02 III
(a) (b) (c) (d)
I and III are geometrical isomers II and III are geometrical isomers I and II are geometrical isomers II and III are optical isomers
alkr tfitf
Which of the following is a true sequence? (a) observation, hypothesis, experiment, theory (b) observation, hypothesis, theory, experiment (c) theory, hypothesis, observation, experiment (d) experiment, hypothesis, theory, observation. Who coined the term taxonomy ? (a) Waksman (b) A.P. decandole (c) Leuwenhoek (d) Louis Pasteur Kalpvriksha is the name of (a) banyan tree (b) peepal tree (c) coconut tree (d) palm tree In the book Historia Naturalis about 1000 medicinal plants were described which was written by (a) Pliny (b) Linnaeus (c) Caesalpino (d) Tippo The term phylum in taxonomy was given by (a) C. Linnaeus (b) G.L. Cuvier (c) John Ray (d) E.H. Haeckel Taxon is (a) species (b) unit of classification (c) highest rank in classification (d) group of closely related families Viroids have (a) single stranded RNA not enclosed by protein coat (b) single stranded DNA not enclosed by protein coat (c) double stranded DNA enclosed by protein coat (d) double stranded RNA enclosed by protein coat Yersinia pestis is causative agent of (a) syphilis (b) leprosy (c) whooping cough (d) plague 10' In plant, Citrus canker is caused by (a) virus (b) algae (c) fungus (d) bacterium fit Agaragar which is commonly used in microbiological studies and culture media is obtained from (a) Gelidium (b) Laminaria (c) Polysiphonia (d) Batrachospermum Dinoflagellates are considered connecting link between Monera and Protista because (a) they spin while they move (b) they have flagella in grooves (c) they show bioluminescence (d) they have condensed chromosomes lacking histone proteins. Red rust of tea is caused by
PHYSICS FOR YOU I JANUARY '08
(a) Puccinia (c) both (a) and (b)
(b) Cephaleuros (d) none of these
Pteridophytes differ from bryophytes in having (a) vascular tissues (b) archegonia (c) motile antherozoids (d) alternation of generation i 14 If the number of chromosome in nucellus is 48 then what will be the number of chromosome in endosperm of Ephedra ? (a) 48 (b) 72 (c) 24 (d) 96 In active nonosmotic absorption of water the OP of the cell sap of root hairs is than/to OP of the soil water (a) higher (b) lower (c) both (a) and (b) (d) equal 116 The role which can be assigned to plasma membrane is (a) it gives passage to water (b) it gives passage to solutes and water (c) it gives passage to water and solutes only into the cell (d) it helps in movement of cell contents out of the cell. 117 The osmotic potential is denoted by (a) (b) AT (c) (d) Ws
118 Loss of water from the tips of leaves is called (a) guttation (b) transpiration (c) respiration (d) bleeding 119 Rate of transpiration can be measured by (a) Ganong's potometer (b) porometer (c) auxanometer (d) respirometer ] 2(J The element which is not of much importance to plants is (a) Ca (b) Zn (c) Cu (d) Na. Nonsymbiotic anaerobic nitrogen fixation bacteria is (a) Azotobacter (b) Frankia (c) Clostridium (d) Azolla 122.1n one of the following plant types both PEP carboxylase and RuBP carboxylase are present in the cell chloroplast (a) CAM (b) C 4 (c) C 3 (d) CAM and C 4 123 .Rubisco protein comprise % of total chloro plast (a) 4 (b) 40 (c) 16 (d) 20 124 Who of the following proposed photoperiodism ? (a) Garner and Allard (b) Darwin (c) Lysenko (d) Arnon contd. on page no. 86
6 } o + 0 ?acj<t $ 6 , d i ^ e c t i y
q f W l t y
Model Test Paper CBSEPMT 2008
O 125 Which of the following is incorrect statement? (a) C4 plants also show C2 cycle (b) C, plants respire in presence of light (c) C4 plants also exhibit Calvin cycle (d) C3 plants lack Hatch Slack pathway 126 At which step C0 2 joins photosynthesis? (a) first step of light reaction (b) last phase of light reaction (c) first step of photophosphorylation (d) dark phase or the first step of Calvin cycle. Which of the following provides energy to ETS by absorption of sunlight ? (a) chlorophyll (b) mitochondria (c) ATP (d) water i 28,In sugarcane plant C0 2 is fixed in malic acid, in which the enzyme that fixes C0 2 is (a) ribulose biphosphate carboxylase (b) phosphenol pyruvic acid carboxylase (c) ribose phosphate kinase (d) fructose phosphatase Electron acceptor in PS II is (a) FRS (b) PQ (c) cytb (d) Fe J 30. Succulent plants have respiratory quotient less than one because of (a) complete oxidation (b) complete reduction (c) incomplete oxidation (d) incomplete reduction Vinegar is synthesized from alcohol by (a) Mycobacterium aceti (b) Acetobacter aceti (c) Lactobacillus (d) both (a) and (b) 132 Which of the following cells do not respire? (a) cortical cells (b) epidermal cells (c) RBC (d) xylem cells 133 The respiratory enzymes in the aerobic bacteria are located mainly in (a) liposomes (b) mitochondria (c) chondrioids (d) polysomes How many ATP molecules are formed in ETS from the reduced nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide generated in one cycle of Krebs cycles ? (a) 3 (b) 6 (c) 9 (d) 12 Pyruvic acid enters TCA in the form of (a) OAA (b) malic acid (c) Acetyl CoA (d) citric acid f 36. Acetyl CoA is synthesized in (a) cytosol 16
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
Contd. from page no. 26
(b) inner membrane of mitochondria (c) matrix of mitochondria (d) Fi particles of mitochondria 137 Female gametophyte of angiospermic plants is represented by (a) oospore (b) embryosac (c) carpel (d) pollen grain 138 Pollen grains are not green but yellow because (a) plastids are absent (b) plastid chloroplast changes to chromoplast (c) they degenerates at the time when pollen grains shed (d) for attraction of vectors. 139,Pollen grains are able to withstand extremes of temperature and dessication because their exine is composed of (a) cutin (b) suberin (c) sporopollenin (d) callose 140 In Casuarina fertilization occurs by (a) chalazogamy (b) mesogamy (c) porogamy (d) apogamy The formation of embryo sac is called (a) megasporogenesis (b) megagametogenesis (c) microgametogenesis (d) none of these 142. A type of pollination in which flower remains closed is (a) dicliny (b) chasmogamous (c) dichogamous (d) none of these 143.Pollination in Vallisneria is by (a) wind (b) animals (c) insects (d) water 144.Growth is maximum in the zone of (a) cell division (b) cell elongation (c) cell maturation (d) all of these. l45,Skoog and Miller are associated with discovery of (a) cytokinin (b) auxin (c) gibberellin (d) both (a) and (c) 146.The growth hormones responsible for bolting, are (a) auxins (D) kinetins (c) coumarins (d) gibberellins 14 Most of the plant's auxin occurs in (a) leaves (b) lateral buds (c) shoot apex (d) root apical meristem 148. The level of which of the following increases during water stress? (a) ethylene (b) abscisic acid (c) indole3acetic acid (d) gibberellins Genetical dwarfness can be overcome by treating it with
(a) auxins (c) antigibberellins 150 Abscisic acid causes (a) faster leaf fall (c) dormancy of tuber
(b) gibberellins (d) ethylene. (b) retardation of growth (d) all of these
immediately after the start of ventricular systole. (c) Purkinje fibresinitiation of heart beat. (d) Pulsation of radial'arteryvalves in blood vessels. 160A portal system is one in which (a) a vein starts from an organ and ends up in heart (b) a vein starts from an organ and ends up in another organ (c) a vein starts from heart and ends up in lungs (d) none of these 161 .Lymph differs from blood in possessing (a) more proteins and less waste products (b) less proteins and more waste products (c) more proteins and more waste products (d) less proteins and less waste products 162,Which of the following wave of ECG shows ventricular depolarization ? (a) P wave (b) QRS wave (c) T wave (d) U wave 16? Which of the following statements is wrong ? (a) The counter current mechanism changes the isotonic glomerular filtrate into a hypertonic urine by increasing salt concentration around the nephron and collecting tubule. (b) The wall of collecting tubule is permeable to water whereas ascending limb is impermeable to water. (c) The urine leaving the DCT is nearly as concentrated as the interstitial fluid deep in the medulla. (d) As the filtrate passes through the ascending limb, sodium is transported passively and chloride ions pass out actively into the interstitial fluid. 164Angiotensin  II increases the blood volume by (a) signalling PCT to reabsorb more NaCl and water (b) stimulating adrenal gland to release aldosterone (c) by stimulating the release of ADH (d) all of these 16: .When the volume of body fluid falls below normal, ADH (a) decreases permeability of distal convoluted tubule and collecting tubule (b) increases permeability of distal convoluted tubule and collecting tubule (c) has nothing to do with permeability of convoluted tubule (d) none of these 166.Vitamin excreted by urine in higher vertebrates is (a) A (b) D (c) K (d) C 16? .Which of the following are involved in the formation of the acetabulum ?
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
151 Recently discovered vitamin having anticancer properties is (a) Vitamin B. (b) Vitamin B1S (c) Vitamin B n (d) Vitamin Q 152 Tonics made out of the liver are very effective in curing haemopoietic disorder because (a) they contain proteins (b) they contain RBCs (c) they contain bile juice (d) they contain vitamin B 153 Find the odd one (a) Vitamin K, prothrombin (b) Zinc, Carbonic anhydrase (c) Vitamin B r Paralysis (d) Sulphur, Phosphatase 154 Black tongue disease is associated with the deficiency of (a) Menadione (b) Niacin (c) Retinol (d) Calciferol Clara cells in the respiratory system are present with (a) Trachea, release mucus (b) Trachea, release lecithin (c) Respiratory bronchioles, release mucus (d) Respiratory bronchioles, release lecithin If thorax is injured and pleura damaged, the air enters the pleural cavity and the lungs are collapse. This condition is known as (a) Hyponea (b) Orthopnoea (c) Dyspnoea (d) Pneumothorax 157.Which of the following gases makes the most stable combination with the haemoglobin of red blood cells? (a) C0 2 (b) CO (c) 0 2 (d) N2 Which of the following statements is incorrect ? (a) Atelectasis occurs due to the lack of surfactant and Pneumothorax. (b) There are 3 lobes in right lung and 2 lobes in the left lung of man. (c) Asphyxia occurs due to acute hypercapnia. (d) In methaemoglobin, ferric ions are converted into ferrous. Which one of the following is a matching pair ? (a) Dubbopening of the semilunar valves at the beginning of ventricular diastole. (b) Lubbclosure of atrioventricular valves
(i) Ilium (ii) Ischium (iii) Pubis (a) i & ii only (b) ii & iii only (c) i & iii only (d) i, ii & iii The cells responsible for the resorption of bone matrix during the growth and remodelling of the skeleton are called (a) osteoblasts (b) osteoclasts (c) chondroblasts (d) chondroclasts Bone formed by the ossification of tendon is called as (a) sesamoid (b) cartilage or replacing bone (c) isnvesting or dermal bone (d) none of these Uncinate process is the typical feature of (a) Verterbral column  Birds (b) Vertebral column  Reptiles (c) Ribs  Birds (d) Ribs  Reptiles Which of the following transmits impulses from one side of the cerebellum to the other? (a) Pons varolii (b) Crura cerebri (c) Corpora quadrigemina (d) Cerebellum Branched tree like structure present in cerebellum and made up of white matter is (a) arborial (b) areolae (c) arbor vitae (d) archenteron The CSF moves from ventricle of the brain to subarachnoid space through (a) foramina Magendie (b) foramina Luschka (c) foramen of Monro (d) both (a) and (b) Trigeminal nerve arises from brain in the region of (a) pons Varolii and divides into palatine, chorda tympani and hyomandibular (b) medulla and divides into palatine, hyomandibular and chorda tympani (c) cerebellum and divides into ophthalmic, maxillary and mandibular (d) pons Varolii and divides into ophthalmic, maxillary and mandibular Inhibition of uterine contraction ceases and the bleeding and cramps of menstruation begin, when the level of progesterone in the blood is (a) low (b) normal (c) high (d) very high Which of the following product PIP2 diffused into the cytoplasm triggering the release of Ca2+ for intracellular calcium mediated processes? (a) IP, (b) DG
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
(c) cAMP
(d) Protein kinase A
During mechanism of action of insulin, protein kinase C is activated by (a) P,P 2 (b) IP3 (c) DG (d) Ca2+ Which of the following hormones binds with intracellular receptors? (a) Thyroid hormone (b) Catecholamine (c) Peptide hormone (d) All of these Fertilizin proteins are associated with (a) corona radiata of the ovum (b) zona pellucida of the ovum (c) acrosome of the sperm (d) tail part of the sperm Cells of Rauber are (a) trophoblast cells in contact with embryonal (b) cells of inner cell mass (c) cells present in the blastocoel (d) uterine epithelial cells making contact with blastocyst The mesoderm gives rise to all structures except (a) nervous system (b) muscular system (c) circulatory system (d) gonads If both the ovaries of a pregnant female are removed in the second trimester it will lead to (a) abortion (b) slow development of fetus (c) normal development (d) premature birth Inner surface of fallopian tubes, bronchi and bronchioles are lined by (a) squamous epithelium (b) ciliated epithelium (c) columnar epithelium (d) cubical epithelium The mast cells secrete the following substance (a) heparin (b) histamine (c) serotonin (d) all of these Urethra, vagina and oesophagus have a common inner lining of (a) squamous epithelium (b) ciliated epithelium (c) columnar epithelium (d) stratified squamous epithelium Stratum germinativum is an epithelium of the type (a) squamous (b) ciliated (c) columnar (d) cuboidal The horns of rhinoceros are composed of (a) bone (b) cartilage (c) chitin (d) keratin In mammals, the melanocytes give protection from (a) UVrays (b) infrared rays (c) Xrays (d) visible light
Duodenum has characteristic Brunner's glands which secrete two hormones called (a) prolactin, parathormone (b) estradiol, progesterone (c) kinase, estrogen (d) secretin, cholecystokinin Gall bladder is stimulated by (a) secretin (b) cholecystokinin (c) enterogastrone (d) enterokinase .A lubricant, mucin in saliva is made up of (a) glycoprotein (b) polysaccharides (c) phospholipids (d) myosin Severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS) (a) is caused by a variant of Pneumococcus pneumonae (b) is caused by a variant of the common cold virus (corona virus) (c) is an acute form of asthma (d) affects nonvegetarians much faster than the vegetarians. Which one of the following commonly forms renal stones in ureter and cause severe pain during urination ? (a) Oxalate salt (b) Citrate salt (c) Uric acid (d) Carbonate salt The respiratory centre in the brain is stimulated by (a) C0 2 conc. in venous blood (b) 0 2 conc. in arterial blood (c) CO, conc. in arterial blood (d) 0 2 conc. in venous blood Systemic heart refers to (a) the heart that contracts under stimulation from nervous system (b) left auricle and left ventricle in higher vertebrates (c) entire heart in lower vertebrates (d) the two ventricles together in humans. Haemophilia is caused by (a) factor V (b) factor VIII (c) factor III (d) none of these Movement of WBCs out of capillaries is called (a) translocation (b) phagocytosis (c) diapedesis (d) pinocytosis. RASS operated during which condition (a) low BP & low Blood volume (b) high BP & high Blood volume (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these Which one of the following statements is correct with respect to salt water balance inside the body
oflivng organisms? (a) When water is not available camels do not produce urine but store urea in tissues. (b) Salmon fish excretes lot of stored salt through gill membrane when in fresh water. (c) Paramecium discharges concentrated salt solution by contractile vacuoles. (d) The body fluids of fresh water animals are generally hypotonic to surrounding water. 20' If a person dependent on maize food grain in future he suffers from deficiency of which vitamin? (a) Retinol (b) Niacin (c) Thiamine (b) Calciferol • ANSWERS 3. (b) 8. (b) 13. (b) 18. (c) 23. (d) 28. (a) 33. (c) 38. (c) 43. (c) 48. (d) 53. (c) 58. (b) 63. (d) 68. (c) 73. (a) 78. (c) 83. (a) 88. (b) 93. (c) 98. (b) 103. (c) 108. (d) 113. (a) 118. (a) 123. (c) 128. (b) 133. (c) 138. (a) 143. (d) 148. (b) 153. (d) 158. (d) 163. (d) 168. (b) 173.' (d) 178. (a) 183. (b) 188. (a) 193. (a) 198. (a)
1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 46. 51. 56. 61. 66. 71. 76. 81. 86. 91. 96. 101. 106. 111. 116. 121. 126. 131. 136. 141. 146. 151. 156. 161. 166. 171. 176. 181. 186. 191. 196.
(b) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (d) (d) (b) (d) (b) (a) (a) (c) (b) (b) (a) (a) (a) (d) (a) (b) (b) (b) (c) (d) (b) (c) (b) (d) (c) (d) (b) (d) (a) (a) (a) (c) (a) (b)
2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. 47. 52. 57. 62. 67. 72. 77. 82. 87. 92. 97. 102. 107. 112. 117. 122. 127. 132. 137. 142. 147. 152. 157. 162. 167. 172. 177. 182. 187. 192. 197.
(a) (a) (c) (a) (d) (d) (c) (a) (a) (d) (b) (a) (b) (d) (d) (c) (a) (b)
(d)
(a) (b) (a) (d) (d) (a) (a) (c) (b) (d) (c) (d) (b) (b) (d) (c) (c) (c) (d) (b) (c)
4. 9. 14. 19. 24. 29. 34. 39. 44. 49. 54. 59. 64. 69. 74. 79. 84. 89. 94. 99. 104. 109. 114. 119. 124. 129. 134. 139. 144. 149. 154. 159. 164. 169. 174. 179. 184. 189. 194. 199.
(c) (b) (b) (b) (c) (b) (a) (b) (d) (a) (b) (b) (d) (a) (a) (c) (d) (b) (b) (a) (a) (d) (c) (a) (a) (b) (c) (c) (b) (b) (b) (b) (d) (a) (d) (b) (d) (d) (c) (a)
5. 10. 15. 20. 25. 30. 35. 40. 45. 50. 55. 60. 65. 70. 75. 80. 85. 90. 95. 100. 105. 110. 115. 120. 125. 130. 135. 140. 145. 150. 155. 160. 165. 170. 175. 180. 185. 190. 195. 200.
(a) (b) (d) (c) (a) (c) (c) (c) (a) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (b) (d) (b) (d) (b) (b) (b) (a) (b) (d) (a) (c) (c) (a) (a) (d) (d) (b) (b) (c) (a) (a) (d) (b) (b) (b)
For detailed solution, visit our website : www.momentumacademy.com
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
Thought Provoking
Projectile Motio
By : Prof. Rajinder Singh Randhawa*
If Vbe the velocity of projection and Vl the velocity of striking the plane when projected so that range up the plane is maximum, and V2 the velocity of striking the plane when projected so that the range down the plane is maximum, Prove that V = ^V\V2 A ball is thrown from a point in level with and at a horizontal distance R from the top of a tower of height H. How must the speed and angle of projection of the ball be related to R in order that the ball may just go grazing past the top edge of the tower? At what horizontal distance r from the foot of the tower does the ball hit the ground? For a given speed of projection, obtain an equation for finding the angle of projection so that r is at a minimum. Two persons simultaneously aim their guns at a ball kept on a tower. The first person releases his 'shot' with a speed of 100 ms"1 at an angle 30°. The second person is ahead of the first by a distance of 50 m and releases his 'shot' with a speed of 80 m s 1 . (a) How must he aim his gun so that both "shots" hit the ball simultaneously? (b) What is the distance of the foot of the tower from the two persons and the height of the tower? A projectile is fired from the base of coneshaped hill. The projectile grazes the vertex and strikes the hill again at the base. If 8 be the halfangle of the cone, H its height, V the initial velocity of projection and < the angle of projection, show that ) > 4 = tan" (2 cot 8) and V = ^2gff >
1
If v be the velocity and a its inclination to the horizontal at any point on its path for a projectile, show that, it is at right angles to the former direction after a time v/gsina. SOLUTIONS The max. range along inclined plane is V2 R= OA g(l + sin9 2 )
T h e he,
Sht
A B = R Sln 0
V sin0 2 2  g(l + sin0 2 )
Velocity at A, is Vv then V2 = V,2 + 2g (AB) (V 2 sin0,) y2 (lsinG;) g(l + sin0 2 ) ^ (l + sin0 2 ) "'U) Similarly, maximum range down the plane is given by R' V 2 sin0, g( l  s i n 0 2 )
2_V 2 2
4.
V sin9, g(lsin02)J ...(ii)
( l + sin0 2 ) (lsin02)
Multiply (i) and (ii), we get V,2 V22 = V X
+ i tan §j .
l
2
2.
Ball/
\A
1
An aeroplane flies horizontally at a height h' at a speed v. An antiaircraft gun fires a shell at the plane when it is vertically above the gun. Find the minimum muzzle velocity required to hit the plane and also angle with which it is projected? From a point on the ground at a distance 'a' from the foot of a pole, a ball is thrown, at an angle of 45°, which just touches the top of pole and strikes the ground at a distance of 'b', on the other side of it. Find the height of the pole. Randhawa Institute of Physics, S.C.0,208,
H
Hk.
8 8
R=Vxt,R=V
c o s 8 2 V slnQ _ V2 sin 29
Rg = V2 sin2 9 Solve quadratic equation
Also, H=(V sin 0)t+ ^ g t 2
First Floor, Sector36D, Chandigarh. Email: randhawainstitute_physicsiyahoo.com
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
Cnl^j .
f =
ftvvb Now, V
p a ^ e U
—V sin 8 ± ^Jv2 sin 2 6 + 2gH^ g
(Taking+ye
sign)
:. r = VcosG/ =
^yjv2 sin 2 0 + 2gH  V s i n O j
2 _ 2 gH . 2i sm 0
2 gH l i \ i = 2 g H L +4T t a n o 2 c o t 8 / y l + 4cot 8 \ '
...(ii) The angle of projection 0 for which r is minimum for a dr given value of V is given by j^ = 0 . Using (ii), we get a t) V2 sin 20 cos0  sin0 (V 2 sin 20 + 2 gH)  V c o s 2 0 ^ V 2 s i n 2 0 + 2gH = 0 solution of equation (iii). For first person's shot, (a) H = (100 sin30°)?  (1/2) x 9.8 t2 ...(i) For second person's shot, H = (8Osin0)f  (1/2) x 9.8 t2 ...(ii) From (i) and (ii), we get (100 sin30°) = 80 sin0 => 0 = 38° 68' (b) The distances of the foot of the tower from the two persons are dy = 100 cos30° x t ...(iii) and d2 = 80 cos (38° 68')f •••(iv) ...(iii) The angle of projection for which r is minimum is a
y = ^2g//(l + itan28) We have ;vt(u => v = u cos a h = (u sin a ) t  ^ gt2 1 => ^gt ^ ~(usina)t +h=0 cos a)t
Aerc^iiane
Since 'f' is real ! sin 2 a > 4 x \ g h
••y]v2 + 2gh Now, c o s a =
a = tan
2
Jv +2gh
tana =
A/2~gh
(A/2lh/v)
Let H be the height of the pole, using equation of trajectory, x_ y = x tan a 1 R) :. H = a tan 45° 1H
First person Second person
a +b
ab * a+b
100 cos30° t = 50 + 80 cos (38° 68')f [From figure] which gives t ~ 2 sec is the time of the two "shots" hit the ball after firing. Using we find d{ ~ 180 m and d2~ 130 m [From (iii) and (iv)] Now, height of the tower is from (i) H = 100 x 4 x 2  4.9 (2) 2 = 100  1 9 . 6 = 80.4 m s V 2 sin 2(f) Range = 2H tan 6 = and H = V 2 sin 2 0 2g A \
Since the horizontal c o m p o n e n t of velocity remains constant throughout the motion, .•. v cos a = V cos (3 But a + (3 = 90° vcosa cos ( 9 0 °  a ) As along vertical direction, initial velocity = v sin a ; Final velocity =  V sin (3 =  v cot a sin (90°  a ) =  v cos 2 0/sin 0 Now, using v = u + at f a = g ' U=? vcos 2 0 vsin0  gt sin0 cos 2 0 v gt = v sin0 + sin0 sine
gsinO
.
•
Dividing, 2 tan 5 = 2 s m 20 sin (j) tan 5 = 2 cot 6 tan 0 = 2 cot 5
1
j) = tan^ (2 cot 8)
: \ \ HILL ¥ vf V/ / / / \/ / //////// 2#tan5
\f/
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
;
01K18 '
Train Your Brain
^ g C ^31 OTH][? UlMfl JJ 0 C n^ B 1B 
The diagram shows a circuit with four identical light bulbs. When we remove bulb A from the circuit, the light intensity of bulb C (a) remains the same (b) increases (c) decreases (d) becomes zero. The amplitude of an electromagnetic wave in vacuum is doubled with no other changes made to the wave. As a result of this doubling of the amplitude, which of the following statements is correct? (a) The speed of propagation of the wave changes. (b) The frequency of the wave changes. (c) All of the above are true. (d) None of the above is true. Two objects are initially at rest on a frictionless surface. Object 1 has a greater mass than object 2. The same constant force starts to act on each object. The force is removed from each object after it accelerates over a distance d. After the force is removed from both objects, which statement is correct (p is a momentum, K is a kinetic energy)? (a) p i < p 2 (b) p i > p 2 (c) Kx > K2 (d) Kx < K2. A dart is loaded into a springloaded toy dart gun by pushing the spring in by a distance d. For the next loading, the spring is compressed a distance 2d. How much faster does the second dart leave the gun compared to the first? (a) Four times as fast (b) Two times as fast (c) The same • (d) Half as fast One of two parallel metallic plates is uniformly charged with charge +q, and the other one is charged with charge  q . In this case, the electric field between them is E. When the negatively charged plate is discharged and then recharged with a positive charge 4q, the electric field between the plates becomes
Canadian Physics Oiympaic! Problems
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS WITH ONE CORRECT OPTION A uniform meter stick is supported on a fulcrum at the 25 cm mark. A 0.50 kg object is hung from the 0 cm end of the meter stick, and the stick is balanced horizontally. The mass of the meter stick is (a) 0.25 kg (b) 0.50 kg (c) 0.75 kg (d) 1.0 kg. 2. The radius of the Earth is 6.37 x 10 6 m. Approximately, how fast is a person on the Equator moving due to the Earth rotation? (a) 5 m/s (b) 50 m/s (c) 500 m/s '(d) 5000 m/s In a certain region of space, the electric field is zero. From this we can conclude that the electric potential in this region is (a) constant (b) zero (c) positive (d) negative. 4, A bullet of mass m and speed v hits a pendulum bob of mass M at time /,, and passes completely through the bob. The bullet emerges at time t2 with a speed of v/2. The pendulum bob is suspended by a stiff rod of length / and negligible mass. After the collision, the bob can barely swing through a complete vertical circle. At time t3, the bob reaches the highest position. What quantities are conserved in this process? (a) Total kinetic energy of the bob and the bullet during the time interval At = t2 th (b) Total momentum of the bob and the bullet during the time interval Af = t2tv (c) Total mechanical energy of the bob and the bullet during the time interval t3t{. (d) Momentum of the bob after t2.
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
(a) 0 (c) 2.5 E
(b) 1.5 £ (d) 3E
A uniform magnetic field B is directed out of ©j2L£L£L® the page. A metallic wire © 2>©© 3 has the shape of a square © 3 © © 3 © & © © © frame and is placed in the © © ©p© © field as shown. The shape of the wire is steadily transformed into a circle in the same plane, the current in the frame (a) (b) (c) (d) is directed clockwise does not appear is directed counterclockwise none of these.
> Two solid objects of the same mass are supplied with heat at the same rate AQ / At. The temperature of the first object with latent heat L, and specific heat capacity c^ changes according to graph 1 on the diagram. The temperature of the second object with latent heat L^ and specific heat capacity c2 changes according to graph 2 on the diagram. Based on what is shown on the graph, the latent heats Lj and Lj, and the specific heat capacities c, and c 2 in solid state obey which of the following relationships? (a) Lj > L2; C, < c 2 (b) L, <L2\CL< c2 (c) Ll > L2, c, > c 2 (d) L t < L2, Cj > c2. 15. A light ray strikes a prism as shown in the drawing. The angles of the prism are 90°, 45°, and 45°. The critical angle of the prism material is 49°. What rays are the possible continuations of the incident ray? (a) The ray 1 only (b) The ray 2 only (c) The ray 3 only (d) Both rays 2 and 3. I< You stand on a platform at a train station and listen to a train horn as the train approaches the station at a constant velocity. While the train approaches, but before it arrives, you hear (a) the intensity and the frequency of the sound both increasing (b) the intensity and the frequency of the sound both decreasing (c) the intensity increasing and the frequency decreasing (d) the intensity decreasing and the frequency increasing. 17. A linear conductor with current /, is placed along the axis of a circular conductor, which carries current / 2 . The magnetic force acting on each of the conductors is (a) zero (b) directly proportional to the product of currents /, and / 2 , and inversely proportional to the radius of the circular conductor (c) directly proportional to the product of currents I, and / 2 , inversely proportional to the square of the radius of the circular conductor (d) directly proportional to the product of current /,, current I 2 , and the area of a circular conductor.
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
11. The drawing shows velocity (v) versus time (t) graphs for two cyclists moving along the same straight segment of a highway f r o m the same point. The second cyclist starts moving at t = 3.0 min. At what time do the two cyclists meet? (a) 4.0 min (b) 6.0 min (c) 12 min (d) 8.0 min. Two solid spheres manufactured of the same material freely fall down in the air. One sphere has a diameter twice as large as the other. The force due to air resistance is proportional to the crosssectional area of a moving object and is a quadratic function of the speed of an object. In some time after the beginning of motion in the presence of air resistance, the velocity of each sphere becomes constant. It is called the terminal velocity. The ratio of terminal velocities of the spheres vbig/vsmal] is (a) 2 (b) (0 \ (d) ^
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
Astronauts are weightless in orbit because they are beyond the pull of gravity they travel in the accelerated frame of reference where centrifugal force is equal to centripetal force, and the net force on an astronaut is zero they are in free fall together with their spacecraft of another cause.
An aquarium is filled with water. The lateral wall of the aquarium is 40 cm long and 30 cm high. Using 10 m/s 2 for the acceleration due to gravity, and 1 g/cm3 for the density of water, the force on the lateral wall of the aquarium is (a) 36 N (b) 90 N (c) 180 N (d) 1500 N. A satellite is moved from one circular orbit around the earth, to another of lesser radius. Which of the following is true? (a) The kinetic energy increases and the potential energy increases. (b) The kinetic energy increases, and the potential energy decreases. (c) The kinetic energy decreases and the potential energy decreases. (d) The kinetic energy decreases and the potential energy increases. A point particle carries a positive charge +q and is maintained at a distance h above a large conductive uncharged plate. The electric force of interaction between the charge and the plate is best described as (a) zero force (b) an attractive force proportional to q/h1 (c) an attractive force proportional to q2/h2 (d) an attractive force proportional to q2/4h2 QUESTIONS THAT REQUIRE GRAPHIC SOLUTIONS 21. A heavy pendulum bob is swinging back and forth when the string, supporting it, suddenly breaks. Ignoring the mass of the string and air resistance, draw the path of the subsequent motion of the bob if the string breaks when the bob is at its highest point. A long vertical tube with a weightless movable piston inside has its lower end under the water. The tube is motionless throughout the experiment. The crosssectional area of the piston is A. The initial position of the piston is just over the surface of the water. Then it is slowly moved upwards. Sketch a graph of the force necessary to lift the piston during its motion as a function of the height of the piston. 23. On the same graph, draw the following two functions: (i) kinetic energy versus speed of a particle according to classical mechanics and (ii) the same function for Einstein's relativistic theory.
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
24. An electron is moving at a constant velocity in a region of space with a uniform electric field of 1.0 x 10 3 N/C and a uniform magnetic field of 1.0 x 10~3T. The electric field has only an xcomponent while the magnetic field has only a ycomponent. Sketch a vector diagram for the velocity of the electron, the magnetic field, and the electric field in the cartesian system of coordinates. A brick is on an incline whose angle of inclination can be changed from 0 to 90 degrees. Sketch a graph of the force of friction acting on the brick versus the angle of inclination in the given range. SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS 26. Sand from a stationary hopper falls onto a moving conveyor belt at a rate of 5.00 kg/s as shown in the figure. The conveyor belt is supported by frictionless rollers and moves at a constant speed of 0.75 m/s under the action of a constant horizontal external force F ext supplied by the motor that drives the belt. Find (i) the force of friction exerted by the belt on the sand (ii) the external force F ext (iii) the work done by Fext in 1 s (iv) the kinetic energy acquired by the falling sand each second due to the change in its horizontal motion (v) compare and analyse the answers to (iii) and (iv). 27. A source of electric power with electromotive force E and internal resistance r, is connected to a resistor. (i) Find the power delivered to the resistor as a function of the resistance of the resistor. (ii) Find the power produced by the source as a function of the resistance of the resistor. (iii) Sketch graphs of these two functions. (iv) Treating the efficiency of u.e source as a ratio of the power consumed to the power produced by the source, find the efficiency of the source of electric power as a function of the resistance of the resistor and sketch the graph of this function. (v) Find the resistance of the resistor that corresponds to the maximum power delivered to the resistor, and calculate the efficiency for this resistance. 28. A point source of light is moving uniformly along a straight line, which intersects the optical axis of a converging lens under a small angle a at a distance 2F
from the lens with a focal distance F. The speed of the source of light is v0. (i) Draw the lens, the trajectory of the source of light, and the trajectory of its image produced by the lens. (ii) Draw the vector diagram for the velocity of the source of light, the velocity of the image, and the relative velocity of the image with respect to the source. (iii) Determine the minimum relative speed of the image of the source of light with respect to the source. SOLUTIONS (b) Condition of equilibrium for torques with respect to the fulcrum is: 0.50 x 0.25 = M x 0.25 =>M = 0.50 kg The relationship between the angular speed (co) and the linear speed (v) gives: v = mR, where R is the radius of the Earth. If T is a period of rotation, co = 271IT, and T = 24 x 3600 s. v = 2nR/T = 4.63 x 102  500 m/s Consider uniformly charged spherical shell. The field any where is zero. As V = constant. The • ,. potential is
^
its smaller mass. Therefore, it takes less time to travel the distance d. Even though the force applied to objects 1 and 2 is the same, the change in momentum is less for object 2 because At is smaller. 8, (b) According to the law of conservation of energy, the potential energy of a spring transforms into the kinetic energy of a dart. The potential energy is proportional to the square of the compression, and kinetic energy is proportional to the square of the initial speed of the dart. Therefore, the speed increases the same number of times as the compression does. 9. (d) At a particular point S, in between the plates, the field due to q+ is added to q . However by the superposition of two Gaussian surfaces, E.A + E.A = — + e e due+to due to o o q q to the right to the right from P to S from S to O Thus the field is £ = — where O = — . If instead of q~ one has 4G 4i7+, the field due to 4q = — to the E o o left and that due to +q = — to the right. Therefore the resultant field is —  —  riSL or IE where e0 £o £o to the to the 0 left right £ = • The answer should be (d) and not (b). e o The reason why there is need to take one gaussian surface for one plate and full discussions are given in the author's book, Beyond the Barriers (Extension lectures in physics) by Krishnan, T.V. 10, The area of a circle is greater than the area of a square with the same perimeter. During the transformation of the shape of the frame, the magnetic flux through the frame is increasing. It results in the induction of electric current in the loop. According to the Lenz's law, the current produces the magnetic field of the opposite direction to the external field whose flux is increasing. Therefore, the direction of the induced current is clockwise. 11. (b) From the slopes on the graph, we can obtain the ratio of accelerations of the two cyclists: a2 tax = 4. The distances traveled by the two cyclists must be equal a/ 2 a2(t  3)2 a2_f 2 t )2 U3J '
Jl P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
?
dV
N —u, dx
1
47te0
Q+ — , a constant
R
(a). The potential is also positive (c). If Q is negative, the potential is also a negative (d). If the shell is not charged, E = 0, V= 0 (b). If the question had been a uniformly charged sphere, the potential will be a constant and will be positive or negative depending on whether the charge is +ve or negative. If "it is a certain" region of space, whether it is enclosed or not is also not known, then not only the field is zero but the potential is also zero unless it is mentioned that it is a charged enclosure. 4. (a) and (c) are wrong, because of the energy loss during the motion of the bullet inside the bob, (d) is wrong, because an object experiences the external force of gravity that changes momentum, (b) is the correct answer. The equivalent resistance of the part of circuit with the bulb B increases after the removal of the bulb A. This entails the reduction in current through the bulb C. ft. (d) (d) is correct because an amplitude, a speed of propagation, and a frequency of the wave are independent variables. 7, Object 2 has a greater acceleration because of
t = 6min —— = 2 t3 12. (b : • The uniform motion with the terminal velocity is possible when the force of gravity of the object is equal to the force of the air resistance. j2 nd z Mg = kv' Jtd 2 Kd D — e = kv — 6 4 where M is the mass of a sphere, d is its diameter, D is the density of the material ofthe sphere, v is the velocity, and k is the constant coefficient for both spheres. From the equation (i), v is proportional to JJ . 13. (b) 14. (b ) The horizontal segment of the graph corresponds to the melting of the solids. Under the same condition, the two identical masses have different time of phase transition. The time of the second object is greater, therefore, its latent heat is also greater. (d) Comparing the slopes of the diagrams for the solid state of the two objects, we see that the same heat causes less change of temperature for the second object. Hence, the second object has the greater specific heat capacity. 15. (d) The angle of incidence of the initial ray on the inclined side of the prism is less than the critical angle, therefore, the Snell's law gives the possibility for the ray to be refracted in the direction of the ray 2. In addition, there is also a possibility of reflection along ray 3. The intensity of sound is increasing because the distance between the source and the observer is decreasing. Because the source is approaching the observer, the frequency increases due to Doppler effect. 17. (a) : Each conductor is parallel to the direction of magnetic field lines of another conductor. If the wire with current is parallel to the magnetic field line, the sine of the angle between this two directions is zero, and the magnetic force on the wire is zero. 18. (c) : The pressure P of water on the base of the aquarium is given by: P = DgH, where D is the density of water, H is the height of the wall. Pressure is a linear function of the height. Therefore, the average pressure is half of the maximum one. The force on the lateral wall can be found from: F = PavHL, where L is the length of the wall. F = [(1000 x 10 x 0.3) / 2] x 0.3 x 0.4 = 180 N. 19. (b) In the circular motion around the Earth, the centripetal force on the satellite is a gravitational force. Therefore, v2 = GM IR, where M is the mass of the Earth, R is the radius of the Earth and G is the universal gravitational constant. Therefore, the kinetic energy
PHYSICS F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
increases with the decrease in the radius of the orbit. The gravitational potential energy is negative and decreases with the decrease in radius, i.e. the magnitude increases and it is negative. .20. i The lines of field of the point charge are everywhere perpendicular to the surface of the conductive plane. The pattern ofthe electric field lines over the plane is absolutely the same as for the system of two identical and oppositely charged particles separated by the distance 2h. Therefore, we can apply the Coulomb's law to calculate the force. 21 The motion will be vertically down under the force of gravity. No other forces are applied to the bob. 2:; The force will increase linearly until the pressure of water under the piston becomes equal to the atmospheric pressure P0. After this moment, the force becomes constant. 23. c = 3 x 108 m/s
(a) Classical Mechanics^' 5 6 2 '' (b) Relativistic Mechanics
24.
Jl
25. There are two segments of the graph: 1. When the brick is motionless, and static friction exists; ,'mgsm(a) ; When the brick m g moves and the force ( ' nmgcos(aKj of kinetic friction tan  1 ((i) nil acts on it. The motion starts when a = tan 1 (p.) (i) For the motionless brick: Ff = /wgsin(a) (ii) For the moving brick: Ffk = pmgcos(a)
a
2fi Introducing the vertical and horizontal axes of coordinates, we can find the rate of change of the xcomponent of momentum for the sand. Apx = (5.00 kg)(0.750 m/s) • = 3.75 N. (i) At 1.00 s This change occurs due to the only horizontal force on the sand
A N
The force of friction: / =
= 3.75 N At (ii) The belt is in equilibrium. It experiences the external force and the force of friction from the sand £Fx = max +Fext  / = 0; Fext = 3.75 N
(iii) W = FArcosO = 3.75 N (0.750 m)cos0° = 2.81 J (iv) ^(Am)v 2 = ^5.00 kg(0.750 m/s)2 = 1.41 J (v) Friction between the sand and the belt converts half of the input work into internal energy of both objects. (i) The power, delivered to a resistor, is given by R This function has a maximum at R = r. (R + r) Pmax = E1/(4r). (ii) The power, produced by the source is ?(R + r) = • This function is steadily (R + r)2 (R + r) decreasing with increasing of the resistance R (when R = 0,Ps = EV r).
Ps =
P=
Due to the properties of the point at the doublefocal distance from the lens, the image of the object is also at the doublefocal distance from the lens. Therefore, the trajectory of the image of the source of light A'B' crosses the optical axis at the point P ' at the distance 2F from the lens. The triangles POC and P'OC are equivalent right angle triangles, and thus, the trajectory of the source and the trajectory of its image cross the optical axis of the lens under the same angle a. The diagram shows the different distances AB and A'B', covered by the source and its image during the same time interval, which permits to state that the speeds of the source and the image are different. (ii) While the object moves at the velocity v0, its image moves at the velocity u vo along the line 2F ..•IF 0 that crosses the optical axis X at distance 2F from the vertex of lens and has the Fig. 2 \7 same magnitude of inclination a to the axis (figure 2). (iii) The vector diagram of the velocities (figure 3) shows that the relative velocity v has its minimum magnitude when it is perpendicular to the vector u. From this condition, we can obtain the result: I v Inm = v0sin2a. The obtained condition, however, does not permit us to conclude about the instantaneous position of the source of light at the moment that matches the result for the relative velocities, as it is clear from figure. The only general conclusion is that the position of the source must guaranty the following relationship between the instantaneous speed of the source and the instantaneous speed of its image: v0 < u •
A
(iii)
0 r
Available
+ r)
(iv) The efficiency is given by: eR/(R 5 1 e 3 o 130.5
BOUND VOLUMES
of your Favourite Magazines Volumes of the following years are available : Mathematics Today : 2006,2005, 2004 Chemistry Today: 2006,2005
0
f\
r
/
R
Physics For You : Biology Today :
2006,2005 2006,2005,2004,2003
28. (i) First, we must investigate the trajectory of the image of the source of light. The path AB of the source during some time interval is shown on the Fig.l figure 1 as an object. Its image A'B' is a trajectory of the image of the point source of light during the same time interval.
PHYSICS FOR YOU I FEBRUARY '08 187
Price of each volume : i s.170 Add Rs.25 (for each volume) for postage .
How to order : Send money by demand draft/money order. Demand Draft should be drawn in favour of MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd. Mention the volume you require along with your name and address. Mail your order t o : Circulation Manager, MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd., 406, Taj Aptt., Ring Road, Near Safdarjung Hospital, New D e l h i  2 9 . Tel.: 26197344 email: info@mtg.in
IITJEE 200
PHYSICS SECTION 1 Only One Correct Option (Q. No. 1 to 5) In gravityfree space, a man of mass M standing at a height h above the floor throws a ball of mass m straight down with a speed u relative to ground. When the ball reaches the floor, the distance of the man above the floor will be (a) h\ l + M
(b)
Practice Paper
SECTION  II One or More Correct Option (Q. No. 6 to 10) 6. A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery. The quantities charge, voltage, electric field and energy associated with this capacitor are given by Q{}, VQ, E{) and U0 respectively. A dielectric is now introduced between plates with battery still in connection. The corresponding quantities now are given by Q, V, E and U. These quantities are related to the previous ones as (a) Q> Qo (b) V> V0 (c) E > En (d) U> U0 7. For the situation shown in the figure, the correct statement(s) is/are,
(a) T h e n e t f o r c e o n t h e l o n g s t r a i g h t w i r e AB is
h 2
m ~M
(c) 2 h (d) a function of m, M, h and u. A solid cylinder of mass M and radius R is pulled by a horizontal force F acting at its topmost point on a horizontal surface where the coefficient of friction is p.. The maximum acceleration of the cylinder so that it may not start slipping is (a) 2pg (b) (c) (d) ~Vg
Long glass capillary tube is dipped in water. It is known that water wets glass. The water level rises by h in the tube. The tube is now pushed down so that only a length hi2 is outside the water surface. The angle of contact of the water surface at the upper end of the tube will be (a) 30° (b) 45° (c) tan" 1 2 (d) 60° 1 g of water on evaporation at atmospheric pressure forms 1671 cm3 of steam. Heat of vaporization at this pressure is 540 cal g~'.The increase in internal energy is (a) 250 cal (b) 500 cal (c) 1000 cal (d) 1500 cal. Two capacitors of 4 pF and 6 pF are connected in series and a potential difference of 5 kV is applied across the combination .They are then disconnected and reconnected in parallel. The potential difference across the combination is (a) 1100 V (b) 2250 V (c) 2400 V (d) 1200V
a a+b (b) The loop will be compressed. (c) No torque will be acting on the loop as the forces are in same plane (d) No torque will be acting on the loop as the forces experienced by the wires of the loop are normal to the plane of the loop.
2ti L
p F =  0 V 2 Z.[
a n d is r e p u l s i v e .
8. The conductor ABCDE has the shape shown in the figure. It lies in the yz plane, with A and E on the yaxis. When it moves with a velocity v in a magnetic field B, an emf e is induced between A and E. (a) e = 0, if v is in the ydirection and B is in the xdirection (b) e = 2Bav, if v is in the )>direction and B is in the xdirection (c) e = BXv, if v is in the zdirection and B is in the xdirection.
Vidyarthi Academy, 1/4, First Floor, Chandrodaya Society, Swastik Park, Opp. Swastik Chambers, Chembur, Mumbai71. Tel. 25222710
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U IFEBRUARY'08 188
(d) e = Bkv, if v is in the xdirection and B is in the ^direction. A body of mass m is suspended from two light springs of force constants kx and k2 (< k{) separately. The periods of vertical oscillations are T} and T2 respectively. Now the same body is suspended from the same two springs which are first connected in series and then in parallel. The period of vertical oscillations are Ts and Tp respectively 7; for kx > k2 (a) Tp<T1<T2< 1  J _ _L 1 1 _L r 2 1] 2 +r 2 2 Tp T{ T£ (b) r 2 " r2 t2 (C) (d)
ColumnI (Element)
ColumnII (Graph of voltage and current
(a) Inductor
(P)
Two different isolated coils have selfinductances, Li — 8 mH and L2 = 2 mH. The current in one coil is increased at a constant rate. The current in the second coil is also increased at the same constant rate. At a certain (b) Capacitor instant of time, the power given to the two coils is the same. At that time the current, the induced voltage and the energy stored in the first coil are iu Vt and (/, respectively. Corresponding values for the second coil at the same instant are i2, V2 and U2 respectively. V2±_ Then, 1_ 1 (c) Resistor (d) (b) — = 4 (c) ^ = 4 (a) T TT Ui SECTION Match the Columns (Q. No. 61 to 64) Statements in the Column  I (a, b, c, d) have to be matched with one or more statements in the Column  II (P, Q, R, S, T, U) A parallel plate air capacitor has capacity 5 x 10~12 F. Plate A has a positive charge ql  IO"10 coulomb and plate B has charge q2 = +2 x IO"10 coulomb. ColumnI ColumnII (a) charge on inner (P)  5 0 x 10~12 F surface of plate A (Q) 150 x 10~12 F (b) charge on outer surface of B is Now a cell of emf (R) 100 x 10~12 F 10 V is connected so that plate A is +ve (S) 50 x IO"12 F and plate B ve (T) 100 X 10~12 F (c) charge on inner surface of plate A is (U) 150 X 10"12 F (d) charge on outer surface of plate B is 12. Figure shows an LCR circuit consisting of a series combination of a resistance R, an inductance L and a capacitance C driven by a current source. i(t) = 7max sin cot. Match the graphs given in ColumnII to element given in ColumnI.
(Q)
(d) Plot of voltage across (S) capacitor and inductor 13. A heavy spool of mass r>R/2 Fr>fR for all the case M and radii r, R of axel and spool respectively is resting on rough surface so that only rolling may be possible. An ideal string is wound on the axel. The string is continuously pulled by applying force F. There is no slipping between string and axel./stands for force of friction. Match the following. (/ = MR2) ColumnI ColumnII Mg (r +R) (P) a = —1——t2(a) Force F = Mg } 2MR2 is applied to string towards left and spool rolls without slipping. Mg(rR) (b) Force F = Mg is f (Q) 2 MR7 applied vertically ( r upwards. V
PHYSICS FOR YOU IF B U R '08189 ERAY
71
(c) Force F = 2Mg applied at angle 6 0 with vertical ( C M so that line of ' •s force passes through point of contact (d) Force F = Mg applied at an f Q A
( r  R sin 6)L (R) « = " g
angle e < 8 0
VY/
(S) a = 0, ac, , = 0 (T) a ^ O , acn. = 0 (U)a*o>acm*0
PassageII n A homogenous field of magnetic induction B is perpendicular to a track of breadth / which is inclined at an angle a to the horizontal. A frictionless conducting rod of mass m slides the two rails of the track as shown in the figure. !7. When switch S connects capacitor C in circuit acceleration of rod after some time is (a) zero mg sin a (b) constant and equal to m + B2l2C mg sin a (c) constant and equal to mB2l2C (d) increasing continuously ! 8. When switch S connects resistor R in circuit maximum velocity of rod is Mg R sin a. Mg R sin a. (a) (b) 2 B2l2 B2l2 3Mg R sin a MgR sin2 K (c) (d) 2 2 2Bl B2l2 19. (a) (b) (c) (d) When switch 5 connects an inductor L, the rod reaches terminal velocity has constant acceleration has increasing acceleration oscillates simple harmonically SECTION  V Assertion & Reason (Q. No. 20 to 21)
. A thin equiconvex lens (n = 1.5) has focal length 50 cm when placed in air. In columnI are given lens and surrounding medium. In columnII are given corresponding focal lengths. Focal length
Water
(a) V
(P) 600 cm
(b) \J
[i=1.2
(Q) 100 cm
I
U=4/3
i
(c) "a=4/3'
(R) 75 cm
(d)
H=1.2
/ J 1 ) 1
Jv
\
(S) 143 cm
(1=4/3
I
(T) 237 cm (U) 200 cm
SECTION  IV Comprehension Type (Q. No. 15 to 19) PassageI When 2500 kg car driven at 72 km/hr on level road is put in neutral gear (engine force is cut off) the velocity decreases in the following way v = 20/(1 + tl20). The power required to drive this car at 36 km/hr is (a) 2.5 kW (b) 3.0 kW (c) 6.25 kW (d) 9 kW The resistive force at speed of 72 km/hr was (a) 2500 N (b) 3000 N (c) 4000 N (d) 5000 N
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U IFEBRUARY'08190
Instructions Each question contains statement1 (assertion) and statement2 (reason). Of these statements, mark correct choice if (a) statements1 and 2 are true and statement2 is a correct explanation for statement1 (b) statements1 and 2 are true and statement2 is not a correct explanation for statement1 (c) statement1 is true, statement2 is false (d) both statement1 and statement2 are false. 20. A man is moving with constant speed in A cart. A vertical coil of conducting wire with galvanometer is in a cart. The plane of coil is parallel to velocity (see figure). Uniform magnetic field B is as shown in the figure Statement When he crossed uniform magnetic field galvanometer shows deflection.
Statement. He states that current is produced because Lorentz force acts on free electrons. 21 Disc rests on rough horizontal surface. A particle of mass m strikes the disc tangentially at topmost point (see figure) Statement1: Angular momentum of system about point of contact is not conserved. Statement2: External torque due to friction acts on disc during collision. SECTION  V I Subjective Questions (Q. No. 22 to 25) 22. A twoslit Young's experiment is illustrated in the figure X = 5000 A. When a thin film of a transparent material is put behind one of the slits, the zero order fringe moves to
the position previously occupied by the 4th order bright fringe .The index of refraction of the film is n = 1.2. (a) Calculate the thickness of the film and (b) shift of central fringe if S,S2 is 1 mm, and distance between slit and screen is 2 m. 23. A simple pendulum of massless rod of length L and mass m has a spring of force constant k connected to it at a distance h below its point of suspension. Find the frequency of vibrations of the system for small values of amplitude. 24. A piston divides a closed gas cylinder into two parts. Initially the piston is kept pressed such that one part has a pressure P and volume 5 V and the other part has pressure 8P and volume V; the piston is now left free. Find the new pressure for (a) the isothermal and (b) adiabatic process [y = 15] 25. A body is projected vertically upwards from the surface of earth with a velocity sufficient to carry it to infinity. Calculate the time taken by it to reach height h.
CHEMISTRY SECTION 1 Only One Correct Option (Q. No. 26 to 30) The average energy of oscillator with frequency 10 Hz at 1000 K is (Boltzmann constant = 1.38 x IO"23 J K"1) (a) 5.55 x IO"22 J (b) 1.2 x IO"20 J 4 (c) 3.6 x 10 J (d) 4.2 x IO"24 J
14
(a) 3, 4
(b) 10, 12 C=C
(c) 5 , 6 ^Br CI —CH" ^C1 tButOK
isomers
(d) 4 , 6
H'
CH
(a) none
product has
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
T; A —» B, fraction of A left undecomposed after 400 sec was 0.5 and after 964 sec, it was 0.25. The order of reaction was (a) 2 (b) 1.5 (c) 3.5 (d) 1st order
CHJ 28.
SECTION  II One or More Correct Option (Q. No. 31 to 35) CH,  C H = CH  C  C H , — • O CH,  CH = CH  CH  CH, I conversion possible by (a) LiAlH4 (c) NaBH 4 reagents (b) Zn . Hg/HCl (d) AlIsopropoxide
OH
II
CH 3
^c = c
\ H I
H
CH jCOOAg *(A) I2 H i (b) (c) '
H —,0
•(*)
final product B is
H I
F )
OH
I
CH3
(a)
 , OH OH (c) both (a) and (b)
CH3 — C — C — CHJ
CH3 — C  C —
OH H CHR CH—CH,—OH CH3
Re2Cl8" " molecule has (a) 0 bonds (b) dp hybridization (c) 5 bond (d) bond order is three i 33 Which can undergo nucleophilic substitution? (a) C2H5Br (b) [ f j ) N
PHYSICS FOR YOU IF B U R '08191 ERAY
t
29 If 18e" rule is valid for Mn, Fe the value of x, y are in the Mn2(CO)jc, Fe3(CO)y
N0> (O
NO,
'NO,
CH,
(c) AgCl, Agl (d) A1C13, MgCl2
(d)
(R) Chromatography (S) NH 3 (T) C2H5  O  C2H5 ether ColumnI (Isotope) (P) 94Pu239 (Q) 6C14 (S) 14Si30 (T) 24Cr55 (U) 7N13
39. (a) (b) (c) (d)
Which of these can form transproduct ? (a) 2Butyne + H 2 Pd/BaS0 4 alkene (b) 2Butene(cis) + C 5 H 5 C0 3 H>(,4)
CH : H—C—N—0 © (C) H• C2H5
H,
° > (B)diol
ColumnII (Types of emission) positron a, 3 Prays Xrays
(R) 6 C n
I
H
CH :
alkene
C2H5 (d) trans2pentene + OSO4 (a) (b) (c) (d)
SECTION  IV (A)
H,0
diol
Comprehension Type (Q. No. 40 to 44) PassageI Lithium cobalt oxide and specially carbon are active ingredients for +ve and ve electrodes, respectively for a rechargeable lithium battery. During charge recharge cycles, following half cell reaction occur LiCo0 2 ^ " Lij _ „ + Co0 2 + x . Li® + xee + w C+xH + 2e~ C „ Lix total amount of energy battery can store is rated as mA hr. Battery rated as 1500 mA hr can power a device drawing 100 mA current for 15 hrs. Graphite has lithium inter eolation sites between its layers. If carbon Li intercolation ratio is 6 : 1 the theortical charge capacity of lgm graphite to intercolate lithium is (a) 372 mA hr/gm (c) 150 mA hr/gm (b) 684mAhr/gm (d) 880 mA hr/gm
Solubility of PbCl2 decreases in 0.1 M KC1 increases in 1M CN~ decreases by increasing temperature decreases by adding C 2 0 4 " ~ SECTION Match The Columns (Q. No. 36 to 39)
Statements in the Column  I (a, b, c, d) have to be matched with one or more statements in the Column  II (P, Q, R, S, T, U) 36. ColumnI CoiumnII (Reagents) (Conversions) (a) > C = O — > CH, > (P) H2NOH/dil. H 2 S0 4 (b) C0 2 4 H 2 C 2 0 4 (Q) Zn . Hg/HCl (c) CH2 = CH  CHOH  CH3 (R) N2H4 / OH~ 0 I II (S) Na at 230°C CH,— CH  C  CH, 0 (d)
•NH
1 gm graphite can charge coulombs (a) 1341 (b) 95600 (c) 13600 (d) 2682 PassageII Hydrogen is more energy dense than carbon by mass. It is very powerful fuel and can operate the heat engine. S°(H 2 ) = 131 JmoL 1 K"1, S 0 (O 2 ) = 205 JmoHK" 1 ., S°(H20) = 20 Jmol'K' 1 ) What is the ratio between heat generated by hydrogen burned and same weight of carbon burned ? AH, H , 0 = 286 kJ AHf CO, = 394 kJ (a) 2.2 (b) 4.3 (c) 6.8 (d) 12.6 When 1 kg of H 2 is burned, find theoretical maximum work produced from electric motor. Using H 2 as fuel ? (a) 1.2 x 105 kJ (b) 2.4 x 105 kJ 4 (c) 8.6 x 10 kJ (d) 11.2 kJ What work will be provided by engine operating between 25°C and 300°C ? (a) 6.9 x 104 kJ (b) 2.4 x 105 kJ 2 (c) 6.2 x 10 kJ (d) 182 kJ
(T) PCC, CH2C12 (U) K2Cr207 ColumnII (Property) (P) n Bond order is 2 (Q) Hydration energy maximum (R) Paramagnetic (S) Odd electron molecule (T) oxidising property ColumnII (Method of separation) (P) Benzene (Q) Steam distillation
37. ColumnI (Molecule) (a) F2 (b) C 2 (c) K0 2 (d) NO
38. ColumnI (Pairs of compounds) (a) o, pNitrophenols (b) d(+), /(+) 2Butanol
PHYSICS FOR YOU IF B U R '08192 ERAY
SECTION  V Assertion & Reason (Q. No. 45 to 46) instructions Each question contains statement1 (assertion) and statement2 (reason). Of these statements, mark correct choice if (a) statements1 and 2 are true and statement2 is a correct explanation for statement1 (b) statements1 and 2 are true and statement2 is not a correct explanation for statement1 (c) statement1 is true, statement2 is false (d) both statement1 and statement2 are false. 45. Statement1: LP. N 2 > I.P. of 0 2 Statement2 N2 looses bonding e~ and 0 2 looses antibonding e" 46. Statement1: CH3CN less basic than CH 3 CH —NH Slateinen bond N. Triple bond N has more I.P. than double
rate constants sulphonation also takes place by same steps. (k{, k2', k3 rate constant). Graph of Benzene and C6D6 (deutro benzene) are shown in nitration and sulphonation in figure1 and 2 (  C6D6) ( C6H6). Explain the effect in benzene and C 6 D 6 by using calculate of kh k2, k3 nitration graph
Compare rate of Nitration use of Benzene/C6D6 (kh k2, k3) Compare rate of Sulphonation of Benzene/C6D6 (k{, k2, k3) 49 It is possible to prevent precipitate of Co(OH)3 from solution of 0.01M CoCl3 by buffering solution at pH 9.1 with buffer having NH 3 and NH 4 ion. How much of 6 M NH3 and 6M HC1 should be added per litre of this solution to prevent Co(OH)3 from precipitate ? (kb NH3 = 2 x IO"5, ksp Co(OH)3 = IO"43, kf for Co(NH3)3+ = 2 x 1035) MCI 50. A cell is prepared MCI M 1 x 1 0 " % lxlO" 2 M M
SECTION  VI Subjective Questions (Q. No. 47 to 50) 47. Compound (A) C 7 H 7 0 2 N is insoluble dil HCl/NaOH. It does not react with Benzene sulphonyl chloride or acetylchorides. On reduction, with Zn + NH4C1. It forms (B), C 7 H 9 ON which forms silver mirror with Tollen's reagent, and oxidized product (C) C 7 H 7 ON. The compound ( Q can form isomers X and Y on nitration with con. HN0 3 . Find st. of A, B, C, X, Y explain the reaction.
H N02
NH 3 (2M) NH 3 (2M) where MCI is insoluble salt which form complex M^CNHj^ with NH 3 . E cell was 0.118 volts at 25°C. MCI
5
MCI
*3 Nitration of Benzene takes place by above path. kh k2, k3
1X10~5M M it has Another cell is M 1X10~ M NH3(0.01M) NH3(0.1M) emf 0.1179 volts at 25°C. Find value of x, y (formation of complex) [xM* + y NH3 ^ M,(NH3)y complex]
MATHEMATICS SECTION 1 Only One Correct Option (Q. No. 51 to 55) 51. If a is a root of x2 + ax + b = 0 then a 2 is also its root. Let a, b be real, then the number of such quadratic equations is (are) (a) one (b) two (c) three (d) infinitely many The minimum distance of x2  2y2 = 1 from the line y = x is (a) V2 (b) 1/V2 (c) 2V2 (d) 1/2 Which of the following relation represents a hyperbola in (x, y) plane (a) 13x= 1 5 y  3 ± j{yl)(y + 5) (b) 15y = I3x  3 + J(x3)(2x) +7
(c) 15* = I3y + 3 ± yl5x2y
(d) 13x=15y + 3 ± V3 + x  4 x 2 54. Which of the following expressions will NOT admit 2 as a value? (a) IZ21 (b) I Z  l l + IZ+ll (c) IZ1I + IZ2I + IZ+3I (d) I2Z+1I + IZI + IZ1I The digits 1,2,3, , 9 are written in random order to forms a nine digit number. In this how many numbers will be divisible by 11 (a) 11 x 4! 5! (b) 11 x 2 ! x 7 ! (c) 11 x 3! 6! (d) 11 x 9!
P H Y S I C S FOR Y O U IFEBRUARY'08193
One or More Correct Option (Q. No. 56 to 60) The function(s) having a maximum or a minimum is (are) (a) 57  (1  x ) 1 9 (b) 54  (1  x ) 2 8 (c) x17 + x9 + 2x + 1 (d) be81 The limit(s) that do(es) not exist are Vx* (a) lim (1  x) (b) l i m d  x 2 ) 1 7 * (c) (d) lim (x  sin x f v ' x>0 The sum(s) equaling 4" are .2x1/* lim(lxz)
(c) Any other vector can be written as a linear combination of OA, OB, OC (d) OABC will be a quadrilateral. V4x2 , and u,v(u< v) are the roots of 1—x 2 2x  2x  3 = 0, then Match the following ColumnI ColumnII (a) x 6 [2,  1 ] (P) 0 e [0, TT/3] If sin 0 =
(b) x E (  1 , u) ( Q ) 0 E (TT/3, TI/2)
(c) x € (0, 1) (d) x 6 (v, 2)
(R) 0 e (71/2, 0) (S) null set
(2n+1) 2 d ) (b) 2 2 ( g ) ( c ) 2 2 ( t * ) ( d ) 2 ( : *J 4=0 4=0 4=0 4=0 A circle keeps touching the xaxis and the circle x2 + (y  2)2 = 4 externally. The locus/loci of centers of such circles (a) one ray (b) one parabola (c) two parabolas (d) one circle If sin 2x > cos x and x e [71,7i], then x € (a) [71, ti/2] (b) [71/6, ti/2] (a)
(c) [5TI/6, TT] (d) [TI/2, 5JC/6]
SECflON Match The Columns (Q. No. 61 to 64) Let a0, ah a2, and b0, bh b2, be nonzero real numbers. Using the concept of infinite GP, Match the following for the valid type of expansion of 1 fix) ~ x 2  8 x + 15 ColumnI ColumnII (a) for x > 6 (b) for  1 < x < 1 (c) for x < 2 (d) for 3 < x < 5 Vectors (P) (Q)
Let f(x) be differentiable in [  4 , 4] a n d / (  l ) = 0, / ( 1 ) = 4 , / ( 2 ) =  4 , then Match the following where prime denotes differentiation w. r. t. x. ColumnI ColumnII (a) The least number of real (P) one root(s) of f (x) = 0 in [2,2] (is) are (b) The least number of real (Q) two root(s) o f / ' ( 2 x + 1) = 0 in [3/2, 5/2] (is) are (c) The least number of real (R) three root(s) of fix2) = 0 in [V3,V3 ] (is) are (d) The least number of real root(s) of f'(—x2) = 0 in [  7 2 , ^ ] (is) are (S) none
SECTION  IV Comprehension Type (Q. No. 65 to 69) PassageI The mid points iPn) of all the chords of C : x2 + y2 = 1 passing through the point <2(0, 2) are joined with the point /?(1,1). Let (T) be the curve where the mid points of PnR will lie. The equation of F is (a) x2 + y2x2y + 1 = 0 (b) x2 +y2 + x  2y + 1 = 0 2 2 (c) x + y x2y1 = 0 (d) x2 + f x + 2y  1 = 0 The equation of one of the common tangents of C and r is (a) Ay = 3x + 5 (b) 4y = 3x + 5 (c) 3x = 4y + 5 (d) 3x = 4y  6 The equation of the chord of contact of C corresponding to the common tangents is (a) x  2y = 1 (b) x  2y + 1 = 0 (c) x + 2y = 1 (d) x + 2y + 1 = 0
2 anX" n=0
2 v
n
(R) 2 ianxn+bnxn) n=0 (S) none of these OA,OB,OC are such that
3OA + AOB + 6CO = 0 , also OA is not proportional to OB • Match the following Columni ColumnII (a) The points A, B, C will (P) True form a triangle. (b) The vectors (Q) False OA, OB, OC will form a triangle.
PHYSICS FOR Y O U IF B U R '08194 ERAY
PassageII If/w = f~Hx) = (a) (c) xJx2 2 \x\+yjx2 + 4x 2
x < 0 (b)
y2  4x  6y cos 6 + 16 sin 0 + 9 cos20 + 4 = 0. Check that the equation IZ + 1/ZI = 1/2 represents two branches of bounded curves in the Argand plane, find the minimum and maximum distance between them. •x + ^x2 + 4x ,x>0 1.
11. 12. 13. 14. 17.
ANSWERS
(a) 2. (b) 3. (a,d) 7. (a, c) 8 . (a, b, c) 10. aP, bQ, cS, dQ aQ, bR, cS, dP aP,U, bT, cR, dU aQ, bR, cU, dS (b) 18. (b) 19. (a) 10 x IO"8 m, (b) 0.40 (d) 4. (a, c, d) (a, c, d) (b)
5.
+14x1
I x I + sgn (x)yjx2 + 14x1 6. (d) 9. 2
(d)
The number of real roots of the equation/(x) = / _ 1 (x) are (a) none (c) two (b) one (d) more than two
SECTION  V
A s s e r t i o n & R e a s o n (Q. No. 70 to 71)
22.
23. 24.
15. (c) 20. (b) (d) x lO^m or 4 mm
16.
21.
(a) (d)
1 ImgL + kh2
(a) (13/6)P, (b)1.84 P or J z m p or
1+ 
Each question contains statement1 (assertion) and statement2 (reason). Of these statements, mark correct choice if (a) statements1 and 2 are true and statement2 is a correct explanation for statement1 (b) statements1 and 2 are true and statement2 is not a correct explanation for statement1 (c) statement1 is true, statement2 is false (d) both statement1 and statement2 are false. In triangle ABC, if a = 2, b = 2k and ZA = Jt/3. Statement Two triangles are possible if 1 < k < 2/ J3 . A quadratic equation px2 + qx + r= 0 has two real and distinct positive roots if q2 > pr and ^ > 0, and  > 0 P P Let f(x) = sin 3x <Tsin* The limit o f / ( x ) as x — °° does not exist. > If there exists a pair of sequences x„ and x'„ having limiting values and x„ = a = x'„ and if f(xn) * / (x'n) then the limit o f / ( x ) as x —> a does not exist. (Hint: the sequence x„ = nn + a is such that x„ = °° and xn = 1/nn is such that x„ = 0).
(3&/2sj2)P (a) 27. (b)
i
R
1
26. (b) 31. (a, b, c)
28.
32. 34. 36. 37. 38. 39. 42.
30. (a) (b) 33. (a, b, c) (b, d) 35. (a, b, c) aQ,R, bS, cT, dP aQ, T, bP, cR, dR,S aQ, bR, cS, dP,T aR,U, bP, cQ, d  r
(a, c, d)
(a) (c)
47.
CH,
SECTION  VI
S u b j e c t i v e Q u e s t i o n s (Q. No. 72 to 75)
48. 49. 50. 54. 58.
61.
L I f « > 1 a n d / ( n ) = 4 + L ++ r,2++ _ • Find least V _ 4L W ,2 3 2 r 2 n72. positive integers a and b such that a<f(ri)<b.
Let 0<a<2b. Find the least and the greatest values a 2b +of a + 2b 3a + 4b If 0 is real then find the loci of a focus and of a vertex of the family of conics
PHYSICS F O R Y O U I JANUARY '08
62. 63. 64. 67.
Nitrate RC6H6 = RC6D6, Sulphonation NH3 = 30 ml, HC1 = 12 ml 51. (c) * = 1, y = 2 52. 56. (b, d) 57. (c) 55 (a) (b, d) (a, c) 60. (a, b, c) aQ, bP, cP, dR aP, bQ, cQ, dP aP, bQ, cS, dR aQ, bP, cQ, dP 65. 69. (c) 70. (c) (d)
RC6H6 > RC6D6 53. (b) (a, d) (a)
(a) (a)
66. 71.
(b) (d)
a = 1, b = 2 16 9 Jl7 +1 yfVJ —1
73.
min = —, max = — 2 10 =1
74. 75.
(£ ~ 2) 16
AIEEE  2008
PHYSICS 1. The masses and radii of the earth and moon are MVR and Af , R2 respectively. Their centres are a distance d apart. The minimum speed with which a particle of mass m should be projected from a point midway between the two centres so as to escape to infinity is given by 1/2 ^ "G(M, . + M 2„ 1 f W /W t /W ) t ,i X + + V 1/2 ~G(MIV1. M2) 7 . I (b) 2 (a) md d (c) 2. ~G(MlM2)~ md 1/2 G(M]  M2) (d) 2 d
1/2
Practice Paper
A rectangular tank is filled to the brim with water. When a hole at its bottom is unplugged, the tank is emptied in time T. If the tank is halffilled with water, it will be emptied in time
( ) Tl ( ) i 3 b
7.
()I C
(d)
22 ^
If M is the mass of the earth, R its radius (assumed spherical) and G the universal gravitational constant, then the amount of work that must be done on a body of mass m so that it completely escapes from the gravity of the earth, is given by GmM GmM (a) — — (b) R 2R 3GmM 3 GmM (d) (c) v 2R ' 4R A rocket is fired from the earth to the moon. The distance between the earth and the moon is r and the mass of the earth is 81 times the mass of the moon. The gravitational force on the rocket will be zero, when its distance from the moon is
At 40°C, a brass rod has a length 50 cm and a diameter 3.0 mm. It is joined to a steel rod of the same length and diameter at the same temperature. What is the change in the length of the composite rod when it is heated to 240°C ? The coefficients of linear expansion of brass and steel are 2.0 x 10~5oC_1 and 1.2 x IO"5 °C_1 respectively, (a) 0.28 cm (b) 0.30 cm (c) 0.32 cm (d) 0.34 cm 8. Two rods of different materials having coefficients of thermal expansion a and a 2 and Young's modulii YL and Y2 are fixed between two rigid and massive walls. The rods are heated to the same temperature. If there is no bending of the rods, the thermal stresses developed in them are equal provided. (a) (c) 9. (b) y2 ja7
„
3.
(a)
i
(b)
r5
(c)
To
(d)
?
A hydraulic lift is used to lift a car of mass 3000 kg. The crosssectional area of the lift on which the car is supported is 5 x 10 2 m. What is the pressure on the smaller piston, if both the pistons are at the same horizontal level ? Take g = 10 ms~2. (a) 6 x 105 Pa (b) 5 x 105 Pa s (c) 4 x 10 Pa (d) 3 x 105 Pa 5. A block of wood floats in a liquid with four fifths of its volume submerged. If the relative density of wood is 0.8, what is the density of the liquid in units of kg m"3 ? (a) 750 (b) 1000 (c) 1250 (d) 1500
a. A copper block of mass 2 kg is heated to a temperature of 500°C and then placed in a large block of ice at 0°C. What is the maximum amount of ice that can melt ? The specific heat of copper is 400 J kg'1 0C'1 and latent heat of fusion of water is 3.5 x 10s J kg1. 6 10. (b)  k g (C)  k g ( d ) — k g (a)
y, (d) y2
V«1 Cj C
2*
10. A person measures the time period of a simple pendulum inside a stationary lift and finds it to be T. If the lift starts accelerating upwards with an acceleration of g/3, the time period of the pendulum will be r (a) ST V3T (b) —
T
(c) ^
(d) 1 3
Contributed by : Momentum, 1495, Near Stadium, Wright Town, Jabalpur Ph.: 4005358, 4035241.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08196
11. Two identical waves, each of frequency 10 Hz, are travelling in opposite directions in a medium with a speed of 20 cm s_1. The distance between adjacent nodes is (a) 1.0 cm (b) 1.2 cm (c) 1.5 cm (d) 2.0 cm 12. Two parts of a sonometer wire, divided by a movable knifeedge, differ in length by 1 cm and produce 1 beat per second when sounded together. If the total length of the wire is 100 cm, the frequencies of the two parts of the wire are (a) 51 Hz, 50 Hz (b) 50.5 Hz, 49.5 Hz (c) 49 Hz, 48 Hz (d) 49.5 Hz, 48.5 Hz 13. How is the interference pattern in Young's double slit experiment affected if the sodium (yellow) light is replaced by red light of the same intensity ? (a) The fringes will vanish (b) The fringes will become brighter (c) The fringe width will decrease (d) The fringe width will increase 14. In Young's double slit experiment, the slits are separated by 0.28 mm and the screen is placed 1.4 m away. The distance between the fourth bright fringe and the central bright fringe is measured to be 1.2 cm. What is the wavelength of light used in the experiment ? (a) 200 nm (b) 400nm(c) 600 nm (d) 800 nm 15. In Young's double slit experiment the slits are 0.5 mm apart and interference is observed on a screen placed at a distance of 100 cm from the slits. It is found that the 9th bright fringe is at a distance of 9.0 mm from the second dark fringe from the centre of the fringe pattern. What is the wavelength of light used ? (a) 2000 A (b) 4000 A (c) 6000 A (d) 8000A 16. In a cathode ray tube, the electrons are subjected to a potential difference of 182 V. The maximum speed acquired by the electrons is (a) 106 ms"1 (b) 2 x 106 ms"1 6 1 (c) 4 x 10 ms" (d) 8 x 106 ms"1 17. In Millikan's oil drop experiement, a charged oil drop of mass 3.2 x 10~14 kg is held stationary between two parallel plates 6 mm apart by applying a potential difference of 1200 V between them. How many excess electrons does the oil drop carry ? Take g = 10 ms"2 (a) 7 (b) 8 (c) 9 (d) 10 18. The maximum energy K nm of photoelectrons emitted in a photoelectric cells is measured using lights of
various frequencies v>. The graph in figure shows how Kmm varies with u. The slope of the graph is equal to (a) the charge of an electron (b) the charge and mass ratio of an electron (c) the work function of the emitter in the cell (d) Planck's constant. 19. The distance of the closest approach of an alpha particle fired at a nucleus with kinetic energy K is rQ. The distance of the closest approach when the alpha particle is fired at the same nucleus with kinetic energy 2K will be (a) 2r 0 (b) 4r 0 (c) ^ (d) ^
20. The radius of a nucleus is (a) proportional to its mass number (b) inversely proportional to its mass number (c) proportional to the cube root of its mass number (d) not related to its mass number. 21. Which one of the following nuclear reactions is not possible ? (a) (b)
12 9
C + 12C
?0°Ne+«He
s 3 Li
Be+jH
+ ^He + "He
(c) "Be + JH (d) 3Li + jHe
9 4Be
\ L + \°B V
22. In pure silicon at 300 K the electron and hole concentration is each equal to 1.5 x 1016 m3. When doped with indium, the hole concentration increases to 4.5 x 1022 m3. What is the electron concentration in doped silicon ? (a) 3 x 109 nr 3 (b) 4 x 109 m 3 9 3 (c) 5 x 10 nr (d) 6 x 109 nr 3 23. A piece of copper and another of germanium are cooled from room temperature to 80 K. The resistance of (a) each of them increases (b) each of them decreases (c) copper increases and that of germanium decreases (d) copper decreases and that of germanium increases 24. A full wave rectifier is fed with ac mains of frequency 50 Hz. What is the fundamental frequency of the
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '08
17
ripple in the output current ? (a) 25 Hz (b) 50 Hz (c) 75 Hz (d) 100 Hz 25. In a transistor circuit, the collector current is 9.8 mA and the base current is 0.2 mA. The current gain (3 is (a) 48 (b) 49 (c) 50 (d) 51 26. The electrical conductivity of a semiconductor increases when electromagnetic radiation of wavelength shorter than 2480 nm is incident on it. The band gap (in eV) for the semiconductor is (a) 0.9 (b) 0.7 (c) 0.5 (d) 1.1 27. A uniform sphere of mass M and radius R exerts a force F on a small mass m situated at a distance of 2R from the centre O of the sphere. A spherical portion of diameter R is cut from the sphere as shown in figure. The force of attraction between the remaining part of the sphere and the mass m will be
(a) 2(KI + K2) (c) (Kl + K2)
(b) ~(Kl (d) \(Kl
+
K2) K2)
+
30. Two persons A and B, each carrying a source of sound of frequency u, are standing a few metres apart in a quiet field. A starts moving towards B with a speed «. If v is the speed of sound, the number of beats heard per second by A will be X)u (a) — (c) t)u
( v + M)
(b)
W
(d)
2vu v vu
(VK)
31. In Young's double slit experiment, the 10th maximum of wavelength X, is at a distance y t from its central maximum and the 5th maximum of wavelength X2 is at a distance y2 from its central maximum. The ratio of y/y2 will be 2X, 1X2 X^ X.0 (d) (a) (b) (c) 2X, 32. The maximum kinetic energies of photoelectrons emitted from a metal are Kl and K2 when it is irradiated with lights of wavelength X and X2 respectively. The work function of the metal is K + K2X2 i\ • K2X2 (a) (b) X2 — X^ X2 + Xx
K,K
28. A glass tube of radius r is dipped vertically into a container of mercury with its lower end at a depth h below the mercury surface. IfCTis the surface tension of mercury, what must be the gauge pressure of air in the tube to blow a hemispherical bubble at the lower end ? 2c , (a) — + hg p r (c) — +hg P r (b) (d) r
4o
(c)

K2Xx
+
X2 —
(d)
X2 +
hg p i. hg p
33. A 1 MeV positron and a 1 MeV electron meet each moving in opposite directions. They annihilate each other by emitting two photons. If the rest mass energy of an electron is 0.51 MeV, the wavelength of each photon is (a) 5.1 x IO3 A (b) 10.2 xlO" 3 A 3 (c) 8.2 x 10 A (d) 6.2 x 10 3 A 34. The current gain (P) of a transistor in common emitter mode is 40. The change in collector current by 160 mA at constant VCE, the necessary change in the base current is (a) 0.25 i.A (b) 4 iA (c) 4 mA (d) 40 mA 35. The circuit shown in figure contains two diodes D1 and D, each with a forward resistance of 50 ohms and with infinite backward resistance. If the battery voltage is 6 V, the current through the 100 ohm resistance (in amperes) is
29. Two rods A and B of different materials are welded together as shown in figure. If their thermal conductivities are K{ and K2, the thermal conductivity of the composite rod will be
A B
k2
24
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '198
• —
Dl
150
Q
m m 50 £2 MV. ' IM 100 Q iiyu Tmi (c) 0.03 (d) 0.036
38. When a plane electromagnetic wave travels in vacuum, the average electric energy density is given by (here E is the amplitude of the electric field of the wave) (a) ^ e 0 £ 2 (b) \z 0 E 2 a (c) 2e 0 £ 2 (d)
4P F
D2
ll—
6 V
(a) zero
(b) 0.02
36. The binding energies per nucleon for 2H and jHe respectively are 1.1 MeV and 7.1 MeV. The energy released (in MeV) when two 2 H nuclei fuse to form 4 He is (a) 4.4 (b) 8.2 (c) 24 (d) 28.4 Photoelectric emission is observed from a metallic surface for frequencies l), nd u, of the incident light Cu, > u2). If the maximum values of kinetic energy of the photoelectrons emitted in the two cases are in the ratio 1 : n, then the threshold frequency of the metallic surface is nv1  v2 •u,  D 2 (a) (b) n1 n1 /!t),  Dj (d) (c) n1
39. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of length L suspended from the roof of a vehicle which moves without friction down an inclined plane of inclination cc, is given by (a) (c) (b) 2jc g since (d) 2k gtanoc
40. A slab of stone of area 0.34 m2 and thickness 10 cm is exposed on the lower face to steam at 100°C. A block of ice at 0°C rests on the upper face of the slab. In one hour, 3.6 kg of ice is melted. Assume that the heat loss from the sides is negligible. The latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.4 x 104 J kg1. What is the thermal conductivity of the stone in units of J s  W C  1 ? (a) 1.0 (b) 1.5 (c) 2.0 (d) 2.5
CHEMISTRY 64 gm of an organic compound contains 24 gm of carbon, 8 gm of H,and the rest oxygen. The empirical formula of the compound is (a) CH 2 0 (b) C,H,0 (C) CH 4 0 (d) C 2 H 8 0 2 42. Two compounds have the structural formula CH3  O  CH,  CH3 and CH3CH3CH,OH is an example of (a) Metamerism (b) Functional isomerism (c) Positional isomerism (d) Chain isomerism 43. The order of decreasing stability of the carbanions (1) (CH3)3C (3) CH 3 OI, (a) 1 > 2 > 3 > 4 (c) 4 > 1 > 2 > 3 (2) (CH 3 ) 2 CH (4) C 6 H 5 01 2 is (b) 4 > 3 > 2 > 1 (d) 1 > 2 > 4 > 3 The predominant product formed, when 3methyl2pentene reacts with HOC1 is CI OH I I (a) C H 3  C H 2  C  C H  C H 3 CH3 CI CI I I CH3CH2CCHCH3
(b)
Alkene RCH = CH, and B,H6 react readily with H 2 0, and the product on oxidation in alkaline medium produces (a) RCH,CHO (b) RCH,CH,OH RCCH, (d) R  C H  CJH2 , (c) w J II OH OH O 20
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '08
CH, OH I (c) CH^ — CH2 — C — CH — CH^ 1 1 CH3CI CH3OH I I (d) C H 3  C  C H  C H 3 CH3 Which of the following reaction is expected to give a hydrocarbon product readily in good yields. (a) * C O O K S S f > (b) /?COOAg ———>
(c)
CI, CH3ch3^>
KMnO,
KOH/H
(d)
(ch3)2chc1»^
CH2_CH2
O?
A
, product X in the above (b) glucose ' (d) all of the above
(b) Ne > Ar > Kr > He > Xe (c) Xe > Kr > Ar > Ne > He (d) Ar > Ne > He > Kr > Xe Which of the following statement is not true regarding transition elements? (a) They readily form complex compound. (b) They show variable valency. (c) All their ions are colourless. (d) Their ions contain partially filled d electron. Acidified solution of chromic acid on treatment with hydrogen peroxide yields (b) Cr 2 0 3 + H , 0 + 0 2 (a) Cr0 3 + H , 0 + O, (d) H 2 Cr 2 0 7 + H 2 0 + 0 2 (c) Cr0 5 + H~0 Which of the following is not a transition metal ? (a) Chromium (b) Titanium (c) Lead (d) Tungsten Which of the following is expected to form colourless complex ? (a) Ni2+ (b) Cu+ (c) Ti3+ (d) Fe3+ An organic compound has been found to possess the empirical formula CH,0 and molecular wt 90 . The molecular formula of it is (a) C 3 H 6 0 3 (b) CH 2 0 (C) C,H 6 0 2 (d) C 2 H 2 0 IUPAC name of the compound CH, CH3 — CH2 — CH CH,  CH •• CH, — CH, — CH3 I CH /\ CH 3 CH 3 (a) (b) (c) (d) 4 Isopropyl1, 6dimethyloctane 3Methyl5(l'methylethyl) octane 3Methyl5isobutyloctane 6Methyl4( 1 'methylethyloctane)
reaction is (a) ethylene glycol (c) ethanol
Reaction of phenol with dil HN0 3 gives (a) p and mnitrophenol (b) o and /jnitrophenol (c) Picric acid (d) o and mnitrophenol The ester among the following is (a) calcium lactate (b) ammonium acetate (c) sodium acetate (d) none of these SO. Hinsberg's reagent is (a) ( O ^ C O N H 2
(C)
C H
(b) COC1
3
(d)
COC1
When methyl iodide is heated with ammonia the product obtained is (a) methylamine (b) dimethylamine (c) trimethyl amine (d) mixture of all the three amines given in choices Which of the following halides is least stable and has doubtful existence ? (a) CI4 (b) Gel4 (c) Snl4 (d) Pbl4 In the nitrogen family the H  M  H bond angle in the hydride MH3 gradually becomes closer to 90° on going from N to Sb. This shows that gradually (a) the basic strength of hydrides increases. (b) almost pure /7orbitals are used for M  H bonding. (c) the bond energies of M  H bond increases. (d) the bond pairs of electrons become nearer to the control atom. Which is used as hydrogen generators ? (a) NaH (b) HI (d) None of these (c) S6H3 Solid PC15 exist as (a) PC15 (c) PCI " (b) PC14+ (d) PC14+ &PC16"
Benzene reacts with CH3COCl in the presence of AlCl3to give (b) C6H5COCl (a) C6H5C1 (d) C6H5COCH3 (c) C6H5CH3 The compound most likely to decolourise a solution of KMnO.is (a) CH3CH3 (b) i L j J
(c) CH3CH = CHCH2CH3 (d) (CH3)4C Acquired immuno deficiency syndrome (AIDS) is characterised as (a) killer Tcells
The correct order and solubility in water for He, Ne, Ar, Kr Xe is (a) He > Ne > Ar > Kr > Xe
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '08 200
(b) Reduction in number of Tcells (c) An auto immune disease (d) Inability of body to produce interferons Which of the following is a correct statement ? (a) Troleins are amino acid (b) exHydrogen is present in fructose (c) Starch is a polymer of aglucose (d) Amylose is compound of cellulose Dacron is obtained by the condensation polymerisation of (a) dimethyl terephthalate and ethylene glycol (b) terephthalic acid and formaldehyde (c) phenol and phthalic acid (d) phenol and formaldehyde Nitrobenzene gives Nphenyl hydroxyl amine by (a) Sn/HCl (b) H„/PdC (c) Zn/NaOH (d) Zn/NH4C1 Which of the following set of elements doesn't belong to transition elements set (a) Fe, Co, Ni (b) Cu, Au, Ag (c) Ti, Zr, Hf (d) Ga, In, T1 Which of the following will show increase in wt. when kept in magnetic field ? (a) Ti0 2 • (b) Fe2(S04)3 (c) KMn0 4 (d) ScCl3 The proton on the phenol must be removed to start the reaction. Why is the phenolic proton acidic (I) Electron withdrawing group are present (II) The anion is stabilised by resonance (III) The phenol is a carboxylic acid (a) I only (c) I & II only (b) II only (d) I & III only
74. Which of the following turns solution cloudy immediately ? (a) > C H 2 O H CH9 — CHo 1 (b) CH3CH2CH2 • C  O H I " CHo — CHt (c) CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH  OH CH, (d) OH ZCH=CH2 » Z = C H 2  C H 2  B r which of the following substituent might be best suited for Z ? (a) CI (b) S0 3 H (c) OCH 3 (d) CH3 Rate of reaction is generally influenced by change in solvent and its polarity. Which of the following combination (SN2 reaction, reactanteffect on rate) is correct, when solvent polarity is increased ? L = leaving group Nu_ = nucleophile (a) R  L + Nu small decrease in rate (b) R  L + Nu" Large decrease in rate (c) R  L+ + Nu  small decrease in rate (d) None of these Aq. solution of A on treatment with HC1,H2S gives black precipitate. Thus which of the following cationic species must not be in the compound A ? (a) Hg+ (b) Pb2+ (c) Bi3+ (d) Cd2+ The correct nucleophilicity order in DNF (a) CH," > OH" > NH2" > F > I (b) CH3 > OH" > NH2~ > r > F~ (c) R > F > OH" > NH2 > CH3 (d) CH3" > NH2" > OH" > F > r The dissolution of Al(OH)3 by a solution of NaOH results in the formation of (a) [A1(H20)4(0H)2]+ (b) [A1(H20)3(0H)3] (d) [A1(H20)6(0H)3] (c) [A1(H20)2(0H)4]"
HBr
Which of the following compound is optically inactive ? CI CI
(b)
<s <, d
o~CHj
The correct increasing order of extent of hydrolysis in the following compounds is (a) CC14 < MgCl, < A1C13 < SiCl4 < PC15 (b) CC14< AlCl 3 <MgCl 2 <PCl 5 <SiCl 4 (c) A1C13 < MgCl2 < CC14 < PC15 < SiCl4 (d) SiCl4 < MgCl2 < A1C13 < PC1S < CC14
The observed relative reactivities of alcohol towards reaction with a hydrogen halide are 3° > 2° > 1°. If secondary alcohols underwent an SN2 reaction with a hydrogen halide rather then SN1 reaction. The relative reactivities of the three classes of alcohol would be (a) same (b) 2° > 3° > 1° (c) 2° > 1° > 3° (d) 3° > 1° > 2°
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '08
MATHEMATICS r dx J ^ ^ T T T 7 ^ " equals (a) Vl + x 4 , 5 + c (c)  V l + x 4 ' 5 + c  dx = Alog (b) x 3 (l + x 4 , 5 )" 2 + c (d) none of these V T v  i + B , then A V l  x 2 +1 (c) 1 (d) The coordinates of a point on the line x + y = 3 such that the point is at equal distances from the lines Ixl  lyl are (a) (0,3) (b) (0,0) (c) (3,0) (d) (0,3) If a, b, c are in A.P., a, x, b are in G.P., and b, y, c are in G.P., then (x, >') lies on (a) a st. line (b) a circle (c) a parabola (d) an ellipse. The equation of the circle whose radius is 5 and which touches the circle x2 + y2  2x  Ay  20 = 0 at the point (5, 5) is (a) x2 + y2+ 18x + I6y + 120 = 0 (b) x2 + y2  18x  \6y + 120 = 0 (c) xr + f  18x+ 16y+ 120 = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 18x  16} + 120 = 0 The circle x2 + y2  6x  lOy + k = 0 does not tpuch or intersect the xaxis and the point (1,4) lies inside the circle, then (a) 25 < k <29 (b) 9 < £ < 2 5 (c) 9<k<29 (d) none of these The length of the latusrectum of the parabola 169{(x  l)2 + (y  3)2} = (5x  12v + 17)2 is (d) 7c (a)
82. If
f—7=i viequals
J
(a)
(b)
When ne N, the value of \{x]dx t where [x] is the o greatest integer function, is n(n 1) (a) n(n  1) (b) (c)
a
n(n +1)
(d) none of these
f nsinCTtlog^x) v ' V'* I n~ J " " equals (b) 2 (c) 271
(a)  2
12
13
(b)
14 13
(c)
28 13
(d)
25 ^
Area enclosed by y = 1 and ± 2x + y = 2 (in square units) is (a) ~ (b) ^ (c) 1 (d) 2
Area enclosed between the curve y ~ x"3, the yaxis and the line y =  1 , y = 1 is (a) 0 (c) (b) \
Consider the equation of the parabola y2 + Aax = 0, where a > 0. Which of the following is false ? (a) Vertex of the parabola is at the origin (b) Focus of the parabola is (a, 0) (c) Directrix of the parabola is x = a (d) Tangent at the vertex is x = 0 x y The eccentricity of the ellipse ~ + 77 = 1 , whose a b latusrectum is half its minoraxis is (a) (c) J~ . 2
(d) none of these
The integrating factor of the differential equation dy — (xlogx) + y = 21ogx is dx (a) e* (b) logx (c) log(logx)
3
A
I
(b)
72
(d) none of these
(d) x
Family y = Ax + A of curves is represented by the differential equation of degree (a) three (b) two (c) one (d) none of these 24
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '202
The foci of an ellipse are (0, ±1) and minor axis is of unit length. Then the equation of the ellipse is (b) x2 + 2y2 = 2 ' (a) 2x2 + y2 = 2 2 2 (c) 4x + 20y = 5 (d) 20x2 + 4y2 = 5 The equations represent jeR
(a) a circle (c) an ellipse
(b) a parabola (d) a hyperbola
value of 9 is: (a) 2nn±—neZ 3 (b) 2nn±—,neZ 6 neZ
12 persons are to be arranged to a round table. If two particular persons among them are not to be side by side, the total number of arrangements is (a) 9(10!) (b) 2(10!) (c) 45(10!) (d) 10! All the letters of the word 'EAMCET' are arranged in all possible ways. The number of such arrangements in which two vowels are adjacent to each other is (a) 360 (b) 144 (c) 72 (d) 54 Two persons throw a pair of dice alternatively till one gets a total of 9 and wins the game. If A has the first throw, then the probability that A wins the game is 9 (a) ^ (b) n (c) 1/2 (d) none of these If mean of a binomial distribution is 3 and its variance . 3 is —, then number of trials is (a) 6 (c) 12 (b) 2 (d) none of these
(c) /m + (  l ) —, w e Z (d) nn + —,
At a point A, the angle of elevation of a tower is such 5 that tangent is — , on walking 240 m nearer the 3 tower, the tangent of the angle of elevation is ~ . Then the height (in m) of the tower is (a) 220 (b) 225 (c) 224 (d) none of these If x = sin~'k, y = cos~lk,  1 < k < 1, then the correct relationship is (a) x + y = 2 (b) xy = 2 n n (c) x + > ' = '2 (d) x " y = Two forces act at an angle of 120°. The greater force is represented by 80 kg and the resultant is at rt. angles to the lesser. The lesser force is (a) 60 kg (b) 40 kg (c) 50 kg (d) None of these The resultant of two forces, each equal to P in magnitude acting at an angle a is of magnitude R and the resultant of P and ~ R acting at rt. angles is 2D of magnitude ^ R. The value of a is (a) TI/2 (c) 71/3 (b) TT/6 (d) none of these
The minimum value of sin0 cos© is 1 (a) 1 (O  (b) 0
(d)
\
Iii a triangle ABC, cosecA (sinB cosC + cosB sinC) is (a) c/a (b) ale (c) 1 (d) none of these If in a AABC 4cosA cosB + sin2A + sin2B + sin2C = 4 then the triangle is (a) equilateral (b) only right angled (c) isosceles and right angled (d) none of these In a triangle ABC, (a + b + c)(b + c  a) = Xbc if (a) 0 < A.<4 (b) l > 4 (c) ? i < 0 (d) X > 0 In a AABC, if Rr (sinA + sin/? + sinC) = 96, then the area of the triangle in square units, equals (a) 24 (b) 48 (c) 72 (d) 96 The perimeter of a triangle, rightangled at C, is 70, and the itiradius is 6,1 a  b\ equals (a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 7 (d) 9 1 If  sinO, cosO and tanG are in G.R, then the general
A particle moves in a st. line and its law of motion is given by s2 = 3 t2 + 2t + 4. Show that the acceleration varies as 1 1 1 1 (a) — (b) (c) (d) ~7 s s s Displacement in time t is (a) * = (c) s = tu + (b) s = ^t{u + v) (d) s = tv
The mean wage of 1000 workers in a factory running in two shifts of 700 and 300 workers is Rs. 500. The mean wage of 700 workers working in day shift is Rs. 450. The mean wage of workers working in the night shift is (a) Rs. 570 (b) Rs. 616.67 (c) Rs. 543.67 (d) none of these
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '08 203
If each observation of a raw data whose variance isCT2,is increased by X. then the variance of the new set is (a) c 2 + X . (b) Cj~ + A.2 2 2 (c) a /. (d) none of these If S.D. of n observation xv x2 , xn is 7 and another set of n observations yv y2 , yn is 8, then S.D. of n observations xx  y{, x2  y2, ,xn yn is (a) 1 (c)  1 (b) (d) none of these
ANSWERS 1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26% 31. 36. 41. 46. 51. (b) (a) (a) (d) (c) (c) (a) (c) (c) (a) (d) 2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. (a) (c) (b) (d) (c) (a) 3. 8. 13. (C) (d) (d) 4. (a) (c) 14. (c) 19. (c) 24. 29. (d) (d) 5. (b) 10. (b) 15. (c) 20. 25. (c) (b)
18; (d) 23. (d) 28. (a) 33. (c) 38. (a) 43. 48. 53. (b) (b) (d)
32. (a) 37. (b) 42. 47. (b) (a)
34. (c) 39. (a) 44. (b) 49. (d) 54. (a) 59. (c) 64. (c) 69. 74. (d) (b)
30. (a) 35. (b) 40. (a) 45. (c) 50. (b) 55 (d) 60. (b) 65. (b) 70. (b) 75. (b) 80 (d) 85. (a) 90. (b) 95. (c) 100. (a) 105. (a) 110. (c) 115. (b) 120. (a)
If G is the G.M. of the product of K sets of observations, with GM 'SGVG2 GF. respectively, then G is equal to (a) logG, + logG2 + + logGK (b) logGjlogG^ logGK
(c) GXG2 GK
56. (c) 61. (a) 66. (c) 71. (c) 76. (a) 81. (c) 86. (b) 91. (b) 96. (d) (a) 106. (d) llil. (b) 11)6. (d)
52 (d) 57. (c) 62. (b) 67. (a) 72. (c) 77 (d) 82. (c) 87. 92. 97. (b) (c) (d)
58. (c) 63. (d) 68. 73. 78. (d) (a) (d)
(d) none of these. The relationship between mean, median and mode for a moderately skewed distribution is (a) Mode = Median  2 Mean (b) Mode = 2 Median  Mean (c) Mode = 3 Median  2 Mean (d) Mode = 2 Median  3 Mean Variance is independent of (a) origin only (b) scale only (c) origin and change of scale (d) none of these.
83. (b) 88. (a) 93. (c) 98. (a) 103. (c) 108. ( a ) 113. (b) (c)
79. (c) 84. (b) 89. 94. 99. (a) (b) (c)
102. (c) 107. (a) 112. (c) 117. (d)
104. (c) (b) 114. (b) (c)
Forthcoming Competitive Exams
CBSE PMT Preliminary Exam IITJEE West Bengal JEE MGIMS CBSE AIEEE AFMC BHU PMT Screening BITSAT CBSE PMT Mains Exam DPMT DCE BHU PMT Mains : , ' April 6 April 13 April 20 April 20 April 27 May 4 May 7 May 9 to 12 June May 11 May 18 May 31 June 15
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08204
r
CMC According to new pattern 5PCPMT Manipal PMT
PMT Haryana I Kerala PMT ( Raj. PMT
(
TNPCEE
CET Karnataka
1.
A 20 kg block is initially at rest on a rough horizontal surface. A horizontal force of 75 N is required to set the block in motion. After it is in motion, a horizontal force of 60 N is required to keep the block moving with constant speed. The coefficient of static friction is (a) 0.38 (b) 0.44 (c) 0.52 (d) 0.60 The total kinetic energy of a rolling sphere having translational velocity v is (a) —Mv2 10 2 (c) — Mv (b)  M v 2 2 (d) — Mv2
(c) 8.12 rad/sec 7.
(d) 35.26 rad/sec
A particle is thrown with velocity u making an angle 9 with the vertical. It just crosses the top of two poles each of height h after 1 s and 3 s respectively. The maximum height of projectile is
(a) 9.8 m (c) 39.2 m 8.
(b) 19.6 m (d) 4.9 m
3.
A car accelerates from rest at a constant rate a for some time, after which it deaccelerates at a constant rate P and comes to rest. If the total time elapsed is t, then the maximum velocity acquired by the car is (a) (c) tx + P ap V ( a + P)f a2  p2 ^ ap V apt (d) a +p
A man slides down a light rope whose breaking strength is r times his weight. What should be his maximum acceleration so that the rope just not breaks? (a) g ( l  r i ) (b) i) g (c)  J — (d) _ J _ i+T) in Three equal weights A, B, C of mass 2 kg each are hanging on a string passing over a fixed frictionless pulley as shown in m figure. The tension in the string connecting weights B and C is (a) zero (b) 13.0 newton (c) 3.3 newton (d) 19.6 newton
(b)
ap
Which of the following pair does not have similar dimensions? (a) Stress and pressure (b) Angle and strain (c) Tension and surface tension (d) Planck's constant and angular momentum 5. The speed of a boat is 5 km/h in still water. It crosses a river of width 1.0 km along the shortest possible path in 15 minutes. The velocity of the river water is (in km/h) (a) 5 (b) 1 (c) 3 (d) 4 If 2 kg mass is rotating on a circular path of radius 0.8 m with angular velocity of 44 rad/sec. If radius of the path becomes 1 m. then what will be the value of angular velocity? (a) 28.16 rad/sec (b) 19.28 rad/sec
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O l I FEBRUARY '08
10. A cricketer catches a ball of mass 150 g in 0.1 sec moving with speed 20 m/s, then he experiences force of (a) 300 N (b) 30 N (c) 3 N (d) 0.3 N Two equal masses ml and m2 moving along same straight line with velocities + 3 m/s and  5 m/s respectively collide elastically. Their velocities after collision will be respectively (a) + 4 m/s for both (b)  3 m/s and + 5 m/s (c)  4 m/s and + 4 m/s (d)  5 m/s and + 3 m/s
6.
12. A body of mass M is hung by a long thread and a bullet of mass m hits it horizontally with a velocity v and gets embedded in the body. Then for the body and the bullet system (a) momentum M m M+m
19. A cube is s . : _ ; c t i : . compression. If the sioc : : 1%, the bulk strain is (a) 0.01 (b) 0.02 (c) 0.03
(d; 0.06
(b) kinetic energy = 4 m v2 (c) momentum = W+m)mv M m2 v 2 (d) kinetic energy = 2 (M+m) 13. Moment of inertia of a uniform rod of length L and mass M, about an axis passing through L/4 from one end and perpendicular to its length is (a) ~ML2(b) ~ML2(c) ~ML2 (d) Mf
If the surface tension of water is 0.06 Nm 1 , then the capillary rise in a tube of a diameter 1 mm is (cos 0 = 0°) (a) 1.22 cm (b) 2.44 cm (c) 3.12 cm (d) 3.86 cm 21. If the r.m.s. speed of a gas molecule at 27°C is 100\/2 m s 1 . The r.m.s. speed at 327°C would be (a) 100 ms"1 (b) 200 ms"1 1 (c) 300 ms" (d) 400 ms1. 22. Surface tension of water is 0.072 Nm '. The excess pressure inside a water drop of diameter 1.2 mm is (a) 240 Nm"2 (b) 120 Nm"2 2 (c) 0.06 Nm(d) 72 Nm"2 23. If X denotes the wavelength at which the radiative emission from a black body at a temperature T K is maximum, then (a) (b) 7"' (c) KT* (d) Xm does not depend on T 24. The temperatures Tx and T2 of heat reservoirs in the ideal Carnot engine are 1500°C and 500°C respectively. If increases by 100°C, what will be the efficiency of the engine? (a) 62% (b) 59% (c) 65% (d) 100% 25. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a gas is found to be proportional to the cube of its absolute temperature. The ratio CjJCv for gas is (a) 4/3 (b) 2 (c) 5/3 (d) 3/2 26. A particle is performing simple harmonic motion along xaxis with amplitude 4 cm and time period 1.2 sec. The minimum time taken by the particle to move from x = + 2 t o x = + 4 c m and back again is given by (a) 0.4 s (b) 0.3 s (c) 0.2 s (d) 0.6 s 27. Velocity of a body moving in simple harmonic motion, is (a) (ti2y]a2 + y2 (c) o>/a2 + y2 (b) c o J a 2  y 2 (d) or J o
14. Two particles having mass M and m are moving in a circular path having radius R and r. If their time periods are same, then the ratio of angular velocity will be (a) R_ R (b) R r (c) 1
15. A wheel having moment of inertia 2 kg m 2 about its vertical axis, rotates at the rate of 60 rpm about this axis. The torque which can stop the wheel's rotation in one minute would be (a) Nm (b) JL Nm (c) ~ Nm (d) Nm
16. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on earth then increase in potential energy of a body of mass m upto a distance equal to twice the radius of the earth from the earth surface is (a) \mgR (b)  mgR (d) \mgR
(c) 2 mgR
17. A cylindrical vessel is filled with water up to height H. A hole is bored in the wall at a depth h from the free surface of water. For maximum range, h is equal to (a) H/4 (b) HI2 (c) 3H/4 (d) H 18. If S is stress and Y is Young's modulus of material of a wire, then the energy stored in the wire per unit volume is (a) 2Y 2Y
s
2
(C)
S 2Y
(d) 2 S2Y
28. Two infinite plane parallel sheets, separated by a distance d have equal and opposite uniform charge densities o. Electric field at a point between the sheets is
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '08 206
(a) depends upon location of the point a (b) 2e 0 (d) zero (0 f
(a) 2 : 1
(b) 4 : 1
(c) 1 : 2
(d) 1 : 1
29. A charge Q (0.C is placed at the centre of a cube, the flux coming out from any face will be (a) (c) Q xlO 6e, Q 24 en (b) Q_ xlO" 6e 0 (d) Ben
35. The maximum power drawn out of the cell from a source is given by (E = emf of a cell, r  internal resistance of a cell) (a) £2/2 r (b) E2/4 r (c) E2/r (d) E2/3 r 36. The magnetic field due to a current carrying circular loop of radius 3 cm at a point on the axis at a distance of 4 cm from the centre is 54 uT. What will be its value at the centre of the loop? (a) 250 (xT (b) 150 iT (c) 125 iT (d) 75 jiT. 37. A charged particle moving with velocity 2 x 103 m/s passes undeflected through electric and magnetic fields. Magnetic field is 1.5 tesla. The electric field intensity is (a) 2 x 103 N/C (b) 1.5 x 103 N/C 3 (c) 3 x 10 N/C (d) 4/3 x 10"3 N/C 38. To produce a magnetic field of n tesla at the centre of circular loop of diameter 1 m, the current flowing through loop is (a) 5 x l O 6 A (b) 107 A (c) 2.5 x 106 A (d) 2 x 106 A 39. The magnetic moment of a current I carrying circular coil of radius r and number of turns N varies as (a) 1/r2 (b) Hr . (c) r (d) r 2 40. The current flowing in a coil of self inductance 0.4 mH is increased by 250 mA in 0.1 s. The e.m.f. induced will be (a) + 1 V (b)  1 V (c) + 1 mV (d)  1 mV 41. For the series LCR circuit shown in figure, what is the resonance frequency and the amplitude of the current at the resonating frequency?
8 mil
30. Elecric field at the centroid of a triangle carrying q charge at each corner is (a) zero (0 4  * * V2 r (b) 72 Kq 3 Kq
31. As per a point charge + q is placed at the origin O. Work done in taking another point charge  Q from the point A [coordinates (0, a)] to another point B [coordinates (a, 0)] along the straight path AB is (a) (c) qQ 1 47te 0 a 2 72 a
qQ l ja_ 47t£0 a2'42
32. Two wires of same metal have the same length but their cross sections are in the ratio 3 : 1 . They are joined in series. The resistance of the thicker wire is 10 Q. The total resistance of the combination is (a) (5/2) Q. (b) (40/3)Q (c) 40 Q (c) 100 Q 33. The figure shows a network of currents. The magnitude of current is shown here. The current I will be s. ISA
220 V © 44 C
20 p F
SAv
(a) 2500 rads" and 5 7 2 A (b) 2500 rads"1 and 5 A (c) 2500 rads"1 and
1
1
72 '
(a)
(d) 23 A
(d) 250 rads" and 5 7 2 A 42. Soap bubble looks coloured due to (a) dispersion (b) reflection (c) interference (d) none of these
Two resistors whose value are in ratio 2 : 1 are connected in parallel with one cell. Then ratio of power dissipated is
24
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08207
Two waves of same frequency, but of amplitudes in the ratio 1 : 3 are superimposed. The ratio of maximum to minimum intensity is (c) 3 : 1 (d) 1 : 3 (a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 4 The radius of curvature of a thin planoconvex lens is 10 cm (of curved surface) and the refractive index is 1.5. It the plane surface is silvered, then the focal length will be (a) 15 cm (b) 20 cm (c) 5 cm (d) 10 cm If convex lens of focal length 80 cm and a concave lens of focal length 50 cm are combined together, what will be their resulting power? (a) + 6 . 5 D (b)  6.5 D (c)  0.75 D (d) + 7 . 5 D An electron of charge e is liberated from a hot filament and attracted by an anode of potential V volts positive with respect to the filament. The speed of the electron of mass m when it strikes the anode is (a) eV2 (c) yj2e/mV (b) meV (d) peV/m
^
= 0.38 Kinetic energy of rolling sphere
= — Mv2 + — /to 2
2
2
For sphere, I = —MR and Rat = v to KE = ^Mv2 + 2 2 1 ,, 2 , 1 ,, 2 7 w 2 = — Mv +Mv = —Mv
VM
2
2
3.
(<J):
A A
l =
V
max.=
a f
l
= Vmax
Pf2 Vmax
But t=t1 + t2 =
a a + pN ap
At any instant, the ratio of the amount of radioactive substances is 2 : 1. If their half lives be respectively 12 and 16 hours, then after two days, what will be the ratio of the substances? (a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 4 Complete the equation for the following fission process L Z 1 „Kr90 + . • '2TT + Jt 143 ,Xe145 (a) 4 Xe + 3 Qn' (b) 54' 142 (c) 57 Xe (d) 54 Xe 142 + 0nl The part of a transistor which is heavily doped to produce a large number of majority carriers is (a) base (b) emitter (c) collector (d) none of these The following configuration of gate is equivalent to
p a(3 or a + (3 Tension is force, and surface tension is force/length so they do not have the same dimensions. The resultant velocity of boat and river = 1.0 km/0.25 h = 4 km/h. Velocity of river =  42 = 3 km/h Mass (m) = 2 kg; initial radius of the path (r^ = 0.8 m; initial angular velocity (coi) = 44 rad/sec and final radius of the path (r2) = 1 m. Moment of inertia, I, = mr,2 = 2 x (0.8)2 = 1.28 kgm2 and J2 = mrl = 2 x (l) 2 = 2 kgm2. Therefore from the law of conservation of angular momentum /jCD, = I2o\ C02= 28.16 rad/sec. 1 2 Using the relation, s = ut + ^ at , we have 1 2 h = u cos 0 f j  £ Sh = u or u cos 0 x 1 1
cos6
a
/jXCOj _ 1.28x44 or ta2 = — — ~ 2
1 2 h ~ 2 Sh
x 9.8 x l 2 1 x 9.8x3
= u cos 0 x 3 (a) NAND (c) OR (b) XOR (d) none of these SOLUTIONS F = \iR = \iMg '5 = Ll x 20 x 9.8 for static friction or
u cos 0 (3  1) = 4.9 x (9  1) = 4.9 x 8 4 9x8 u cos 0 = — — = 4.9 x 4 = 19.6 m/s u2 cos2 0 _ (19.6)2 = 19.6 m 2x9.8
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08208
Max. height 
mgR~ma mg  r mg = ma mg (1  ri) = ma, a = g (1  rj) Let Tbe the tension in the string. Let the bodies B and C accelerate downwards with acceleration a. Then the body A moves upwards with acceleration a. Therefore, for motion of body A Tmg = ma ...(i) For motion of body B and C 2mgT=2mxa ...(ii) . Adding (i) and (ii), we get uT 2 mg  mg  3 ma or a = gl3. For motion of body C mg  Tl = ma or Tl=m(ga)m(ggi3) T1 = 2 mg/3 = 2x2 x 9.8/3 = 39.2/3 = 13 N F =m = (150 x 1(T3) x ^ = 30 N
Horizontal range will be maximum if dRIdh = 0. i.e. 2x^(hH or h2yU2x(H 2h) =0
H = 2h or ft = H/2 Energy stored per unit volume
1 1 stress 1 S2 = — x stress x strain =  x stress x ——— = — — Let L be the length of each side of cube. Initial volume = L3. When each side decreases by 1%, new , u r' r L L length L = L  — = 99 W New volume = L'3 = (99 L/100) 3 Change in volume, A V = L 3  (99 L/(100) 3 or = LJ AV = L 3Z? 100 [neglecting higher order term] Bulk strain = AV 3L 3 /.100 = 0.03 V h = 2 S cos 9/ r p g
When m] = m,, the velocities are just exchanged after perfectly elastic collision. mv Velocity of system = ^ + m 1 J K.E. of system = ^ ( M + m )
,,,
/
mV
\2
1 j
m 2V 2
2x0.06xcos0° ... in_2 = —r 5 = 2.44 x 10 m = 9 44 cm 10 x 0 . 5 x 1 0 x9.8 Vr.m.s.o'JT (v r . m ,Ji _ [K= ( r.m.sh
or v
Applying theorem of parallel axes, I = I0 + M (L/4) 2 As co= be same i.e.
CO,
Ml} ^ ML2 7 , „2 ~~12~ "T6~ = 48 2n and T is same, therefore, 0) must
1(27 + 273) \ (327 + 273)
1300 = _ L _ V600 ^2
0>r.m.sh = (Vr.m.s)l V2 = (100V2) x V2 = 200 ms" 1 _ 2S 45 4x0.072 P = — = — =.. .  1 = 240 Nm D 1.2x10" According to Wien's law = b
15. (a Here, / = 2 kg m 2 , Uj = 60 r.p.m. = 1 r.p.s. T = ?, U2 = 0, t •• 1 min = 60 s I (co2 •co,) _ I 2n (\>2 t = 7a = = 2x271(01) 7t = _ "60 15 Change in potential energy of body is \R GMm + 2R) ( GMmx R
23.
1 Am oc — y Tl = 1500 + 100 = 1600°C = 1600 + 273 K = 1873 K T2 = 500°C = 500 + 273 = 773 K ri = i _ ZL —1 _ 713_ _ 1100 1 Tx 1873 1873 T,= x 100% = 59% P
AU=
2 G M m 2 /GM \ 3 { R2 )mR = mgR 3R Horizontal velocity of water flowing out of hole UyJYgk Height of hole from ground level = (H  h). The time taken by water to cover vertical distance (H  Ii) can be calculated from (Hh) = ±gt
2
T3 or ~ = constant or PT'3 = constant T For an adiabatic change, PT
lY
= constant
ort =
yj2(Hh)/g
Y =  3 or  3 + 3 y = Y or 2 y = 3 or y = 3/2 _ lY When particle is at x = 2, the displacement is y = 4  2 = 2 cm. If t is the time taken by the particle to go from x = 4 cm to jc = 2 cm, then
Horizontal range, R = ut = yflgh. x yj2 ( H  h ) / g = 2y]h(Hh)
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08209
y = a cos (Dt = a cos or
COS
2nt
27it = acos^ ^
v Charged particle is undeflectei => E = vB = 2 x 103 x 1.5 N/C = 3 x 103 N/i 38. (c) or / =
B =
2nt y 2 1 n L 2  = a = 4 = 2 = C°S3 2t 1 ¥ = 0.2s or o L2 = 3 0 1 1 Time taken to move from x = + 2 cm to x = + 4 cm and back again = 2 t = 2 x 0.2 s = 0.4 s Displacement equation of S.H.M. is y = a sincor. Therefore velocity (by differentiating it) (v) = —=acocoscttf = aa> Jl^ sin 2 at V ' dt = awJl~ 28. ( c ) : E =G>y]a2
Ho 2tc7
2X71X0.5
2.5 XlO6 A Ho 4txx10 Magnetic momentM = NIA =NIn i2 i.e. Ldl (250x10~ 3 ) 40. (d): E = = (0.4X10" 3 )X v dt " 0.1 = 10" 3 V =  l m V Here, /? = 44£2,L = 8 m H = 8 x 10"3 H C = 20 p F = 20 x 10"6 F 1 (Dr = 1 VZC ^8xl03x20xl0^ 1 4x10"
0
2Br _
r2
"e„ A cube has six faces. Therefore, electric flux
104 • = 2500 rad s"
Q xlO" 6 — o t0 Symmetry shows that resultant of three forces on unit charge at the centroid of triangle would be zero. q( Q) coming out from any face = Initial P.E. at A = Final P.E. at B •• =
_ E 0 _ %/2 Ev _ V2 x 220 = A R ~ R ~ 44 Interference in thin films causes colouring of soap bubble. Here, 7 = ^ ; £ 3 > y = (pl) r ^n J_ (£ + a) 2 _ ( 3 + l) 2 = 4:1 (fefl) 2 ( 3  1 ) 2
g(6) 47te„a Work done = change in P.E. = V2Vl = 0 For the same length and same material, Aj _ 3 h. =  or R2=3R{ The resistance of thick wire, Ry = 10 Q. The resistance of thin wire = 3Rl = 3 x 10 = 30 Q. Total resistance = 1 0 Q + 30£2 = 4 0 Q Apply Kirchhoff's first law.
= (15  1 ) ( i  Z T o ) = ^
or F = 20 cm F 20
R,
When plane surface is silvered, / = y = — = 10 cm •50 " 2 D =1 100 . 2 5  2 =  0 . 7 5 D or vJYeVTm = J§ = 16;
48
4
The maximum power is drawn from the cell, when external resistance of cell is equal to the internal resistance i.e. R = r E E' Max. Power P  R+r r+r 2r Field along axis of coil B =  , „ ... 2(R + x ) At the centre of coil, Ml_ vpi„,2(R B~2R
B =
p=7«p4: sot=H
p=p1+100 p2
eV = ~mv2
No. the half lives : 48 16
=
q
12/
< 1 2 /
8
^ 2R 2 \3/2 2x3/2 +x'y'z _ (Rz + X'y
=
/V, v ^ L  i v L i ^ x i . W2 A^o 16 1 2 ' N2 2 42 ' /V, Applying conservation of mass no. and Charge no., only (a) is correct Emitter is heavily doped. Output of G, = (A + B); Output of G 2 = A f i ; Output of G 3 = (A + B). AB = (A + B)(A + B) = AA + AB + BA + BB = AB + BA [since A A = 0,BB = 0] ••
Bx(R2+X2)312
^
or
_ 54x[(3) z + ( 4 ) 2 ] 3 / 2 _ 54x125 27 (3) B' = 250 pT.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08210
y = a cos cut = a cos 2nt
01 COS
27it 2
y
=
2711 • a cos 1.2 1 7C
COS
v Charged particle is undeflected => E = vB = 2 x 103 x 1.5 N/C = 3 x 103 N/C _ ji0 271/ 38. (c): B =
471
Ty=a
or
4= 2=
=
3 or
' =T Time taken to move from x = + 2 cm to x = + 4 cm and back again = 2 t = 2 x 0.2 s = 0.4 s Displacement equation of S.H.M. is y = a sincof. Therefore velocity (by differentiating it) (v) = ~=acocosG» = ao) VIsin 2 cor dt = aco J1  — = co yfa2 28. (c) E=°A cube has six faces. Therefore, electric flux Qx 10 6 coming out from any face = —7~r—
O Cq
or
U=\
a 2 s
/ ^ = ° 7 5 = 2.5xlO^A Ho 47txl0 ' Magnetic moment Af = NIA = N In r2 i.e.
3
2 X n X
r2
Ml (250 xlO" ) in_3, 8 = —  =  (v0 . 4 x 1 0 7 ) x dt 0.1 = 10 3 V =  l m V Here, R = 44 Q, L = 8 m H = 8 x 10~3 H C = 20 ( F = 20 x IO"6 F X 40. (< co co =
1 *_= . •JLC ^8xl0~3x20xl0"6
Symmetry shows that resultant of three forces on unit charge at the centroid of triangle would be zero. q( Q) Initial P.E. at A = V, = 4 n E fl t> „ Final P.E. at B =V2 = 9(~Q)
1 104  = 2500 rads" 4 4 xlO" 4 _E0 _ y/l Ev _ yfl X 220 ; /„ = 5 V2 A 0 R R 44 Interference in thin films causes colouring of soap bubble.
re
' ^
=
3'
I^QafQ1)
2
"
4
"
1
Work done = change in P.E. = V2  Vx = 0 For the same length and same material, R2 A, 3 —  — =  or = 3R] 1 The resistance of thick wire, Rl = 10 £2. The resistance of thin wire = 3R1 = 3 x 10 = 30 Q. Total resistance = 10Q + 30£2 = 4 0 Q Apply Kirchhoff's first law. p = Yl or P°=—• s o ^  = ^ = i R R' P2 R1 2 The maximum power is drawn from the cell, when external resistance of cell is equal to the internal resistance i.e. R = r r?2 nl Max. Power P ' R+r r+r 2r (i0iR Field along axis of coil B =  . .... 2(R + x ) ' Ufii At the centre of coil, B = ~ B' B _ 2R ^iR Bx(R2+x2y
y2(R~+x ) 2 A
=(L51>(irio)
=
^
or F =20 cm
F 20 When plane surface is silvered, / = y = — = 10cm 7> = L00 = 100 =
P
1 2 5 D
_ 100 100 2 ~ f2 "  5 0 " P = P1+P2 = 1.252 = 0.75 D «V =  m v 2 or v = y/2 eV/m 48 No. the half lives : ^ = j y = 4
n 2_
_48_3 . 16 ' N0
^ N0
=
/lV=JL. \2) 16'
& = (lf=i /Vq \ 2 / 8
2R 2 \3/2 z
(.R'+x2)
3/2
R
3
16 1 2 ; /V2 2 2 ' /V, Applying conservation of mass no. and Charge no., only (a) is correct Emitter is heavily doped. /V2 Output of Gj = (A + B); Output of G2 = ~AB; Output of G 3 = (A + B). Afi = (A + B)(A + B)
B'
R3 54x[(3) 2 h(4) 2 ] 3/2 (3)3
54x125 27
= AA + AB + BA + BB = AB + BA [since AA = 0,BB=0]
or
B' = 250 (iT.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08211
Train Your Brain
•JI'JU^HW' iyjM
Canadian Physics Olympaid Problems
DATA Speed of light Gravitational constant Radius of Earth Mass of Earth Radius of Earth's orbit Aceleration due to gravity Fundamental charge Mass of electron Mass of proton Planck's constant Coulomb's constant c = 3.00 x 108 m/s G = 6.67 x 10 " Nm2/kg2 3 RE = 6.37 x 10 km 24 ME = 6.0 x 10 kg
RES= 1.50 x 10s km
A* reaches the other end first? B, (a) ball A (b) neither, since both arrive at the same time (c) ballS (d) ball A, but only if the dip is deep enough. 4. To a good approximation, Earth and Jupiter move around the Sun in circular orbits of 1.49 x 108 km and 7.79 x 109 km radius, respectively. What is the maximum error that can arise in the prediction of solar eclipse times (as observed from Earth) on Jupiter caused by one of its moons if one fails to take into account the variation of the relative position of the two planets? (a) 2.6 x 10 3 s (b) 3.1 x 103 s 2 (c) 5.0 x 10 s (d) 9.9 x 102 s. 5. Experiment shows that two perfectly neutral parallel metal plates separated by a small distance d, attract each other via a very weak force, known as the Casimir force. The force, F, depends only on the Planck constant h, on the speed of light c, and on d. Which of the following has the best chance of being correct for F ? (a) F = held 2 (b) F = held 4 2 (c) F = hd /c (d) F = dVhc. 6. A simple pendulum of length L with a bob of mass m is taken into Earth orbit on the International Space Station. Its frequency of oscillation with respect to that on the ground is (a) greater (b) smaller but nonzero (c) the same (d) zero. 7. When you turn on a batteryoperated portable musicplaying device, how long must you leave it on for electrons leaving the negative terminal of the battery to reach the positive terminal if their path lies within good conductors? (a) a few milliseconds (b) a few tenths of a second (c) a few microseconds (d) a few minutes. 8. Circuit A is made of resistors connected in series to a battery; circuit B is made of resistors connected in parallel to a battery. Let P be the power drawn from the
g = 9.80 m/s2 e = 1.60 x 10"19C me = 9.11 xlO 3 1 kg mp = 1.673 x IO*27 kg h = 6.63 x IO"34 Js 1/4TI e0 = 8.99 x 109 Jm/C2
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS WITH ONE CORRECT OPTION 1. A child throws a ball toward the front end of an approaching train. The collision between the ball and the train is perfectly elastic. Let v be the speed of the ball with respect to the train and V its speed with respect to the ground. If the labels '/' and ' / ' refer to those speeds just before and just after, respectively, the ball hits the train, then (a) v; = vf and V( < Vf (b) v, < vf and V, < Vf (c) v; > V/and Vj<Vf (d) v, = vf and V; > Vf. 2. A physics textbook of mass m rests flat on a horizontal table of mass M placed on the ground. Let Na b be the contact force exerted by body 'a' on body 'b'. According to Newton's 3 rd law, which of the following is an actionreaction pair of forces? > (a) mg and /Vtable — book On + M)g and NMe —>book (b) (c) ^prnnnd —^ table ground (d) Aground and Mg + Nground > hook table andtwo identical balls, A and B, are set /Vtable _ 3. At some time t, rolling without slipping at the same speed from one end of two tracks which are identical with the same horizontal length, except that track B has a dip in the path of ball B, as shown in the figure. The straight portions of the tracks are horizontal. Gravity is uniform throughout. Which ball 24
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '212
batteries. As the number of resistors in each circuit is increased, (a) PA increases and PB decreases (b) both Pji and PB increase (c) PA decreases and PB increases (d) PA and PB remain the same 9. According to a simplified but still useful model, the drag force due to air resistance on a moving car goes like the square of the car's speed v. Suppose that the maximum speed of a car is limited only by this drag force. If the power of the car's engine were increased by 50%, the top speed of the car would increase by about (a) 50% (c) 22% (b) 15% (d) 30%
13. An object of mass m hangs motionless from a vertical spring. When the object is pulled down to a new rest position, the total mechanical energy of the system (a) increases (b) remains the same (c) decreases (d) may increase or decrease depending on the new position. 14. As more and more negative electric charge is being brought to a conducting sphere, inside the sphere (a) the electric field and potential increase (b) the electric field stays constant and the potential increases (c) the electric field stays constant and the potential decreases (d) the electric field increases and the potential decreases. 15. A static magnetic field of about 0.01 T in strength can erase data on the magnetic strip of a credit card. What would be roughly the minimum diameter of along straight wire carrying a 100 A current for which your card would be safe no matter how close you take it to the wire? (a) 0.2 mm (b) 1 mm (c) 2 mm (d) 4 mm. 16. A string of length L is composed of two segments of equal length. One segment has linear mass density e , and the other e 2 * G i O n e segment is tied to a wall, and the string is stretched by a force, applied to the other segment, which is much greater than the total weight of the string. If 7; is the tension in the segment, and v; the speed of a transverse wave propagating along that segment, (a) V] = v2 and Tj = T2 (b) V] # v2 and TX = T2 (c) v, = v2 and TL * T2 (d) Vj * v2 and T, * T2 17. A perfectly straight portion of a uniform rope has mass M and length L. At end A of the segment, the tension in the rope is TA\ at end B it is TB > TA. The tension in the rope at a distance LL5 from end A is
(a) (c) TbXTA (4TA + TB)/5 (b) (d) (TA + (TA x TB)/5 TB)/5.
10. A projectile is launched with an initial velocity vi; with v k and vly the horizontal and vertical velocity components, respectively. When is there a point on its trajectory after launch where its velocity is perpendicular to its acceleration? (a) (b) (c) (d) always only if v k ^ 0 and viv points upward only if * 0 always, except if = 0.
11. Three charged conducting metal spheres, of radius Rx, R2, and R3, are connected together by wires. Let Rt < R2 < R3. At equilibrium, which of the following sets of relations involving the electric field strength E generated by a sphere, its potential V, and its charge Q, must hold between the spheres?
(a) (b) V, = V 2 = V 3 , VJ = V2 = V3, < E2 < E3, E,>E2> E3, QI<Q2< Q3QI<Q2<Q3.
(c) VJ<V2< (d) v,>v2>
V3, EL<E2<E3, v3, E1<E2<
Q, = Q2 = Q3.
E3, Gl > Ql > e 3 .
12. A ball of mass m attached to an inextensible string of length R in swung around a vertical circle just fast enough so that the string is always fully stretched. Let AT denote the difference between the tension in the string at the bottom and at the top of the circle, vb and v, the speed of the ball at the bottom and at the top, respectively. Then, taking dependence to be with respect to a set of independent variables, (a) AT is independent of R, vb and v, (b) AT is independent of R, but depends on v2b x v2 (c) AT depends on R, but on neither vb nor v, (d) AT depends on R, and v2h x v2
18. Two spheres are identical except that sphere A is white whereas sphere B is black. After they have been in thermal contact long enough with each other and their surroundings, in the visible range, (a) A radiates less than B (b) Both emit the same amount of radiation (c) A radiates more than B (d) A radiates more than B only if its temperature is high enough. 19. An aircraft bound for Vancouver and coming from
PHYSICS FOR YOU I FEBRUARY '08
83
24. A horizontal cathode ray tube (CRT) is set so that its electron beam produces a spot of light at the centre of the screen when no external electromagnetic field is present. When you look straight at the screen, however, you discover that the spot, instead of being at the centre as it should, is shifted a bit to the right. Suspecting what the cause of this deflection may be, you rotate the CRT 20. You are on the shore of a canal of uniform width d by 180° around its vertical axis. Facing the screen, you and want to reach a point a distance L > d away along the find that the spot of light is still shifted to right of centre other shore as quickly as possible. To achieve this, you by the same distance as before. You conclude that the first run along the shore at constant speed v b then jump CRT is immersed in in the canal and swim directly toward your target at (a) an electric field directed horizontally to the left with constant speed v 2 < v,, both being your maximum speeds. respect to the screen's initial position The water in the canal is motionless. The angle of your (b) an electric field directed horizontally to the right with trajectory in the water with respect to the shore must obey respect to the screen's initial position (c) a magnetic field directed vertically upward with (a) cos0 = v,/v2 (b) cos0 = yfvf/v^ « 1 respect to the screen's initial position (c) cosO = 1 « d/L (d) cos© = v2/v,. (d) a magnetic field directed vertically downward with respect to the screen's initial position 21. Exactly half of a rectangular conducting loop lies in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of 25. Light rays from a very distant source travel along the loop. At some point in time, the magnitude of the the + x direction. Two identical thin lenses with focal magnetic field starts rapidly decreasing. While this is length / > 0 and their optical axis along x, sit, one at happening, which of the followings statements most x = 0, and the other at x = d </. Where do the rays focus? accurately describes the effect on the loop? f ( f  d ) (a) The loop is pulled into the magnetic field (b) d + ^ d (a) d+ 2f —d (b) The loop is pushed out of the magnetic field (c) The loop starts rotating ,, d  /(/"A (C) d+ <d> d + j2TT) 2(f + d) (d) The behaviour of the loop cannot be determined unless the direction of the magnetic field is completely specified. 22. Two otherwise identical spaceships have different solar sails: sail A is a perfect reflector, sail B is a perfect absorber. Each starts at the same distance from the Sun and travels radially outward. Let ApA and ApB be the momentum gained by the ships after travelling equal distances. Then (a) ApA = ApB (b) ApA>ApB
(c) APA<APB (d) ApA = ApB = 0.
Montreal is flying due west. Its body and wings are covered in aluminium. At some point on its flight path, the Earth's magnetic field points north and downward. The point on the plane's exterior which is then at the highest potential is (a) the nose (front) (b) the tail (back) (c) the tip of the right wing (d) the tip of the left wing
(d) all of the previous equally.
SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS Problem 1 A magnetohydrodynamic v (MHD) generator is a device ©_ OB that converts part of the kinetic © . • T fY ' VMM.t energy of a streaming hot gas nl f into electrical energy. At its operating temperature of between 2000 and 3000 K, the gas is readily ionised. As schematically shown in the figure, the ions and electrons enter a region between two electrodes (here, parallel conducting plates of area A separated by a gap d) in which a uniform and constant magnetic field B has been set up, pointing straight out of the page. Their initial velocity v is parallel to the plates. A resistor R is connected to the plates. The magnetic field is strong enough that many charged particles will hit the electrodes and charge them before they can exit. This creates a timevarying potential difference Vbetween the plates.
23. If there were only one transmitter, and you were separated from this transmitter by the many tall buildings to be found in downtown Toronto, spaced about 30 m apart on average, with which of the following would you be most likely to experience dead spots (places with very poor or no reception)? (a) AM radio stations (frequency 1 MHz) (b) FM radio stations (frequency 100 MHz) (c) cell phones (frequency 1000 MHz) 24
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '214
(a) On a diagram, display all the forces acting on a sits a mast carrying a square sail, assumed to be always positive ion at some generic position between the parallel to the length of the hull, Attached to the bottom plates. Use your diagram to show that the ion j of the hull is a keel in the shape of a square always parallel experiences a braking force as soon as its velocity ; to the sail. A heavy lead weight forms the bottom of the has a component transverse to the plates. keel under water. Other than the lead weight, consider (b) Then, a crude approximation, assume that any mast, sail, hull, and keel to be weightless. Somewhat electric field E arising from the process is uniform unrealistically (it would make tacking difficult), you can everywhere between the plates. Assume also that the also assume that the sail extends all the way from the transverse component of the velocity of the charges bottom to the top of the mast. remains everywhere much smaller than its (a) Establish a relationship between wind speed and the longitudinal component, and that the latter therefore angle 6 the mast will tilt away from its initial upright is pretty uniform. The gas obeys a generalised Ohm's position when a wind with speed v blows law, according to which J=o(E + vxB), where J is perpendicular (initially) to the sail. Other assumptions the transverse current density between the plates and may be made so long as they are explicity stated and, C is the conductivity of the gas. 7 as much as possible, justified. Obtain an expression for the current / flowing In this simplified model, is this boat stable in all wind through the resistor in terms of v, B, and R. speeds? Since you may not be able to find a general (c) Derive an expression for the output voltage V that solution for the angle 0 as a function of v, you are does not explicitly contain R. welcome to obtain solution valid only for small 0 or for large 0. The expansion (1 + x)n = 1 + nx + ... for Problem 2 x « 1 may be useful. A 1000 kg satellite is orbiting the Earth at an altitude (b) The following data, lossely based on the Catalina of 400 km. It receives electrical power from a solar panel Capri 16, are given for a small sailboat. Area A of of area A = 10 m2. At this altitude. Earth's atmosphere sail is 12 m2, mass M of lead weight 190 kg, depth d 11 3 is very tenuous, with a density p = 10 kg/m . of keel below water level, technically known as draft, Nevertheless, over time, the friction force generated by 0.75 m, height h of mast 6.6 m, specific gravity of collisions of the molecules and the panel might cause lead, supposed to be the part at the bottom of the the satellite to lose altitude. keel that acts as a stabiliser, 11.3. Also, air density is (a) Assume that in such collisions, the molecules 1.2 kg/m3. become embedded in the solar panel. If the satellite With these date, at what wind speed will 0 be 30°? is moving at speed v, find an expression for the 60°? maximum retarding force on the solar panel in terms of p and of the radius of the satellite's orbit. Make SOLUTIONS any other reasonable assumption. 1. (a) : In elastic collision, linear momentum is (b) Estimate how much altitude the satellite might lose conserved. over one week because of this friction. If you make Now considering momentum of ball with respect to train, assumptions, do not forget to justify them briefly. Pi ~ mvr Pf ~ mvf (c) Somebody claims that as the satellite loses altitude m is mass of ball. v it also loses speed because of the friction. Comment v Pi = Pp •'• mvi = mvp i = vf briefly. Now considering momentum of ball with respect to Problem 3 In a mood for some physics as you look at a sailboat on a lake, you wonder about its stability when a strong wind blows from the side. The sailboat leans over in the wind and the question in whether its keel can prevent it from being blown over completely. Analyze the stability of the sailboat using the following oversimplified model. Consider the hull of the sailboat as an straight hollow cylinder. On top of this cylinder and perpendicular to it ground. Pi = mVt; PfmVf To find Vj, we use the relation, lm2u2 v = (m,w2)«1  1 m{ + m2 m} + m2 m, = m (mass of ball) m2 = M (mass of train) u] = Vi (initial velocity of ball with respect to ground) u2 = V (initial velocity of train with respect to ground) v, = V, (final velocity of ball with respect to ground)
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08215
y f
=(mM)Vi

m+M
2mV (m + M)
it is clear,
Vj i.e. V, < V
Hence option (a) is correct.
in series to a battery V volt. Equivalent resistance in series, Rs 2 nR = y2 y Power of circuit A is P. = — = — 4 Rs nR
2.
(d):
Circuit B : Let n equal resistors are connected in parallel to a battery. Equivalent resistance in parallel R ~R
R
p~n Power of circuit B is,
T/2 T v/ 2
If N. ground—stable AL table—» ground' (c) : Speed of ball A remains same throughout its path but speed of ball B increases as it falls through the dip. As speed of ball B increases, its will take less time than A to reach other end. 4. (d) 5. (a): F h" cb dc F=khacbdc where k is a constant. [F] = [hf [c]» W ML T 2 = (ML2 T 1 )". (LT 1 ) 6 (L)c ML I " 2 = M a . l 2 a + b + c . T ~ a ~ b Equating power on both sides, we get 2a + b + c = 1 ab=2 From (ii) & (iv),  1  b =  2; •(i)
(.M+m)g is action, then its reaction must be
R H Now, Pi A 1 and P„<* n B n As n increases, PA decreases and PB increases Hence, option (c) is correct.
x
=n
T 2 y/ z
...(ii)
9.
( b ) : Drag force due to air resistance, F °= v2 where v is top speed of car.
(given)
F=kv2
...0)
where k is a constant. Now, power of car engine, P = F.v. •; P  kv2.v using (i) P = kv3 Taking log both sides we get log P = log k + 31og v On differentiating we have, dP = Mv = > 5 0 % = 3 . H 4 dP = 0 + 3± dvP v ... ^ = = 16.6% (max). v 3 Hence, top speed of car may increase by 15%
...(ii) ...(iii) ...(iv) {l+b) = 2
\+b = 2[ Q From (iii), 2a + b + c = 1 or 2 x l + l + c = l ; 2 + l + c = l c = 1  1 + 2; 1 c =  2  Put value of a, b and c in (i) we get F = k h1 c1. dr2; d2
10. ( b ) :
Hence, the best change of correct F is F = he 6. (d) : Time period of simple pendulum, T = 2n — \8
v =
vjx remains constant through the journey. i.e v k t 0; viy always points (viy = 0 at max height) vertically upward and g always acts vertically downward. Hence, option (b) is correct.
Frequency of simple pendulum, v 7. 8.
v = 0.
1
fg 11. ( b ) :
g = 0 at International space station (d)
(c): CircuitA: Let n equal resistors R are connected
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08216
C j = 47te0 JRj
C 2 = 47t£0 R2 C 3 = 4m 0 R 3 After connecting the wires, the system of spheres acquire a common potential. (V) i.e. V=V1 = V2= V3. Now Cj = QXV 4TI80 RR Q1V 47l£0 4K£n 47ien •Rn • f l , e3=V As flj < fl2 < fl3
QI<Q2< G
3
where e is linear mass density. :. v1= [f~ — ^ v2 = [f e2 Ase,*e2
17. (c) ;Mass of rope = M Length of rope = L For entire rod AS, At point P, ^ T T ^ M IL\ ~ A = —\JJC
LIS
l
TnT,=Ma
„.(i)
Again E p £ o c1
KQ
fl~
4tte 0 fl
flz
:

47ten
1
4Z./5
i.e. smaller the radius, higher the electric field with common potential E1>E2> E3 Hence, option (b) is correct. 12. (a) T, = 0 Tb = 5 mg Change in tension, A T= TbTt AT=5mgQ AT = 5mg AT is independent of fl, vb and vr 13. (a) ;Work done by spring  —kx Mechanical energy of springmass system in (b) goes on increasing with the elongation 14. (e) 15. (d) .Magnetic field at P due to a long straight wire carrying current 7, is B=
10"
A
A
TTA TTA
= f a = \ UTBTA] 5] using (i)
T  T ^ ^ J  A . ,T _ TR 4 TA ~ 5 +1a 5 " 5 + 5 (4TA+TB) 5 18. (a) A black body is a perfectly absorber as well as a perfectly radiator. Therefore, Body A radiates less than body B.
1
T
2
19. (c) Magnetic field at nose and tail of aircraft is zero. Magnetic field at right wing of aircraft (BR) is greater than magnetic field at left wing of aircraft (B f )
B
r >
B
L
Hence, right wing of aircraft is at higher potential than its left wing.
y
Vancover (West) Nose B= 0 ,eft w i n g
B
Right w i n g y
.27 471 r 2x10"
0.01 =
10"7x 2x100
o
<
Montreal
(East)
Tail 5 = 0
2x10 = 2x10 m 10"2 r = 2 mm diameter of wire, d=2r\ d = 4 mm 16. (b) ;Tension on the string strictly depends on value of external force applied on it here, external force F is constant and very large. Hence, T, = Tr Further, we know that, velocity of L/2L/2transverse wave on i<—• < • >p T *P r— string is given by
20. ( d ) : t a n 0 =  ^ Given that: v2 < v, 0 is small „ 21. (a) 22. (b) : Perfect reflector spaceships suffers greater change in momentum than perfect absorber spaceships. i.e ApA>ApB.
217
v?
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY '08
23. (c) ^ 24. (c) 25. (d): I f / ' is equivalent focal length of combination, then, _J_ = J_ f f ~ f ~ f 1 _2f J_ f
2
d_ /"/
r r r= (2 ff  d )
2
—d
Now, using lens formula for equivalent lens ~ ~ ~
J_
1
1
f (2 f  d )
1
_2
f
1
fd
momentum of individual particles when they collide with the panel. Since the molecules are absorbed, they come to rest and the change is equal to the incident momentum itself. If n is the number of molecules per unit volume, the number that strike the panel per unit of time, or flux, is equal to the product of n with the surface A of the panel and the component of the molecule's velocity perpendicular to the panel. The momentum of an individual incident molecule perpendicular to the panel is its mass m times the component of its velocity perpendicular to the panel. Since nm = p, the mass density of the molecules, this gives F = pAv2, with v the average speed of the molecules with respect to the panel, when the flux is perpendicular to it. We assume that this average speed is that of the satellite in its orbit, ie we neglect the intrinsic motion of the molecules, whose average speed with respect to the Earth is an order of magnitude lower than the satellite's speed (~ 7 km/s.) Then, with r the orbital radius of the satellite, F = pAco2r = pA(4n 2 /7 2 )r (T is the period of the orbit) = pA(GM/r2)r (Kepler's third low) pAGM/r (b) The rate what which energy is lost because of this retarding force is P = F • v =  Fear. Again, from Kepler's third law, co =  J C M / r ' , and we obtain P = pA(GM / r3)3/2 To find the resulting rate of change in radius, we observe that the total energy of the satellite is E =  GMm/lr. If we calculate AE = E2  Ex corresponding to Ar = r2  r,, we see that if we can assume that Ar « ru r2, then we can approximate r 2 = rx = r, so that AE = (GMm/2r2)Ar, from which immediately follows Ar = (2r2IGMm)PAt so long as we can assume that the rate of energy loss is small and constant on the time scale of interest. Combining with the second boxed equation above yields.
2 f
2
fd
or
(2 f  d ) d+ f2 (2 f  d )
Hence, the rays focussed at a distance
from x = 0. Problem 1 (a) In the figure below, the electric force FE and the magnetic force F B on the ion are displayed. The resultant net force F has a centripetal component (perpendicular to the trajectory), which does not change v, and a tangential component opposite v which slows down the ion. (b) Assuming that v remains approximately longitudinal, in a first approximation the transverse current density is J=a(vBE) Since the potential difference V between the plates is equal to Ed as well so to RI, we can write the current I as I = JA = Aa(vB  IR/d) Solving for / gives vBd d/aA+R (c) Since V = RI, we can solve for RI in the nexttolast equation and obtain V = vBd Id I OA Problem 2. (a) The force on the panel, or the rate momentum change, is equal to the product of the number of molecules that strike the panel per unit of time with the change of
Inserting numbers and At ~ 6 x 105 s (a week), gives Ar = 6 k m The answer is consistent with out assumption of reasonably slow orbit decay, but it also shows that the satellite would not stay very long in orbit unless it gives itself a small compensating boost quite often.
24
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08218
Problem 3. (a) Similar to problem 2, the initial force exerted by the wind on the sail is F = pAv2, \ „i where p is air density, A the Xk area of the sail, and v the wind 'VTV/VVV>I/\A/VVV i »lead 1 speed. When the mast is tilted at angle 0 with respect to the vertical, the component of the force perpendicular to the sail is pAv2 cos 2 0. This force exerts a torque about the hull, with moment arm )jh cos0. The total torque of the wind force is then
bracket is obviously a mass, and it is well known that v has the same dimensions as J g d Let us rewrite the previous expression after inserting cos 2 9 = 1  sin 2 0. (1  sin 2 0) 3 =  ^ j  sin 2 0 2M  i ^ s s . \ M g d where B = A p Ah
XW = pAhv2
cos 3 0
A countertorque is provided by the lead mass at the bottom of the keel. We should take into account the buoyancy of the lead. If M is the mass of the lead, then its net weights is (1  p w a t e / p i e a d ) M g. The moment arm is d sin0, so that the opposing torque from the keel is
P water Plead
This is a cubic equation which is not that easily solved if you don't have a good calculator or a computer at hand. Nevertheless, one can look at the small angle solution using the binomial expansion (1  sin 2 0) 3 = 1  3 sin 2 0. Then, in the limit of small 0 angles, sin0 =
1
M
gdsin0
V(3 + B 2 /v 4 ) One sees that 0 increases smoothly with v, as expected. In the largeangle approximation, for 0 approaching 90°, it is best to recast out result for v in terms of cosQ. v2 _ 1  cos 2 0 B2 ~ (cos 2 0)3
=
Imposing the condition for equilibrium, iw = xk, and solving for v, we obtain
1/2
1_ (cos2 0)3
in the limit of lar
§e
6
2 V =
I
Pwater Read
Mgd sin 0
pAftcos 3 0
Then we get immediately sin0 = x/l  ( f i 2 / v 4 ) " 3 This is seen to approach 1 smoothly more important, there exists a solution. Thus, the range 0 < v < °° maps smoothly to the range 0 < 0 < 90°, so that equilibrium can be maintained at any finite speed. (b) Inserting the date yields v = 4.5 m/s for 0 = 30° and = 13.6 m/s for 0 = 60°
where 0 is not the equilibrium angle. Writing the answer in this form makes it easy to check that dimensions are correct, since the denominator in the
U I M M is m O L E rnmMrn QT NN I
MTG UGET Manipal Explorer's available with a CD to give you thoroug! practice of the online examination on your home PC Frea 
; ® •Hiside
CD CONTAINS3 Very Similar ONLINE tests as per latest pattern
Each test covers 240 questions (i) Physics  60 (ii) Chemistry  60 (iii) Biology  80 (iv) English & General Aptitude  40
f^OK'UNlv, Mwmml
Price : Rs. 350
BOOKS
Available at leading bookshops throughout India.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I FEBRUARY'08219
Thought Provoking Problems III Electronics
1. An npn transistor in a common emitter mode is used as a simple voltage amplifier with a collector current of 4 mA. One terminal of an 8 V battery is connected to the collector through a load resistance RL and to the base through a resistance RB. The collectoremitter voltage VCE = 4 V, base  emitter voltage VBE = 0.6 V and the base current amplification factor Pac = 100. Find the values of RL and RB.
•'IR
By : Prof. Rajinder Singh Randhawa* (a) If VB = 5 V, what should be the maximum value of R so that the voltage Fis above the knee point voltage? (b) In VB = 5 V, what should be the value of R in order to establish a current of 5 mA in the circuit? (c) In VB = 6 V, what is the power dissipated in the resistor R and the diode when a current 5 mA flows in the circuit? (d) If R = 1 kQ, what is the minimum voltage VB required to keep the diode above the knee point? 4. A semiconductor has an electron concentration of 8 x 1013 cm 3 and a hole concentration of 5 XIO 12 cm 3. (a) Is the semiconductor n or /jtype ? (b) What is the resistivity of the semiconductor? Given, electron mobility (pe) = 2.3 x 104 cm 2 V 1 s 1 and hole mobility =100 c m 2 V ' s When the plate voltage of a triode is increased from 230 V to 250 V. The control grid voltage is changed from  3 V to 3.4 V to maintain the constant current. If the plate resistance at this point is 5000 Q, find the amplification factor (p.) and mutual conductance (gj? 6. The base current of a transistor is 105 pA and collector current is 2.05 mA. (a) Determine the value of P, IE and a . (b) A change of 27 pA in the base current produces a change of 0.65 mA in the collector current. Find Pac? The circuit shown in figure contains two diodes each with a forward resistance of 50 Q and with infinite reverse resistance. It the battery voltage is 6 V, find the current through the 100 Q resistance.
150 a
 » —
h
N o signal
In circuit shown in figure, the base current IB=5 pA, base resistor = 1 xl0 6 £2, collectorresistor RC = 1.1 x 103 Q, the collector current IC = 5 mA and dc voltage in the collector circuit VCC = 6.0 V. Can this circuit be used as an amplifier?
K H G
Rs
EJ
IC + Ir Vcc— • YCE
3.
A silicon diode is connected to a resistor R and a battery of voltage VB as shown in figure. The knee point of its IV characteristics is 0.7 V. Assume that the diode requires a minimum current of 1 mA to attain a value higher than the knee point. Also assume that the voltage Vacross the junction is independent of the current above the knee point.
1.
Hi 100 Q 6 V
The saturation current density of a PN junction germanium diode is 250 mA/m 2 at 300 K. Find the
Randhawa Institute of Physics, S.C.0.208, Firstfloor,Sector36D, Chandigarh. Email; randhawainstitute_physics @ yahoo.com Ph : 01722620699, Mob : 09814527699.
PHYSICS FOR YOU
MARCH ' 0 8
voltage that would have to be applied across the junction to cause a forward current density 105 Am 2 to flow. (Boltzmann's constant k = 1.38 * IO 23 J/K). An audio signal of 10,000 Hz modulates a carrier generated by a tank circuit comprising of a capacitor of 1 x 10"9 F and a coil of 10 x IO"6 H. Find the frequency of side bands. SOLUTIONS 100 .'. Vcc = potential drop across RB + VBE = IBRB + VBE _
IB
i k =
independent of the current above the knee point. Also VB = 5 V Vr = ^  7 = 5  0 . 7 = 4.3 V V„ 4 3 But; R = S = ^  = 8600 I 5 xlO  3 In this case, VB = 6 V, But V= 0.7 V (as before) VR = 6 0.7 = 5.3 V As we know that power dissipated equals current times voltage. The current in the circuit is 1= 5 mA. Power dissipated = VR x / = 5.3 x (5 x 10"3) = 26.5 mW. and the power dissipated in the diode is = / x y = ( 5 x 10~3) x 0.7 = 3.5 mW. (d) 7? = 1 kQ = 1000 £2. To keep the diode above the knee point, a minimum current of /min = 1 mA = 10 3 A must flow in the circuit. .. Minimum voltage VB required is; VB = Imm *R+ V 3 = (1 x IO" ) x 1000 + 0.7 = 1 + 0.7 = 1.7 V. (a) Since the electron concentration is higher than the hole concentration, it is an wtype semiconductor. (b) The resistivity of semiconductor 1 P=" e(ne\ie+nh\ih) 1 (1.6xl0~ )[8xl0 1 29.44 p = 3.39 x IO 2 Qm
19 19
(c)
( 8  0 ^
= 185xl()5Q
4x10 Also, from fig., Vcc = potential drop, across RL + VCE
= ICRL+VCE
VrrVr
CE
84 rv3 :1000 Q 4x10" As we know that, a transistor circuit can be used as an amplifier if the emitterbase junction is forwardbiased and the basecollector junction reverse biased. Applying KirchhofF's loop rule to the loop ABEDFGHKA, we have VCC = VBE + IBRB (VBE — base emitter voltage) >
VBE = VCCIRRB = 6  (5 x io®) x (1 x 10*) = + 1 V
x2.3 + 5 x l 0 1 8 x l x l O  2 ]
Again apply Kirchhoff's law to the loop EDFGHCBE, we get Vcc = VCE + ICRL VCE = V cc  IcRc VCE = 6  (5 x 10^3) x (i.i x io 3 ) = + 0.5 V The collector is + 0.5 V w.r.t. the emitter and the base is + 1.0 V w.r.t. emitter. So that the base is (1  0.5) = + 0.5 V w.r.t. collector. .'. Both the emitterbase and basecollector junctions are forwardbiased. Hence the circuit cannot be used as an amplifier. (a) Let VR — Voltage across resistor » V—> Voltage across the junction diode. Then, VB=VR+ V VR=VB V= 5  0.7 = 4.3 V From Ohm's law, VR = IR. Since VR is fixed, when lis minimum (/min), R should be maximum (RMM), such that I x R =4 3V 4.3 = 4.3X10 3 Q Rmax 1X10"3A (b) Now V = 0.7 V as in part (a), since it is
%
The power of the waterfall is nothing but a lot of drops working together
Anon %
v V ""wiirtiiintt"^'#0
0
PHYSICS FOR YOU  MARCH '08
We know that p, =
V
dK
s Ji l a is const. 150Q 50Q
Here dVa = 250  230 = 20 volts = 3.4  3.0 = 0.4 V
6V
2
MCQ'il
1. Who can participate If you have taken any of the exams given below and possess plenty of grey cells, photographic memory then you are the right candidatefor this contest. All you have to do is write down as many questions (with all choices) you can remember, neatly on a paper with name of the exam, your name, address, age, your photograph and mail them to us. 2. The exams ...i.v, •.. . PMT : AFMC, BHU, AIIMS, JIPMER, Delhi PMT, H.P., WB JEE, Punjab, Haryana CET, Safdarjung VMMC, CMC Vellore, Maharashtra CET, U.P. CPMT, 0rissaJEE,M.P. PMT Engineering : DCE, UPSEE, Haryana CEE, MP PET, J & K CET, AMU, WB JEE, Bihar CECE, Jharkhand CECE, Orissa JEE, Maharashtra CET, PunjabPET,.... 3. The Benefits Plenty! Each complete question with answer will make you richer by Rs. 5*/ More the questions, the merrier it will be. We will make you famous by publishing your name (photo if possible). Also you can derive psychological satisfaction from the fact that your questions will benefitthousandsof readers. and lastly the pitfalls Don't send incomplete question. Our panel of experts will crosscheck your questions. You have to send it within a month of giving the particularexam.
Mailto: e! itor «ITq 406,Taj Apt., Ring Road, Near Safdarjung Hospital, New Delhi29. Tel. :(011)26194317,26191601.
Also M 50 1 gm= — = = = 10 r 5000 100 • (a) =^ = mho
100£2
2.05x10,3 ,6 = 19.5 105x10"
Now, lE = IB+ Ic= 105 x 10~« + 2.05 x 10 = 2.155 x 10"3 A = 2.155 mA a or 19.5(la) = a P= iTa Solving, we get oc = 0.95 (b) V ' _ 5 / c 0.65 xlO" 0.65 3 Pac=o = 7T = xlO =24.07 ac 5I B 27xlO" 6 27
3
DiodeD, is forward biased and offers aresistance of 50 Q. Diode D2 is reverse biased and as its corresponding resistance is infinite, no current flows through it. Now the equivalent circuit is shown in figure. As all the three resistances are in series, the current through 6V them is I : 0.02 A (50 + 150 +100) Q
f eV
As we have 1 = 1 r For Ge, Ti = 1 Put T = 1 and dividing both sides by area, L = LL k ^ V ' k T _ l j ^ ~A~~A J
=
J s ^ V I k T _ Jj
4.
J Given .A = 250 x 10 3 Am"2, J= 105 Ams J 10 eVIkT  1 = = 4xl05 JS 250 xlO" 3 eV c — = log e (4xl0 5 ) = 12.9 kl =
12.9 x 1.38 xl0" 2 3 x 300 = 1.6x10
•19
33
* Conditions apply
9. 1V =
C
1
2JTVZC '
o Payment will be made after the MCQs are
published. complete. questions. maximum apply. The
2 x 3.14 x 7(10 xlO" ) x (1 xlO" ) u c = 1592 kHz Freq. of side bands = (1592 + 10) = 1602 kHz and (1592 10)= 1582 kHz.
PHYSICS FOR YOU MARCH ' 0 8 222
6
9
O Kindly note that each question should be O Payment will be made only for complete O Preference complete and correct questions.
will be given to the reader sending the Other conditions
decision ofthe Editor, MTG shall be final and binding.
WfllfWWijl
AIEEE  2008
If e is the charge, V the potential difference, T the temperature, the units of eV/Tare the same as of (a) Planck's constant (b) Stefan's constant (c) Boltzmann constant (d) gravitational constant. A circular railway track of radius r is banked at angle 9 so that a train moving with speed v can safely go round the track. A student writes tanG =  f v Why this relation is not correct? (i) equality of dimensions does not guarantee correctness of the relation (ii) dimensionally correct relation may not be numerically correct (iii)the relation is dimensionally incorrect (a) (i) and (ii) (b) (ii) and (iii) (c) (iii) and (i) (d) (i), (ii) and (iii) A quantity is represented by X = M" Lb/T. The percentage error in measurement of M, L and T are a %, 3 %, y % respectively. The percentage error in X would be (a) (acr + fib + yc) % (b) (act  fib + yc) % (c) (aa fib yc) x 100% (d) none ofthe these If i, j and fc are unit vectors along x, y and zaxis respectively, the angle 9 between the vector i + j +k and vector i is given by (a) 0 = cos (c) e = cos~'
(b) e=sin
Practice Paper
6. A point traversed half of the distance with a velocity v„. One portion of remaining part ofthe distance was covered with velocity V! and second part by velocity v2 with equal time interval t. The mean velocity of the point averaged over the whole time of motion is (a) v0 + 2vj + 2V2 (b) 2v0 +v t +v 2 3
(c)
2v0 (v, + v,) (d) (2v +V, + v ) ' 0 2
The deceleration experienced by a moving motorboat after its engine is cut off, is given by — =  kv3 where k is constant. If v0 is the magnitude of the velocity at cutoff, the magnitude ofthe velocity at a time t after the cutoff is (b) v0efa (a) V(2v02fe + 1) (c) v0/2 (d) v0. 8. A rectangular box is sliding on a smooth inclined plane of inclination a . At / = 0, the box starts to move on the inclined plane. A bolt starts to fall from point A. Find the time after which bolt strikes the bottom surface of the box
^
e^sm'f—" 2 21 (a) \j g cos a
(C)
Figure shows the vt graph for two particles P and Q. Which of the following statements regarding their relative motion is true? Their relative velocity (a) is zero (b) is nonzero but constant (c) continuously decreases (d) continuously increases.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
(b) (d)
( — ) [gsmaj I g
IJ
9. The given thing construction consists of two rhombus with the ratio 3 : 2. The vertex A2 moves in the horizontal direction with a velocity v. The velocity of Ax is
(a)
0
(b)
]/W
0
(0 (a) 0.6 v (b) 0.7 v (c)3v (d) 2 v
0
(d)
A boy playing on the roof of a 10 m high building throws a ball with a speed of 10 m/s at an angle of 30° with the horizontal. How far from the throwing point will the ball be at the height of 10 m from the ground? 1 Jl g = 10 m/s 2 , sin 30° = ,cos30° = — 2 2 (a) 4.33 m (b) 2.60 m (c) 8.66 m (d) 5.20 m. A body of mass m is thrown upwards at an angle 9 with the horizontal with velocity v. While rising up the velocity of the mass after t seconds will be (a) ^(vcos9) + (vsinO)
2 2
A simple pendulum is vibrating with an angular amplitude of 90° as shown in the given figure. For what value of a, is the acceleration directed? (i) vertically upwards (ii) horizontally (iii) vertically downwards B B 0
(a) 0°, cos (c) cos
•a)'
90°
(b) 90°,cos" i (d) cos
1 _  = ,0° V3
 L 1,0°, 90°
J=,90°,0°
(b) ^ ( v c o s 9  v s i n O ) 2  gt (c) Jv2 + g2t2(2vsinQ)gt
(d) sjv2 + g2t2  (2vcos0),g7 • What is the maximum value of the force F such that the block shown in the arrangement does not move? (Given p. = ~ j = )
15. A force F = Ay2 + By + C acts on a body in the ^direction. Find the work done by this force during a displacement from y =  a to y = a. 2 Aa5 2Aa + 2 Ca (a) 3 (b) 2 + ) (d) none of these. 3 2 16 A 1 kg ball moving at 12 ms"1 collides head on with 2 kg ball moving with 24 ms"1 in opposite direction. What are their velocities after the collision
( c
 F sin60
if« = § ? (a) (b) (c) (d) (d) 15 N v, =  28 ms 1 , v2 =  4 ms 1 vj =  4 ms~', v2 =  28 ms"1 Vj = 28 ms 1 , v2 = 4 ms~' Vj = 4 ms"1, v2 = 28 ms 1
Fcos60 —
w= 10V3
(a) 20 N
(b)10N
(c) 12 N
A particle of mass m is suspended from a fixed point O by a string of length R. At t = 0, it is displaced from equilibrium position and released. The graph, which shows the variation of the tension Tin the string with time t, may be
17. A 0.01 kg block collides with a horizontal massless spring of force constant k = 2 N/m. The spring get compressed by 0.4 m. If the coefficient of kinetic friction between the block and the surface is 0.5. The speed of the block at the time of the collision is (g= 10 ms 2 ) (a) 3 ms"1 (b) 1.5 ms"1 (c) 6 ms"1 (d) 4.5 ms' 1 .
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
For the given uniform square lamina ABCD, whose centre is O, F 'AC = A/27EF (b) 'AC = a/27EF (c) 'AD = 37EF
(a)
/ x „ „ mB <0 r  2 , . 1 ^ A capacitor of capacitance C = 2 pF is connected as shown in figure. If the internal resistance of the cell is 0.5 £2, the charge on the capacitor plates is 2Q AVvVC Hh HI
2.5 V
D ' O E
(d) he = IEF
A coil having n turns and resistance R Q is connected with a galvanometer of resistance 4R Q. This combination is moved in time 1 seconds from a magnetic flux, Wx weber to W2 weber. The induced current in the circuit is W W ... n(W2Wx) (a)  2 x (b) 5 Rt 5 Rnt "(W2WQ (d) (c) Rnt Rt The moment of inertia of two bodies are /, and I 2 . Their geometrical shapes and sizes are same, the first made of iron and the second of aluminium, then (a) / , < / 2 (b ) / , = / 2 (c ) / , > / 2 (d) relation between Ix and I 2 depends on the actual shape of the bodies. A tray of mass M= 10 kg is supported on two identical springs, each of spring constant k, as shown in figure. When the tray is depressed a little and released, it executes simple harmonic motion of period 1.5 s. When a block mass m is placed on the tray, the period of oscillation becomes 3.0 s. The value of m is Tray
•AAAA—
10 £2
(a) zero (b)2 pC (c) 4 uC (d) 6 pC. A charge + q is fixed at each of the points x = x0, x = 3x0, x = 5x0 ... upto infinity and a charge  q is fixed at each of the points x = 2x0, x = 4x0, x = 6x0 ... upto infinity. Here x0 is a positive constant. The potential at the origin of this system of charges is 1 (a) zero (b) 4TT£0X0 ln(2) (c) infinity (d) < In (2) 7
4 71 ^ Q ^Q
The currentvoltage (/  V) graphs for a given metallic wire at two different temperatures Tx and 7 2 are shown in figure. It follows from the graphs that
/ / / /
(a) 10 kg (b) 20 kg (c) 30 kg (d)40kg 22. An air chamber of volume V has a neck of crosssectional area a into which a light ball of mass m can move without friction. The diameter of the ball is equal to that of the neck of the chamber. The ball is pressed down a little and released. If the bulk modulus of air is B, the time period of the resulting oscillation of the ball is given by (a) T = \mV (b) T = 2n BV ma
(a) 7, > T2 (b) 7, < T2 (c) 7, = T2 (d) 7, is greater or less than 7 2 depending on whether the resistance R of the wire is greater or less than the ratio V/I Which of the graphs shown in figure correctly represents the variation of magnetic field B with distance r from a long current carrying conductor?
(a)
PHYSICS FOR YOU
MARCH'08225
(a) 16
(b)6
(c) 4
(d)i
(c)
(d)
27. A rectangular coil of 50 turns carries a current of 2.0 A and is placed in a magnetic field B of 0.25 T, as shown in figure. What is the magnitude of torque acting on the coil?
B
30. A conducting square loop of side L and resistance R moves in its plane with a uniform velocity v perpendicular to one of its sides. A magnetic field B, constant in space and time, pointing perpendicular and into the plane of the loop exists everywhere as shown in figure. The current induced in the loop is
BX X X X X X £ X X X X X X X X X X N V X X X X
X X X X
—\Q
12 c m
10 c m
(a) BLv/R clockwise (b) BLv/R anticlockwise (c) 2BLv/R anticlockwise (d) zero 31. In a Young's double slit experiment the intensity at a point where the path difference is — (A, being 6 the wavelength of light used) is I. If I0 denotes the maximum intensity, j is equal to < 0 # (d) An Xray tube produces a continuous spectrum of radiation with its shortwavelength end at 0.33 A. What is the maximum energy of a photon in the radiation? Planck's constant = 6.6 x 10~34 Js. (a) 35 keV (b) 37.5 keV (c) 40 keV (d) 42.5 keV Binding energy per nucleon versus mass number curve for nuclei is shown in figure. W, X, Y and Z are four nuclei indicated on the curve. The process that would release energy is
Y
A,
(a) 0.1 Nm (c) 0.3 Nm
(b) 0.2 Nm (d) 0.4 Nm
28. A square metal wire loop of side 10 cm and resistance 1 Q is moved with a constant velocity v in a uniform magnetic field B = 2 T, as shown in figure. The loop is connected to 4 Q resistor. What should be the speed v of the loop as to have a steady current of 1 mA in the loop?
(b)i
®
B
•
4 Q
(a) 1 cm s 1 (c) 3 cm s _I
(b) 2 cm s 1 (d) 4 cm
29. One end of a massless rope, which passes over a massless and frictionless pulley P is tied to a hook C while the other end is free. Maximum tension that the rope can bear is 960 N. With what value of maximum safe acceleration (in ms~2) can a man of 60 kg climb on the rope? (a) Y  2 Z (c) W > 2 7
30
60
90
»
Mass number
(b) (d)
W+X+Z Y+Z
. A freshly prepared radioactive source of half life 2 hours emits radiation of intensity which is 64 times the permissible safe level. The minimum time after
PHYSICS FOR YOU MARCH'08226
which it would be possible to work safely with the source is (a) 6 hours (b) 12 hours (c) 24 hours (d) 128 hours A radioactive sample consists of two distinct species having equal number of atoms initially. The mean life time of one species is z and that or the other is 5T. The decay products in both cases are stable. A plot is made of the total number of radioactive nuclei as a function of time. Which of the following figures best represents the form of this plot?
zero of vernier scale on the main scale reads 4.32 cm. The 5th of vernier scale division is coinciding with any main scale division. Vernier constant of calliper is 0.01 cm. Find actual internal diameter calorimeter, when it is observed that the zero of vernier scale lies on the left of zero of main scale, (a) 4.37 cm (b) 4.36 cm (c) 4.42 cm (d) 4.32 cm 39. The thin metallic strip of vernier calliper moves downward from top to bottom in such a way that it just touches the surface of beaker. Main scale reading of calliper is 8.6 cm, whereas its vernier constant is 0.1 mm. The 4th of vernier scale division is coinciding with any main scale division. The actual depth of beaker in mm is (when zero of vernier coincides with zero of main scale) (a) 8.64 cm (b) 8.62 cm (c) 8.63 cm (d) 8.13 cm A balance which has arms of equal length and pans of equal weight is called a (a) sensitive balance (b) inertial balance (c) true balance (d) beam balance SOLUTIONS eV W_ PV =R T1 T R and — = Boltzmann constant, N. [rg]_L(Lr2) (a) [tane] = ^ = (LT 1 ) 2 = 1 = [M°L°T° [v Hence formula is dimensionally correct. But the relation is not correct because of (i) and (ii). X = MaLb/T; 3. (a) AX x .„„ = (aAM + bAL + •cATs x 100 100 X { M L T = (aa + Z>3 + cy) % 4. (a (i +j+k)i cos0 — 2 2 (i + J + k2)112 x (7 2 ) l/2
(a)
N
(b)
(c)
(d)
36. In the adjoining figure, the input is across the terminals A and C and the output is across B and D. Then the output is
(a) zero (c) full wave rectified
(b) the same as the input (d) half wave rectified
37. Consider a two particle system with particles having massess mx and m2. If the first particle is pushed towards the centre of mass through a distance d, by what distance should the second particle be moved, so as to keep the centre of mass at the same position? (b ) d m2 m, t \ m2 J (d) (c) 2 d m. 3) The jaws of a vernier calliper touch the inner wall of calorimeter without any undue pressure. The position 18
PHYSICS FOR YOU MARCH '08
_ r r + 7  7 + ^ r _ I+O+O _ i (l + l + l ) 1 / 2 x l ~ V3 "73 (.". j • i = k i = 0 and i i = 1 ) The difference in velocities is increasing with time as both of them have constant but different accelerations. d Then for first half distance, time = —> 2v„ next distance, = Vj t Let the total distance be d.
(a) —d
and last part of distance, = v2t d d :. v\t + v2t= — or t = 2 2(Vi+v2) Now, average speed „_ t 2V 0 (V 1 +v 2 ) (v, + v2) + 2v0 2v0 2(V[ + v 2 ) 2(v,+v 2 ) dv 7. ( a ) : ~71 = ~ dt ^ , J or —r = ~kdt
3
5 10. (c): R =
M2
.. v. 1 = 3 x  = 0.6v 5 sin 26 g 10 x 10 x sin 60° = — ~— = io = 8.66 m
11. (c) : Instantaneous velocity of rising mass after t sec will be v, = + v2 where vx = v cos9 = Horizontal component of velocity vy = v sinG  gt = Vertical component of velocity v, = (0 cos 0) 2 + (v sin 0  gt)2
1 Intergrating we get  — 2 = kt + c 2v At t= 0, v = v0 1 •=c 2v„ Putting in (i), we get 2v " 1 or 2v 2 + kt
2
V, = V( v 2 + £ 2 ' 2 2vsin0gO
12. ( a ) ; / = ^
l_ 2v 2 J_
2 2v :J or [1 + 2 v & ] = fv2
v
Fsin60°
o
F cos60°—
ir= 10V3 F cos60 = \L(W + F sin60) By substituting p = — ^ and W = 10>/3 F = 20 N YYIV^ 13. ( d ) : TmgcosQ = R
or v = 1+2
or
v=
^1 + 2 v 2 fe
8. (a) Actual acceleration of bolt 2, =  g sin a ;  g cos a j
a0 = g
sina/
v X V
...co
x'/
a2 = actual acceleration of box = g sina i i +  <W 1= gt cos a At equilibrium tension should be maximum and at the position of maximum amplitude tension is minimum but not zero. Also tension varies non linearly. Option (d) is correct. 14. (a) : Vertically upward /, 3  = vA=3k,vA=5k
2
=
 / = 0+ (gcosa)f2 f= 9 (a) 21 g cos a % = 0,
Vertically d o w n w a r d
O•
B
But
= —— = 3+2 5 5k = v
• mg
A^
1
mg
PHYSICS FOR YOU
MARCH '1
Horizontally
By perpendicular axes theorem, _IZ _ Ma2 T 1 IAC + ^BD  h ac IMa2 By the same theorem IEF == =
2 o
•'• i ac ~ ief
19. (b) : Induced current _ n _ n dW R' dt R' dt = m.ac v2 = 2gR cosa R ac = 2g cosa, and a, = g sina r \ a. tana = = 2cota (T  mg cos 9) = tan a = cosa =  j =
ha
1 n(W2Wx)^ (R + 4R) t
n(W2Wx) 5 Rt
20. (c) Iron is denser than aluminium Ix > I 2 . M 21. ( C ) Here 7; = 2 t z l  ^ 2k and r=2n M 2k
A/ 3 Aa3 3 2 Aa3
h
W = \Fdy = j(Ay2 + By + C) dy 2 • + Cy Ba2 ~2~4 Ca j :
M +m 3.0 10 + m or Tx V M 1.5 V 10 which gives m = 30 kg. Hence the correct choice is (c). 22. (d) : L e t P be the pressure of air in the chamber. When the ball is pressed down a distance x, the volume of air decreases from Vto say VAV. Hence the pressure increases from P to P + AP. The change in volume is A V=ax The excess pressure AP is related to the bulk modulus B „ AF as AP = B — Now restoring force on ball = excess pressure x crosssectional area ...(i) or F = —AV v2 F = kx F°<=x
3
+
2
Ca
+ 2 Ca According to conservation of momentum
1 x 1 2 + 2 (24) = Vl + or VI + 2V2 =  3 6
2V2
3 12  (24) or v2  v, = 24. Solving (i) and (ii) we get V, =  28 ms"1, and v2 =  4 ms"1 17. (c): H ere, 1 2 1, 2 —mv = —kx + u.mg.x 2 2 2 2 x (0.4)2 200x16 v = — — + 2 x 0.5 x 10 x 0.4 =0.01 "" " " 100 or V = 6 ms"1 By perpendicular axes theorem, t *,"2+b2 M(a2+a2) IEF =M — = — 12 12 M(2a^) 1 ~ 12 M(2a ) 12
2
Also
or /r = _ ^ L £ ( .  . AV=ax)or ...(ii) where k = Ba2/V i.e.,
4 = 36
a2 =M 12
2 2
Hence the motion of the ball is simple harmonic. If m is the mass of the ball, the time period of the SHM is „ m m T = 2nJ— k „ mV or T = 2n' 2 ~ yBa
_ Ma
23. (c) : When the capacitor is fully charged, no current
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
flows in the 10 £2 resistor. The current in the circuit is 2.5 / = = 1A 2 + 0.5 Potential drop across 2 Q resistor = 2 £2 x 1 A = 2 V This is also the potential drop across the capacitor plates. Therefore, the charge on capacitor plates is Q = CV= 2 x 10"6 x 2 = 4 x lO^6 C = 4 p.C Hence the correct choice is (c). 24. ( d ) : V = 1 4ti£„ 1
471 £ N
Current in the circuit is / = — = R 4 B u t / = 1 m A = 10~3. Therefore, 10"3 = 4 ^
.
which gives v = 2 x 10~2 ms 1 = 2 cm s_1. Hence the correct choice is (b). 29. (b) T60g=60a or 9 6 0  ( 6 0 x 10) = 60 a or 60 a = 360 or a = 6 ms~2 30. ( Since the magnetic field is constant in time and space and exists everywhere, there is no change in magnetic flux when the loop is moved in it. Hence no current is induced, which is choice (d). In Young's double slit experiment intensity at a point is given by I = I 0 cos !
:
— + — + — +... upto infinity > x0 3x0 5x 0 J 6x0 •... upto infinity >
 q + r « 2x. 4x0
1 q {1 — + —  — + —  —... upto infinity 47tsn x, 2 3 4 5 6 47te0x0 In (1 +1) = gin (2) 47C£0X0
Hence the correct choice is (d). 25. (b) It is clear from figure that at a given voltage V0, the current /, in the wire at temperature T{ is greater than the current/ 2 in the wire at temperature T2. Therefore, the resistance of the wire at temperature Tx is less than that at temperature T2. This can happen if Tx is less than T2 because the resistance of a wire increases with increase in temperature. Hence the correct choice is (b).
(t)
... (i)
where 0 = phase difference, I 0 = maximum intensity cos 2tc, Phase difference (b = — x path difference , 27t X ¥
or
d = > V 3
... (ii)
Substitute eqn. (ii) in eqn. (i), we get I 2 — = cos 32. = 6 x 10
(!)
or
'o = 1
3 4 hc _ 6.6xlO" 34 x 3 x ! 0 8 ~ 0.33xlO" 10
E = h v
15
J = 37.5keV
26. • c) B oc \/r. Hence the correct graph is (c). . 27. (c ) The sides PQ and RS are parallel to the field lines hence the force on each is zero. The force on vertical sides PS and QR is /= BIl = 0.25 x 2.0 x 0.12 = 0.06 N The force/acts on PS in a direction out of the page and on QR into the page, this forming a couple. The total force is F = 50 x 0.06 = 3.0 N. Therefore, the torque is x = 3.0 N x 0.10 m = 0.3 Nm 28. (b) The emf induced in a wire of length / moving in a field B with speed v perpendicular to the field is given by e =BIv = 2 x 0 . l v = 0.2 v
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
The binding energies of the reactant and the products in the given nuclear reactions are as follows : Reaction (a) 7—> 2Z (b) (c) W^X+Z W>2Y Y+Z Reactant 60x 8.5 = 510 MeV 120 x 7.5 = 900 MeV 120 x 7.5 = 900 MeV 90 x 8.0 = 720 MeV Products 2 x 30 x 5.0 = 300 MeV (90 x 8.0 + 30 x 5.0) = 870 MeV 2 x 60 x 8.5 = 1020 MeV (60 x 8.5 + 30 x 5.0) = 660 MeV
(d)X—
The binding energy of the products in reaction (c) is greater than that of the reactant. Hence reaction (c)
releases energy. Since the half life is 2 hours, the intensity of the radiation falls by a factor of 2 every 2 hours. In 12 hours it will fall by a factor of (2)6 = 64. Thus, in 12 hours the intensity attains the safe level. Hence the correct choice is (b). For each species, the number of radioactive nuclei decreases exponentially with time. Hence, for both the species taken together, the total number of radioactive nuclei will decrease exponentially with time. This is best represented in plot (d). The figure is a circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier. If JC, and x2 are the positions of masses m} and m2, the position of the centre of mass is given by = m' + m 0) l 2 If x, changes by Ax, and x2 changes by Ax2, the change in x™ will be M 1 Ax, + M 2 A X 2 Ax = (I) m, + m2 Given Axr a = 0 and Axt = d. Using these values in Eq. (1), we get m x d+m 2 Ax2 = 0 or
AX2 =  J
2 md :. Distance moved by m 2 = ——, which is choice (a). 38. (c) T = 4.32 cm, « = 5 V V.C = L.C = 0.01 cm .. observed internal diameter of calorimeter D0 = N+ n* V.C = 4.32 + 5 x 0.01 =4.32 + 0.05 D0 = 4.37 cm Correct internal diameter D =D0 + C given that C = 0 D = 4.37 cm when zero of v.s lies on the left, then C = +(n x L.C) = +0.5 £> = 4.37 + 0.5 =4.42 cm 39. (aT: N = 8.6 cm n= 4 V.C = L.C = 0.01 cm .. Observed diameter of beaker = N + H(V.C) =8.6 + 4 x 0 . 0 1 = 8.6 + 0.04 = 8.64cm Here error C = 0 Actual depth of beaker = 8.64 + 0 = 8.64 cm. 40. (c) •
m
—
Want to Clear CBSEPMT 2008! That too with a good Rank!!
M T G brings y o u close to SUCCESS in CBSEPMT 2008 with
MTG CHAPTGRWISG GXPLORGR
MTC r,lAPrt(0«. '
 MIfa11i»i! I • f' 'I  s 6 V <
20 CBSEPMT 2 0 CBSEPMT 20 CBSEPMT •XS2 Oapwwfe Selwd Papers
years chaptewlss Softwd Papers
PHYSreS
!
Chapteiwtee Solved Papers BIOLOGY
Suf«« temtmn flow Matte l
Hi?feientwiRi>ic?«tt; foi Mphihq D<>f»'Tff.
Fully Solved Papers  Detailed Solutions by Experts
Success in PMT 2008 NOW M a d e Easy!
Nearly 50% of the questions in CBSEPMT are from previous years papers. So, with MTG Chapterwise Explorers you are close to success by 50%.
These books are essential for every PMT aspirant. ON SALE at leading book stalls www.mtg.in
2
PHYSICS FOR YOU MARCH '08
JHf M T G BOOKS
»
BOOKS
503, Taj Apt., Ring Road, Near Safdarjung Hospital New Delhi  110 029. Tel.: 26191599, 26191601 email: info@mtg.in
IITJEE 200
PAPER  II STRAIGHT OBJECTIVE TYPE This section contains 9 multiple choice questions numbered 1 to 9. Each question has 4 choices (a), (b), (c) and (d), out of which ONLY ONE is correct. 1, The readings of a constant potential difference is noted four times by a student. The student averages these readings but does not take into account the zero error of the voltmeter. The average measurement of the potential difference is Reading 1 1.176 V (a) precise and accurate Reading 2 1.178 V (b) precise but not accurate (c) accurate but not precise Reading 3 1.177 V (d) not accurate and not precise Reading 4 1.176 V (a)
(C)
Practice Paper
2\img(m + M) 2m + M 2 \img(m + M) (b) 2)xg(m + M)
(d) iig(m + 2M) m + 2M Two hollowcore solenoids, A and B, are connected by a wire and separated by a large distance, as shown in the diagram. Two bar magnets, 1 and 2, are suspended just above the solenoids. If the magnet 1 is dropped through solenoid A as shown, then the magnet 2 will simultaneously be
Magnet 1 Magnet 2
J
s N
I
N S
A metal plate is exposed to light with wavelength A. It is observed that electrons are ejected from the surface of the plate. When a retarding uniform electric field E is imposed, no electron can move away from the plate farther than a certain distance d. Then the threshold wavelength A0 for the material of plate is (e is the electronic charge, h is Planck's constant and c is the speed of light) (a)
hc
Solenoid A
Solenoid B
(a) attracted by a magnetic force towards solenoid B (b) repelled by a magnetic force away from solenoid B (c) repelled by an electric force away from solenoid B (d) unaffected by solenoid B. A uniform cylinder of mass M lies on a fixed plane inclined at an angle 0 with horizontal. A light string is tied to the cylinder's right most point, and a mass m hangs from the string, as shown. Assume that the coefficient of friction between the cylinder and the plane is sufficiently large to prevent slipping. For the cylinder to remain static, the value of mass m is
f1
< «o = • (c) AQ — A. — eEd Four blocks are arranged on a smooth fixed horizontal surface as shown. The masses of upper blocks are m kg and lower blocks are M kg as shown in figure. The coefficient of friction between upper and lower blocks is i. Both the upper blocks are connected by inextensible light string having initial zero tension. For all four blocks to move with same acceleration, the maximum value of horizontal force F applied to right bottom block (as shown) is HP
Smooth horizontal surface
hc x eEd
eEd
M /mm
M
77777777
(a)
M cos 9 1 + sin 9
(b)
MsinG 1 + sin 9
By: R e s o n a n c e , K o t a (Rajasthan). For detailed answers of the paper, log on to institute's website www.resonance.ac.in
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
HH
, , (c)
M cos0 1 —r 1  sm 0
90 Th 234 91 Pa
, JX M sin9 (d) — 1  sin 8
234 92 U 234
Part of the uranium decay series is shown 92U238 — 90 Th 230 — 88 Ra 226 > > How many pairs of isotopes are there in the above series ? (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 0 Four uniform wires of the same material are stretched by the same force. The dimensions of wire are as given below. The one which has the minimum elongation has (a) radius 3 mm, length 3 m (b) radius 0.5 mm, length 0.5 m (c) radius 2 mm, length 2 m (d) radius 3 mm, length 2 m In the circuit shown, cells are of equal emf E but of different internal resistances rx = 6 Q and r2 = 4 Q. Reading of the ideal voltmeter connected across cell 1 is zero. The value of the external resistance R in ohm is equal to WWW
R
choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct. (a) Statement1 is True, Statement2 is True; Statement2 is a correct explanation for Statement1. (b) Statement1 is True, Statement2 is True; Statement2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement1. (c) Statement1 is True, Statement2 is False. (d) Statement1 is False, Statement2 is True. A spherical surface of radius of curvature R separates two media of refractive index «,and n2 as shown.
medium 2 / "2 ^medium 1 0 "1 t
W
R
>
cell 1
cell 2
(a) 2
(b) 2.4
(c) 10
(d) 24
Two large oppositely charged insulated plates have a uniform electric field between them as shown. The distance between the plates is increased by a small amount. Which of the following statements is/are correct ? (i) The electric field strength decreases. (ii) The electrostatic force of attraction between the plates increases. (iii) The potential difference between the plates increases.
— = > — — — —
If an object O (a thin small rod) is placed upright on principal axis at a distance R from pole (i.e, placed at centre of curvature), then the size of image is same as size of object. If a point object is placed at centre of curvature of spherical surface separating two media of different refractive index, then the image is also formed at centre of curvature, i.e., image distance is equal to object distance. Two concentric conducting spherical shells are charged. The charge on the outer shell is varied keeping the charge on inner shell constant, as a result the electric potential difference between the two shells does not change. If charge is changed on an isolated thin conducting spherical shell, the potential at all points inside the shell changes by same amount. Gas ejected from rocket will never exert thrust on the rocket if the ejected gas and the rocket move in the same direction. To exert thrust on rocket in its direction of motion, the ejected gas (w.r.t. rocket) must move opposite to velocity of rocket (w.r.t. ground). A homogeneous rectangular brick lies at rest on a fixed rough inclined
(a) (i) only (c) (iii) only
(b) (ii) only (d) (i) and (iii) only
ASSERTION REASON TYPE This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13. Each question contains STATEMENT1 (Assertion) and STATEMENT2 (Reason). Each question has 4
plane as shown. Then the right half of the brick exerts greater force on the inclined plane as compared to left half o f t h e brick.
particle will be (a) 100 m (b) — m ' 125 m (d) 250
m (c) 215
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
For brick in situation of statement1 to be at rest, the net moment of all forces about its centre of mass should be zero. Moment of force on brick due to its weight about centre of mass is zero. The moment of force due to friction on brick about its centre of mass has tendency to rotate the brick in clockwise sense. Hence the right half of the brick presses the inclined plane more in comparison to the left half of the brick. LINKED COMPREHENSION TYPE is section contains 2 paragraphs C 1 4 1 6 and C^.^. sed upon each paragraph, 3 multiple choice lestions have to be answered. Each question has choices (a), (b), (c) and (d), out of which ONLY >JE is correct. C M . 1 6 : Paragraph for Question Nos. 14 to 16 A uniform and constant magnetic field B = (20/  3 0 y + 50K) tesla exists in space. A charged particle with charge to mass ratio \ 103 — = — C / kg enters this region at time t = 0 with m) 19_ _ _ a velocity V = (20/ + 5 0 j + 30£) m/s . Assume that the charged particle always remains in space having the given magnetic field. (Use = 1.4). During the further motion of the particle in the magnetic field, the angle between the magnetic field B and velocity of the particle (a) remains constant (b) increases (c) decreases (d) may increase or decrease. The frequency of the revolution of the particle in cycles per second will be 104 104 104 (a) (b) (c) (d) Wl9 jia/38 Wl9 27cVl9 The pitch of the helical path of the motion of the
C n .  9 : Paragraph for Question Nos. 17 to 19 Figure shows block A of mass 0.2 kg sliding to the right over a frictionless elevated surface at a speed of 10 m/s. The block undergoes a collision with stationary block B, which is connected to a nondeformed spring of spring constant 1000 Nm 1 . The coefficient of restitution between the blocks is 0.5. After the collision, block B oscillates in SHM with a period of 0.2 s, and block A slides off the left end of the elevated surface, landing a distance d from the base of that surface after falling height 5 m. (use 7t2 = 10; g = 10 m/s 2 ). Assume that the spring does not affect the collision.
•10 m/s
B T 0,2 kg
K= 1000 Nm" www—
1
1 • d; 1
!
5m
Mass of the block B is (a) 0.4 kg (b) 0.8 kg 5spring system, is (a) 2.5>/l0 cm
(c) 3VTO c m
(c) 1 kg
(d) 1.2 kg
Amplitude of the SHM as being executed by block (b) 10 cm
(d) 5a/TO c m
The distance d will be equal to (a) 2 m (b) 2.5 m (c) 4 m CTIO MATRIX MATCH TYPE
(d) 6.25 m
This section contains 3 questions. Each question contains statements given in two columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B, C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements (p, q, r, s) in Column II. Thq answers to these questions have to be appropriately bubbled as illusti ated in the following example. If the correct matches are Ap, As, Bq, Br, Cp, Cq and Ds, then the correctly bubbled 4 x 4 matrix should be as follows
®®o®
®(q)©©
®@0® ®®©®
Match the statements in Colum I with the results in Column II.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
Column  1
Column  I I
(A)A thin uniform spherical shell (p)is of surface area S has an initial independent temperature more than its ofS surrounding atmosphere. Then magnitude of rate of change of its temperature with time (B)A soap bubble initially in (q) depends equilibrium is given a charge on S Q, which distributes uniformly over its surface. The centre of the bubble is always fixed. For the duration the bubble having surface area S expands, the magnitude of electric potential at a fixed point always lying outside the bubble (C)A container with open top and (r) remains filled with ideal liquid is placed at constant rest on a smooth horizontal table. A small hole of area S is drilled at the bottom of a side wall of container. The magnitude of force exerted by escaping liquid on the container (D) An infinitely long straight current (s) decreases carrying wire lies along the axis with time of a closed cylindrical surface of total surface area S in space. As the magnitude of current in the wire is continuously increased, the magnitude of the magnetic flux through the surface of this cylinder Match the statements in Column  1 with the results in Column  II. Column  1 Column  I I
(B) A circular ring lies in space (q) first decreases having uniform and constant for some magnetic field. Initially the time and then direction of magnetic field is increases parallel to plane of the ring. Keeping the centre of ring fixed, the ring is rotated by 180° about one of its diameter with constant angular speed. For the duration the ring rotates, the magnitude of induced emf in the ring (C) A thin rod of length 1 cm (r) is always lies along principal axis of a constant convex lens of focal length 5 cm. One end of rod is at a distance 10 cm from optical centre of the lens. The convex lens is moved (without rotation) perpendicular to initial principal axis by 5 mm and brought back to its initial position. The length of the image of the rod (D)A bulb (of negligible (s) increases or inductance) and a capacitor in may increase series are connected across an over some ideal ac source of constant peak time interval voltage and variable frequency. As frequency of ac source is continuously increased, the brightness of bulb Net force on a system of particles in ground frame is zero. In each situation of columnI a statement is given regarding this system. Match the statements in columnI with the results in columnII. ColumnI ColumnII
(A) A variable resistor is connected (p) first increases across a nonideal cell . As for some the resistance of the variable time and then resistor is continuously decreases increased from zero to a very large value, the electric power consumed by the variable resistor
(A) Acceleration of centre of mass of (q) is constant system from ground frame (B) Net momentum of system from (q) is zero ground frame (C) Net momentum of system from (r) may be zero frame of centre of mass of system (D) K.E. of system from frame of (s) may be constant centre of mass of system
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
CHEMISTRY Useful data : Gas Constant, R = 8.314 J K 1 mol"1 1 F = 96500 C is /are correct about it ? (a) Hybridisation state of chromium is sp3cf and it cannot show geometrical isomerism (b) Its IUPAC name is Potassium amminetetracyano nitrosylchromate(II) (c) In the complex chromium is in (+III) oxidation number. (d) None of the above is correct The end product of following reaction sequence is OH P h  C  C H ?  N H 2, 2

Ph NaNQ2/aq.HCl NaBH
Atomic Numbers
: H = 1, Li = 3, B = 5, C = 6,
N = 7, O = 8, F = 9, Na = 11, P = 15, S = 16, CI = 17, A r = 18,K= 1 9 , V = 2 3 , C r = 2 4 , M n = 2 5 , F e = 26, Co=27, Ni = 28, Cu = 29, Zn = 30, Ge = 32, Br = 35, Ag = 47, I = 53, Xe = 54, Pt = 78, Hg = 80, Pb = 82. SECTION  I STRAIGHT OBJECTIVE TYPE This section contains 9 multiple choice questions numbered 23 to 31. Each question has 4 choices (a), (b), (c) and (d), out of which ONLY ONE is correct. How many mmoles of sucrose should be dissolved in 500 gms of water so as to get a solution which has a difference of 103.57°C between boiling point and freezing point. (Kf = 1.86 K kg mol 1 , Kb = 0.52 K kg mol"1) (a) 500 mmoles (b) 900 mmoles (c) 750 mmoles (d) 650 mmoles Identify true and false statements 5 1 : X e 0 3 is a colourless explosive solid and has a pyramidal molecular structure. 5 2 : XeF 2 is not a better oxidising agent than XeF 4 . S 3 : Xe, Kr and Ne all form clatherate compounds. S 4 : Fluorine in dilute solution of sodium hydroxide disproportionates in fluoride and hypofluorite. (a) TFFF (b) TFTF (c) TTTT (d) FTFT At 298 K the standard free energy of formation of H 2 O w is 257.20 kJ/mole while that of its ionisation into H + ion and hydroxyl ions is 80.35 kJ/mole, then the emf of the following cell at 298 K will be (take F = 96500 C] H2(g,\ bar)  H + (1 M)  OH" (1 M)  0 2 (g, lbar) (a) 0.40 V (b) 0.50 V (c) 1.23 V (d)0.40 V According to molecular orbital theory, which of the following is correct ? (a) LUMO level for C 2 molecule is a o 2 p orbital (b) In C 2 molecule both the bonds are rcbonds (c) In C 2 2 " ion there is oneCTand two n bonds (d) All the above are correct When a graph is plotted between log xhn and log p. it is straight line with an angle 45° and intercept 0.3010 on yaxis. If initial pressure is 0.3 atm, what will be the amount of gas adsorbed per gm of adsorbent ? (a) 0.4 (b) 0.6 (c) 0.8 (d) 0.1 28 The green coloured complex K 2 [Cr(CN) 4 (NH 3 )(NO)] is paramagnetic and its paramagnetic moment (spin only) is found to be 1.73 B.M. Which of the following
(T)
(3)
(2)
03/Zn^
C o n c . H 2 S Q 4 , A^
(a) Ph  C = 0 + C H 2 = 0 Ph (b) Ph  C = 0 + P h C H = 0 I CH 3 (c) PhCH = 0 only
(4)
O II
(d) Ph  C  C H 2  P h
The major product formed in the following reaction Me 2 N. CH,
IC1
> Me /
Me 2 N
Me \
N
I (a) M e 2 N ^ O ) C
CI "
CH
2
(b
)
CI  C  CH 2 I
fa
NMe, Me 2 N. (c) CH 2 (d)
[6j
/NX Me Me Me 2 N.
Me 2 N
j
Me 2 N
C1
Which of the following reactions are feasible (practically possible) ?
PHYSICS FOR YOU MARCH '08
Me (I) Me'
CI
Me
Me^ SbF 5 S0 2 s <B>
Me 2C1
Acid catalyzed dehydration follows saytzeff (Zaitsev's) rule. SECTION  III LINKED COMPREHENSION TYPE This section contains 2 paragraphs C36.38 and C39.41. Based upon each paragraph, 3 multiple choice question have to be answered. Each question has 4 choices (a), (b), (c) and (d), out of which ONLY ONE is correct. Cj638: Paragraph for Question Nos. 36 to 38 White crystalline solid (A) reacts with H 2 to form a highly associated liquid (B) and a monoatomic, colourless gas (C). The liquid (B) is used for etching glass. Compound (A) undergoes hydrolysis slowly to form (Q, (B) and a diatomic gas (D) whose IE is almost similar to that of (C). (5) forms an addition compound with KF to form (E) which is electrolysed in the molten state to form a most reactive gas (F) which combines with ( C ) in 2:1 ratio to produce (A). The molecular shape, and hybridisation state of central atom in the molecule A is (a) linear, sp (b) triangular,sp 2 3 (c) linear, sp d (d) Vshape, sp3 The molecule of compound E contains which of the following types of bonds (a) ionic (b) ionic and covalent both (c) ionic, covalent and metallic (d) ionic, covalent and Hbonds According to Molecular Orbital Theory, which of the following is correct about the molecule of D ? (a) its bond order is 2.0 (b) it has two unpaired electrons in 71bonding M.O. (c) both the above are correct (d) none of these is correct Cj)j)i: Paragraph for Question Nos. 39 to 41 The components of organic mixture can be separated by simple chemical method. Aromatic carboxylic acids are soluble in sodium bicarbonate solution, while the phenols are soluble in NaOH solution. Organic bases (aromatic amines) are soluble in aqueous HC1 solution. The separted components are identified by laboratory tests of functional groups. Observe the analysis of following organic mixture composed of three components (I, II, III)
NaHCO (I), (II), ( I I I ) _ ... ® Soluble NH.OH . „ „ > B l a c k p p t . (Z) AgN03
S Me CI
Me' 2K >  2K 9
(II)
(III) I ^ J J (H 2 O)
HCl/ZnCl
> H
i© ll CI
H
OH
HCIO, (H20)
(IV)
H (a) I, IV OH
CIO 0 H (c) I, II, IV (d) I, II, III
(b) II, III
SECTION  II ASSERTION REASON TYPE This section contains 4 questions numbered 32 to 35. Each question contains STATEMENT1 (Assertion) and STATEMENT2 (Reason). Each question has 4 choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which ONLY ONE is correct. (a) Statement1 is True, Statement2 is True; Statement2 is a correct explanation for Statement1. (b) Statement1 is True, Statement2 is True; Statement2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement1 (c) Statement1 is True, Statement2 is False (d) Statement1 is False, Statement2 is True 32. STATEMENT1 N ^ 2K [Ag(CN) 2 ] + K 2 S The reaction is carried out in presence of air or 0 2 so that K 2 S is oxidised to K 2 S0 4 thereby shifting the equilibrium in forward direction. Pseudohalide ions generally are not stronger coordinating ligands than the halide ions and hence the complex formed by pseudohalide ions are of high spin. The halide ions have higher values of electronegativity in their corresponding periods. In rcbutane the gauche conformation lies higher in energy than the anti conformation. The gauche conformation has eclipsing interactions. The reactivity order for acid catalyzed dehydration of alcohols is R 3 C  OH > R 2 CHOH > RCH 2 OH
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
Ag2s + 4 K C
 > (II), ( I l l ) I n s o l u b l e
J,NaOH
PNaphthol Red dye< (III) Insoluble (II) S o l u b l e Br2/H20
HC
W)j S o l u b l e (JO
R e d colour d e c o l o u r i s e d (X)
I
The compound Z can be COONa
42. COONa ColumnI (A)(NH 4 ) 2 s 2 o 8 + H 2 o  > (B) NaB0 2 + H 2 0 + H202 (C) XeF4 + H 2 0 ColumnII (p) Hydrolysis (q)One of the product has peroxide linkage (r) Redox Reaction
COOAg OH
COONH4 COONa
OH"
(D) HN0 3 (50%)+As 2 0 3 (s) one of the products is + H 2 0 (unbalanced) — > a gas (paramagnetic) COONH4 The compound X can be NH, For the following matching take the concentrations of the both the solutions being titrated to be equal to 0.1 M, and Ka of CH3COOH =2 x 10 5, Kai of H 2 C0 3 = 107, Ka_ of H 2 C0 3 = 10 _u , Kb of NH3 = 2 x IO"5) ColumnI (Titrations) CHO COONa ColumnII (Properties)
(A)CH3COOH + NaOH (p)Approximate shape of the• titration curve will
t
volume o^base added — •
Br The compound 7 can be
® ©
Br
(B) NH4C1 + NaOH
(q)Phenolphthalein (pA^,n = 9) can be used for end point detection
NH3CI
COOH
(C)Na 2 C0 3 + HC1 (upto (r) At equivalence point, Ist equivalence point) ( W C 1.8 x 10' (D) HC1 + NaOH (s)At equivalence pH > 7 point,
©I © NH3CI
Match following column (I) with column (II)
ColumnI (Reactants) ColumnII (Products) ^CH (i) B r 2 / C S 2
2
OH NH3CI SECTION  IV MATRIX MATCH TYPE This section contains 3 questions. Each question contains statements given in p q r s two columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B, C, D) in A ColumnI have to be matched with B statements (p, q, r, s) in ColumnII. The answers to these questions have to be appropriately bubbled D as illustrated in the following example. If the correct matches are Ap, As, Bq, Br, Cp, Cq and Ds, then the correctly bubbled 4><4 matrix should be as follows :
©
1
OH
(A)
(P) OCH,
1 (ii) ( C H 3 ) 2 S 0 4 / 0 H " >
OH
NH2 (B) ^
Q j (i)NaN02/HCl(a9))
(q) OH OH
®®©® ® ® ©® ®®©® ®®©®
OCH3 OH
(i) C H B r 3 / O H " v
(C)(
(ii) H 2 0 (iii) N a B H 4
(r)[ OH OCI1 3 (s)j Br
MARCH '08
Br
(i) B r 2 / F e
(D)(
(ii) M g / e t h e r (iii) 0 2 (iv) H 2 0
PHYSICS FOR YOU
MATHEMATICS SECTION STRAIGHT OBJECTIVE TYPE This section contains 9 multiple choice questions numbered 45 to 53. Each question has 4 choices (a), (b), (c) and (d), out of which ONLY ONE is correct. Let y = / (x) be a cubic polynomial function which attain its local maximum at x = 3 and point of inflection is at x = 7, then (a) local minimum is at x = 11 (b) local minimum is at x = V21 (c) local minimum is at x =  1 (d) data insufficient Equation of circle of minimum radius which touches both the parabolas y = x2 + 2x + 4 and x=y2 + 2y+ 4 is (a) 4x2 + 4 / ~ l l x  l l y  1 3 = 0 (b) 2x2 + 2 /  l l x  U y  13 = 0 (c) 3x2 + 3 /  l l x  l l y  1 3 = 0 ( d ) x 2 + /  l l x  U y  13 = 0 If y = f (x) is differentiable at x = a and y = g(x) is continuous but not differentiable at x = a , g'(a+) and g'(a ) are finite, then which of the following is incorrect ? (a) y = f(x) g(x) is not differentiable at x = a if f(a) * 0 (b) y = / ( x ) g(x) is differentiable at x = a i f f ( a ) = 0 (c) y = / ( x ) g(x) is not differentiable at x = a if m=0 (d) y = / (x) g(x) is continuous at x = a K , 5jt Area bounded by y =/~'(x), x = 0, y = 7 and y = — 6 6 w h e r e f ( x ) = x + sinx, is (a) 3 ^ 3 + — (c) S
+
(c) least value of a • £ + > (d) least value of 5 • £ +
6 I2 +2 5 I 2 +2
is 2 4 2 is 2V2  1
If a unit vector a in the plane of b = 2i + j and c = i  j + k is such that a x b = a x d where d = j + 2k , then a is i +j +k i j+k (b) (a) (c) 21 + 7
ir
(d)
2i  j
If A = x 3) B = x 2 , C = [ c ^ x 3 are three matrices so that = 3, S = 2, \C\ = 4, then ABQ is (a) 24 (b)  2 4 (c) 0 (d) not defined The general solution of y • (a) y = CjX + c 2 (c) y = CjX + c2e* d2y
1S
(ate) (b) > = C j e ^ > (d) ^ = eci* +
SECTION  II ASSERTION  REASON TYPE This section contains 4 questions numbered 54 to 57. Each questions contain STATEMENT1 (Assertion) and STATEMENT2 (Reason). Each question has 4 choices (a), (b), (c) an (d) out of whic ONLY ONE is correct. (a) Statement1 is True, Statement2 is True; Statement2 is a correct explanation for Statement1. (b) Statement1 is True, Statement2 is True; Statement2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement1 (c) Statement1 is True, Statement2 is False (d) Statement1 is False, Statement2 is True Let I , = 0 and L2 = 0 are two non perpendicular intersecting straight lines in two dimensional plane and if for X = 1, Lx +~KL2= 0 gives line passing through acute angular region between the lines then for ~k = 4 L\ + Xl2 = 0 gives line passing through obtuse angular region. j Points (x b yx) and (x2, y2) are on the same / opposite sides of a line ax + by + c = 0 if and only if axj + by} + c and ax2 + by2 + c are of
(b) 2 7 3 + — 3
o» 3
n 3 smx , , ' sin(sinx) , ax, / 2 = J dx, 71/6 n/6 sinx
Let / , = 73 =
j
T ^ ^ x , t h c n
k /6
tanx (b ) / 2 < / , < / 3
(a) / 1 < / 2 < / 3
(c)/3</,</2 (d)/3</2</, If A, I are nonzero vectors such that {A + /J  =  A then (a) afo = 2£> (b) aft =  i
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
same/opposite signs respectively. Roots of ax + bx + c = 0 are real if b1  4ac > 0. Set of all real numbers and set of all imaginary numbers are subsets of set of all complex numbers. STATEMENT1 : 111 a A 4 5 C if cosA cosB + sin/1 sin5 sinC = 1, then ABC is right angle triangle. If k<p + qr<p + q<k, then k=p + qr=p + q = kandr= 1. L e t / : R —> R be thrice differentiable non constant function, then between two consecutive real roots of f"'(x) = 0, there are atmost four real roots o f f ( x ) = 0. I f / (x) is differentiable in [a, b], then there exist atleast one c 6 (a, b) for which f > { c ) = m z m . TYPE
2
(c) zbej(AB)
(d) 2zb e'
C6l.t3: Paragraph for Question Nos. 61 to 63 A lamp post of length 10 meter placed at the end A of a ladder AB of length 13 meter, which is leaning against a vertical wall as shown in figure and its base slides away from the wall. At the instant base B is 12 m from the vertical wall, the base B is moving at the rate of 5 m/sec. A man (M) of height 1.5 meter standing at a distance 15 m from the vertical wall, then answer the following question. Rate at which 9 decreases, when the base B is 12 m from the vertical wall, is (a) 1 rad/sec (b) 2 rad/sec (c) 5 rad/sec (d) — rad/sec
mam rem _ LINKED COMPREHENSION
63.
Rate at which length of shadow of the man increases, when the base B is 12 m from the vertical wall, is (a) 15 m/sec (b) — m/sec 27 (d) 5 m/sec
This section contains 2 paragraphs C 58 . 60 and C 6 B a s e d u p o n each paragraph, 3 multiple choice questions have to be answered. Each question has 4 choices C(zc) (a), (b), (c) and (d), out of which ONLY ONE is correct. C 5!Mj0 : Paragraph for Question Nos. 58 to 60 In the figure \z\ = r is circumcircle of AABC. D, E and F are the middle points of the sides BC, CA and AB respectively, AD produced to meet the circle at L. If ZCAD = 0, AD = x, BD = y and altitude of AABC from A meet the circle z = r at M, za, zb and zc are affixes of vertices A, B and C respectively. Then Area of the AABC is equal to (a) xy cos(9 + Q (b) (x + y)sin 0 (c) xy sin (0 + Q Affix of .Mis (a) 2z„ei2B (b) Affix of L is (a) Z ( ,e''^ 2 0 ) (d) ~ xy sin(0 + C) (c)zbeiB (b) 2z 2 ,e'^ 2 0 ) (d) 2z b e i B
(c) — m/sec 2 Rate at which a decreases, when the base B is 12 m from the vertical wall, is 72 80 rad/sec (a) (b) rad/sec 35 181 , , 36 J; (d) 20 rad/sec (cj — rad/sec
MATRIXMATCH TYPE This section contains 3 questions. Each question contains statements given in two columns which haveto be matched. Statements (A, B, C, D) in Column 1 have to be matched with statements (p, q, r, s) in Column II. The answers to these questions have to be appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the following example. If the correct matches are Ap, As, Bq, Br, Cp, Cq and Ds, then the correctly bubbled 4 x 4 matrix should be as follows:
®®0® ®®®@
®®Q® ® ®©®
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
Column I (A) If/(x) is a quadratic expression inx and 6 \f( )dx 0 then k is
x
Column II (P)l
= k /(l) + /(0) + 4/(1/2)
(B) If the sum of the squares of the intercepts on the axes cut off by the tangents to the curve x 1/3 + ym = a1'3 (a > 0) at ^ » ^ j
is 2 t h e n a is
(q)4
(D) The lengths of two opposite edges AB (s) 4 and CD of a tetrahedron ABCD are a and b. Shortest distance and angle between AB and CD are equal to d and 0 respectively. If the volume the tetrahedron is ~ abd sin 0, t ^ e n p is equal to
'
(C) The distance of the point on y = x4 + 3x2 + 2x which is nearest to the line y = 2x  1 is r, then J5r is (D) I f / ( x ) =  2 sin x + aeM + 5 tan x3 is differentiable at x = 0, then a is Column I (A) Number of integral value of b for which tangent parallel to line y = x + 1 can be drawn to hyperbola
2 2 5
(r)3
(8)2
Column II (p) 4
b2
_____ (q)5
(B) x2+y2 + 2xy + 2x + 2y + X = 0 does not represent a pair of real straight line if A, = (C) Number of solution of tan2x = tan 6x in (0, 3 ft) is (D) If in the expansion of (21/3 + 3 ,/3 ) n the ratio of 7th term from begining to the 7 th term from end is 1 : 6, then n is Column I (A) Minimum value of x3 + x + 2 , x e (0,
X
(r)6 (s)9
45. 50. 55 60. 64. 65.
(d) (a) (a) (b) (b) (c) (a) (b) (d) 10. (d) (a) (a) (d) (a) 15. G>) (a) (b) (d) (c) (A)  p,s; (B)  p,r; (C)  q,s; (D) p,r (A) P,s; (B) q,s; (C)  p,s; (D) s (A)  P,q; (B) • •P,r; (C)  p,q; (D) r,s (b) (d) (a) (b) (c) (b) (C) (d) (c) 32. (a) (d) (b) (c) (d) (c) (a) (d) (b) (a) (A)  p,q; (B)  p,q; (C)  p,r,s; (D)  r,s (A)  p,q,r,s; (B)  p,r,s; (C)  q,r,s; (D) q,r ( A )  s ; (B)  q; ( C )  p ; ( D )  r (c) (c) (a) (a) (c) (a) (b) (b) (d) (d) (b) (a) (b) (c) (d) (b) (a) (a) (b) (A)  p ; (B)  q; (C) p ; ( D )  s (A)  p; (B)  p,q,r,s; (C)  q; (D)  s (A)s;(B)r;(C)q;(D)p
For Paper 1 refer Chemistry Today, March issue.
Column II (P)6 is
(B) Number of real solutions of  x  +2\J5  4x  x 2 = 16 is
(q)l
(r)0
(C)If4=(r^.1 where r is a natural number \A\\ + \A2\ + \A3\ + .... + ^20061 = k (2006) 2 , then k is equal to
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
Kids who live in neighbourhoods with heavy traffic pollution have lower IQ and score worse on other tests of intelligence and memory than children who breathe cleaner air, a new study shows.
!O0§ ©M©0@@ MH SWB P O 3 MOD GD IMMEG O isms®* DC O D O© G npaid Problem
DATA Speed of light Gravitational constant Radius of Earth Mass of Earth Mass of Sun Radius of Earth's orbit
Train Your Brain
c = 3.00 x 10s m/s
G = 6.67 x 10~u Nm2/kg2 RE = 6.38 x 10 3 km ME = 6.0 x 1024kg MS = 2.0 x 10 30 kg
RES= 1.50 x l O 8 k m
Acceleration due to gravity g = 9.80 m/s2 Fundamental charge e = 1.60 x 1019C Mass of electron me = 9.11 x 10~31kg Mass of proton Planck's constant Coulomb's constant Speed of sound in air Energy conversion ^ = 1 . 6 7 3 x 10
27
Three airplanes A, B and C, each release an object from the same altitude and with the same initial speed v0 with respect to the ground. At the moment their object is released, A is flying horizontally, B is flying upward at an angle 0 with respect to the horizontal, and C is flying at the same angle 9 as B but downward with respect to the horizontal. Assuming the ground to be horizontal and neglecting any aerodynamical effect, the speeds v at which the three objects will hit the ground satisfy (b) VA > VB = V C (d) VA = VFI = VC. Two identical conducting spheres, A and B, carry equal electric charge. They are separated by a distance much larger than their diameter and exert an electrostatic force F on each other. A third identical conducting sphere C is initially uncharged and far away from A and B. Sphere C is then brought briefly into contact with sphere A, then with sphere B, and finally removed far away. The electrostatic force between A and B is now (a) 3F/8 (b)F/2 (c) F/4 (d)F/16. On the ground, the Earth exerts a force F0 on an astronaut. The force that the Earth exerts on this astronaut inside the Space Shuttle in low Earth orbit, 300 km above the ground, is (a) a little less than F0 (b) a little more than F0 (c) exactly F0 (d) zero, since the astronaut is weightless when in orbit. A person is swinging a ball at the end of a string of length I with constant speed v. The work done by the tension Tin the string over one revolution is (a) 0 (b) mv1/! (c) 2nlT (d) undetermined by the information given. The pressure exerted by a gas on the walls of the vessel that contains it is due to the (a) change in kinetic energy ofthe gas molecules as they strike the walls (b) collisions between the gas molecules (c) repulsive force between the gas molecules
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
kg
(a) A = VB< Vc (c) VA<VB< vc
V
h = 6.63 x 1034JS l/4ne 0 = 8.99 xio~ 9 Jm/C 2 vs = 343 m/s 1 e V = 1.6 x 10"19 J
A parallelplate capacitor holds charge q and is not connected to anything. The distance between the plates is now increased. The electrical energy stored on the capacitor (a) decreases (b) remains the same (c) increases (d) can do any of the above, depending on how the capacitance changes. When an electromagnetic wave goes from one medium to another, it undergoes a change in (a) amplitude only (b) both speed and wavelength (c) speed only (d) wavelength only. Two identical rooms in a perfectly insulated house are connected by an open doorway. The temperature in the two rooms are maintained at different values. The room which contains more air molecules is (a) (b) (c) (d) the one with the higher temperature the one with the lower temperature the one with the higher pressure neither, since both have the same volume.
(d) change in momentum of the gas molecules as they strike the walls. A Martian creature similar to an Earth frog jumps with an initial speed v0 and attains the range R over horizontal ground. The maximum possible height reached by the creature, neglecting friction in the tenuous Martian air, is (0 being the launch angle) (a) (c) ftan©
4
maximum acceleration while towing another car twice its mass, assuming no skidding, would be (a) 3.0 m/s2 (b) 1.5 m/s2 2 (c) 1.0m/s (d) 0.5 m/s 2 . Two satellites of equal mass, A and B, are in concentric orbits around the Earth. The distance of B from Earth's centre is twice that of A. The ratio of the centripetal force acting on B to that acting on A is (a) 1 (b) VT72 (c) 1/2 (d) 1/4. A proton sits at coordinates (x, y) = (0, 0), and an electron at (d, h), where d » h. At time t = 0, a uniform electric field E of unknown magnitude but pointing in the positive y direction is turned on. Assuming that d is large enough that the protonelectron interaction is negligible, the y coordinates of the two particles will be equal (at equal time) (a) (b) (c) (d) at a b o u t j = of/2000 at an undetermined value since E is unknown at about j = d/43 none of these
(b)
4 sin 6
4
tanO
(d) undetermined because of missing data. The work done to accelerate a truck on a horizontal road from rest to speed v (a) is less than that required to accelerate it from v to 2v (b) is equal to that required to accelerate it from v to 2v (c) is more than that required to accelerate it from v to 2v (d) may be any one of the above since it depends on the force acting on the truck and the distance over which it acts. If the Earth did not rotate on its axis, the magnitude of the gravitational acceleration at the Equator would be about (a) 0.003% larger (b) 0.3% larger (c) 0.3% smaller (d) 0.003% smaller. You want to apply a force on a box so that it moves with constant speed across a horizontal floor. The coefficient of kinetic friction between the box and the floor is Of the four following cases, the force you apply on the box will be smallest when you (a) push on it with a force applied at an angle 0 < 0 < 90° downward from the horizontal (b) pull on it with a force applied at the same angle as in (a), upward from the horizontal (c) do either (a) or (b) since the applied force is the same (d) push or pull with a force applied horizontally. An electric current runs counterclockwise in a rectangular loop around the outside edge of this page, which lies flat on your table. A uniform magnetic field is then turned on, directed parallel to the page from top to bottom. The magnetic force on the page will cause (a) the left edge to lift up (b) the right edge to lift up (c) the top edge to lift up (d) the bottom edge to lift up. A car has a maximum acceleration of 3.0 m/s2. Its
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
In the circuit below we increase the resistance R2. If Ij is the current through resistor Rj (J = 1,2, 3), then — m — h m
r
2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
/, and I 2 both increase 7] decreases and I 2 increases Ii and I 2 both decrease Ii increases and I 2 decreases.
Two carts A and B, are placed on an air track. They are made of the same material and look identical. B is given a constant speed and collides elastically with A at rest. After the collision, both carts move in the same direction. One concludes that (a) A is hollow (b) B is hollow (c) A and B are identical (d) any of the first three answers is possible. The smallest length scale known in physics is the Planck length. It is an important ingredient in some currrent cosmological theories. Which of the following expressions could represent this Planck length? (see Data table.) (a) yle2/hc (b) Jhc/G (c) 4<3h~c (d) ^JhG/c3 • The Webb space telescope, scheduled to be launched in 2010, will have a mirror 6 m in diameter. Compared
with the Hubble space telescope, whose mirror has a 2.4 m diameter, it will be able to resolve objects whose angular separation is about (a) 2.5 times smaller (b) 5 times smaller (c) an order of magnitude smaller (d) the same, the larger mirror only increases the amount of light gathered. A simple pendulum of length L is suspended from the top of a flat beam of thickness LI2. The bob is pulled away from the beam so that it makes an angle 0 < 30° with the vertical, as shown in the figure. It is then released from rest. If < is the maximum angular >  deflection to the right, then
work W she does on it ? (a) F=0 and W= 0 (b) F * 0 a n d P F = 0 (c) F=0 and Wt 0 (d) .FV 0 and 0. A magnet moves inside a coil. Which of the following factors can affect the emf induced in the coil? I. II. III. (a) (c) The speed at which the magnet moves The strength of the magnet The number of turns in the coil I only (b) I and II only II and III only (d) I, II and III.
(a)
c> = 0 j
(b)
<j)<0
(c) 0 < 4 < 28 >
(d)
<j) > 20
In the diagram below, light is incident on the interface between media 1 and 2 at exactly the critical angle, and is totally reflected. The light is then also totally reflected at the interface between media 1 and 3, after which it travels in a direction opposite to its initial direction. The two interfaces are perpendicular. The media must have a refraction index n such that
\
"3
"2
At TRIUMF, a large experimental particle and nuclear physics research facility on the campus of the University of British Columbia, one major programme involves the production of intense beams of unstable isotopes of alkali atoms (potassium K, rubidium Rb, francium Fr). These have the advantage that since their valence shell contains only one electron, their closed shell structure when they are ionised simplifies calculations. Many isotopes are produced when bombarding a calcium oxide target with 0.5 GeV protons from the TRIUMF accelerator. Until recently, the desired isotope was selected by means of the TRIUMF Isotope Separator OnLine (TISOL) now decommissioned and replaced by a combined separator/ accelerator called ISAC—and sent as a lowspeed beam to experimental areas. You are asked to design a (much) simplified version of TISOL. More specifically, you want to select 38K ions whose energy is 20 keV. 38K has a mass of 6.3 x 10 26 kg. Separation should proceed in two steps, as illustrated below.
(a) n1<n2< n 3 (c) n] ~n\> n]
(b) (d)
«,2 nl>n] n,2 + n\ > n\
For the sake of science a physicist jumps attached to the end of a bungee cord, carrying sound measuring equipment. As he swings up and down vertically with a period of 6.0 s, he monitors the frequency of a sound source on the ground directly below him, and observes a difference of 84 Hz between the maximum and minimum frequency of the source. If the source emits at a constant 1370 Hz, and assuming no significant attenuation of his oscillations over the duration of the measurements, the amplitude of his oscillations is closest to (a) 10 m (b) 20 m (c) 32 m (d)15m. A person pulls a box along the ground at constant speed. Considering the Earth and the box together as a system. Which of the following is true about the net force F exerted by the person on this system and the
Selector
(ii) M a s s s e p a r a t o r
The figure shows the desired path of a 20 keV 38K ion through the system. This path is to be achieved by means of suitable uniform timeindependent electromagnetic fields. Interactions between ions can be neglected here. (a) In the first step, out of all ions (38K or not) entering the velocity selector from the left, only those that have a speed corresponding to a 20 keV 38K ion should be undeflected. Suggest a field configuration that can do this, draw a sketch showing the direction of the field(s), and derive as much information as you can about the magnitude of the field(s).
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
v is velocity of electromagnetic wave in medium '•' c = v>X0; v = \)X vX0
••• ^
=
.(ii) X0 is wavelength of electromagnetic wave in vacuum X is wavelength of electromagnetic wave in medium. From (i) and (ii) it is clear that, as electromagnetic wave goes from one medium to another, it suffers a change in speed and wavelength, while frequency remains constant. 3. (b) ForA,uy
!
sphere C is zero, i.e., qc = 0. When C is in contact with A, q+0 q qc = q A = — = 2 When C is in contact with B, q 4c = ^ and ^ 2+q = =3q 1B 2~ 4 respectively.
Now, charges on A and B after contact with C are Force between A and B is now, , K q M 2 _ F7' =• 22 ' ~4" 3 Kq r 8 r2 F' = F • F' = — 8 ' 8
[using (i)]
=0 ;
v2~u2 = 2as v/ = 2gh
 0 = 2
ay
h
i = Vvo2 + 2 8 h
For B,
2
uy = +vosin0
Vy ~ Uy2 = 2dyh v2  (v0sin9)2 = 2gh v 2 = v02sin29 + 2gh
•4
v
Force experienced by astronaut at the ground, GMm Rl where, m = mass of astroanaut, M = mass of earth, R = radius of earth Now, force experienced by astronaut at a height h above ground is, GMm / GMm GMm Fh = (.R + h)2 Fo (R + h)2! R1 F0 R2 (R + h)2 1+
= •'•
v
^](v02
sin 9 + 2gh) + (v0 cos9)
2+2
2
2
b=V o
8h
2 2
(ii)
F" = (1 + f) =(1^')(for/'muchlessthani?) ,.
Fh=FQ(i^y,.
For C, uy =  v0sin9; Now, v  u = 2ayh v2  (vosin0)2 = 2gh\ v 2 = v02sin26 + 2gh
2
Fh<Fo
+v2y
2+2
Displacement of ball in one revolution is zero. Work done is zero Pressure, P ..(iii) But, F oc P^Ap. 2vq sin 9 cos 9 g Maximum possible height, Range, R • ^o2sin29 2g Dividing (ii) by (i) we get, V sin2 9 Q H _ 2g sin 9. sin 9 R 2v02sin9cos6 ~ 4sin9cos9
n
= ^/(v0 cos9) 2 + (v02 sin2 9 + 2gh)
v
Force (F)
c= V o
v
^
(Rate of change of momentum)
From (i), (ii) and (iii), we have vA = vB = v c Hence, option (d) is correct. A
q
•(i)
.
..(ii)
Let initial charge on identical spheres A and B are, iA = q; qB = q:. Force experienced by A and B due to one another is,
I ,
_ F = Kq
,(i) ^ = tan6: R 4 H=
7? tan 9
245
According to question, initial charge on third identical
PHYSICS FOR YOU
MARCH '08
v is velocity of electromagnetic wave in medium '' c = v>X0; v = UA vx 0 .(ii) X0 is wavelength of electromagnetic wave in vacuum X is wavelength of electromagnetic wave in medium. From (i) and (ii) it is clear that, as electromagnetic wave goes from one medium to another, it suffers a change in speed and wavelength, while frequency remains constant. 3. (b) ForA,u  0 = 2 ciyh; =h For B,
1 + v
sphere C is zero, i.e., qc = 0. When C is in contact with A, q+0 q qc = iA = — =2 When C is in contact with B, 2+q qc=qB = — •2 and = 3q 
Now, charges on A and B after contact with C are respectively. K 1
2 2
.". Force between A and B is now, F'=
'
4
= \  \
8
2
[using (i)]
=0 ;
v2u2
= 2as
•
F' = — F • F' = —
8 '
v 2 = 2gh = ^ g h + v02
*
uy = +vosin0
Vy2  Uy2 = 2dyh Vy2  (vosin0)2 = 2gh v 2 = vo2sin20 + 2gh
=1
= V(v02 sin2 0 + 2 gh) + (v0 cos0) 2 ••• vfl = + 2gh (ii) For C, uy =  vosin0; Now, v2  u2 = 2ayh v2  (—vosin0)2 = 2gh; • vo2sin20 + 2gh v„ +v/ = yj(v0 COS0)2 + (v02 sin2 9 + 2 gh) vc = ^v2+2gh ..(iii) From (i), (ii) and (iii), we have va = Vb = Vc Hence, option (d) is correct. " * >F Let initial charge on identical spheres A and B are, iA = q; qB = q:. Force experienced by A and B due to one another is, FkI (i)
2
Force experienced by astronaut at the ground, GMm Fn = 2 R where, m = mass of astroanaut, M = mass of earth, R = radius of earth Now, force experienced by astronaut at a height h above ground is, GMm /GMm GMm R2 " (R + h)2' F0 (R + h)2 1 1 R2 (R + h)2 y = (l + j j = ( l ~ ^ ) ( f o r / z much less than/?)
y]v02
Displacement of ball in one revolution is zero. Work done is zero Pressure, P P^ Ap. Range, R = 2vn sin 0 cos 0 .(i) Force (F) But, Foc^E (Rate of change of momentum)
g Maximum possible height, v„ sin2 0 2g Dividing (ii) by (i) we get, V sin2 0 p H _ 2g sin0. sin9 R 2v 2 sin0cos0 ~ 4sin6cos0 H= g f ^ t a n e ; H= i?tan0 .(ii)
According to question, initial charge on third identical
PHYSICS FOR YOU
MARCH '08
10. (a) Work done = Change in kinetic energy Case I: K, = 0; Kf = \mv2 z 1 i .. W\ = ±mv2 Case I I : K^^mv2; ; AK = \mv2 2
N= (mg  F sin 0) ••• f = ^ m g  F s m Q ) 13. (c) Use Fleming left hand rule. F=ma a = — = 3.0m/s 2 m where m is mass of car. In towing another car of mass 2m. p acceleration of car, a' = r—(m + 2m) ....(i) ....(iii) t h e n , / < f <f2. Hence, option (b) is correct
Kf = ±m(2v)2 = 4 ±mv2
AK = 4\mv2\mv2. AK = \mv2 I 2 ' 2 .. W2 = mv2', ••• W2 = 3Wl i.e., Value of acceleration due to gravity on its equator is g'=gCG 2 7? As earth stops rotating, value of g increases by to 2 R :. % increase m g = — x l O O 8 n2 (fjxfxlOO 4n .6.38 xlO xlOO 9.80 (24x60x60)2 4 x 9 . 8 6 x 6.38x10 (86400)' 9.80 4x9.86 4X986X638 = x 638 x 1 q 8 • x 10 746496xlO 4 980 = 746496x980 : 3 2 = 3.44 x IO" x 10 = 0.34% g increases by 0.3% 12. (b) Case I : When push or pull (F) is horizontal. iN
= 2 6
a' = 1 . 0 m/s 2 Centripetal force is balanced by gravitational force of acceleration GMm„ 'B_ . GMm.
(«J ('J
. \21 ' " I 4
As mA = mK and rB = 2rA •
Fa
m {2rA)
FA~
16. (d) Proton moves along the direction of E. Electron moves opposite to the direction of E. 17. (c) As /?, increases, I 2 decreases. Further increase in effective resistance, decreases current through the circuit. 18. ( a ) :
B A (Rest)
+F
fl
mg
fi = Vk™g (i) Case I I : When push on the block is downward at angle 0 < 0 < 90° with horizontal. AN
SI
h I f sine >> mg
F cos 8 —>
N= mg + F sin 0 :. f2 = \x.k(mg + F sin 0)
....(ii)
Case III: When pull F on the block is upward at angle 0 (0 < 0 < 90°) with horizontal
F sine
a h V
F cos 8 —>
In elastic collision, velocity of body B after collision is, _(mlm2)ul 2 m2u2 v, = m, +m2 ml+ m2 Here, mx = m B , m 2 = mA ux = v, u2 = 0; V! = vB (mBmA)v V b ~ (m + m ) mB+mA B A According to question, both blocks moves in same direction. i.e. vB is positive, or vB > 0; .•. mBmA> 0 i.e.mB>mA. : . Block A may be hollow. M = M L 2 T 1 ; [c] = L T 1 [G] = M _1 L 3 T" 2
mg
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
IhG
£
3
IML2T 1 • M'L'T" 2 LT"
L
hG
= Dimension of length. 1 d
9 ' 2.5 m
C, + C2 = 90° C2 = (90°  C J From (ii) sin(90°  Q =
n\
Hence, option (d) is correct. Angular separation of telescope, 0 d is diameter of mirror of telescope. 0, 21. (c): 6 m 5 j = T.— = —m = 2.5m «i 2.4 m 2 0 2 _
cose, = Squaring and aiding (i) and (iii) we get 2 2 sin 2 C, + cos 2 C, =  j +  j ^
1=
....(iii)
"2+"3
2
2
2 2 2 2 nx = n2 + «3 =>«,«. = ru Hence option (c) is correct.
v = velocity of the observer At A, K.E = 0, P.E = mg[L  L cos 6] P.E = mgL(\  cos 0) Total energy at A, EA = K.E + P.E Ea = mgL(\  cos 0) ....(i) At B, K.E = 0 L L ,1 Ln P.E = mg jcoscjjj = mg(l coscl Total energy at B.
E
3
330(u  u 0 ) = u 0 .v 330 • 8 4 = 1370 v v = 20.23 m/s = 20.46 = 20 m
= ^
(
1COS0)
.(ii)
Since energy is conserved. => mgL(lcos0) = ^^(lcos()) Assume that there is no friction F = 0 because once the box has started moving, it is moving with a constant velocity, mg is acting down and R = mg. N o work is done because unless the body is lifted, there is no work done, once motion has started. 25. (d) Problem 1 (a) As shown in the figure below, we can use a uniform electric field, E , directed downward in the plane of the page, and a uniform magnetic field, Bx, directed into the page. (E directed upward and S, out of the page will also work.) .(i) FM Fe ..(ii)
(i) V e l o c i t y s e l e c t o r
2  2 cos0 = 1  cos () 2 cos0  cos < = 1 ) > 2 cos0 = 1 + cos tf» _ l + cos<b
COS0 = — 
0 < <) < 20
Hence option (c) is correct. 22. ( c ) :
For refraction at (12) interface, «, sin C, = « 2 sin 90° sinC,  L2. For refraction at (1  3) interface, sin C2 = « 3 sin 90° sinC, = — Now from the diagram, it is clear that
E
Since the alkali ions all have positive charge e, they
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
experience • an electric force FE = eE, directed downward in the plane of the page • a magnetic force Fm = ev x 5,, where v is the velocity of an ion. From the righthand rale for vector products, it is directed upward in the plane of the page, for v directed to the right, the magnitude of Fu is simply evB. For a given velocity v0, there exist magnitudes of £ and 5, such that the magnetic and electric forces balance each other. This condition is achieved when F, = FM, or eE = ev„B,. Then all ions which have speed
E
V° = B when they enter the velocity selector will not be deflected. Ions with othdr . speeds will be deflected and can be extracted from the initial beam. Only the ratio E / B is determined by the condition 2 Kn E B'
trajectory with radius of curvature R0, we should use afield _ mv0 _ 1 2m0K0 2 eR, R,i With the data supplied, we have _1_ l2K0(eV) K0 in eV 2 ?/r, R* l 2(2.0 x 10 eV) . = 0.060 T 2.1 m l (1.6 x 10~19 C)/(6.3xl0~ 26 kg) Problem 2 If the high tides in the Bay of Fundy are caused by a resonance mechanism, it must be because the tidal forces from the Moon driving seawater in and out of the bay are exciting one of its standing wave modes. The rise and fall ofthe tide can be modelled by a wave with extremely long wavelength propagating on the water. The boundary conditions at the mouth and the far end of the bay mimic those of a standing wave on a string with on end fixed (mouth), where the vertical displacement is minimum, and the other free (far end), where displacement is maximum. This mode would have a wavelength A. = 4L, where L is the length ofthe string or, here, the length ofthe bay L = 260 km. with v = 25 m/s the speed of the waves, their period is 4(2.60 x l 0 5 m ) X=—= — = = 4.16 x 10 s v v 25 m/s 11.6 hours Now we expect the period of the tides to be about 12.4 hours. Indeed, if the Moon had a fixed position with respect to the Earth, the two tidal bulges (high tides) on Earth would move in the direction opposite the Earth's rotation with one passing through a given position every 12 hours. But the Moon moves in its own orbit with the Earth's rotation with an average period of about 29 days, i.e. 6.2° in the sky every 12 hours or 720 minutes. Therefore, it takes 25 minutes for the Moon to cover that angular distance, and this increases the tidal period to 12.4 hours. We have found that the period with which the water sloshes back and forth in the bay due to the Moon's tidal force is comparable to the period of the fundamental resonance mode for our admittedly crude model of the Bay of Fundy. Given the approximations involved, this is quite a good match, and it is likely that this resonance mechanism can explain why the tides are amplified.
where m0 is the mass of a 38K ion and K = m„v02/2. 2(2.0 xl0 4 eV)(l .6 x 10"19C) Then, A B 6.3xl0~ 26 kg 5 = 3.2 x io m/s Note that this value is much smaller than the speed of light, consistent with our ignoring relativistic effects, (b) In this case, the uniform magnetic field B2 directed into the page, as shown in the figure below, exerts a centripetal force F2 on incoming ions, giving them a circular trajectory of radius R. It does not change their energy (and speed) since magnetic fields do no work. The direction of deflection of the ions is determined from the righthand rale applied to F2 v0XB2.
(ii) Mass separator
Since v„ and 5, are perpendicular, we have F, = evJB2. Using the general expression for a centripetal force, F2 = mv02 / R, where m is the mass of an ion, we obtain RmV° ~eB~2 All incoming ions having the same speed, to each ionic mass in the beam will correspond one value of R in a given magnetic field. If only 38K ions are to have a
249 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
Problem 3 (a) We are looking for a configuration where the telescope, the Earth and the Sun maintain the same relative positions in a coordinate system rotating at constant angular velocity co. In other words, in that rotating system, the telescope has the following net acceleration , \GM, ^ GM2 a  co x  — ± L x (R±x) 2 where the + sign is to be used w h e n x > R and the  sign when x < R. (Technical point: since we are working in the noninertial frame rotating with angular velocity co, an extra pseudoacceleration (Coriolis) term dependent on dx I dt should also be present. With our assumption of a circular orbit, however, dx / dt = 0, and the Coriolis term does not contribute.) The condition that a vanishes then reads GM, GM, C X = r^O X (R + xY (b) Using Kepler's Third Law, GM, = co2R\ and introducing the parameter a = MJM}, we can eliminate co2 and M, aR 3 R x = — ++ , x2 (R ± x)2 Multiplying by xJR, and rearranging yields, with u = x/R au.2 « J  1 = ±(1 ±uy (e) From the result in (a), there should be a point L, on the axis between the Earth and the Sun where the condition that the centrifugal acceleration co2x, equals the net gravitational acceleration (which is smaller than that due to the Sun) can be satisfied for a value of
0) equal to the Earth's, so that x, < R. Since the mass of the Earth is over 300000 times smaller than the Sun's, Lx should not be very far from Earth. It is actually 1.5 million km away, one hundred times closer than the Sun. Conversely, the same condition will be satisfied at a point L2 a bit farther than the Earth's orbit, where this time the gravitational attractions of Sun and Earth add, so that x2> R. L2 should be (and is) at about the same distance from the Earth's orbit as Lv Finally, at a point Z.3 on the other side of Sun, the condition is also satisfied where the gravitational acceleration due to the Sun's and the Earth's gravity reinforcing each other equals co2x3. Since Earth is much farther from Z3 than from L2, L3 should be much closer to R than L2. It is a good place to hide from Earth.
(d) The point labelled L2 in the figure will be suitable for the telescope. A heat screen attached to the telescope will shield it from heat radiated by both Earth and Sun since they are always aligned as viewed from L2, leaving the rest of the sky unobstructed for observation. (e) Since the system shown in the figure is symmetric about the x axis, Lagrange points off the axis must come in pairs. So the minimum number is two. In fact, Lagrange found one pair of solutions off the axis, for a total of five.
A Complete Magazine on Current Affairs
Rs. 150
Rs. 275
H o w t o o r d e r : Send D.D./ M.0. in favour of M T G L e a r n i n g M e d i a (P) Ltd., Payable at New Delhi. Post to the address given
Available at all leading magazine stands
MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd.,
406, Taj Apt., Ring Road, New Delhi29. Tel.: (011) 26194317 email: info@mtg.in www.mtg.in
64 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
iAMCET
Manipal PMT
PMT Haryana
j i a PMT
TNPCEE
ilPMER
CET Karnataka
Which one ofthe following is not a unit of time? (a) Lunar month (b) Leap year (c) Parsec (d) Solar day Suppose refractive index p is given as i where A and B are constants and X is wavelength, then dimensions of B are same as that of (a) wavelength (b) volume (c) pressure (d) area The vector sum of two forces is perpendicular to their vector differences. In that case, the forces (a) can not be predicted (b) are perpendicular to each other (c) are equal to each other in magnitude (d) are not equal to each other in magnitude A body is allowed to fall from a height of 100 m. If the time taken for the first 50 m is tx, and for the remaining 50 m is t2, then (a) tx = t2 (b) tx > t2 (c) tx < t2 (d) depends upon the mass The displacement time graphs of two bodies A and B are shown in figure. The ratio of velocity of A, vA to velocity of B, vB is
2
Two masses Mx = 5 kg and M2= 10 kg are connected at the ends of an inextensible string passing over a frictionless pulley as shown. When the masses are released, then the acceleration ofthe masses will be
//////*///(///fU/I///
(a) g
(b) g/2
(c) gl3
(d) gl4
A block of mass m is pulled along a horizontal surface by applying a force at an angle 0 with the horizontal. If the block travels with a uniform velocity and has a displacement d and the coefficient of friction is p, then the work done by the applied force is \imgd Xrngd cos0 (a) cos0 + J.sin0 (b) cos0 + isin9 \imgd cos 0 \xmgd sinQ (d) (c) cos 0 +p. sin 0 v ' cos 0  p. sin 0 Consider a car moving along a straight horizontal road with a speed of 72 km/h. If the coefficient of static friction between road and tyres is 0.5, the shortest distance in which the car can be stopped is (a) 30 m (b) 40 m (c) 72 m (d) 20 m Three point masses, each of mass m, are placed at the corner of an equilateral triangle of side I. Then the moment of inertia of this system about an axis along one side ofthe triangle is (a) 3 mP (b) rnt1 (c)  ml2 (d)  ml2
(a) ^
r (b) V3
1 (c) 3
(d) 3
A projectile is thrown at an angle of 40° with the horizontal and its range is RX. Another projectile is thrown at an angle 40° with the vertical and its range is R2. What is the relation between RX and R21 (a) R\=R2 (b) RL=2R1 (c)
R2 = 2RX
The moment of inertia of a body about a given axis is 1.2 kg m2. Initially, the body is at rest. In order to produce a rotational kinetic energy of 1500 joule, an angular acceleration of 25 rad/sec2 must be applied about that axis for a duration of (a) 4 s (b) 2 s (c) 8 s (d) 10 s If the metal bob of a simple pendulum is replaced by a wooden bob, then its time period will
(d)
Rx=P
_ 4 R2
60 PHYSICS FOR YOU APRIL'07
(a) increase (b) decrease (c) remain the same (d) be first (a) then (b) The acceleration due to gravity is g at a point r distant from the centre of earth of radius if. If r < R, then (a) g°c r (b) g r 2 (c) (d) g °= r 2 The escape velocity for a body projected vertically upwards from the surface of earth is 11 km/sec. If the body is projected at an angle of 45° with the vertical, the escape velocity will be (a) 11/V2 km/sec (c) 2 km/sec (b) l h / 2 km/sec (d) 11 km/sec
A reversible engine converts onesixth of the heat input into work. When the temperature of the sink is reduced by 62°C, the efficiency of the engine is doubled. The temperatures of the source and sink are (a) 99°C, 37°C (b) 80°C, 37°C (c) 95°C, 37°C (d) 90°C, 37°C Graph of specific heat at constant volume for a monoatomic gas is
3R
(a)
(b)
A block of weight W produces an extension of 9 cm when it is hung by an elastic spring of length 60 cm and is in equilibrium. The spring is cut into two parts, one of length 40 cm and the other of length 20 cm. The same load W hangs in equilibrium supported by both parts as shown in figure. The extension in cm now is /////////// A =>
(c)
C
V
3R 2
(d)
}V\ (a) 9 (b) 6
o tij, (c) 3
20 cm (d) 2
Two capillaries of length L and 2L and of radii R and 2R are connected in series. The net rate of flow of fluid through them will be (given rate of the flow through single capillary X= NPR4/KT]L) (a) f x (b) f x (c) jX (d) ] x
If the displacement (x) and velocity v of a particle executing simple harmonic motion are related through the expression 4V2 = 25  x2 then its time period is (a) n (b) 271 (c) 4ji (d) 6n 22 A pendulum suspended from the roof of an elevator at rest has a time period T h when the elevator moves up with an acceleration a its time period becomes T2, when the elevator moves down with an acceleration a, its time period becomes 7"3, then (a) Ti(c) Tx = JT22 + T2
(b) 7; = YL(T2 + T 2 )
Pressure versus temperature graph of an ideal gas is as shown in figure. Density of the gas at p o i n t s is p0. Density at point B will be P* 3 P, •<A
B
(d) none of these
2Tn (a)  p 0 (b) p0 (c) fpo (d) 2p 0
The latent heat of vaporisation of a substance is always (a) greater than its latent heat of fusion (b) greater than its latent heat of sublimation (c) equal to its latent heat of sublimation (d) less than its latent heat of fusion
In a sinusoidal wave, the time required for a particular point to move from maximum displacement to zero displacement is 0.17 sec. The frequency of the wave is (a) 1.47 Hz (b) 0.36 Hz (c) 0.73 Hz(d) 2.94 Hz Stationary waves of frequency 300 Hz are formed in a medium in which the velocity of sound is 1200 m/s. The distance between a node and neighbouring antinode is (a) 1 m (b) 2 m (c) 3 m (d) 4 m The refractive index of water with respect to air is 4/3 and the refractive index of glass with respect to air is 3/2. Then the refractive index of water with respect to glass is (a) 9/8 (b) 8/9 (c) 1/2 (d) 2
64 PHYSICS FOR YOUAPRIL'07
If one face of a prism of prism angle 30° and p is silvered, the incident ray retraces its initial path. The angle of incidence is (a) 60° (b) 30° (c) 45° (d) 90° A paper with two marks having separation d is held normal to the line of sight of an observer at a distance of 50 m. The diameter of the eye lens of the observer is 2 mm. Which of the following is the least value of d, so that the marks can be seen as separate? Mean wavelength of visible light may be taken 5000 A (a) 0.125 cm (b) 1.225 cm (c) 1.525 cm (d) 2.125 cm A beam of light of wavelength 600 nm from a distant source falls on a single slit 1.00 mm wide and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2 m away. The distance between the first dark fringes on either side of the central bright fringe is (a) 1.2 cm (b) 1.2 mm (c) 2.4 cm (d) 2.4 mm A Nicol prism is based on the principle of (a) refraction (b) scattering (c) dichroism (d) double refraction Four charges are arranged at the corners of a square ABCD as shown in the figure. The force on the positive charge kept at the centre O is
The number of dry cells, each of e.m.f. 1.5 volt and internal resistance 0.5 £2 that must be joined in series with a resistance of 20 ohm so as to send a current of 0.6 ampere through the circuit is (a) 2 (b) 8 (c) 10 (d) 12 In an experiment to measure the internal resistance of a cell by a potentiometer, it is found that the balance point is at a length of 2 m, when the cell is shunted by a 5 £2 resistance and at a length of 3 m, when the cell is shunted by a 10 Q resistance. The internal resistance of the cell is then (a) 1.5 Q (b) 10 Q (c) 15 Q (d) 1 Q The temperature of inversion of a thermocouple is 620°C and the neutral temperature is 300°C. What is the temperature of cold junction? (a) 320°C (b) 20°C (c) 20°C (d) 40°C Two infinitely long parallel wires carry equal currents in same direction. The magnetic field at a mid point in between the two wires is (a) square of the magnetic field produced due to each of the wires (b) half of the magnetic field produced due to each of the wires (c) twice the magnetic field produced due to each of the wires (d) zero An arc of a circle of radius R subtends an angle ^ at the centre. It carries a current I. The magnetic field at the centre will be
 2 q +q (a) zero (b) along the diagonal AC (c) along the diagonal BD (d) perpendicular to side AB
fa) (aj
. Electric potential at any point is V = 5x + 3y + Vl5z then the magnitude of electric field is (a) 3V2 (b) A^2 (C) 5^2 (d) 7 A network of four capacitors of capacity equal to C, = C, C2 = 2C, C3 = 3 C and C4 = 4C are connected to a battery as shown in the figure. The ratio of the charges on C2 and C4 is
47? l j SR A transformer with efficiency 80% works at 4 kW and 100 V. If the secondary voltage is 200 V, then the primary and secondary currents are respectively (a) 40 A, 16 A (b) 16 A, 40 A (c) 20 A, 40 A (d) 40 A, 20 A If T is the number of turns in a coil, the value of selfV inductance varies as (a) N° (b) N (c) N1 (d) IT2 A particle A has charge +q and a particle B has charge +4q with each of them having the same mass m. When allowed to fall from rest, the ratio of their speeds vA/vB will become (a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1 The energy of a photon is equal to the kinetic energy of a proton. The energy of the photon is E. Let A,! be the de Broglie wavelength of the proton and A2 be the wavelength of the photon. The ratio Xi/X2 is
^ 2R
(b)
m
W
(a) A/1
(b) 3/22
(c) 7/4
(d) 22/3
64 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
proportional to (a) E° (b) EM (c) E L (d) E~2 The moment of momentum for an electron in second orbit of hydrogen atom as per Bohr's model is (a) A ( b ) 2nh (c) M (d) f The angular speed of the electron in the «th orbit of Bohr's hydrogen atom is (a) directly proportional to n (b) inversely proportional to ~Jn (c) inversely proportional to n 2 (d) inversely proportional to w3 In hydrogen spectrum, the shortest wavelength in Balmer series is A,. The shortest wavelength in Brackett series will be (a) 21 (b) AX (C) 9A (d) 16A. An element with atomic number Z = 11 emits KA Xray of wavelength X, then the atomic number ofthe element which emits KA Xray of wavelength AX is (a) 11 (b) 44 (c) 6 (d) 5 If N0 is the original mass of the substance of half life period 5 years, then the amount of substance left after 15 years is (a) Nq/2 (b) AV3 (c) NO/A (d) NO/S The current gain for transistor working as common base amplifier is 0.96. If the emitter current is 7.2 mA, then the base current is (a) 0.29 mA (b) 0.35 mA (c) 0.39 mA (d) 0.43 mA The electrical conductivity of a semiconductor increases when electromagnetic radiation of wavelength shorter than 2480 nm is incident on it. The band gap (in eV) for the semiconductor is (a) 0.9 (b) 0.7 (c) 0.5 (d) 0.1 The combination of the gates shown in the figure below produces
A
SOLUTIONS Parsec is a unit of distance. velocity of light in vacuum . h e n c e 1 S As H = —;—.. e y j> ^ velocity of light in medium dimensionless. Thus each term on the RHS of given equation should be dimensionless. — is dimensionless, i.e., B should have X dimensions of X2, i.e., cm 2 , i.e., area. S = F1+F2 and D = F,F2 As two vectors are perpendicular to each other, hence S D = 0 or (Fl + F2)(F1F2) =0 or or or (/j)2(F2)2=0 IF 2  — 0 l^M^l
s=
2
or
l^iH^I
\st\ yfg ^ \lg
or
,2 = 50X2 = 100 e S
2 2
and 100 = i g ? t2=ttl
or f =
=  ^ ( S  l ) = 0.Atl i.e., t.>t2 \I8 Velocity is the slope of the displacement time graph vA = tan30° vB tan 60°
=
(1/^3) _ \ (^3)
R is same for both 0 and (90°  0). If angle w.r.t. vertical is 40° then w.r.t. horizontal direction it will be 90°  40° = 50°. Since M2> Mu therefore M2 moves downwards and Mx moves upwards with an acceleration a as shown in the figure.
//////////////////////
(a) NOR gate (c) OR gate
(b) AND gate (d) NAND gate
A message signal of frequency 10 kHz and peak voltage of 10 volts is used to modulate a carrier of frequency 1 MHz and peak voltage of 20 volts. The modulation index is (a) 0.5 (b) 1 (c) 1.5 (d) 12
Free body diagram of M, A a Jl s Mxg
64 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
The equation of motion for Mx is T  Mxg = Mxa Free body diagram of M 2 l l "I
Mr,
Moment of inertia about BC is IBC = m( 0)2 + m(0)2 + m(AD)2 Since BC AD = JAB 'BC = m\—l \ml2 4
73/ 2
" t M2g The equation of motion for M2 is Mig T~ M2a (ii) Adding (i) and (ii), we get (M Mi)g (105)g g a = 2 ,+M1 (10 + 5) 3 Because the block moves with a uniform velocity, the resultant force is zero. Resolving F into horizontal component F cosO and vertical component F sinO, we get R + F sin 0 = mg or R = mgF Alsof = \iR = i(mg  FsinO) But Fcos0 = / or FcosQ = (x(mg  FsinO) or F(cos 9 + j, sin 0) = \img mg F = cos0 + (isin0 £ + .Fsin8 >F cos 0
77777777777777
Similarly, we find the moment of inertia about AB is IAB = m( 0)2 + m(0)2 + m(CE)2 In right angle ABEC sin 6 0 ° = £ K = C E BC I or CE = ^ l , V3 3ml2 or CE=l sin 60°
sinO
Moment of inertia along AC is IAC = m( 0)2 + m{ 0)2 + m(BF)2 In right angle ABFC BF BF ^ or BF = I sin 60° sin60° = BC I or BF = / •f3
2
S ,  m\( —~l ^
3ml2
= I/(o2=I/(a02 = ^ / a V
Work W = Fs •••
COS0
C O s 6
1500 = 5 x 1 . 2 * (25) 2 t2 or t2 = 4 or t= 2 s Time period of a simple pendulum is
T
W= ^ (••• s = d) Q cos0 + (t.sin0 1 Initial kinetic energy of the car = Work done against friction = \Xmgs From conservation of energy xmgs = ^ mv2 or s = (v 2 /2fig) Stopping distance, s = ( v ^ n g ) Given, v = 72 km/h = 72 x = 20 m/s jt = 0.5 and g=10ms~2 20x20 = 40 m 2x0.5x10
T H i Time period of a simple pendulum is independent on the material of the bob. Hence when a metal bob is replaced by a wooden bob its time period remains the same. 13. (a) 2
10. (c):
2GM,, R„ Since the escape velocity is independent of direction of projection, therefore escape velocity of the body, projected at an angle of 45° with the vertical will be same, i.e., 11 km/sec. Spring constant for original spring be k (say) W = (k x 9) or k 9 As spring constant is inversely proportional to length, so spring constant for spring of k and for spring of 20 cm length = 3k.
/
D
64 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
Spring constant of combination of two shorter springs 9k
=
or or or ••
4 ^ = x dt 4a =  x 1 a = —x
4
T+U
=
T
f — y dt dx_ dt and T =
v
••• w = f £(*'), x' = 2 cm
or 9/t = fcc'
Fluid resistance is given by nr When two capillary tubes of same size are connected in series, then equivalent fluid resistance is 8r)£ , 8r2Z, _ 8t]Z ^ 9 R S =R. 1+R, Z•• nR 4 8 :kR* 7t(2 RY . ,FL _ P NPR"a" 8 Rate of flow  ^  ^ > < 9 =F
P=
co2 = ±
4
271 = 2 T = 47! S ec T_ = co 1/2 4TC2/ r2 £
a
r =2
T 2••
' Ng
g +a 1 ga or or
: 2jt
4TT2/ ~ =g+
4TI I
r 3 = 27t
ga
tc/3/T 1 ^ = 8 , 1 TF or and
V
4n2l , 4TI2/
4n2l • 2 g where g =
Solving we get, j =
T P_ T
or or 3
8. (a) 9. (a)
or 5 T
= 1
£
3
^Tf+jf ZL T o; Here, time for maximum displacement, /= 0.17 sec. Time period T for one vibration = 4t = 4 x 0.17 = 0.68 sec Frequency = 1
timcpenod(r)
 0 .68 = 1.47 Hz
~r
L
=
«
=
ff 7T 6i
0
=
1 ...(i)
velocity 1200 m/s = 4m frequency 300 Hz The distance between a node and neighbouring Wavelength A,= antinode is ^ = 1 m Given : <K x ^ or 'IL =— X =
H
 6 T
T ' 3 or 2TH  ITI =  186 Solving (i) and (ii), we get TH = 372 K = 99°C
62 T =11  ^ L " = 2 T 1 W ^
=
% '
3/2 4/3 1 (9/8)
X
^ =2
=
?
...(ii)
T, =  r „ =  x 3 7 2 K = 310K = 37°C 1 6 H 6 According to first law of thermodynamics Ag = AC/ + PAF If A g is absorbed at constant volume, AF = 0
At/ A7
^ X It is clear from the figure that the ray will retrace the path when the refracted ray QR is incident normally on the polished surface AC. Thus angle of refraction r = 30°
A
for an ideal monoatomic gas AC/ _ 3 p . r _ 3 _ ~AT~2 ' v ~2 4V2 = 25 x2 Differentiating, 4 ^ 2 v ~ j =  2 x * 
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '08
( = sim'/sinr X sin/ = (xsinr sini = V 2 x s i n 3 0 ° V 2 x i = (1/V2) i = 45° Given: Separation between marks = d\ Distance between paper and observer (D) = 50 m; Aperture of eye lens (a) = 2 mm = 2 x 10 3 m and mean wavelength of light (X) = 5000 A=5000 x 1010m. The least distance between the marks to be seen separate,
rf =
"
J_ C' r" 
6+3+ 2 6C ^
11
JJ_ 6C
Charge on each of the three capacitors in series Q'6 CV
11
Also charge on capacitor C4 = 4CV 6 CV Ratio = 1 1 x 4 CV 22 wxl.5 n x 0 . 5 + 20 Solving, we get n = 10 V, /, ER,/(R]+r) V2 l2 ER2/(R2 + r) 3 "5(10 + r) 2_T0(5+7) T, = 620°C, T„ = 300°C T.+T _R,(R2+r) R2(R1 + r) n
l^xD=122x<5000y(r">x50
a 2x10
= 15.25 x 10"3 m = 1.525 cm In case of diffraction at a single slit the position of minima is given by d sin 0 = nX If 0 is small, sin0 = 0 = So the position of first minimum relative to centre will be given by d(y/D) = X, i.e., y = (D/d)X Here, D = 2 m; d = 1 x io 3 m and X = 6 x 10"7 m 7 2x6xl0~ • = 1.2 mm So y = :
1x10"
or
T—
2 or 600 = 620 + Tc :. Tc =  2 0 ° C 36. (• ) : Magnetic field at the centre of a circular arc of radius R, carries current I and making an angle 0 at the centre is given by R R = i V l 4nR „ In the given problem (j) = r . li 0 /(B/2) p07 4 nR 8R Efficiency of a transformer Output power ( P ) _VSIS VpIp Input power(P)
.•. Distance between first minima on either side of central maxima, Ay = 2y = 2.4 mm. Magnitude as well as polarities of charges at points A and C are same. Therefore forces at O, due to these charges cancel each other. Moreover, polarities of the charges at B and D are opposite; therefore force on charge kept at the centre is along the diagonal BD. Given: Electrical potential V=5x + 3y+ y/l5z Electric field E = VV where V = E= dx1 dyJ dz
where Vs = Voltage across secondary VP = Voltage across primary I P = Current flowing in the primary I s = Current flowing in the secondary 80
100'
j L j + JL^ + jik (5x + 3y + yf\5z) dx' dyJ dz =5137715^
Po 4x10
[  5 I + 3 J + V15F]
\E\ = \I (5))z2 + (  3 ) 2 + ( (3Y (—*Jl5)2 V(5 = 7 2 5 + 9 + 15 = 7 C b C2 and C 3 are in series  U 1 +  U  L C' C 2C 3C
P o = y X l 0 3 W = 3200W 3200 / =5L = = 16 A 200 Vs Also Pi = IpVp P or T L; 4 x 1 0 W = 40 A P Vp 100 V •
"
S
PHYSICS FOR YOU
MARCH '08
Self inductance =
VA = ^2 qV/m,
V
HqN2A
l
a
a = 0.96, I e = 7.2 mA =Y or I c =
aI
vB =
yjlxAqV/m
e
B
For proton, X, = For photon,
2
I c = 0.96 x 7.2 = 6.91 mA h=Ic + h h=IeI E,
c
•JlmE
= 7.2  6.91 = 0.29 mA
= — E
_L —. * xE K V2~mE he According to Bohr's second postulate Angular momentum L = 2n Angular momentum is also called a moment of momentum. For second orbit n = 2 j _ 2h_ _ h_ 2n n co = —. Further v — and r «2, r n hence co °c (1/w3). 1 1 n, "2 _ "I For shortest wavelength in Balmer series,
1240 eVnm ^nm 1240 eVnm E„ = = 0.5 eV * 2480 nm
Y=A + B = AB [Using Boolean identity A + B = A • B ] = AB
n.,
00
Modulation index = ^ = 0.5
= 2;
n2
=
W1bG
1 1 or X = R i " For shortest wavelength in Brackett series X' r =M _42
= 4 x
°°2 l=4X
GXPLORGR
4 Years (20042007) Solved Papers Available at leading bookshops throughout India.
Send D.D/M.O in favour of MTG Books. Add Rs. 35 for postage.
MAINS
iPMT
According to Moseley's law 4x> = a(Zb) Squaring both sides, u = a2(Zb)2 or = a\Zb)2
Therefore, for two different elements, the ratio of wavelength is given by K Xi =X,Zx k 4X (^l)2 = 1 1 , X2 = 4X, Z2 = ? (Z2 1)2. or ( Z 2  l) 2 = 25; (11 — l)2 Z2 = 6
^ ^ ^
15 No. of half lives =  y = 3
WtibQ MTG BOOKS
503, Taj Apt., Ring Road, Near Safdarjung Hospital New Delhi 110 029 Tel.: 26191601,26194317
Always insist on MTG Boo *>J
PHYSICS FOR YOU MARCH ' 0 8
Practice Paper for
Mains
l.(a) Finding dimensions of resistance R and inductance L, speculate what physical quantities (L/R) and (l/2)/J 2 represents? (b) If 3 + i I = \a  b\, find the angle between vectors a and b . 2.(a) When walking on ice, is it better to take short or long steps? Explain. (b) A shell of mass 0.02 kg is fired by a gun of mass 100 kg. If the muzzle speed ofthe shell is 80 m s 1 , what is the recoil speed of the gun? „ , ^ „ . , _ . . A (4 kg) lm B(2 3.(a) Four particles of masses 4 kg, —2 2 kg, 3 kg and 5 kg are fixed at the four corners A, B, C and D of a square of each side 1 m. Calculate the moment of intertia of the r>(5 kg) lm C(3 kg) system about an axis passing through the point of intersection of the diagonals and perpendicular to the plane of the square. (b) If the radius of the earth is reduced to half of its present day value without change in its mass, what will be the length of the day? 4.(a) What will be the density of lead under a pressure of 20,000 N cm 2 ? (Density of lead is 11.4 g cm"3 and the bulk modulus of lead is 0.80 x io 10 N nr 2 ) (b) Why is moisture retained longer in the soil if it is harrowed? 5.(a) A reversible engine converts one fifth of heat which it absorbs from source into work. When the temperature of the sink is reduced by 70 K, its efficiency is doubled. Calculate the temperature of the source and the sink. (b) A particle is executing simple harmonic motion. If Vi and v2 are the speeds of the particle at distances jt and x2 from the equilibrium position, show that the
64 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '
frequency of oscillations, / =
2n
V X2
2 _
X
2
\
J
6. (a) Two point charges one of +100 pC and another of 400 pC, are kept 30 cm apart. Find the points of zero potential on the line joining the two charges. (Assume the potential at infinity to be zero) (b) A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates has a capacitance of 8 pF (1 pF = 10~12 F). What will be the capacitance if the distance between the plates is reduced by half, and the space between them is filled with a substance of dielectric constant 6? 7.(a) 1 m long metallic wire is broken into two unequal parts P and Q. P part of the wire is uniformly extended into another wire R. Length of R is twice the length of P and the resistance of R is equal to that of Q. Find the ratio of the resistances of P and R and also the ratio of length of P and Q. (b) A silver and a copper voltameter are connected in series with a 12.0 volt battery of negligible internal resistance. 0.806 g of silver is deposited in half an hour in the silver voltameter. Calculate (i) magnitude of current flowing in the circuit, (ii) mass of copper deposited in the copper voltameter during the same period. (Given : ECE of silver = 1.12 x 10 8 kg C^', ECE of copper = 6.6 x 10"7 kg C"1 8.(a) A 10 ohm coil of mean area 500 cm2 and having 1000 turns is held perpendicular to a uniform field of 0.4 gauss. The coil is turned through 180° in (1/10) s. Calculate (i) the change in flux (ii) the average induced emf. (b) A capacitor of capacitance 100 pF and a coil of resistance 50 Q and inductance 0.5 H are connected in series with a 110 V, 50 Hz source. Calculate the r.m.s value of the current in the circuit.
47
9. (a) A photon and an electron both have energy of 100 eV. Which has the longer wavelength? Which has higher linear momentum? (b) The halflife of radium is 1500 years. After how many years will one gram of the pure radium reduced to one milligram? 10.(a) A transistor has a = 0.95. If the emitter current is 10 mA, what is the collector current, the base current and gain (3? (b) A glass prism of refracting angle 60° and refractive index 1.5, is completely immersed in water of refractive index 1.33. Calculate the angle of minimum deviation o f t h e prism (sin' 0.56 = 34.3°). SOLUTIONS eft l.(a) As e = L— i.e., L = \z\ dt di 't ML T [L] = so AT A _ q _j j
2P2
If we take short steps, the reaction remains close to the vertical. This helps to develop more frictional force on a slippery road and makes walking possible. This is why while walking on ice it is better to take short steps. (b) : Given : m = 0.02 kg, M = 100 kg, v = 80 m s"1 Let the recoil speed of the gun be V. Then according to the principle of conservation of momentum, we get 0 = mv + MV or 0 = 0.02 x 80 + 100 x V 0.02x80 , ms 1 =  0 . 0 1 6 m s~' 100  v e sign shows recoil speed of the gun. or V= 3.(a) Given : m, = 4 kg, m2 = 2 kg, m3 = 3 kg, m4 = 5 kg AB = BC = CD = DA = 1 m OA = OB = OC = OD = 4= m 42 Moment of inertia of the system passing through O and perpendicular to the plane of the square, 7 = 4 (OA)2 + 2 (OB)2 + 3 (OC) 2 + 5 (OD)2 = 4x — + 2x — + 3x — + 5x — = 7 k g m2 2 2 2 2 (b) : If M is the mass of earth, R its radius and to its spin angular velocity, the angular momentum of earth will be L = I a =  M R 2 ...(0 5 Now when its radius becomes half without change in its mass and w' its spin angular velocity, the new angular momentum 2 L2 = I'm' = ^M(R/2)2(D' •••(ii) As no external torque is acting, angular momentum must be conserved, i.e., Lx = L2 From (i) and (ii), we get 2 1 2 — MR2a = — x — MR2(a', i.e., co' = 4co 5 4 5 i.e., angular velocity will become 4 times of its initial value so r ]_ 1 as T oc 4 T ~ co' ~ T 24 or = 6 hour T' = == 4 4.(a) The bulk modulus of lead is given by, K • APV AV
64 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  APRIL '260
T,
i.e., so so
and
[L] = [ML2 T"2 A"2] and as V=IR i.e., R = VII "ML2 T~2" i.e., = [ML2 T 3 A"2] [R] = ATA ' L _R_ 1 • Li ML2 T~2 A  2 ML2 T"3 A"2 1 Lt'J = [T]
= [ML2 T2 A' 2 ] [A2] = [ML2 T"2]
64
Now as (L/R) has dimensions of time and so is called time constant of L  R circuit and (1/2) Li2 has dimensions of work or energy, so it represents magnetic energy stored in a coil \a + b\ = Ja2 +b2 + 2abcosQ \a  b\ = yja2 +b2 labcosQ Given \a + b\ = \ab\ or \a + b^ = \abt or a2 + b2 + 2a6cos0 = a2 +b2  labcosQ or 4aAcosO = 0 or 0 = 90° 2.(a) Ice is almost frictionless. While walking, there must be sufficient friction to prevent slipping of feet. Frictional force depends on the normal reaction which depends on the inclination of the reaction of the ground to the vertical. If we take long steps the inclination of the reaction of the ground to the vertical becomes large and hence the frictional force is less. (b)
1 Here, K = 0.80 x 10 1 0 Nm" 2 = °  8 ° *4 0 " ' N cm"2 10 AV _ AP AP = 20,000 N cm"2 1
Velocity, v = — =  a m sinco? dt or v2 = ahD2 sin2 tot = a2co2 (1  cos2 (Of)
2
or AV = — 40 0.80x10'" V 39V New volume, V = V  AV = V 40 40 Since the mass of lead will remain the same, we have Vp = Vp' New density, P =
20000xl0 4
=
 co (a x
)
— 40
Hence, v2 = co2 (a 2  x f ) and Subtracting the two, or But ••• co = —r co = 2 n /
2
v
v2 = co2 (a 2  x 2 ) ..2 \
v,  v = co2 (x2  x f )
2
2
,
\
Vp
7x11.4x40 _3 = 11.7 gem 39 V
f 2 2tif = V 2 1! or / = 2tc
.2 A
(b) When the soil is not harrowed, there are large capillaries in it. Water in the soil rise up the capillary holes to the surface from where it evaporates continuously. Thus the soil continuously loses water. When harrowed, all these capillaries are destroyed, and so capillary suction stops altogether. Thus, water is retained longer in the soil. 5.(a) According to the question,
6. (a) : As shown in figure, let the two charges be placed 30 cm (or 0.30 m) apart at points A and B. Let C be the point of zero potential on the line AB. B i $ 400 iC +100 nC
K r 
Potential at C due to two charges will be, 1 1 100x10 400x10" 47te„ _ 1 r2 . 4tce0 r 0.30Since potential at C is zero, hence V = 0 Vor 1 47te„ 100x10 400x10" 0.30= 0
0.30 
r •
Hence, Q2 = £>i
•
Tt T 4 1 Efficiency, r = 1 =1 = 
a 5
a
=
i
a
...(i)
= 0 or 4r= 0.30 — r or 0.30r 0.30 = 0.06 m = 6 cm
5r=0.30
On reducing the temperature of the sink by 70 K, Efficiency = 2rj = 1 — ——— 2 x 1 = 1 Ii T 5 2_1_ 70 or 5 ~ 5 T. Solving, 7, = 350 K 4 4 From equation (i), T2 T. = —x350 = 280K 5 5 (b) The displacement of a particle executing simple harmonic motion is given by, x = acoscor
20 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
Hence the point of zero potential lies at a distance of 6 cm from the charge of+100 iC on the line joining the two charges. (b) : The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor is given by, T" (1) Now, the distance between the plates (d) is reduced by half 'fiT and the space between them is filled with
Z£
T

1


5 7; [using equation (i)]
+
+
—
a substance of dielectric constant (AT), new capacitance is given by, 2 KEnA c = KE0A = 2 KC d! 2 [Using equation (i)] 49
Mrs. K = 6 C = 8 pF = 8 x 10"12 F —ce " i C = 2 x 6 x 8 x 10~12 F = 96 x 10' 1 2 F = 9 6 p F Let the length of piece P be L then of Q will
A0 = 0 2  0, = NSB  NSB = 2NSB i.e., A01 = 2 x 103 x (500 x 10"4) x (0.4 x 10') = 4mWb (ii) As in turning through 180°, i.e., in change of flux A0, the coil takes (1/10)s, ,  _ A0 _ 2NSB _ 4 x 1Q"3 _ • = 40 mV
So that, RP = p— and RQ = p^—^— S S Now when part P is extended into another wire R of iength twice of P, i.e., 2L its resistance will be (2L) „ L * =P(572) = 5 [ a s S L = 2 L * V] According to given problem
R r = RQ
to
to
10"
(b) Given : C = 100 ^iF = 100 x 10"6 F R = 50 £2, L = 0.5 H, Vmx = 1 1 0 V , / = 50 Hz The impedance of LCR circuit is given by z = JR.2+(xL  xc)2 = JR2 + ( 2 * f i  JLj
ie
=
So,
R. ^ P ( U S I RR 4p (L/S)
„ L (1 L) . , „„ 4p_ = pi i.e., L = 0.2 m S S 0.2 1 I a n d 4 = . 4 LQ ( 1  L ) (10.2) 4
= 4 (50)' + 2 x 3 . 1 4 x 5 0 x 0 . 5 
2 x 3 . 1 4 x 5 0 xlO" 4
= V(50) 2 + (15731.85) 2 = ^2500 +15662.5 = 134.77 £2 .". r.m.s value of the current in the circuit is given by
(b) Given : w, = 0.806 g = 0.806 x 10' 3 kg
t = 30 min = 30 x 60 s Z, = 1.12 x io 8 kg C', Z2 = 6.6 x 10"7 kg C"1 According to Faraday's first law of electrolysis, m, = Z,7/ or
1 = 3 
(i)
9. ,
Z,t
(ii) A c c o r d i n g electrolysis, m. Z,
= 40 A 1.12 x 10"8 x 3 0 x 6 0 to F a r a d a y ' s second law
0.806x10"
hc (a) : For photon E = hv = — A.
x=/E=12400(eV.A)=i2400_
of
E
£(eV)
100 eV (v E = p2/2m)
m,
For electron p = h/X => 0.806 xl0" 3 x 6.6x10" kg j2mE = h/X .•• x = h/^bUE
or
1.12x10" = 47.5 x 10"3 kg = 47.5 g
w2=m,x^ =
= 6.6 x 10" 3 4 /V2x9x 10"31 xlOOx 1.6x 10"la = 1.23 A So the photon has a longer wavelength. Momentum of photon = hv/c = h/X = 6.6 x 10 _34 /124 x IO"10 = 0.053 x 1024 k g m s  ' Momentum of electron h 6.6 xlO"34 = —= rr = 5.4 xlO kg m s X 1.23x10'° So the electron has greater momentum. (b) or N = N 0 e' J log, — = Xt N
N
8.(a) (i) When the plane of a coil is perpendicular to the field as shown in figure (I) the angle between area S and field B is 0°. So the flux linked with the coil, (j), = NBScosQ = NSB cosO = NSB [as 6 = 0] When the coil is turned through 180° as shown in figure, (II) the flux linked with the coil will be 0 2 = MSficosl80 = NSB (as 6 = 180°)
or or
N
N„
_ „
2.303 logl0 — = Xt Nn
64 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  APRIL '262
N
So change in flux, 50
2.303log,, or t=A 0.693
N_ Nn 2.303 r i / 2 l o g 1 0 ^ t=0.693
N0W
133 Refractive index is given by,
But
X
Given : JV0 = 1 g N = 1 g  10~3 g = (1  10"3)g = 0.999 g 1 2.303xl500xlog 0.999 year t=0.693 2.303x1500x 0.0004 0.693 = 1.99 year
sin or 1.13 =
A + 8„
10. (a): Given : a = 0.95, l E = 10 mA Now, a = —
IE
or or
1 , ,„ . (A + S„ —xl.l3 = sm a 2 { 2 sin A + 8. 1x1.13 = 0.56 = sin 34.3° 2 A + 8„, = 68.6°
or Ic = aIE = 0.95 x 10 = 9.5 mA •• h = h ~h = 1° ~ 9.5 = 0.5 mA 0.95 = 19 10.95
Since, IE = lB + lc
And P =
a 1a
or or
A + 8„
= 34.3° or
( b ) : Given : A = 60°, % = 1.5, a \i„= 1.33
8m = 68.6°  A = 68.6°  60° = 8.6°
Reaction Mechanisms in ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
WjbG
BOOK Y O U R C O P Y T O D A Y !
wite
Reaction IVlechanisms in
Organic Chemistry covers major portion of a Chemistry Paper of any competitive exam be it medical or engineering. Organic Chemistry is based on different reactions. In order to solve the problems of Organic Chemistry one should have good command on the concepts, reactions and their mechanisms. MTG is releasing this book to empower students with each and every skill required to solve problems in Organic Chemistry.
The book starts with basic knowledge of various types of reactions : electrophilic and nucieophilic substitutions, Dt. Rlukul C Ray eliminations etc. The book deals with important named reactions, rearrangement and their mechanisms. M T G BOOKS <• This book would be useful and effective in helping the students § * » • • 503, Taj Apts., Ring Road New De,hi" ?9 Tel: of chemistry to develop an insight into the mechanistic aspects ' 26191599 of Organic Chemistry as a whole. tS8&
64 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL ' 51
SOLVED PAPER
CBSEPMT (Prelims)  2007
1. The primary and secondary coils of a transformer have 50 and 1500 turns respectively. If the magnetic flux 0 linked with the primary coil is given by (> = <> + 41, where < is in webers, t is time in seconds ] (0 >  and ()o is a constant, the output voltage across the secondary coil is (a) 120 volts (b) 220 volts (c) 30 volts (d) 90 volts. 2. A beam of electron passes undeflected through mutually perpendicular electric and magnetic fields. If the electric field is switched off, and the same magnetic field is maintained, the electrons move (a) in a circular orbit (b) along a parabolic path (c) along a straight line (d) in an elliptical orbit. 3. The position x of a particle with respect to time t along jcaxis is given by x = 9t2  t3 where x is in metres and t in second. What will be the position of this particle when it achieves maximum speed along the +x direction? (a) 54 m (b) 8 1 m (c) 24 m (d) 32 m. 4. A particle starting from the origin (0, 0) moves in a straight line in the (x, y) plane. Its coordinates at a later time are ( ^ 3 , 3 ) . The path of the particle makes with the xaxis an angle of (a) 45° (b) 60° (c) 0° (d) 30°. 5. A car moves from A'to Y with a uniform speed v„ and returns to Y with a uniform speed v,,. The average speed for this round trip is iWd d + vu 2 v v du (d) Vj + Vu ' (b)
v
inputs A and B is expressed by the truth table.
A
B +
(a) A B 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 (c) A B 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
Y 1 1 1 0 Y 0 1 1 1
(b) A B Y 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 (d) A B Y 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
8. In a radioactive decay process, the negatively charged emitted Pparticles are (a) the electrons produced as a result of the decay of neutrons inside the nucleus (b) the electrons produced as a result of collisions between atoms (c) the electrons orbiting around the nucleus (d) the electrons present inside the nucleus. 9. The phase difference between the instantaneous velocity and acceleration of a particle executing simple harmonic motion is (a) 71 (b) 0.707TX (c) zero (d) 0.571. 10. In a mass spectrometer used for measuring the masses of ions, the ions are initially accelerated by an electric potential V and then made to describe semicircular paths of radius R using a magnetic field B. If V and B are kept constant, the ratio ( charge on the ion ^ ion' V mass of the ion J (a) MR? (b) R2 will be proportional to (c) R (d) MR.
6. Two radioactive substances A and B have decay constants 5 A. and X respectively. Ait = 0 they have the same number of nuclei. The ratio of number of nuclei of A to those of B will be (Me)2 after a time interval (a) AX (b) 2X (c) \/2X (d) MX. 7. In the following circuit, the output Kfor all possible
11. A wheel has angular acceleration of 3.0 rad/sec 2 and an initial angular speed of 2.00 rad/sec. In a time of 2 sec it has rotated through an angle (in radian) of (a) 10 (b) 12 (c) 4 (d) 6. 12. A hollow cylinder has a charge q coulomb within
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U MARCH'08
it. If (J) is the electric flux in units of voltmeter associated with the curved surface B, the flux linked with the plane surface A in units of voltmeter will be (a) (c)
e
(a)  F0T
(b) F0P
(c)  f j
(d) f0T.
19. A common emitter amplifier has a voltage gain of 50, an input impedance of 100 Q and an output impedence of 200 Q. The power gain of the amplifier is (a) 1000 (b) 1250 (c) 100 (d) 500. 20. Three resistances P. Q, R each of 2 £2 and an unknown resistances S form the four arms of a Wheatstone bridge circuit. When a resistant of 6 £2 is connected in parallel to .S'the bridge gets balanced. What is the value of S? (a) 3 Q (b) 6 Q (c) 1 Q (d) 2 Q. 21. A steady current of 1.5 amp flows through a copper voltameter for 10 minutes. If the electrochemical equivalent of copper is 30 x 10"^ g coulomb 1 , the mass of copper deposited or the electrode will be (a) 0.50 g (b) 0.67 g (c) 0.27 g (d) 0.40 g. 22. A small coin is resting on the bottom of a beaker filled 4 cm with liquid. A ray of light from the coin travels upto coin the surface of the liquid and moves along its surface. How fast is the light travelling in the liquid? (a) 2.4 x 10s m/s (b) 3.0 x 10s m/s s (c) 1.2 x 10 m/s (d) 1.8 x io 8 m/s. 23. A transformer is used to light a 100 W and 110 V lamp from a 220 V mains. If the main current is 0.5 amp, the efficiency of the transformer is approximately (a) 50% (b) 90% (c) 10% (d) 30%. 24. Dimensions of resistance in an electrical circuit, in terms of dimension of mass M, of length L, of time T and of current 1, would be (a) ML 2 T (b) ML 2 T 1 I 1 2 3 2 (c) ML T I~ (d) ML 2 T 3 I'. 25. A uniform rod AB of / length / and mass m is free to rotate about point A. B The rod is released from rest in the horizontal position. Given that the moment of inertia of the rod about A is mflh, the initial angular acceleration of the rod will be
q 2£O
(b) < p
(d)
e
q_ o
0 13. The frequency of a light wave in a material is 2 x 1014 Hz and wavelength is 5000 A. The refractive index of material will be (a) 1.50 (b) 3.00 (c) 1.33 (d) 1.40 14. A nucleus y X has mass represented by M(A, Z). If Mp and A/„ denote the mass of proton and neutron respectively and 8.E. the binding energy in MeV, then (a) (b) (c) (d) B.E. B.E. B.E. B.E. = = = = [ZM„ r (A  Z)M„  M(A, Z)]C2 [ZMp + AM,,  M(A, Z)]c2 M(A, Z)  ZMp  (A  Z)M„ [M(A, Z)  ZM,,  (A  Z)M„]c2.  m 6 ii Wr3Q —VvW4 £2
15. The total power dissipated in watts in the circuit shown here is (a) 40 (b) 54 (c) 4 (d) 16.
18 V 16. If the nucleus f j Al has a nuclear radius of about
HUM
3.6 fm, then ' ^ T e would have its radius approximately as (a) 9.6 fm (b) 12.0 fm (c) 4.8 fm (d) 6.0 fm.
17. A block B is pushed \ \ \ \ v NB \ momentarily along a horizontal \ 7 TTTtTTTTTTT)7 7 7 7 V surface with an initial velocity V. If n is the coefficient of sliding friction between B and the surface, block B will come to rest after a time (a) g\i!V (b) g/V (c) Vlg (d) K/(gfi). 18. A particle moving along jraxis has acceleration/, T constants. The particle at t = 0 has zero velocity. In the time interval between / = 0 and the instant when / = 0, the particle's velocity (v r ) is at time t, given by / = /o 1 t w h e r e / and T are
c
38
PHYSICS FOR YOli
MAY 07
(a)
mgl 2
(b)
26. A particle of mass m moves in the AT plane with a velocity v along the straight line AB. If the angular momentum of the particle with respect to origin O is LA when it is at A and L„ when it is at B, then (a) LA = LH (b) the relationship between LA and LH depends upon the slope of the line AB (c) LA < LB (d) LA > L„. 27. The particle executing simple harmonic motion has a kinetic energy K0cos2(tit. The maximum values of the potential energy and the total energy are respectively (a) K0/2 and K0 (b) K0 and 2K 0 (c) K0 and K0 (d) 0 and 2 K 0 . 28. Charges +q and q are placed at points A and B respectively which are a distance 2L apart, C. is the midpoint between A and B. The work done in moving a charge +0 along the semicircle CRD is (a) (c) qQ 2 ne0L qQ 6ne0L qQ (b) 6K E L q qQ (d) AkzqL
I"
(c)
21
(d)
31
(b) qa along the line joining points (x = 0,y = 0, z = 0) and (x = a, y = a, z = 0) (c) \[2qa along +x direction (d) J2qa along +y direction. 31. Two satellites of earth, S, and S2 are moving in the same orbit. The mass of 5, is four times the mass of S2. Which one of the following statements is true? (a) The potential energies of earth and satellite in the two cases are equal. (b) and S2 are moving with the same speed. (c) The kinetic energies of the two satellites are equal. (d) The time period of S is four times that of S2. 32. A and B are two vectors and 0 is the angle between them, if \ A x B \ = S ( A B ) , the value of 0 is (a) 45° (b) 30° (c) 90° (d) 60° 33. A mass of 2.0 kg is put on a flat pan attached to a vertical spring fixed on the ground as shown in the figure. The mass of the spring and the pan is negligible. When pressed slightly and released the mass executes a simple harmonic motion. The spring constant 7777777777 is 200 N/m. What should be the minimum amplitude of the motion so that the mass gets detached from the pan (take g = 10 m/s 2 ). (a) 10.0 cm (b) any value less than 12.0 cm (c) 4.0 cm (d) 8.0 cm. 34. A charged particle (charge q) is moving in a circle of radius R with uniform speed v. The associated magnetic moment p is given by (a) qvR2 (b) qvR2/2 (c) qvR (d) qvR/2. 35. The total energy of electron in the ground state of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV. The kinetic energy of an electron in the first excited state is (a) 6.8 eV (b) 13.6 eV (c) 1.7 eV (d) 3.4 eV. 36. A 5 watt source emits monochromatic light of wavelength 5000 A. When placed 0.5 m away, it liberates photoelectrons from a photosensitive metallic surface. When the source is moved to a distance of 1.0 m, the number of photoelectrons liberated will be reduced by a factor of (a) 8 (b) 16 (c) 2 (d) 4.
29. Monochromatic light of frequency 6.0 x 1014 Hz is produced by a laser. The power emitted is 2 x 10~3 W. The number of photons emitted, on the average, by the source per second is (a) 5 x IO16 (b) 5 x 1017 14 (c) 5 x io (d) 5 x io 15 . 30. Three point charges +q, 2q and +q are placed at points (x = 0, y = a, z = 0), (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) and (x = a, y = 0, z = 0) respectively. The magnitude and direction of the electric dipole moment vector of this charge assembly are (a) 42qa along the line joining points (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) and (x = a, y = a, z = 0)
60
20 PHYSICS FOR YOU APRIL'0
37. A particle executes simple harmonic oscillation with an amplitude a. The period ofoscillation is T. The minimum time taken by the particle to travel half of the amplitude from the equilibrium position is (a) 778 (b) 7712 (c) 7/2 (d) 774. 38. For a cubic crystal structure which one of the following relationsindicating the cell characteristics is correct? (a) a * b * c and a = (3 = y = 90° (b) a = b = c and a * 0 * y = 90° (c) a = b = c and a = 0 = y = 90° (d) a * b * c and a * 0 and y * 90°. 39. Two condensers, one of capacity C and zrc/2 other other of capacity C/2 are connected to a Kvolt battery, as shown. The work done in charging fully both the condensers is (a) \CV2.. (b) jCF2 ( C ) ^CV2 (d) 2CV2.
45. Nickel shows ferromagnetic property at room temperature. If the temperature is increased beyond Curie temperature, then it will show (a) anti ferromagnetism (b) no magnetic property (c) diamagnetism (d) paramagnetism. 46. A vertical spring with force constant k is fixed on a table. A ball of mass m at a height h above the free ,upper end of the spring falls vertically on the spring so that the spring is compressed by a distance d. The net work done in the process is 1 9 1 , (a) mg(h + d)—kd~ (b) mg(hd)kdz (c)• mg(hd) 1 ? + kd(d) mg(h+d) 1 ? + kd .
40. A black body is at 727°C. It emits energy at a rate which is proportional to (a) (1000) 4 (b) (1000) 2 (c) (727) 4 .(d) (727) 2 . 41. The resistance of an ammeter is 13 Q and its scale is graduated for a current upto 100 amps. After an additional shunt has been connected to this ammeter it becomes possible to measure currents upto 750 amperes by this meter. The value of shuntresistance is (a) 2 £2 (b) 0.2 Q (<?) 2 kQ (d) 20 Q. 42. An engine has an efficiency of 1/6. When the temperature of sink is reduced by 62°C, its efficiency is doubled: Temperatures of the source is (a) 37°C (b) 62°C (c) 99°C (d) 124°C. 43. The electric and magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave are (a) in opposite phase and perpendicular to each other (b) in opposite phase and parallel to each other (c) in phase and perpendicular to each other (d) in phase and parallel to each other. 44. What is the value of inductance L for \yhic(i the current is maximum in a series LCR circuit with C = 10 pF and co = 1000 s' 1 ? (a) 1 mH (b) cannot be calculated unless R is known (c) 10 mH (d) 100 mH.
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O UIDECEMBER'07
47. Under the influence of a uniform magnetic field a charged particle is moving in a circle of radius R with constant speed v. The time period of the motion (a) depends on both R and v (b) is independent of both R and v (c) depends on R and not on v (d) depends on v and not on R. 48. If the cold junction of a thermocouple is kept at 0°C and the hot junction is kept at T° C, then the relation between neutral temperature (T„) and temperature of inversion (7)) is (a) Tn = 27) (b) T„ = T,  T (c) Tn = 7 + 7' (d) T„ = 7 ^ / 2 . 49. Assuming the sun to have a spherical outer surface of radius r, radiating like a black body at temperature t°C, the power received by a unit surface, (normal to the incident rays) at a distance R from the centre of the sun is (a) (c) r a(t + 273) 4%R2 r a(t + 273)4
2
(b)
\6n2r2Gt4
«t) R2 where cj is the Stefan's constant. 50. In the energy band , diagram of a material shown below, the open circles and filled circles denote holes and electrons respectively. The material is (a) an insulator (b) a metal
47ir 2 at 4
.U.M.U.AjLJ./.U.iJ.
s ~
41
(c) an «type semiconductor (d) a ptype semiconductor. SOLUTIONS 1. (a) : Given : No. of turns across primary N„ = 50 Number of turns across secondary NS = 1500 Magnetic flux linked with primary, ( = 0O + At >  :. Voltage across the primary, V = — = —(<j>0 + At) dt dt = A volt. VS NS
N—— ("oh
=
... ( i i )
Divide (i) by (ii), we get L NAi = e &AlB)' or,
NL
A = g(SXX)/ B 4ll
or,
f i T  . t=
or, AX~ 2X'
or, AXt = 2 7. (c):
Also
' TP=TP
2. (a) : Electron travelling in a magnetic field perpendicular to its velocity  circular path. (a) : Given : x = 9t2  t3  0) dx d o i t Speed v = — = —(9t —t ) = \ 8t — 3t . dt dt dv •0 For maximum speed, 18  6/ = 0 dt t = 3 s. * max = 81 m  27 m = 54 m. (From x = 9t2  t3). 3. 4. (b) : Let 0 be the angle which the particle makes with an xaxis. From figure, tanG: 73
y
Y' = A + B• Y=A + B = A + B. Truth table of the given circuit is given by A B Y' Y 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 I 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 8. (a) : In beta minus decay ((3 ), a neutron is transformed into a proton and an electron is emitted with the nucleus along with an antineutrino. n p + e~ + v where v is the antineutrino. 9. (d) : Let y = ^sino)/
(0,0)
or, 0 = tan~'(\/3) = 60°. 5. (d) : Average speed = total distance travelled total time taken i + i1 _ 2s _ 2vuvd u +u JL + JL v;/+V„
V
— = Aacosat = Aosinfatf + — dt V 2 Acceleration = ^w 2 sino)r The phase difference between acceleration and velocity is 7i/2. 10. (a): In mass spectrometer when ions are accelerated 1 2 through potential V,  m v qV ... (i)
U
V
cl
where m is the mass of ion, q is the charge of the ion. As the magnetic field curves the path of the ions in a semicircular orbit mv" BqR v= R m Substituting (ii) in (i), we get Bqv = 1 BqR
2
6. (c) : Given : XA = 5X, XB = X AT 1=0, (N0)A = (N0)H NA N According to radioactive decay, — = e No Na  0)
Wo) A 42
.2
(ii)
Nb V
= qV
Since V, B are constants, charge on the ion or, m Rz mass of the ion
q _ 2V or, —  2 2 m BR
R
PHYSICS FOR YOU  MAY 07
11. (a) : Given: Angular acceleration, a = 3 rad/sec 2 Initial angular velocity co, = 2 rad/sec Time t = 2 sec Using, 9 = co,/ +  a r 2
1 9
t t /= = \img (f is the force of friction) .'. Retardation, a = \ig
. LJL ' a ng' 18. (c) : Given : At time t = 0, velocity, v = 0. t' Acceleration / = / o [ ' j
0 = V  at
or,
0—V
V
9 = 2 x 2 + 1 x 3 x 4 = 4 + 6 = 10 radian. 2 12. (d) : Let (j)^, and <j>( are the electric flux linked with A, B and C. According to Gauss theorem, Since (J)^ = <t»e.» •"• <\>A + <(>fl= — e o or, 2§ a = 2 + +
<t)c ~ e ~ o
A t / = 0,
0 = /0 1 — 1 =0 or t = T.
Since f0 is a constant, or 2§A =   < ( > £ £0 (Given = 0). dv Also, acceleration / = — dt
v
T
:.
* \dv=
n
1=1
T ( t \ J fdt = J / o 1   dt
n 0 V
1
i~n 1=0
J
velocity of light in medium (v) v = vX = 2 x 1014 x 5000 x IO' 10 In the medium, v = 10 s m/s v vac 3 xlO 8 „ 1'med 14. (a) 15. ( b ) : In the given circuit 6 £2 and 3 are in parallel, and hence its equivalent resistance is given by — =1 +1 Rn 6 3 or R = 2 Q .
p
13. (b) : [i =
velocity of light in vacuum (c)
fo 19. Option not provided. Given : Voltage gain P = 50 Output resistance R„  200 £2 Input resistance Rt = 100 £2 Power gain = P 2 x  f  = (50) 2 x — = 5000. 100 R,
R
108
200
The equivalent circuit diagram is given in figure. Total current in the circuit,
Wr
4 £2
18 / =:3 A. 18 V 2+ 4 Power in the circuit = VI = 1 8 x 3 = 54 watt. 16. (d) : Nuclear radii R = (R0)A'n where A is the mass number. (ATE ^Al or, RTt = I 4M
3
J/3 /
—VAV
Let .Ybe the equivalent resistance between S and 6 £2. 1 1 1 ••• r  r 6 Therefore, the equivalent circuit diagram drawn below.
125 27
n.1/3
xR,
17. (d) : Given u = V, final velocity = 0. Using v = u + at
PHYSICS FOR Y O U
MAY 07
43
For a balanced Wheatstone bridge, we get P R —=—
Q X
or
2 2  =—
2 X
=> =
v X = 2
„ _ Q. _
From eqn. (i), we get 1 1 1 1 2 „ „ ^  = —+or,  = or, S = 3 Q . 2 S 6 S 6 21. (c) : Given : I = 1.5 A, t = 10 min = 600 sec Z = 30 x 10~5 g coulomb 1 . According to Faraday, first law of electrolysis m = ZIt = 30 x io 5 x 1.5 x 600 = 0.27 g. K
3cm
[ML2T 2 / I T ] w , 2^3,2  = ML T I . I 25. (c) : Torque about A,
.. R =
„
1 mgl T = mg x — = —— 2 2 Also x = 7a x mgl/2 3? Angular acceleration, a = — = — = — = . 2 7 ml /3 21
>1
26.
(a) :
22. (d) :
4 cm
Moment of momentum is angular momentum, OP is the same whether the mass is at A or B.
coin
From figure, sinC =
V(4) +(3) where C is the critical angle. Also, sinC  ' Va 1 sinC = — Also
2
:2
3 5
>/ L
t since H a =
V/
1 —
•'• La = LB. 27. (c) : Kinetic energy + potential energy = total energy When kinetic energy is maximum, potential energy is zero and vice versa. Maximum potential energy = total energy. 0 + K0 =K0 (K.E. + P.E. = total energy).
R
velocity of light in air (c) Mv: velocity of light in liquid (v)
+9 28. ( c ) : «
D
v v sinC = —= c 3x10° •J or, v = 3 x l 0 8 x — = 1.8x10 8 ms  1 . 5 23. (b) : Given : Output power P = 100 W Voltage across primary VP = 220 V Current in the primary l p  0.5 A output power „„ Efficiency of a transformer t\ = — — xlOO input power 100 X100: X100 = 90%. V l 220x0.5 nr 24. (c) : According to Ohm's law, F V = RI or R1 Dimensions of V = W '1 ML 2 T" 2 IT
21
L, AD = AB + BD = 2L + L = BD = BC =
3L 1 q 47te0 L 1 q L_
Potential at C is given by
= 0
JL_i 4 t c 0 .3 L L 67l£0 Work done in moving charge +Q along the semicircle CRD is given by q 0 ~q Q (Q) = 6rcen 6MNL Comments : Potential at C is zero because the charges are equal and opposite and the distances are the same.
W = [VDVC](+Q) = PHYSICS FOR YOUMARCH'08
44
Potential at D due to q is greater than that at A (+q), because D is closer to B. Therefore it is negative. 29. (d) : Power of monochromatic light beam is P = Nhv where N is the number of photons emitted per second. Power P = 2 x 10~3 W Energy of one photon E = hv = 6.63 x 10"34 x 6 x i o ' 4 J Number of photons emitted per second, N = PIE 2 x 1 0 3 = 0.05xl0 1 7 = 5 x l 0 1 5 . 6.63 xlO  3 4 x 6 x l 0 1 4 30. (a) : This consists of two dipoles, q and +q with dipole moment along with the +ydirection and q and +q along the xdirection. The resultant
—= 4 or, Ks = 4KS. .S'2 m«2 '"S Hence option (c) is correct. From (iv), since T is independent on the mass of a satellite, time period is same for both the satellites 5, and S2. Hence option (d) is wrong. 32. (d) : \AxB\ :. ^BsinO = = S(A ^ABcosQ O e o B)
or, tan0 = VI or, 0 = tan" 1 V3 =60°. O
(b) (c)
33. (a) : / q*a
s
(a)
q x a
+q
moment = Jq2a2 + q2a2 = 4lqa. Along the direction 45° that is along OP where P is (+a, +a, 0). 31. (b): The satellite of mass m is moving in a circular orbit of radius r. GMm ... (i) :. Kinetic energy of a satellite, K 2r GMm Potential energy of a satellite, U = ... (ii) GM Orbital speed of satellite, v  \ j ~ y ~ Timeperiod of satellite, T = ( a jc 2 ^ 4 GM
1/2
...(iii)
The spring has a length /. Whem m is placed over it, the equilibrium position becomes O'. If it is pressed from O' (the equilibrium position) to O", O'O" is the amplitude. o o , = ^ L = 2 x l 0 = ( ) 1 0 m k 200 mg = kx0. If the restoring force mAa>2 > mg, then the mass will move up with acceleration, detached from the pan. g 20 A>A > > 0.10 m. k/m 200 The amplitude > 10 cm. i.e. the minimum is just greater than 10 cm. (The actual compression will include jc0 also. But when talking of amplitude, it is always from the equilibrium position with respect to which the mass is oscillating. 34. (d) : Magnetic moment p = IA «• Since r = / Also, / :
2KR
... (iv)
_qv_ T 27iR
2
Given wV = 4ws7 Since M, r is same for both the satellites Sx and S2 :. From equation (ii), we get U m or, Us =4Us. I Us, ,2 2 Option (a) is wrong. From (iii), since v is independent of the mass of a satellite, the orbital speed is same for both satellites and S2. Hence option (b) is correct. From (i), we get K «= m
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U MARCH'08
J J S L )( n R U nR)
) ^ .
s =4 mK »s
m
35. (d): Energy of «th orbit of hydrogen atom is given by 13.6 eV E = —t— n2 For ground state, n = 1 13.6 = 13.6 eV l2 For first excited state, n = 2
13.6
22 Kinetic energy of an electron in the first excited state is K = E2 = 3.4 eV. 36. (d): For a light source of power P watt, the intensity at a distance d is given by And1 where we assume light to spread out uniformly in all directions i.e. it is a spherical source. 4 h = — or, — = 4 or, / , =/ 2 10.5 J I2 A In a photoelectric emission, the number of photoelectrons liberated per second from a photosensitive metallic surface is proportional to the intensity of the light. When a intensity of source is reduced by a factor of four, the number of photoelectrons is also reduced by a factor of 4. or, 37. ( b ) : x(t) = (7sinti)/ (from the equilibrium! position) At x(t) = a/2 a  = asin(atf) sinf  = sin(co/) K _ 2nt or, — = 6 2k oo = I
P
=  3 . 4 eV
40. (a) : According to Stefan's law, rate of energy radiated E T4 where T is the absolute temperature of a black body.
E OC (727 + 273) 4 or E « [1000]4.
41. (a) : Let the shunt
resistance be S.
,
•—>—
/
S
R„
13 Q.
G i v e n : / = 750 A, / „ = 100 A, /? ( ; = 13 Q From the figure, or 100 x 13 = [750  100]S 5 = 1300/650 = 2 Q.
/ /,.
VA\— or 1300 = 650 5
7, 42. (c) : Efficiency of an engine, T = I ——where T} is the temperature of the source and T2 is the temperature of the sink.
T;
or,
Zk
(i)
When the temperature of the sink is decreased by 62°C (or 62 K), efficiency becomes double. Since, the temperature of the source remain unchanged ^ 1 , (7;62) , 2 x —= 1  or, 1 = 1 (7262) '1 T 2  62 or, 271 : 3 r 2  1 8 6 or,
or, 2T,=3
71—186 71 = 186 or,
T,
[using (i)] —=186
or, l = 7712. 38 (c) : In a cubic crystal structure a = b ^ c, a = § = y = 90°. 39. (b) : As the capacitors are connected in parallel, therefore potential d i f f e r e n c e across both the condensors remains the same. Q\=CV\ Q:
=
5
or, 7, = 372 K = 99°C. 43. (c): In electromagnetic wave, electric and magnetic field are in phase and perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular to the direction of the propagation of the wave. 44. (d): In series LCR, current is maximum at resonance. 1 .'. Resonant frequency co
JLC
2
—V
co = —
+—VCV. 2 2
Also, Q = Q, + Q, = CV ^
Given co = 1000 s 1 and C = 10 (xF  = 0.1 H = 100 mH. 1000x1000x10x10" 45. (d) : Above Curie temperature, ferromagnetic material become paramagnetic.
L =
LC
or, L =
c 2C o
Work done in charging fully both the condensors is given by w = Qy
2
= x\cv]v 2 V2
J
=
4
cv2.
46. When a mass falls on a spring from a height h the
66
20 PHYSICS FOR YOUAPRIL'07
work done by the loss of potential energy of the mass is stored as the potential energy of the spring. 1 2 One can write mg(h + d) = —kd
Analysis of CBSEPMT (Prelims) 2 0 0 7
Topics 1. 2. 3. 4. Units and Dimensions Motion in One Dimension Motion in Two Dimensions Laws of Motion & Friction Work, Power and Energy CM & Rotational Motion Gravitation Oscillation Waves Ques. Asked 1 3 2 1 1 3 1 4 0 3 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 2 9 4
o of o mg(h + d) = ^kx2
lllg/k
(x„ + x') = x = d
5. 6. 7.
=^kd2
8. 9.
Thetwo energies are equal. If work done is initial P.E.  final P.E., it is zero. Work done is totally converted (assuming there is no loss). The work done in compression or expansion is always positive as it is x2. The answer expected is 1 kd~  mg(h + d) mg(h + d)^kd2 or, as seen from options, but it is not justified. Question could have been more specific like work done by oscillation. 47. (b): In a uniform magnetic field, a charged particle is moving in a circle of radius R with constant speed v. ... 0) ~Bq 27zR 2nmv 2K M ... (i>) Time period, T = v Bqv Bq Time period 7'does not depend on both R and v because when v is changed, R is also changed proportionately and for period, it is R/v that is taken. or, R= 48. (d) : T,  T„ = T„  Tc 7* = 2T„  Tc or, T, = 2T„  0°C or Tn = Tj!2. 49. (c) : Power P radiated by the sun with its surface temperature (t + 273) is given by Stefan's Boltzmann law. P = <5e 4jir\t. + 273 )4 where r is the radius of the sun and the sun is treated as a black body where e = 1. The radiant power per unit area received by the surface at a distance R from the centre of the sun is given by P __ o47tr2(? + 273)4 r2a(t + 273) 4 5 = 4KR2 4KR2 R1 50. (d) : ptype semiconductor. mv  = Bqv ~R~ mv
10. Heat and Thermodynamics 11. Electrostatics 12. Current Electricity 13. Thermal & Chemical Effect of Current 14. Magnetic Effect of Current 15. Magnetism 16. Electromagnetic Induction & Alternating Current 17. Electromagnetic Waves 18. Optics 19. Modern Physics 20. Solids & Semiconductor Devices
„• !

i
Must for PMT Aspirants
m 10 Model Test Papers & 10 Practice Papers with expert's detail answers a Tips on H W to attempt SUBJECTIVE questions D o Success tips from exam toppers Important information and FAQ's on CBSEPMT Mains a 3 Previous Years Solved Papers
PHYSICS FOR YOU
MAY 07
47
Thought Provoking Problems
in S.H.M . & WAVE MOTIOII
By: Prof. R.S. Randhawa 1. Two waves of equal amplitude, both travelling along the +ve x direction and wavelengths A, = X, X2  X + AX superpose on a string. Discuss the shape of the combination at / = 0, compare it with the beats phenomena. Determine the distance from peak to peak of the amplitude modulating factor and number of wavelengths contained between successive zeros of the modulating envelope. 2. If /, is the length of an imperfectly adjusted pendulum which gains n seconds in one hour at the same place, find the length of the second pendulum. 3. Find the natural frequency of the semicircular shell of mass m and radius r which rolls without slipping. 4. The speaker of public address system emits 20 W power. Considering it a point source (a) What is the sound intensity level at a point 4 m away? (b) At what distance from the speaker does the sound intensity level drop to half the level that it has at 4 m? 5. Suppose the sound intensity level in Chandigarh has been increasing by about l d B annually. What percentage increase in intensity does this correspond to? In about how many years would the intensity of sound double if it increased at ldB annually? SOLUTION 1. The two superposing waves are
r 2tt
2ti
If t = 0, then y = A [sin2nA:]x + sm2iik2x\
= 2A cos [ji {k\  k^x] sin [7t (kx + £2)jc]
The amplitude modulating factor is AM= 2/lcos [n (kf  k^pc\. The distance between points where a m p l i t u d e modulating factor becomes zero is defined by the change of x corresponding to an increase of n in the quantity 7 i  k2)x. Let us denote this distance by D, we have 7t(A,  k2)D = 7i or D = v2
A., X2
or D t
X2 AX
Number of wavelengths contained in this distance is A X ~ AX' T For second pendulum, l = 7i — \S For the pendulum that gains n second, 2, 3600 3600 + n~ [7[ ]jg •••(ii) ...(i)
For the pendulum that looses n sec; 3600 3600  n f£ ]jg ...(iii)
Dividing equation (i) by (ii), we get 3600 + n _ 17 3600 Dividing (i) by equation (iii), we get 3600n _ 3600 IT (v) ~ V /, (iv)
YT = A sin —(xvt)
y2 =
sin —•(xvt)
> 2
Since wave number k = MX\ From principle of superposition, •'• y = y\ + yi = A {sin [Ink^x  vt) + sin [2nk 2 (x  vf)]}
Randhawa Institute of Physics, SCO208, First Floor, Sector36D, Chandigarh. Mobile : 9814527699 Ph.: 01722620699
6 PHYSICS FOR Y O U I APRIL '07
Adding equation (iv) and equation (v)
• ••(vi)
If we assume no dissipation of energy occurs the total power radiated remains constant at 20 W m~2 and r = 5. 20 47cx (1 x 10 )(10 ) = 2.2 km
On squaring both sides and solving, / =4 /,/ 2
As intensity level p is given by / = I„e ^P 10 di In 10 , — = ——/
dfi 10
/ P = lOIog— 3IA®2 =mr(rd)tf
~ • • On differentiation we get e O A/ f A Hence — « — I I
P
InlO = —— Ap 10 23%
('a) where, = / cvw + w (r  a) 2 — 70  «7a2 + m (r — a)2 .= 2/777' (r — a) )max = (7>£)max wr(/  a) co = mga (1  cos9) 4.(a) Intensity at a radial distance of 4 m from the source.
/ =
2
for AP = 1 dB, we get
di In 10 d$ , On integrating ~]~ = ~W~dt , I(L) we get I n = /(?,). lnloVP , Mdt 10 J dt
dfi As — = 1 dB/ year and taking I (t2) = 2/(?,), we have dt In 10 which is the required time for intensity to double. At
2
 t ,1 ~
10 In 2
„ = 3 year.
20
47I72 4ir(4) 2
9.9xlO" 2 W/m2
. Sound intensity level = 10Iog„ 9.9 xlO" io' 2
2
DCE
HOdB.
WlfcG
P = 101ogl(
Guide
P n. (b) Half the intensity level P' = ^ = 55dB P' = 101og1{ dB. P' 10 dB • / ' = /„ xl0 p ''
log,,
'o y
v v ^  M T G BOOKS
::;®§§ Boors
N e a r S a Warjung
147t/„(10p
/lndB
)
503, Taj Apt., Ring Road Hospital New D e l h i  1 1 0 029 Tel.: 26191601,26194317
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL 07
According to New Pattern
I I T  J E E PAPER  I
PHYSICS
2 0 0 7
Section  1 (Q. No. 1 to 12) (Only one option is correct) 1. Starting from rest when 5 = 0, pulley A is given a constant angular acceleration of 6 rad/s2. The speed of block B when it has risen by S = 30 m will be (Given: radius of pulley rA = 50 mm, rc= 150 mm, rD= 75 mm).
bar resting on a fixed smooth supports A and B. The ball is released from rest from the position when the string makes an angle of 30° with the vertical. The mass of the bar is 4 kg. The displacement in meters of the bar when the string makes the maximum angle on the other side of the vertical is (a) 0 (b) 0.2 (c) 0.25 (d) 0.5 4. Two identical discs of radius R and mass m each are connected by a light rod as shown in figure. A block of height 2R and mass 2m collides elastically with the disc A. Just after the collision, the direction of frictional forces on A and B respectively will be A B ) ) / > H I ) / /1 r/7 > / M H (a) leftwards, leftwards (b) leftwards, rightwards (c) rightwards, leftwards (d) rightwards, rightwards
/ / /
50 mm
EL
(a) 2 m/s (c) 4 m/s
(b) 3 m/s (d) none of these
2. If force F is increasing with time and at t = 0, F = 0, where will slipping first start? FH = 0.5  ( 1 = 0.3
(a) (b) (c) (d)
between 3 kg and 2 kg between 2 kg and 1 kg between 1 kg and ground both (a) and (b)
T
5. Suppose that earth suddenly shrinks in size under some internal forces. Assume that it remains perfectly spherical and its mass remains unchanged. Then, (a) the duration of day will decrease (b) the kinetic energy of rotation about its own axis will remain unchanged (c) the duration of year will decrease (d) all the above 6. A conical metallic body is heated at middle. If the body was truncated from its ends then
m = 4 kg
3. A ball of mass 1 kg is suspended by an inextensible string lm long attached to a point O of a smooth horizontal
Heat
By : insight G a t e w a y to NTs, Kota (Rajasthan). Ph. : 07442433425, 9352603206 For detailed answers of the paper, log on to institute's website www.insightiitjee.com
20
64 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '276
(a) there will be no effect on the body (b) no strain is produced in the body (c) maximum compressive stress will be on the side of the body towards L (d) maximum compressive stress will be on the side of body towards R 7. A detector is released from /(Hz) rest over a source of sound of 3 1100 frequency / 0 = 10 Hz. The frequency observed by the 1000 detector at time t is plotted in the graph. The speed of,sound in air is (g = 10 m/s2) (a) 330 m/s (b) 350 m/s (c) 300 m/s (d) 310 m/s 8. Two thin rods are arranged as shown in figure. The system is heated uniformly and slowly such that it's temperature
A'i
y
XT(C) (d)
y
(0,0)
x
(0,0)
*
11. A plane mirror falling vertically as shown in the figure. If S is a point source of light, the rate of increase of the length AB is
3.0
•/( s)
accel = g m/s2 Height = x mts
(a) (b) (c) (d)
directly proportional to x constant but not zero inversely proportional to * zero
dT increases at a rate R = — . The speed of point C will be (a) zero (c) (/fa, 2 + /22 a 2 2 )mR (b) (/,a, + l2a2)R (d) none of these
12. In the given potentiometer arrangement, the null point
r
9. A body cools in a surrounding which is at a constant temperature of 9 0 . Assume that it obeys Newton's law of cooling. Its temperature 0 is plotted against time /. Tangents are drawn to the curve at the points P(Q = 0 2 ) and Q(Q = 0,) . These tangents meet the time axis at angles of and as shown in figure. Then (a) (c) tan<j), tan cjjj tan <> ji tan<j)2 0j — 02 0 2 — 0q 0, 0 tan<>2 _ tan <> fj tan<j> (d) tan ef>2 (b) 02  0 O 0 0 0
(a) (b) (c) (d)
aWV—(")" K K can be obtained for any value of V null point can be obtained only if V < V0 null point can be obtained only if V> V0 can never be obtained SectionII (Q. No. 13 to 20) (More than one option may be correct)
10. A light ray is incident on a glass slab with variable refractive index given by p. = 1.5 (1 + x) where x, y axes are taken as usual. Outside refractive index is 2. Which of the following figures represents the trajectory of the ray correctly?
13. A particle strikes a horizontal smooth floor with a velocity u making an angle 0 with the floor and rebounds with velocity v making an angle < with the floor. The >  coefficient of restitution between the particle and the floor is e. Then (a) the impulse delivered by the floor to the body is mu( 1 + e)sin0 (b) tan<j> = e tan0 (c) v = l(le2)sin20 (d) the ratio of the final kinetic energy to the initial kinetic energy is cos20 + e 2 sin 2 0
(0,0)
64
(0,0)
PHYSICS FOR Y O U  APRIL '277
14. Two boats of base areas A, and A2, connected by a string are being pulled by an external force F0. The viscosity of water is r) and depth of the water body is H. When the system attains a constant speed, the tension in the thread will be (a) zero
(c)
(a) S « T2 (b) 5 oc T
(c) S oc 9
(d) 5 ~ 0 2
(b)
F0 ° ( A
L
+ A
2
)
FN
' W A T )
(d) none of these
15. A large flat plate of area A is kept such that the temperature of surroundings to it's left is T\ and to it's right is T2. Assume that heat transfer takes place only through radiation and that the plate has a very large thermal conductivity. The equilibrium temperature of the plate will be (a)
/4 , 7T+7V4 Y
19. Starting from rest a particle is first accelerated for time t\ with constant acceleration a, and then stops in time t2 with constant retardation a2. Let v, be the average velocity in this case and J, the total displacement. In the second case it is accelerated for the same time tx with constant acceleration 2a, and comes to rest with constant retardation a2 in time t3. If v2 is the average velocity in this case and s2 the total displacement, then (a) v2 = 2v, (b) 2v, < v2 < 4v, (c) s2 = 25, (d) 2s, < s2 < 20. A particle is projected from a point P with a velocity v at an angle 0 with horizontal. At a certain point Q it moves at right angle to its initial direction. Then (a) velocity of particle at Q is vsin0 (b) velocity of particle at Q is vcot0 (c) time of flight from P to Q is (v/g) cosec0 (d) time of flight from P t . ^ is (v/g)sec0 EMISTRY Section  1 (Q. No. 21 to 32) (Only one option is correct) 21. Which ofthe following will have structure different from others ? (a) I 2 0 5 (b) S 2 0 5 2  (c) C1205 (d) N 2 0 5 22. Denticity of ligands l,4diaza2,5cyclohexadiene, [fig (a)], and adenine, [fig (b)] is H
r2
(b) (7? + T 2 Y A
(c) somewhere between 7] and T2 but the exact value cannot be predicted by given data (d) none of these 16. A radioactive material of halflife T was produced in a nuclear reactor at two different instants. The quantity produced second time was twice of that produced first time. If now their present activities are AT and A2 respectively then their age difference equals (a) (c)
T , 2 A,
(b) Tin
A
lnIn 2 2
i2
A,
(d) r m A l 2A
(a)
N H (b) 2, 2
(b) (
17. A part of the 2V circuit is shown in the figure. All the capacitors have 2 V o— capacitance of 2pF. 9. 2 V <j ? Choose the correct alternative (a) charge on capacitor C, is zero (b) charge on capacitor C2 is zero (c) charge on capacitor C3 is zero (d) charge on none of the capacitors is zero
(a) 1,2 —o
3V
i
1,1
(d) JP %
o
18. A planet having surface temperature TK has a solar constant S. A solid angle 0 is subtended by the sun at the planet
PHYSICS FOR YOU IDECEMBER'07
23. A manufacturer of u barometers discovered that a recently prepared lot of i C11 hundred barometers had a J O notable defect : the glass tube in these cases had non1 Constriction . uniform cross section due to a slight constriction towards the center. How can the manufacturer correct this
HIg
278
defect? (a) This causes no defect in the reading (b) By introducing some air in the empty space over Hg column in the tube (c) By adjusting the marking on the wooden scale such that the readings in the zone of constriction should indicate the distance on curved surface of glass measured in vertical direction (d) He should throw these barometers and make fresh ones if he wants to save his reputation 24. A mercury drop of radius 1 cm is sprayed into 106 droplets of equal size. Calculate the work done if surface tension of mercury is 35 x 10~3 N/m. (a) 6.36 x 10~5 J (b) 4.356 x 1Q3 J 3 (c) 3.333 x IO" J (d) 5.64 x 10 6 J 25. When aqueous ammonia is added to silver chloride, the salt dissolves. Which of the following helps to explain the observation? (a) Ammonia depresses the concentration of [CI] (b) NH 4 + and Cl~ have great affinity for each other (c) The ionic product of [Ag+]aq and [CI"]aq in the solution is less than or equal to the solubility product of silver chloride just after adding ammonia (d) Ag precipitates as complex ion [Ag(NH3)2]Cl. 26. A simple model for enzymecatalyzed reaction is given by the following set of equations
A E+P ES
EP
B EP
C
ES
EP ES
D E+S
Activated complex Activated complex
ES
Activated complex Activated complex
E+P
E+S
EP
Which of the following will be a Pemitter ? (a)
7 5 B
(b) ,2D (d) all of these.
(c) ?oNe
28. Which of the following has minimum oxidation potential? (a) Li (b) Na (c) Rb (d) Cs. 29. Which of the following will undergo minimum hydrolysis with water? (a) A S C 1 3 (b) SnCl2 (c) SnCl4 (d) CdCl2 30. Which of the following gases when bubbled through lime water will not turn it milky and then colourless? (a) S0 3 (b) C0 2 (c) SOz (d) COCl2 31. If C4H5OH represents a primary alcohol, which of the following will be the possible stable structure? (a) OH OH (d) OH
(c)
eT
OH
C
D
32. Consider
(I) NC CN (II) NO,
Reaction coordinate E + S
Fast
ES
(enzyme)
ES
(reactant)
:
(intermediate 1)
EP
(intermediate 1) (intermediate 2)
EP
(intermediate 2) E + P (enzyme) (product)
O O ( I V ) " ^ ^ ^ _ O' o The correct order of their acidity is (a) (II) > (I) > (III) > (IV) (b) (II) > (III) > (I) > (IV) (c) (IV) > (III) > (II) > (I) (d) none of these Section  II (Q. No. 33 to 40) (More than one option may be correct) 33. When an aqueous solution of lithium chloride is electrolysed using graphite electrodes
PHYSICS FOR Y O U  APRIL '07
This is known as the MichaelisMenten mechanism. The potential energy diagram is shown in figure. Which of the following sets of identifications is correct? (Assume that temperature and pressure are constant.)
20
(a) pH of the resulting solution increases (b) pH of the resulting solution decreases (c) as the current flows, pH of the solution around the cathode increases (d) as the current flows, pH of the solution around the anode increases 34. Which of the following is unstable(does not exist at room temperature)? (a) Cul 2 (b) CuCl2 (c) T1F3 (d) SnPb0 3 35. Which of the following mixtures, when dissolved in water, will give hydrogen gas at cathode when electrolysed using inert electrodes under standard conditions? (a) K 2 C0 3 and Na 2 S0 4 (b) NaCl and CaCl2 (c) Ba(N0 3 ) 2 and Pb(N0 3 ) 2 (d) CuCl 2 and potash alum 36. Electrolysis of aqueous solutions of which of the following substances results in only decomposition of water? (a) Potassium chloride (b) Zinc sulphate (c) Potassium hydroxide (d) Sodium phosphate 37. The probable products of the following reaction can be
kH "'CH3 C 2 H s 07C 2 H 5 0H A
t
(a) acidic Mn0 2 > K 2 S 2 0 8 > Cl2 (b) I 2 > K 2 S 2 0 8 > Br2 (c) K 2 S 2 0 8 > I2> Br2 (d) Cl 2 > K 2 S 2 0 8 > Br2. 40. The following conversion reaction can be carried out by using reaction sequence/s. O O 11 1 1 •COOH OH . // W
(a)
(b) (c)
NaBH4
f
A12Q3, A> Q,/H 2 Q(oxidative)
Br2/hv ^ h+ KCN
>
(
Z n / H g / H C l , A> Heat>
H3Q+,A>
I 2 / N a O H , A^
(d) KMn0 4 /0H~ / heat MATHEMATICS Section  I (Q. No. 41 to 52) (Only one option is correct)
x ^ 2/3
41. If f { x )
L .,2 0 ( f/((t ' ) )
and ^ (c) 6
dt JJ o (/('))2 (d) 0
=
/ (72) is equal to (a) 2 (b) 3
42. If the slope of tangent to the curve ^.sin 2 x y ~f[x) is — thenX*) is periodic function with fix) principal period (a) n (b) In n (d) non periodic (c) j
HH
(a)
,,
cos8
,
t a n 0
x
0 M 6 /
(c) 38. (a) (b) (c) (d)
(d)
&
H CH,
43.
J /(*
sine
)^f ^y' f(xsmQ)dx
) i s equal to
J
(a) cosG 
tan 9
Which of the following is correct? Csl3 is thermally more stable than [N(CH3)4]+I3~ BaS0 4 and KMn0 4 are isomorphous CsC10 4 is less soluble than LiC104 (in water) None of these.
] sin 9
tan 9
(b) tanG J f{x)dx CS O0
sin 0 tan 6
(c) sinG j / ( x c o s G ) dx
(d)
tanG
j
sine
f(x)dx 2/1+1 n\ 5n +1
39. K 2 S 2 0 8 , acidic K 2 S 2 0 8 and acidic Mn0 2 oxidise I", Br", CI" to I2, Br2 and Cl2, respectively from the given data, the sequence that represents the correct order of increasing oxidisng ability is
44. The value of
lim
is equal to
64
64 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '28
2/5
(a) 1
(b) 0
(c)
(d) e2/5
loss for a team. The probability that no teams win all its games or loss all its games is
45. If p and q are two mutually perpendicular unit vectors and if the vectors {ra + r(5 + .y(axi3)} {a + ( a x P)} and {sa + sjj + t(a x j))} are coplanar, then (a) is the A.M. of r and t (b) is the G.M. of r and t (c) is the H.M. of r and t (d) none of these 46. The auxiliary circle of a family of ellipse passes through origin and makes intercept of 8 and 6 units on the xaxis and the yaxis respectively. If eccentricity of all such family of ellipse is j then locus of the focus will be
(a)
(a) 1 1 32 (c) 32
51. If 3z, Y 2  z 2 2zi A 3 " * : 15
(b) 16 (d) none of these =k
then points A(zt), B(z2) C(3, 0) and D(2,0) (taken in clockwise sense) will (a) lie on a circle only for k > 0 (b) lie on a circle only for k < 0 (c) lie on a circle V ke R (d) be vertices of a square V £ s ( 0 , l ) 52. Each square of a 3 x 3 board is coloured either red or blue at random ( each having probability 1/2). The probability that there is no 2x2 red square is n (a) i512
r(b) M w
x2 i6
+
v2 ir=
2 5
i n 512
(b) 4x2 + 4y*  32x  24y + 75 = 0 x2 y2 (d) none of these 47. Locus of point of intersection of the perpendicular lines are one belonging to (x+y2) + X(2x + 3y  5) = 0 and other to (b) straight line (d) none of these (2x + y  11) + X(x + 2y  13) = 0 is a (a) circle (c) pair of lines
(c) 512
201
(d) none of these
Section II (Q. No. 53 to 60) (More than one option may be correct) 53. Let e be the eccentricity of a hyperbola and./(e) be the eccentricity of its conjugate hyperbola then
3 [ / / / • • • / ( g ) «times
d e js e q u a
j
{ 0
(a) 4 if n is even (c) 2 if n is even
(b) 4 if n is odd (d) 2^2 if n is odd
48. The length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola
2 2
54. Which of the following functions are odd functions?
x v — — = 1 for which there is only one tangent at a (a) a b~ distance of 1 unit from the focus (6, 0) is (b) f ( x ) = x2 l n ( > / 7 7 l ' + x 3 ) 22 11 (a) f (b) (c) / ( * ) = 2* + 1 _5_ 281 (d) none of these. (c) 11 (d) f ( x ) = {g(x) + g(x)}{h(x) 49. If coefficient jc" in (1 +x) 101 (1  x + x2)100 is nonzero, then n cannot be of the form (a) 3t + 1 (b) 31 (c) 3t + 2 (d) 41 + 1 50. Five teams of equal strength play against each other in a tournament and each match either ends in a win or
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O UIDECEMBER'07
+ h(x)}
55. the (a) (b) (c) (d)
For the function f ( x ) = cos 1 x + cos"' x2 which of following statements is / are true? / (x) is always decreasing f ( x ) is decreasing in [0, 1] and increasing in [1,0] / (x) has only one local maxima / (x) has only one local minima
56. If / ( x ) = (a) (b) (cl (d) /(x) fix) f'(x) fix)
3x + 21 x  1 1  1 1+x is increasing in [0,1] is continuous in [0,3] does not exist at x = 1 has a maximum at x = 1
0<x< 1 , then 1 <x<3
Y = x a + _y(3 + z ( a + p), then (a) z2 = 1 2x 2 (b) z 2 = 1  2 f 2 2 (c) z — 1 x y (d) x2 = y2 59. If p + q + r pa qc determinant rb = 0 = a + b + c, then the value of the qb rc ra pb is pc qa a b c (b) P V c a b b c a
57. If L, and L2 are two lines belonging to family of lines (3 + 2X)x + (4 + 3X)y 7  5 ^ = 0 (A. is parameter) such that at maximum and minimum distance from (2,3) respectively, then the equation of lines passing through (1,2) and making equal with L} and L2 is/are (a) x + 2y = 7 (b) 3x +y = 5 (c) x — 3y = 5 (d) none of these 58. Let d , f i a n d y be the unit vectors such that
P q r abc 1 p P (a) r r q
(c) (a3 + b3 + c3)(p3 + q3 + r3) (d) 0. 60. If a, b, c form A.P. with common difference d(* 0) and x, y, z form a G.P. with common ratio 1), then the area of the triangle with vertices; (a, x), (b, y) and (c, z) is independent of (a) a (b) b (c) x (d) r
a and 3 are mutually perpendicular and y is equally inclined to d and 3 at an angle 0. If
PAPER  II
PHYSICS Section I (Q.No. 1 to 10) Comprehensive questions Comprehension 1 : A stable collection of charges One important question regarding a static distribution of charges was asked long back in 1904 by J.J Thomson, the discoverer of electron. Thomson's question was this: How should n identical point charges be distributed on a plane circular area such that the total electrostatic energy of the distribution is minimum? Since the time of Thomson, a lot of effort has gone into answering this seemingly simple question. Common sense would suggest that ^identical charges, constrained to be on a circular area, would lie on the circumference and arrange themselves on a regular polygon of T sides. V But the answer is not that simple. In 1985 Satanand Gupta came up with a very surprising answer for the distribution of these charges. He showed that the simple intuitive answer is all right as long as there are 11 or less charges. When there are 12 charges, be found that for minimum energy, 11 charges should be spaced symmetrically on the circumference of the circle and one charge should sit at the centre. He said that for all N > 12, the minimum energy arrangement will have ,V 1 charges equally spaced on the circumference and one charge at the centre of the circle. Improved calculations in 1986 by Tikam Roopchandani indicated that Satanand's results are valid only for N = 12 to 17. For N= 18, he found that 16 charges should be placed symmetrically on the circumference and the two charges should be placed symmetrically about the centre at some distance from it. When one more charge is added to this (i.e. N = 19), the added charge should go to the centre and rest everything remains same. For greater values of N no conclusive results have yet been obtained and this problem is still keeping many scientists occupied. May be in future one of you would be able to get to the correct result for a general value of Nl 1. Suppose that you are given six identical point charges and you have arranged them in a circular region of area A such that the potential energy of the system is minimum. Then the distance between the two adjacent charges would be
«
2.
$
$
< « >
iS ^
(d)
If 15 charges are to be arranged on a circular region
20 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
20
such that the potential energy of the system is minimum then they should be arranged as
(c)
3 Kq2
(4
^
2
Sj
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
3. If 18 charges are to be arranged on a circular region such that the potential energy of the system is minimum then the best arrangement will be 'i
(a)
(c)
4. According to the information given in the passage, if 19 identical point charges are arranged on a circular region such that the potential energy of the system is minimum then, for the arrangement, choose the incorrect statement. (a) At least three charges will be collinear (b) At the most five charges can be colinear (c) One charge has to occupy the centre (d) There is at least one charge whose distance from all the other charges is equal 5. Suppose that you are given six identical point charges. You are free to place them anywhere on a circular region of radius r. If each charge is q, the minimum possible value of potential energy of the arrangement will be (a) zero (b) KqVr
283
Comprehension  2 : Stable and unstable equilibrium A body is said to be in equilibrium when the net vvvvvvvwvutvv force acting on it is zero. figure 1 Suppose that it is displaced slightly from the equilibrium position. After displacement, if the forces act on it in such a way that it is displaced further away from the equilibrium position then it is said that the equilibrium \\\\\\ is unstable. On the other flgure 2 hand, if the forces act on it in such a way that the body tends to move back to equilibrium position, then we say that the equilibrium is stable. Lastly, if the body neither tends to move away nor towards the equilibrium position, we say that the equilibrium is neutral. For example, if a hemisphere is kept on a flat horizontal plane as shown in figure 1 then it is easy to see that the hemisphere is in stable equilibrium. On the other hand, if we manage to balance a tabletennis ball over a football as shown in figure 2 then the tabletennis ball will be in unstable equilibrium. Some elementary questions of stability are answered by common sense as seen in above examples. But there is a large variety of questions which may require some mathematical figure 3 calculations. We will study one such case. Suppose that a body (BodyI) with a curved bottom is balanced on a body (BodyII) with curved top as shown in figure 3. It is given that no slipping is possible between the bodies. BodyI will be in equilibrium when its centre of mass lies vertically above the point of contact. Let and R2 be the radii of curvature of two surfaces at the point of contact. Let the height of centre of mass of bodyI be at a height h above the point of contact. Then it can be mathematically proved that if the upper body is displaced slightly from the equilibrium position, it will be in 1 1 1 Stable equilibrium if /, ^ ^ 2 ' Contd. on page no. 60
PHYSICS FOR YOU I
APRIL 07
2£> Contd. from page no. 26 Unstable equilibrium if .
R
<xx\± 3 0 b a c k . height hiA above its base. The cone will be in (a) stable equilibrium (b) unstable equilibrium (c) neutral equilibrium (d) stable or unstable equilibrium depending on the radius of the circular base 8. Two equal point masses Meach are suspended from a thin rod of mass 10 m 2 M and length < I_I~ 1 M j •<«"»,' \ M 100 cm. The rod is placed equilibrium on a hemisphere of radius 50 cm. For checking the equilibrium, the value of h in formula 1 1 , 1 h>< R, R, derived in the passage should be kept as (a) h = 0 (b) A = 10 cm (c) h = 10 cm (d) h =  5 cm 9. The arrangement described in Q.8 will be in (a) stable equilibrium (b) unstable equilibrium (c) neutral equilibrium (d) half stable equilibrium 10. A cone of height r and base radius also r is stuck on the flat surface of a hemisphere, also of radius r. The arrang ement is placed on a horizontal plane as shown in figure. The arrangement will be in (a) stable equilibrium (b) unstable equilibrium (c) neutral equilibrium (d) stable / unstable equilibrium depending on what my partner thinks SectionII (Q.No. 11 to 15) Match the columns 11. Column 1 (a) Velocity at t = 0 of a particle following the equation x = u(t  8) + a(t  2)2 (b) Acceleration of a particle moving according to equation 2 jc = 4(r  5) + a(t  2) at t = 0 (c) Velocity of the particle moving according to equation x = ut + 5at 2 ln(l + tl2) + at2 at t = 0 (d) Acceleration of the particle moving according to the equation x = ut+ 5at 2 ln(l + t/2) + at2 Column II (P) a
1 , 1 +
R,
Note that the proof has been avoided here to keep the passage simple. Let us look at some simple examples of the above result. Example 1 : Suppose that a hemisphere is kept over another hemisphere as shown in figure. It is given that the centre of mass of a uniform solid 3r hemisphere lies at a height jjfrom it's base on it's axis. If the radius of lower hemisphere is 10 cm, for what values of /?, will the upper hemisphere in stable equilibrium? Here, h = r 3 r ( 5 r ,R, = 10 cm Let R{ = r So, for stable equilibrium, 1 1 : _3_ > J_  > — + 5 r r 10 5 r 10 r < 6 cm. Example 2 : If the hemisphere in the previous problem is inverted. Then, h = 3r/8, R\ —» 00 (for a plane surface) and R2 = 10 cm So, for stable equilibrium 80 8/3r > 1/10 + l/oo T c m for stable equilibrium of upper hemisphere. 6. A cube of side length a is resting on a hemisphere of radius r. The maximum value of air for which the cube will be in stable equilibrium is (a) zero (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) infinity 7. A cone of height 2 cm is balanced on a hemisphere of radius 10 cm. It is given that the centre of mass of a solid uniform cone lies at a
64
Cube
hemisphere
A
(Q) 2a
(R) u
(S) u  4 a
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '284
12. A person A can swim in still water with a velocity 5 m/s. If the water is flowing at a speed 3 m/s and if Column II Column I (P) he will cover a drift (a) The man swims in a in the direction of direction perpendicular river to the flow of river in frame of river then (b) The man swims at an (Q) he will cover zero drift angle of 150° to the direction of the flow of river in river frame then (c) The man swims at an (R) he will cover drift in angle of 53° to the a direction opposite direction of flow of river to the rivers flow in river frame then (d) The man swims at an (S) he will take minimum angle 90° to the flow of possible time to cross river, in ground frame the river then 13. A projectile is thrown at an angle 0 with the horizontal with a initial velocity v0. If the magnitude of velocity of the projectile and time are related as \2
15. In the given systems 2 beads each of mass m are constrained to move only in vertical direction. Match the corresponding constraint relations for the system shown in the left column
(P) vB = 0
(Q) vB = v c
(R) Vfi =  v c tan 2 0/2
v'(t)
(a) (b) (c) (d)
: T, a a Column I Range is Height is Time of flight is Velocity at highest point
then Column II (P) c (Q) 2b/a (R) Ibcla (S) b2/2a (S) vB =  v c (sec0  1)
(T) vc = vB(\+
sec9)
14. A particle moving in horizontal plane along a curve whose equation in polar coordinates is r = 2acosG Column I Column II (a) If dO/dt = 5 rad/s and 6 = 60°, then (b) If v = 10a m/s and 0 = 30°, then (c) If d29 _ 25 ~ — and dt2 ~ s 0 = 45°, then (R) aN = 100a m/s2 50a (Q) a T = m/s2 (P) a N
100a
(1 + V2) m/s2
SectionIll (Q. No. 16 to 20) Subjective Questions 16. Two landingstages M and K are served by launches that all travel at S, km K \ 2 3 4 5 the same speed relative to the water. The distance between the landingstages 1 is 20 km. It is 2 3 4 5 6 covered by each launch irom M to K in one hour and from K to M in two hours. The launches leave the two landingstages at the same time at an interval of
50 a (d) If co = 10 rad/s and 0 = n/2 rad, then
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O UIDECEMBER'07
(S) aT=
2 +
^
m/s2
(T) aT = 0 m/s2
285
20 minutes and stop at each of them also for 20 minutes. Determine (i) the number of launches in service (ii) the number of launches met by a launch travelling from M to K (iii) the number of launches met by a launch travelling from K to M. 17. A block of mass m is placed on a wedge of mass M as shown in figure. Find the "777777777777777777777777777777777 ^X accelerations of the block and the wedge in the reference system fixed to the table, and the reaction. Friction is to be neglected. Analyse the limiting case when the wedge remains stationary. 18. In figure, a block slides along a track from one level to a higher level, by moving through an intermediate valley. The track is frictionless until the block reaches the higher level. There a frictional force stops the block in a distance d. The block's initial speed v0 is 6 m/s, the height difference h is 1.1 m and the coefficient of kinetic friction p. is 0.6. Find d. 19. In a cylinder filled up with ideal gas and closed from both ends there is a piston of mass m and crossB sectional area S. In equilibrium the piston divides the cylinder into two equal parts each with volume V0. The gas pressure is P0. The piston was slightly displaced from the equilibrium position and released. Find its oscillation frequency, assuming the processes in the gas to be adiabatic and the friction negligible. 20. A hemispherical bowl of radius R is set rotating about its axis of symmetry which is kept vertical. A small block kept in the bowl rotates with the bowl without slipping on its surface if the surface of the bowl is smooth and the angle made by the radius through the block with the vertical is 0, find the angular speed at which the bowl is rotating. CHEMISTRY Section I (Q. No. 21 to 33) Comprehensive questions Comprehension I : In monosubstituted benzene derivatives, if the substituent group provides electron density to the ring by its resonance effect, it is always
20
ortho/para directing. The arenes (alkyl benzenes) stabilize the arenium ion by +1 and hyperconjugative effect so are also activating and ortho/para directing. If the substituent group withdraws electron density by resonance effect then it is meta directing. In case of disubstituted benzenes, the strongly activating group dominates over weakly activating or deactivating groups in deciding the orientation of major product. There is often little substitution between two groups that are meta to each other due to steric crowding. 21. In the following reaction the monochlorination mainly takes place at
oT
CI
Cl,/SbCI, (monochlorination)
•
(a) ortho position (b) meta position (c) para position (d) both ortho and para position O
22.
Br;/Fe
> ; The major substitution is
taking place at position (a) 1 (b) 2 HC — CH — COOH 23. product is HC = CHCOOH
(c) 3
(d) 4.
HOCl/H+
*•
The
major
HC = CHCOOH (b)
(a)
(c)
HC = CH  COOH CI
OH CI I I HCCHCOOH (d) 
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
24. Which of the following aromatic ring is most basic with DF/BF3?
(c) Silver ion and perchlorate ion (d) All of these. 27. Which of the following ions will be capable of causing catalytic decomposition of H 2 0 2 ? (a) Fe3+ (b) Fe2+ (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of these 28. Which statement about standard reduction potentials is correct? (a) £ ° D + / D 2 = zero at 298 K (b) £°H+/H, = zero at all temperatures (c) A redox reaction is feasible if sum of SRP of oxidant and that of reductant is a positive quantity (d) K 2 Cr 2 0 7 (acid) is stronger oxidising agent than KMn0 4 (acid). 29. and (a) (b) (c) (d) Which is correct about the reaction between H 2 0 2 03? 0 3 will oxidise H 2 0 2 into 0 2 It is a case of mutual reduction It is not a redox reaction H 2 0 2 being a stronger oxidising agent will decompose ozone into oxygen. Comprehension  3 M
S 0ng y "" / h e a t e 'd> P + Q,0 + Hg(N0 3 ) 2
O 25. OMe OH + CI  S  ^ ^  M e O
HCI •
(1)
Br,/Fe • =
(2)
(3)
+ H: _ >
The major product is Br, (a) MeO .Br (c) MeO—(/ % (d) (b)
(R) ppt.
(colourless hydrated salt)\
HgCl2
Comprehension2 Standard reduction potentials (SRP) for different systems can be used to decide the spontaneity of a reaction e.g. E°z„2+/Zn =  0.76 V, hence for the reaction Zn + 2H+ Zn 2+ + H 2 , AG° is negative. It has been found experimentally that if (SRP of an oxidant  SRP of a reductant) is more than 1.7 V, then their combination may lead to explosion (though it may be prevented by kinetic factors). Now go through the following data and answer the questions. Data: E° N2 /N 3 ~ 3.09 V N £ V / A g = 0.80 V = 1.23 V E ° M =271 V ao4/cio3E° O 2 / h 2 o 2 =  1 . 0 3 V £ ° F C 3 + / F e 2 + : ^ 0.77 V £°o3/o2 = 2.07 V £°H 2 o 2 /H 2 o = 1.76 V £°Cr2072/Cr3+= 133 V £°MnO,/Mn2+= 1.54 V 26. Which of the following ionic combinations may lead to the formation of explosive substance? (a) Silver ion and azide ion (b) Sodium ion and azide ion
64 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '
N (white ppt.)
O
(black ppt.) excess of
(M) soln ^ ^
00 0ur ess
> white \ turbidity
\
' ' solution
prolonged > heating with HNO,
clear solution
31. The colour of the compound R is (b) yellow (a) white (d) brown (c) black 32. The structure of compound P is (b) crown shaped (a) linear (d) zigzag chain (c) square pyramidal 33. Compound M is used (I) in photography (II) (III) as a dehydrating agent (IV)as an oxidising as well as Choose the correct option. (a) I, III (b) (c) I, II (d) in analytical chemistry reducing agent I, II and III I, II, III and IV.
61
SectionII (Q. No. 34 to 37) Subjective Problems
34. Rate of a reaction A + B — product is given as a > function of different initial concentrations of A and B. \A\/mo\ L1 [Bj/mol L"' 77/mol L 1 min"1 (a) 0.01 0.01 0.005
0.02 0.01 0.010
39. Which compounds in column (I) shows a characteristic test with reagents in column (II)? Column I Column II
^
N/
O II
(P) Tollen's reagent
0.01 0.02 0.005 Determine the order of the reaction with respect to A and with respect to B. What is the halflife of A in the reaction? 35. Calculate the concentration of ammonium ion that is required to prevent the precipitation of Mg(OH)2 in a solution with [Mg2+] = 0.10 M and [NH3] = 0.10 M. Two equilibria are involved in this system. Mg(OH)2W M g 2 ^ + 20H~ W) Ksp = 1.5 x 10"11 ... (i) NH3(ot/) + H 2 O (0
( „ „ ) + OH 1.8 x 10Ksp '
O
(Q) Fehling's solution (R) NaOH + I2 (S) Brady's reagent
(b)
H3C  C  H
O  (c) H 3 C  C  N H 2 O
(d) H3C 
c
CH3
NH,4
... (ii)
Section I (Q. No. 41 to 52) Comprehensive questions Comprehension 1 : If / (x) = (x  a)" g(x) then / ( a ) =/'(<*) = / " ( a ) = .... = / » ( a) = 0 where fix) and 37. Reaction of 3,3dimethyllbutene with hydrogen g(x) are polynomials. iodide yields two compounds A and B, each having the For a polynomial/(x) with rational coefficients, answer molecular formula C6H13I, in the ratio A : B = 90 : 10. the following questions. Compound A, on being heated with potassium hydroxide 0), in ttpropyl alcohol, gives only 3,3dimethyllbutene. 41. I f f ( x ) is of degree 4 and touches xaxis at Compound B undergoes elimination under these then conditions to give 2,3dimethyl2butene as the major (a) sum of the roots / (x) is 0 product. Suggest structures for compounds A and 5. (b) product of the roots of f (x) is 9 (c) sum of the product of the roots taken three at time SectionIll (Q. No. 38 to 40) is 12>/3 ' Match the columns (d) none of these. 38. Column I Column II 42. I f / (x) is of degree 3 and touches xaxis, then (a) Isothermal vaporisation (P) AT=O (a) all the roots o f / ( x ) are rational of water at 100°C (b) only one root is rational (b) Isothermal reversible (Q) AE = 0 (c) both (a) and (b) may be possible expansion of an ideal gas (d) none of these. (c) Adiabatic compression (R) AH = 0 of an ideal gas 43. I f f (3) = / ( 2 ) = 0 and/'(—3) < 0, then the largest (d) Adiabatic free expansion intergal value of C is ( w h e r e / ( x ) = x3 + ax2 + bx + c), (S) Q = 0 of ideal gas (a) 18 (b)  1 9 (c)  1 2 (d)  6 .
64 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
36. A well known orange crystalline compound (A) when burnt imparts violet colour of flame. (A) on treating with (B) and concentrated H 2 S0 4 gives reddish gas (C) which gives reddish yellow solution (D) with alkaline water. (D) on treating with acetic acid and lead acetate gives yellow precipitate (E). (B) sublimes on heating. Also on heating (B) with NaOH, gas (F) is formed which gives white fumes with HC1. What are (A) to (F) ?
40. Column I Column II (a) On increasing pressure (P) viscosity of liquid increases, pL increases (Q) V, decreases, p7 (b) On increasing temperature decreases (R) viscosity of water (c) On dilution decreases (S) none of these (d) On increasing mass MATHEMATICS
44. / ( a ) = / ' ( a ) = / " ( a ) = 0,/((3) = / ' ( P ) = / " ( P ) = 0 and / ( x ) is polynomial of degree 6, then (a) all the roots of f i x ) = 0 are real (b) atleast two roots o f f " ( x ) = 0 are always real (c) exactly two roots o f f " ( x ) = 0 are real (d) none of these Comprehension 2 : Consider a three dimensional cartesian system with origin at O and three rectangle coordinate axes x, y and zaxis. Suppose that the distance between two points P and Q in the space having their coordinates (x,, y,, z,) and (x2, y2, z2) respectively be defined by the following formula d(P 0 =  * 2  * l l + + Z. Although the formula of distance between two points has been defined in a new way, yet the other definitions remain same (like section formula, direction cosines etc.) So in general equations of straight line in space plane in space remain unchanged. 45. If /, m, n represent direction cosines (if we can call it) of a vector OP, then which of the following relations holds? (a) P + m2 + n2 = 1 (b) I + m + n = 1 (c) / + m + n\ = 1 (d) /[ + \m\ + « = 1. 46. Locus of point P if d (O, P) = k where k is a positive constant number, represents (a) a sphere of radius k (b) a set of eight planes forming an octahedron (c) a set of eight planes forming hexagonal prism (d) an infinite cylinder of radius k. 47. Let A be a point ( 5,2,3) in the given reference system. Then locus of the point P in the first octant satisfying the equation d{OP) = d(A, P) does not contain (a) any of the coordinates axes (b) any of the coordinates planes (c) any plane parallel to coordinates axes (d) any plane parallel to coordinates planes. 48 An equilateral triangle has its vertices on the axes of coordinates and area V3 square units. The coordinates of the orthocentre of the triangle are (a) (L L 1) (c) (b) (d) 1 V2 3 ' 1 V2 1 V2 J 3 ' >/3' y/3 3 ' 3
length 2a and vertices A, B, C lying on x, y and zaxis repectively. Let P be a point inside the region of the tetrahedron satisfying d{0, P) < mm{d(P, A), d(P, B), d(P, C)} The maximum value of d(0, P) is (a) a (b) V2a (c) 2ct/3 (d) 4a/3. Comprehension 3 : Statement  In the equation z2 + 2Xz + 1 = 0, X is a parameter which can take any real value, then 50. The roots of this equation lie on a certain circle, if (a)  1 < X < 1 (b) X > 1 (c) X < 1 (d) none of these. 51. One root lies inside the unit circle and one outside, if (a)  1 < X < 1 (b) A > 1 (c) X < 1 (d) none of these. 52. For every large value of X, the roots are approximately (a)  2X, \IX (b)  X, \IX (c) 2X,MX (d) none of these. SectionII (Q. No. 53 to 56) Subjective Questions 53. L e t / ( x ) = minimum {ex, 3/2, 1 + e~x}, 0 < x < 1. Find the area bounded by y=f(x), xaxis, >>axis and the line x = 1 54. Tangents PA and PB are drawn to circle (x + 3)2 + (y 2)2 = 1 from point P lying on y2 = 4x, then find the locus of circumcentre of APAB. 55. Find the minimum value of P(A u 5)if P(B) = {P(A u B)}2 56. If x = sin — + s i n — + sin — 1 1 1 2K 4ti 871 and y = cos h cos 1 cos—, then find x + y 7 7 SectionIll (Q. No. 57 to 60) Match the columns 57. Let / (x) be a real valued function defined by fix) =x2 2\x\ and _ (minimum{/(/):  2 < 7 < x } , x e [  2 , 0 ) Six~)  [maximum { f i t ) : 0 < t < x}, x e [0,3] Column I Column II (a) / (x) is not continous (P)  2 at x equal to (b) gix) is not derivable (Q) 0 at x equal to
PHYSICS F O R Y O U  APRIL '07 . .
t
.
.271
.471
87T
49. Let OABC represent a regular tetrahedron with edge
20
(c) Number of points of local extremum of g(x) is equal to (d) Absolute maximum value of g(x) is equal to
(R) 1
ANSWERS
PAPER 1
l. 6. 11. 15. 19 24. 29. 33. 36. 40. 45. 50. 54. 57. 60. 2. (b) 7. (d) 12. (d) 16. (a) (a, d) 20. 25. (b) 30. (d) (a, c, d) (c, d) 37. (a, d) 41. 46. (b) 51. (a) (a, b, c, d) (b,c) 58. (a, b) 4. (c) 3. (b) 9. (b) 8. (c) 13. (a, b, c, d) (d) 17. (d) 18. (b,c) (a) 22. (d) (b, c) 21. (d) 26. (d) 27. (c) (c) 31. (a) 32. (a) (a) 34. (a,d) 35. (a, b) (b, d) 38. (a, c) 39. (a, b) 42. (a) 43. (a) (c) 47. (a) 48. (a) (b) 52. (a) 53. (a, d) (a) 55. (c) 56. (b, c) 59. (a, b) (a, b, c, d)
(c) (c)
(S) 2 (T) 3
5. (a) 10. (c) 14. (b) 23. (a) 28. (b)
58. Let ax + by = 1 be a chord of the curve hx^y2 2x + 4y = 0 intersecting the curve at the points A and B such that AB subtends a right angle at the origin O. Column I Column II (a) a  2b + 1 is equal to (P) 0 (b) the distance from the origin of the farthest chord (Q) 2 cannot exceed (c) if the triangle OAB is (R) isosceles then the area of the triangle cannot exceed (d) The number of chords such that triangle OAB is (S) 3 isosceles cannot exceed (T) 5 59. Column I Column II (a) if a, b, c are unequal (P) of opposite signs positive numbers and b is A.M of a and c then the roots of ax2 + 2bx + c = 0 are (b) If a e R, then the roots of (Q) rational numbers the equation (R) real and unequal x2  (a + 1 )x  a2  4 = 0 are (v) If a, b, c are unequal (S) imaginary positive numbers and b is H.M. of a and c then the roots of ax2 + 2bx + c = 0 are (d) If \a ± b\ < c and a = 0 (T) of same sign then the roots of a2x2 + (b2 + a2  c2)x + b2 = 0 are 60. L e t / : R  {0} x R be defined by
44. (c) 49. (O
PAPER II
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (d) 8. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 9. (a) 11. (a)S (d)Q (b)Q (c)R 12. a)P, S ; (b)R ; (c)P ; (d)Q 13. a)R ; (b)S ; (c)Q ; (d)P 14. a)R, S ; (b)Q, R ; (c)P, Q ; (d)R, T 15. a)R ; (b)S ; (c)Q ; (d)T ; (e)P, Q i) 11, (ii) 8, (iii) 8 16. 5. (d) 10. (b)
Msinacosa M +OTSina msinacosa bx = S A/ + /;isin2a 18. .17 m
17.
ax = g
. (A/ + w)sin a 6^gi M + m sin2 a _ mMg cosa 5 0~ M + sin2 a
19. 21. 26. 31. 38. 39. 40.
<o = SsJlyPg/ mV0 > where y is the adiabatic exponent (d) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (c) (a) 27. (d) 28. (a) 29. (b) (a) 32. (d) 33. (c) (a)P ; (b)P, Q, R ; (c)S ; (d)P, Q, R, S (a)P, S ; (b)  P, Q, R, S ; (c)R ; (d)R, S (a)P, R ; (b)Q, R ; (c)Q ; (d)S
(b) (b) (b) 42. 47. 52. (a) (d) 43. 48. (b) (c) 44. 49. (a) (a)
20. a>y[gRsecQ
25. (c) 30. (d)
45. 50.
(d) (a)
*+l + /(*) = x e 1 2 now match the entries from the following two columns Column I Column II ( a ) / ( x ) is even (P) true (b) f(x) is oneone (Q) false (c) / (x) is onto (R) can't be decided (d) lim x>0 f(x)= 2 (S) data insufficient
sin(n)sin 53. sinj
54. (y\)
2
H) 0
(c)
JS1
=
2x+3
55.
J5
56.
57. 58. 59. 60.
(a)Q ; (b)Q, S ; (c)Q, (d)T " (a)Q ; (b)R, S, T ; (c)T ; (d)S, T (a)R, T ; (b)P, R ; (c)S ; (d)R, T (a)P ; (b)Q ; (c)Q ; (d)P.
PHYSICS FOR YOUIDECEMBER'07
67
( a i i m s ) ( C B S E ) ( D P M T ) A F M C ) ( V M M C ) (EAMCET) WBJEE) ( B H U ) ( C M C )
2007 Medical Entrance 1 Exam
( UP C P M T ;1 [CET Karnataka j MP PMT MGIMS
Practice 1rest Pa peir
( c ) FTV~L ( d ) FT1 V.
jManipal P M T ( JIPIV1ER ]
(PMDT B i h a r ) (PMT H a r y a n a ) ( K e r a l a PMT 1 R a j . P M T ; f T N P C E E j (2i + j  k ) . The work done by the force in arbitrary unit is (a) 8 (b) 10 (c) 12 (d) 16 8. A 50 gram bullet moving with a velocity of 10 ms 1 gets embedded into a 950 g stationary body. The loss in kinetic energy of the system will be (a) 95% (b) 100% (c) 5% (d) 50%. 9. A uniform rod of mass m and nnnintiiiniiininniiim length I is suspended by means of two light inextensible strings as shown in figure. Tension in one B string immediately after the other A string is cut is (a) mgl 2 (b) mg (c) 2 mg (d) mglA 10. The moment of inertia of a circular ring about one of its diameter is /. What will be its moment of inertia about a tangent parallel to the diameter? (a) 4/ (b) 21 (c) (3/2)7 (d) 37. 11. A remote sensing satellite of the earth, revolves in a circular orbit at a height of 250 km above the earth's surface. What is the orbit speed of the satellite? (Take radius of earth 7? = 6400 km, g = 10 ms 2 ) (a) 6.8 kms"1 (b) 7.8 kms"1 (c) 8.8 kms~' (d) 9.8 kms"1. 12. The rotation period of an earth satellite close to the surface of the earth is 83 minute. The satellite in an orbit at a distance of three times earth radii from its surface will be (a) 83 minute (c) 664 minute (b) 83 x A/8 minute (d) 249 minute.
1. If velocity (V), time (T) and force (F) were chosen as fundamental quantities, the dimension of mass will be
(a) FTV ( b ) F~LTV
2. Two trains A and B of length 400 m each are moving on two parallel tracks with a uniform speed of 72 km Ir 1 in the same direction, with A ahead of B. The driver of B decides to overtake A and accelerates by 1 ms~2. If after 50 s, the guard of B just brushes past the driver of A, what was the original distance between them? (a) 1200 m (b) 1250 m (c) 850 m (d) 450 rn. 3. A balloon is rising up with a velocity of 9.8 ms  ' and a bag is dropped from it when its height from the ground is 39.2 m. The time taken by the bag to reach the ground is (a) 2 s (b) 3 s (c) 4 s (d) 5 s. 4. The angle between the two vectors A = 2i +Aj + 5k (d) 180°
and B = 7>i + A j —5k will be (b) 45c (c) 90° (a)
5. A man standing in a lift holds a spring balance with a load of 5 kg suspended from it. What would be the reading of the balance when the lift is descending with an acceleration of 4 ms~2? (a) 1 kg (b) 2 kg (c) 3 kg (d) 4 kg. 6. Three masses of 1 kg, 6 kg and 3 kg are connect to each other with strings and are placed on a table T< as shown in figure. If g = 10 ms2, the acceleration 1 kg with which the system is moving is (a) zero (b) 1 ms"2 (c) 2 ms~2 7.
6 kg
r,
3 kg
(d) 3 ms 2 .
A particle is displaced from a position ( 2 i  j + k) to
13. A horizontal pipe line carries water in a streamline flow. At a point along the pipe where the crosssectional area is 10 cm2, the water velocity is 1 m/s and the pressure is 2000 Pa. What is the pressure of water at another point where the crosssectional area is 5 cm2? (a) 200 Pa (b) 300 Pa (c) 400 Pa (d) 500 Pa. 14. A steel wire of length 4.7 m and cross section 3.0x10~ 5 m2 stretches by the same amount as a copper
PHYSICS FOR YOU  APRIL '07
another position (3/ + 2 j 2k) under the action of the force
64
On putting numerical values, we get f 0.2Z = cos  (0.9998) = 1.14° 0 = cos 1 2x9.8x9.8 \ Alternative Method : a = gsin 0 dv v — =  g s i n 9 , vdv = gs'mQ(ldQ) ds o e Integrating, we get J vdv = glj sin QdQ 0 "0 gl[ COS01 or or
2
10. u,1 = frequency of closed pipe = — = — . 4 4/, 60 v v t>2 = frequency of open pipe = — = — . i.e., u, > "02 212 61 According to question, I), t)2 = 6
60
U
V
V
61
= 6:
6160
60(61)
= 6 => v = 6(60)(61) cm/s
'
1
= gl [cos 9  1 ] = gl [1  COS0] S
v
?
6(60X61) = 366 Hz and 60 60' j > = 6(60)(61) = 3 6 Q H z 61 61
2
cose = 1 — ^ 2 gl
2
11. Work done by friction is given by W =  fNs = f (mg cos a) ,v sina As sin a = — 5 h = 3m
• 0 = cos" 1  0 2 gl On putting numerical values, we get 0 = cos
\
W = fmgh cot a On putting numerical values, we get W =  0.2(100)(9.8)(3)cot 30° = 1018.44 J Change in the internal energies of the body and the plane =  W = 1018.44 J = 1.01 k.1. 12. At t = 50° C, pbody (50oC) = phquld (50.C) = p (say). At t = 0°C, p M0 . c) = p„{5(rC) (1 + 50pA) P/(0°C) = P/(50°C)(' + 5 °P/) fraction of body immerged. _l + 50pfc 5_pb P/ 1 + 50(3/ (1 + 503,) (1 + 5op,r » ( 1 + 50(3,,) (1503/) = [150(13,3,)] = 1  50 x 7.7 x 10"5 = 0.'996 13. From first law of thermodynamics dO = dU + dW = nC„dT + PdV = nC,dT + nRdT dO = n(Cv + R)dT= nC,,dT dO =—nRdT = — PdV ? ?
0.2 4
2x9.8x9.8
= cos (0.9998) = 1.14° y = N2T2
1
7.
Given /,  l2 = 22 cm and U
9 9 Squaring both sides, we get N] l\ = N ^ 2
2 /, => —  /V /V,2 h
=>M2ti — = Nyln 36 30
2
* :36 — 25
 _A _ 36 1 = .11 /2 25 25 25 => ^2 = yj~ x 22 = 50 cm So,/, = /2 + 22 = 72 cm l2 8. Given v = 250 m/s, u = 500 Hz and A > = 60°. < V , , , 271 , X , . V , , z^>X = — and Acp = — A * : = —A<p = Ad) u X 271 27IU On putting numerical values, we get 250 ( n } 1 Ax = — — =— m 27r(500) V 3 J 12
,
A
On putting numerical values, we get 0 =  x l . 5 2 x l O 5 (0.07  0.03) = 1.52 x io 4 .1 14. Let the distance of lens from table = x.
9. v= yJyP/p The density F l P +K 2 P 2 V, +V2
=
of mixture 4(1) + 1(16) =4 5
is
given
by
50 x
50
I_I_L
V
u
f
( P  i i  l , v'•= '300 = 650 m/s " v ~ V p' 14 2
PHYSICS FOR YOU MARCH '07
1
1 (50  x )
1 +8
(50jc) +jc 1 =  => 400 = 50*  x 2 => * 2  50* + 400 = 0 x(50x) 8 => (x  40) (*  10) = 0 .. x = 40 cm or 10 cm.
(l)(9.8)4(i 2 ) Q= 18. 9xl09
f
1 N
9.8 a/3(9X10 9 )
= 2.5x10" 5 C
d = 4/'„ _p0/ .". 1 = +
100
{27t(2rQ) }
2 2 3/2
2
_p0/
4r02
_ p0/ 2r0
1 4^2
4ti (4r0 + 4r 0 ) 3 cm = +—m =J 3 10*
1
2X6^2^
5,= (V 2
' fl, > fl2
r
o
1 _ Ho' 2 5\[5 r0
16. Let resistance of parts as x and 1 0  * . According to question. 1 — + 1 = 1= > ( 1 0  * ) + x x => •• 10x 1 x(10x) 10= 1 Ox  x 2 => x 2  1 Ox + 10 = 0  (  1 0 ) ± V l 0 0  4 0 " 10±2>/l5 _ . + r— _ 2 2
1 M Bp = B] — Bi = 2 fh 4>/2 19. N = N0e~Xl
5^5,
tesla
— N0 = N0 e~x' [where t = 60 hrs,] => — = e ^ 0 1 100 0 7 , 100 = ,\t In 7 Similarly ln2 = 1 \ T U 2
'1/2 _
=» *, = 8.873£2 and x 2 = 1.127Q The connecting wires divide the length in the ratio of 8.873 : 1.127 = 7.87 : 1 17. Given m = 1 kg, l0 = 1 m and 0 = 30° w\
... (i) ... (ii) In 2 100 In
Divide equation (ii) by (i), we In 2 (60) hrs. = 15.64 hrs. 100 ln
In equilibrium of the charges mg = 7cos0 Fe = 7sin6 Dividing equation (ii) by (i), we get  = tan 0 : 1 mg 1 4TC0 (/ o sin0 + / o sin0) sin 2 0)tan0
• 0) (ii)
20. From quantization of angular momentum. nh mvr 2tt From Newton's second law. 1 47TE0 Ze" r 2_
e
... (i)
mg
= tan0
'mv
4tce 0r
(For hydrogen atom Z = 1) ...(ii) 2n h e' • v=2znh
=> Q = y]4m0(mg)(4$
From (i) and (ii), we get
On putting numerical values, we get 2 = (1 )(9.8)4(12 )(sin 2 30° )(tan 30°) 9x10
mvr 47t£nr On putting numerical values, we get v= (1.6X10"' 9 ) 2 2(8.85xl0" 1 2 X6.6xl0" 3 4 )
= 2.19x10° m/s
64
64 PHYSICS FOR YOU  APRIL '07
QUESTIONS 1. A train passes an observer standing on a platform. The first carriage of the train passes the observer during time = Is and the second, during time t2 = 1.5 s. Find the velocity of the train at the beginning and end of observation and its acceleration, assuming that the motion of the train is uniformly variable. The length of each carriage is / = 12 m. 2. A bullet is fired from a gun from the bottom of a hill along its slope. The slope of the hill is 30° and the angle of the gun to the horizontal is 60°. The initial velocity of the bullet is 21 m/s. Find the distance from the gun to the point at which the bullet falls. 3. A helicopter ascends with a velocity v 0 = 10 m/s. At a height H = 50 m, a heavy body is dropped from it. With what velocity does this body reach the ground? 4. Find the velocity of an artificial satellite moving in a circular orbit at a height h = 1600 km above the surface of the earth. The radius of the earth R = 6400 km. 5. A car of mass M = 1000 kg decelerates from a velocity v = 100 km/h to a stop in 10 s. At what average rate must the braking surfaces lose heat if their temperature is not to rise significantly? 6. A pendulum of length / =9.8 m hangs in equilibrium and is then given velocity v 0 = 0.2 m/s at its lowest point. What is the amplitude of the subsequent oscillation? 7. Two pendulums whose lengths differ by /,  /2 = 22 cm oscillate at the same place so that one of them makes 7V, = 30 oscillations and the other N2 = 36 oscillations during the same time. Find the lengths of the pendulum. 8. The speed of a wave is 250 m/s and its frequency is 500 cycles/s. What is the distance between two points having a phase difference of 60° ? 9. The velocity of sound in hydrogen is 1300 m/s. What will be the velocity in a mixture of 4 parts by volume
of hydrogen and 1 part of oxygen at the same temperature and pressure? 10. Two tuning forks A and B give 6 beats/second. A resonates with a closed column of air 15 cm long and B with an open column 30.5 cm long. Calculate their frequencies. 11. A body of mass m = 100 kg slides down an inclined plane with a slope a = 30°. What is the change in the internal energies of the body and the plane upon the displacement of the body by a distance h = 3 m along the vertical? The coefficient of sliding friction is / =
0.2.
12. A solid body floats in a liquid at temperature t = 50°C being completely submerged in it. What fraction 8 of the volume of the body is submerged in the liquid after its cooling to t0 = 0°C, if the coefficient of cubic expansion for the solid is pv = 0.3 x IO5 K _1 and of liquid P; = 8 x 10"5 K"1 ? 13. Two molecules of an ideal monatomic gas expand isobarically from an initial volume VX = 0.03 m 3 to a final volume V2 = 0.07 m 3 . The pressure throughout is P = 1.52 x io 5 N/m 2 . Calculate the total amount of heat Q absorbed in the process. 14. A point light source is at a height h = 50 cm above a table. An experimenter wishes to obtain a sharp image of the source at the table, using a converging lens of focal l e n g t h / = 8 cm. At what height should she place the lens? 15. The distance of best vision for an eye is L = 1 m. Find the optical power of the spectacles compensating the defect of vision for this eye. 16. A ring is made of a wire having a resistance R 0 = 10Q. Find the points at which currentcarrying conductors should be connected so that the resistance R between these points is equal to 1Q. 17. Two masses m = 1 kg with equal charges O are
Contributed by : Paradise Institute, H.O. : Arya Kumar Road, Rajendra Nagar, Patna  16
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  MARCH '07
73
suspended by light strings of length /0 = 1 m from a point. The strings hang at 30° to the vertical what is the value of Ql 18. Parallel loops of radii r 0 , 2r0 are at distance d = 4r 0 apart and carry currents I in opposite senses. Find the magnetic field Bn at the point P halfway between the loops. 19. A sample of sodium containing a certain concentration of the Na 2 4 isotope is prepared. After 60 hours this concentration has fallen to 7% of its original value. Calculate the halflife of u N a 2 4 . 20. Determine the velocity of an electron in the first orbit of hydrogen atom. SOLUTIONS
J
In A04B,cosp = — = OA R 2u sin(oc~P)cosa R. cosp gcos 2 p On putting numerical values, we get 2(21 2 sin30°cos60°) ^ = 9.8cos 30°
2(21
R= 3.
{ 2 A 12 ; „ ^T^r —^ = 30 m 9.8
v, = 10 m/s
From 3rd equation of motion,
v 2 = u2 + 2 aS => v2 = v02 + 2 g H , v = 4v[+2gH On putting numerical values, we get v = JlO2 +2(9.8)(50) = 32.86 m/s.
H = 50 m
C t2= 1.5
B
t,= Is A
v / = 12 m
/= 12 m u+v
4.
From Newton's law of ... (i)
For uniform acceleration, S = For first carriage 12 = 1 For second carriage 12 = v'+v
GMm gravitation, F = (i) ...(ii) mv.2
1=>M + V' = 24 1.5=> v + v' = 16
From dynamics of circular motion, F ... (ii)
From equations (i) and (ii), we get GMm
2 =
For first and second carriage both
mv2
V
_ fGM _ I GM
24 =
• j(2.5) => u + v = 19.2
...(iii) ...(iv)
r ~ r ' ~V r V R+h~ On putting numerical values, we get 9.8(6.4xl0 6 ) 2 „„„, , v =4 = 7.08 km/s V (6400 + l 600)103 5. From workenergy theorem. W =  M ( V , 2  V 2 ) = .:10Ool 2 2 ^ Average rate of heat loss
 A W T 9 E ~ 1 A5
gRz R+h
Substracting equation (ii) from (i) we get uv = 8 Adding equations (iii) and (iv), we get 19.2 + 8  = 13.6 m/s u=
From equation (iii), we get v — 19.2  13.6 = 5.6 m/s. vu 5.613.6 2 a= = =  3 . 2 m/s t 2.5 2. By taking ycomponents of 2nd equation of motion, we get Sv = uvt + —avt^ „ 3 0 = 7/sin(ap)r(gcos?)/2, 2 2u sin(a(3)cosa : O yy — g cos p
h = 21 m/s
U _ 3 85xl05 18 j
\\
/
m
I =  6.
At
=
in
= 3.35x10 J/s — jo.5 kW
\ f > K B = 3n°
j / ^ R
From conservation of
mechanical enerev
1 2 — 3@?V/\ — tn&h ~ yyi<? (• ~~ : 2
2
=
"S"l(a~P). gcosp
• cosO = 1 => 0 = cos
Horizontal displacement is given by SH= uHt = (wcosa)f
2 gl
2g/
60
64 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
Very Similar
• • n M M M a M H M a m M H H H M M M * I IIW IB I WWIii'l IIHH WIl WI WM I IIll I
Practice Paper m AIEEE 2007
Exam on 29th April 2007
Refractive index (i is given as B_ ^=^+ 2 X where A and B are constants and X is wavelength, then dimensions of B are same as that of (a) wavelength (b) volume (c) pressure (d) area. 2. If  A x B  = V3 (A • B), then the value of  A + B  is i (a) (A2 + B1 +ABy (b)
1.
moving along a horizontal straight track. The stone will hit the ground following a (a) straight line path (b) circular path (c) parabolic path (d) hyperbolic path 7. A car is moving on a circular level road of curvature 300 m. If the coefficient of friction is 0.3 and acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s 2 , the maximum speed of the car is (a) 30 km/hr (b) 81 km/hr (c) 108 km/hr (d) 162 km/hr 8. Three equal weights A, B, C of / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / mass 2 kg each are hanging on a string passing over a fixed frictionless pulley as shown in the figure. The tension in the string connecting weights B and Cis (a) zero (b) 13 N (c) 3.3 N (d) 19.6 N 9. If \x.k is the coefficient of kinetic friction, the coefficient of rolling friction and p.v the coefficient of static friction then generally (a) Hv > M* > Mr . (c) H, < > Mr (b) Rv < it. < M, (d) p., > > \xk
(c) A + B (d) (A2 +B2 + V3AB)' 3. A particle starts from rest. Its acceleration (a) versus time (r) is as shown in the figure. The maximum speed of the particle will be ioni/s2 (a) 110 m/s (b) 55 m/s (c) 550 m/s (d) 660 m/s
11 *s)
4. A ball is released from the top of tower of height h metre. It takes T second to reach the ground. What is the position of the ball in 7/3 second? h (a) g metre from the ground (b) {lh/9) metre from the ground (c) (8/7/9) metre from the ground (d) ( \ l h l 18) metre from the ground. 5. The relation between time t and distance x is t = ax2 + Px where cc and p are constants. The retardation is (a) lav3 (b) 2Pv3 3 (c) 2aPv (d) 2 P V 6. A stone is just released from the window of atrain
10. A mass m moving horizontally with velocity v0 strikes a pendulum of mass m. If the two masses stick together after the collision, then the maximum height reached by the pendulum is (a) JS. 8g (c) jlv(g (b) (d) ^
J^g
11. A ball is dropped from a height 10 m. Bali is embedded in sand 1 m and stops (a) only momentum remains conserved
20 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '07
20
(b) only kinetic energy remains conserved (c) both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved (d) neither kinetic energy nor momentum is conserved 12. In a carbon mon xide molecule, the carbon and the oxygen atoms are separated by a distance 1.12 x 1 0  l o m . The distance of the centre of mass from the carbon atom is (b) 0.51 x 10'° m (a) 0.48 x IO' 10 m (d) 0.64 x io 1 0 m (c) 0.56 x IO"10 m 13. Two particles of masses /n, and m2 are connected by a rigid massless rod of length r to constitute a dumbbell which is free to move in the plane. The moment of inertia of the dumbbell about an axis perpendicular to the plane passing through the centre of mass is
work required to stretch it further by another 5 cm is (a) 6.25 Nm (b) 12.50 Nm (c) 18.75 Nm (d) 25.00 Nm 18. (a) (b) (c) (d) Viscosity of liquids increases with increase in temperature is independent of temperature decreases with decrease in temperature decreases with increase in temperature
(a) mx + m2
(c)
mxm2r
(b) (m, + m2)r2 (d) (/w,  m2)r2
19. A Utube is partially filled with water. Oil which does not mix with water is next poured into one side, until water rises by 25 cm on the other side. If the density of oil is 0.8 g/cm 3 , the oil level will stand higher than the water level by (a) 6.25 cm (b) 12.50 cm (c) 31.75 cm (d) 62.50 cm 20. Two thermally insulated vessels 1 and 2 are filled with air at temperatures (T,, T2), volume (VU V2) and pressure (Pu P2) respectively. If the valve joining the two vessels is opened, the temperature inside the vessel at equilibrium will be (a) r, + T2 (b) (r, + T2)/2 (c) PVT1
+
14. A satellite of mass m revolves around the earth of radius R at a height x from its surface. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth, the orbital speed of the satellite is
(a) gx (c) R + x
(b) (d)
gR Rx
P2VX
(d)
rj^pxv,+p2v2)
f gR
2
[R+x
15. A solid sphere of uniform density and radius R applies a gravitational force of attraction equal to F, on a particle placed at P, distance 2R from the centre O of the sphere. A spherical cavity of radius RI2 is now made in the sphere as shown in figure. The sphere with cavity now applies a gravitational force F2 on same particle placed at P. The ratio F2IF, will be (a) 1/2 (b) 7/9 (c) 3 (d) 7 16. For a given material, the Young's modulus is 2.4 times that of modulus of rigidity. Its Poisson's ratio is (a) 2.4 (b) 1.2 (c) 0.4 (d) 0.2 17. A spring of spring constant 5 x l o3 N/m is stretched initially by 5 cm from the unstretched position. The
20 PHYSICS FOR Y O U  APRIL '07
21. Two marks on a glass rod 10 cm apart are found to increase their distance by 0.08 mm when the rod is heated from 0°C to 100°C. A flask made of the same glass as that of rod measures a volume of 1000 cc at 0°C. The volume it measures at 100°C in cc is (a) 1002.4 (b) 1004.2 (c) 1006.4 (d) 1008.2 22. A kettle with 2 litre water at 27°C is heated by operating coil heater of power 1 kW. The heat is lost to the atmosphere at constant rate lfeO J/sec, when its lid is open. In how much time will water heated to 77°C with the lid open? (specific heat of water = 4.2 kJ/kg) (a) 8 min 20 sec (b) 6 min 2 sec (c) 14 min (d) 7 min 23. The temperature of the two outer surfaces of a composite slab consisting of two materials having coefficients of thermal conductivity K and 2K and thickness x and 4x respectively are T2 and Ti(T2> 7",). The rate of heat transfer through the slab, in a steady A(T2Tx)Ky wjth/ec)ual tQ state
61
(a) 1 (b) 1/2 (c) 2/3 (d) 1/3 24. Two cylinders fitted with pistons contain equal amount of an ideal diatomic gas at 300 K. The piston of A is free to move, while that of B is held fixed. The same amount of heat is given to the gas in each cylinder. If the rise in temperature of the gas in A is 30 K, then the rise in temperature of gas in B is (a) 30 K (b) 18 K (c) 50 K (d) 42 K 25. The displacement of a particle varies according to the relation x = 4(cosro + sinm). The amplitude of the particle is where x in m and t is second (a) 8 m (b) 2 m (c) 4 m (d) 4^2 m 26. A mass Mis suspended from a spring of negligible mass. The spring is pulled a little and then released, so that the mass executes simple harmonic motion of time period T. If the mass is increased by m, the time period 5T becomes — . The ratio of m/M is (a)
, , 16
overtone and is in resonance with another pipe open at both ends and vibrating in third harmonic. The ratio of length of two pipes is (a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 8 : 3 (d) 3 : 8 30. One train is approaching an observer at rest and another train is receding from him with the same velocity 4 m/s. Both trains blow whistles of same frequency of 243 Hz. The beat frequency in Hz as heard by the observer is (speed of sound in air = 320 m/s) (a) 10 (b) 6 (c) 4 (d) 1 31. Two plane mirror A and B are aligned parallel to each other, as shown in the figure. A light ray is incident at an angle of 30° at a point just inside one end of A. The plane of incidence coincides with the plane of figure. The maximum number of times the ray undergoes reflections (including the first one) before it emerges out is K — — 2V3 m M
^ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
(b) 30 (c) 32 (d) 34
B
/7777777777777777777777/
(b) <d.
3
f
27. Oxygen is 16 times heavier than hydrogen. The equal volumes of hydrogen and oxygen are mixed. The ratio of speed of sound in the mixture to that in hydrogen is (a) V8 F2 (b) (d)
32. An endoscope is employed by a physician to view the internal parts of body organ. It is based on the principle of (a) refraction (b) reflection (c) total internal reflection (d) dispersion 33. A point object is placed at a distance of 10 cm and its real image is formed at a distance of 20 cm from a concave mirror. If the object is moved by 0.1 cm towards the mirror, the image will shift by about (a) 0.4 cm away from the mirror (b) 0.4 cm towards the mirror (c) 0.8 cm away from the mirror (d) 0.8 cm towards the mirror 34. A telescope, whose objective lens has an aperture of 1 mm for the wavelength of light 500 A, then limiting resolving power of the telescope is (a) 2.1 x 10"5 rad (b) 4.1 x 10"5 rad (c) 5.1 x 105 rad (d) 6.1 x 10"5 rad 35. If light is polarised by reflection, then the angle between reflected and refracted light is
20 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  A P R I L '07
28. Equation of a progressive wave is given by, j, = 4 . i n [ * ( l  £ )
+
f
where x, y are in metre and / is in second. Then which o f t h e following is correct? (a) v = 5 m/s (b) X = 18 m (c) a = 0.04 m (d) / = 50 Hz 29. An organ pipe open at one end is vibrating in first 30
(a) n (c) 271
71
resistor is :
20£1
4S2
(b) «>
71
* T
1.4 a m p
Wb—
4
36. In Young's double slit experiment, distance between two sources is 0.1 mm. The distance of screen from the sources is 20 cm. Wavelength of light used is 5460A. Then angular position of first dark fringe is (a) 0.08° (b) 0.16° (c) 0.20° (d) 0.32° 37. Two thin wire rings each having radius R are placed at a distance d apart with their axes coinciding. The charges on the two rings are +Q and Q. The potential difference between the centres of the two rings is (a) zero (c) (b) 4JTE„ (d) R 1 J t f + d2 1
15a
50fl
10Q VWM— (b) 0.4 amp (d) 0.7 amp
(a) 1.4 amp (c) 1.0 amp
42. The electrochemical equivalent of metal is 3.3 x IO7 kg per coulomb. The mass of the metal liberated at the cathode when a 3 A current is passed for 2 second will be (a) 19.8 x IO"7 kg (b) 9.9 x 10~7 kg 7 (c) 6.6 x 10" kg (d) 1.1 x io 7 kg 43. A current of 5 ampere is passed through a straight wire of length 6 cm, then the magnetic induction at a point 5 cm from the either end of the wire is (a) 0.25 gauss (b) 0.125 gauss (c) 0.15 gauss (d) 0.30 gauss 44. The magnetic field due to a current carrying circular loop of radius 3 m at a point on the axis at a distance of 4 m from the centre is 54 pT. What will be its value at the centre of the loop? (a) 250 pT (b) 150 pT (c) 125 pT (d) 75 pT 45. A galvanometer has a resistance of 3663 ohm. A shunt S is connected across it such that (1/34) of the total current passes through the galvanometer. Then the value of the shunt is (a) 3663 ohm (b) 111 ohm (c) 107.7 ohm (d) 3555.3 ohm 46. The armature of a DC motor has 20 Q resistance. It draws a current of 1.5 amp when run by 220 volt DC supply. The value of back emf induced in it will be (a) 150 V (b) 170 V (c) 180 V (d) 190 V 47. In a transformer the output current and voltage are respectively 4 A and 20 V. If the ratio of number of turns in the primary to secondary is 2 : 1, what is the input current and voltage? (a) 2 A and 40 V (b) 1 A and 20 V (c) 4 A and 10 V (d) 8 A and 40 V
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL '32
4jiEud
2KE„
JF77
38. The electric field at a distance 2 cm from the centre of a hollow spherical conducting shell of radius 4 cm having a charge of 2 * 10~3 C on its surface is (a) 1,1 x i o 1 0 V/m (b) 4.5 x 10 10 V/m 10 (c) 4.5 x io V/m (d) zero 39. Four identical capacitors are connected in series with a 10 V battery as shown in the figure. The point N is earthed. The potentials of points A and B are
10 V
b (a) 10 V, 0 V (c) 5 V,  5 V
64
N
(b) 7.5 V, 2.5 V (d) 7.5 V, 2.5 V
40. Potentiometer wire of length 1 m is connected in series with 490 £2 resistance and 2V battery. If 0.2 mV/cm is the potential gradient, then resistance of the potentiometer wire is (a) 4.9 £2 (b) 7.9 £2 (c) 5.9 Q (d) 6.9 Q 41. In the following figure the current through 4 ohm
48. In Millikan's oil drop experiment an oil drop of radius r and charge q is held in equilibrium between the plates of a charged parallel plate capacitor when the potential difference is V. To keep a drop of radius 2r and with a charge 2q in equilibrium between the plates the potential difference V required is (a) V (b) 2V (c) 4V (d) SV 49. Two identical photocathodes receive light of frequencies U, and u2 If the velocities of the photoelectrons (of mass m) coming out are v, and v2 respectively, then (a) v ,  v 2 =
(b) V ,
Z
circuit as shown in the figure? 2kQ
(a) 42 V (c) 7 V
(b) 14 V (d) 6 V
Oh ^(u,u2)
2 2
 V
= ^ ( U ,  U
2
)
55. Figure (a) shows a logic gate circuit with two inputs A and B and the output C. The voltage wave forms of A, B and C are shown in figure (b). The logic circuit is (a) OR gate (b) AND gate (c) NAND gate (d) NOR gate
(c) v,+v 2 = (d) 2h vf+v22=^(u,u2)
50. According to Einstein's photoelectric equation, the plot of the kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons from a metal versus frequency of the incident radiation gives a straight line whose slope (a) depends on the nature of metal used (b) depends on the intensity of radiation (c) depends on both intensity of radiation and the nature of metal used (d) is the same for all metals and independent of the intensity of radiation. 51. The energy of a hydrogen like atom (or ion) in its ground state is 122.4 eV. It may be (a) hydrogen atom (b) He+ 2+ (c) Li (d) Be 3+ 52. Starting with a sample of pure 6SCu, (7/8) of it decays into Zn in 15 minutes. The corresponding halflife is (a) 5 minutes (c) 10 minutes (b) 7— minutes 2 (d) 14 minutes
235
Figure (a)
OtFigure (b) SOLUTION y I'ght ' n vacuum j l e n c e j is ^ velocity of light in medium ' e n c e l x i dimensionless. Thus each term on the RHS of given equation should be dimensionless. 1 fdV As
s velocit

BIX2 is dimensionless. i.e. B should have d i m e n s i o n s of A.2, i.e., m2, i.e., area.
53. On bombardment of U by slow neutrons, 200 MeV energy is released. If the power output of atomic reactor is 1.6 MeV, then the rate of fission will be (a) 5 x 10 l s per second (b) 10 * 1016 per second (c) 15 x io16 per second (d) 20 x io16 per second 54. What is the value of output voltage V0 in the
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I APRIL 07
2.
(a) : Given \ Ax B \ = s/3 (a • §)
Hence, ^BsinO = y/3AB cos0 or tan 0 = fi or 0 = 60° \A + B\ = (A2+B2 + 2AB cos 60°)"2 =(A2 + B2 + AB)V2 33
= ^A2 + B2 + 2AB x ij
3. (b) : The area under the accelerationtime graph gives change in velocity. Since particle starts with u = 0, therefore change in velocity = V; — V — 1 0 = area under a  t graph = 2 " x i 0 x i i = 5 5 m/s. 4. (c) : h = i gT
2
than sliding friction, that is why it is easy to move a heavy load from one place to another by rolling it over the surface instead of sliding it over the same surface. Moreover, it is quite obvious that static friction is always greater than kinetic friction. 10. (a) : Applying the law of conservation of momentum, we get mv„ + m x 0 = 2 m x v 2!o. Kinetic energy = 2 (2 m)v = ^ xx2/.m x p L m x 1 2 (zm)vLet the system reach a height h. Potential energy of the system = 2mgh Hence, 4
=
T 1 (T h In y sec, the distance travelled = — g ( y j = g .'. Position of the ball from the ground
r
h h —h— =— m 9 9 5. (a) : t = cue2 + (k = x(ax + P) Differentiate w.r.t to time on both sides, we get 1 = 2a ^ • x + p r dt dt dx :. v •• dt p + 2ax' Negative sign show # dv 2av • =  2av 3 dt (p + 2ax) 2 retardation.
2
= —2^
2mgh or h = 6
~ 8g
11. (a): It is an example of inelastic collision. In inelastic collision momentum is conserved but kinetic energy is not conserved. 12. (d): Rcu = 12x0 + 16x1.12x10"
12 + 16
6. (c) : The horizontal velocity of the stone will be the same as that of the train. In this way, the horizontal motion will be uniform motion. The vertical motion will be controlled by the force of gravity, i.e. vertical motion is accelerated motion. Thus the resultant motion will be along a parabolic trajectory. 7. (c) : vmax = ^V^g = Vo.3x300x10 = 30 m/s 18 = 3 0 x — km/hr = 108 km/hr 8. (b) : Free body diagram of A a\ = 2a ....(i)
16 = x 1.12 x 10 m = 0.64 x 10" Zo 13. (a): Suppose C be the centre of mass of the bell. Let the particles of masses A , and m2 be H at distances r, and r2 from C. Hence, moment of of given system about an axis passing through of mass
m dumbplaced inertia centre
X \J\
Jig
For A : T2g
Free body diagram of B For B : Tt + 2g  T = 2a Free body diagram of C . [Q 2g ....(iv) ....(v)
2 I = + m2r2 ...(i) According to definition of centre of mass, /M,r, = m2r2 ...(ii) Also, rx + r2 = r ...(iii) Solving for r, and r2 from (ii) and (iii), we get
m,r m, + m. and
...(iv)
mxr ...(v) m. + nu Putting (iv) and (v) in equation (i), we get / =
2
For C : 2g  T, = 2a ....(iii) Adding equation (i) and (ii), we get f , = 4a From equation (iii) and (iv), we get 2g  4a = 2a or a = gl3 From equations (iv) and (v), we get Tx = 4 x ^  = 13N 9. 34
/H, + m2
= (.ir
where (t = system.
mxm2 is called as reduced mass of the mx r m2
14. (d): For the satellite, the gravitational force provides the necessary centripetal force, i.e., GMm (R + x)2 mvn GM,. and R1 'g (R + x) . •'• von ~ " gR ! VJT7
(a) : p,t > \x.k > \i r . Rolling friction is always less
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I APRIL '07
15. (b) : Gravitational force due to solid sphere, lI KV, 21. = GMm A — . „ 2 > where M and m are mass of the solid 4R r , = o°c, T2 = i o o ° c sphere and particle respectively and R is the radius Y ~ 100 V, ' inn J of the sphere. The gravitational force on particle due 100/, to sphere with cavity = force due to solid sphere  /, = 10 cm; l 2  /, = 0.08 mm = 0.008 cm force due to sphere creating cavity, assumed to be 0.008 a = = 8 x l O  6 / ° C ; Y = 3a = 24xl0"/ o C present above at that position. 10 x 100 GMm G(M/S)m 7 GMm i.e., F1 = ... 24x 10"6  F 2  1 0 0 ° 2 2 AR (3i?/2) 36 R2 1000x100 7 GMm / 36 R2 7 y2  1000 = 24 X 10"6 X 105 = 2.4 y2 = 1002.4 cc So — = 9' F, GMm! AR 22. (a): By the law of conservation of energy, energy given by heater must be equal to the sum of energy 16. (d) : Y=2r\ (1 + a) where Y= Young's modulus, r] = modulus of rigidity, gained by water and energy lost from the lid. Pt = msAQ + energy lost o = Poisson's ratio 1000/ = 2 x 4.2 x io 3 x 50 + 160/ Given : Y = 2.4r 840/ = 8.4 x 103 x 50 = 500 sec = 8 min 20 sec 2.4ti = 2rj(l + o) or 1 + a = 1.2 or a = 0.2 17. (c) : k = 5 x 103 N/m, yt = 5 x IO"2 m y2 = y,+ 5 = 10 cm = 10 x IO"2 m W, = ^ k y f =  x ( 5 x l 0 3 ) x ( 5 x l 0 " 2 ) 2 = 6.25 Nm W2=\ky\, ^ = (y1/yiy= 4 A W = W 2  W X = 18.75 Nm 23. (d) : For slab in series, we have x I 4x — 3x = hf. + K — *„„ = /?, + R 2 = — + — = .— eq KA 2KA KA Now, in a steady state rate of heat transfer through the slab is given by dQ = = (T2  T{) •KA 0) dt ft. 3x dQ _^A{T2T,)K^ V2 Given ^ = / dt \ x ' Comparing (i) and (ii), we get f= 1/3. ...(ii)
W2 = 4Wx = 25.0 Nm 18. (d)
C t 19. (b) : On — pouring oil on left 25 cm y Oil side, water rises 1 by 25 cm from its 25 cm previous level in E= >t the right limb of ^ A 5. 33 Utube, creating a difference of levels of water by 50 cm. Let h cm be the height of oil above level A in the left limb of Utube. Equating pressures at A and B, we get PA = PB h x Poii * g = 50 x Pwaler x g
—
24. (d): In cylinder^, heat is supplied at constant pressure while in cylinder B heat is supplied at constant volume.
(A Q)A = NCP(AT)A and ( A Q)B = NC^AT),
Given : (AQ)A = (AQ)„
: . ( A T ) „ = ^ ( A T )
A
= 1.4 x 3 0 = 4 2 K
[ v For diatomic gas —£ = 1.4] 25. (d) : x = 4(cos nt + sin nt) = 4V2 X= cos 7it + —\= sin 71/ V2 V2 = Ajl sin ^ cos A
JC/
C„
50xp„ater _ 50x1
Poii
0.8
= 62.5 cm
+ cos ^ sin nt A J
..Difference of levels of oil (C) and water (D) in the two limbs = 62.5  50 = 12.5 cm. 20. (c) : The number of moles of system remains same pyL+pii RTt RT2 m + Vi) RT
or
= 4^2 sin(n/ + ^ ) Standard equation of displacement is x = a sin (co/ + ((>) Comparing the given equation with standard equation a = A42 m
35
P(K+V2)TJ2 ( W 2 + W O
64 PHYSICS FOR YOU  APRIL '
26. (c) : mx = M, TX = T m2 = M + m, T2 = ^ f Tx _ 2UyJmx / k _ T2 ~ 2n^jm2/k M +m M
r
Given : vc = u 0 or 3v 4L M M +m . m_ = 16 M
=
3v 2L
°r
4
fa Vw2
30. (b) : When the train is approaching, Oi = ——— x u = x 243 = ^ v  v, 320  4 79 Ui = f  x 2 4 3 When the train is receding u2 = ——— x u = x 243 = §7 x 243 2 v + v, 324 81 Beat frequency is J_ u,  o2 = 80 x 243 79 81 6 Hz
x
243
T 2 1 _/5773)2 _ 2 5 T, \ T )
27. (c): Given : Molecular mass of oxygen (M 0 ) = 16MH. (where AfH is the molecular mass of hydrogen) and volume of oxygen V0 = VH (where KH is the volume of hydrogen). Molecular mass of mixture is Mnix = M a + M h = \ 6 M h + M h = 17 M h and volume of the mixture is (Vmix) =V0+ Kh = Kh + KH = 2K„. ^ • „ M Density of a gas, P   y Kh _ 17M h _ 17 2M u Velocity of sound in a gas is given by Therefore,
PH
31. (b) : As is clear from the figure W / = 2V3 m W
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
M„
mH
X
/7777777777777777777777>
A
d = 0.2 tan 30° =
[y~P ,J — Therefore,
. l i.e. v cc ^ ; vu
0.2. • / _ 2V3 = 30 73 ' d 0.2/y/3
.'. Max number of reflections = 30. 32. (c)
J t 28. ( b ) : Given : y = 4sin n \59)+6.
,
33. (a) : From mirror equation, n .... (i) 20 10 " 20 1 3 1 ''• 7 =  2 0 + 9 ^ o r v ' = _ 2 0  4 c m i.e. shift is 0.4 cm away from the mirror.
/ V
U
4r =  + — = •
J
L
Standard equation : J' = asin 2n\ ut  j) + <> ...(ii) Comparing (i) and (ii), we get
2TU) = 
u
or
=
2n _n . — g or A = 18 m Velocity v = uA.=— x l 8 = 1.8m/s 10 Amplitude a = 4 m. 29. (a) : In the first overtone of organ pipe open at one end 3v XV = ...(i) 4/, Third harmonic or second overtone of organ pipe open at both end. 3v ^ From equations (i) and (ii), we get
36
34. (d) : Given : Aperture of objective lens (a) = 1 mm = 1 x 10" ! m and wavelength of light (X) = 500A = 500 x IO"10 m. Limiting resolving power of telescope, d0 = 1.22A, 1.22 x 500 x 10" 1 xlO= 6.1 x 10"5 rad
35. (b) 36. (b) : d= 0.1 mm = IO"4 m, D = 20 cm = j m A = 5460 A = 5.46 x 10~7 m Angular position of first dark fringe is 0 2d 5.46 xlO" 7 2 xlO" 4 x
180° 71
2.73 x 10~3 radian = 0.156°
PHYSICS FOR Y O U APRIL '07
(ii)
= 2.73 x 10
37. (d) : Potential of ring A VA~ R Q
K K
20
50
Q
T = m =>5 = 5 i.e. the bridge is balanced; hence current through 15 £2 resistor is zero. Hence, 15 Q resistor is ineffective. .. RABC = 20 + 4 = 24 Q RAOC = 50 + 10 = 60 Q
A C
_ R a , A x ' , 24x60 , 1 2 0 Q ~ R J . J?ADC 24 + 60 ABC
11 T n
Potential of ring B KQ V =^ + R \l R2 + d2 v  v
A H
So, VA  Vc = 1.4 x — ^ = 24 volt So current through ABC, /, = V  V 94 —^ =
ABC
2 4
120
amp
=2.
2 m ,
Current through ADC, I2 = * A~V(' \R
2
=~
6 0
= 0.4 amp
+ d
2
ADC
38. (d) : Electric field inside the hollow conducting sphere is zero. 39. (b) : If q is the charge on each capacitor, then
So current through 4 Q resistor, = 1 ampere No current will flow through 15 Q resistor. 42. (a): According to Faraday's first law of electrolysis, m = ZIt OT = 3.3 x IO7 x 3 x 2 = 19.8 x 10~7 kg 43. (c) : Let AB represents the current carrying conductor and P be the point where magnetic induction B is required. Now B = Here r = OP Now AO = OB = 1 cm = 3 cm and PB = PA = 5 cm •'• OP = >/(5)2  (3)2 = 4 cm /• = 4 cm = 4 x l o2 metre
6 cm
£+I
c
+
I
c
+
I
c
=
, 0 o r i = 2.5V
c
c c c or VA  0 = 2.5 + 2.5 + 2.5 = 7.5 V Also,  £ = V S Vn = 0  V B
[sin<j>, + sinc^]
or 2.5 = 0  VB or VB =  2.5 V 40. (a) : Potential across potentiometer wire _ (0.2 x 10~3) V x 1 m • = 0.02 V 10~2 m R x 2 Also 0.02 = r+R where R is resistance of potentiometer wire and r is resistance connected in series. 0.02(490 + R) = 2R Solving R = 4.9 Q 41. (c) :
P = 20fl
A
sin <)), = — and sin q>2 = — 3 — +3 — B = 10"7 x ( — 5. \ 4 x 10 / 5 = £ x l 0 " 5 = 0.15 x 10"4 tesla = 0.15 gauss. p0,7?2 (R2+x2f2 or 54 _ = M3)2
2 2[3 + 4 12 ]
H
*
r
2 = 4Q r—wm—
B
44. (a) : B = c or IV =
2
9
54x2x5x25
1.4 amp
15Q —mwrR = 5oa
mm—
Now, at the centre of the coil, x = 0 and p „ / = IV _ p „ ; 2R 2 x 3 6 54x2x5x25 9x6 S or± = 34 S + G
37
D
s= ion
45
^
XI Here
—=— Q s
'
P
R
sTG
64 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  APRIL
s = (G!33) = (3663/33) = 111 Q E—e 46. (d) : I = —^— where e is the induced back emf or 1,5 = « or 1.5 = N
IV
s
Here £,z
122.4 eV
122.4 = 13.6x2? o r Z = 3
20 ?
1
ore = 190 V
52. (a) : Sample remain undecayed is N =  N0 8 /V 11 \n — =  1 when n is the number of half lives N0 \21 or n t
2
47. (a) : Given • V N =^
o r
V v;
=
1 i •••
= 2 V, = 2 x 20 = 40 V
15 or T l = — = 5 min
2
Since the input power = output power (for ideal transformer) ••• W = IX ... /
P
53. (a); The rate of fission
= ^ = 4 x ^ 0 = 2amp
1.6 MeV 200x1.6xlO" 1 9 MeV 16 = 5 x .10 per second.
48. (c) : In Millikan's oil drop experiment, For drop to be remain stationary qE = Mg «V 4 Here E = ^ and M =  icr'p 3
54. (d) : In the circuit zener diode is used as voltage regulating device. The output voltage V0 = 6 V, which is the potential across the zener diode because in parallel, the potetial remains the same. 55. (b) : The Boolean expression which satisfies the output of this logic gate is C  A • B, which is for AND gate. •
For second oil drop, V': ^ = 4 o r V = 4V
(2r)3 2<?
.3
Jtpd
WlfcG
49. (b): According to Einstein's photoelectric equation
to), = to)0 + ~ mv,2 ..,(})
B a s e d on L a t e s t P a t t e r n
• 10 Very Similar Practice Test Papers • 20022006 Expert's Solved Papers
Au, = to)0 +  mvj From (i) and (ii), we get •••ft(t>, u2) = ^ m(vf  Vj)
...(ii)
50. (d): According to Einstein's photoelectric equation (KE) raa , = hv  W The slope of the line in the graph is h, the Planck's constant. M• . , 51. (c) : Ez„ = 13.6 x Z T r 5 eV Ef =  1 3 . 6 x Z eV
• 2000+ MCQ's with detailed Solutions Frequently Asked Questions  A w S a a  S at «v;
For ground state, n
64
bookshops all over the country
P H Y S I C S FOR YOU  APRIL '38
CBSEPMT 2008
PHYSICS 1. If A = 2i + 4j5k vector A are (a) (b) 2 4
and
the direction cosines of the , 5 745
relation a = ba
/ cf e5. If the maximum errors in
the measurement of b, c, d and e are bflc, and e°/c, then the maximum error in the value of a determined by the experiment is (a) (bx + Cj + dl + (b) ( 6 , + c ,  < / ,  « , ) %
(c) (ab ] + Pcj  y dl  5 c,)%
V45'V45 1
N/45'V45 745 4 ,0 and (c) 745 745 3 and (d)
745'745 " 745
and
(d) (ab { + Pcj + y d] + 8 e,)% 7. A person travels along a straight road for the first half time with a velocity vt and the next half time is + 2k) with a velocity v . The mean velocity v of the man is 2 _ J_ + J_ v + v (b) (a) v V[ V2 v, •v = i1 2 2 (c) v= j v ^ (d)
The unit vector parallel to the resultant of the vectors A  4i + 3j + 6k and B = i +3jSk (a) + 6j  2k) (b) ^(3i+6j
3.
(d) ±(3i6j+Zk) (c) —nj + 6]_2k) 49 The vectors from origin to the points A and B are A = 3i  6j + 2k and B = 2i + j 2k respectively. The area of the triangle OAB be (a) — 7 l 7 sq. unit (c) — 7 l 7 sq. unit (b)  7 l 7 sq.unit
Two cars A and B are travelling in the same direction with velocities vt and v2 (Vj > v2). When the car A is at a distance d ahead of the car B, the driver of the car A applied the brake producing a uniform retardation a. There will be no collision when (a) (c) 9.
2 d < (V1V2) 2a
(d) ^ 7 1 7 sq.unit
(b) (d) d>
2a 2a
4.
If C and R represent capacitance and resistance respectively, then the dimensions of RC are (a) [M°L°T2] (b) [M°L°T] (c) [ML 1 ] (d) none of these The equation of state of some gases can be expressed as a \ P +  UVb) — = RT . Here P is the pressure, V
d>
(v. V2) 2 2a
5.
A frictionless wire AB is fixed on a sphere of radius R. A very small spherical ball slips on this wire. The time taken by this ball to slip from A to B is A
is the volume, 7'is the absolute temperature and a,b,R are constants. The dimensions of 'a' are (a) [ML5T2] (b) [ML'T 2 ] 3 (c) [M°L T°] (d) [M°L6T°] A physical parameter a can be determined by measuring the parameters b, c, d and e using the Momentum, 1495, Near Stadium, Wright Town, Jabalpur (M.P.)
Phone : (0761) 4005358, 4035241 Website : www.momentumacademy.com, email : momentumacademy@gmail.com
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I DECEMBER '07
(a)
2J g R gcosQ \8 fi
(b) (d)
2^R gR
COS0
g
(c) 2
10
15. A vehicle of mass m is moving on a rough horizontal road with momentum p. If the coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road be p, then the stopping distance is (a) (c) P ,„„„ 2)img P 2 jim2g P2 (b) 2 \xmg
2
YJGC O S 0
A body is revolving with a constant speed along a circle. If its direction of motion is reversed but the speed remains the same, then which of the following statement is true? (a) The magnitude of centripetal force is variable (b) The centripetal force will have its direction reversed (c) The centripetal force will not suffer any change in direction (d) The centripetal force would be doubled
^
2 \lm2g
16. A given object takes n times as much time to slide down a 45° rough inclined as it takes to slide down a perfectly smooth 45° incline. The coefficient of kinetic friction between the object and the incline is given by (a) (b) 1 1n2
11. The angular speed of seconds needle in a mechanical watch is n (b) 2n rad/s (a) 30 rad/s (c) 71 rad/s (d) —rad/s 12. Figure shows a body of mass m moving with a uniform speed v along a circle of radius r. The change in velocity in going from A to B is
1 n1 17. A particle of mass m moving with velocity v() strikes a simple pendulum of mass m and sticks to it. The maximum height attained by the pendulum will be (a) (c) I (b) yjv0g (d)
(c)
(d)
r
B
D (a) vV2 (c) v
J
(b) V / A / 2 (d) zero
4g
18. A car of mass 1250 kg is moving at 30 m/s. Its engine delivers 30 kW while resistive force due to surface is 750 N. What maximum acceleration can be given in the car? 1 m/s (b) (a)  m/s
2 (c) Irn/s
(d)
m/s 2
13, A body of mass 5 kg starts from the origin with an initial velocity ii = 30/ + 40;ms"'. If a constant force F = (/' + 5 j)N acts on the body, the time in which the^component of the velocity becomes zero is (a) 5 sec (b) 20 sec (c) 40 sec (d) 80 sec 14. A block of mass 5 kg is on a rough horizontal surface and is at rest. Now a force of 24 N is imparted to it with negligible impulse. If the coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.4 and g = 9.8 m/s2, then the acceleration of the block is (a) 0.26 m/s2 (b) 0.39 m/s2 2 (c) 0.69 m/s (d) 0.88 m/s2
19. A space craft of mass M is moving with velocity v and suddenly explodes into two pieces. A part of it of mass m comes at rest, then the velocity of other part will be Mv (b) M +m (M +m)v (d) (c) M m m 20. A bullet of mass m moving with velocity v strikes a block of mass M at rest and gets embedded into it. The kinetic energy of the composite block will be 1 2 M 1 2 m (a) 2 m v (b) mv X (m + M) 2 (m + M) (a) Mv M m mv
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I DECEMBER '07
(c) ( J
1 mv 2
2
x
(M + m) M
(d) Mv 2
x
m {m + M)
(a) ^
(b) V3
, , (c)
3 2
21. When a plane mirror is placed horizontally on a level ground at a distance of 60 m from the foot of a tower, the top of the tower and its image in the mirror subtend an angle of 90° at the eye. The height of the tower will be (a) 30 m (b) 60 m (c) 90 m (d) 120 m 22. A light beam is being reflected by using two mirrors, as in a periscope used in submarines. If one of the mirrors rotates by an angle 0 the reflected light will deviate from its original path by the angle (a) 20 (b) 0° (c) 0 (d) 49 23. The relation between the linear magnification m, the object distance u and the focal length/is X/ (a) (b) m = fu f f+u = f (d) m(c) m f f +u 24. Radius of curvature of concave mirror is 40 cm and the size of image is twice as that of object, then the object distance is (a) 60 cm (b) 20 cm (c) 40 cm (d) 30 cm 25. A point object is placed at a distance of 10 cm and its real image is formed at a distance of 20 cm from a concave mirror. If the object is moved by 0.1 cm towards the mirror, the image will shift by about (a) 0.4 cm away from the mirror (b) 0.4 cm towards the mirror (c) 0.8 cm away from the mirror (d) 0.8 cm towards the mirror 26. Monochromatic light is refracted from air into the glass of refractive index p. The ratio of the wavelength of incident and refracted waves is (a) 1 : p (b) 1 (c) p : l (d) 1: 1 27. If p 0 be the relative permeability and K0 the dielectric constant of a medium, its refractive index is given by (a) (c) 1 Vuo^o" (b) 1
29. The wavelength of sodium light in air is 5890 A. The velocity of light in air is 3 x 10s ms 1 . The wavelength of light in a glass of refractive index 1.6 would be close to (a) 5890 A (b) 3681 A (c) 9424 A (d) 15078 A 30. Total internal reflection of a ray of light is possible when the (ic = critical angle, i = angle of incidence) (a) ray goes from denser medium to rarer medium and i < ic (b) ray goes from denser medium to rarer medium and i > ic (c) ray goes from rarer medium to denser medium and i > ic (d) ray goes from rarer medium to denser medium and i < ic 31. A diver at a depth of 12 m in water (p. = 4/3) sees the sky in a cone of semivertical angle (a) sin1 (4/3) (b) tan1 (4/3) 1 (c) sin" (3/4) (d) 90° 32. The plane surface of a planoconvex lens of focal length/is silvered. It will behave as (a) plane mirror (b) convex mirror of focal length 2/ (c) concave mirror of focal length / / 2 (d) none of these 33. A double convex lens of glass of p = 1.5 has radius of curvature of each of its surface is 0.2 m. The power of the lens is (a) + 1 0 dioptre (b)  10 dioptre (c)  5 dioptre (d) + 5 dioptre 34. The critical angle between an equilateral prism and air is 42°. If the incident ray is perpendicular to the refracting surface, then (a) After deviation it will emerge from the second refracting surface (b) It is totally reflected on the second surface and emerges out perpendicularly from third surface in air (c) It is totally reflected from the second and third refracting surfaces and finally emerges out from the first surface (d) It is totally reflected from all the three sides of prism and never emerges 35. If the refractive indices of crown glass for red, yellow and violet colours are 1.5140, 1.5170 and 1.5318
Mo^o (d) V0K0
28. On a glass plate a light wave is incident an angle of 60°. If the reflected and the refracted waves are mutually perpendicular, then refractive index of material is
P H Y S I C S F O R YOU I DECEMBER '07 308
respectively and for flint glass these are 1.6434, 1.6499 and 1.6852 respectively, then the dispersive powers for crown and flint glass are respectively (a) 0.034 and 0.064 (b) 0.064 and 0.034 (c) 1.00 and 0.064 (d) 0.034 and 1.0 36. If the refractive indices of a prism for red, yellow and violet colours be 1.61,1.63 and 1.65 respectively, then the dispersive power of the prism will be 1.651.62 _ 1.621.61 (b) (a) 1.651 1.611 1.651.63 1.651.61 (d) (c) w 1.631 1.611 37 A prism of refractive index fl and angle A is placed in the minimum deviation position. If the angle of minimum deviation is A, then the value of A in terms of p is (a) sin
(c)
is the value of AB+ AC + AD+ AE+ AF Ej, »/>
(a) OA
(b)
2AO
(c)
4AO
(d) 6AO
43. The frequency of vibration of string is given by F~ . Here p is number of segments in the m 21 string and / is the length. The dimensional formula
v=P
for m will be (b) sin
(d)
(a) [M°LT'] (c) [ML'T°]
(b) [ML'T'I (d) [M°L°T°]
2cos'^j
cos
38. In a compound microscope, if the objective produces an image Io and the eye piece produces an image 7c, then (a) 7o is virtual but 7 is real v ' e (b) 7o is real but 7e is virtual (c) 7o and 7e are both real ' (d) 7 and 7 are both virtual
v J v v 7
44. Which of the following options is correct for the object having a straight line motion represented by the following graph?
0
e
39. The focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece of a compound microscope are 2.0 cm and 3.0 cm respectively. The distance between the objective and the eyepiece is 15.0 cm. The final image formed by the eyepiece is at infinity. The two lenses are thin. The distances in cm of the object and the image produced by the objective measured from the objective lens are respectively (a) 2.4 and 12.0 (b) 2.4 and 15.0 (c) 2.3 and 12.0 (d) 2.3 and 3.0 40. If Fo and Fe are the focal length of the objective and eyepiece respectively of a telescope, then its magnifying power will be (a) Fo + Fe (b) F x F (c) FJFe (d) \(F0 + Fe) 41. Five equal forces of 10 N each are applied at one point and all are lying in one plane. If the angles between them are equal, the resultant force will be (a) zero (b) 10 N (c) 20 N (d) 10^2 N 42. Figure shows ABCDEF as a regular hexagon. What
(a) The object moves with constantly increasing velocity from O to A and then it moves with constant velocity. (b) Velocity of the object increases uniformly. (c) Average velocity is zero. (d) The graph shown is impossible. 45. The motion of a body is given by the equation — = 6.0 — 3v(0 , where v(f) is speed in m/s and t dt in sec. If body was at rest at t = 0 (a) The terminal speed is 4.0 m/s (b) The speed varies with the time as v(t)  2(1  e~3r) m/s (c) The speed is 0.1 m/s when the acceleration is half the initial value (d) The magnitude of the initial acceleration is 3.0 m/s2 46. Two plane mirrors are inclined at an angle of 12°. The number of images of a point object placed between them will be
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I DECEMBER '07 309
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5 47. An object of length 6 cm is placed on the principle axis of a concave mirror of focal length/at a distance of 4f. The length of the image will be (a) 2 cm (b) 12 cm (c) 4 cm (d) 1.2 cm 48. Each quarter of a vessel of depth H is filled with liquids of the refractive indices nv n2, «3 and n4 from the bottom respectively. The apparent depth of the vessel when looked normally is (a) H(nj +n2 + nj + n4) H
2s
2p
2s
2p
(a) (c)
tl
2s
tl t
2p
(b) (d)
t
2s
tl t t
2p
tl
t t t
tl tl tl t
53. The expression of Rydberg constant is (a) 2n2 mh3c / (e2/ 4TI80)2 (b) 2n2 m(e2/ Anef/h'c (c) (e2/Ane0)2/2n2mh3c (d) 2n2 mh'c / (e2 / 4rce0) 54. The velocity of an electron in the first Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom is 2.19 x 106 ms1. Its velocity in the second orbit would be (a) 1.10 x 106 ms' (b) 4.38 x 106 ms 1 5 (c) 5.5 x 10 ms' (d) 8.76 x 106 ms 1 55. Which of the following orbitals is symmetric about the yaxis ? (c) d (b) p. (d )d„ Px 56 The first ionization potential of Na, Mg, A1 and Si are in the order (a) Na < Mg > A1 < Si (b) N a > M g > A l > S i (c) Na < Mg < A1 > Si (d) N a > M g > A l < S i 57. The correct order of third ionization energies (IE3) of Na, Mg and A1 is (a) Mg > Na > A1 (b) A1 > Mg > Na (c) Na > Mg > A1 (d) Mg > A1 > Na 58. The correct order of ionization energy is (a) Si > P > S (b) Si > P < S (c) S i < P > S (d) Si < P < S 59. Which of the element is a metalloid ? (a) C (b) As (c) Pb (d) Mg 60. The molecule having one unpaired electron is (a) NO (b) CO (c) CN" (d) O, 61. The hybridization in sulphur dioxide is (a) sp (b) sp2 (c) sp3 (d) dsp2 62. The species in which the central atom uses sp2 hybrid orbitals in its bonding is (a) PH3 (b) NH3 (c) CH3+ (d) SbH3 63. The ion that is isoelectronic with CO is (a) CN" (b) 0 2 + (c) 0 2 (d) N2+ 64. Which of the following is paramagnetic ? (a) Of (b) CN(c) CO (d) NO+ 65. If 0.6 mol of BaCl 2 is mixed with 0.30 mol of Na3P04. The maximum amount of Ba3(P04)2 that can be formed is (a) 0.70 mol (b) 0.50 mol (c) 0.20 mol (d) 0.15 mol 66. A mixture weighing 4.08 g of BaO (molar mass of Ba = 138 g mol 1 ) and unknown carbonate XC0 3
(b) (c) (d)
n,
ru
n.
(w1+n2 + »3 + n4) AH H\ J + J + 1 + i «3 nA
49. Material A has critical angle i , and material B has critical angle i (z > i ) . Then which of the following is true? (i) Light can be totally internally reflected when it passes from B to A (ii) Light can be totally internally reflected when it passes from A to 5 (iii) Critical angle for total internal reflection is iB  iA (iv) Critical angle between A and B is sin (a) (i) and (iii) (c) (ii) and (iii) (b) (i) and (iv) (d) (ii) and (iv) smiA sin L
50. A thin lens made of glass of refractive index 1.5 has a front surface + 11 D power and back surface  6 D. If this lens is submerged in a liquid of refractive index 1.6, the resulting power of the lens is (a)  0.5 D (b) + 0 . 5 D (c)  0.625 D (d) + 0.625 D CHEMISTRY 51. The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons ejected from a metal is 4 x 1019 J when it is irradiated with radiation of frequency twice the threshold frequency. The threshold wavelength of the metal is about (a) 400 nm (b) 500 nm (c) 600 nm (d) 300 nm 52. The orbital diagram in which the aufbau principle is violated is
72
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I DECEMBER '07
was heated strongly. The residue weighed 3.64 g. This was dissolved in 100 mL of 1 M HC1. The excess acid required 16 mL of 2.5 M NaOH solution for complete neutralization. The molar mass X is about (a) 20 g mol"1 (b) 30 g mol"1 1 (c) 40 g mol" (d) 50 g m o l 1 67. Assuming complete dissociation of H,S0 4 as (H 2 S0 4 + 2H 2 0 2H 3 0 + + SO'") The number of H 3 0 + ions in 10 ml of 0.5 N H 2 S0 4 is (a) 3.01 x 1021 (b) 1.5 x 1021 (c) 6.02 x 1021 (d) 3.01 x 1022 68. Three of the following formulae might be empirical or molecular formulae but the fourth is certainly a molecular formula. Which one is that ? (a) N 2 0 (b) N 2 0 4 (c) NH 3 (d)Mg 3 N 2 69. Given the following reaction at equilibrium. N 2(8). + 3H 2(s) . 2NH3(s). Some inert gas at constant pressure is added to the system. Predict which of the following fact will be affected ? (a) More NH3(sJ is produced (b) Less NH3(j) is produced (c) No affect on the equilibrium (d) K of the reaction is decreased 70. For the reaction NO,., + 0 „ . 2(g) 2(g) 2N 2 0 5(s) , which
73. The halflife period of a radioactive element is 140 days. After 560 days, one gram of the element will reduce to (a) 1/2 g (b) 1/4 g (c) 1/8 g (d) 1/16 g 74. For an endothermic reaction where AH represents the enthalpy of the reaction, the minimum value for the energy of activation will be (a) less than AH (b) zero (c) more than AH (d) equal to AH 75. The plot of log K versus 1 IT is linear with a slope of (a) EJR (b) EJR (c) EJ2.303R (d) EJ2.303R 76. For the decomposition of N 2 0 5(g) , it is given that 2 N 2 < V • 4N0 2fe) + 02(g); activation energy, £ ^C^) 2N02fe)+—02fe) ; activation energy E'a then (b ) E > E ' a (d) Ea  2 E'a
(a)Ea=E'a (c) Ea < E'a
77. 0.1 mol of HC1 is added to 1L of solution containing 0.5 mol of sodium acetate. The pH of the solution will be (a) 1.0 (b) 4.74 (c) 5.35 (d)4.15 (Given :^ a ( C H 3 C O O H ) = 1.8 xlO" 5 ) 78. The ratio of acid strength of HOCN and HCN is about (Given : K (HCN) = 4.2 x IO"10 M and
x lo^m) • ah c ) ~ ^(on (a) 548 : 1 (b) 1 : 548 (c) 2.86 x 10s : 1 (d) 2.86 x 10 4 : 1 79. If pKb for fluoride ion at 25°C is 10.83, the ionization constant of HF in water at this temperature is (a) 1.74 x IO"5 (b) 3.52 x 10~3 1 (c) 6.75 x lO^ (d) 5.38 x IO"2
of the following fact holds good ? (a) Kp = K c (b) Kp > Kc x v ' ' (c) Kp < Kc v y (d) Kp and Kc cannot be correlated unless pressure of the system is provided. 71. Solids CaCO, and CaO and gaseous C 0 2 are placed in a vessel and allowed to reach equilibrium CaO,(s), + CO,, , = CaCO 3(s) AH =  \ 80 kJ m o l 1 2(g) The quantity of CaO in the vessel could be increased by (a) adding more of CaC0 3 (b) removing some of C 0 2 (c) lowering the temperature (d) reducing the volume of the vessel 72. In a system A(s) ^
2 B,
80. 40.25 g of Glauber's salt is dissolved in water to obtain 500 mL of solution of density 1077.5 g dm 3 . The molality of Na 2 S0 4 in solution is about (a) 0.25 mol kg1 (b) 0.24 mol kg1 1 (c) 0.26 mol kg" (d) 0.27 mol k g 1 81. Mixing of 50 mL of 0.25 M lead nitrate solution with 25 mL of 0.10 M chromic sulphate solution causes the precipitation of lead sulphate. The molarity of Pb2+ and Cr3+ ions in the solution respectively are (a) 0.0667 M, 0.0667 M (b) 0.1 M, 0.2 M (c) 0.125 M, 0.05 M (d) 0.05 M, 0.125 M 82. A solution containing Na 2 C0 3 and NaHCO a is titrated against 0.1 M HC1 solution using methyl orange indicator. At the equivalence point, (a) both Na 2 CO a and N a H C 0 3 are completely
+ 3Cter, if the concen
tration of C at equilibrium is increased by a factor of 2, it will cause the equilibrium concentration of B change to (a) two times the original value (b) one half of its original value (c) 2\[2 times its original value (d) I/2V2 times the original value
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I DECEMBER '07
73
neutralized (b) only Na 2 C0 3 is wholly neutralized (c) only NaHCO, is wholly neutralized (d) NaC0 3 is neutralized upto the stage of NaHC0 3 Benzene (p° = 160 mm) and toluene (p° = 68 mm) form ideal solution at certain temperature with mole fraction of benzene as 0.2. The vapour pressure of solution will be (a) 220 mm (b) 86.4 mm (c) 160 mm (d) cannot be predicted 84. The elevation in boiling point of solution of 9.5 g MgCl2 in 1 kg water using the following information will be (molecular weight of MgCl 2 = 95, Kb = 0.52 K molality"1) (a) 0.16 (b) 0.05 (c) 0.1 (d) 0.2 85. Air contains 79% N2 and 21% 0 2 by volume. If pressure is 750 mm of Hg, the partial pressure of oxygen is (a) 175 mm of Hg (b) 157.5 mm of Hg (c) 320 mm of Hg (d) 250 mm of Hg 86. The density of neon will be highest at (a) STP (b) 0°C, 2 a t m (c) 273°C, 1 atm (d) 273°C, 2 atm The rate of diffusion of methane at a given temperature is twice that of a gas X. The molecular weight of X is (a) 64.0 (b) 32.0 (c) 4.0 (d) 8.0 88. An alloy of gold and copper crystallises in a cubic lattice in which gold atoms occupy the lattice points at the corner of the cube and copper atoms occupy centres of each of the cube faces. The probable empirical formula of an alloy is
(a) Au 3 Cu (b) AUCU3 (C) AU2CU3 (d) AuCu 2
(a) 001
(b) 111
(c) 110
(d) 100
The ionization energy of the groundstate hydrogen atom is 2.18 x 10 18 J. The energy of an electron in its second orbit would be (a)  1.09 x IO18 J (b)  2.18 x 10'8 J 18 (c)  4.36 x 10" J (d)  5.45 x IO"19 J Which of the following arrangement of electrons is most likely to be stable ? (a) (b) (c) (d) 93
Pick out the isoelectronic structures from the following : i. CH3+ n. H3O+ in. NH3 rv. CH3(a) I and II (b) III and IV (c) I and III (d) II, III and IV 94. The molecular electronic configuration of B2 is (a) KK (o2sf (a*2sf (tf2p)\n2py)x 2 2 (b) KK (c2s) (a*2s) (n2p)2 (c) KK (o2s)2 (a*2sf (nlpf (d) KK (o2s)2 (CT*2S)2 {o2p)\n2py)1 95 The expression relating mole fraction of solute (x2) and molarity (M) of the solution is (a) * 2 = (b) (c) x. MM, M(M,M2) + p MM, M(M,M2)p M(M,M2) + p MM, M(M,  M z )  p
mtitititin tititititim tititititim is
3d 4s
1
1
1
1
89. If the anions (A) form hexagonal closest packing and cations (C) occupy only 2/3 octahedral voids in it, then the general formula of the compound is
(a) CA (b) CA 2 (C) C /
3
(d) CJA2
90. Miller indices of the shaded plane shown in the diagram
MM, 96. The equilibrium constant Kc of the reaction 2AB,, is 50. If 1 mol of A, and 2(S) (g) 2 2 mol of B2 are mixed, the amount AB at equilibrium would be (a) 0.467 mol (b) 0.934 mol (c) 1.401 mol (d) 1.866 mol For a chemical reaction X —» Y, the rate of reaction increases by a factor of 1.837 when the concentration of X is increased by 1.5 times. The order of the reaction with respect to X is
+ S
(d) x2 =
9'
74
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I DECEMBER '07
(c) apogamy
(d) amphimixis
119 Effect of foreign pollen on endosperm is (a) chimera (b) xenia (c) metaxenia (d) polyploidy 12 The total nuclei in mature male gametophyte of an angiosperm are (a) two (b) three (c) four (d) five 121 Crucifer ovule is (a) atropous (c) anatropous
produced in the process of respiration during (a) glycolysis (b) Kreb's cycle (c) anaerobic respiration (d) none of these S 52 Photorespiration take place in plants where carbon fixation occurs through (a) Calvin cycle (b) Hatch Slack cycle (c) glycolysis (d) Kreb's cycle. Total ATP production during EMP pathway is (a) 24 ATP molecules (b) 8 ATP molecules (c) 38 ATP molecules (d) 15 ATP molecules If there is increase in temperature of about more than 35°C (a) rate of decline of respiration will be earlier than decline of photosynthesis (b) rate of decline of photosynthesis be earlier than decline of respiration (c) both decline together (d) both show no fixed variations. R.Q.ofC 1 8 H 3 2 0 1 6 is (a) 0.715 (b) 1.00 (c) During conversion of pyruvic are also formed (a) CO, and H 2 0 (b) (c) C0 2 and NAD (d) 1.430 (d) 2.145 acid to acetyl CoA C0 2 and NADH2 CO, and 0 2
(b) campylotropous (d) circinotropous
8nucleated embryosacs are (a) monosporic only (b) bisporic only (c) tetrasporic (d) any of these In an embryo, the radicle is near the (a) micropyle (b) chalaza (c) hilum (d) funicle The ephemeral structure which anchors the embryo and pushes it into the nutritional zone of the embryosac (a) haustorium (b) suspensor (c) coleorhiza (d) radicle i 25 One of the following guide the pollen tube in releasing gametes in embryosac (a) synergid (b) secondary nucleus (c) egg cell (d) antipodal cell Photorespiration in C3 plants starts from (a) Phosphoglycerate (b) Phosphoglycolate (c) Glycerate (d) Glycine Which type of reaction changes pyruvate to acetyl CoA? (a) Oxidative decarboxylation (b) Oxidative dehydrogenation (c) Oxidative dehydration (d) Oxidative phosporylation Pyruvic acid before combining with the oxaloacetic acid of citric acid cycle change into (a) 4 carbon compound (b) 3 carbon compound (c) 2 carbon compound (d) 6 carbon compound The approximate amount of energy received from one bond breakage of molecule of ATP is (a) 76 kcal (b) 7.6 kcal (c) 6.7 kcal (d) 67 kcal. Which of the following occurs only in aerobic conditions ? (a) Glycolysis (b) Oxidative phosphorylation (c) Fermentation (d) Lactate respiration • Largest amount of phosphate bond energy is
37 The number of glucose molecules required to produce 38 ATP molecules under anaerobic conditions by any yeast cell is (a) 2 (b) 1 (c) 19 (d) 38 What is common in NAD, ATP and FMN ? (a) Zn (b) P (c) Ca (d)Mg. 139 NADPH and ATP are generated through (a) anaerobic respiration (b) glycolysis (c) photosystem I (d) photosystem II In anaerobic fermentation 15% of the energy is stored as ATP and 50% of it is lost as heat. The remaining energy is used in (a) doing work (b) growth and reproduction of yeast cells (c) fast locomotion (d) production of oxygen In anaerobic respiration of yeast and bacteria, which of the following is released ? (a) Methanol (b) CO, (c) Butanol (d) H , 0 Osmotic pressure depends upon (a) concentration of solute (b) ionisation of solute (c) temperature (d) all of these Which of the following has the highest water
76
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I DECEMBER '07
potential ( ¥ ) (a) 1 M salt solution (b) 1 M sugar solution (c) 1 M sugar solution with 2.3 bars pressure applied on it (d) Distilled water 144.0.5 M sucrose solution develops a pressure of 15 bars in an osmometer. Which of the following statement is wrong for such a solution ? Its (a) osmotic potential is  15 bars (b) water potential is  15 bars (c) pressure potential is  15 bars (d) osmotic pressure is + 15 bars 145.0.1 M solution of a solute has a water potential of (a)  2 . 3 bars (b) 0 bar (c) 22.4 bars (d) + 2.3 bars 146.Stump of well watered potted plant shows exudation of sap due to (a) root pressure (b) capillary (c) cohesion force (d) transpiration pull. 147.Root hairs absorb water from soil through (a) turgor pressure (b) ion exchange (c) osmosis (d) DPD 148.Field capacity is affected by (a) soil profile (b) soil structure (c) temperature (d) all of these Cobalt chloride is blue in dry state. In contact with moisture, it turns (a) yellow (b) pink (c) green (d) red 150 Main function of lenticels is (a) transpiration (b) guttation (c) gaseous exchange (d) translation 151 Yellow bone marrow is found especially in the medullary cavity of (a) spongy bones (b) long bones (c) short bones (d) all of these 152 Transitional epithelium is found in (a) lungs (b) liver (c) urinary bladder (d) stomach 153.Heparin is secreted by (a) liver cell (b) mast cell (c) nervous cell (d) kidney 154 Adam's apple represents (a) cartilage of larynx (b) thyroid cartilage of trachea (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these 155 Cartilage is (a) nonvascular (c) poorly vascular (b) highly vascular (d) none of these
development (a) Erythrocytoblast (c) Reticulocyte
(b) Normoblast (d) Erythrocyte
157.Relative volume of erythrocyte may be read as percentage of total blood volume in the graduated centrifuge tube (Haematocrit tube) (a) PCV (b) ESR (c) TLC (d) all of these 158 Thromboplastin changes into Prothrombokinase in presence of calcium ion, now prothrombokinase helps in clotting of blood by (a) inactivation of heparin (b) conversion of prothrombin into thrombin (c) conversion of fibrinogen into fibrin (d) both (a) and (b) 159,Which of the f o l l o w i n g is used as artificial anticoagulant and precipitates calcium ion in testtube during blood examination? (a) citrate or oxalate of Na (b) citrate or oxalate of K (c) citrate or oxalate of Cs (d) both (a) and (b) 160J31ood differ from lymph in (a) containing less lymphocyte & waste (b) containing large protein (c) containing RBC (d) all of these 161 Which of the following layer of epidermis in man provides the main protection of body against water loss and the entry of disease causing organism? (a) Stratum spirosum (b) Stratum corneum (c) Stratum lucidium (d) Stratum germinativum 162 Camouflage of Chameleon is associated with (a) chromosome (b) chromomere (c) chromoplast (d) chromatophore 163 Pacinian corpuscles occur in the skin of certain parts of body in mammals. These are (a) type of glands (b) pain receptors (c) naked tactile receptors (d) encapsulated pressure receptors 164 Epidermis is specialized for (a) respiration (b) absorption (c) protection (d) all of these 165 Erector pilli associated with base of hair follicle is (a) single unit, involuntary (b) multi unit, involuntary (c) single unit, voluntary (d) multi unit, voluntary 166 Greenish faecal matter passed by infant in first two days of birth due to sterilized intestine is (a) macrophage (b) stercobilin n u v t r r c W D v n u I ncrcuoCD 'n 1 Y
156 Haemoglobin first appears in which stage of RBC
(c) meconium
(d) both (b) and (c).
167 The term given to rythmic waves of contraction passing backwards over the gut wall resulting in the pushing of the food is (a) regurgitation (b) emulsification (c) peristalsis (d) deglutination. among the following are not deciduous (a) incisors (b) canines (c) premolars (d) 1st and 2nd molars 169. Eating of raw fish can cause deficiency of vitamin (a) D 1 (b) B6 (C) B l (d) K Cloacal thymus is another name of (a) cloaca of birds (b) endostyle of protochordates (c) bursa Fabricius (d) thymus of man. • Mumps is the painful condition of (a) sublingula infection (b) parotid infection (c) submaxillary salivary glands (d) all of these * Cow's milk is more nutritious and slightly yellow due to presence of (a) vitamin D (b) ascorbic acid (c) riboflavin (d) tryptophan Surfactant dipalmityl lecithin of the lungs is released by (a) histiocytes of the lungs (b) Kupffer cells of the liver (c) Clara cells of the lungs (d) both (a) and (c) 174. The end product of anaerobic respiration, in animals, is (a) pyruvic acid (b) malic acid (c) lactic acid (d) methyl alcohol Haemoglobin oxygen dissociation curve in developing foetus is (a) sigmoid (b) hyperbola (c) parabola (d) none of these The intestinal villi are more numerous and larger in posterior part of small intestine than in anterior part, because (a) blood supply is poorer in anterior part (b) there is more digested food in posterior part (c) blood supply is poorer in posterior part (d) digestion is faster in posterior part The partial pressure of oxygen in the alveolar air is about (a) 50 mm Hg (b) l O l m m H g (c) 150 mm Hg (d) 200 mm Hg 8. Sometimes food gets accumulated in lower part of 78 PHVSIPS ! OR vnri I nnTMRFR m
oesophagus due to failure of cardiac sphincter. This leads to (a) Heart burn (b) Achlorohydria (c) Cardia achlasia (d) Deglutination 179. Aurebach's plexus is present in (a) submucosa (b) between mucosa and submucosa (c) between circular and longitudinal muscles of muscularis interna (d) between circular and longitudinal muscles of muscularis externa 180. The heart rate is increased by (a) an increase in the activity of the sympathetic nerves that supply the heart (b) a decrease in the activity of the parasympathetic (vagus) system (c) an increase in the level of adrenalin in the circulation (d) all of these. 181 During oxygen transport the oxyhaemoglobin at the tissue level liberates oxygen to the cells because in tissue (a) 0 2 concentration is high and C0 2 is low (b) 0 2 tension is low and CO, tension is high (c) 0 2 concentration is low and C0 2 is high (d) O, tension is high and C0 2 tension is low 182. Chloride shift is essential for transport of (a) C0 2 and 0 2 (b) N2 (c) C0 2 (d) 0 2 183 The anticoagulant most commonly used to store blood in the blood banks is (a) sodium citrate (b) sodium fluoride (c) EDTA (d) acid citrate dextrose 184. Active bone marrow in adult human being is about (a) 3.5  6% of the body weight (b) 3.5  6% of total blood (c) 3.5  6% of total body fluid (d) 3.5  6% of coelomic fluid 85. Pacemaker of the heart in rabbit is situated in (a) wall of right atrium close to eustachian valve (b) interatrial septum (c) interventricular septum (d) wall of left atrium close to the opening of pulmonary veins 186. Severe Acute Respiratory syndrome (SARS) (a) is caused by a variant of Pneurnococcus pneumoniae (b) is caused by a variant of the common cold virus (•Corona Virus) (c) is an acute form of asthma
!
(d) affects the nonvegetarian much faster than the vegetarians 187.Which statement is wrong ? (a) Partial pressure of CO, (P co ) is higher in the air inside the lungs (b) Partial pressure of 0 2 (P ) is higher in the air inside the lungs (c) Partial pressure of O, (PQ ) is lower inside the venous blood than in the air in the lung (d) Partial pressure of C0 2 (P co ) is higher inside the venous blood than in the air 188.Which one of the following is a disease of kidney? (a) Parkinson's disease (b) Addison's disease (c) Bright's disease (d) Graves's disease 189.What would happen if human blood becomes acidic (low pH) ? (a) Oxygen carrying capacity of haemoglobin increases (b) Oxygen carrying capacity of haemoglobin decreases (c) RBCs count increases (d) RBCs count decreases.
190jn
198.When, under certain conditions, the P50 value of haemoglobin rises, the affinity of the pigment of combining with 0 2 will (a) remain same (b) rise (c) fall (d) first rise and then fall 199.Ultrafiltration occurs in glomerulus when (a) hydrostatic pressure is more than osmotic pressure (b) colloidal osmotic pressure + capsular pressure is less than hydrostatic pressure (c) osmotic pressure is more than hydrostatic pressure (d) none of these 200Jn micturition (a) urethra relaxes (c) ureter relaxes
1. 6. 11. 16. 21. 26. 31. 36. 41. 46. 51. 56. 61. 66. 71. 76. 81. 86. 91. 96. 101. 106. 111. 116. 121. 126. 131. 136. 141. 146. 151. 156. 161. 166. 171. 176. 181. 186. 191. 196. (a) (d) (a) (a) (b) (c) (c) (c) (a) (c) (b) (a) (b) (c) (b) (a) (a) (b) (d) (d) (b) (c) (d) (b) (b) (a) (b) (b) (b) (a) (b) (b) (b) (c) (b) (b) (b) (b) (d) (a) 2. 7. 12. 17. 22. 27. 32. 37. 42. 47. 52. 57. 62. 67. 72. 77. 82. 87. 92. 97. 102. 107. 112. 117. 122. 127. 132. 137. 142. 147. 152. 157. 162. 167. 172. 177. 182. 187. 192. 197. (a) (b) (a) (a) (a) (c) (c) (c) (d) (a) (b) (a) (c) (a) (d) (c) (a) (a) (c) (b) (d) (b) (b) (c) (d) (a) (a) (c) (d) (c) (c) (a) (d) (c) (c) (b) (c) (d) (c) (a) 3. 8. 13. 18. 23. 28. 33. 38. 43. 48. 53. 58. 63. 68. 73. 78. 83. 88. 93. 98. 103. 108. 113. 118. 123. 128. 133. 138. 143. 148. 153. 158. 163. 168. 173. 178. 183. 188. 193. 198.
(b) ureter contracts (d) urethra contracts
(a) (c) (c) (c) (b) (b) (d) (b) (c) (b) (b) (c) (a) (d) (d) (a) (b) (b) (d) (c) (a) (b) (b) (a) (a) (c) (b) (b) (d) (d) (b) (d) (d) (c) (c) (c) (d) (c) (d) (c) 4. 9. 14. 19. 24. 29. 34. 39. 44. 49. 54. 59. 64. 69. 74. 79. 84. 89. 94. 99. 104. 109. 114. 119. 124. 129. 134. 139. 144. 149. 154. 159. 164. 169. 174. 179. 184. 189. 194. 199. (b) (c) (d) (a) (d) (b) (b) (a) (c) (d) (a) (b) (a) (b) (c) (c) (a) (c) (a) (c) (b) (a) (a) (b) (b) (b) (a) (d) (c) (b) (a) (d) (d) (c) (c) (d) (a) (b) (d) (b) 5. 10. 15. 20. 25'. 30. 35. > 40. 45. 50. 55. 60. 65. 70. 75. 80. 85. 90. 95. 100. 105. 110. 115. 120. 125. 130. 135. 140. 145. 150. 155. 160. 165. 170. 175. 180. 185. 190. 195. 200. (a) (c) (d) (a) (a) (b) (a) (c) (b) (c) (b) (a) (d) (c) (d) (b) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (c) (c) (b) (a) (b) (b) (b) (a) (c) (c) (d) (b) (c) (b) (d) (a) (c) (b) (a)
ANSWERS
a cardiac output of 5250 ml per minute, with 75 heart beats per minute, the stroke volume is (a) 55 ml (b) 60 ml (c) 70 ml (d) 80 ml
191,Which of the following vertebrate organs receives only oxygenated blood ? (a) Gill (b) Lung (c) Liver (d) Spleen 192,Sphincter of Boyden which helps in the filling up of gall bladder is present in (a) Ampulla of vater (b) Duct of wirsurg (c) Ductus choledoccus (d) Duct of santorini 193.Chemical responsible for increase in blood pressure due to renin action is (a) aldosterone (b) angiotensinogen (c) angiotensin I (d) angiotensin II 194.Glomeruli fail to filter from plasma (a) glucose (b) globulins (c) lipids (d) Both (b) and (c) 195.0ne of the following is not a kidney disorder (a) pyelitis (b) oedema (c) Bright's disease (d) Paget's disease 196.Trimethylamine is excreted by (a) marine teleosts (b) mollusca (c) fresh water fish (d) amphibians 197Which of the following control the amount of enzymes in pancreatic juice ? (a) Pancreozymin (b) Secretin (c) Cholecystokinin (d) Gastrin
For detailed solution, visit our website : www.momentumacademy.oom
12 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER ' 0 7
•:: f .: '•
Train Your Brain
l§ © H M B O S © ®000 g o ® © H M Q M J d q ODD© M D 0 t M 
Canadian Olympiad Problems
SECTION  A Multiple Choice Questions with one correct answer 1. You are standing upright in a room in front of a vertical mirror. In this mirror, you can see from your position only the upper twothirds of your body. You wish to see the entire length of your body reflected in the mirror. Which combination of the following three courses of action will achieve this? (I) Move away from the mirror (II) Move toward the the mirror (III) Use a mirror whose height will allow you to see your whole image when you are at your initial position. (a) (I) only (b) (II) only (c) (III) only (d) either (I) or (in). 2. A 5 kg cart collides on a horizontal surface with a 20 kg cart. Which cart experiences the smaller force because of the collision? (a) The 5 kg cart (b) The forces are equal (c) The 2,0 kg cart (d) It depends if the collision is elastic. 3. Two monkeys with the same mass stand on a branch at height h above the horizontal jungle floor. Monkey A steps off the branch holding the end of an inextensible rope of length L whose other end is tied to another branch at height H, lets go at the bottom of the swing, and falls freely to the floor, as shown below. Monkey B steps off and falls straight downward. Then, neglecting air resistance but not the tension in the rope, the total work W done on each monkey and the speed v with which each hits the floor are as follows
/•
(a) WA < v, < vB (c) WA=WB,vA = vB
,y (b) WA = WB' vA VV VV V (d) W A < W B' VA ^
4. A person, standing on a train that is accelerating forward at 3.3 m/s 2 , throws a ball vertically upward. Neglecting air resistance, the magnitude of the ball's acceleration relative to the train is (a) 9.8 m/s 2 (b) 10.3 m/s 2 2 (c) 7.0 m/s (d) 13.1 m/s2. 5. I must cross a river in the shortest possible time. Water flows downstream at a constant 5.0 m/s between the two parallel shores. Taking the direction of the flow as reference, if my boat has a maximum speed of 10 m/s, it should head at (a) 90° (b) 120° (c) 150° (d) 27°. 6. A hoop and a solid cylinder have the same mass and radius. They both roll, without slipping, on a horizontal surface. If their kinetic energies are equal, (a) the hoop has a greater translational speed than the cylinder (b) the cylinder has a greater translational speed than the hoop (c) the hoop and the cylinder have the same translational speed (d) the hoop has a greater rotational speed than the cylinder. 7. A string clamped at both ends is vibrating. At the moment the string looks flat, the instantaneous transverse velocity of points along thf string, excluding its endpoints, must be (a) zero everywhere (b) dependent on the location along the string (c) not zero anywhere (d) nonzero and in the same direction everywhere. 8. In vacuum, a potential difference V is maintained between points a distance d apart. The corresponding electric field E accelerates an electron from rest to a speed v over that distance. Which one of the following statements is true?
(a) (b) (c) (d)
E does not depend on d E depends on V, not on d E depends only on d v depends on V, not on d.
9. Students claim that in a lab experiment they witnessed a headon elastic collision between two balls on a horizontal surface which resulted in the balls being both at rest. No external horizontal force was acting at any time on the masses. Which of these comments is the most appropriate about this process? (a) initial speeds and masses must have been different (b) initial speeds and masses must have been identical (c) initial speeds, but not necessarily masses, were identical (d) the process cannot have occurred as claimed. 10. The potential across a 3 p,F capacitor is 12V when it is not connected to anything. It is then connected in parallel with an uncharged 6pF capacitor. At equilibrium, the charge q on the 3pF capacitor and the potential difference V across it are (a) q = 12 pC, V = 4 V (b) q = 24 pC, V = 8 V (c) q = 36 p,C, V = 12 V (d) q = 12 pC, V = 6 V. 11. In subatomic physics, one often associates a characteristic wavelength X with a particle of mass m. If h = h/2n (h being Planck's constant) and c the speed of light, which of the following expressions is most likely to be the correct one? (a) (c) X = he I m Xhm/c (b) X = hlmc2 (d) X = hlmc •
If the filament in lightbulb A burns out, then the following is true for light bulb B (a) it is turned off (b) its brightness does not change (c) it gets dimmer (d) it gets brighter. 15. An observer at O views two closely spaced lines on the bottom sheet through an angled slab of plastic with parallel faces, exactly as shown in the figure below.
12. At equilibrium, the electric field at a point on a closed conducting surface, whether the surface is charged or neutral, can never be (a) (b) (c) (d) tangent to the surface perpendicular to the surface zero directed inward since it must vanish inside.
Compared to when there is no plastic, the lines appear to the observer (a) the same but shifted to the right (b) shifted to the left and spaced further apart (c) shifted to the right and spaced closer together (d) exactly as they do without the plastic slab. 16. If all of Earth's polar ice were suddenly to melt into the oceans, in the short term the length of the day would (a) increase (b) remain the same (c) decrease (d) first decrease, then increase. 17. Two uncharged balls A and B, each very light and coated with a conducting material, hang vertically side by side just touching each other. A positivelycharged glass rod is brought near ball A without touching it. Now A and B are separated and then the glass rod is removed. If Q and QB represent the electric charges on A and B, respectively, you conclude that (a) QA < 0 and QB < 0 (c) QA > 0 and 0R < 0 (b) QA < 0 and QB > 0 (d) QA > 0 and QFL > 0.
13. A u n i f o r m cubical box of mass M rests on a horizontal floor with one edge against a small obstruction fixed to the floor. Can a horizontal force of magnitude F applied on the box at the centre of the side opposite the obstruction tip the box? (a) No, never (b) yes, only if F > mg (c) yes, F > mgl2 is sufficient (d) yes, only if F > 2mg. 14. A circuit consists of a battery, a resistor R, and two light bulbs A and B as shown below
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U t DECEMBER '07
18. Two identical balls A and B, of uniform composition and initially at the same temperature, each absorb exactly the same amount of heat. A is hanging down from the ceiling while B rests on the horizontal floor in the same room. Assuming no subsequent heat loss by the balls, which of the following statements is correct about their final temperatures, TA and TB, once the balls have reached their final dimension? ((t/Uffttf
of the magnet due to this current. As seen from the magnet looking in the direction of the loop, f \
O A
(a) TA < TB (c) Ta = Tb
1
(b) TA > TB (d) TA < TB.
1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
I / I I
runs runs runs runs
clockwise and a points to the left counterclockwise and a points to the right clockwise and a points to the right counterclockwise and a points to the left.
23. You are moving a negative charge q < 0 at a small constant speed away from a conducting spherical shell on which resides a negative charge O < 0. The electrostatic field of Q is E . Let U be the total energy of <7, W the work done by the force Fa you exert on q, and Wh. the work done by the electrostatic force F f on q. Then, as q is being moved, (a) W = —Wp and therefore U remains constant (b) Fa =  F]: , and therefore U remains constant (c) U increases (d) U decreases. 24. An ice cube of pure fresh water floats on pure fresh water in a glass. A huge ice shelf, also of pure fresh water, floats on the ocean away from Antarctica. Neglecting the contribution due to the density of air, as the ice cube and the iceberg melt, (a) the water level rises both in the glass and in the ocean (b) the water level does not change in either case (c) the water level stays the same in the glass but rises in the ocean (d) the water level decreases in the glass but stays the same in the ocean. SECTION  B Long Answer Questions 25. A uniform ball of mass M = 1.00 kg is released from rest at the surface of a pond and sinks vertically into the water. An observer, wishing to determine the density of this ball, measures the timedependence of the angle a between the vertical at his position, a distance h above the surface, and the direction of the ball's apparent instantaneous position (see figure). The horizontal distance between the observer and the initial position of
19. You are travelling at constant speed in an airtight car with a balloon floating motionless next to you. Suddenly, you slam on the brakes so as to stop the car quickly. During decceleration, with respect to the car the balloon (a) moves forward (b) remains motionless (c) moves backward (d) can move forward or backward. 20. Due to tidal friction on earth, the radius R of the Moon's orbit is increasing at the rate of a few centimetres per year. During this process, the moon's angular momentum (a) remains constant since its speed decreases (b) remains constant but its total energy increases (c) increases as JR while its total energy increases (d) decreases as Jp> while its kinetic energy decreases. 21 In order to measure the speed v of blood flowing through an artery, a uniform magnetic field B is applied in a direction perpendicular to the flow and a voltmeter measures the voltage across the diameter D of the artery, at right angles to B. If positive and negative ions in the blood are longitudinally at rest with respect to the flow, the speed of the flow is closest to (a) v = V/BD (c) v = VD/B (b) v = (d) v =
BD/V
B/VD.
22 A bar magnet with its north (TV) and south (5) poles as shown below is initially moving to the left, along the axis of, and away from a circular conducting loop. A current I is induced in the loop, with a the acceleration
50
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I DECEMBER '07
the ball is d.
r
, xl •+ 
a
'h i • surface
n
^
ball
The drag force acting on the ball as it sinks is well approximated at low speed v by F^ = —bv, where b is a constant. We also take the density of water to be = 1000 kg/'m3 and its refraction index as nw = 1.33. (a) Derive an expression for the instantaneous depth y of the ball as a function of a, h, and d. (b) Having calculated the depth of the ball as a function of time, the observer can then construct the following table for the speed of the ball as a function of time: Time [s] 0.000 0.010 0.025 0.075 0.125 0.175 Speed [m/s] Time [s] 0.000 0.0910 0.2086 0.5081 0.6823 0.7836 0.225 0.275 0.325 0.375 0.425 0.475 Speed [m/s] 0.8425 0.8767 0.8966 0.9082 0.9145 0.9155
(b) Calculate the torque that must be supplied by the bicycle wheel to produce the required average electrical power for the bulb. State briefly two other simplifying assumptions that must be made. (c) What is the amplitude of the current induced in the coil under these conditions? (d) To the extent that the lightbulb obeys Ohm's Law, and that its resistance is constant, by what factor would the power delivered to the bulb increase if the cyclist tripled the bicycle's speed (presumably downhill or at the Tour de France)? The long jump as an Olympic sport dates back at least as far as 700 BC. Unlike in the modern Olympics, it was practised not only from a running start, but also from a standing start. The length of a jump was measured (as it still is) from the point where the back of the feet touched the ground on landing. Paintings on ancient Greek vases depict athletes jumping from a standing start while holding compact weights in both hands. Examples of these have been dug up by archaeologists, and typical ones, made of stone or lead, each have a mass of around 3 kg. (a) Write a short paragraph explaining qualitatively how athletes could boost their performance, ie. jump further from a standing start, by carrying such weights. More precisely, describe what they would have done with the weights during the jump. You can accept that, as biomechanics research has shown, a loaded body could take off at the same speed and angle as an unloaded one. (b) Estimate by how much the length of a 3 m j ump could be increased for a 65 kg athlete jumping at an angle of 50°. Remember that this takes place from a standing start, not a running start like today's long jump. You can take the centre of mass of the body to be at a height of lm above ground and the length of the arms to be 65 cm. Also, at the moment of takeoff, the athlete is leaning forward so that his shoulders are about 15 cm in front of the centre of mass of his body. SOLUTIONS
SECTION A
From these data, find the initial acceleration of the ball and estimate at which value its speed will stabilise. Then calculate the density of the ball and obtain a value for the drag coefficient b. Bicycle headlights are often powered by a generator, with the rim of the generator's shaft rolling against the tire's rim due to the rotation of the wheel. The shaft is rigidly connected to a coil within the generator which rotates in a magnetic field B. In one such generator, the coil has 125 turns of wire and a crosssectional area of 0.0010 m2, immersed in a field of magnitude 0.080 T. At the area of contact with the tire, the rim of the generator's shaft has a radius of 1.25 cm. The tire's diameter is 66 cm. (a) If the lightbulb in the headlight needs 5.0W of average electrical power, corresponding to a voltage amplitude of 4.0V, to produce a decent amount of light, calculate the linear speed of the bicycle needed, assuming no slipping anywhere in the problem.
(c) (b) (d) 16. (a) 21 (a)
2. 7. 12. 17. 22.
(b) (b) (a) (b) (c)
3 (c) (d) 13. (b) 18. (b) 23. ( d )
4. 9. 14. 19. 24.
.(b) (d) (d) (c) (c)
5. 10. 15. 20.
(a) (a) (b) (c)
12 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER '07
SECTION
B
0 = Mg  p
'
wVgbvf=\\^\Mgbvf
Pball.1
Solving for b yields
surface
v
f
{
Pball,
(1.00 kg) (9.80 m/s 2 ) ball (a) Let x be the horizontal distance from the point where the ball was released, to the point where a ray originating from the instantaneous position of the ball at depth y crosses the surface to reach the observer. From Snell's law we have sin a = nw sin (3, where n w= 1.33 is the index of refraction of water. From geometry, we can also write : x = dh tan a tan P = x/y Then Jf = cosp tan P sin p ;lsin P sin 2 p 0.916 m/s
1
1.00xlO 3 kg/m 3 1.4xlO 4 kg/m 3
= 9.9 kg/s (a) Since the generator shaft contacts the tire very close to its edge, we can take its tangential speed v to be that of the bicycle wheel, and therefore the linear speed of the bicycle itself. This is related to its rotational speed 0) by v = cor, where r is the radius of the shaft. As is readily derived from Faraday's law applied to the rotating coil with N turns and area A, immersed in a uniform magnetic field with magnitude B, the voltage output of the generator as a function of time is e = atNBA sin m and its amplitude is therefore emax = mNBA. Combining these expressions leads to re v=• NBA (1.25 x 10 m)(4.0V) = 5.0 m/s (125)(0.080 T)(1.0 x 10~ 3 m 2 ) (b) The average torque supplied by the tire's rotation is given by T = /VOJ, with P the average mechanical power. If we ignore any loss due to (i) friction and (ii) the resistance of the coil, P is also the average electrical power produced by the generator. Then T = rP/v _ (1.25xl0~ 2 m)(5.0 W) 5.0 m/s = 1.25 x 10 2 N'm (c) The power amplitude P is twice the average power, and the maximum current is therefore I mx =P mx mx = (^ 0 W)/(4.0 V)' = 2.5 A a a /e a 1 ' (d) Assuming that the light bulb obeys Ohm's Law, the power it consumes goes like the square of the voltage supplied at constant resistance. Since that voltage goes like the linear speed of the bicycle, power is proportional to v2. If that speed triples (to 15 m/s, or 54 km/hr), the power supplied is multiplied by 9. The bulb may well burn out! 27. (a) The centre of mass of the body of the athlete loaded
1 sin a (b) The initial acceleration a0 can be calculated from the first velocity point in the data table. Velocity changed from 0 to 0.091 m/s in 0.01s, which gives a0 = 9.10 m/s2. The terminal speed can be read off the table as approximately v f = 0.916 m/s2. The total instantaneous downward force F acting on the ball when it has speed v is F = Mg p„Vgbv ...(i) where Mg is the gravitational force, p w Vg is the upward buoyancy force if the ball has volume V, and bv is the drag force. By Newton's second law, F= Ma, where a is the acceleration of the ball. • Initially, v is small enough that the drag force can be ignored, and we can write with p w  the density of the ball. Thus, Pball Pw 1  «o! 8 1000 kg/m
_
= ( d  h tana).
1.4 x 104 kg/m3 19.10/9.80 On the other hand, when the speed has reached its final value v , the acceleration vanishes and eq. (i) becomes
52
P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U I DECEMBER '07
with the weights follows a parabolic trajectory. Then, if the jumper thrusts the weights forward at arm's length as he jumps, the centre of mass lies a bit forward and higher from its position than if there were no weights. In midflight, the athlete then swings the weights down and backward before landing, which puts the point of contact of his feet at a position slightly further ahead with respect to the centre of mass then if no weights were carried. There is also an extra enhancement coming from the upward vertical motion of the body with respect to the centre of the mass as the weights are swung down before landing, in effect extending its trajectory a bit further forward, (b) Let M be the mass of the body and m the total mass of the weights. The position of the centre of mass is given by R = (X,Y): Mrj + mr2 _ r\ +jf>2 R=M +m \ + ml M where r, and r2 are the positions of the centre of mass of the body and the centre of mass of the weights, respectively. The initial shift in the position of the centre of mass of the body due to the weights is then . „ Mn+mr) Ar A R=— = M+m \ + M lm where Ar = (Ax, Ay) = r2  r,. With M = 65 kg and m = 6 kg, this gives AR = 0.085 Ar. Let us break down the effect into three parts, two horizontal ones and one vertical. • At takeoff, the weights are held at arm's length (arms horizontal). Assuming 65 cm as the length of the
arms, plus another 15 cm for the horizontal position of the shoulders relative to the centre of mass of the body leaning forward, we have Ac = x,  xx = 80 cm, which gives AX = 6.8 cm. • At landing, the arms are swung backwards. We assume that then arms make an angle of 40° with the vertical. Then the centre of mass of the body is 0.0845 sin 40°(60 cm) = 3.3 cm ahead of the centre of mass of the system. • If the athlete always lands in a crouching position, whether or not he carries weights, it is reasonable to assume that the vertical position of the weights has shifted by up to one metre between takeoff and landing. Therefore, when the trajectory of the system's centre of mass is at the vertical position it would have at landing with tout weights, the centre of mass of the body is higher by about AY= 0.085 x lm = 8.5 cm. The angle of the trajectory being about 50°, the corresponding horizontal extension of the length of the jump is AX = AF/tan 50° = 7.1 cm. Totalling these three contributions gives an extension of the jump's length of about 17 cm. This is of course quite dependent on the assumptions we made, but gives a reasonable estimate. No; Athletes were not allowed to throw the weights while in flight, which makes sense as the long jump was not meant as a weightthrowing contest on top of the jump itself. *>
A Complete Magazine on Current Affairs
Ifwedoti'taanow what you see here mi^it disappear by 2050
CURRENTS
Subscription Rates KEESCHEJ'ZSSB Rs. 150 Rs. 275
Available at all leading magazine stands How to order: Send D.D.I M.0. in favour of MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd., Payable at New Delhi. Post to the address given MTG Learning Media (P) Ltd.,
406, Taj Apt., R i n g R o a d , New Delhi29. www.mtg.in Tel.: (011) 26194317 e  m a i l : i n f o @ m t g . i n 12 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  SEPTEMBER ' 0 7
Thought Provoking Problems in OPTICS
By: Prof. Rajinder Singh Randhawa 1. In YDSE, the incident light is composed of two wavelengths 6696 A , and 6699A. The screen is placed 3 m away and the distance between the slits is IO"3 m. (a) Find the order upto which fringes can be seen on the screen? (b) And how far from the centre of the screen does this occur? 2. Suppose that one of the slits in a YDSE is wider than the other, so the amplitude of the light reaching the, central part of the screen from one slit is thrice that from the other slit. Find an expression for the light intensity I at the screen as a function of 8, the angular position. 3. A small coin is placed at the bottom of a cylindrical vessel of radius R and height h. If a transparent liquid of refractive index p. completely filled into the cylinder, find the minimum fraction of the area that should be covered in order not to see the coin. 4. A spherical surface of radius of curvature R enclosing a medium of refractive index p = 1.5. Find the distance x where a mirror should be present so that the image of a distant point object lying on the principal axis is formed at the pole P. 5. Due to a vertical temperature gradient in the atmosphere the index of refraction varies as i = p,0 ^ 1 + ay , where p 0 is the index of refraction at the surface and a = 8 x IO6 n r 1 . A person of height h = 2 m stands on a level surface. Beyond what distance he cannot see the runway? 6. A vertical beam of crosssectional radius r is incident symmetrically on the curved surface of a glass hemisphere table. Find the radius of the luminous spot formed on the table. 7. Light is incident at an angle 8 on one plane end of a transparent cylindrical rod of refractive index p. Determine the least value of p so that the light entering the rod does not come out of the curved surface of the rod irrespective of the value of 8. 8. A thin glass sheet (p = 1.52) is introduced normally in the path of one of the two interfering waves. Tht central bright fringe is observed to shift to the positioi originally occupied by the fifth bright fringe. II X = 5890 A find the thickness of the glass sheet. SOLUTIONS (a) The fringes will be invisible when n&' maximum of wavelength 6699 A coincides with the
(4)
minimum of wavelength 6696 A . Hence n X = \ n + \ \ x ' n (6699) n + 1 6696 2,
n = 1116 So, the fringes will be visible to the order 1116 (b) Distance from the centre is given by nXD 2. 1116x6699 xlO"10 x 3 = 2.25 m
10"
The resultant intensity at a point is
•d)
1= K (A? + A] + 2/1, A2 COS C>) As A, = 3A2 = 3A The intensity at the central position / 0 = A"(3A + A)2 = 16 KA2 or K = J ^ T
...(2)
H)
3".
The path difference at any point P is Ax = <7sin0 2 7t The phase difference at any point P is 0 = — x Ax:; X
of radius 2r placed with its base on a horizontal
Randhawa Institute of Physics, S.C.O. 208, First Floor, Sector36D, Chandigarh. Email: randhawainstitute_physics@yahoo.com
PHYSICS FOR Y O U I DECEMBER '07
2n
(dsind)
(3)
Thus, equation (1) becomes,
In
16 A2
(3 A) + A + 2.(3A).Acos
2ji<isin0 v = 2x
/ = A 10+ 6 cos 2 2 j t J s i n 0 16 3. When the rays coming from the coin incident at an angle i > ic, they will be totally reflected.
\
Due to presence of the plane mirror, the image formed at I behaves as a virtual object for the plane mirror and a real image V is formed in front of the plane mirror, v _3R at the pole P. x +x =v x = ~— ~ 5. Let O be the object visible to man and P be a point on the trajectory of the ray 6 = 90  i.
.'.
Minimum area that should be covered, A = nr2.
As t a n = — => r = h tan i. c h 1 Since s i m c = — ^ =» tan ic = The slope of tangent at point P is tanO = Using Snell's law, p,0 sin 90° = p. sin i =
1
— co1 *
Jl + a y j sin i
sini =
[7~,
dy , coti = — •
o \iay h :. A  nr2 = nh2 H 1 ' The fraction of base area covered = h1 (p.2 1) R2 4. Since light comes from very distant object i.e. u = °°
(J.
V
o
va
; x io"
* max = 1000 m 6. Let 0 = angle of incidence a = angle of refraction nh2 ti  1
2 C
The total area of the base A' = n R2
r
?
nR1
A a\
\
2 ri /a
\
\
\
\
0 >/ / st
1
oo
n  1
R
3R
For the extreme rays, r 1 sin6 = — = 2r 2 cosO = 2
\iR _ 1.5R v=Hl 1.51
70 P H Y S I C S F O R Y O U  OCTOBER '07 69
,, sine As P = —— sin a cos a =
sin a =
sm0 1 2 1 = —x—= — and p 2 3 3
AIEEE.
iITJEE
or
P M T
You Can Meet The Challenges
When one looks at the question papers for the past many years, one thing is clear. The general standard is rising. 2r For IIT, one has to not only know the concepts thoroughly but must have also the ability to calculate fast the applications which are dependent on many concepts for the same problem. In fact, for the purpose of studying physics, chemistry, mathematics whether one goes for any exam or not, the most important things are the concepts in each chapter. If the basic concepts are clear and the student develops the attitude to think, to ask why, and seek the answers to the logical limit, there is no need to fear any exam here or in the universities. IITJEE or AIEEE or PMT, in fact any exam can be tackled if the concepts are clear. Of course speed and accuracy should be the keyword for success. Speed comes with practice. To learn to go straight to the heart of the problem, reducing the given problem to elementary ones is all that is needed. Practice and practice as if the winning of the test matches depends on you.
In AOPQ, Z.OQP = 90 + 9  a . 2r Applying sine rule; s i n ( 9 0 + e _ a
r
)
=
sin a sin a ,2r = cos (9  a ) cos 0 cos a + sin 9 sin a Using above values r0 = 0.678r 7. As L = sin
T
. M
at B
Snell's law for refraction at A yields sun sinr smi • sin r = • ...(1)
Since r + ic = 90° => sin (99  ic) = cos ic. For a ray not to come through the curved surface, r < 90  ic sin r < yj1  sin2 ic < ^ 1 ...(2)
Eliminating sin r from (1) and (2), we get sin; n 1_ < . 1 2 v h
=> sin i < ^/p2 1 p2l>sini p > ^/l + sin 9
r^nun
Think, think straight, and go to the roots of the problem when studying, then REVISE, REVISE. This is the key for success. Revise immediately after you have learnt something; revise again and again till you know your subject like the palm of your hand. One doen not learn 50% truth for passing, 60% truth for getting the cutoff percentage and reserve 100% learning for the rest. Either one works for 100% or one does not work. What you get is not in your hands. But you work for is in your hands. Revise everything from class XI onwards. Do not leave anything or play Monte Carlo. You can win anything if you have the will to do it. Trust in God and buckup. Editor
; siniS^/p 2  1
p • = V 2 Since sin9 < 1, v x0 = displacement of images = 5P
8.
D, „ XD c — ( p  l ) z = 5x — rf a 5X 5x5890x10" t=p1 1.521
= 5.66 x 10^ cm
Thought Provoking Problems in
0
0
By: Prof. Rajinder Singh Randhawa* 1 A cylinder of weight W and radius R is to be raised on to a horizontal step of height h as shown in figure. A rope is wrapped around the cylinder and pulled horizontally. Find the minimum force F necessary to raise the cylinder and the reaction force at A assuming the cylinder does not slip. A ladder rests on the floor, leaning against a wall of coefficient of static friction between the ladder and floor is i, and that between ladder and wall is p.2> What is the minimum angle 0 that ladder can make with the floor if the ladder is not to slip? (Assuming there is uniformly distributed mass). 3. A rod of mass M and length I is pivoted at the top. A body of mass m and velocity v hits at distance d from the top and stick to it. Find the ratio of initial energy to the final energy. 5 A spherical ball of mass m and radius r moving with velocity u strikes elastically a rigid surface at an angle a to the normal. Assuming that slipping occurs while the sphere is in contact with the surface and coefficient of friction is p. Find (p) coefficient of friction in terms of a and (3 when the ball is reflected at an angle 3 to the normal. SOLUTIONS 1. The moment of arm x of the weight relative to the =^2Rhh2
point A, x = ^R2(Rh)2
The moment arm of F relative to A CD = 2Rh The net torque about A is Wx  F. (2R  h) = 0 W = JlRhh1  F. (2R h) = 0 *°
M
W^2Rhh2 =>F = 2 Rh Now, Using condition of equilibrium, i.e. N cosG = F and N sin0 = W Dividing, (ii) by (i) we get W A tan0 = — JF2+W2 For equilibrium, 1 F X = 0" Z F , = 0 1FX = 0 1F= 0 ...(i) ...(ii)
m
\
A spherical ball of mass m and radius r is projected along a rough horizontal surface so that initially (;t = 0) it slides with linear speed u but does not rotate. As it slides, it begins to spin and eventually rolls without slipping. How long does it take to begin rolling without slipping?
Squaring and adding up (i) and (ii), we get N=
Randhawa Institute of Physics, S.C.O. 208, First Floor, Sector36D, Chandigarh. Email: randhawainstitute_physics@yahoo.com 70 PHYSICS FOR YOU  OCTOBER '07 69
IF, = = 0 and 1 Fy = Nx + ^ N2  Mg = 0 Now, Taking moment about point 'A' is given by
(I) .(2)
I. Fx =  f = ma  \ik R = ma ZFy = Rmg =0 From eqns (1) and (2), a = —p.k g Velocity of C.M. at time Y is v = u + at ie v = u  p* g t
...(1) ...(2) ...(3) ...(4)
Eqn of motion for rotation is T= \i.k mgr  —mr a. L sin0 • ••(5)
2
2
2
r
Then the angular velocity of the ball at time t is A M.,AT,=y; ( A s / ! = miVj a n d / 2 = \x2N2) f2 (LcosG) + / j (LsinG) = Mg \  cosflj Solve (1), (2) and (3), we get 0 = tan"1 Initial energy, Et = ^ mv2 Final energy, L' Ef = —
2
co = 0 + at =
2r
.(6)
...(3) fi 2 Hi ... (1) ...(2)
The condition for pure rolling ; vcm = coR 5p* gt0r 2u 5. 2r
Since collision is elastic, then u cos a = u' cos (3 ...(1)
About pivot, according to conservation of angular momentum, L' = L = mvd + md2 3 Using (3) and (4) in (2), we get (mvd)2 3m2 v2d2 f 21' Ml2 2(M I2 + 3md2) j2) + md ' M. I. after collision, / ' = From eqns (1) and (5); Ei _ \
m v 2 x 2 + 3wrf2)
...(3) Ml2 ...(4) From impulse momentum'theorem ; (5) NAt = Ap = pf  pi = 2mwcosa ...(2) Component of impulse parallel to the surface = p. NAt = 2mwp cosa Also, 2 mwpcos0 = mu'sinP  mwsina ...(3) , , • tanBtana From (1) and (3), after solving ; p = Now, Angular impulse on the ball = (2m«pcosa) r •••
A
3 m2v2d2
_ Ml2 4 3 md2 3 md2
Eqns of motion for (translational) sphere are given by ^i? (normal reaction)
A y
Aap
12 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  SPE BR '07 ETME
2umwcosa J 2Lp m « r c o s a ® =— = T I ^ 2 —mr 5 5p«cosa
XFI = VL1N1N2 = 0 and Z Fy = + ^ N2  Mg = 0 Now, Taking moment about point 'A' is given by
...(1) <2)
X F„ =  / = ma =>  Pfc R = ma FyRmg = 0 From eqns (1) and (2), a =  \ik g Velocity of C.M. at time 'f is v = u + at ie v = u  \lk g t
...(1) ...(2) ...(3) ...(4)
2 2 Eqn of motion for rotation is T= \xk mgr = —mr a
a=
Z sin9
2
12L£ r
...(5)
Then the angular velocity of the ball at time t is co = 0 + at = 5nt gt 2r ^cos0 IzJhJh 2p, ...(1) ...(2) 5. ...(3) The condition for pure rolling ; vcm = mR u\ykgt0 Solve (1), (2) and (3), we get 9 = tan" 3. Initial energy, E, = ^ mv L' Ef = —
2 2
...(6)
(As / j = p, A^ and f2 = p 2 AT2) / 2 (Lcos8) + / i (Lsin0) = Mg
5p* gt0r =2r
2u 7 Since collision is elastic, then u cos a = u! cos P ...(1)
Final energy,
About pivot, according to conservation of angular momentum, L' = L = mvd • ••(3) Ml2 M. I. after collision, / ' = — — + md Using (3) and (4) in (2), we get _ tLt (L')2 21' (mvd)2 Ml2 + md' 3 m2v2d2 2(MI2 + 3md2) (5) ...(4) From impulse momentum'theorem ; NAt = Ap = pf  pi = 2/Mucosa ...(2) Component of impulse parallel to the surface = p, NAt  2rawjLt cosa Also, 2 mwpcosG = mu'sinP  mwsina •••(3) From (1) and (3), after solving ; p = Now, Angular impulse on the ball = (2mwp.cosa) r
Aco
tan
From eqns (1) and (5); ^ mv2 x 2 (Ml2 + 3md2) 3m2 v2 d2
m
i
+
^
3 md2
ft ^
tang
Eqns of motion for (translational) sphere are given by ^•R (normal reaction)
A
y
(
r/
\
_ 2 p m « c o s a _ 2p,mwrcosa 7 2 2 —mr 5
Aa> =
12 PHYSICS F O R Y O U  SPE BR '07 ETME
5pwcosa
' SOLVED PAPER 2007
CBSEPMT
1.(a) Capacitance of 6 pF is charged by 6 V battery. Now it is connected with inductor of 5 mH. Find current in inductor when 1 /3 rd total energy is magnetic. (b) An object is thrown vertically upward with some speed. It crosses 2 points p, q which are separated by h metre. If tp is the time between p and highest point and coming back and tq is the time between q and highest point and coming back, relate acceleration due to gravity tp, tq and h. (b)
(Mains)
A solid sphere of radius a having charge q~ is placed inside spherical shell of inner radius r, outer radius R. Find potential at distancex, where r<x< R. rb <1
5.(a) Find the force on conductor carrying current i is shown in the figure. (b): A conducting cone is given charge q. How will the charge density and electric b'u potential varies at different bnr. points of cone ?
2.(a) Two coils m and n having 10 turns and 15 turns respectively are placed close to each other. When 2 A current is passing through coil m, then flux linked in coil n is 1 8 x 10"4 weber per turn. If 3 A current is passed through coil n then, calculate the flux linked per turn of coil m (b) A string having tension 360 N and mass / length = 4 x IO3 kg/ni. It produces two consecutive' resonant frequencies with a tuning fork, which are 375 Hz and 450 Hz. Find mass of string.
6.(a) A rod is hinged as shown in the figure, supported by a table. When the support is withdrawn calculate the acceleration of centre of mass.
Support
A